diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:04:51 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 20:04:51 -0700 |
| commit | 5eb2e4170bf5aeff67697d3414dc3e447b8f579e (patch) | |
| tree | b79770fa668b4d155bb490bd72b30e2f36180378 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-0.txt | 6407 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 97181 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-8.txt | 6407 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 96064 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 165793 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-h/35964-h.htm | 8144 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 63163 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964.txt | 6407 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 35964.zip | bin | 0 -> 96059 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
12 files changed, 27381 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/35964-0.txt b/35964-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5fccdf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6407 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old +House, by Ross Kay + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old House + + +Author: Ross Kay + + + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [eBook #35964] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE +MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE*** + + +E-text prepared by Roger Frank, Juliet Sutherland, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + +by + +ROSS KAY + +Author of "The Search for the Spy," "The Air Scout," "Dodging the +North Sea Mines," "With Joffre on the Battle Line," "The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers' Island," "The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave," etc., etc. + + + + + + + +Copyright, 1916, +by +BARSE & HOPKINS + + + +PREFACE + +In almost every rural community in the older parts of our country there +is a house which some of the country folk have believed to be “haunted.” +As a rule this house is old and perhaps has fallen into partial decay. +The children passing on the country road move to the opposite side when +they draw near the building. Stories are current of scenes which have +been witnessed and sounds heard in the vacant dwelling. Perhaps even the +older people have not altogether outgrown their feeling of timidity when +they are near it. How baseless all such stories are and how easily most +of the unusual sights and sounds can be accounted for is of course +clearly understood. In this story I have tried to interest my young +readers in the attempts of four normal, go-ahead boys to solve the +mysteries connected with a venerable house near the home of one of them, +which was shunned by many of the simple country people. I have +endeavored to avoid all sensationalism and yet to interest the boys and +girls in a stirring story of the experiences of my heroes. I am not +without hope that the final solution of the mystery of the old Meeker +House may help my young readers a little more courageously to face other +problems, perhaps equally mysterious or perplexing, which may be +presented to them in other forms. At all events I sincerely hope that +the spirit and determination of the Go Ahead Boys will remain in their +minds after the story itself shall have long been forgotten. + + --Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + • CHAPTER I—THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + • CHAPTER II—COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + • CHAPTER III—INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + • CHAPTER IV—FLIGHT + • CHAPTER V—A SURPRISE + • CHAPTER VI—A PRISONER + • CHAPTER VII—AN ESCAPE + • CHAPTER VIII—THE LOST CAR + • CHAPTER IX—ANOTHER FLIGHT + • CHAPTER X—THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + • CHAPTER XI—THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + • CHAPTER XII—A HASTY DEPARTURE + • CHAPTER XIII—WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + • CHAPTER XIV—DISAPPOINTED + • CHAPTER XV—A FAMOUS SPOT + • CHAPTER XVI—ANOTHER LOSS + • CHAPTER XVII—LEFT BEHIND + • CHAPTER XVIII—THE ARRIVAL + • CHAPTER XIX—AN INVITATION + • CHAPTER XX—THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + • CHAPTER XXI—AN EXPLANATION IN PART + • CHAPTER XXII—A DARE + • CHAPTER XXIII—LED BY A MAN + • CHAPTER XXIV—THE END OF THE HOUSE + • CHAPTER XXV—A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + • CHAPTER XXVI—CONCLUSION + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + + + + +CHAPTER I—THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + + +“Do you see that house?” + +“You mean that low, old house on the corner of the road?” + +“Yes.” + +“What of it?” + +“Well, that’s one of the oldest houses in this part of the country.” + +“It looks the part. How old is it?” + +“It’s at least one hundred and seventy-five years old.” + +“It’s old enough to look better, then. Is that one of the houses that +Washington slept in?” + +“I guess so.” + +“It must be, from the stories you have told me since I have been here. +How old was Washington, anyway, when he died?” + +“He was in his sixty-eighth year.” + +“I think there’s some mistake about that.” + +“No, sir. Those are the correct figures. He was born in 1732 and he died +in 1799.” + +“I’m not going to dispute you, George. I’ll take your word for it, but +it always seemed to me that Washington’s age must have been a good deal +greater than the histories say it was.” + +“Why?” + +“Because he slept in so many houses. I have figured it up and if he had +spent about a quarter of an hour in every one of the houses that you say +he slept in, it will figure out that he was a good deal more than +sixty-seven years old. Indeed, I have begun to think that Methuselah was +an infant-in-arms compared with George Washington, if ten per cent of +the stories you have been telling us are true. By the way, how old was +Methuselah, anyway?” + +“‘And all the days of Methuselah were nine hundred and sixty and nine +years and he died.’” + +“Well, poor old man, I should have thought he would have been ready to +die. Just think of it, having to live in this world almost a thousand +years! I wonder how his hearing was and if he could see straight. I have +always thought that no matter how long I might live I should want people +to feel when I came to die that I had a little more of a record than +born in 1899 and died some time in the future.” + +“That’s the best thing some men ever did.” + +“What?” + +“Why, to die. They’d give up their places to others who could fill them +better.” + +“What’s all that got to do with that old house?” + +“Nothing. I didn’t start to talk about Methuselah.” + +“That’s all right, but what about this house?” + +“It’s haunted.” + +A hearty laugh went up from the three boys who were the companions of +George Sanders in his automobile. + +The conversation which has been recorded had been carried on by George +Sanders and his friend Fred Button. These two boys, together with John +Clemens and Grant Jones, were close friends and schoolmates. Although +they were nearly of the same age they were markedly different in their +appearance. Fred, who was the pygmy of the party, was a little, +round-faced, bright-eyed fellow, who was able to say quick and keen +things and who was the inspiration of most of the pranks of which the +band was guilty. + +John Clemens was perhaps Fred’s closest friend. He was six feet three +inches tall, but he did not weigh very much more than the shorter Fred, +who made up in breadth what he lacked in length. + +Grant Jones, the most quiet and thoughtful member of the party, seldom +entered into the wordy contests, although he took special delight in the +pranks of his comrades. + +George Washington Sanders was the owner of the automobile in which the +four boys were riding. + +The day was one of the most beautiful of early summer. In Northern New +Jersey, not far from the border of New York State, George’s father had +an extensive farm. To this place from their early childhood the four +friends had been accustomed to come from the great city and the many +good times they had enjoyed there seemed to increase in number and +quality with every succeeding summer. + +Not all their summers had been passed on the farm, however. There had +been frequent trips, which the boys had taken to different parts of +their own land and others. A few years before this time they had been +accompanied by the father or uncle of one of the boys, who had acted as +guardian and guide. On these various trips they had not only had many +enjoyable times, but also many stirring experiences. Some of these +adventures have already been told in other stories of this series. + +Among themselves the boys frequently referred to the quartet as the Go +Ahead boys. They had selected this name as one that was most expressive +of their purposes. They had found it in the famous motto of Davy +Crockett, who, years ago, was himself familiarly known as “Go Ahead” +Crockett. + +On the day when this story opens they were on their way to George’s +farm. They had approached within a mile of their destination when their +host had called their attention to the low building which commonly was +referred to as the Meeker House. It was an unpretentious structure, +containing a story and a half, with a lean-to or addition, that looked +much as if it had been built as an afterthought, or as a postscript is +added to a letter. + +The sides of the building were weather-beaten and it was manifest that +it had been long since any one had dwelt in the house. + +“It seems to me, George,” spoke up Fred, “that you’re finding new +historical places around the farm every summer. Let me see, what was it +last summer?” + +“You are doing better, Fred,” laughed George. “You remember now that +there was a last summer. I have sometimes been afraid you wouldn’t +remember even that much, but for your sake I’ll tell you that last +summer I told you the story of the young fellow who was captured in +Ramapo Pass. He was Washington’s messenger, you will remember, although +he did not know it at the time.” + +“I do recall now,” said Fred pompously, “some information you were kind +enough to dole out to us. It seems to me that you told me that this +young fellow was sent purposely by Washington down through the Ramapo +Valley so that he would be captured by the British and taken to New +York. If I’m correct he had a letter sewed inside the lining of his coat +and this letter contained instructions for General Heath, who was at +Morristown, to join him, that is Washington and not the boy, in taking +New York.” + +“That’s right. It all comes back to me, too,” joined in Grant. “This +fellow was taken to New York and he felt pretty mad at Washington. He +could have found his way across the country all right, he thought, and +would have given the message to General Heath without any trouble, but +Washington insisted upon his going through to Ramapo Valley and of +course he was caught. Poor chap, he didn’t know that that was the very +thing Washington was planning to do. He wanted him caught so that his +letter would be found and Clinton wouldn’t dare leave New York.” + +“What did Clinton want to leave New York for?” broke in John. “I can’t +understand why anybody would want to leave little, old New York. That’s +the best town on the globe.” + +“He wanted to take his army south to help Cornwallis, who was bottled up +on the Yorktown peninsula. That was the trick that Washington played on +him. He kept Clinton here, and when at last Clinton got his eyes opened, +he found out that Washington’s army was already down across the Delaware +and headed for Chesapeake Bay.” + +“Did he arrive in time?” inquired Fred innocently. + +“For further and detailed information I refer you to any primary history +of the United States,” said Grant laughingly. “That’s one of the things +no American boy ought to have to learn. He ought to know it before he +begins.” + +“What about this house back here?” said Fred. “You seem to point it out +as if you thought there was something peculiar about it.” + +“I told you that it’s haunted.” + +Again the boys laughed heartily as Grant said, “Anybody would think to +hear you talk, George, that you belonged back in the days when they +hanged witches.” + +“You mean burned,” spoke up Fred promptly. + +“No, I don’t mean ‘burned’ the witches, I mean ‘hanged,’” retorted +Grant. “There are some ignorant people who sometimes talk about the +people of the Salem Colony burning witches, but they didn’t burn +them—they hanged them.” + +“Pardon me,” said Fred demurely. “I stand corrected.” + +“But there really is something queer about this house,” said George. “I +know, for I’ve been there.” + +The boys all looked back at the little building, which now was far +behind them. The quiet that rested upon it seemed like that of a +cemetery. It plainly belonged to another generation. + +“What do you mean by its being haunted!” demanded Fred, at last breaking +in upon the silence. + +“I’m telling you what the common report is,” said George, somewhat +testily. “Everybody says it is haunted.” + +“But you said you yourself knew it was.” + +“No, I didn’t. I said there was something peculiar about it.” + +“Go on with your story, George,” called John. “Don’t keep us in this +burning suspense. What was it?” + +“Why, I went over there one day,” explained George, somewhat +reluctantly. “It was just at sunset and a terrible thunder shower had +come up and I ran to the old Meeker House to get in out of the rain.” + +“When did you learn to do that?” broke in Fred. + +“I didn’t have to learn,” declared George. “At all events I got inside +the house and waited for the storm to pass. But it didn’t pass. When it +struck the hills over yonder it was turned back by colder currents of +air, so I got the storm coming and going. The first thing I knew the old +place was dark and then—” + +“And then what?” demanded Grant. + +“And then,—things began to happen.” + +“What happened?” inquired Grant. “Don’t keep us in this terrible +suspense.” + +“Well, there wasn’t a breath of air stirring,” explained George, “but +the window shutters began to slam a half a dozen times and I heard +groans that seemed to come up from the cellar and I was almost sure that +once I heard something or somebody call my name.” + +“That’s a good one,” laughed John, who in spite of his flippant manner +was strongly moved by the story of his friend. “You’re always expecting +somebody to call you by name whether they know you or not.” + +“Oh, but they know _of_ him,” suggested Fred. “I know _of_ a good many +people that I don’t know by sight; for example, there’s the President.” + +“Keep still, fellows,” ordered Grant, “and let George tell his story. He +was as far as the slamming of the shutters and the groans that came from +the cellar and the call which some of the evil spirits made on him by +name. Go on, George,” he added, turning to his friend, “tell us what +happened next.” + + + + +CHAPTER II—COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + + +“I don’t know just what happened next,” laughed George. “There were two +peals of thunder so near together that you could hardly clap your hands +between them. When the first one came and I heard that call, I didn’t +stand on the order of my departure. When the next clap sounded I was +away down the road under that old oak tree.” + +All the four boys laughed heartily, even George apparently not being +crestfallen by his lack of courage on the night he was describing. + +“What is it you call the house?” inquired John. + +“The Meeker House.” + +“You think it’s haunted?” + +“I didn’t say so,” responded George somewhat warmly. “I merely said it +is a common report that it is a haunted house. I’m just telling you what +happened one night when I ran in there to get out of a storm.” + +“Poor old house,” said George thoughtfully, as he looked back at the old +building, which still could be seen in the distance. “It makes me think +of Uncle Sim. He’s the last leaf on the tree and I guess this is the +oldest house in this part of the country.” + +Uncle Sim was an aged negro, who for many years had been in the employ +of George’s father. His labor was no longer efficient, but his faithful +services in the years that were gone had caused Mr. Sanders to provide +for the wants of the gray-haired negro. Uncle Sim’s form was bowed with +the weight of years which he carried and his trembling limbs showed how +much he had suffered from the “mis’ry.” Indeed, the boys had become +convinced that there was no topic concerning which the old man loved to +talk as he did concerning his various aches and pains. + +In spite of his afflictions, however, Uncle Sim was a warm friend of the +boys. When they got into mischief Uncle Sim’s face was lifted heavenward +so that he was unable to see any of the pranks they committed and +therefore was unable to impart any information when he was asked as to +his knowledge of their deeds. He was a great favorite of the boys and +many of his stories had been familiar to them from their earliest +childhood. He knew why the red squirrel and the black hated each other +so intensely. He was well informed concerning the perpetual warfare that +existed between the dogs and cats on the farm. The call of the bluejays +was in a language which Uncle Sim claimed to understand. And although he +did not talk back to the chattering jays, nevertheless he strongly +believed that they were much more guarded in their conversations when he +was nearby. + +“You go ask Uncle Sim if the house is haunted,” repeated George. “He’ll +tell you what he thinks and you won’t have to wait very long for him to +do it, either.” + +“Has he never been there?” asked Fred. + +“You’d better ask him,” declared George. + +“What do you honestly think about it yourself, George?” said Grant more +seriously. + +“I don’t know just what to think. I haven’t been there since—” + +“Since when?” spoke up John encouragingly. + +“Since the last time I was there.” + +“When was that?” + +“That time I was telling you about when I ran in there to get out of the +rain.” + +“Will you go back there now if we’ll go?” challenged Fred. + +“I don’t mind going,” said George, “but I don’t believe we’ll have time +this afternoon.” His three companions laughed derisively and so aroused +his spirit that he said brusquely, “That’s all right, fellows. I’ll go +back there as soon as any one of you will go.” + +“All right, sir,” called John. “Stop your car, and we’ll all of us go +back to the old Meeker House and find out if what you have been telling +us is true.” + +“Who ever heard,” broke in Grant, “of ghosts walking around in the +daytime? The time for us to go there is when the ghosts are showing up +well.” + +“You didn’t tell us, George, what the ghosts were?” + +“No, I didn’t see them,” replied George. + +“What do they say they are?” + +“Why, the common report is, that ever since the days of the Revolution +the ghosts of the Cowboys and Skinners have made their headquarters in +the old Meeker House and whenever there’s a night that is especially +dark or there is a particularly heavy storm, then they come there and +join in the racket.” + +“Cowboys?” demanded John. “What do you mean? Those fellows that drive +the cattle out on the plains?” + +“No, sir, I mean the men who lived in this part of the country when +Washington was fighting for the independence of the United States. But +even if they did live here they wouldn’t help him. They said they didn’t +belong to either side, but the Cowboys usually took advantage of both +sides. When the men were away from home they would go into a house, if +they thought there was any money hidden in some old stocking, and they +would take the women and hold their feet out over the fire until they +told where the money was.” + +“What were the Skinners?” inquired John. + +“Why, they were about the same kind of men, the only difference being +that the Cowboys took the families of the patriots, while the Skinners +paid their first attention to the Tory families. I guess it didn’t make +much difference to either party as long as they found some money or +could get any valuables.” + +“What did they put up with such things for?” + +“They had to put up with more or less of it,” answered George. “You see +most of the men were away from home, fighting in the army. That gave the +Cowboys and Skinners their chance and they took it. When the men came +back the Cowboys and Skinners were gone.” + +“They were something like Georgie Porgie, weren’t they?” laughed Grant. +“I don’t know who he was, but when a certain part of the population of +which he was afraid began to get busy, Georgie Porgie ran away,—likewise +the Cowboys and Skinners.” + +“It’s all very interesting,” spoke up Fred, “but I don’t believe there’s +such a thing in all the world as a ghost.” + +“All right, sir,” said George warmly. “All I want you to do is to talk +to Uncle Sim and if he doesn’t convince you that the Meeker House is the +special place where all the people that walk around in the night have +their headquarters, then I’m mistaken.” + +“I’ll ask him just as soon as we get back,” said Fred promptly. + +Not long afterward the automobile entered the beautiful grounds of the +farm where the four boys were spending a part of the summer. The place +was attractive because of its quietness and the deep shade in the front +yard. A collie dog, lying on the ground, arose and stretched itself and +then bounded toward George as soon as the boys alighted. Around the +corner of the garage at that moment came Uncle Sim, his broad-brimmed +hat carried in his hand and his face shining with perspiration and good +nature. + +“Well, Uncle Sim,” called Fred. “You can’t guess where we’ve been.” + +“No, suh, no, suh,” replied the negro, “I reckon I can’t. Mos’ gen’lly I +finds out right soon whar yo’ boys has been. Sometimes I can tell the +d’rection in which yo’ all is goin’, even when I can’t see none o’ +yo’all.” + +“How’s that?” demanded John. + +“Why, from the d’rection in which all the dogs and cats and birds and +cows and I reckon everything that’s able to get away, is movin’.” + +The boys laughed heartily at Uncle Sim’s statement and Grant said, “But, +Uncle Sim, you know we are the Go Ahead boys.” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh, I reckon I’s somewhat familar with dat ar fac’.” + +“Uncle Sim, have you ever been in the Meeker House?” spoke up Grant +abruptly. + +For a moment the old negro was silent as he stared blankly at the boys. +Shaking his head he said, “What fo’ yo’ ask me that question?” + +“Because I want to know,” said Grant. + +“No, suh. I ain’t never been inside the Meeker House, but I’s been so +close dat I could hear what was er goin’ on.” + +“Why, what is going on there?” inquired Fred. “The house seemed to me to +be deserted. Does any one live there?” + +“No, suh. No, suh, no one lives dar. Leastwise, no one live dar in the +daytime.” + +“Who lives there at night?” inquired Fred. + +Once more the negro was silent and it was evident that the boy’s +question had aroused certain feelings in the heart of Uncle Sim. + +“Yo’ all better take my advice,” said the old negro, shaking his head in +a still more solemn manner. “Yo’ better keep away from de Meeker House.” + +“Why?” inquired John. + +“No good comes to anybody dat goes to the Meeker House in the night +time.” + +“But how do you know, Uncle Sim? You say you have never been there?” + +“Yo’ all keep away from dar. Min’ what I tell you. Don’t none o’ you’ +boys go near dat old Meeker House after sundown.” + +“But you make us want to go all the more,” said Grant. + +Uncle Sim merely shook his head and made no further comment. It was +plain, however, that he was seriously troubled by the statement of Grant +and that he was sincere in his warning. + +“I say, fellows,” called Fred quickly, “why don’t we go over to the +Meeker House to-night? It looks as if it is going to be cloudy,” he +added as he glanced up at the sky. “This will be just the ideal night. +If there’s anything uncanny around the place we’ll be likely to find it +out. Oh, you needn’t go if you don’t want to,” he added quickly upon +George’s unspoken protest. “You and Uncle Sim will be excused, if you +don’t want to go.” + +“If you fellows go I’m not going to be left behind,” spoke up George +promptly. + +“Then it’s all fixed,” declared Fred gleefully. “We’ll go to the Meeker +House to-night.” + + + + +CHAPTER III—INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + + +The Go Ahead boys were excited when they entered the house of their +friend and that night when they gathered about the supper table their +one theme of conversation was the proposed visit to the old Meeker +House. + +Occasionally throughout the conversation there was an expression on the +face of George different from that of his companions. However, none of +them was aware of the occasional smile, or of the keen look with which +George occasionally glanced about the table. At other times the +expression of his face was serious and his interest in the suggested +visit apparently was as keen as that of any of his friends. + +The boys decided to wait until darkness had fallen before they started +on their expedition. + +“It’s just eight o’clock,” said Grant, as they left the house and +prepared to take their places in the automobile which was awaiting their +coming. + +“Eight o’clock and all’s not well, I’m afraid,” suggested Fred. + +“Are you afraid?” demanded John with a laugh. + +“No, I’m not afraid, but somehow when I think of this business,” replied +Fred, “I find I have some shivers.” + +“You had better not go, my lad,” said John solemnly. “This is no place +for infants or those afflicted with chills.” + +“I’m not chilly enough to stay home if all of you are going,” retorted +Fred. + +“It’s just the kind of a night we want,” spoke up George. “There isn’t +any moon and it’s going to be dark.” + +“Those clouds look as if it might rain,” suggested Grant. + +“That will be all the better,” said George. “The darker the night the +better the spooks behave. They say it’s almost impossible to find any +there on a moonlight night.” + +“I hope we’ll find some to-night,” laughed John, but his voice somehow +seemed to belie his confidence. + +At all events there was not much conversation in the automobile as it +sped swiftly down the road. + +George, who was driving, occasionally referred to the various stories he +had heard of the deeds in the Meeker House, but his efforts did not meet +with any marked response until he said, “I have heard that Claudius +Smith sometimes shows up in the old house.” + +“Who’s he?” + +“He _was_ a Cowboy. He lived more than one hundred and twenty-five years +ago. You have got to speak of him as one who ‘was’ and not ‘is’.” + +“What makes him come back to the old house?” + +“It was one of his favorite places, I’m told.” + +“What was he?” + +“I told you he was a Cowboy. He got to acting so badly that at last all +the farmers and their boys that could be spared from the army got +together and chased him clear down on Long Island.” + +“Did they get him?” inquired Fred. + +“They did. They brought him back and took him to Goshen, where they +hanged him in the old courtyard.” + +“I shouldn’t think he would come back here to the Meeker House,” +suggested Grant. “I should think his ghost would ‘hang’ around the court +house up at Goshen.” + +“I can’t tell you about that,” said George, “but it may be that he +follows the road he used to travel. That may be the reason why part of +the time he’s here at the old Meeker House.” + +“He must have been a great boy,” suggested Fred. + +“He certainly was, and he wasn’t the only one. I have heard my father +tell about a man here in Jersey named Fagan. He was one of the Cowboys +that they used to call the Pine Robbers.” + +“Who were they?” inquired John. + +“Why there were a dozen or more bands of these Pine Robbers. They used +to make their headquarters in the Pines back of Lakewood. They would dig +a hole in the sand and hide in it the stuff they had stolen, and then, +when they had enough to make up a cargo they would take it to Toms River +and ship it to New York, where William Franklin helped them dispose of +it.” + +“Who was William Franklin?” demanded Grant. + +“Why, every educated man knows that William Franklin was the last royal +governor of New Jersey. He was the son of old Ben Franklin. He inherited +his father’s brains, but not his father’s disposition. He was one of the +bitterest of all the Tories, and when the war of the Revolution broke +out he went to New York to be with his friends.” + +“What happened to this man Fagan?” asked Fred. “Is his ghost around +here, too?” + +“I can’t tell you,” replied George, “whether it is here or not. I know +Fagan got to be such a bad man stealing, shooting, tormenting the women +and children that finally a big gang of men took after him and caught +him down here between Trenton and Freehold.” + +“Did they do anything to him after they caught him?” inquired Grant. + +“Not very much. They just hanged him from the limb of a big tree by the +side of the road and left the body swinging there in the air for two or +three days. Finally they left the head in the noose, stuck a long pipe +between the jaws and my grandfather used to tell me that the head was +there until the crows had picked out the eyes and left nothing but the +grinning skull.” + +“That’s a nice story to tell just before we make our bows at a spook +party,” said Fred. + +The boy was striving to speak lightly, but his voice sounded strange +even in his own ears. Indeed, by this time, after the gruesome stories +of the Cowboys had been told, the nerves of all the boys were on edge. + +The dim outlines of the Meeker House were now plainly visible. The +silence that rested over the place was unbroken except for the sighing +of the wind as it swept through the ancient pine trees that grew in the +front yard. + +“This is a ghost story up to date, isn’t it?” said Grant. “I don’t +suppose many of those Cowboys or Skinners ever traveled around in +automobiles.” + +“Probably not,” said John dryly, and conversation abruptly ceased. + +“George, don’t you think you had better leave your automobile up here on +the road and not take it clear down to the house?” inquired Fred in a +whisper, when they drew near the place they were seeking. + +“What for?” inquired George. + +“Oh, nothing, only I thought it would be more out of the way there. You +see the house is on the corner and if some one makes a sharp turn there +they might run into it without seeing it.” + +“Just as you say,” replied George good-naturedly. + +Acting upon the suggestion, the automobile was stopped about a hundred +yards from the house and the boys at once prepared to walk across the +yard toward the front door. + +No one spoke until Fred whispered sharply, “What’s that?” + +“What’s what?” retorted George, also speaking in a whisper. + +“Nothing but a branch creaking up in the tree,” suggested Grant. + +“I guess that’s what it was,” assented Fred, and the four boys at once +resumed their advance upon the ancient house. + +“Come on, fellows,” whispered George. “We’ll try the front door first.” + +The attempts of the boys, however, to open the door were unavailing. The +door was massive and although it creaked and groaned it was strong and +all the attempts to open it proved failures. + +“You stay here, fellows,” whispered George. “I’ll go around to the back +of the house and see if I can get in there.” + +“I’ll go with you,” suggested Fred. + +“No, you won’t, you’ll stay right here and defend these fellows who are +a good deal more scared than they are willing to own,” retorted George. + +The trio remained in silence before the front door, waiting for some +word from their friend, who at once had carried out his suggested plan +and had gone to the rear of the house. + +Suddenly and without any word being spoken the heavy door in front of +the waiting boys slowly opened. It creaked noisily but there was no +question that George succeeded and the door was being opened from +within. + +Grant was the first to enter, but instantly he stepped back and in a +voice that trembled said quickly, “What’s that? What’s that?” + +There was a noise of flying wings in the room before them, but not one +of the boys was able to see any of the winged creatures. Back and forth +they flew, the unseen birds, their wings noisily flapping and their +cries steadily increasing in volume. + +Startled as all the boys were by the unexpected sound they withdrew to +the porch in front of the door and in whispers talked over the best plan +for them to follow. + +“I say we go ahead,” said Grant at last. “We don’t want to be scared out +by a little thing like this.” + +“That’s all right,” agreed Fred. “You’re so bold, I’ll let you go ahead. +I shall be satisfied to-night to be one of the go behind boys. I’m not +afraid,” he hastily added when Grant laughed derisively. “I’ll follow +you wherever you dare lead. Now then start if you want to.” + +No more was said and slowly and silently the boys once more entered the +room into which the door directly opened. + +This time again when only a few steps had been taken, by a common +impulse they stopped and Fred whispered, “Where is George?” + +“He’s somewhere around here,” whispered Grant in reply. + +“But I don’t see him or hear him,” declared Fred. “We ought to find out +what has happened.” + +“Oh, he’s all right,” said John confidently. “Come on, let’s go ahead.” + +“We haven’t any light,” suggested Fred. + +“We’ll have one pretty soon. That’s probably what George has gone for,” +whispered John. “He’ll be back in a minute.” + +“I don’t believe we had better try to go any farther. A good many of +these old houses have steps from one room to another. I don’t want Fred +to fall and break his neck.” + +“Don’t you worry about my——” began Fred, but he stopped abruptly when +suddenly the shutters in the room directly over their head banged +noisily against the side of the house. At the same time the sound of the +flying creatures in the room was heard again and as if to make matters +worse a sound very like a groan came from the stairway. The weird +interruption was followed by a wild laugh that came from the same +stairway and a moment later the confusion was increased by a sound more +unexpected than any which as yet had been heard by the Go Ahead boys in +the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER IV—FLIGHT + + +There had been a moment of intense silence which was sharply broken by a +long whistling sound, that seemed to come from some place directly +behind the spot where the boys were standing. This sound was followed by +a prolonged sigh and this in turn was abruptly ended when out of the +darkness there came a call, “F-r-e-d! Fred Button!” The call was in a +low tone but coming as it did after the startling events which had +occurred was almost more than Fred was able to bear. His nerves were +unstrung and without a word he turned and swiftly made for the door, +which fortunately had been left open. + +Nor had Fred been long out of the house before he was joined by his +companions. George, who previously had gone around to the rear door, +came as quickly as John and Grant. + +For a brief time the boys assembled under the branches of a huge cherry +tree that was growing in one corner of the yard. + +“What do you make of that?” demanded George. “I told you you might hear +something about Fagan and the Cowboys if you went into that old Meeker +House.” + +“It wasn’t what I heard about them that troubled me,” retorted Fred. “It +was when I heard my own name called.” + +“Honest?” demanded George. + +“Yes, sir. You ask the other fellows. Somebody right behind me called +‘Fred.’ ‘Fred Button.’ I was standing where I could see straight through +the window and I am perfectly sure there wasn’t anybody there. If you’ll +tell me how the thing was done I’ll be much obliged to you.” + +“It wasn’t done at all,” laughed George. “You were just dreaming. It’s +one of those attacks of nightmare that you have some times. Don’t you +remember when we were at Mackinac,[1] how one night we had to throw some +cold water in your face to make you wake up?” + +“I guess that was the same night,” retorted Fred, “when I had to +administer condign and physical chastisement to you, you were kicking so +in the bed.” + +“Yes, I have a very vivid recollection of that part of that night.” + +“Almost as vivid as you have of to-night,” laughed George. + +“I don’t see anything to laugh at,” said Fred sharply. “You ask the +other fellows if somebody didn’t call my name.” + +“It did sound like it,” said John, “but then we were ready to believe +almost anything and when Fred said there was somebody calling him we all +heard ‘Fred’ on every side of us. What are we doing out here, anyway? +Why don’t we go back there and look into it?” + +“I’m going to look into it,” said Fred quickly, “but I’m not going to +look when I can’t see. It’s so dark to-night that you can’t find +anything.” + +“You seem to have found some things that made you leave the room faster +than George goes when he runs the hundred in ten flat.” + +“Maybe I did,” admitted Fred, “but if I did I want to tell you I never +ran a race in which I was so hard pushed as I was to-night. There wasn’t +room to put a sheet of paper between Grant and me.” + +“That’s all right,” spoke up Grant. “I didn’t take any part in your +foolish conversation, but what I want to know is how you can account for +these things.” + +“If you ask me,” said George, “I’m not accounting for them.” + +“But there’s some way to find out what these things mean. There isn’t +one of us a big enough fool to believe that there is such a thing as a +ghost and yet we got into the old Meeker House,—” + +“If there isn’t any ghost,” spoke up George, “then I don’t see where the +trouble is. You can’t be afraid of something that isn’t, can you?” + +“I don’t suppose you can,” admitted Grant, “but sometimes you can be +afraid of things you think are when they are not.” + +“You’re getting too deep for me,” said Fred. “What I want to know is +about those wings. That room seemed to be just full of something that +was flying all around.” + +“I’ll tell you what it was,” spoke up John. + +“What was it?” inquired Fred quickly. + +“Cherubs.” + +“What?” + +“Cherubs. Don’t you know what cherubs are? They are just heads with +wings. You can find them on old tomb-stones and in the pictures of some +of the old books. I have always thought that a cherub must be almost as +happy as the people said he used to be. He didn’t have to bother about +any clothes except neckties and a hat. It doesn’t take him very long to +get from one place to another. In fact I think if Fred here was a cherub +he would have had less trouble getting out of that house to-night than +he did.” + +“You seem to be greatly troubled about my leaving that house,” spoke up +Fred testily. “I noticed that I wasn’t alone.” + +“Except when you started,” suggested Grant. “We thought you were in +trouble and came out to see if we could help.” + +“You did?” laughed Fred derisively. “I’ll tell you what I’ll do, Grant, +if you’ll go back into that house with me right now I’ll go too.” + +“I’m going back there,” said Grant slowly, “but as has been said I am +going back when I can see something.” + +“That’s what I thought,” retorted Fred tauntingly. + +“It’s all right, fellows,” spoke up George. “I guess we have had enough +for one night. I don’t suppose there really is anything in the things we +have heard to-night, and we’ll find out pretty soon just what it is, but +until we do I think it’s great fun to go into the old house and stir up +the spooks.” + +“Do you know, I have an idea what those flying creatures were?” +suggested John. + +“What were they?” inquired George. + +“Bats probably.” + +“Bats?” exclaimed Fred scornfully. “Bats? Why those things had wings at +least two feet long. You could hear them flapping over your head.” + +“That’s about on the scale that you heard and saw everything to-night, +Fred. That is, everything except the length of the steps you took when +you were leaving. I would like to understand how a fellow who is only +five feet four can take steps that are ten feet long.” + +“There’s only one answer to that,” said George, “and that is, he +didn’t.” + +“You don’t know what you’re talking about,” retorted Grant. “You didn’t +see him. I did.” + +“See me?” exclaimed Fred. “See me! Why his hands were right on my +shoulder all the while. I couldn’t shake him off. He almost had me there +two or three times. I’m not sure that I wouldn’t rather have Fagan’s +spook get hold of me than Grant’s hands when he is as scared as he was +to-night.” + +“Well, fellows, what shall we do?” inquired George. “Do you want to give +it up or go back?” + +“Both,” said Fred quickly. “We’re not going back again to-night and +we’re not going to give it up. We’re going ahead and find out what there +is in that tomfoolery.” + +“Well, I see you have a little piece of nerve left yet,” laughed George. +“I told you what was coming but you wouldn’t believe me.” + +“Was that the reason why you went outside, George?” demanded John. “You +remember, fellows,” he added, turning to his companions, “George went +around to the back of the old house. He was outside where he could get a +fine running start if he had to.” + +“That may all be,” said George slowly, “but my running start wasn’t much +compared with the one you fellows had. If you didn’t get a running start +I am wondering what time you would make if you had one. My, what a thing +it would be at the track meet to have one of these ghosts to start the +fellows off. I think the next time I see Grant on the track I’ll yell +Fagan at him. I think he will break the record if I do. Especially if +Fred is just ahead of him. If you’re not going back into the house,” he +continued, “I think we had better go back to the machine and start for +home.” + +The boys all agreed and soon were seated in the car, riding swiftly back +toward the farm. + +Their confidence returned in proportion to the distance that intervened +between them and the house which they had just visited. Indeed, when at +last they arrived at the farmhouse every one was loud in his declaration +that he had not been frightened by what had occurred and was strong in +his determination to go back and investigate the things which had seemed +so mysterious. + +Nevertheless, in spite of their boasting, it was plain that Fred was +somewhat chagrined by the quickness and rapidity of his departure from +the old Meeker House. Several times that evening a sly allusion to his +speed brought a quick retort. + +The following morning, however, the courage and good spirits of the boys +had returned in full measure. Even Fred was not afraid to acknowledge +his fear of the night before and laughed as heartily as any of his +friends when they described his antics in his flight from the house. + +“That doesn’t make any difference,” he asserted strongly. “I’m still one +of the Go Ahead boys and I haven’t given up the plan I spoke about.” + +“What’s your plan, Freddie?” laughed John. + +“I’m going to look into the old house by daylight.” + +“I wouldn’t do that yet,” suggested George soberly. “It seems to me the +best plan will be for us to go down there again to-night and find out +whether or not there really is anything in what we thought we heard and +saw last night.” + +“We might take a gun,” suggested Grant. + +“What would you shoot?” said Fred scornfully. “Suppose you did find a +spook and shot it, what good would it do? I suppose they aren’t like +other people.” + +After a long consultation it finally was agreed that another visit to +the mysterious house should be made that evening and then if anything +strange occurred the boys would make further investigation the following +day. + +----- +[1] See “The Go Ahead Boys on Smugglers’ Island.” + + + + +CHAPTER V—A SURPRISE + + +Meanwhile Fred had decided that he would make some investigations of his +own. His apparent lack of courage had reacted now and he was determined +to do something which would enable him to redeem himself in the eyes of +his companions. + +Accordingly when his friends decided early in the afternoon that they +would take the automobile and go to the country club for a game of +tennis he excused himself on the plea that there were some other and +very important matters to which he must attend. + +It was a matter of self-denial for Fred to decline to join his +companions in a visit to the country club. This place throughout the +summer afternoons was one that was marked in the region. Crowds of young +people assembled there and the tennis courts and golf links were +occupied by people who were finding their vacation days passing all too +rapidly in the beautiful region. + +To the protests of his friends Fred refused to listen. Even the fact +that his absence might prevent a game of tennis from being played did +not appeal to him. He quietly and steadfastly adhered to his purpose. + +Soon after luncheon he saw his friends depart, although the last words +he heard were their calls for him to reconsider and join them. + +Previous to their departure George called Fred into the library and in a +low voice said to him, “Take my advice, lad, and don’t try it.” + +“Don’t try what?” Fred inquired. + +“You know what I mean.” + +“I haven’t the least idea.” + +“Well, then I tell you again that my advice to you is not to do it.” + +“But I don’t know what you mean.” + +“If you’ll think it over for two or three hours I’m sure you’ll find +out,” declared George and he withdrew from the room. + +George’s warning was still fresh in Fred’s mind when the boys no longer +could be seen. He was still mystified by the strange warning. He was +positive that he had not spoken to any of his friends concerning the +project in his mind and therefore it was impossible that George could +have heard any word of his plans. + +Assured that his companions had departed, Fred soon afterward set forth +on his solitary expedition. He had, however, not entered the road before +he saw the automobile returning. + +“What’s wrong?” he called as the car stopped in front of the long, +winding driveway that led to the farmhouse, which was located back on +the hillside. + +“I went off without my tennis racquet,” explained George. “You have +decided to come with us, haven’t you, Fred? + +“No, I’m not going,” replied Fred. + +“But you’re going somewhere,” said George. “What are you doing down here +in the road if you’re not? I thought you had some very important matters +which you had to attend to this afternoon?” + +“I have,” and Fred refused to listen to the renewed pleadings of his +friend, although he did not start on his way to the old Meeker House +until once more the automobile had passed out of sight. He was +suspicious as he walked on that George’s return for the racquet had been +a pretense on his part. He was somewhat suspicious now that George +believed he was about to go back to the old house, although what had +given him that impression it was impossible for him to say. + +On his journey Fred had taken with him the collie dog which belonged to +George. The animal was unusually beautiful and its owner was exceedingly +proud of it, as it had won a prize whenever he had exhibited it. + +Delighted to be permitted to accompany Fred the intelligent animal +expressed his pleasure in his own noisy and active manner. + +It was not until Fred at last had arrived at the road in front of the +old house that the collie displayed any uneasiness. When Fred turned in +at the open gateway the dog, looking up into his face whined, and then +apparently convinced that protests on his part were unavailing, turned +and ran from the place. + +Startled by the unexpected action Fred returned to the road and watched +the dog as it fled swiftly homeward. A feeling of uneasiness crept over +him despite his attempt to laugh. It was impossible for spooks to be +found, he assured himself, on such a day. The afternoon sun, warm, and +yet not unduly warm, was flooding the beautiful region with its beams. +The fertile land, the attractive houses, even the woods back upon the +hillside all seemed to be sharing in the absolute quiet that prevailed. +Not a sound was to be heard save the noisy flights of the winged +grasshoppers or the occasional unmusical sound which proclaimed the +presence of locusts. + +Determined to ignore the momentary impression which the unwillingness of +the dog to accompany him into the old house had aroused, Fred once more +turned toward the rear of the old building. A fallen grape-arbor on his +right and the tangled mass of vines that grew along the ground showed +how long it had been since the place had received any attention. There +was an air of neglect and decay manifest wherever he looked. The passing +boys had thrown stones or snowballs at the windows until only a few +panes were left. The chimneys had crumbled in part, so that not one was +standing in its original form. The grass was high and tangled and the +shrubs in the yard were rank and overgrown. The place which manifestly +at one time had been the abode of people who had given it every care and +affection had now been forgotten. + +And yet, was it really forgotten? Fred vividly recalled the experience +of the preceding evening as he advanced toward the kitchen door. The +door still was hanging upon its hinges and was only partly closed. +Doubtless it had been left ajar by George in his exit the night before. + +Fred stepped cautiously inside the building. The silence that followed +for a time was unbroken. The very stillness itself produced its effect +upon the boy and when he stopped and looked intently all about him, his +heart was beating rapidly, although he assured himself there was no +cause for fear. + +Suddenly from the front room came a sound that was unusual and somewhat +startling in the prevailing stillness. It was a sound not unlike that +produced by a noisy rattler in the hands of a small boy. The noise, +however, was forgotten, when, to Fred’s intense amazement, which +included perhaps an element of alarm, he was startled by the sound of +footsteps on the stairway. + +Once more he assured himself that it was broad daylight. Again he +recalled the statement which he had heard many a time that in such +houses there was nothing to be feared except after the shades of night +had fallen. He could plainly see the rays of the afternoon sun as they +entered through the open window and fell across the floor of the room in +which he was standing. + +But the footsteps could not be denied. The sound became plainer. For an +instant Fred glanced timidly toward the door and was strongly tempted to +run from the place. + +Before he started, however, the footsteps ceased, the old door at the +foot of the stairway creaked upon its hinges and a moment later Fred saw +standing before him a man, whose appearance proclaimed him to be a +tramp. + +The surprise was mutual, and for a moment the man and the boy stared +blankly at each other. Fred suspected that the stranger doubtless had +been sleeping in the upper room. Indeed the boy laughed in his relief as +he was confident now that he had discovered the source of the strange +sounds that had been heard the preceding evening. + +“Hello, young man,” called the tramp in a low, guttural voice. “Did you +come in here to wake me up? I told me valet not to call me until five +o’clock.” + +“No, I didn’t come in here to wake you up,” said Fred quietly. + +“Maybe you come from the hospital?” + +“No,” said Fred simply. + +“I’m expecting somebody from the hospital.” + +“What’s the matter? Are you sick?” + +“Yes, I be. Leastwise, I’ve got some symptoms I don’t like.” + +“Tell me what the trouble is,” suggested Fred good-naturedly. “Perhaps I +can help you.” + +“From the best I can find out I think I am threatened with hydrostatic +internal spontaneous combustion.” + +“It’s more likely your conscience,” laughed Fred. + +“No, it isn’t my conscience. I can stick a pin in that and not flinch. +No, it’s something else that’s the matter with me. I feel as if I were +burning up inside.” + +“You’re not going to get anything out of me,” laughed Fred, “to put out +the fire.” + +“That’s a pity,” said the tramp, who now seated himself quietly on the +foot of the stairs. “That’s a pity. All I need is a nickel to stop that +roaring flame. I’m suffering from another trouble too,” added the tramp. + +“What’s that?” + +“Overweariness of the flesh. I’ve had that for considerable time. It’s a +great source of suffering. Still, I don’t know that either of those is +quite as bad as something else.” + +“What, have you got more troubles still?” + +“Yes, I have.” + +“What are they?” + +“Well, the chief one is that I’m an orphan. There isn’t any home waiting +for little Willie.” The man shook his head in mock pathos and Fred +laughed heartily. “I have consulted specialists,” began the tramp once +more, “but I don’t find any one to relieve me. The last man I went to +said he thought the best thing he could prescribe would be for me to go +out in the country where I could breathe fresh air and not have to +endure hard labor.” + +“What were you doing, breaking stone?” laughed Fred. + +For a moment the tramp glared upon the lad, but a moment later he said +good-naturedly, “If I thought you knew what that meant I would give you +something to make you remember this visit a long time. No, my great +trouble is that I’m too ardent an American. I insist upon seeing my own +country. I have been going to and fro, wandering up and down the land—” + +“You’re not the only one,” broke in Fred. “It seems to me I’ve heard +about another individual who is going about like a roaring lion.” + +“Why don’t you come in and sit down,” suggested the tramp, apparently +ignoring Fred’s last suggestion. “Ever been in this old house before?” + +“Once.” + +“When was that?” + +“Last night.” + +“How long did you stay?” + +“I don’t remember. We left in such a hurry,” said Fred somewhat +ruefully. + +“Oh, you found the spooks, did you?” + +“We heard some strange noises. The strangest of all was that some one +called my name.” + +“Oh, that’s not strange,” declared the tramp lightly. “I’ve been in this +house hundreds of times. I have heard my name called and never flinched +once. Sometimes the constable calls it and sometimes somebody else, but +it doesn’t make any difference; I never answer. If you’d like to look +through the old house I’ll show you around.” + + + + +CHAPTER VI—A PRISONER + + +“That’s just what I should like to do,” exclaimed Fred eagerly. + +The knowledge that he was not to make the investigation entirely alone +doubtless strengthened the courage of the boy. All his friends were +aware that he was not cowardly and yet somehow his strange experience of +the preceding evening in the old Meeker House had deeply affected him. +Convinced as he was that there was an explanation to be found for every +mysterious happening, nevertheless he was somewhat nervous at the +thought of being alone in the neglected building. + +“I have spent some time in here,” said the tramp, “as I told you. It is +a queer old house. For example, right here in this room,” he added as he +led the way into the front room, “there is a concealed closet. I don’t +think any one would ever find it unless he was told of it.” + +As he spoke the strange man turned a button, which was apparently a part +of the molding of the stairway. + +In response to his quick and energetic pull a door was opened and as +Fred peered within he saw there was a small room perhaps six or seven +feet square. It was directly under the stairway and when he looked into +the adjoining room he saw that it extended within that room also. + +“What was that for?” he said as he turned to his companion. + +“I don’t know,” replied the tramp. “I suspect, though, that that is +where they used to put the boys when they were naughty.” + +The tone of the man’s voice, the language which he used; indeed the very +bearing of the stranger, increased Fred’s curiosity concerning him. Was +this man no more than he appeared to be? Was he really a tramp, as he +said he was? His clothing was old and worn, the care of his person had +been neglected and at first glance any observer might think that he was +an ordinary vagabond. Perhaps he was, Fred thought, and yet somehow he +was convinced that there were other things to be explained in connection +with the stranger. + +“Come up stairs,” said the tramp, leading the way up the stairway. + +Fred followed obediently and soon found himself in the hallway from +which opened several rooms. Some of these were large, though all were +low. For a moment, as he stopped to look about him, it seemed to Fred +that he almost saw the sights that the house had witnessed one hundred +years before this time. What stories of life and death, of suffering and +joy these old rooms might have told had they been endowed with the power +of speech. + +Somehow, although Fred was unable to account for his feeling, it seemed +that unseen witnesses were about him and that the presence of himself +and the tramp in these rooms was very like an intrusion. He did not +speak concerning his feelings, however, and after a hasty inspection the +two returned to the room below. + +“What’s that?” demanded Fred suddenly as from the chimney there came +sounds like those which he had heard the preceding evening. + +“I cannot see,” replied the tramp, his eyes twinkling as he spoke. + +“I cannot see, either,” said Fred, “but I can hear. Don’t you know what +that noise is?” As he spoke the strange sound was repeated. It was a +broken note, sharp and yet long-drawn out. It was clearly heard, too, +and yet Fred was convinced now that it was no ghostly voice from which +the chatter came. But what was it? His companion did not explain to him +and he himself had no conception of the source of the strange sound. + +They proceeded through the various rooms on the first floor, but nothing +was discovered that in any way explained the mysterious events which +Fred had come to investigate. + +Conversation had almost ceased, the tramp seldom speaking except to call +to Fred to follow him, and Fred only occasionally asking such questions +as occurred to him. + +“The cellar is the strangest part of all,” said the tramp. “You don’t +want to leave until you have seen that part of the old house.” + +“All right,” declared Fred lightly. “I came over to see what I could +find, and if there’s anything in the cellar worth finding I want to see +it.” + +The stairs to the cellar were low and broad, but the wood in places had +decayed and fallen away. As a consequence when the tramp descended upon +the third step the rotten timbers in part gave way and he was compelled +to leap to the ground below him. Fred too jumped, but the mishap did not +cause any inconvenience, though neither of them spoke when both arose. + +The light was dim, entering the place from two open windows which were +just above the ground. In silence the investigators moved about the +place until at last Fred said, “It seems to me like a dungeon down here. +I don’t know what they could have kept here.” + +“Probably they used to come down here with a candle. I have an idea that +if you boys thought you saw and heard strange things here last night you +were not unlike the boys of one hundred years ago who came down here +after apples and potatoes.” + +“That’s right,” laughed Fred, although his laughter was not hearty. “No +man could crawl through either of those two windows. There isn’t much +more than room enough to put your arm through either of them.” + +“Wait a minute,” said the tramp abruptly. “I’ll be back here with a +light. I want to show you something.” + +“What is it?” demanded Fred. + +“Why, there’s a well here in one corner. I don’t know whether it was +made in case the Meekers were attacked by the Indians and they wanted to +be sure of having what water they needed, or whether the house was built +over the old well, which they perhaps filled in and since then it has +fallen away.” + +“Never mind,” called Fred. “I’ll go upstairs with you. I don’t care +anything about the old well.” + +“But I want to show it to you,” declared the tramp. “You wait here and +I’ll be back in a minute.” + +Hastily the strange man retraced his way to the room above, but no +sooner had he gained the place he was seeking than the massive door was +dropped into place and left Fred in almost complete darkness. + +The first feeling of the boy was that some accident had befallen his +recent companion. He listened intently, but he did not hear any sound +that indicated any trouble in the room above. + +Following this feeling of fear came the sensation of intense loneliness. +Although the room was only dimly lighted, by this time Fred’s eyes had +become somewhat accustomed to the semi-darkness and he was able to see +all about him. A pile of boards in one corner of the cellar were the +only objects he distinguished. + +At first Fred had no feeling of fear. He expected the door to be opened +at once and he waited confidently for a hail from the man who had just +left him. However, when several minutes elapsed and he heard no call nor +was any attempt made to open the door, a feeling of alarm swept over +him. Again he glanced hastily about the cellar and keenly watched the +light of the setting sun as its beams were cast through the little +windows. + +Convinced that night was near at hand and somewhat alarmed now at his +predicament, Fred rushed to the heavy door and did his utmost to lift +it. Whether or not the door was fastened he did not know, but his +efforts were unavailing. The massive door was unmoved and when a few +minutes had elapsed Fred was convinced that he was helpless to lift it. + +Astonished by what he had already learned, he remained standing at the +foot of the stairway and in his loudest tones called to the man who had +recently left him. “Open the door! Open the door!” he shouted. “I can’t +get out. The door is fast.” + +His tones increased in loudness as he discovered that no attention was +paid his hail. + +Repeatedly the anxious lad pounded upon the cellar-door and repeated his +calls. The silence that rested over the old house was unbroken. +Apparently no one was within hailing distance. What had become of the +tramp was not clear, but apparently he had departed from the old Meeker +House. + +Almost desperate now, Fred dragged the boards from the corner in which +he had discovered them and piling them up on the floor beneath the +little window that opened upon the road he soon was able to look out +upon the scene. No one was within sight. To call for help now would be +useless, if the tramp really had departed from the house. + +He carefully examined the windows to see if it would be possible for him +to lift the sash and thus make an opening that would be large enough to +enable him to crawl through. He was unable, however, to accomplish his +task and soon concluded that his sole reliance now was to wait until +some one passed in the road and call to him for help. + +Not many minutes had passed before a farm-wagon, drawn by two horses, +was seen approaching. The farmer who was driving the team was apparently +unaware of any call upon him, for his rattling wagon soon passed on and +in spite of Fred’s loudest calls for help he did not stop. + +“I don’t believe I am making enough noise,” Fred sturdily declared to +himself. “The next one that passes I’ll make him hear me whether he +wants to or not.” + +A brief time afterward he discovered a boy driving a cow not far away on +the road. He was approaching the corner on which the old Meeker House +stood and in a brief time would be within hailing distance. + +Convinced that his call before had not been heard because he had not +used tones sufficiently loud, Fred increased his efforts. He shouted in +tones that were unnatural, they were so high keyed. He then whistled and +gave his school yell as being likely to be heeded when his own call +might be unheard. + +Nor were his efforts in vain. Fred saw the boy when he approached the +corner stop abruptly and give one startled look toward the old house. A +moment later Fred saw a picture which he never was able to forget. The +cow, with tail elevated, was running swiftly from the place, while close +behind her followed the boy, who at frequent intervals stopped and +looked behind him at the old Meeker House. It was evident to Fred what +thoughts were in the mind of the lad, for his frequent glances, as well +as his manner, betrayed his terror. Evidently he had heard stories of +the old place that had not induced him to enter the building when such +strange and unearthly sounds issued from the cellar. + +A moment later the horn of an automobile was heard and soon afterward a +car turned the corner. Fred was nearly hopeless by this time, but in +desperation once more he did his utmost to make his voice heard. The +automobile, however, passed on and apparently his calls for aid were +unheard. + +Darkness would be settling over the land within a few minutes. Fred +thought of his friends, who doubtless by this time had returned from the +country-club and were puzzled to account for the absence of their +friend. + +Convinced that he was the only one except the tramp who knew where he +was at that time, Fred resolutely prepared to endure the wait that must +elapse before relief could be had. As he turned away from the window he +was startled by sounds that came from the room directly above him. The +boy, alarmed now and thoroughly distressed, stopped abruptly and waited +for a repetition of the noise which had aroused him. + + + + +CHAPTER VII—AN ESCAPE + + +There was no question about the repetition of the strange sound in the +upper room. To the excited boy there were evidences that people were +walking over the board floors. Indeed, he was positive he could hear the +slow, measured footfalls of some one who was walking back and forth in +the room directly above him. A moment later he was equally convinced +that the sound of the whistling creatures which had been heard when the +four boys first visited the house was now repeated. + +A moment later there came a rushing sound of many wings. For a moment +Fred’s courage almost deserted him, his flesh seemed to creep. He +stopped abruptly in the darkness and spoke aloud to himself, “This will +never do. It is all foolishness. There isn’t any such thing as a spook +anyway, so why should you be afraid of one?” + +At that moment, however, the sound of the rushing wings was heard again +and all Fred’s efforts to strengthen his heart proved unavailing. The +flying creatures were in the cellar, there was no question about that +now. Fred almost cried aloud as he heard the wings coming closer to the +place he was standing. + +A moment later the flying creatures seemed to be circling the cellar and +in the midst of it all the sharp twitter which had so strangely +impressed him the preceding evening was now heard again and within a few +feet of him. Then, too, there was the sound of some one walking again in +the room above him. Had Fred been in a less nervous condition he would +have been aware that it was no ghostly walk which he heard, for the +footfalls were heavy and plainly those of some one whose weight was not +slight. Fred, however, was in no condition calmly to consider these +things. The darkness was almost appalling now and surrounded as he was +by unseen winged creatures his fears redoubled. + +He looked again at the cellar windows, but escape through them was +impossible. Almost in a frenzy the frightened boy decided that help must +be found from some source. In his desperation he ran to the cellar door +and pushed against it with all his strength. To his amazement the door +readily yielded to his onslaught. He pushed up the heavy door and in a +moment he was in the yard. + +He was in the kitchen when the door once more fell back into its place. +The loud report startled the unseen creatures and even after he had +gained the ground outside the building he heard the strange twittering +that seemed now to come from the chimney. The noise made by the wings of +the flying creatures also was plainly heard. Whatever the explanation +might be the whole place and experience seemed so uncanny to the nervous +boy that he instantly fled toward the road not far away. + +Even when he gained the highway his one supreme thought still was of +flight. Instantly beginning to run he steadily increased the pace at +which he was fleeing until his breathing became labored and perspiration +was pouring down his face. Occasionally he glanced behind him in his mad +flight and on one occasion as he did so his foot was caught in some +obstruction and he was thrown heavily upon the ground. + +Falling, however, was not uncommon in the experience of Fred. Indeed, +his friends declared that he was like a rubber ball, he bounced up after +every fall as if the contact with the ground had only afforded him +additional power. + +The road was dusty and as Fred’s flight continued his appearance became +steadily worse. Fortunately, however, in the dim light not one of the +few people who met him recognized him, or discovered his plight. The one +great purpose in his mind was still to run. The greatest possible +distance between himself and the old Meeker House must be made and in +his determination this distance steadily and rapidly increased. +Occasionally he glanced behind the trees, the dim outlines of which were +plainly to be seen. Somehow there was a fear in his mind that some enemy +might be loitering behind these shelters. Once when he ran past an old +and deserted barn that stood near the roadway he was confident that he +heard sounds of weird laughter issuing from the tumbling structure. +Indeed, in whichever direction the boy looked, it seemed to him he +discovered evidences of the very enemies whom he had left behind him in +his flight. + +Somehow at last Fred found himself in the long, shaded lane or driveway +that led from the road up to the house of his friend. The trees were +tall poplars and stood like sentinels guarding each side of the road. +Even now Fred’s fears had not disappeared, although he saw the lights +gleam from the windows of the old farmhouse before him. + +So weary was he by his long flight and worn by his excitement that when +at last he swiftly mounted the steps of the piazza his foot slipped and +once more the unfortunate boy fell upon the floor. + +Aroused by the sound his three friends instantly rushed from the room in +which they were seated and a moment later discovered their friend in his +predicament. + +“What in the world is the matter with you?” demanded George as the three +boys gazed in astonishment at Fred. + +“N-n-o-t-h-in’. N-n-o-t-h-in’,” gasped Fred. + +“You look as if there was nothing doing,” said Grant, repressing a smile +as the plight of Fred became manifest in the light. “Actually you look +as if you belonged in a lunatic asylum.” + +“I guess I do,” responded Fred. + +“Well, what’s the matter?” demanded John. “You haven’t told us where you +have been nor what you have been doing.” + +“I can’t. I can’t now,” said Fred. “Give me a chance to rest up.” + +“You need a bath more than you need a rest,” declared George laughingly, +as he became convinced that nothing serious had happened to his friend. +“Come upstairs and I’ll see that you get what you deserve.” + +“It’s lucky everybody doesn’t get what he deserves. If he did—” + +“Never mind that,” directed George. “Come on upstairs and take your bath +and get a change of clothes and you’ll feel in your right mind once +more.” + +Acting promptly upon the suggestion Fred withdrew from his friends for a +time and a half-hour later, when he returned to the piazza, he was not +able entirely to conceal his feeling of chagrin. It was true that he had +had some strange experiences, but it was difficult now to believe that +they were all real. Certainly his companions were very much in evidence +and as they seated themselves, George said promptly, “Now my lad, tell +us what happened to you.” + +“Well, I don’t mind telling you,” said Fred, “that I went over to the +old Meeker House.” + +“That’s just what I thought,” laughed George, “and you stayed there +until it was so dark that you heard those strange noises again, didn’t +you?” + +“Yes, sir, I did that, and a good deal more.” + +“What else? Tell us about it. Why don’t you talk?” demanded John +impatiently. + +“It isn’t anything I want to talk much about,” said Fred positively in a +low voice. “I tell you there’s something strange about that house. I +went over there late this afternoon and found a tramp.” + +“Where?” broke in George. “In the house?” + +“Yes, it was in the house and he at once offered to become my guide, +counselor and friend.” + +“What do you mean?” inquired Grant. + +“Just what I say,” said Fred. “He showed me through the old building. +Finally he took me into the cellar and left me there, though he took +pains not to close the old cellar-door. For a while I didn’t mind it, +but when I found I couldn’t get out of the place, for the windows were +too small for me to crawl through, and I couldn’t lift the big door, I +didn’t know just what to do.” + +“Well, what did you do?” demanded John. + +“Why, I called, shouted and whistled through the window, but I couldn’t +get anybody to pay any attention to me. Yes, there was one who heard +me,” he added. “He was a small boy driving a cow and when he heard the +calls from the old Meeker House he lost no time in withdrawing from that +part of the country. Even the cow he was driving seemed to feel just as +he did, for her tail went up and her head down and she joined in the +race in that graceful, polite way that cows have when they run.” + +“It’s plain you saw something besides the spooks then,” said George, +laughing heartily. “Look yonder,” he added quickly, pointing as he spoke +toward the end of the piazza. + +In the dim light Uncle Sim was seen standing there, his eye-balls +shining and his intense interest in the conversation of the boys +manifest in the expression of his face. + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” he said when the boys first became aware of his +presence, “I don’ tol’ yo’ not to go near dat ol’ Meeker House.” + +“Don’t you ever go there?” asked Fred. + +“Me go dar? No, suh. No, suh. It would take fo’ yoke ob oxen to make me +go inside dat ol’ house in de daytime and in de night I reckon Caleb’s +Army couldn’t drive me in dar’.” + +“What became of your tramp friend?” inquired George when the boys arose +to enter the room. + +“That’s what I should like to know,” said Fred somewhat ruefully. + +“Well, come on in, we’ll all feel better after dinner,” said George +cheerfully, as he led the way into the dining room. + +The strange experience which had befallen Fred was the chief topic of +conversation. Even their interest, however, was broken when a half-hour +had passed and word was brought that Uncle Sim was desirous of speaking +at once to Mr. George. + +Excusing himself George withdrew from the dining room and a few minutes +later when he returned he said, “What do you think has happened, +fellows?” + +“We don’t know. How should we know?” retorted John. “If you’ve got +something to say why don’t you say it?” + +“That’s just what I am going to do,” said George, but he had scarcely +begun his statement before his three friends leaped from their seats at +the table and quickly followed him as he led the way out of the house. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII—THE LOST CAR + + +“What’s the trouble? What’s the trouble?” demanded George excitedly when +the boys had run out through the kitchen door. + +“Uncle Sim says that my car is gone,” replied George. + +“Gone? Gone where?” demanded Grant. + +“He doesn’t know and that’s what he wanted to find out from us.” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” broke in the old colored man who now approached +the place where the boys were standing. “Dat car sho’ am gone. I jes’ +came to fin’ out if any ob yo’ young gen’lemen disremembered who might +hab tuk de car.” + +“Why, there hasn’t anybody taken it,” said John. “Have you looked in the +garage, George?” + +In spite of his perplexity George laughed slightly as he said, “I +certainly have. You don’t think I would solemnly state to you that the +car was gone if I had seen it in the garage, do you?” + +The boys by this time had advanced to the open door of the garage and a +hasty examination confirmed the statement of the old colored man that +the automobile was not there. + +“What do you suppose it means?” inquired Fred. + +“It means somebody has taken it,” replied George. + +“You mean stolen it?” + +“That’s what I don’t know. I’m trying to explain to you fellows that the +car isn’t here and if it isn’t here it must be somewhere else. Now, if +it is somewhere else how did it get there and who took it there? Do you +see? Can I make any impression on any of you?” + +“Why don’t you say in plain English just what you mean?” retorted John. +“Do you think your car has been stolen?” + +“I know it’s gone and that’s all I know.” + +“What are you going to do about it?” + +“I’m going to take you fellows and Uncle Sim in the old car and find out +what has happened to the new one, if I can.” + +“That’s all right, we’ll be with you in a minute,” declared George. + +Speedily the boys entered the house and securing their caps at once +prepared to accompany George, who soon started down the lane toward the +road beyond. There was no plan clearly defined in his mind nor had any +one in the party any suggestions to make as to whom the thief might be +or what had become of the missing automobile. + +In response to George’s queries Uncle Sim related his own experiences. +He had been coming in from the barn and noticed that the door of the +garage was still open. As he had strict orders to see that this was +closed every night, he turned aside to carry out the directions. To his +surprise he found that the new automobile was not in its accustomed +place. His first thought naturally was that the boys had taken it for +another drive and yet at that very moment he heard the sound of their +laughter issuing from the dining-room. + +Puzzled by the fact he at once entered the house and soon made his +presence and his errand known. + +His statement, startling as it was, at first had not alarmed George, but +as soon as he had made a hasty investigation he too was as troubled as +his dusky friend. The car was gone and there was no accounting for its +departure. + +“Did any of you fellows hear the automobile when it went down the +driveway?” George inquired of his friends as they sped along the dusty +road. + +“Not one of us,” said John, positively. + +“That’s the trouble in having such a good car,” said George dryly. “You +see it makes so little noise that it couldn’t be heard a few feet away.” + +“I don’t think that was it,” spoke up Grant. “I think it’s because +certain members of our party were making so much noise that an +earthquake or thunder would have been drowned.” + +“That’s all right, then,” said George dryly. “You wait until we find +that car and then we’ll talk a little more about it.” + +“What was the number of your car?” asked Fred. + +“27155.” + +“I think a man has got more nerve to steal an automobile than anything +else. Of course he knows he will be taken,” declared Fred. + +“Not always,” answered George. “Down on the sea shore there was a +certain firm last summer that did a regular business in stolen +automobiles. They painted them different colors and did a few little +things that altered the appearance so that a man wouldn’t recognize his +own car.” + +“Is that so? Is that true?” demanded Grant. + +“It certainly is. I know a man who lost a car down there. Those men work +all through the towns and cities in the northern part of the state and +run down to the seashore with the stolen cars in the night when nobody +is around and the next day the cars wouldn’t be recognized by the very +men who were looking for them.” + +“Well, I hope we shan’t find your car down there,” said Fred warmly. + +“I hope we shan’t,” replied George, “though the main thing I want just +now is to find the car anyway. Some of the good times I promised you +fellows this summer will go begging, I’m afraid, if we have lost our +automobile.” + +“We’ll find it, George,” said John, patting his friend on the shoulder. + +Meanwhile Uncle Sim, who was still a member of the party, had taken no +share in the conversation. At that moment, however, he uttered an +exclamation of surprise and directed the attention of the Go Ahead boys +to the old Meeker House which now was not far ahead of them. + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” said Uncle Sim, his voice trembling in his +excitement. “I sho’ do see some lights in dat cellar ob de ol’ house. +‘Pears like dere’s always somethin’ wrong in de ole Meeker House.” + +“How it is, Fred? Do you agree with Uncle Sim?” laughed George. + +“I never saw any lights in it,” replied Fred glumly. + +“No, but that’s what you wanted to see, I guess, more than anything +else,” laughed Grant. “But there’s a light there now,” he added +suddenly, “I saw it myself. It shines for a minute and then it is gone. +There it is again!” he exclaimed a moment later. “You can see it shining +through the cellar windows. What do you suppose it is?” + +“Spooks,” said George solemnly. “They usually have a supper there once a +year and I think to-night is the regular time for their meeting.” + +“Do you want to stop?” demanded Fred quickly. + +“I don’t mind,” replied George. There was no enthusiasm, however, +manifest among the boys, although every one jokingly declared that he +was not afraid. The excuse was commonly given that the necessity of +hasty investigation into the loss of the automobile demanded action in +other directions. Consequently no stop was made and although every boy +was frequently glancing behind him at the old Meeker House no light was +seen nor did any additional or unusual sounds come from that direction. + +When the boys had gone beyond the corner their thoughts once more +returned to the problem which was confronting them. The mystery of the +lost car must be solved. Although there were many suggestions offered +there was not one of the boys that had any clearly outlined plan as to +what must be done in order to find the lost car or obtain information +concerning those who had taken it. + +“I have a suggestion,” broke in Grant at last. + +“What’s that?” demanded Fred. + +“Why, it’s your friend, the tramp. Probably he’s the man who has been +hanging around the place for several days and when his opportunity came +he took it.” + +“Which do you mean, the opportunity, or the car?” laughed Fred. + +“Both. His opportunity was to take the car.” + +“That tramp,” declared Fred solemnly, “didn’t have strength enough about +him to push the button to turn on the power.” + +“That’s something you don’t know,” retorted his friend. “I think when +you are through with it you’ll find that the car disappeared at the same +time the tramp did. No one has seen him since,” added Grant, positively. + +“And from all I can learn,” retorted Fred, “nobody saw him before except +myself, so you haven’t run down your problem yet.” + +When the boys arrived at the Corners, as the little nearby hamlet was +called, they made many inquiries of the people they met, but no word +concerning the missing car was heard. There were several suggestions +from the country people that other cars had been lost within the past +few weeks, but none of them was able to add to the information which the +boys already possessed. + +Disappointed by their failures, George at last said, “I think the best +thing for us to do will be to go back home. I’ll call up my father on +the ’phone and if he isn’t coming out pretty soon he will tell me what +to do.” + +In response to George’s suggestion the boys once more clambered into the +car and in a brief time were noisily speeding over the road on their way +back to their friend’s house. + +“We’ve got two mysteries now,” suggested George. + +“Three you mean,” spoke up Fred quickly. + +“We’ve got the mystery of the lost car and the mystery of the old Meeker +House. That makes two. I don’t see where your third comes in.” + +“The third is our mysterious friend, the tramp, that I saw in the old +Meeker House.” + +“What’s the mystery about him?” laughed George. “I don’t find anything +very mysterious about an unwashed tramp you found in the old house. Very +likely he had crawled in there to sleep and you waked him up.” + +“He was awake all right,” declared Fred promptly. “There isn’t any +question about that. He wasn’t moving around as fast as I have seen +some, but he didn’t take it all out in motions, either.” + +“It seems to me,” laughed Grant, “that you find in that tramp whatever +you want to find, Fred. First you say he’s one kind of man and then you +tell us he’s another.” + +“Wait until you see him,” said Fred sagely. “Maybe he’s in the old house +now. It can’t be far ahead.” + +“Not more than a quarter of a mile,” suggested Grant. + +For some reason the boys became silent as the car speeded forward in the +dim light. The eyes of every one were turned toward the old house which +had perplexed them in so many ways. + +As they came near the corner John said in a low voice, “There’s not only +a ghost of a man in that house, but there’s the ghost of the automobile. +Do you hear that horn?” + +All the boys listened intently and to their consternation the faint +sound of a horn was heard, issuing from the old house. + +“What do you suppose that means?” demanded Fred in a whisper. + +“I told you there was the ghost of an automobile in that house, didn’t +I?” demanded John. + +“Look yonder,” called Grant quickly. “There’s that light again in the +cellar. Don’t you think we had better stop and find out what all this +means?” + +At that moment the faint sound of the horn was heard again from the +house and for an instant lights flashed from every window. + +These, however, quickly disappeared and although the boys waited several +minutes, the sound was not repeated nor were the lights again seen. + + + + +CHAPTER IX—ANOTHER FLIGHT + + +“What do you suppose that means?” demanded Fred in a whisper. + +“Things are seldom what they seem,” said Grant. + +“What do you mean?” again demanded Fred, turning sharply upon his +friend. “Don’t you think there are lights there? Didn’t you hear the +sound of the automobile horn?” + +“I certainly did,” acknowledged Grant, “but that isn’t all there is to +it. There are some things we don’t see in connection with these things.” + +“Come on,” urged George, “let’s all get out and go in there and see if +we cannot see those other things that Grant is telling about.” + +For a moment there was silence in the little party, but at last, as no +one was desirous of being looked upon as cowardly by his friends, all +four boys stepped down upon the ground. + +“Come on, Uncle Sim,” called George. “You aren’t going to be left +behind.” + +“We don’ lose one car,” remarked the aged negro, his teeth chattering as +he spoke. + +“And we don’t want to lose another, do we, Uncle Sim?” said George. “I +don’t think anybody can take it without our knowing it, so you can come +along, Uncle Sim, if you want to.” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” responded the negro. “D’rec’ly, d’rec’ly.” + +George laughed, as the old man slowly and with manifest reluctance +climbed down upon the ground. His “mis’ry” plainly was unusually +troublesome, for he walked with a great effort and very slowly. Indeed, +he groaned with every step that he took, as he followed the boys on +their way to the old house. + +Silence fell upon the party when they drew near the building. No lights +now were to be seen in any of its windows. Silence rested over the +quaint old structure and apparently there was nothing to explain the +strange sights and sounds which recently had issued from the venerable +building. + +“You boys stay here and go into the house by the front door and I’ll go +around to the kitchen,” said George. + +“What for?” demanded Fred. + +“Why, we’ll be more certain,” explained George, “to find out if there is +anything wrong here if we come at the old house from two sides.” + +“I think I’ll go with you,” spoke up Grant quickly. + +“There’s no need of that,” protested George sharply. Indeed the lad +spoke too sharply, for the suspicions of Grant were instantly aroused by +the evident desire of his friend not to have him accompany him. +Knowledge of that fact, however, was sufficient of itself to increase +Grant’s determination. + +“We had better divide up the party evenly,” he suggested. “John and Fred +can stay here and watch this side and I’ll go with you around to the +kitchen door.” + +With manifest reluctance, though he made no further protest, George +accepted the suggestion of his friend and together the two boys soon +disappeared from the sight of their companions. + +“Who’s that?” whispered Fred as he grasped the arm of John, who was +standing beside him, and pointing to an approaching figure of a man. + +“That’s Uncle Sim,” replied John after a hasty glance at the approaching +form. + +John’s words were verified when a few moments later Uncle Sim, his voice +trembling and his terror manifest in his entire bearing, approached the +spot where the two boys were standing. Indeed, had it not been for the +presence of John and Fred, Uncle Sim with all his “mis’ry” would not +have been induced to approach the uncanny place. + +“Come on,” said John a moment later. “We’re going into the house to find +out about those lights.” + +No protest was made and together the two boys, followed by Uncle Sim, +whose reluctance manifestly increased with every passing moment, pushed +open the sagging front door and entered the front room. + +For a moment they were unable to distinguish any objects in the +darkness. From the small windows the faint light entered, but it was not +sufficient to enable the boys to see about them. Suddenly the strange +whirring of winds was heard again. Now the sound came from the ceiling +and then again it seemed to the startled boys that it was close to the +place where they were standing. Back and forth and up and down the +strange sounds continued, occasionally broken by a plaintive note as if +the creature that was darting about the room was in terror or pain. + +Uncle Sim, unable longer to control his feelings, began to pray, but +even his prayer did not prevent him from speedily fleeing from the room. + +Fred glanced through the open door and saw the old negro making most +excellent time as he ran across the field toward the waiting automobile. +Under other circumstances he would have laughed heartily, but just now +there was excitement sufficient to prevent the boys from following the +retreating old negro. + +In the midst of the sounds of the wings suddenly a prolonged groan was +heard. It seemed to both Fred and John that it issued from some place +close to them. Several times the startling noise was repeated and then +was followed by a strange whistling. + +For some reason, which neither of the two boys explained to the other, +they had not advanced farther into the room. Both glanced behind them to +make certain that the door was still open and their way of escape was +unimpeded. + +“Where are the other fellows?” whispered Fred. + +“I don’t know. Shall I call them?” + +“Yes,” said Fred eagerly, + +“Hello, there is George. Where are you, Grant?” called John, striving to +speak boldly, though in spite of his efforts his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +Instead of a response from their companion a faint sound of an auto horn +was heard in the old building. It was mournful beyond the power of +either boy to describe. Instead of the sharp, short “honk,” it was +prolonged and weird. + +“This is too much for me,” said Fred sharply. “I have seen all I want to +see. The other fellows aren’t here and I’m not going into this old house +any further unless I can see my way.” + +“What’s that? What’s that?” whispered John excitedly. + +As he spoke the sound of some one running around the corner of the house +was heard by both boys. In a moment John and Fred were outside the old +building and as they became aware that the fugitives were George and +Grant they lost no time in following them. + +In the distance Uncle Sim could be seen climbing into the automobile. It +was marvelous too what excellent time all four boys were making. Swiftly +as George and Grant were running they were soon overtaken by their +companions and together all four arrived at the place in the road where +their automobile had been left. + +At that moment there came a sound from the old Meeker House very like a +wild burst of laughter. This was repeated and the terror of Uncle Sim +became still more pronounced. + +“There goes that auto horn again,” said George, as he grasped the wheel +and looked behind to see if his friends were ready to start. “Uncle +Sim,” called George just before he started, “I wish you would see if +that back tire on the left is all right. We don’t want to start out on a +flat tire.” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” answered Uncle Sim quickly, as he obediently +climbed out of the car and inspected the tire. “It’s all right, suh,” he +repeated. “It’s all right.” + +In his eagerness to be gone George at once started, unaware that the +aged negro had not yet returned to his seat. + +His ignorance was speedily dispelled when from the darkness behind them +came several agonizing calls for help, “Hi dar, don’t leave me! Don’t +leave me! Wait! Wait dar!” + +As the boys glanced behind them they saw the old man running swiftly +toward them and making even better time than when he had departed from +the old Meeker House. + +Obediently George stopped the automobile and in a moment Uncle Sim, +breathless and excited, climbed into the seat. + +“There’s one thing I don’t understand, Uncle Sim,” said George, laughing +as he spoke. + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” responded the negro. “Dat’s jes’ de way I feel.” + +“What I can’t understand,” said George, “is why it is so hard for you to +walk when you are working around the place and it’s so easy for you to +run when you have been left behind.” + +“Dat’s so. Yas, suh,” answered the negro. “I jes’ cain’t explain dat +mahself.” + +Apparently George was the only member of the party that was willing to +talk and even he soon lost his desire as few responses were made to his +various suggestions. + +Uncle Sim, however, with chattering teeth and trembling voice, +frequently expressed his displeasure over the attempt of the boys to +belittle the sounds which had come from the old Meeker House. + +At last Uncle Sim declared solemnly, “I jes’ made up my mind how dat ar +automobile was taken.” + +“How was that?” demanded George. + +“It’s de spooks back in de ole Meeker House. Dey make all de trouble.” + +The four boys were now far enough from the scene of their recent +adventure to permit of their looking more calmly at their surroundings. +Their former fear had departed as the distance between them and the old +house had increased. When Uncle Sim made this solemn declaration as to +the cause of the loss of the automobile they all laughed heartily, +although the aged negro strongly maintained his repeated declarations. + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” he declared, “Dar’s somethin’ strange ‘bout all +dis rumpus. Yo’ hear de spirits in de ole house and you see de lights +from de windows, and den you hear de autermobile ho’n. Dat’s de way it +is, yas, suh. Yo’ couldn’t find that automobile if yo’ was to search dat +old house from de cellar up to de garret and yet de ho’n kept er blowin’ +and er blowin’ all de time.” + +“I think you’re mistaken, Uncle Sim,” laughed George. + +“No, suh. No, suh. Dat’s jes’ de way it is. I feel shore you’ll neber +see dat autermobile agin.” + +“You think it is in the old house?” demanded Fred. + +“No, suh. No, suh. I didn’t say as how it is exac’ly _in_ de ole house, +but what I says is dat de persons what’s in de ole house can tell yo’ +what become of dat ar autermobile, an’ it was our autermobile ho’n what +was er blowin’ dar. Yas, suh, I’d know dat ho’n if I heard it er hundred +miles from here.” + +“I’ll tell you what I’ll do,” said George suddenly. + +“Tell ahead,” said Fred. “What is it you’ll do?” + +“I’ll dare the crowd to go back to the old Meeker House.” + +“We’ll take your dare,” responded Fred promptly. + + + + +CHAPTER X—THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + + +There was no enthusiasm manifest among the four boys when again they +walked across the field on their way to the old Meeker House. As they +came near the building, suddenly lights were seen in the windows once +more and a faint sound of the automobile horn again was heard. + +“Shall we go in?” inquired Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his +attempt to control it. + +“It’s getting late,” suggested George. There was a note of laughter in +his voice, but his companions were so excited that they were scarcely +aware of it. “Perhaps we had better put it off until some other time.” + +“That’s the way I feel about it,” joined in John. + +“All right,” said George, “and we must look after our car too. My father +wouldn’t want me to lose the old car as well as the new one.” + +Like the famous soldiers who marched up the hill and then marched down +again, the Go Ahead boys without protest on the part of any member of +the party retraced their way to the road and silently took their places +in the car. + +Conversation lagged and when at last they arrived at George’s home they +left the car in the garage and then quickly entered the house. + +When they came into the room where the lights were shining they stared +blankly at one another for a moment and then laughed loudly. + +“What a pack of brave fellows we are, aren’t we?” said George. + +“We are going to find out about that old house,” declared John quietly. + +To the surprise of the boys George’s father had arrived during their +absence. He was an interested listener to the story which the boys had +to relate, although none of them detected the sly glance which passed +between him and George. Evidently there was something understood by them +which was unknown to the others. + +“Yes,” said Mr. Sanders when the boys were seated in the room. “There +have been some strange occurrences in this part of the country from the +days when it was first settled.” + +“I guess that’s so,” said Grant. “We were hearing about the young fellow +who was captured up here in the Ramapo Pass in the Revolution.” + +“Do you mean young Montagnie?” + +“We don’t know his name,” replied Grant, “but it was the one who was +used by Washington as a messenger without his understanding it.” + +“That’s the fellow,” said Mr. Sanders. “I have always been greatly +interested in him. I do not think people ever have appreciated the part +he took in the plan which Washington wanted to try. He was a fine young +chap, about twenty years of age, and was a licensed preacher. Washington +had heard such good reports of him that when he came to try his plan he +sent for young Montagnie one morning up on the Hudson at Dobbs Ferry. It +was there the Continental army was encamped at the time. The general +told Montagnie that he had heard good reports of him and the young +soldier was so embarrassed that he could only stammer his thanks. Then +Washington went on to tell him that he wanted him to go across the +country and through the Ramapo Pass and carry a message to General +Heath, who was then at Morristown. He explained carefully how the papers +were to be sewed inside the lining of his coat. Young Montagnie agreed, +but suggested that he knew a better way across the country. There was +danger of his being taken if he should go down through the Ramapo +Valley. It is said that Washington drew himself up to his full height +and looked sternly at the young soldier as he thundered at him, ‘It is +your business to obey.’ And of course there was nothing more to be +said.” + +“He must have had a strange feeling when he went down through the Pass,” +suggested John. “He knew what the danger was and at the same time he +knew that he could find his way safely across the country without going +into the Pass. It seems strange that he did not suspect the trick +Washington was trying to play.” + +“Apparently he didn’t suspect anything,” said Mr. Sanders. “It was early +in the morning when he entered the narrow defile. The only weapon he had +was a stout club and he was swinging along at a good rate, confident +that if he once safely got through the Pass many of his perils would be +over. He had just entered one end of the Pass when he saw five men +coming in at the other end. + +“He instantly recognized the leader as young Richard Smith, whose father +he had seen hanged up in Goshen a few days before this time. You see his +father was one of the worst of the cowboys. At least many of his +dastardly deeds were committed against the colonists, but he didn’t stop +for that and he was willing to have dealings with either side, provided +he made by the transaction.” + +“What was he hanged for?” inquired John. + +“Why, the people became so indignant at last that about two hundred of +the boys and men started after him one day. Of course he ran then, but +they chased him clear down to Long Island.” + +“Did they catch him?” inquired John. + +“They most certainly did, and they brought him back to Goshen and he was +hanged there in the courtyard. Then his son, Richard, declared he would +revenge his father’s death and it was this young man whom Montagnie saw +when he came into the Ramapo Pass just at sunrise that morning away back +in 1781. + +“The young messenger felt of the letter inside the lining of his coat to +make sure that it was safe and grasping his club more firmly and doing +his utmost to appear indifferent he at once turned and approached the +men. Very likely he would have run if he thought he could escape in that +manner, but he had no weapon except his club while the others were +armed. He well knew that if he should try to escape they would at once +start after him. + +“He quietly saluted the men when he passed them and received a grunt +from Richard in response. However, he was not critical, as now he was +hoping that his peril had been passed. He was not to get away so easily, +however, for before he came out into the open road he was hailed by the +men behind him and ordered to stop. Once more the young preacher was +tempted to run, but he was aware that his effort would be useless. +Accordingly he waited for the men to come back to him, and when Richard +Smith gruffly demanded who he was and where he was going he answered in +a general way saying that he was simply going across the country, ‘That +won’t do,’ said Richard loudly, ‘that may mean to New York or it may +mean to Morristown. Who are you anyway?’ + +“By this time Montagnie was convinced that he was in deadly peril and he +quickly decided to sell his life as dearly as possible. Swinging his +club he knocked down one of them and leaping over his prostrate body +started up the steep side of the Pass. For some reason he was not fired +upon but before he gained the top he was astonished to see two of the +party whom he had left in the valley now approaching from above him, +almost as if they had dropped out of the clouds.” + +“How did they do it?” inquired Grant. + +“Very likely they knew of a short cut. At all events the young messenger +was caught between the two parties. They took him to a little shanty in +the woods and then began to search him. They cut his hat into shreds, +and of course found nothing valuable. Then they made him take off his +coat and as soon as they had cut the lining they discovered the letters +which were hidden there. + +“Young Montagnie expected every moment that he would be shot or hanged. +One of the common methods of hanging employed by the cowboys in those +days was to put a noose around the prisoner’s neck, tie the rope to the +limb of a tree after they had put the man on horseback, and then, when +they struck the horse and it started quickly, the wretched victim was +left hanging in the air. But for some unexplained reason young Montagnie +was simply kept in the house three days. Then when he still confidently +believed that he was being led to his death he was taken down the Hudson +and carried across to New York, where he was shut up in the old Van +Cortlandt Sugar House, which stood near the corner of what is now +Broadway and Cortlandt Street. You see there were so many American +prisoners in New York that the British had to make use of some of the +big buildings besides the jails.” + +“Yes,” suggested John, “I have heard that they used some of the churches +as jails.” + +“They did,” responded Mr. Sanders. + +“Well, what happened to young Montagnie?” + +“I was just about to tell you,” said Sanders, smiling as he spoke. +“Naturally he felt very bitter when he found himself a prisoner in the +old sugar-house. He was so thoroughly convinced that his capture was +useless and that he might have made his way successfully across the +country to Morristown, that he was angry at Washington for his arbitrary +command. + +“However, three days later his keeper showed him a copy of _Rivington’s +Gazette_. Rivington was a printer in New York and was a very bitter +Tory. Montagnie was not especially interested when he first took the +paper, but in a moment he was keenly excited when his eye fell upon an +announcement that one of Washington’s messengers had been captured and +that valuable information had been found concealed in his coat. The +statement further announced that in this paper was a letter from General +Washington to General Heath in which the commander explained that he was +about to attack the British in New York and expected to find General +Clinton entirely unprepared for such action. + +“And at that very time,” resumed Mr. Sanders, “Washington with his +little army had crossed the Delaware River and was on his way toward +Yorktown to help Greene and Lafayette. It was impossible now for Clinton +to leave New York, believing as he did that it was about to be attacked, +and even after he had found out the trick which Washington had played +upon him it was too late for him to try to transport his army by sea +because Washington would arrive at Yorktown before the red coats +possibly could come to the aid of Cornwallis. The battle of Yorktown +followed, as you know, and Cornwallis and his army were made prisoners. +Indeed it was at Yorktown that really the final independence of the +Colonies was won. But I have always felt that the part which young +Montagnie took in winning the victory at Yorktown has never been known +as it ought to be.” + +“What became of him?” inquired Fred. + +“I don’t know. I have often tried to find out,” replied Mr. Sanders. +“You see the men in those days were so busy making history that they had +little time in which to write it. As a consequence there are many things +which we would like to know, but do not.” + +“Now,” continued Mr. Sanders as he arose from his seat, “I understand +that you boys have lost an automobile.” + +“We didn’t lose it,” exclaimed George; “it was stolen.” + +“It seems to me,” said Mr. Sanders, “that if you had an automobile and +haven’t one now you must have lost it, whatever the way in which it +disappeared.” + + + + +CHAPTER XI—THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + + +“What are you going to do?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“We don’t know what to do,” explained Fred. “We thought when you came +out here you would tell us.” + +“I think I shall leave it for you boys to settle among yourselves.” + +“But don’t you want to get your car back?” demanded Grant in surprise. + +“Indeed I do,” said Mr. Sanders. + +“Then,” exclaimed Grant, “I should think you would want to help us find +it.” + +“It’s possible that I may try some plans of my own,” explained Mr. +Sanders, “but meanwhile I am willing for the Go Ahead boys to see what +they can do in the way of restoring the car.” + +“It’s a strange thing,” said George, “how that car ever could have been +taken out of our yard without some of us hearing it. I explained to the +boys,” he added laughingly, “that it was such a good car that they +couldn’t hear the engine.” + +“That may be true,” spoke up Fred, “but we had another explanation.” + +“What was that?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“Why, we said some of the fellows were making so much noise that they +might have taken a threshing machine out of the garage and not one of us +would have heard it.” + +“I don’t mind explaining to you,” said Mr. Sanders, “that I have sent a +brief description of the car to several of the nearby cities. My +impression is that the automobile hasn’t gone very far from home, but +one cannot tell about that. Perhaps we shall get some word from Newark +or New York pretty soon.” + +“Do you think they would take that car to New York?” demanded Fred. “I +thought George said that they had had trouble a year or two ago when a +lot of automobiles were stolen and taken down to Lakewood or somewhere +along the Jersey shore.” + +“That may be true,” said Mr. Sanders. “I have taken a few steps in the +matter, but I am going to leave the most of it to the Go Ahead boys. I +shall expect you to get some trace of the car before I come out for the +week-end. I am compelled to go back to the city to-morrow morning, so I +must leave you boys to your own devices.” + +“Well,” said George just before the boys sought their rooms, “to-morrow +morning we’ll start out and begin our search for that missing +automobile.” + +The following morning, after the departure of Mr. Sanders, the boys were +soon ready for their expedition. That is, all were ready except John, +who, for reasons which he did not fully explain, said that he would wait +until the following day before he joined in the search for the missing +car. + +Before the three boys and Uncle Sim took their seats in the automobile +Fred drew his elongated friend to one side and pulling his head down +until it was on a level with his own whispered to him. + +The conversation between the two friends was brief, but when Fred +responded to the hail of his comrades and ran to take his seat in the +automobile, there was an expression upon his face which indicated that +the cause of the failure of John to accompany them was not altogether +unknown to him. + +In a brief time the car with its inmates disappeared around the bend in +the road and John was no longer to be seen. + +“I think I’ll go first to Paterson,” explained George, to the two boys, +“and then I’ll stop at every garage along the road between there and +Newark.” + +When they arrived at Paterson they sought the quarters of the chief of +police and all three boys entered the room. + +George was the spokesman for the party and he briefly explained the loss +which had befallen them. + +The chief of police listened attentively, made notes of several +statements which George made and then said, “We shall do our best for +you. The trouble is that stolen cars frequently are mutilated or +repainted or something is done to them which prevents an owner from +recognizing his own property.” + +“My father too is sending out word about the car,” suggested George. + +“That’s right, that’s the only thing to do. It’s one of the things you +never can tell about. You may find the car in a country garage, or in a +big city, or you may not find it at all.” + +“Don’t you think we’ll find it?” demanded George. + +“I cannot say. Have you offered a reward for its recovery?” + +“I don’t know,” admitted George. “My father has charge of that. If he +has offered a reward he hasn’t told me about it.” + +“Yes, I see,” said the chief slowly, looking sternly at George as he +spoke. “There may be reasons why he doesn’t want to tell you about it.” + +“What reasons?” demanded George. + +“If you don’t know I shan’t tell you.” + +“Do you think we took the car?” demanded George hotly. + +“I’m not saying anything about that part of it. I don’t know. I’m going +to take your directions and do my best to locate the car and the thief +too, if I can. It won’t make any difference to me where I hit or who it +is. When we find the party that stole the car shall we report?” + +George was too angry to continue the conversation and turning abruptly +from the room he joined his companions, and together they hastily +reëntered the car. + +“Never mind, George,” said Fred cheerfully; “don’t forget that we’re the +Go Ahead boys, and if the car is anywhere in Jersey we’ll try to find +it.” + +“But we haven’t any plan,” suggested Grant. “What do you intend to do, +George?” + +“Find the car. That’s as far as I have got now. I think I will stop at +every garage along the road and find out if any one has seen or heard +anything about our lost car.” + +“You’ll stand about as good a chance of finding it as you will of +finding a needle in a haystack,” laughed Grant. “However, if that’s what +you want, I’m perfectly willing to go along with you.” + +“That’s very kind and considerate on your part,” remarked George dryly, +as the car started swiftly along the country road into which they now +had turned. + +“I don’t see anything,” suggested Grant, who was the first to break in +upon the silence. “I don’t see anything to prevent the thief taking the +car into New York City or going to Philadelphia with it.” + +“There isn’t anything,” said George quietly. + +“And even after he has gone into New York or Pennsylvania he can come +back again and double on his tracks. I don’t see much hope of your ever +finding your car.” + +“Perhaps we shan’t find it,” admitted George, “but I belong to a crowd +that’s known as the Go Ahead boys and we aren’t beaten before we start, +anyway. If we have to give up it will be after we have done our best.” + +“That’s the way to talk!” broke in Fred. “We’re going ahead anyway and +we’re going to get where we started for, too.” + +“What will you do if you find your car?” inquired Grant. + +“Take it, of course,” said George. + +“But suppose somebody has bought it from the thief? He won’t give the +car back to you without your proving that it belongs to you.” + +“Then we’ll prove it,” said George quietly. + +“What will you do with your thief if you find him?” + +“I’ll wait until I find him,” said George. + +“You know,” broke in Fred, “I sometimes think it wasn’t any thief that +stole that car anyway.” + +“What do you mean, pygmy?” demanded both boys together as they looked +keenly at their diminutive friend. + +“You know just as well as I do,” said Fred sturdily. + +“I haven’t the remotest idea what you mean,” said Grant. “You’ll have to +try to make the point plain.” + +“You mean,” retorted Fred, “that you have to be helped to see a point +once in your life.” + +“Go ahead, Fred,” called George sharply. “What do you mean?” + +“Why you heard the tooting of that horn in the old Meeker House the same +as I did,” said Fred. + +“You think the car is in that old house?” demanded Grant. + +“I didn’t say so,” said Fred, “but I do say that the horn that belongs +to George’s car is in that old house, or else the horn that is there is +so like it that you couldn’t tell them apart.” + +George laughed quietly and said, “Next thing, Fred, you’ll be telling us +that the spooks stole the car.” + +“I’m not so sure that they didn’t,” said Fred. + +“If they did, then what we’ll find in the old Meeker House will be only +the ghost of the car, I’m afraid.” + +Conversation ceased and at every garage along the road George stopped +and made inquiries concerning the missing automobile. + +It was late in the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys turned homeward. Not +an inkling had they received of the stolen car. Several times they had +been informed that “A good many cars of late have been stolen,” but the +knowledge brought neither comfort nor light. + +“George,” suggested Fred, “suppose we go home by the road where the old +Meeker House is.” + +George smiled dryly as he replied, “All right. The way is as short if I +turn in there as in any other way. What are you looking for, the ghost +of the lost automobile?” + +Fred shook his head and did not reply, but when at last in the dusk they +drew near the place where the mysterious old house was standing, all +were convinced that they heard a faint sound of an automobile horn +coming from the place. + + + + +CHAPTER XII—A HASTY DEPARTURE + + +As the speed of the automobile was instantly decreased, Fred said +excitedly, “Stop, George! I say it is time for us to find out about this +thing and quit all our foolishness.” + +“What do you want to do?” demanded George. + +“I want to go into that old house and find out just what all this +mystery means.” + +“I don’t dare leave the car,” said George. + +“Then you stay here and look after it,” retorted Fred. “Grant and I will +make our own inspections, won’t we?” he added as he turned to his +companion. + +Grant did not speak, but as he quickly leaped out of the car his example +was at once followed by Fred and together the two boys started toward +the house, the dim outline of which could be seen before them. + +It was an ideal summer night. There was no moon, but as there were not +many clouds in the sky the two boys were able to see about them in every +direction. Crickets noisily were proclaiming their presence and the not +unmusical notes of the tree toads joined in a chorus that arose from +every side. + +In silence the boys approached the front door of the house and just as +they were about to enter there came again that mocking sound of an +automobile horn. + +In spite of his declaration of his courage Fred instantly gripped his +companion’s arm. Neither of the boys spoke as they halted for a moment +on the stone door-step. + +The startling noise of the horn was followed by sounds even more +unexpected. There were shouts and calls and cries issuing from within +the building. In the midst of this strange confusion there was also +heard the sound of laughter. + +The combination at first appeared to be almost too strong for the nerves +of the two Go Ahead boys. For an instant they turned and were looking +back at the road where George was waiting for them in his automobile. + +“Come on,” said Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his courageous +attitude. “Come on in, Grant. We must find out about this thing.” + +Before Grant could reply, suddenly around the corner of the house two +men were seen. Both were running swiftly and apparently were unmindful +of the presence of the boys. + +The two ghostly forms moved swiftly across the intervening field and +were apparently running directly toward the automobile in the road. + +The sight was more than either Grant or Fred was able to endure. Without +another word both leaped from the stone steps and in their swiftest +paces ran down the old pathway eager to gain the shelter of the waiting +automobile. + +“What’s the trouble?” demanded George as his companions joined him. +“What’s happened? Is there anything wrong?” + +“Don’t talk about it now,” said Fred. “Put on all the speed you have got +and we’ll tell you later what happened.” + +“I don’t believe there’s any such great need of haste,” said George +dryly. “Why not go back and find out what the cause of all the trouble +is?” + +“You may go if you want to,” retorted Fred, “but I’m not going to try it +again to-night.” + +“The Go Ahead boys apparently are in motion, but not in the right +direction,” suggested George demurely. + +“The right direction,” declared Fred, “is straight toward your house.” +As he spoke he glanced again at the Meeker place and as he did so +discovered the two ghostly forms that were still moving across the +field. + +“Both of them came out of the house,” he said in a loud whisper, “while +we were on the front door-step.” + +“Oh, I guess not,” said George tantalizingly. “It’s probably two men +that took a short cut. They were coming from the other road.” + +“Don’t you believe it!” maintained Fred stoutly. “They came out of that +old Meeker House. Didn’t they, Grant?” he added, turning to his friend +for confirmation. + +“Yes, they came out of the house,” said Grant brusquely. It was plain +the boy was not enjoying the recollection of the swift flight which he +and Fred had made to rejoin George. + +“Get your car under motion,” said Fred sharply. “We don’t want to stay +here any longer. We’ll tell you what happened when you get out on the +main road.” + +“Just as you say,” laughed George. + +A moment later the automobile was moving swiftly down the road. As it +came near the place where the two forms had been seen it was evident +that both were seeking to gain the road in advance of the automobile. + +“Maybe the spooks will try to get this car, too,” suggested George in a +low voice. + +At that moment there came a hail from the two men in advance and at the +sound George laughed loudly. + +“Do you know who that is?” he demanded, turning to his companions. + +“Who is it?” inquired Fred. + +“Why it’s John and Uncle Sim. They want to ride home. I guess I’ll +pretend not to know who they are and put on a little more speed.” + +As he spoke the car began to move more swiftly, a sight which at once +called forth louder shouts of protest from the two men who now were near +the fence along the roadside. + +“Let them in. Let them in,” said Grant. + +“All right, just as you say,” replied George, and as he spoke he brought +the automobile to a standstill. + +“What do you want?” he called to the two men who now were climbing the +fence. + +“We want you to take us home,” replied one of the two. + +“Is that you, John?” + +“It certainly is.” + +“Well, I couldn’t tell,” laughed George. “You look more like a string +than ever. Is that Uncle Sim with you?” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” spoke up the negro promptly. + +“Then you have been over to the old Meeker House, have you?” inquired +George as John and the colored man took their seats in the car. + +“Yes, we have been there,” abruptly replied John. + +“You didn’t seem to stay very long,” suggested George. “Were there any +special reasons why you didn’t want to tarry any longer?” + +“Dere sho’ was,” spoke up Uncle Sim, his teeth chattering as he spoke. +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh, dere sho’ was.” Lifting his face toward the sky the +old colored man muttered some incantations or prayers which in a measure +indicated the terror which possessed him. He was trembling in every limb +and when he tried to speak his lower jaw, over which he apparently had +lost control, resounded as it repeatedly struck the teeth on his upper +jaw. + +“Never mind, Uncle Sim,” said George, noticing the abject terror of the +old man. “We’ll soon be out of this. I don’t see why you went back there +when you’re so afraid of the old place.” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” stammered Uncle Sim. “I don’ went jes’ because dis +young man ‘sist on my goin’ wif him.” + +“Was he afraid to go alone?” + +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh.” + +“Did he think he would be less scared if there were two than he would be +if he was there alone?” laughed George. + +“That’s all right, George,” broke in John, “you don’t know what you’re +talking about. If you had heard what we did you would have made better +time than either of us when we were trying to head you off.” + +“What did you hear?” + +“Why, we heard the same old sound and a lot more. Just as true as I am +sitting here there was a voice that sounded all through the house and it +was calling, ‘John, John’.” + +“Did you answer it?” + +“Did I answer it? No, sir, I didn’t answer it. I was out of that house +before you could count ten.” + +“I didn’t know that it affected you that way,” laughed George, “to have +anybody speak to you.” + +“It doesn’t to have any live body, but that name was sounded all through +the house. It wasn’t loud either, it was just that whispered, ‘John, +John,’ that I don’t think I shall ever forget as long as I live.” + +“It seems to have affected Uncle Sim even worse than it did you,” +suggested George, as Uncle Sim clasped his hands and lifted them far +above his head and offered various incantations, as if he were doing his +utmost to ward off the evil spirits. + +“Well, all I have got to say,” explained George at last, “is that the Go +Ahead boys ought to change their name.” + +“Why?” demanded Fred sharply. + +“Because it seems to me that they can leave any place and make better +time than anybody I have ever seen. Even Uncle Sim forgets his +rheumatism and ‘mis’ry’ and keeps up with John when he races across the +field. To-morrow morning I will give John one dollar if he will make as +good time from the old Meeker House out to the road as he made to-night +when it was dark.” + +“Never you mind about that!” retorted John. “You didn’t see all that I +saw.” + +“But you haven’t told us what you saw.” + +“I told you something I heard. If you had heard your own name coming +down the chimney and through the windows and up from the cellar, out of +the attic, in the hallway, down the stairs and everywhere at the same +time you wouldn’t have stayed there any longer either.” + +“Perhaps I wouldn’t,” admitted George, “but my feeling is that you +didn’t hear half as much as you thought you did.” + +“No, sir,” responded John. “I have told you only half what I did hear.” + +“Well go ahead with your story.” + +“I’m not going to talk until we get home.” + + + + +CHAPTER XIII—WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + + +Conversation ceased during the remainder of the ride. The silence was +broken two or three times by George, who was driving the car as he +looked behind him at his companions and laughed aloud. No response was +given to his implied invitations to describe their feelings and as they +came nearer the end of their journey the chagrin under which all three +boys were suffering became still more marked. + +At last when they were once more in the house, Fred, unable longer to +remain silent, said abruptly, “I know there isn’t anything in the racket +at the old Meeker House, but in spite of it all I confess I’m scared +when I hear those strange sounds.” + +“What are you afraid of?” laughed George. + +“I don’t know what I’m afraid of,” said Fred, “but it scares me half out +of my wits.” + +“There’s something very strange about it,” broke in John. “I don’t +believe in spooks and such things, but no one has told us yet what the +sound of those flying wings means and they haven’t explained how a +fellow can get in there and hear his name called from seven different +parts of the house at the same time.” + +“What about that horn?” inquired Grant. “That’s the strangest part of it +all to me.” + +“Do you know,” said Fred, “I’m sure that horn that blows in the old +house is the one that used to be on George’s car.” + +“No, it can’t be,” said George. “There’s nothing but ghosts in the +Meeker House and so it could be only the ghost of that horn if there +really is anything there.” + +“Well, it isn’t the ghost of a sound,” declared John positively. “It’s a +real noise let me tell you and when you hear it as I did to-night, first +right close to your ear, and then, a second or two later, sounding as if +it came from the attic or the cellar you’re ready to believe almost +anything.” + +“Too ready, I’m afraid,” laughed George. + +“The next time we go there,” spoke up Fred, “I move that George Sanders +be selected to go into the house by the front door. If you remember, +fellows, he has always slipped out every time we went there and gone +around to the kitchen door.” + +“I believe he knows more about it than he has told us yet,” declared +John. + +“All I know,” said George solemnly, “is that some of the Go Ahead boys +have reversed their name. Whenever they pluck up courage enough to go to +the old house they always go there with fear and trembling. They walk as +if they were traveling to their own funeral, but when they leave they +make better time than I ever saw any of them make on the cinder path. I +think that we ought to change the name. They aren’t Go Ahead boys any +more, they are the Go Backward or the Get Away boys.” + +“I notice,” spoke up Grant, “that you didn’t stand very long in the way +of your own departure. At least I haven’t noticed yet that you have been +very far behind any of us when we ran from the place.” + +“Of course you haven’t,” said George. “I have to look after my guests, +don’t I? And if they are in such a hurry to leave, it wouldn’t be very +polite for me to stay.” + +“Don’t leave on our account,” said Fred dryly. + +“I guess there isn’t much danger that you wouldn’t any other time,” +laughed George. “Perhaps you don’t need any help after all. I was just +trying to be polite.” + +“It’s too great an effort,” said Fred. “Don’t try it again, but what are +you going to do about that stolen car?” + +“I’m going ahead,” replied George. + +“You certainly have a strange way of doing it then,” retorted Fred. “It +seems to me you were going all around it.” + +“Never you mind,” said George. “We’ll have that car back in our garage +in less than a week, you mark my words and see if we don’t.” + +“If we do,” declared Grant, “it won’t be any fault of ours. I guess your +father will be the one that will find it.” + +“He will help,” laughed George. + +“Help,” repeated Fred. “If we keep up the idiotic kind of a search we +made to-day I guess he will have to do the whole thing.” + +“Perhaps he will,” admitted George. “I’m not jealous. If we can only get +that car back, that’s about all I want.” + +“Well, I’m going to bed,” declared John. “This has been my busy day.” + +“And you haven’t told us yet what you were doing,” suggested Grant. + +“I guess I don’t have to tell you,” said John. “All three of you seem to +know more about Uncle Sim and me and what we have been doing to-day than +we do ourselves.” + +In a brief time the boys had withdrawn from the room and sought their +beds. + +The following morning when three of the Go Ahead boys went down stairs +they discovered George talking over the telephone. + +“Yes,” he was saying. “That’s all right. We’ll start right after +breakfast. Thank you very much. Good-by.” + +As he hung up the receiver George turned to his friends and said, “What +would you fellows say if I told you that I had some word about the car?” + +“We would all say that it was a good word, anyway,” said Fred promptly. + +“I was just talking to my father who told me that he had received a +telegram this morning from Newburgh.” + +“That’s in New York State,” spoke up Fred. + +“Correct,” answered George. “I’m glad that for once in your life you are +correctly informed.” + +“You want to be thankful,” retorted Fred, “that once in your life you +were able to appreciate the information I possess. I haven’t a stingy +thing about me, and I have been trying to be generous and give you some +of the knowledge I have acquired, after long and painful effort, but you +do not seem to appreciate my kind heart.” + +“My father says that the best thing for us to do will be to take the old +car and go straight to Newburgh. We may have to stay all night, so you +had better go prepared.” + +“We aren’t going before breakfast, are we?” demanded Grant. + +“No, my lean and hungry friend, we’ll wait until the wants of the inner +man are satisfied.” + +“Not that,” said Fred. “Not that. You mean you will wait long enough for +him to eat all he needs, but not all he wants. We aren’t going to start +from here before sunset, if you don’t mean that.” + +Conversation was not as brisk after the boys entered the dining room, +but when their breakfast had been eaten and they followed George as he +led the way to the garage they were all as talkative as before. + +“Going to take Uncle Sim with you?” inquired Grant. + +“No,” answered George. “I’ll have to leave him to look after the place!” + +“How long before we start?” inquired John. + +“About three minutes. Are you going with us to-day?” + +“You’re right I am,” declared John. “I stayed home yesterday to make my +own investigations in the old Meeker House.” + +“And you have finished them all?” inquired George with a laugh. + +“I can’t say that the investigations are all finished, but I am. Yes, +sir, I’m done. You don’t catch me alone in that old house again.” + +“But I thought Uncle Sim went with you,” suggested Fred. + +“Uncle Sim? Uncle Sim? I would rather have an infant in arms with me. +Uncle Sim was scared before we were inside the house and after that +everything he saw or heard all helped to scare him still more.” + +“He surely was scared last night,” laughed Fred as he recalled the +plight of the aged negro. + +“He was that,” said John solemnly, “but the worst of it is he scared me +too. You know they say that a man doesn’t run because he’s scared, he’s +scared because he runs. I don’t know much about that, but I guess it +worked both ways with me. I know I was scared before I ran and I know I +was scared a good deal worse after I began to run.” + +“Never mind, John,” said George, “We’ll have a fine ride to-day. We’re +going up through Ramapo Valley, through that place my father was telling +you about where young Montagnie was taken prisoner so many years ago by +the cowboys.” + +“I hope there won’t be anybody there to make prisoners of us,” declared +Grant solemnly. “Do you ever have any hold-ups there now?” + +“Not every day,” explained George. + +“What do you mean by that?” demanded Grant as he turned sharply upon +George. + +“Just what I say,” repeated George. + +“You don’t really think we’ll have any trouble, do you?” inquired Fred +anxiously. + +“I cannot say,” said George slowly. “There comes a gentleman now who +belongs to the fraternity. Perhaps he can tell you more about it than +I.” As he spoke the three boys glanced quickly toward the kitchen door. +Approaching it was a man who bore every indication of being a tramp. + +“Hold on, fellows,” whispered Fred, excitedly, “that’s the very same +tramp I met over in the old Meeker House.” + +“Sure about that?” asked George quickly. + +“Yes, it’s the same man.” + +“Come on, then,” said George, “We’ll go up and interview him.” + +The tramp now was seated on the stone step and hungrily was devouring +the breakfast which had been given him. + +“How long since you have been in the old Meeker House?” inquired Fred as +he approached the stranger. + +As the man looked up he recognized his companion of the former night and +a smile spread over his countenance. “I just came from there,” he said. + +“Were you in the house all night?” demanded Fred quickly. + +“Yes. Why?” + +“Did you hear any strange sounds?” + +“Not one.” + +“Didn’t you see anything that scared you?” + +“No, sir, nothing scared me.” + +“And you say you were there all night?” + +“That’s what I say. I crawled in there right after sunset and went to +sleep. I told you the other night that I sometimes sleep there in my +travels.” + +“I don’t understand why you didn’t hear anything,” said John, “if you +really were in the house. I was there and I heard some things.” + +“What?” The tramp paused in his occupation and stared blankly at John as +he spoke. + +“The same things that happen there every night. There were some +creatures flying all around the room—” + +“Ostriches,” said the tramp soberly. + +“And there must have been a good many people there too because they +called me by my name and at the same time from every part of the house.” + +“A part of Washington’s army,” said the tramp. + +“I don’t know who they were, but the thing that scared me most of all +was the tooting of an automobile horn. First it sounded right close to +my ear and then it seemed to come from all parts of the house at once.” + +“Nothing but the wind whistling around the eaves,” said the tramp. “I +don’t mind telling you though that there have been times when I have +heard sounds over there that made me think of the horn of an auto—” + +“Didn’t you hear it last night?” demanded John. + +“No. Where are you boys going?” the tramp abruptly added. + +“We’re going to look for a lost automobile,” said Fred. “You haven’t +seen one lately, have you?” + +“Did you lose a car?” inquired the tramp, ignoring the question. + +“We certainly have lost it,” said George, “or rather somebody has taken +it.” + +“And you know where it is now?” + +“We’ve got word where it may be and we’re going to find out.” + +Fred had been watching the tramp closely throughout the conversation and +when George abruptly turned back to the garage he instantly followed +him. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV—DISAPPOINTED + + +“I tell you,” exclaimed Fred in a low voice as soon as he had overtaken +his friend, “that tramp knows more about the lost automobile than he +told us.” + +George turned abruptly and for a moment stared blankly at his friend and +then laughed aloud. “I think you surely have got it,” he said. “A fellow +who can find spooks and ghosts of automobiles ought to be able to find +out a man who will steal them. That tramp to me doesn’t look as if he +had ever seen the inside of a car.” + +“It doesn’t make any difference,” said Fred persistently. “I tell you he +knows more about that car than you think.” + +“What makes you think so?” + +“The way he looked and acted when we were talking about the auto having +been stolen.” + +“Did he look guilty?” + +“I don’t know whether he did or not. He looked up right away and the +expression on his face was different from what it was before. He knows +something about it anyway, whether he took it or not.” + +“Keep it up, Fred,” laughed George. “Pretty soon you’ll be able to run +down every man who has seen our car, to say nothing of those who took +it.” + +“What do you advise me to do?” he continued. + +“I don’t know.” + +“That’s just it,” laughed George. “There are lots of people that can +tell you what ought to be done, but there are mighty few that can tell +you how to do it. Do you want me to have him arrested?” + +“I didn’t say that,” said Fred. “All I said to you was that he knows +more about it than you think he does. It seems to me it would be a good +thing to have some one watch him or to leave word with the constable.” + +“What will the constable do? He can’t invite him to his house.” + +“No, but he can tell him he mustn’t leave town, can’t he?” + +“I don’t think he could without a warrant or something. You can’t arrest +a man merely on suspicion.” + +“All the same,” said Fred, “I think you’ll find that he knows more about +that lost car than any one else.” + +“Well,” said George, “he doesn’t seem to be leaving the country very +rapidly and if we hear of him riding around in a brand new automobile +we’ll begin to ask some questions. Now, the thing for us to do is to +start on our trip and see if there’s anything in the report my father +has received about the lost car having been found in Newburgh.” + +A few minutes later the four boys were on their way toward the beautiful +little city on the Hudson. + +A ride of between forty and fifty miles was before them and they had not +gone far on their journey before they were more deeply interested in the +sights and scenes they were passing than in the pursuit of the car which +had been lost. + +While they were riding through the Ramapo Valley they tried to discover +the place where young Montagnie had had his troubles with the cowboys +who had stopped him. Other stories of heroic deeds by the colonists in +the struggle for independence were told by George and Grant and the time +passed so rapidly that when the car stopped at Suffern, where the boys +were to have their luncheon, with one accord they declared that the ride +had been the most enjoyable in all their experience. + +Early in the afternoon the ride was resumed and such excellent time was +made that by half past three o’clock they had arrived at the end of +their journey. + +Their car was placed in a garage and then the boys at once went to a +hotel where they were to remain that night, for it had been decided that +they would not return until the following morning, whether their lost +car was found or not. + +“Come on, fellows,” said George a half-hour afterward, “we’ll go down to +the garage and see if our car is there.” + +Down the hillside on the steep street that led to the bank of the Hudson +the boys made their way, frequently commenting on the experiences people +of Newburgh must have in winter-time, when ice and snow were to be found +on the streets. + +George explained that at that time ropes were stretched along the +sidewalk to protect the people who tried to pass up or down the slippery +way. + +“Here we are,” explained George a little later as they stopped in front +of a large garage. “Come on in. We’ll know what out fate is in a few +minutes.” + +Entering the garage George inquired for the manager and soon was in +conversation with a young man, who at once became deeply interested in +the boys and in the story they were telling him. At last he said, “The +car you are talking about is back here in the corner. Come with me and +I’ll show it to you.” + +Eagerly following the manager the boys soon stopped in front of the car +which he indicated. “You see,” explained the young man, “this car has +recently been painted. It has a Pennsylvania license, but that could be +very easily obtained for they could run over across the Pennsylvania +line and then come up into New York State. There are some other changes +that have been made, but I want you to look at it and tell me whether or +not you think it is the car you have lost.” + +“I don’t think it is,” said George promptly. + +“Better look at it more closely,” said the manager. “Sometimes these +cars are created the way they used to tell me the gypsies did when I was +a boy. You know they used to scare us by telling us that the gypsies +stole children and then they fixed them up so that their own mothers +wouldn’t recognize them.” + +“How did they do that?” inquired John. + +“Oh, I don’t know. I suppose they cut their hair, painted their faces +and dressed them up in some outlandish clothes. Well, that’s the way +these men that steal automobiles sometimes do. They fix them up so that +their owners wouldn’t recognize the cars as theirs.” + +A further and careful investigation of the car was made but it was not +long before George said positively, “That isn’t our car.” + +“You’re sure, are you?” again inquired the manager. + +“Yes, sir. I’m sure. The engine isn’t like ours. There are more spokes +in the wheels and the hood is different. No, I’m sure it’s not our car.” + +George’s disappointment was manifest in the tones of his voice and his +friends naturally shared in his feelings. + +“Was that car stolen?” inquired Fred. + +“We suspect that it was,” replied the manager. “We have had half a dozen +inquiries recently about stolen cars and though I cannot tell you more +we have reason to believe that this is one of them. My advice to you is +to stop on your way back home at a garage managed by Egge and Hatch.” + +“What are their names?” demanded Grant blankly. + +“Egge and Hatch,” repeated the manager. “I know another automobile +concern which is run by Waite and Barrett.” + +“Wait and Bear-it,” laughed Fred. “That’s a good name. That would do for +a lot of other concerns besides garages, wouldn’t it?” + +“It would be a better name for the men who leave their automobiles there +to be repaired,” suggested Grant. + +The boys were now convinced that the car they had inspected was not the +one they had lost. There was nothing more to be done unless they visited +every garage in the city. + +“And I don’t think there will be much use even in that, just now,” +suggested the manager. + +“Come on then, fellows, we’ll go back to the hotel,” said George. + +“But I don’t want to go back to the hotel,” said Grant. “I want to go +somewhere else.” + +“Do you know where it is?” demanded John. “I’ve known you when you +started for some place that you didn’t know, nor did any one else.” + +“I know exactly where I want to go,” said Grant pompously. “If you +fellows want to come with me it will do you good, but if you don’t you +can do what you please. I have never been in Newburgh before and while I +am here I am going to take advantage of the opportunity.” + +“All right, we’ll go with you,” said Fred glibly. “If you can find +anything that is going to improve you we want to come along and see the +show.” + + + + +CHAPTER XV—A FAMOUS SPOT + + +Unknown to his friends Grant had made some inquiries concerning a spot +in Newburgh which he long had been desirous of seeing. Without +explaining to his companions what he had in mind he quickly led the way +up another hill until they arrived at a large enclosed yard. In the +midst of it stood a low old stone house. In front of the house, on the +extensive lawn, were several piles of cannon balls, and cannon were +looking out over the peaceful waters of the Hudson. The flag of the +United States was floating from the high flagpole and added much to the +beauty of the scene. + +“What’s all this?” demanded John. + +“Every young American is supposed to know that this is Washington’s +headquarters. Didn’t you ever hear of it?” + +“He had so many,” laughed John, “I can’t keep track of them. It is +something like the beds he slept in that we were talking about the other +day.” + +“Well, this is where he had his headquarters,” said Grant, “when his +army was in this part of the country. This is a beautiful spot, isn’t +it?” + +“It’s wonderful!” said Fred in a low voice. The impulsive lad was deeply +impressed by the associations connected with the place where they then +were standing as well as by the marvelous scene of the Hudson winding +its way in and out through the midst of the towering hills. + +“Over yonder,” said Grant, pointing across the river as he spoke, “is +Beacon and right across the river is Fishkill.” + +“Good name,” said John in a low voice. + +“Of course it is,” said Grant. “We’re in the Empire State. That’s the +State I live in and there isn’t another one like it in the Union.” + +“That’s right,” said George, who felt that he was now called upon to +defend his own State. “New York has a choice collection. I don’t say +that there aren’t some good people here, but you don’t have to go very +far to come to Ossining. Do you know who lives there?” + +“Yes, some undesirable citizens,” said Grant. + +“Yes, and you go on a little farther up the river and you come to +Albany. If you want to know what New York State is like you want to find +out how much the capitol building there cost.” + +“Never mind about those things,” broke in John. “What I want to know is +about this part of the country where we are now. I have read a good many +stories about the American army when it was in camp at Peekskill.” + +“Of course you have,” said Grant; “there were a lot of things doing +there. I have a book at home that my great-grandfather used to read when +he was a boy. It tells about a young fellow only seventeen years of age +who was one of Washington’s couriers. He used to ride between Morristown +and Lake Champlain. At least he did in the year when Burgoyne was trying +to bring his Hessians and redcoats from Montreal to New York.” + +“He didn’t bring them, though,” spoke up Fred quickly. + +“Only as far as Saratoga,” laughed Grant. “If it hadn’t been for certain +obstacles I guess he would have brought them all the way down the +river.” + +“I guess he would too,” laughed Fred scornfully, “but his ‘obstacles,’ +as you call them, were General Gates, Philip Schuyler, Benedict Arnold +and a few other continental soldiers that did not seem to be +enthusiastic over allowing Johnnie Burgoyne to come any farther.” + +“I was reading the other day,” said Grant, “that the Baroness de +Reidesel was with her husband when the Hessians were captured. She had +her children with her and to show them due honor Mrs. General Schuyler +took the Baroness and her children into her own home. The Hessian lady +did not know that Mrs. Schuyler understood German and she rudely carried +on some conversation with her children in that language when Mrs. +Schuyler was present. One time one of the children piped up and asked +his mother, ‘Isn’t this the place that we are to have when our father is +made a duke after he has whipped the Yankees?’ As the Baroness glanced +up she was aware that Mrs. Schuyler had understood what the boy was +saying. She tried to apologize but Mrs. Schuyler was a perfect lady and +at once smoothed things out. They say she was a brave woman. There’s one +story about her though that I never believed.” + +“What was that?” asked John. + +“Why they say that thirteen was a magical number for the Americans. The +British reported that Martha Washington had a big cat with thirteen +stripes around its tail and that she wouldn’t have any other kind. There +were just thirteen of the colonies, you know, and that made it worse. +And it was reported that General Phil. Schuyler had just thirteen hairs +left in his bald pate and that Mrs. Catherine Schuyler very carefully +oiled and brushed them every night for fear that the magic number might +be changed.” + +“She had better brush his hair than pull it,” suggested George. + +“I can remember the time,” said John, “when my mother used to brush and +pull my hair at the same time.” + +“So can I,” said every one of the boys together. + +“Well, the main thing is,” said Fred philosophically, “that George +Washington had some headquarters and that it’s a good thing for the +United States of America that he did. I wish we had some men now as +great as he was.” + +“We have,” said John quickly. + +“We have?” retorted Fred scornfully. “Where are they?” + +“Eight here,” said John solemnly. “Here are four of them. They haven’t +all arrived yet, but they are on their way.” + +“Fine lot too,” broke in Grant. “Scared so that they run like deer when +they hear sounds in the old Meeker House and there isn’t one of them +that has shown that he has the nerve to stay there long enough to find +out just what those strange sounds mean.” + +“We’re not afraid of anything we can see, but it is the things that you +can’t see that scare us,” explained Fred. + +“Never mind the Meeker House,” said Grant, “I want to take in what this +place means. The old cannon balls, the old guns, and the relics we saw +inside the house,” for the boys had entered the old building and +inspected the various relics of revolutionary times that were on +exhibition, “to say nothing about the old Hudson River itself, and the +hills, ought to satisfy every one of us for a while, anyway.” + +“It’s a great sight,” said George. “I’m glad you brought us up here. I +knew Washington’s headquarters were here, but it had slipped my mind +when we first came. I’m getting hungry. Come on back to the hotel and +we’ll have our dinner.” + +The following morning was unusually warm. The boys were early awake, but +even then the heat was oppressive. + +“Whew,” said Fred when they left the dining room, “if it’s as hot as +this before we start what will it be afterward?” + +“That’s just like some people,” declared John. “They aren’t satisfied +with the good or the bad they have, but they are always looking ahead +for more. There’s one thing we don’t have to do.” + +“What’s that?” inquired Fred. + +“We don’t have to swelter before the sun beats down upon us. It will be +plenty of time to see what we have to do if we find it so warm on the +road that we don’t want to go on.” + +Soon after breakfast the boys started on their homeward ride. + +True to its promise the heat steadily increased and a glare that was +exceedingly trying to the eyes beat down upon the roadway. + +George increased the speed at which he was driving, but the air which +fanned their faces was almost like that which comes from a heated oven. + +Already the cattle in the nearby fields had sought the shade of the +trees in the pastures. The hens in the farmyards also were lying in the +shade, their wings partly extended as if they were trying to cool their +heated bodies. + +“Hens in hot weather,” said George, “always make me think they are +laughing at us.” + +“What do you mean?” demanded John. “Who ever heard a hen laugh.” + +“I didn’t say I had heard them laugh, but they have their mouths open.” + +“Hens don’t have mouths, my friend.” + +“They don’t?” demanded George. “Then how do they eat?” + +“They have throats and bills and beaks, but they don’t have mouths.” + +“What is a mouth anyway?” said George scornfully. “Isn’t it the opening +in the head through which one takes food into his stomach?” + +“I suppose it is.” + +“Well, doesn’t a hen swallow corn?” + +“She does.” + +“Then she has a mouth, hasn’t she?” + +“Wait a minute and I’ll tell you. It’s this way, you see—” + +At that moment there was a loud report directly beneath the car which at +that time was passing under a stone bridge. + +George instantly stopped the car, but another driver directly in front +of him was so startled by the unexpected sound that he lost control of +his automobile and swung into the ditch, nearly overturning his car as +he did so. Instantly rising from his seat he turned and glared at the Go +Ahead boys as if he was tempted to visit some merited punishment upon +them. + +The boys, however, were so busy with their own troubles that they +ignored the anger of the driver before them. Instantly leaping from +their seats they began their investigations. + +Only a brief time, however, was required to disclose the cause of the +trouble. “A blowout,” said George disgustedly. “It’s torn that tube all +into shreds.” + +“You blew it up too tight,” suggested Grant. + +“Thank you,” said George as he took off his coat, “you’re so well +informed about these matters that I think I’ll let you help me put a new +tire on.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVI—ANOTHER LOSS + + +The angry stranger, who by this time had recovered from his surprise, +speedily departed. Indeed, the fact that the boys had had only a slight +conversation with him perhaps increased his anger and as soon as his car +had been pulled from the ditch, a task in which all joined to help, he +soon afterward disappeared from sight. + +The intense heat soon caused the faces of the boys to be shining with +perspiration. The dust from the road also did its part until in the +streaked countenances of the Go Ahead boys even their own mothers would +have had difficulty in recognizing members of their families. + +The difficult task and the heat of the day also united in increasing the +irritation of the boys. There were several remarks made which happily +were soon forgotten or ignored. + +In the midst of the task the jack broke and the wheel dropped upon the +ground. + +“There you have it!” exclaimed George irritably. “A broken jack! No +tube! Seventeen miles from nowhere and not a crumb to eat!” + +“Never mind, George,” said John good-naturedly. “Somebody will be coming +along pretty soon and will lend us a hand.” + +“He will have to lend us a jack, I guess if we ever get anywhere. I +don’t know what is the matter with this thing,” he added as again he +examined the broken implement. + +“There’s nothing for us to do except wait,” suggested Grant. “Come up +here in the shade, fellows. We’ll have to join that man who is sitting +there.” + +As Grant spoke he pointed toward a bank or knoll near the roadside where +a man was seen reclining on the ground beneath the shade of some huge +maple trees. + +“That’s a good suggestion,” declared Fred, and in a brief time the boys +were seated on the ground, enjoying the relief from the heat of the +burning sun. + +Their only hope now rested upon some friendly driver stopping to aid +them. + +To the amazement of Fred, as well as of his companions, the man whom +they discovered enjoying the shade was none other than the tramp who had +first been seen in the old Meeker House. + +He stared a moment at the unexpected sight and then as a grin spread +over the countenance of the man he was convinced that his first +impression had been correct. The tramp of the Meeker House was there +before him. How he had come there, so far from the place where he had +been first seen, was a mystery. + +“You seem to have had bad luck, my friends,” laughed the tramp, as he +sat erect when the boys approached. + +“Yes, the day is so hot,” growled George, “that the tube burst. We had a +blowout. We had it blown up too much anyway when we left Newburgh.” + +“Have you been to Newburgh!” inquired the tramp. + +“Yes,” replied George shortly. + +“Did you find your car?” + +“No.” + +“That’s too bad.” If the tramp, however, had any real sympathy for the +boys in their loss his countenance failed to reflect the feeling, for he +was still grinning at his young companions. “Not much use,” he +continued. “There must be seventy-five or a hundred thousand autos in +Jersey alone, and when you stop to think of all that are in New York and +Pennsylvania you will see you stand mighty little chance of ever finding +your own car.” + +“Thank you,” said George. “You needn’t be worried though, for we are +going to get it.” + +“What are you doing up here?” demanded Fred. + +“Why I got to thinking of it last night,” explained the tramp, “after +you boys left home and the more I thought about it the more I thought I +would like to come up into this part of the world too. You haven’t any +objection to my coming?” he added quizzically. + +“Oh, no, not the slightest,” said Fred glibly. “I was just wondering how +a man as weary as you are could have made such good time. You must have +come forty miles or more. How did you do it?” + +“Part of the way,” replied the tramp, “I came in an empty box-car. I got +a lift with an old man who was taking a load of produce to market and +another man gave me a ride in his automobile. I don’t think I have +walked all together more than half a mile. There’s always somebody that +is good to the halt, the blind, the lame,—” + +“And the lazy,” joined in Fred. + +“I guess that’s right,” said the tramp. “But I’m not to blame for it. I +don’t like to work. It’s the way I was born, and if I don’t like it I +don’t see why I should do it, do you?” + +“Not as long as some one else is willing to work and get you something +to eat and wear,” suggested George tartly. + +“I guess you’re right again,” drawled the tramp. “If the time ever comes +when there isn’t anybody to do that for me, then I guess I’ll have to go +to work. But I’m putting it off as long as possible. Hello,” he added +quickly, “there comes a car,” pointing as he spoke toward an automobile +which was swiftly approaching. + +George ran speedily down to the road and hailed the approaching car. + +The automobile was stopped as the signal was discovered, and for the +first time George was conscious of his dust-discolored face, for seated +in the back seat was a young girl with her mother. She laughed as she +saw George’s countenance and even her mother’s face could not conceal +the quizzical expression that appeared when George spoke. + +“We had a blowout here,” explained George, “and when we tried to put on +a new tube our jack broke. Can you help us out?” + +“Certainly,” said the woman. “James, you help these young gentlemen,” +she added as she turned to her chauffeur. + +The other boys now turned and offered their assistance to George, +although Grant and John plainly were more interested in the occupants of +the friendly car than they were in the task immediately confronting +them. + +“There’s no use, boys,” said the chauffeur at last. “That blowout must +have been a big one.” + +“It was,” spoke up Fred quickly. + +“It has bent your rim. Yon never can get a new tire on that until it has +been fixed.” + +“What shall we do?” inquired George blankly. + +“The best thing I can suggest is for you to get in our car and we will +take you to a good garage about four miles up the road. They will have +to come back here in another car so you won’t have to walk.” + +“That’s a good suggestion,” said George quickly as he prepared to accept +the invitation. + +His zeal, however was quickly shared by two of his friends, who insisted +that their presence also was required. “You see,” Fred explained, “if +they cannot help us at that garage, why some of us will have to go on to +another. We cannot leave our car here all day in the sun.” + +John was the only one of the party left behind and as it was deemed +necessary for some one to remain with the car he volunteered for that +service. + +The task confronting him was not difficult, however, and John soon was +reclining once more in a shaded spot near the tramp who was still seated +in the same place he had first been seen. + +In spite of John’s efforts to draw the man into conversation the tramp +was strangely silent most of the time. At last, however, his mood +changed and turning to John he said, “Your friends ought to be back here +by this time.” + +“They may have had trouble in getting a car right away to bring them +back.” + +“Well, they will be here pretty soon,” said the tramp. “I think I’ll go +up to that orchard up yonder,” he added as he pointed to a hillside +covered with apple trees about one hundred yards distant. + +“Are there any apples there ripe?” inquired John quickly. + +“Plenty of them. Plenty of them. The owner doesn’t seem to care anything +about them. He hasn’t sprayed his trees or pruned them for years, but +there are some juicy red apples in the corner of the orchard and they +are mighty good. I know for I have tried them already.” + +“Wait a minute and I’ll go up with you,” said John. + +Together they made their way up the side of the hill and John speedily +discovered that the statement of his companion was correct. The ground +beneath the trees was carpeted with a layer of red apples tempting in +their size and appearance. + +“I think I’ll take back a few for the other fellows,” said John, as he +filled his cap. “I would like to pay for them, but I don’t see anybody +around here.” + +“Nobody pays for these apples,” explained the tramp. “The owner of the +farm spent a lot of money on his place and then got tired of it and went +back to the city. He left everything here to go to pieces.” + +“That’s a pity,” said John as he climbed over the fence and started back +toward the place where they had left the automobile. + +“Where is our car?” demanded John in consternation as he drew near the +place from which they had started. + +In amazement he looked up and down the road, but not a trace of the +automobile was to be seen. + +“What do you suppose has happened to that car?” he demanded, again +turning to his companion. + +“I don’t know unless it has evaporated,” said the tramp. “It’s a pretty +hot day.” + +“Evaporated nothing!” explained John angrily. “The car is gone. I don’t +know what George and the fellows will say. We have lost two cars now +instead of one. I don’t understand how it could have been taken away +without our knowing it.” + +“That isn’t nearly so important,” suggested the tramp, “as the fact that +it is gone. There isn’t any car here.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVII—LEFT BEHIND + + +“I think the men from the garage may have come and taken the car away,” +suggested the tramp. + +“That may be the way it is,” said John, relieved by the suggestion. A +moment later, however, the thought occurred to him that in the event of +the return of the boys with a man from the garage, in all probability +some of them would have remained and not all have gone back with him. In +that case his companions must be near, but as he looked up and down the +road he did not discover any trace of his friends. + +“They will be back here by and by,” said the tramp encouragingly. “It +won’t take very long to straighten that rim and put on a new shoe. The +best thing for you to do is to stay right here until they come.” + +“I don’t see much else to do,” said John, still far from being persuaded +that an explanation of the missing car was to be found in the suggestion +made by his strange companion. “I guess I’ll just have to wait.” + +“If you do, then you might as well wait comfortably.” As he spoke the +tramp again sought the shaded place on the bank above the road, and +seated on the ground, with his back against a tree, he at once began to +feast upon the apples he had brought from the orchard. + +Following his example John speedily climbed the little knoll and quickly +seated himself in a similar manner against a nearby tree. + +“We can see up and down the road here,” said the tramp, “and if your +friends come you’ll know it long before they are here.” + +For some reason John lost his desire to talk to the strange man. He was +continually looking up the road in the direction in which the boys had +disappeared when they had departed in the friendly car. A half-hour +passed and only two automobiles were seen on the dusty road. The heat +seemed to increase as the noon-hour approached. There was no habitation +within sight at which a luncheon might be obtained and John now began to +feel hungry as well as anxious. + +He was by no means satisfied that George’s car had been taken to the +garage by the boys. Indeed, his fear that the second car had been stolen +was steadily increasing and he was blaming himself, as not unnaturally +he believed George would blame him if the car had indeed been taken. + +When an hour had passed a car was seen approaching which the tramp +quickly declared belonged to a garage in a neighboring village. “I know +that car,” he said confidently, “for I have worked in that shop.” + +“Do you know anything about automobiles?” demanded John quickly. + +“Not very much, but then one doesn’t have to know very much to work in a +place like that. I used to look wise and hammer a lot and then charge +still more. I have made up my mind that if ever I have to work again I’m +going to find a job in an automobile shop. The hardest thing you have to +do is to make out your bills.” + +“That may be so,” said John, smiling as he spoke, “though I hope it +won’t prove to be the case this time. There are the boys in that car,” +he added quickly, as he recognized his three friends approaching. The +car was driven by a man in his shirt sleeves and the speed at which he +was moving proclaimed the fact that either he was an expert driver or +one of the most reckless of men. + +A few minutes later the automobile was stopped in front of John, who now +ran down into the road to greet the returning boys. + +“Where’s the car, Jack?” inquired Grant quickly. + +“I don’t know,” said John. + +“You don’t know! Weren’t you here in charge of it?” + +“I have been here all the time except about five minutes when I went up +into the orchard yonder and got some apples. When I came back the car +was gone. This man,” he added, pointing to the tramp as he spoke, “said +he thought you had come from the garage and taken the car back with +you.” + +“Whew!” whistled Fred. “This is getting exciting. First you lose one car +and then you lose another. I think we’ll have to go back to the old +Meeker House and look for its ghost.” + +“I don’t see anything funny in this,” said Grant in disgust. “Here we +are at least four miles from the railroad. We know how hot and dusty the +road is and we don’t want—” + +“You fellows are a sympathetic crowd,” broke in George. “You’re thinking +about your own comfort all the while and not a word about my losses. +It’s bad enough to have one car stolen to say nothing of two.” + +“Do you think this second car has been stolen?” demanded Fred abruptly, +turning upon his friend as he spoke. + +“Well, it’s gone, isn’t it?” said George. + +“Yes, it’s gone,” admitted Fred, “but that doesn’t mean it has been +stolen.” + +“Well, tell me what has become of it then? Where is it? Show me the +car.” + +“I can’t do it,” said Fred. “I wish I could. But I don’t believe that +car has been stolen.” + +“What do you think?” demanded George, turning to the mechanic as he +spoke. + +“I haven’t heard of a car being stolen up here in a long time, and I +don’t see how anybody could have taken that car away without being seen +if he was trying to steal it.” + +“That’s all true enough,” said George angrily. “I know all those things, +but tell me if you can where my car is. I don’t see how anybody could +have taken it away from here with the shoe being in the condition that +it was. I never saw such a blowout in my life.” + +“Perhaps we can track it,” suggested Grant. + +“That’s right. That’s just what we can do,” said George eagerly. “Look +here,” he added, as he pointed to a place near the road where the +imprint of the mutilated tire plainly could be seen. + +It was possible to follow this track a few yards, but there the trail +ceased, the car apparently had been brought up again on the hard roadbed +and no trace was left of its passage. + +“What’s become of your tramp?” demanded George, suddenly turning upon +John. + +All four boys quickly looked about them, but the tramp had disappeared +from sight. + +“That’s one of the strangest things I ever heard of,” said Fred. “That +tramp knew how you lost the other car and I guess he could tell some +things about this one too, if he wanted to.” + +“He was with me all the time,” spoke up John quickly. “I never lost +sight of him a minute.” + +“It’s a pity you didn’t do as well with the car,” said Grant. + +“Well, the tramp and I went up into the orchard together. We were +together all the while we were there and we came back together. When we +got back here we saw that the car was gone. The tramp was here. Now will +you please tell me how a tramp could steal an automobile and still be +with me all the while?” + +“What do you think is the best thing for us to do?” said George, turning +to the mechanic. + +“Your car isn’t here,” said the man, “and you could track it a little +way, far enough to see that it was taken in that direction,” he +explained as he pointed ahead of him. “Now that’s right on the way back +to the garage and my advice is for all four of you to get into the car +and we’ll see what we can find on the way back. If you don’t find +anything we can telephone when you get into the village, or you can +leave on the train. There’s one out in about an hour and a half.” + +The suggestion finally was adopted and all four boys maintained a +careful outlook for the missing car throughout their ride to the garage. +However no trace of the missing automobile was discovered. The car had +disappeared and the boys were stranded in a little village in northern +New Jersey. + +Leaving his companions, George telephoned his father. The conversation +lasted several minutes and when at last George rejoined his friends he +said glumly, “My father says the best thing for us to do is to come home +by train. He told us to look out and not lose the train.” + +“I guess,” laughed Grant, “it would be a little more expensive for him +if we should lose the train than to have us lose the cars.” + +“If we keep this up much longer,” said Fred, “we’ll have a good big bill +to pay. I never knew anybody in my life that ever had a car stolen and +here we lose two inside of a week.” + +“You must remember,” said John soberly, “that we are the Go Ahead boys. +It doesn’t make any difference what we start in we have got to leave the +rest of them behind us. If it’s looking for smugglers or digging for a +pirate’s chest or having our automobiles stolen, it doesn’t make a +particle of difference which, we are bound to go ahead, get ahead and +keep ahead.” + +“I’m glad to hear you talk that way,” said George grimly. “I have been +looking in my pockets to see if I have money enough to get a ticket +home. Have any of you got money?” + +“I’ll take up a collection,” suggested John, seizing his cap as he +spoke. The result of his efforts, however, when the sum was counted, was +not quite sufficient to purchase the tickets required by the four boys +on their return trip. + +“I don’t see anything for us to do,” said Fred glibly, “except to leave +String here. He’s the one who is responsible for the loss of the car +to-day and if anybody has to stay behind I think he ought to be the +one.” + +“I agree with you,” said John meekly. “I’m willing to stay, for I +confess I would like to find out what has become of that lost car.” + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII—THE ARRIVAL + + +In spite of the protests of the other boys against John being left +behind, it was finally decided that he should carry out his own plan. He +had declared his purpose to find out if possible what had become of the +second car. + +George had insisted that all four of the Go Ahead boys either should +remain together or depart in a body; but after a brief conversation in +which John explained that he really was desirous of making some further +investigations of his own and also that it was equally important for +George to get into touch with his father, as he could not do over the +telephone, it was agreed that John should remain until the following +day. A very attractive hotel not far from the station was most inviting. +There John explained he would remain until the following day when the +boys either would come for him or send him money. + +Only a few moments elapsed before the noisy train proclaimed its coming. +The scream of the locomotive was echoed and re-echoed in the nearby +valley and long before its arrival at the station the people of the +little village were aware that the one o’clock train was “on time.” + +Again George protested strongly against John being left behind, although +he did not explain how he was to ride on the train without a ticket nor +how he was to obtain a ticket without any money. However, in a few +minutes the three departing boys, standing on the rear platform of the +last car, were waving their hats as they bade good-by to the fourth +member of the Go Ahead boys who was watching them from the platform of +the station. + +Slowly John turned into the walk that led him from the little station to +the main street of the village. As he came out upon the sidewalk he was +startled when he heard himself addressed by his own name. Surprised, he +glanced in the direction from which the unexpected hail had come and he +was amazed to behold the tramp, who had been his companion in the +morning, now seated in the missing automobile. Evidently he had been +driving the car but the expression on his face as John ran toward him +did not indicate his purpose to explain the sight which had so startled +him. + +“Where did you get that car?” demanded John sharply as he stared at the +driver. + +“I found it at the other garage,” explained the tramp. + +“How did it get there?” + +“Why, there was another blowout right near where you had yours this +morning. I guess it must be the same fellow that you scared or drove +into a ditch; at least that’s what he said. He couldn’t fix his car +because the rim was torn into pieces and he got a lift back to this +garage and sent some men out to get his car.” + +“And they got ours?” demanded John delightedly. + +“That’s what it seems,” replied the tramp quietly. “I suspected there +might be some trouble of the kind so I went around there and sure enough +I found this car just as I half expected to. Your friends have cleared +out and left you, have they?” + +“They have gone back home,” explained John. + +“Well, that’s all right. We’ll beat them there yet. You get in and I’ll +see what time I can make.” + +“You’re sure you know how to drive?” inquired John. “Because if you +don’t know how I can do something at it myself.” + +“My ‘deah boy,’” lisped the tramp, “don’t distress your little heart +about my being able to drive the car. You get in here and if you have +any fault to find I’ll resign and let you take the wheel.” + +“We ought to have something to eat,” said John, “but I haven’t a cent of +money.” + +“So I understand. It took all the money there was in the crowd to buy +tickets for three boys.” + +“How did you know?” + +“Never mind that. I knew you didn’t have any money and I knew too that I +would have to furnish what we needed on our trip. I managed to get +together twenty-three cents. I think that’s just the amount one ought to +have when he is leaving in a hurry, don’t you?” laughed the tramp. + +“That’s all right.” + +“Well, I took my twenty-three cents and went over to the grocery store +and I bought some cheese and a box of crackers. You get in and feed up +on the way back. If you’re like me you’ll think you’ve had a dinner fit +for a king.” + +As he spoke the tramp held up to view the purchases he had made and John +instantly responded to his appeal and took his seat in front beside the +driver. The hungry boy declared that he never had tasted food he enjoyed +more. Meanwhile the car was driven steadily forward on its way. And if +John had had any misgivings as to the ability of his companion as a +driver they were soon dispelled. It was plain that the man was an expert +at his task. + +“Where did you learn to drive a car?” + +“I didn’t have to learn,” said the tramp. “I always knew. I have driven +cars ever since they were first made. If I need any money I get a job as +a chauffeur and then after I have got some money I don’t need any job +and quit.” + +John laughed as he said, “You’re the strangest man I ever saw.” + +“That’s what others have told me.” + +“I don’t see why a man with the brains you have doesn’t do something +worth while. What do you want to be beating around the country for +without any home and staying nights in such places as the old Meeker +House?” + +“I have often wondered myself,” replied the tramp quietly. “I don’t know +that there’s any answer to your question. Speaking of the old Meeker +House, have you heard anything more about the strange noises over +there?” + +“Not since I saw you,” replied John. + +“Well, my advice to you is to take your friends over there to-night and +I suspect you’ll have an experience that will interest you.” + +“What is it?” demanded John, interested at once. + +“I’m not sure just what it will be so I cannot explain, but if you want +to see your friends stirred up you take them over there after you have +had your dinner to-night. By the way, do you think there will be any +reward for finding this car?” + +“Knowing Mr. Sanders as I do, I’m quite sure there will be.” + +“I have brought the bill in my pocket for the repairs at the garage.” + +“How much did they charge?” + +“Fifty-three cents and the man apologized for the size of his bill. +That’s one of the things they haven’t learned up here in the country +yet.” + +“I have never found any one who didn’t know how to charge,” laughed +John. + +“Well, this man didn’t seem to know much about it, so I paid his bill +and had just twenty-three cents left, as I told you. I think if Mr. +Sanders wants to pay that bill I shall let him.” + +“I certainly know he will,” said John. “I know he will insist upon it +anyway for he’s that kind of a man.” + +The automobile was making most excellent time and long before it was +possible for his companions to arrive John had turned into the driveway +that led to George’s home. + +The tramp had insisted upon leaving the car before it had turned in, +explaining that he would return when Mr. Sanders came and if the latter +“sufficiently urged” him to accept a reward he would do so willingly. + +John laughed as the strange man departed and then drove up to the house. + +Uncle Sim was the first to greet him and after staring blankly at John +for a moment he said, “Whar de other boys?” + +“They are coming later,” said John. “They are coming on the train.” + +“Wha’ fo’?” + +“Oh, they will have to tell you,” said John. “Just as soon as I can wash +up I want to go over to the station and bring them home. They’ll come in +probably on the next train.” + +True to his word a half-hour later John was waiting in the automobile +near the station. He had pictured to himself the excitement of his +friends when they should arrive and discover him in the lost automobile, +awaiting their coming. + +John’s meditations were interrupted by the prolonged blast by which the +coming of the train was made known. So pleased was he over the prospect +that he laughed aloud. The arrival of the train, however, soon caused +him to watch the alighting passengers and as soon as he discovered his +friends among the number, in his loudest tones he shouted, “George, tell +all the Go Ahead boys to come over here!” + +Startled by the unexpected hail the three boys turned and for a moment +stared blankly at John. All the latter’s hopes were more than fulfilled. +Surprise and incredulity were stamped upon the faces of the three Go +Ahead boys. + +“Where did you get that car?” demanded George, hastily approaching. + +“Why, it is your car, isn’t it?” said John meekly. + +“Sure it is, but where did you get it?” + +“Why, after you fellows left me over there where you took the train I +thought you would like to have me look up your car, so that’s what I +have done, but you don’t seem to be very thankful. This is an ungrateful +world, and a naughty deed arouses more interest than a good one. At +least I think that’s what Shakespeare says.” + +“Shakespeare?” broke in Fred sharply. “You never got as far as the title +page.” + +“That may all be,” retorted John. “All I mean to say now is that this +car is for the exclusive use of those who are accustomed to move in +polite society.” As he spoke John turned on the power and despite the +efforts of his friends to overtake him soon was moving rapidly over the +road. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX—AN INVITATION + + +Appearing to ignore his friends John drove rapidly around the circle +which had been laid out between the station and the main street. Proudly +returning to the place on the platform where his friends were awaiting +his coming, he called out, “How’s this car? How’s the driver? Pretty +slick, eh?” + +“What we don’t know,” said George quickly, “is where the driver came +from and how he got the car.” + +“You’ll have to trust your Uncle John for some things,” replied the +driver solemnly. “There are some things you can’t explain and some +things it’s hard for certain people to understand. You see that your +car’s here, don’t you?” + +“Yes,” replied George. + +“It’s all right, isn’t it?” + +“As far as I can see.” + +“Cylinders all sound? Tires all complete? Boiler intact? Carbureter +still working? Limousine all ready to be carved?” + +“That’s right,” said George, laughing as he spoke. “As far as I can see +everything is all straight except the fact that you didn’t tell us how +you got the car and beat us back here.” + +“Get in, fellows, and I’ll tell you about it on the way back,” said +John. “I’ll resign my position as chauffeur too,” he added, as he +quickly moved to another seat. + +“I don’t mind; stay where you are,” said George cordially. + +“No, I know you don’t ‘mind,’ but this is a hot day. I would rather sit +behind and tell you how to do it.” + +“All right then, I’ll go ahead,” said George, as he started the car. +“Tell us how you did it.” + +“I have already explained to the best of my ability,” said John soberly. + +“Tell us again, then,” broke in Fred. + +“Why, all there is to it is that after you fellows left I looked around +for the car and found it.” + +“Did you find it alone?” + +“What do you mean,—was I the only one that found it, or do you mean that +I found the car all by itself?” + +“My, how correct some fellows are in their talk,” murmured Fred. “Yes, +what I mean was were you all alone when you found the car?” + +“No.” + +“Well, why don’t you tell us who was with you?” demanded Grant +irritably. + +“The tramp,” said John abruptly. + +“The tramp!” repeated the boys together. + +“That’s what I said.” + +“Tell us about it,” said George. + +“Why, after you fellows cleared out and left me behind, for you remember +that you took all the tickets there were and left me up there sans +money, sans ticket, sans everything, as Shakespeare says—” + +“We don’t remember anything of the kind,” interrupted George. “We tried +to get you to come along.” + +“Yes, you did!” laughed John scornfully. “You tried hard. You had just +money enough to buy three tickets and I was generous enough to say that +I would let you three fellows use them—” + +“Go on with your story about the tramp,” interrupted Fred. + +“Well, I’ll tell you the truth,” said John. + +“Hope it won’t make you too tired,” murmured Fred. + +“I’m telling you the truth,” said John, glaring at his diminutive +companion as he spoke. “The train hadn’t fairly gotten out of sight with +you fellows on board before up comes the tramp, driving this car. He +came right up to the platform of the station and invited me to get on +board. You may be sure I didn’t stand on the form, or likewise on the +platform, very long.” + +“Where did he get it?” demanded George. + +“He suspected what had happened,” explained John, “and he said he went +to another garage, hoping that there had been some mistake. He said +there were two cars in trouble out there on the road, one besides ours. +The men that came out from the shop made a mistake and I guess each car +was taken to the wrong garage.” + +“That’s a pretty good story,” laughed George. + +“Well, it’s all right,” declared John warmly. “Here’s your car anyway. +The tramp brought it, just as I’m telling you, and you haven’t anything +to say about it.” + +“Maybe the tramp took the car and got scared when he saw us start off. +Probably he thought we were going for help.” + +“Probably nothing!” exclaimed John disgustedly. “I tell you that tramp +is all right. He can speak the English language and he has got some +brains. I asked him to-day what he was tramping around the country for +and he said he didn’t know.” + +“He must have a lot of brains,” ejaculated Fred. + +“He knows how to drive a car all right,” said John. “He drove all the +way home.” + +“Where is he now?” demanded George. + +“I don’t know. He wouldn’t stay. By the way, he did suggest before he +departed that if there was any reward connected with the finding of the +car he wouldn’t mind taking it.” + +“Probably he wouldn’t,” laughed Fred. + +“I think he is entitled to something,” said George, “and I’ll tell my +father about it the first time he comes out.” + +“Where did the tramp go?” + +“He didn’t tell me,” explained John, “but I think he went over to the +old Meeker House. He said that if we wanted to see something worth while +and something that would beat anything we had ever experienced in the +old Meeker House we had better come over there after dinner.” + +“To-night?” inquired Fred. + +“Yes, to-night.” + +“I say we go,” said Grant quickly. + +“So say we all,” added George. + +In a brief time the car was running swiftly up the driveway of the yard +and as soon as his companions alighted George took it to the garage. + +The other missing car, however, had not been returned nor had any word +been received concerning it during the absence of the boys. + +A call on the telephone speedily demanded George’s attention and as soon +as he rejoined his friends he said, “I have been talking to my father.” + +“You mean your father has been talking to you,” suggested Fred. + +Ignoring the interruption, George continued, “My father says that he has +word of a car that is being held in Morristown. In some ways it answers +the description of ours. He thinks it will be a good thing for us to go +there to-morrow and find out more about it.” + +“Good plan. Good scheme,” said Fred sympathetically. “Did your father +say anything about suitably rewarding the tramp for his return of the +car which he probably had all the while?” + +“He did,” said George simply. “He told me to give him a ten dollar +bill.” + +“That’s all right,” said Fred eagerly. “Now I think it will be a good +thing for each of us to take his turn, too,” he added. “Every one of us +can take that car off and hide it over night and get ten dollars reward +when he brings it back in the morning. That’s all your friend Mr. Tramp +did.” + +“That’s no such thing!” spoke up John, quick to defend his recent +acquaintance. + +“You may have it your own way,” laughed Fred. “Then we’re to go over and +call on him to-night at the old Meeker House, are we?” + +“That’s just what we are going to do,” said John. + +True to the suggestion, soon after sunset the Go Ahead boys rode to the +mysterious house. When they left their car by the roadside and started +across the intervening field it was plain that there was an air of +greater confidence now manifest by all four boys than in any previous +visit. + +The moon already had risen and in its clear light the old apple trees +and the poplars that lined the driveway appeared like aged sentinels, +twisted and gnarled. Indeed, some of the objects assumed fantastic forms +and as the boys advanced, a silence not unlike that which had rested +upon them in their former visits now fell over the party. + +“I’ll tell you one thing,” spoke up Fred in a loud whisper; “I’m going +with George around to the kitchen this trip.” + +“I haven’t invited you,” replied George promptly. + +“It doesn’t make any difference whether you have or not, I’m going just +the same,” said Fred. + +“Then I shall have to put up with it,” responded George in mock +resignation. “All I can say to the rest of you is that whatever you do +don’t run. Let’s find out what this thing means this time. Do you +agree?” + +“Yes, we agree,” replied his friends. + +“Good,” responded George. “Now don’t forget.” + +The boys at once separated, George and Fred moving around to the rear of +the house while John and Grant approached the front door, which already +was a familiar sight. + +Without waiting for their companions to enter they at once pushed open +the door, which creaked on its rusty hinges, producing sounds not unlike +the cry of a child in distress. + +Inside the room there again was the sound of many rushing wings. Indeed, +for a moment, to the boys, who were startled in spite of their +determination to be calm, the room seemed to be filled with flying +creatures. Weird sounds also were heard and low spoken cries that were +not unlike the creaking of the hinges of the old door. + +In spite of their recently expressed courage both boys stopped as if by +common consent. As they did so the sound of voices, speaking in +whispers, was heard from other parts of the house. No person, however, +was visible and in the dim light that penetrated the room neither of the +boys was able to see any object distinctly. + +Meanwhile the flapping of the unseen wings continued. Suddenly there was +a flash of light that was almost blinding. It was so unexpected that +both boys together and almost instantly turned toward the door. A cloud +of smoke swept through the room and both boys, coughing and choking, +instantly turned and fled from the house. Their speed increased as there +came sounds of loud laughter from within the ancient dwelling. Unmindful +of their promise not to run, both boys instantly turned and quickly were +making most excellent time across the field in the direction of the +automobile, which still could be seen in the open road. + + + + +CHAPTER XX—THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + + +When John and Grant climbed into their seats in the waiting automobile +both were nearly breathless. Before either of them spoke there came +another loud burst of laughter from the house of mystery, and a moment +later Fred and George were seen approaching. Both were running but +neither apparently had been as greatly alarmed by the occurrences in the +old Meeker House as had their two friends. + +“I thought you fellows were not going to run,” said Fred as he seated +himself. + +“We thought the place was being bombarded,” explained John. “I noticed +that you didn’t stay very long either.” + +“We had to come out and find what had made you fellows run so fast,” +said George. + +“That’s all right,” said John. “I’m willing to go back there now if you +are.” + +Fred hesitated a moment, but as George had now seated himself and the +car was under motion and there was slight prospect of turning back, in +his boldest tones he said, “I’m perfectly willing to go back. I wasn’t +scared to-night anyway.” + +“Come on, then,” said John, rising as he spoke. + +George, however, ignored the conversation and increasing the speed at +which the car was moving soon left the corner far behind him. + +When the Go Ahead boys arrived at the farmhouse neither John nor Grant +had much to say concerning their recent experience. The blinding flash +which they described had been seen also by their companions, but both +George and Fred declared that they had not been frightened by the +unexpected occurrence. + +There was no possibility of denying the fact that John and Grant had +fled much more precipitately than had their companions, although there +had been no great difference in the time of their return to the waiting +automobile. + +For some reason conversation flagged and not many references were made +to the mysteries of the old Meeker House which still were unexplained. + +“To-morrow morning,” said George, “you understand that we are to go to +Morristown. Are we all going?” + +“We are,” replied his friends together. + +“I didn’t know but John would like to stay behind and make some further +investigations,” laughed George. + +“No, sir. I’m not going to be left this time,” explained John. “I want +to see Morristown. I have heard so much about the place that I want to +see it for myself.” + +“It’s well worth seeing,” said George. + +The following morning directly after breakfast, the Go Ahead boys were +speeding swiftly toward the beautiful Jersey town which was to be their +destination. The ride across the rolling country, with its frequent +streams and hills and villages, was most attractive. Many beautiful +homes, erected by the people of the great city beyond the borders of the +state, added much to the beauty of the scenery. + +However, the enthusiasm of the boys reached its highest point when at +last they arrived at Morristown. The combination of age with the best +that the thought of modern times could accomplish in the architecture of +the houses was most impressive. Beautiful homes, many of which had +extensive lawns and shade trees and the many evidences of thrift and +prosperity to be seen on every side, were most attractive. + +The first duty of the boys, however, was to visit the garage to which +they had been directed by George’s father. Here, however, again their +efforts proved unavailing. The missing car was not found. An automobile +of the same make and concerning which there was some question of +ownership was still in the garage, but the Go Ahead boys speedily +decided that they had no claim to its possession. + +“I don’t believe we’ll ever find the car,” said Fred despondently when +the boys departed from the garage. + +“I guess you have forgotten our name,” suggested John. “We are the Go +Ahead boys, not the Give Up boys.” + +“That’s all right,” spoke up George, “but just now I am going to show +you some of the sights of this old historic town.” + +“Did Washington sleep here?” inquired Fred demurely. + +“He lived here for a while,” explained George, “but the British tried to +find out whether he was asleep or not. They never found him asleep.” + +“Still I suppose he did sleep sometimes.” + +“When was he here?” inquired John. + +“Why, don’t you know the history of your own country?” spoke up Fred. +“Washington came here after the battle of Princeton. That winter was a +hard one for the little colonial army. People have talked about Valley +Forge just as if there wasn’t as much suffering at Morristown. I don’t +know why it is that people start on one line and then forget there are +any others.” + +“He was here twice,” explained Grant. “That winter of ’77 and ’78 and +then too in the winter of ’78 and ’79.” + +“Yes,” said George. “The house which is called Washington’s Headquarters +is where he lived during his second winter. I’m going to take you +first,” he added, “out to Washington Valley. That’s where the most of +the soldiers camped.” + +In a brief time the Go Ahead boys gained the summit of the hill from +which they were able to look down upon the marvelously beautiful valley +before them. It was like a great bowl among the hills. The rich and +cultivated fields and beautiful homes on the hillsides and the nature of +the place itself combined to make a most beautiful as well as +interesting picture. + +“It looks almost as if it was built for an army to hide in,” said Grant. + +“They were pretty well protected here,” explained George. “You see, the +hills were as good as forts. Now we’ll go back to Washington’s +headquarters,” he added, as he turned around and started once more back +toward Morristown. + +Not far from the public square the boys found the famous building. Built +of brick and covered with boards and shingles, its sides painted white, +it produced not merely an impression of age, but also of freshness as +well. + +“Then this is where the father of his country stayed, is it?” said Fred. +“Just look at this picture,” he added as he pointed toward the house and +then turned around to George and said, “then look at this. We have +fallen from that to this, Washington was the father of his country and +G. Washington Sanders is just ‘Pop’.” + +“That’s all right,” replied George, joining in the laugh of his friends. +“I’ll admit that Pop isn’t the biggest word in the language any more +than Pyg is.” + +“Quit this,” demanded Grant. “We’re going into the old house and you +will have to behave yourselves.” + +The visit proved to be most interesting. Many articles that had been +used when Washington was living in the house and many more which had +been contributed were on exhibition. Indeed, as the boys passed from +room to room they became more subdued in their manner, for somehow the +knowledge that they were looking upon the same sights that had greeted +the great commander had produced a marked effect. Even the old cannon on +the lawn and the piles of cannon balls had stories of their own. + +The silence, however, was broken when the boys resumed their seats in +the automobile. + +“I wonder why Washington stayed so far away from his army,” suggested +John. + +“He had a body guard here all the time,” explained Grant. “There were +about two hundred and fifty men stationed here. They used to call them +the life guard.” + +“What did they do?” inquired Fred. + +“It was a special guard to protect General Washington. You see the red +coats and Hessians, as I told you, tried a good many times to catch +Washington asleep. Sometimes they crossed over from Staten Island and +came up through Springfield, trying to catch the ‘old fox’ off his +guard. But the people all through the country knew just what to do. They +had guns or little cannon mounted on several of the hills and whenever +word came that the redcoats were coming the boys fired one cannon and +that would be heard by other people and the guns on the other hills +would be fired too so that the soldiers at Morristown knew long before +the British could arrive that they were trying to advance.” + +“But they never got him,” said Fred gleefully. + +“It wasn’t because they didn’t try hard enough,” laughed George. “My +grandfather used to tell me that when the soldiers at Morristown heard +the ‘old sow,’ which was the name of one of the guns, they understood +right away that there was danger of an attack. Everything in the old +house was shut up except the windows, and then five of the continentals +took their stand at every window and were ready to fire upon any one +that came near the place.” + +“I would like to have seen Washington,” said John thoughtfully. + +“They say,” said George, “that he was about as tall as you are, String, +but he had some breadth and thickness as well as length. He weighed +about two hundred pounds. All the time he was at Morristown he was very +quiet. I fancy he was worried all the while. That didn’t prevent him +from being very strict with his soldiers, however. He issued an order +that there should be no gambling or swearing, that nobody should be +permitted to do any stunts on Sunday, and the men who disobeyed didn’t +forget the lesson taught them.” + +“Why, what did Washington do?” inquired Fred. + +“He had guilty soldiers whipped in the presence of their companies. A +man would be tied up to a tree and then the drummers or fifers would +have to lash him. Sometimes they got forty blows, sometimes more. One +time a soldier who had disobeyed orders about poaching and had stolen a +pig from a poor farmer was reported to the commander. Washington had him +whipped with more than a double dose. They say that the men did not make +any complaint though, and even when they were going through the +performance every man used to take a lead cartridge between his teeth +and bite hard on it whenever he was struck a blow.” + +“I guess that’s one reason why Washington was so popular,” suggested +John thoughtfully. + +“It’s an easy way to become popular,” laughed Fred. + +“Never you mind,” retorted George. “You know just as well as I do that +no fellow likes a teacher that is not strict. My father says that the +man or boy who tries to be popular never is.” + +“And your father is dead right too,” said Grant quickly, turning to his +friend. + +“Yes, sir, he’s all right,” responded John. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI—AN EXPLANATION IN PART + + +It was the middle of the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys returned to +George’s home. Apparently they had not been cast down by their failure +to obtain information concerning the missing car. Indeed, as one of the +boys laughingly remarked, George was the only one deeply and personally +concerned in the loss and if he did not feel discouraged there certainly +was no reason why his friends should be despondent. + +On the broad piazza of the old farmhouse the boys sat for a half-hour +talking over the experiences of the day. Different suggestions were made +as to possible plans that might be adopted in the search for the stolen +automobile. + +“I’m not thinking so much about the car as I am about what we saw to-day +at Morristown,” said Grant thoughtfully. “I feel almost as if I had +stepped right back into the eighteenth century.” + +“My friend,” said Fred soberly, “that is where you belong. I have often +been puzzled to know how to account for some of the strange traits of +your peculiar personality. You have hit the nail now squarely on the +head. You have been born one hundred and forty years too late. You are a +rare old antique.” + +The boys laughed as Grant arose from his seat and lifting his diminutive +friend bodily from the chair in which he was seated, he dropped him over +the rail. + +“When you grow up,” he called, “and learn to behave you may come back +here.” + +“I’m not coming back,” called Fred glibly. + +“We’ll try to live through our disappointment,” said Grant. + +“You’ll be disappointed all right the next time you see me,” called +Fred. Then turning to John he eagerly beckoned to him to follow him. + +With a groan John slowly arose from the chair in which he was seated and +followed Fred as he led the way around the corner of the house. + +“What I want of you,” said Fred when he and his companion could not be +seen by the other boys, “is to go with me over to the Meeker House. I +think I have found something.” + +“Is it the same thing you found last night?” inquired John. + +“Not at all. I don’t mind telling you that I have fixed a trap over +there.” + +“What do you mean, a steel trap?” + +“No, no,” said Fred. “I sprinkled some bran last night all around the +floor. I filled my pockets with it before we started and while we were +in the old house I scattered it on the floors. Now, I want to go over +there to find out if—” + +“If what?” interrupted John. “Are you trying to feed those spooks on +bran?” + +“As usual, my friend,” retorted Fred, “you begin at the wrong end. I am +not trying to get an impression of their heads, but of their feet. Only, +spooks don’t make a deep impression when they step on the floor, and I’m +more than suspicious that I’ll find some tracks.” + +“I’ll go with you,” said John eagerly. “Wait until I tell the other +fellows that we are going away for a while. Are you going to walk, +Fred?” + +“Yes, I am. I have been riding all day and I want to stretch my +muscles.” + +Both George and Grant laughed when John told them that he and Fred were +going for a walk. + +“You’ll walk in one direction,” called George, “but you’ll be running +when you come back. I think I’ll take the car and in a half an hour I’ll +come over after you. You’ll want to see some of your friends by that +time and you will want to see them bad.” + +“I don’t want to see them ‘bad,’” retorted John as he turned away. “They +are ‘bad’ enough as it is. I want to see them badly.” + +Together the two boys walked through the woods and across the lots and +by a shorter route than the highway arrived within a half-hour in the +yard of the house they were seeking. + +“Come around to the kitchen,” said Fred. Almost unconsciously he had +lowered his voice and although it was still daylight he was glancing +nervously about him when he and John softly opened the rear door and +stepped within the kitchen. + +The boards of the floor were twisted and uneven. The floor was of pine +and George had explained that his father had said that he believed the +floor was as old as any part of the house. There were marks of the +places where the women of another generation had scrubbed the floor. +Doubtless it had been their pride to keep the pine boards clean, just as +it is a source of pride to many of their sisters of a later day to be +adorned with feathers of various gaudy colors. + +Noiselessly the boys advanced and without a word having been spoken +began to examine the floor where Fred had scattered the bran the +preceding evening. No footprints were found, however, and it was +speedily plain that if any one had entered the building since the boys +had departed they had not done so by the kitchen door. + +Convinced that they were alone in the house, the courage of both boys +somewhat revived. Indeed there was something in the sunshine of the +summer afternoon and in the not unmusical sounds of the winged +grasshoppers in the adjacent orchard that was soothing to the excited +boys. + +They were about to pass out of the room when John abruptly stopped and +whispered, “Look here, Fred. What’s that?” As he spoke he pointed to a +small tube which plainly had been fastened recently to the wall. The +tube was of tin, about an inch in diameter and extended almost to the +ceiling. Through the wall a hole had been made and the boys peered +eagerly at the wall in the adjacent room to see whether or not the tube +was there also. + +“That’s just how it is! That’s good, String!” exclaimed Fred excitedly. +“That explains the sound of the voices we heard the other night.” + +“I don’t see how it explains it,” said John, somewhat puzzled by the +excitement of his companion. + +“Why, it’s a speaking tube. You go back to the kitchen and I’ll stay +here and we’ll try it.” + +The suggestion was quickly adopted and in a brief time both boys were +aware that Fred’s conjecture was correct. The strange sounds and the +whispers of their names which had been heard frequently whenever they +had visited the house after darkness had fallen, now were explained. + +“That’s the reason,” said John eagerly, “why George always wants to come +around to the kitchen door. Don’t you remember he hasn’t once come in by +the front door?” + +“That’s right,” responded Fred. “He knows more about what is going on in +this old house than he has let on, and all the time he has been +pretending that he was puzzled as much as we are by what we have seen +and heard. We must think up something so that we can pay him back in his +own coin.” + +“That’s what we’ll do,” said John eagerly. “What shall it be?” + +“Time enough to think about that later,” responded Fred. “What’s that?” +he added abruptly. + +From within the chimney could be heard the sound as of a man swinging a +noisy rattle. There were also sharp noises that sometimes were quite +loud and at others were low and soft and yet they were continuously +sounding. + +“I tell you there’s something in that chimney,” said John. + +“I begin to think you’re right,” whispered Fred. “Get down on your knees +and look up through the fireplace.” + +John obediently stretched his long form upon the floor and peered up +through the flue of the open fireplace. As he did so the clatter in the +chimney suddenly increased in volume and for a moment John was on the +point of hastily withdrawing from the spot. + +As he prepared to do so, however, suddenly a little, young bird fell, +striking the floor close to John’s head. At the same time there was a +renewal of the clatter in the chimney and John hastily withdrew. + +To his amazement he found when he arose that Fred was laughing. + +“What’s there so funny about it?” demanded John as he tried to brush the +accumulated dust from his person. + +For a moment Fred was almost unable to control himself, but at last he +said, “Oh, Jack, what fools we have been. There we were so scared by the +sound of the wings that we heard in this room and the strange noises +that came from the chimney that we couldn’t get out of the place fast +enough. And now it’s all as plain as daylight.” + +“I don’t see it,” said John blankly. + +“Well, have a little patience, and in time you’ll see it, Johnny.” + +“Why don’t you talk? Why don’t you explain yourself? What are you +laughing at?” demanded John, irritated by the manner of his companion. + +“Why those sounds we heard were made by chimney-swallows.” + +“What is a chimney-swallow?” + +“Do you mean to tell me that you have lived to be seventeen years old +and don’t know what a chimney-swallow is?” + +“They don’t have them in the city where I live.” + +“Well,” said Fred, pretending to be discouraged, “I cannot understand +how any fellow can live as you have and yet not know that there are some +birds called chimney-swallows that live in the chimneys of old or +deserted houses. If you should look up there now you could see some +nests fastened right to the sides of the chimney. I have never seen the +birds, but I’m sure that’s what they are. Whenever we have come into the +house we have probably frightened them and they have been flying around +the room. They were the spooks that scared us so.” + +“Do you suppose George knew about it?” demanded John ruefully. + +“Of course he knew it. He has been saving it all up to add to his story +of the speaking tube.” + +“Well, it’s a comfort to know the old house isn’t haunted anyway.” + +“Of course it isn’t haunted. There isn’t anything haunted because there +isn’t anything like ghosts or spooks.” + +“I’m glad to hear you talk so nicely, Freddie,” said John, who now had +recovered from his chagrin. “If I’m not mistaken I’ve heard you talk in +a different tone once or twice before when we have been here.” + +“That’s all right,” said Fred glibly. “Now we have found out what the +spooks are and we’ll show George that we’re not afraid of anything in +the old Meeker House.” + +The boys were still conversing in whispers, and as Fred made his bold +declaration he abruptly stopped and looked anxiously toward the +stairway. A sound mysterious and unexpected had been heard in the room +directly above them. Both boys were convinced that either others were in +the house, or that they had not yet found an explanation for all the +mysteries of the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII—A DARE + + +Without a word having been spoken, Fred and John instantly departed from +the old house. They did not even glance at each other as they did so, +but moved by a common impulse both were apparently ready to seek a place +of safety with all haste. + +Fred’s bold declaration that now he had found an explanation for the +strange occurrences in the Meeker House apparently had not held good. He +was maintaining his place by the side of his tall friend when both were +fleeing from the house. + +The sun already had disappeared from sight and the shadows of the +evening were lengthening. + +Perhaps the hour increased their feeling of uncertainty. At all events +the confidence they had possessed, when in broad daylight they had +boldly entered the kitchen, manifestly now was gone. Each boy frequently +glanced behind him in his flight, but neither spoke to the other until +fifty yards intervened between them and the dwelling. + +“What are we doing out here?” demanded Fred blankly. + +“I don’t think you need very much of an explanation,” retorted John. + +“That’s the way it seems to me, too,” responded Fred, striving to laugh +lightly as he spoke. + +“At all events we are making pretty good time.” + +Indeed the smaller boy was able to maintain the pace at which his friend +with the longer legs was moving over the field. Half the distance +between the house and the road had been covered when John stopped and +said, “Look ahead there, Fred. Isn’t that George and Grant waiting over +yonder in the road?” + +In response to the suggestion of his friend, Fred glanced quickly at the +huge spreading oak tree that grew close to the fence. It was a +magnificent tree, the pride of the country around about and the delight +of many visitors. Beneath it an automobile was seen and then Fred +exclaimed quickly, “You’re right, String, that’s George and Grant. Let’s +slow up a little. We don’t want them to think we are in too much of a +hurry.” + +Accordingly the speed at which they were moving decreased and as they +glanced behind them and saw that the conditions about the old Meeker +House apparently were unchanged the boys ceased to run and began to +walk. + +“Don’t let them think we have been scared out,” again suggested Fred. +“We’ll never hear the last of it if we don’t.” + +Without replying John nodded his head and more slowly the boys walked +across the intervening field and then climbed the fence and leaped +lightly into the roadside when they drew near the place where the two +boys were awaiting their coming. + +“What’s your hurry?” demanded George, laughing as he spoke. + +“We’re in no hurry,” responded Fred glibly. + +“We’re hungry, that’s all,” said John. “We were afraid you would be +keeping dinner for us.” + +“That’s a mighty good excuse,” laughed Grant. “You didn’t act when we +first saw you as if you were thinking of your dinner. I didn’t believe +that either one of you could make such good time.” + +“That’s all right,” said Fred sharply. “That’s all right, but it’s just +exactly as I said.” + +“What is?” inquired George. + +“Why the tricks you have been trying to play on us in the old Meeker +House.” + +“Tricks? What tricks have I been trying to play?” replied George. + +“Did you ever hear of chimney-swallows?” inquired Fred. + +“Indeed I have,” said George, “and I have seen them lots of times.” + +“Ever see any in the old Meeker House?” + +“Yes,” replied George, laughing again as he spoke. + +“Well, why didn’t you tell us that they were there? You let us go on and +I think you helped us too to believe that the room was full of flying +spooks.” + +“I didn’t know that I was to blame,” laughed George, “if you didn’t know +the difference between a spook and chimney-swallow.” + +“You must have put in a lot of work in that old house, George,” broke in +John. + +“Work?” inquired George, staring blankly at his friend. “What do you +mean? I never worked there in my life.” + +“Who put in that speaking tube that runs from the kitchen to the front +room?” demanded John. + +“I didn’t,” George said quietly. + +“You mean you didn’t do the work. I guess you knew it was put in and I +guess too that you know who put it in.” + +George laughed, but did not directly reply to the implied question. + +“We have found out about your old speaking tube,” continued John. “That +was a great trick for you to play on your old friends.” + +Grant, who was listening intently to the conversation, in which up to +this time he had taken no part, now said, “Then you two fellows think +you have found out all about the strange things in the old Meeker House, +do you?” + +“We didn’t say that,” replied Fred. “All we say is that we have found +out about the wings that we heard and the chattering in the chimney and +the speaking tube that ran from the kitchen into the front room. My, but +I was scared when I heard my name called there,” he added. + +George laughed loudly as he said, “You don’t need to tell me that, Pyg. +I wouldn’t have believed that any living creature could have made its +legs fly as fast as yours did that night.” + +“I was trying to keep up with the rest of the fellows,” retorted Fred. +“I had to go some to do that.” + +“Now that you have found out all these things you’re not afraid to go +back there any time, are you?” inquired George. + +“Yes, sir, I am,” said Fred. + +“What?” + +“Because we haven’t found out everything. There’s something strange +about that place that I don’t understand yet.” + +“Why, what happened?” inquired George quickly. + +“We heard voices upstairs.” + +“Was that the reason why you were moving so fast across the yard?” +laughed George. + +“Laugh all you want to,” said Fred, “but that’s what we heard.” + +“Probably your tramp was talking to himself,” suggested Grant. + +“No, sir,” spoke up John promptly. “That wasn’t it at all. Besides there +was more than one voice.” + +“You didn’t hear the automobile-horn, did you?” inquired George. + +“No, we didn’t. We heard all I wanted to without hearing that. It just +made my flesh creep to hear those voices upstairs and coming down the +stairway.” + +“Was there anything strange about the voices?” asked George. + +“Yes, sir, there was.” + +“Well, I tell you what I’ll do,” said Grant promptly. “I’ll dare both of +you to come back here to the old Meeker House after dinner to-night.” + +“I’ll do it,” said Fred promptly. + +“I’ll give you another dare better than that,” said John. “I’ll dare you +and George to go back there right now.” + +“Will you come too?” demanded George. + +“We have just come from there,” said John. “We know what there is there +and you don’t. Now we dare you both to go back right now.” + +George glanced a moment questioningly at Grant and then without a word +being spoken promptly turned the car and started back toward the +mysterious old house. + +Apparently all thoughts of dinner had been forgotten or ignored. Fred +and John looked at each other and laughed derisively, but neither spoke +until at last the car was halted under the old oak tree. + +Quickly George and Grant leaped out and started across the intervening +field. + +Fred and John left to themselves waited until their friends had gone to +the rear of the building and then the former said quickly, “Let’s take +the car and go back home. It will serve those fellows just right to +leave them there.” + +John laughed as he agreed to the suggestion. + +Avoiding all possible noise they turned the car about and started down +the road. They had gone only a short distance, however, before Fred +suddenly clutched the arm of his companion who was driving and said, +“Listen, String! Wasn’t that a call or a shout?” + +As he spoke, Fred in great excitement looked behind him in the direction +of the mysterious old dwelling house. Without a word, John turned the +car about and started swiftly on his way back to the old tree. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII—LED BY A MAN + + +When the boys arrived at the familiar place in the road they were +startled by a renewal of the shouts from the house. It was the faint +sound of these calls which had alarmed them and caused them to turn back +on their way. + +Even while they were hesitating as to whether or not they should leave +the car and run to the house to aid their friends, who apparently were +in dire trouble, they saw two forms emerge from the front door. They +instantly recognized George and Grant, for the light was still +sufficient to enable them to see quite plainly across the fields. Both +boys were running at their highest speed. + +Blowing the horn of the automobile and shouting, both John and Fred did +their utmost to call the attention of their friends to the fact that +they were awaiting their coming. That their calls were heard was +speedily manifest when both George and Grant, turning slightly in the +direction in which they were speeding, ran toward the great tree. + +At that moment George stumbled over some unseen object and fell headlong +upon the ground. His companion stopped a moment and Fred and John +watched him as he lifted George to his feet and then both boys renewed +their flight. + +In a brief time they had arrived at the fence and in their haste both +fell when they tried to climb over it. + +“What’s wrong? What’s wrong?” demanded Fred excitedly, as his friends +approached the car. + +“Never mind what’s wrong,” said George brusquely. “Let me get into the +car and give me that wheel.” + +No further words were spoken while George and his companions entered the +car and in a brief time the automobile was again speeding down the road. +Several times Grant glanced apprehensively behind him, but the +increasing distance evidently gave him renewed courage, for when a +quarter of a mile had been covered he said, “I suppose you fellows are +both wondering what the trouble is.” + +“Yes, we are,” said John quickly. “What is it?” + +“It’s the same thing that scared you, only worse. We heard sounds +upstairs that showed that some men up there were fighting, then there +was a pistol-shot and we heard some one fall. After that there were +groans and cries galore, and we thought it was time for us to start for +home.” + +“You were brave boys to leave that other fellow!” said Fred tartly. “If +there was some one shot, it was time for you to help him.” + +“We couldn’t help him very much if we went upstairs only to be shot +ourselves,” said George sharply. + +“You don’t know what you could have done,” retorted Fred. + +“No, I didn’t know, but I’ll tell you what I’ll do. If you want to go +back there right now, I’ll take you back.” + +“I don’t want to go,” said Fred quietly. “It’s time for somebody besides +boys like us to step in. I think the best thing for us to do will be to +find some man and take him back there. We can go in with him then and +help if we have to.” + +“I guess that’s a good suggestion, all right,” said George quickly. +“Grant and I were so scared that we couldn’t think of anything except +getting out of the horrible old house in the best possible time. My, +think how Grant loped along, taking about six feet at a jump.” + +“I noticed that I wasn’t alone,” said Grant, dryly. “Whoever it was with +me wasn’t very far behind.” + +“I guess you’re right,” acknowledged George. “Now I’ll own up, fellows, +about the speaking tube and the swallows. I knew the birds were in the +chimney and I knew too that you didn’t know much about such things, so I +thought I would let you work it out. Then I put in that speaking tube +and added to the fun, but I tell you right now that I have had my +lesson. I’m not afraid of all the ghosts in Jersey, but I don’t like the +sounds that came from that upper room in the old Meeker House. I don’t +mind saying so to any one. I guess my father is at the house by this +time, for he said he might come out to-night. If he is, we’ll tell him +all about it and let him take charge. It’s time for the Go Ahead boys to +go ahead all right, but I think they had better follow somebody who is +older, all the same.” + +All the boys agreed that George’s suggestion was the best that could be +made. The speed of the automobile increased and not many minutes had +elapsed when the Go Ahead boys arrived at George’s home. + +They were all delighted when they found that Mr. Sanders was there. He +listened to the story of the excited boys and then quietly said, “I +think we’ll have dinner first and then I’ll go with you over to the old +Meeker House. You have been stirring up the spooks, have you?” and Mr. +Sanders laughed as he spoke. “There were spooks there when I was a boy, +and I remember how we used to steer clear of the corner when we were +coming home evenings. When we were a little older we began to make +investigations and found there wasn’t anything unusual or that couldn’t +be explained about the old place. But the stories of the spooks have +kept up just the same. I don’t know why, unless it is that there are +some people that believe such things just because they want to believe +them.” + +“That’s what Cæsar says,” spoke up Grant. “I remember in his +Commentaries he wrote that ‘men believe that which they wish to +believe.’ But, Mr. Sanders, don’t you think there’s something very +strange about what George and I heard there to-night?” + +“There may be,” admitted Mr. Sanders, “but there have been so many +stories told about the old house that I do not know whether you boys +thought you heard something or really did hear it.” + +“You would have known if you had been with us,” spoke up George quickly. + +“Well, I shall be with you soon and then we will try to find out. I +cannot believe there is anything wrong there, so we might as well have +our dinner and then we will start.” + +The plan of Mr. Sanders was followed, and directly after dinner the Go +Ahead boys, together with George’s father, started once more for the +place which had been the scene of so much excitement throughout their +summer vacation. + +Upon the suggestion of Mr. Sanders a lantern was taken with them. When +they arrived at the familiar spot beneath the old oak tree the lantern +was lighted and all five started across the fields toward the Meeker +House. + +No one spoke until they arrived at the front door, which now had become +a familiar spot to all four boys. Without a word Mr. Sanders pushed open +the door and stepped within the room. Instantly there was a great +fluttering of wings, for the chimney-swallows, startled by the light as +well as by the unexpected entrance of the visitors, were displaying +their alarm by their frantic cries and swift flight. No other sounds, +however, were heard when the birds at last became more quiet. + +“Where did you say the trouble was?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“In the room upstairs,” answered George. + +“The one directly over this?” + +“Yes, sir.” + +“Well, then the only thing for us to do is to go up there and see what +has happened.” + +The boys agreed to the suggestion and although no one spoke every one +was aware that his companions were as excited as he when slowly they +began to mount the rickety stairway. The boards creaked and groaned +beneath their feet, increasing the excitement of all. + +When they had arrived at the platform about midway on the stairway, all +stopped and listened. The screeching sounds of the excited birds still +continued, but otherwise the silence was unbroken. + +“Is there anybody here?” called Mr. Sanders loudly. As no reply was made +to his inquiry he turned to the boys and said, “There doesn’t appear to +be anybody here. Well go on up and continue our investigations.” + +Once more leading the way, Mr. Sanders noiselessly mounted the steps, +the boys keeping closely together and not far behind the leader. Holding +his lantern before him Mr. Sanders stopped when he arrived at the head +of the stairway and examined the rooms that opened before him. + +Suddenly a sound very like laughter was heard in the old building, but +it quickly ceased and in place of it the faint tooting of an automobile +horn was heard. + +The boys now were staring about them and had it not been for the +presence of George’s father it is doubtful if any one would have +remained. + +As it was, a startling event occurred which instantly cause all five to +turn quickly about and run swiftly down the stairway. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV—THE END OF THE HOUSE + + +Even Mr. Sanders appeared to be as alarmed as his younger companions. At +all events he was swiftly leading the way, and as the boys were running +down the stairway two or three steps at a time it was necessary for him +to move rapidly in order to keep his place at the head of the line. + +There had been a sudden flash of light that apparently had filled the +building. No sound had accompanied the strange sight although the air +was heavy with the suffocating odor of burning powder. The light +apparently had been flashed in every room at the same moment. The +twittering of the chimney-swallows abruptly ceased after one shrill +outburst of alarm. + +Before the party arrived at the foot of the stairway the blinding flash +was repeated. The house now seemed to be filled with the penetrating +odor and even the lantern did not fully serve to light their way. + +“Keep together, boys,” called Mr. Sanders in a low voice. “We must all +make for the front door and get out of this place as soon as possible.” + +In spite of their alarm, Fred in his own mind was questioning whether it +was the heavy odor in the room or the desire of Mr. Sanders to gain a +place of safety outside the building that had caused such a precipitate +flight. At all events no one delayed, and in a brief time all five were +running rapidly across the field, Mr. Sanders still holding the lantern +and leading the retreating party. + +Before they arrived at the road, however, they stopped and looked behind +them. The old house now was wrapped in darkness. Not a sound came from +the mysterious dwelling. The blinding flashes of light that had been +seen apparently were ended and only the reflection of the moonlight from +the few windows that still were left in the house produced an unusual +sight. + +In silence the Go Ahead boys and Mr. Sanders waited for a repetition of +the sight which had startled them. Not a sound came from the place, and +although the boys waited several minutes the strange lights were not +repeated. + +“I’m inclined to think,” said Mr. Sanders thoughtfully, “that it will be +better for us to go back and continue our investigations. What do you +say, boys?” + +“We agree,” spoke up Fred glibly. “We might as well run this matter down +now as at any time. What do you think those flashes were, Mr. Sanders?” + +“From the odor I think likely they were made by setting off the powder +which is lighted when a flash-light picture is taken.” + +“It does seem so, doesn’t it?” said John quickly. “But where did such +powder come from? Who lighted it?” + +“That’s what we must find out,” said Mr. Sanders dryly. + +Meanwhile the party was returning to the building and had covered half +the distance when they all stopped abruptly as George exclaimed, +“There’s a light there now! Can’t you see it? It’s up in the corner of +the eaves.” + +A moment later all declared that they could see the flames to which +George had referred, but as they resumed their walk John said abruptly, +“That’s more than a flash-light, that’s a fire! I tell you, fellows, the +old Meeker House is on fire!” + +Instantly every one stopped but only a brief delay was required to +confirm the startling statement. The flames by this time had burst +through the roof and it was evident that unless help speedily was +obtained the house which had stood nearly two centuries was doomed. + +There was no further waiting now and quickly all five were running +toward the blazing building. This time, however, Mr. Sanders was not +leading the party. The boys speedily outdistanced him and as soon as +they arrived within the yard they discovered that two other men were +already on the ground. + +By this time the fire was under strong headway. The timbers of the +dwelling house, old and dry, were burning almost like tinder. Sparks +were flying from the blazing roof and the flames were steadily mounting +higher and higher. + +Across the field from the opposite road forms of men approaching the +building could be seen, and the wild cry “Fire!” “Fire!” was heard on +every side. + +There were no buckets or pails to be found in the dwelling, as was +speedily discovered when the doors were burst open. Near the kitchen +door was the old well, which had been used in former generations. A +well-sweep was there, but the heavy weight which had been used to +balance the bucket was gone and it had been long since the water in the +depths below had been disturbed. In desperation, however, the entire +party sought to find some means of stopping the fire. + +Some of the men who now had arrived started swiftly across the fields +toward houses that could be seen in the distance. There was a vague +thought that they might obtain pails and ropes that would enable them to +quench the flames. By the time the men returned, however, the house was +doomed. + +Fascinated by the sight, the boys withdrew from the spot and watched the +blazing dwelling as the flames leaped and roared and crackled. + +“There goes the chimney!” exclaimed Fred in a low voice, as a pile of +bricks fell crashing into the depths. + +“I wonder what became of those chimney-swallows,” suggested John. + +“I guess those that could fly are gone and those that were too young to +fly are already burned,” said Grant. + +“How do you suppose that fire started?” inquired George. + +As no one had a ready solution his question remained unanswered. The +boys now, however, were rejoined by Mr. Sanders, who explained that it +was perilous as well as useless to attempt to fight the flames longer. +The most that could be expected was to prevent the flying embers from +setting fire to fences or to buildings that were not far away. + +“It’s a pity,” said Mr. Sanders slowly, “that the old house had to go in +this way.” + +“And it never gave up all its secrets either,” added Fred. “We were just +on the point of finding out, when the whole thing goes up in smoke.” + +“I fancy that what you call ‘secrets’ will all be explained. My thought +is that the two men, whom we found here when we came back across the +fields, can tell more about the origin of the fire than we think.” + +“Who were the men?” inquired George. + +“I don’t know either of them,” answered Mr. Sanders. “To me they looked +like tramps.” + +Startled by the unexpected statement the boys stared blankly at one +another and then as if moved by a common impulse they turned and +advanced among the spectators who now numbered at least three score. + +“Isn’t it wonderful,” suggested Grant, “what a crowd you can get and in +such a little while even out in the country, if anything unusual is +going on? I wouldn’t have believed that a blast on Gabriel’s trumpet +could have brought twenty people here in an hour and yet in less than +twenty minutes there’s a crowd. Where do you suppose they came from?” + +“That fire can be seen a long distance,” explained George, “and there’s +nothing like a fire to get a crowd. There’s the tramp!” he abruptly +added, nodding, as he spoke, toward a man who could be seen on the +outskirts of the assembly. + +By common consent all four boys instantly ran to the place where the man +was seen. + +As they approached, however, the tramp, for George’s statement proved to +be correct, apparently became aware of their coming and instantly +departed. + +To the boys it seemed that he had moved around to the other side of the +burning building but when they sought him there he was not to be found. + +“What do you suppose it all means?” inquired John blankly. “He acted as +if he didn’t want to see us.” + +“Probably he didn’t,” suggested George. “That’s his right.” + +“It may be and it may not be,” retorted John. “I don’t believe he will +stand very long on the order of his departure.” + +“Why not?” + +“Probably he could tell more about how the fire started than any one in +the crowd.” + +“What do you mean?” demanded George as the three boys stopped and stared +into the face of their friend. + +“I don’t know just how much I do mean, but we all know that the tramp +used the old Meeker House as a sort of headquarters, or at least that he +used to stop there nights, and it may be that he was here when the fire +first started.” + +“Of course he was,” spoke up John. “Don’t you remember that he told me +that if we would come over to the house after dinner, we would see +something interesting?” + +“Well, all I can say is that we came and that we certainly found +something interesting,” said George dryly, as the falling timbers +crashed into the fire and great showers of sparks fell all about the +waiting boys. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV—A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + + +Following the fall of the walls of the old house, the fire blazed up +anew and a fresh shower of sparks fell far from the blazing building. +The crowd was helpless. The only water to be had was from the old well +which now had caved in and the small amount which could be secured had +been exhausted in the early part of the fire. The timbers were old and +dry, and blazed almost like burning paper. The faces and forms of the +spectators seemed to be ghostly in the light against the dark background +of the night. + +For an hour the blaze still continued, but the flames were gradually +becoming lower. No longer were there showers of blazing sparks that fell +upon the ground far away. + +There was only a dim glow when at last Mr. Sanders led the way back to +the automobile. The excitement of the boys, however, still continued and +when their car started they were all looking back at the spot where the +crowd, fantastic in its appearance in the dim light and the glow of the +dying fire, were still to be seen. + +“Well, there’s one thing I feel almost as badly about as I do the loss +of the old building,” said John thoughtfully, as the car sped homeward. + +“What is that?” inquired George. + +“Now we shall never know about the mysteries of the old place.” + +“There aren’t very many mysteries left,” suggested Fred. “We have found +out about the speaking tube and the chimney-swallows.” + +“Yes,” said Grant, “but how about that blaze?” + +“I suspect,” joined in Mr. Sanders, “that the blaze you speak of had +something to do with the burning of the old house.” + +“What do you mean?” inquired George quickly. + +“That’s just what I mean,” replied Mr. Sanders. “Somebody had a +flash-light over there and probably set fire to the building. I haven’t +any idea who could have done it.” + +“I guess the tramp might tell us something,” suggested Grant. + +“The tramp?” inquired Mr. Sanders. “What tramp?” + +In response to his questions the boys related all their experiences with +the strange man whom they had found in the old Meeker House. The part +which he had taken in the return of the lost automobile was also +explained and in response to George’s suggestion that his father should +reward the man for the return of the car his father quickly inquired, +“But what was he doing away up beyond Tuxedo? I thought you said he made +his headquarters here in the old Meeker House.” + +“He does, part of the time,” explained John. + +“But what was he doing up there so far away?” inquired Mr. Sanders +sharply. “You know I sent you word that there was a possibility that a +car which had been located in a garage at Newburgh might be the one +which we had lost. What was he doing up there? How did he travel so far +and so fast?” + +“He explained to us,” said John, “that he had got a ride most of the +way. In fact I think he said that he didn’t have to walk over half a +mile. He stole a ride on the cars and then somebody took him in his +automobile and brought him farther.” + +“Did he say what he was doing up there?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“No, sir,” replied George. + +“But you say he was a very skillful driver?” + +“Yes, sir,” spoke up John promptly. “I never saw a man that could handle +a car better.” + +“I think we must look into this more fully,” said Mr. Sanders, “but it +may be that he is the one who may know more about the loss of our car +than we think and I’m sure he could explain a part at least of the +origin of the fire at the old Meeker House.” + +“Do you think he set it on fire?” demanded Fred. + +“Probably not, at least intentionally,” replied Mr. Sanders, “but it may +be that he was the one who had the flash-light and he may have set fire +to the old building without intending to do so.” + +“Well,” spoke up John, “I’m sorry we shan’t ever find out about that +tooting of the automobile horn that we heard in the old building and the +flash that we saw. Why, the fire seemed to be all over the building at +once and then die out in every room just as quickly as it came.” + +“I think we shall know more about it,” said Mr. Sanders quietly. +“Meanwhile the best thing for us to do is not to do anything to-night.” + +After the arrival of the boys at George’s home the excitement still +continued and for two hours the boys remained on the piazza talking over +the experiences of the night. Much of the mystery of the old house was +still unexplained. + +“Well, all I can say is,” declared Fred, as the boys at last arose to go +to their rooms, “that if the old cowboys and skinners came back to the +old Meeker House to carry on their pranks they’ll have to seek other +quarters now.” + +“I think you will find that your cowboys and skinners are pretty well up +to date,” laughed Mr. Sanders. “And you’ll find too that they are +clothed in very substantial flesh. I have been suspicious for a long +time that the tramps were using the old house for a sort of +headquarters, but I was not sure of it until you told me the story of +the man with whom you had had some dealings. We’ll all go over there the +first thing to-morrow morning and perhaps we shall find some things that +will help us to make the others clear.” + +Accordingly, soon after breakfast the following day, the four Go Ahead +boys, together with Mr. Sanders, departed for the place where the fire +had occurred the preceding evening. + +When they arrived, smoke was still rising from the ashes, but the flames +had long since died away. No one was near the spot and as the boys +approached the ruins, Mr. Sanders said, “I wish our friend, the tramp, +would come.” + +“Why do you want him?” inquired George. + +“I think he is the man who can give us the information we most want just +now. I do not recall that I ever saw him.” + +“He’s a strange man,” said George quickly. “He looks like a tramp and +yet he uses good English and he shows that he has been used to better +things some time in his life.” + +“Did he tell you that?” laughed Mr. Sanders. + +“I don’t know that he said that exactly, but that’s what he made me +think.” + +“Quite likely.” + +“Well, it’s true,” maintained George stoutly. “All you have to do is to +look into his face and hear him talk and you know that he isn’t just a +common tramp.” + +“Strange how the mysteries about the old Meeker House keep up,” laughed +Mr. Sanders. “First you have the cowboys and skinners meeting there and +then you have men who may be modern cowboys and skinners in flesh and +blood who make it their headquarters. The twittering of the +chimney-swallows drives all four of the Go Ahead boys out of the +building.” + +“But we went back,” spoke up Fred quickly. “We didn’t give up. Besides, +Mr. Sanders, I noticed last night when we came down the stairway that +all four of us had all we could do to keep up with you.” + +“So you did. So you did,” admitted Mr. Sanders laughingly. “But I did +not run because I was afraid of spooks.” + +“Neither did we,” said Fred. “We thought when we had a man along with us +that we would be protected and everything would be safe. But when we saw +him leaving the old Meeker House, faster than any of us boys could go, +we thought our safest plan was to try to keep up with him. Something +might happen to him, you know. If he was in trouble he might need our +help.” + +Mr. Sanders laughed heartily at Fred’s assertions and then said quickly, +“Who is that man coming across the field?” + +All the boys looked quickly in the direction in which Mr. Sanders +pointed and a moment later George said in a low voice, “That’s our +tramp.” + +“I thought he would be here,” said Mr. Sanders. “Now perhaps we can find +out a little more than we knew before.” + +All five awaited the approach of the man who indeed proved to be the one +about whom they had been talking. + +As the tramp came near, his face lighted up with a smile as he cordially +said, “Good morning. Good morning. You’re early on the scene of our +disaster last night.” + +“Yes,” responded George. “We saw you last night and then we lost sight +of you in the crowd and couldn’t find you again.” + +“Well, here I am,” said the tramp, smiling. “If you still want to see me +all you have to do is to look at me. I never thought before that I was +very much to look at.” + +“We want to talk to you,” said Mr. Sanders more seriously. “You told the +boys, did you not, that you and your friends had been making the old +house your headquarters?” + +“Not exactly ‘headquarters,’” replied the tramp. “We used to stay some +nights there.” + +“And you used the ghosts to scare people off or keep them away from the +old house?” + +“That’s what we did,” admitted the tramp, laughing loudly as he spoke. +“It would do your heart good if you could only have seen some of them +leave.” + +“What were those groans that we heard?” spoke up Fred. “I never quite +understood them. We found out about the birds in the chimney and the +speaking tube that ran from the kitchen to the front room, but how about +those groans?” + +“Why, there were usually two or three of us, and when we had visitors we +took our stand in different rooms and one answered the groan of the +others. Sometimes we groaned all together. Usually, though, we did not +have very much to do, because after one or two groans we usually found +the old house deserted.” + +“What about that automobile horn?” inquired George. + +“Oh, that was another way we had of scaring people, that was all.” + +“Where did you get the horn?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“I can’t just say. We had it a long time.” + +“It sounded, the boys tell me, very like the horn of the car that we had +taken from our garage.” + +The tramp looked into the face of Mr. Sanders a moment before he said, +“And you suspect, do you, that I took your car and left the horn here?” + +“Do you know where our car is?” inquired Mr. Sanders abruptly. “I told +my son to give you ten dollars for returning the old car. Here is the +money,” Mr. Sanders added, as he held forth a bill. + +“Thank you, sir,” said the tramp, as he took the money and thrust it +into his pocket. “I told the boys that I could be persuaded to accept +the reward; but about your other car, all I can say is that I don’t know +where it is now.” + +“Do you know who took it?” + +“I do not.” + +“Do you know how the fire started in the old house last night?” + +“No, sir. I don’t.” + +“But you had some flash-light powder and you set it off here. The house +may have caught fire from it.” + +“I don’t think it could possibly have got on fire that way. You see we +used that powder in pans and we set it off in two or three rooms at the +same time, just as we used to answer one another’s cries or groan +together. The fire couldn’t spread. The powder just flashed up and then +the fire was all out in a minute. Besides, the old house was no good +anyway. No one could live in it and my friends and I thought that if we +slept there occasionally no one would be any the worse for it. Of course +if there had been any objections made we should have been glad to pay +attention to them.” + +“I wish you would come back to the car with me, I want to speak to you +alone.” + +“All right, sir, just as you say,” responded the tramp, quickly +advancing and accompanying Mr. Sanders as he led the way across the +fields after he had bidden the boys remain where they then were. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI—CONCLUSION + + +Mr. Sanders and the tramp remained in the car a long time. Indeed, as +the minutes passed the boys became somewhat impatient. Frequently they +glanced toward the scene in the road in which Mr. Sanders and his +strange companion were evidently holding a very interesting +conversation. + +When an hour had elapsed the desire of the boys to depart became more +pronounced. A few of the country people meanwhile had come to view the +ruins of the famous old house, but they had little to say to the boys +and after they had inspected the ruins the most of them slowly departed. + +At last Fred said impatiently, “Look yonder! Mr. Sanders is taking that +man away in the car.” + +“I wonder where he is going?” said George, as he glanced at the +departing automobile. + +“Probably taking him to the lock-up,” suggested Fred. + +“If he’s taking the man to the lock-up I know some more that he ought +not to forget,” said George soberly. + +“So do I,” spoke up Fred, “and some of them aren’t more than a thousand +miles from here either.” + +However, after the departure of Mr. Sanders in the car, the boys became +more thoughtful. They had not received any word to remain where they +were, but George decided that it would not be wise for them to depart +until they had received some further instructions. Doubtless, he +explained, his father would return for them in a little while. + +Another hour had elapsed before Mr. Sanders came back. As soon as he was +discovered approaching, all the Go Ahead boys ran quickly across the +field and when they were informed, in response to their inquiries, that +Mr. Sanders was ready to take them home they all quickly climbed into +the automobile. + +“What did you do with the tramp?” inquired George as soon as the car +started. + +“I took him to the railroad station.” + +“Is he going to leave?” + +“He says he is.” + +“You seemed to have had a mighty interesting conversation. Did he tell +you all the sad, sweet story of his life?” + +“I knew much of it.” + +“You did?” demanded George in astonishment. “You did! Who is he? What is +he? How did you know him? Where did he come from? What is his name?” + +“Hold on,” interrupted Mr. Sanders with a laugh. “I can answer your +questions one at a time, but I cannot find any answer that might fit +them all alike. Let me tell you first of all that he didn’t explain +everything as fully as I wish he had, but he did tell me a few things.” + +“What were they?” demanded George impatiently. + +“Let me tell you first a little about himself,” said Mr. Sanders, +smiling at the interest of his young companions. “That tramp is the +younger brother of a great friend of mine. Indeed, his brother and I +were together almost all the time when we were boys. If I was not in his +house then he was in mine, or we were fishing in these brooks or nutting +in the woods or coasting on the hills. We very seldom were separated. +This younger brother—” + +“What is his name?” interrupted George. + +“I shan’t tell you his name now. Perhaps I will some other time, but he +was one of the most attractive boys I ever knew. He was very quiet in +his manner, and had the greatest faculty of making friends I ever knew +any one to have. His mother almost idolized him and she never held him +up to any task. If he got into mischief it was always the fault of the +other boys, she said. If he was kept after school or had any trouble +with the teachers she always told him that it was the teacher’s fault. +Whatever he did, to her was right. You boys want to be thankful that you +have mothers that hold you up to some things instead of upholding you in +everything you do. + +“Well, this man when he was a boy was too lazy to have any share in the +family life. Pleasant, good-natured, popular with the boys and girls, he +never did anything for any one else. If his mother wanted a pail of +water drawn from the old well behind the farmhouse—and they lived right +straight across the field in that house over yonder,” explained Mr. +Sanders, pointing as he spoke to a house that could be seen in the +distance, “he always had some excuse. If his mother had simply told him +to bring in a pail of water instead of trying to smooth the way for him +and said that he was too tired or not strong enough, if she had done +that and some other things like it I don’t believe this man to-day would +be tramping around the country. He has been a complete failure. He has +never learned to do anything well. He used to be the best baseball +player we had in all this part of the country. There wasn’t a fellow +that could catch him when we were in swimming in the old pond. He could +make a boat and sail a boat, but he just simply drifted on. By the way, +boys, did any of you ever stop to think of the fact that a boat never +drifts but in one direction?” + +“What’s that?” inquired John. + +“Why, down the stream,” replied Mr. Sanders quietly. “This boy grew up +to be a man and drifted into all kinds of bad ways. You see he had never +learned to work and besides there are two words in the English language +that he never could pronounce. One word has three letters in it and the +other has two, but little words though they are, he never seemed to be +able to pronounce them.” + +“I can’t think what the words are,” said George. + +“I know what they are,” broke in John. “They are ‘yes’ and ‘no.’” + +“That’s right,” replied Mr. Sanders with a smile. “They are the hardest +words in the language for a good many people to use. When they say ‘yes’ +they don’t say it in a way that means much, and when they say ‘no’ it +doesn’t mean much more. + +“His mother died years ago and I have always thought that this son was +the cause of her death. At one time, as I told you, he was just as +straight and attractive a boy as any of you.” + +“I guess the trouble with him was that he wasn’t a Go Ahead boy,” +suggested Fred. + +“That was one trouble,” replied Mr. Sanders with a smile, “and another +was that after he began to drift he couldn’t stop. You see if he hadn’t +begun he never could have come to the end to which he has. That’s a +strange thing to me that more people do not realize that if they don’t +begin, they never will come to the end.” + +“Did he explain to you,” inquired Fred, “why he shut me in the cellar of +the old Meeker House?” + +“No,” replied Mr. Sanders, “I didn’t know that you were shut in there.” + +“Well, I was. He caught me in the cellar and bolted the door on me. I +must have been in there an hour and a half.” + +“How did you get out? Did he let you out?” + +“No, sir, I went and pushed up the outside door.” + +“Well, why did you wait an hour and a half before you did that?” +responded Mr. Sanders with a laugh. + +“I’m sure I don’t know,” said Fred blankly. “I guess it was because I +didn’t think of it or try it.” + +“Very likely he meant it for a joke. Now, when I had my talk with him he +recognized me, although at first I didn’t recognize him. He did say some +things about scaring you boys away from the old place.” + +“Did he say anything about the way we left last night?” inquired George +mischievously. + +“Why, how did you leave last night?” inquired Mr. Sanders. + +“We left in a big hurry,” declared George. + +“What made you in such a hurry?” + +“We were trying to keep up with the man who was with us and was leading +the way,” said George demurely. + +Mr. Sanders joined in the laugh that followed and then said quickly, +“Our lost car will be brought back to-day.” + +“How do you know?” demanded George quickly. + +“I don’t think I shall explain all of that to you, my boy,” said Mr. +Sanders quietly. “It ought to be enough to know that it will be there.” + +“But suppose the tramp doesn’t bring it back?” suggested Grant. + +“I am not supposing anything about the tramp, or about any failure,” +replied Mr. Sanders, again smiling quietly. “All I say to you is that I +am confident that the car will be brought back.” + +“Did you find out who stole the car?” inquired John. + +“I don’t think it was ‘stolen.’ You might call it ‘borrowed.’” + +“Well, did you find out who ‘borrowed’ it then?” demanded John. + +“Yes.” + +“Who did?” said George eagerly. + +“There are several reasons why I shall not go farther into details,” +said Mr. Sanders. “You may draw such conclusions as you please. Very +likely they will not be incorrect. You have followed the events of the +summer more closely than I and I have no doubt can connect one with +another.” + +“Well, I think,” said George positively, “that the tramp took our car. +He’s a mighty good driver and knows all about a car. He didn’t intend to +sell it perhaps, but he wanted to use it for a few days.” + +“Are you sure he used it in the daytime?” inquired Mr. Sanders quietly. + +“Why, yes. When would he use it?” demanded George. + +“Let me suppose a case,” explained his father. “Just suppose a man and +his friends made it a practice to come to your garage nights and take +out your car after you had gone to bed. Suppose on one of these long +rides the car met with a bad accident. It was impossible to bring the +car back that night, so it was taken to a garage where it was said that +at least a week would be required to repair it. At the end of the week +the car is not repaired. Naturally the people whose automobile is +missing are sure the car has been stolen and they are sending word all +over the country for the police to be on the lookout for it. Meanwhile +the car is safe in a little town not more than ten miles distant from +the place where it belonged. Finally there comes a day when the car is +ready, but the man who took it and who had the accident has not money +enough to pay for the repairs. He doesn’t intend to steal the car, but +he is not able to bring it back to its owner. If the owner telephones to +the garage for a man to bring it to his home it is quite likely he may +see it soon.” + +“And did you let the tramp get away?” + +“I not only let him get away, but I gave him money to leave. I don’t +suppose he will use the money as I told him, but I am going to give him +a chance. I would rather help two men who do not deserve it than to let +one go who does. Besides,” Mr. Sanders added thoughtfully, “I thought of +his father and mother and how good they had been to me when I was a boy. +There,” he added, “I have told you more than I expected.” + +“Will the tramp come back?” inquired Grant. + +“I hope not. I doubt if he does, because the old Meeker House has now +gone and he has no place hereabout in which he can stay.” + +“Well, we found out what the spooks in the old house were,” said Fred. +“I guess that’s the way with most of such things.” + +“We certainly had a good time finding out,” said John laughingly. “I’m +glad we didn’t give up.” + +“So am I,” said Fred. “But then,” he added, “we are the Go Ahead boys +and have not learned how to do anything else.” + + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS +OLD HOUSE*** + + +******* This file should be named 35964-0.txt or 35964-0.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/5/9/6/35964 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/35964-0.zip b/35964-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de2b018 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-0.zip diff --git a/35964-8.txt b/35964-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df810db --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6407 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old +House, by Ross Kay + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old House + + +Author: Ross Kay + + + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [eBook #35964] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE +MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE*** + + +E-text prepared by Roger Frank, Juliet Sutherland, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + +by + +ROSS KAY + +Author of "The Search for the Spy," "The Air Scout," "Dodging the +North Sea Mines," "With Joffre on the Battle Line," "The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers' Island," "The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave," etc., etc. + + + + + + + +Copyright, 1916, +by +Barse & Hopkins + + + + +PREFACE + +In almost every rural community in the older parts of our country there +is a house which some of the country folk have believed to be "haunted." +As a rule this house is old and perhaps has fallen into partial decay. +The children passing on the country road move to the opposite side when +they draw near the building. Stories are current of scenes which have +been witnessed and sounds heard in the vacant dwelling. Perhaps even the +older people have not altogether outgrown their feeling of timidity when +they are near it. How baseless all such stories are and how easily most +of the unusual sights and sounds can be accounted for is of course +clearly understood. In this story I have tried to interest my young +readers in the attempts of four normal, go-ahead boys to solve the +mysteries connected with a venerable house near the home of one of them, +which was shunned by many of the simple country people. I have +endeavored to avoid all sensationalism and yet to interest the boys and +girls in a stirring story of the experiences of my heroes. I am not +without hope that the final solution of the mystery of the old Meeker +House may help my young readers a little more courageously to face other +problems, perhaps equally mysterious or perplexing, which may be +presented to them in other forms. At all events I sincerely hope that +the spirit and determination of the Go Ahead Boys will remain in their +minds after the story itself shall have long been forgotten. + + --Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + CHAPTER I--THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + CHAPTER II--COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + CHAPTER III--INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + CHAPTER IV--FLIGHT + CHAPTER V--A SURPRISE + CHAPTER VI--A PRISONER + CHAPTER VII--AN ESCAPE + CHAPTER VIII--THE LOST CAR + CHAPTER IX--ANOTHER FLIGHT + CHAPTER X--THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + CHAPTER XI--THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + CHAPTER XII--A HASTY DEPARTURE + CHAPTER XIII--WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + CHAPTER XIV--DISAPPOINTED + CHAPTER XV--A FAMOUS SPOT + CHAPTER XVI--ANOTHER LOSS + CHAPTER XVII--LEFT BEHIND + CHAPTER XVIII--THE ARRIVAL + CHAPTER XIX--AN INVITATION + CHAPTER XX--THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + CHAPTER XXI--AN EXPLANATION IN PART + CHAPTER XXII--A DARE + CHAPTER XXIII--LED BY A MAN + CHAPTER XXIV--THE END OF THE HOUSE + CHAPTER XXV--A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + CHAPTER XXVI--CONCLUSION + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + + + + +CHAPTER I--THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + + +"Do you see that house?" + +"You mean that low, old house on the corner of the road?" + +"Yes." + +"What of it?" + +"Well, that's one of the oldest houses in this part of the country." + +"It looks the part. How old is it?" + +"It's at least one hundred and seventy-five years old." + +"It's old enough to look better, then. Is that one of the houses that +Washington slept in?" + +"I guess so." + +"It must be, from the stories you have told me since I have been here. +How old was Washington, anyway, when he died?" + +"He was in his sixty-eighth year." + +"I think there's some mistake about that." + +"No, sir. Those are the correct figures. He was born in 1732 and he died +in 1799." + +"I'm not going to dispute you, George. I'll take your word for it, but +it always seemed to me that Washington's age must have been a good deal +greater than the histories say it was." + +"Why?" + +"Because he slept in so many houses. I have figured it up and if he had +spent about a quarter of an hour in every one of the houses that you say +he slept in, it will figure out that he was a good deal more than +sixty-seven years old. Indeed, I have begun to think that Methuselah was +an infant-in-arms compared with George Washington, if ten per cent of +the stories you have been telling us are true. By the way, how old was +Methuselah, anyway?" + +"'And all the days of Methuselah were nine hundred and sixty and nine +years and he died.'" + +"Well, poor old man, I should have thought he would have been ready to +die. Just think of it, having to live in this world almost a thousand +years! I wonder how his hearing was and if he could see straight. I have +always thought that no matter how long I might live I should want people +to feel when I came to die that I had a little more of a record than +born in 1899 and died some time in the future." + +"That's the best thing some men ever did." + +"What?" + +"Why, to die. They'd give up their places to others who could fill them +better." + +"What's all that got to do with that old house?" + +"Nothing. I didn't start to talk about Methuselah." + +"That's all right, but what about this house?" + +"It's haunted." + +A hearty laugh went up from the three boys who were the companions of +George Sanders in his automobile. + +The conversation which has been recorded had been carried on by George +Sanders and his friend Fred Button. These two boys, together with John +Clemens and Grant Jones, were close friends and schoolmates. Although +they were nearly of the same age they were markedly different in their +appearance. Fred, who was the pygmy of the party, was a little, +round-faced, bright-eyed fellow, who was able to say quick and keen +things and who was the inspiration of most of the pranks of which the +band was guilty. + +John Clemens was perhaps Fred's closest friend. He was six feet three +inches tall, but he did not weigh very much more than the shorter Fred, +who made up in breadth what he lacked in length. + +Grant Jones, the most quiet and thoughtful member of the party, seldom +entered into the wordy contests, although he took special delight in the +pranks of his comrades. + +George Washington Sanders was the owner of the automobile in which the +four boys were riding. + +The day was one of the most beautiful of early summer. In Northern New +Jersey, not far from the border of New York State, George's father had +an extensive farm. To this place from their early childhood the four +friends had been accustomed to come from the great city and the many +good times they had enjoyed there seemed to increase in number and +quality with every succeeding summer. + +Not all their summers had been passed on the farm, however. There had +been frequent trips, which the boys had taken to different parts of +their own land and others. A few years before this time they had been +accompanied by the father or uncle of one of the boys, who had acted as +guardian and guide. On these various trips they had not only had many +enjoyable times, but also many stirring experiences. Some of these +adventures have already been told in other stories of this series. + +Among themselves the boys frequently referred to the quartet as the Go +Ahead boys. They had selected this name as one that was most expressive +of their purposes. They had found it in the famous motto of Davy +Crockett, who, years ago, was himself familiarly known as "Go Ahead" +Crockett. + +On the day when this story opens they were on their way to George's +farm. They had approached within a mile of their destination when their +host had called their attention to the low building which commonly was +referred to as the Meeker House. It was an unpretentious structure, +containing a story and a half, with a lean-to or addition, that looked +much as if it had been built as an afterthought, or as a postscript is +added to a letter. + +The sides of the building were weather-beaten and it was manifest that +it had been long since any one had dwelt in the house. + +"It seems to me, George," spoke up Fred, "that you're finding new +historical places around the farm every summer. Let me see, what was it +last summer?" + +"You are doing better, Fred," laughed George. "You remember now that +there was a last summer. I have sometimes been afraid you wouldn't +remember even that much, but for your sake I'll tell you that last +summer I told you the story of the young fellow who was captured in +Ramapo Pass. He was Washington's messenger, you will remember, although +he did not know it at the time." + +"I do recall now," said Fred pompously, "some information you were kind +enough to dole out to us. It seems to me that you told me that this +young fellow was sent purposely by Washington down through the Ramapo +Valley so that he would be captured by the British and taken to New +York. If I'm correct he had a letter sewed inside the lining of his coat +and this letter contained instructions for General Heath, who was at +Morristown, to join him, that is Washington and not the boy, in taking +New York." + +"That's right. It all comes back to me, too," joined in Grant. "This +fellow was taken to New York and he felt pretty mad at Washington. He +could have found his way across the country all right, he thought, and +would have given the message to General Heath without any trouble, but +Washington insisted upon his going through to Ramapo Valley and of +course he was caught. Poor chap, he didn't know that that was the very +thing Washington was planning to do. He wanted him caught so that his +letter would be found and Clinton wouldn't dare leave New York." + +"What did Clinton want to leave New York for?" broke in John. "I can't +understand why anybody would want to leave little, old New York. That's +the best town on the globe." + +"He wanted to take his army south to help Cornwallis, who was bottled up +on the Yorktown peninsula. That was the trick that Washington played on +him. He kept Clinton here, and when at last Clinton got his eyes opened, +he found out that Washington's army was already down across the Delaware +and headed for Chesapeake Bay." + +"Did he arrive in time?" inquired Fred innocently. + +"For further and detailed information I refer you to any primary history +of the United States," said Grant laughingly. "That's one of the things +no American boy ought to have to learn. He ought to know it before he +begins." + +"What about this house back here?" said Fred. "You seem to point it out +as if you thought there was something peculiar about it." + +"I told you that it's haunted." + +Again the boys laughed heartily as Grant said, "Anybody would think to +hear you talk, George, that you belonged back in the days when they +hanged witches." + +"You mean burned," spoke up Fred promptly. + +"No, I don't mean 'burned' the witches, I mean 'hanged,'" retorted +Grant. "There are some ignorant people who sometimes talk about the +people of the Salem Colony burning witches, but they didn't burn +them--they hanged them." + +"Pardon me," said Fred demurely. "I stand corrected." + +"But there really is something queer about this house," said George. "I +know, for I've been there." + +The boys all looked back at the little building, which now was far +behind them. The quiet that rested upon it seemed like that of a +cemetery. It plainly belonged to another generation. + +"What do you mean by its being haunted!" demanded Fred, at last breaking +in upon the silence. + +"I'm telling you what the common report is," said George, somewhat +testily. "Everybody says it is haunted." + +"But you said you yourself knew it was." + +"No, I didn't. I said there was something peculiar about it." + +"Go on with your story, George," called John. "Don't keep us in this +burning suspense. What was it?" + +"Why, I went over there one day," explained George, somewhat +reluctantly. "It was just at sunset and a terrible thunder shower had +come up and I ran to the old Meeker House to get in out of the rain." + +"When did you learn to do that?" broke in Fred. + +"I didn't have to learn," declared George. "At all events I got inside +the house and waited for the storm to pass. But it didn't pass. When it +struck the hills over yonder it was turned back by colder currents of +air, so I got the storm coming and going. The first thing I knew the old +place was dark and then--" + +"And then what?" demanded Grant. + +"And then,--things began to happen." + +"What happened?" inquired Grant. "Don't keep us in this terrible +suspense." + +"Well, there wasn't a breath of air stirring," explained George, "but +the window shutters began to slam a half a dozen times and I heard +groans that seemed to come up from the cellar and I was almost sure that +once I heard something or somebody call my name." + +"That's a good one," laughed John, who in spite of his flippant manner +was strongly moved by the story of his friend. "You're always expecting +somebody to call you by name whether they know you or not." + +"Oh, but they know _of_ him," suggested Fred. "I know _of_ a good many +people that I don't know by sight; for example, there's the President." + +"Keep still, fellows," ordered Grant, "and let George tell his story. He +was as far as the slamming of the shutters and the groans that came from +the cellar and the call which some of the evil spirits made on him by +name. Go on, George," he added, turning to his friend, "tell us what +happened next." + + + + +CHAPTER II--COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + + +"I don't know just what happened next," laughed George. "There were two +peals of thunder so near together that you could hardly clap your hands +between them. When the first one came and I heard that call, I didn't +stand on the order of my departure. When the next clap sounded I was +away down the road under that old oak tree." + +All the four boys laughed heartily, even George apparently not being +crestfallen by his lack of courage on the night he was describing. + +"What is it you call the house?" inquired John. + +"The Meeker House." + +"You think it's haunted?" + +"I didn't say so," responded George somewhat warmly. "I merely said it +is a common report that it is a haunted house. I'm just telling you what +happened one night when I ran in there to get out of a storm." + +"Poor old house," said George thoughtfully, as he looked back at the old +building, which still could be seen in the distance. "It makes me think +of Uncle Sim. He's the last leaf on the tree and I guess this is the +oldest house in this part of the country." + +Uncle Sim was an aged negro, who for many years had been in the employ +of George's father. His labor was no longer efficient, but his faithful +services in the years that were gone had caused Mr. Sanders to provide +for the wants of the gray-haired negro. Uncle Sim's form was bowed with +the weight of years which he carried and his trembling limbs showed how +much he had suffered from the "mis'ry." Indeed, the boys had become +convinced that there was no topic concerning which the old man loved to +talk as he did concerning his various aches and pains. + +In spite of his afflictions, however, Uncle Sim was a warm friend of the +boys. When they got into mischief Uncle Sim's face was lifted heavenward +so that he was unable to see any of the pranks they committed and +therefore was unable to impart any information when he was asked as to +his knowledge of their deeds. He was a great favorite of the boys and +many of his stories had been familiar to them from their earliest +childhood. He knew why the red squirrel and the black hated each other +so intensely. He was well informed concerning the perpetual warfare that +existed between the dogs and cats on the farm. The call of the bluejays +was in a language which Uncle Sim claimed to understand. And although he +did not talk back to the chattering jays, nevertheless he strongly +believed that they were much more guarded in their conversations when he +was nearby. + +"You go ask Uncle Sim if the house is haunted," repeated George. "He'll +tell you what he thinks and you won't have to wait very long for him to +do it, either." + +"Has he never been there?" asked Fred. + +"You'd better ask him," declared George. + +"What do you honestly think about it yourself, George?" said Grant more +seriously. + +"I don't know just what to think. I haven't been there since--" + +"Since when?" spoke up John encouragingly. + +"Since the last time I was there." + +"When was that?" + +"That time I was telling you about when I ran in there to get out of the +rain." + +"Will you go back there now if we'll go?" challenged Fred. + +"I don't mind going," said George, "but I don't believe we'll have time +this afternoon." His three companions laughed derisively and so aroused +his spirit that he said brusquely, "That's all right, fellows. I'll go +back there as soon as any one of you will go." + +"All right, sir," called John. "Stop your car, and we'll all of us go +back to the old Meeker House and find out if what you have been telling +us is true." + +"Who ever heard," broke in Grant, "of ghosts walking around in the +daytime? The time for us to go there is when the ghosts are showing up +well." + +"You didn't tell us, George, what the ghosts were?" + +"No, I didn't see them," replied George. + +"What do they say they are?" + +"Why, the common report is, that ever since the days of the Revolution +the ghosts of the Cowboys and Skinners have made their headquarters in +the old Meeker House and whenever there's a night that is especially +dark or there is a particularly heavy storm, then they come there and +join in the racket." + +"Cowboys?" demanded John. "What do you mean? Those fellows that drive +the cattle out on the plains?" + +"No, sir, I mean the men who lived in this part of the country when +Washington was fighting for the independence of the United States. But +even if they did live here they wouldn't help him. They said they didn't +belong to either side, but the Cowboys usually took advantage of both +sides. When the men were away from home they would go into a house, if +they thought there was any money hidden in some old stocking, and they +would take the women and hold their feet out over the fire until they +told where the money was." + +"What were the Skinners?" inquired John. + +"Why, they were about the same kind of men, the only difference being +that the Cowboys took the families of the patriots, while the Skinners +paid their first attention to the Tory families. I guess it didn't make +much difference to either party as long as they found some money or +could get any valuables." + +"What did they put up with such things for?" + +"They had to put up with more or less of it," answered George. "You see +most of the men were away from home, fighting in the army. That gave the +Cowboys and Skinners their chance and they took it. When the men came +back the Cowboys and Skinners were gone." + +"They were something like Georgie Porgie, weren't they?" laughed Grant. +"I don't know who he was, but when a certain part of the population of +which he was afraid began to get busy, Georgie Porgie ran away,--likewise +the Cowboys and Skinners." + +"It's all very interesting," spoke up Fred, "but I don't believe there's +such a thing in all the world as a ghost." + +"All right, sir," said George warmly. "All I want you to do is to talk +to Uncle Sim and if he doesn't convince you that the Meeker House is the +special place where all the people that walk around in the night have +their headquarters, then I'm mistaken." + +"I'll ask him just as soon as we get back," said Fred promptly. + +Not long afterward the automobile entered the beautiful grounds of the +farm where the four boys were spending a part of the summer. The place +was attractive because of its quietness and the deep shade in the front +yard. A collie dog, lying on the ground, arose and stretched itself and +then bounded toward George as soon as the boys alighted. Around the +corner of the garage at that moment came Uncle Sim, his broad-brimmed +hat carried in his hand and his face shining with perspiration and good +nature. + +"Well, Uncle Sim," called Fred. "You can't guess where we've been." + +"No, suh, no, suh," replied the negro, "I reckon I can't. Mos' gen'lly I +finds out right soon whar yo' boys has been. Sometimes I can tell the +d'rection in which yo' all is goin', even when I can't see none o' +yo'all." + +"How's that?" demanded John. + +"Why, from the d'rection in which all the dogs and cats and birds and +cows and I reckon everything that's able to get away, is movin'." + +The boys laughed heartily at Uncle Sim's statement and Grant said, "But, +Uncle Sim, you know we are the Go Ahead boys." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh, I reckon I's somewhat familar with dat ar fac'." + +"Uncle Sim, have you ever been in the Meeker House?" spoke up Grant +abruptly. + +For a moment the old negro was silent as he stared blankly at the boys. +Shaking his head he said, "What fo' yo' ask me that question?" + +"Because I want to know," said Grant. + +"No, suh. I ain't never been inside the Meeker House, but I's been so +close dat I could hear what was er goin' on." + +"Why, what is going on there?" inquired Fred. "The house seemed to me to +be deserted. Does any one live there?" + +"No, suh. No, suh, no one lives dar. Leastwise, no one live dar in the +daytime." + +"Who lives there at night?" inquired Fred. + +Once more the negro was silent and it was evident that the boy's +question had aroused certain feelings in the heart of Uncle Sim. + +"Yo' all better take my advice," said the old negro, shaking his head in +a still more solemn manner. "Yo' better keep away from de Meeker House." + +"Why?" inquired John. + +"No good comes to anybody dat goes to the Meeker House in the night +time." + +"But how do you know, Uncle Sim? You say you have never been there?" + +"Yo' all keep away from dar. Min' what I tell you. Don't none o' you' +boys go near dat old Meeker House after sundown." + +"But you make us want to go all the more," said Grant. + +Uncle Sim merely shook his head and made no further comment. It was +plain, however, that he was seriously troubled by the statement of Grant +and that he was sincere in his warning. + +"I say, fellows," called Fred quickly, "why don't we go over to the +Meeker House to-night? It looks as if it is going to be cloudy," he +added as he glanced up at the sky. "This will be just the ideal night. +If there's anything uncanny around the place we'll be likely to find it +out. Oh, you needn't go if you don't want to," he added quickly upon +George's unspoken protest. "You and Uncle Sim will be excused, if you +don't want to go." + +"If you fellows go I'm not going to be left behind," spoke up George +promptly. + +"Then it's all fixed," declared Fred gleefully. "We'll go to the Meeker +House to-night." + + + + +CHAPTER III--INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + + +The Go Ahead boys were excited when they entered the house of their +friend and that night when they gathered about the supper table their +one theme of conversation was the proposed visit to the old Meeker +House. + +Occasionally throughout the conversation there was an expression on the +face of George different from that of his companions. However, none of +them was aware of the occasional smile, or of the keen look with which +George occasionally glanced about the table. At other times the +expression of his face was serious and his interest in the suggested +visit apparently was as keen as that of any of his friends. + +The boys decided to wait until darkness had fallen before they started +on their expedition. + +"It's just eight o'clock," said Grant, as they left the house and +prepared to take their places in the automobile which was awaiting their +coming. + +"Eight o'clock and all's not well, I'm afraid," suggested Fred. + +"Are you afraid?" demanded John with a laugh. + +"No, I'm not afraid, but somehow when I think of this business," replied +Fred, "I find I have some shivers." + +"You had better not go, my lad," said John solemnly. "This is no place +for infants or those afflicted with chills." + +"I'm not chilly enough to stay home if all of you are going," retorted +Fred. + +"It's just the kind of a night we want," spoke up George. "There isn't +any moon and it's going to be dark." + +"Those clouds look as if it might rain," suggested Grant. + +"That will be all the better," said George. "The darker the night the +better the spooks behave. They say it's almost impossible to find any +there on a moonlight night." + +"I hope we'll find some to-night," laughed John, but his voice somehow +seemed to belie his confidence. + +At all events there was not much conversation in the automobile as it +sped swiftly down the road. + +George, who was driving, occasionally referred to the various stories he +had heard of the deeds in the Meeker House, but his efforts did not meet +with any marked response until he said, "I have heard that Claudius +Smith sometimes shows up in the old house." + +"Who's he?" + +"He _was_ a Cowboy. He lived more than one hundred and twenty-five years +ago. You have got to speak of him as one who 'was' and not 'is'." + +"What makes him come back to the old house?" + +"It was one of his favorite places, I'm told." + +"What was he?" + +"I told you he was a Cowboy. He got to acting so badly that at last all +the farmers and their boys that could be spared from the army got +together and chased him clear down on Long Island." + +"Did they get him?" inquired Fred. + +"They did. They brought him back and took him to Goshen, where they +hanged him in the old courtyard." + +"I shouldn't think he would come back here to the Meeker House," +suggested Grant. "I should think his ghost would 'hang' around the court +house up at Goshen." + +"I can't tell you about that," said George, "but it may be that he +follows the road he used to travel. That may be the reason why part of +the time he's here at the old Meeker House." + +"He must have been a great boy," suggested Fred. + +"He certainly was, and he wasn't the only one. I have heard my father +tell about a man here in Jersey named Fagan. He was one of the Cowboys +that they used to call the Pine Robbers." + +"Who were they?" inquired John. + +"Why there were a dozen or more bands of these Pine Robbers. They used +to make their headquarters in the Pines back of Lakewood. They would dig +a hole in the sand and hide in it the stuff they had stolen, and then, +when they had enough to make up a cargo they would take it to Toms River +and ship it to New York, where William Franklin helped them dispose of +it." + +"Who was William Franklin?" demanded Grant. + +"Why, every educated man knows that William Franklin was the last royal +governor of New Jersey. He was the son of old Ben Franklin. He inherited +his father's brains, but not his father's disposition. He was one of the +bitterest of all the Tories, and when the war of the Revolution broke +out he went to New York to be with his friends." + +"What happened to this man Fagan?" asked Fred. "Is his ghost around +here, too?" + +"I can't tell you," replied George, "whether it is here or not. I know +Fagan got to be such a bad man stealing, shooting, tormenting the women +and children that finally a big gang of men took after him and caught +him down here between Trenton and Freehold." + +"Did they do anything to him after they caught him?" inquired Grant. + +"Not very much. They just hanged him from the limb of a big tree by the +side of the road and left the body swinging there in the air for two or +three days. Finally they left the head in the noose, stuck a long pipe +between the jaws and my grandfather used to tell me that the head was +there until the crows had picked out the eyes and left nothing but the +grinning skull." + +"That's a nice story to tell just before we make our bows at a spook +party," said Fred. + +The boy was striving to speak lightly, but his voice sounded strange +even in his own ears. Indeed, by this time, after the gruesome stories +of the Cowboys had been told, the nerves of all the boys were on edge. + +The dim outlines of the Meeker House were now plainly visible. The +silence that rested over the place was unbroken except for the sighing +of the wind as it swept through the ancient pine trees that grew in the +front yard. + +"This is a ghost story up to date, isn't it?" said Grant. "I don't +suppose many of those Cowboys or Skinners ever traveled around in +automobiles." + +"Probably not," said John dryly, and conversation abruptly ceased. + +"George, don't you think you had better leave your automobile up here on +the road and not take it clear down to the house?" inquired Fred in a +whisper, when they drew near the place they were seeking. + +"What for?" inquired George. + +"Oh, nothing, only I thought it would be more out of the way there. You +see the house is on the corner and if some one makes a sharp turn there +they might run into it without seeing it." + +"Just as you say," replied George good-naturedly. + +Acting upon the suggestion, the automobile was stopped about a hundred +yards from the house and the boys at once prepared to walk across the +yard toward the front door. + +No one spoke until Fred whispered sharply, "What's that?" + +"What's what?" retorted George, also speaking in a whisper. + +"Nothing but a branch creaking up in the tree," suggested Grant. + +"I guess that's what it was," assented Fred, and the four boys at once +resumed their advance upon the ancient house. + +"Come on, fellows," whispered George. "We'll try the front door first." + +The attempts of the boys, however, to open the door were unavailing. The +door was massive and although it creaked and groaned it was strong and +all the attempts to open it proved failures. + +"You stay here, fellows," whispered George. "I'll go around to the back +of the house and see if I can get in there." + +"I'll go with you," suggested Fred. + +"No, you won't, you'll stay right here and defend these fellows who are +a good deal more scared than they are willing to own," retorted George. + +The trio remained in silence before the front door, waiting for some +word from their friend, who at once had carried out his suggested plan +and had gone to the rear of the house. + +Suddenly and without any word being spoken the heavy door in front of +the waiting boys slowly opened. It creaked noisily but there was no +question that George succeeded and the door was being opened from +within. + +Grant was the first to enter, but instantly he stepped back and in a +voice that trembled said quickly, "What's that? What's that?" + +There was a noise of flying wings in the room before them, but not one +of the boys was able to see any of the winged creatures. Back and forth +they flew, the unseen birds, their wings noisily flapping and their +cries steadily increasing in volume. + +Startled as all the boys were by the unexpected sound they withdrew to +the porch in front of the door and in whispers talked over the best plan +for them to follow. + +"I say we go ahead," said Grant at last. "We don't want to be scared out +by a little thing like this." + +"That's all right," agreed Fred. "You're so bold, I'll let you go ahead. +I shall be satisfied to-night to be one of the go behind boys. I'm not +afraid," he hastily added when Grant laughed derisively. "I'll follow +you wherever you dare lead. Now then start if you want to." + +No more was said and slowly and silently the boys once more entered the +room into which the door directly opened. + +This time again when only a few steps had been taken, by a common +impulse they stopped and Fred whispered, "Where is George?" + +"He's somewhere around here," whispered Grant in reply. + +"But I don't see him or hear him," declared Fred. "We ought to find out +what has happened." + +"Oh, he's all right," said John confidently. "Come on, let's go ahead." + +"We haven't any light," suggested Fred. + +"We'll have one pretty soon. That's probably what George has gone for," +whispered John. "He'll be back in a minute." + +"I don't believe we had better try to go any farther. A good many of +these old houses have steps from one room to another. I don't want Fred +to fall and break his neck." + +"Don't you worry about my----" began Fred, but he stopped abruptly when +suddenly the shutters in the room directly over their head banged +noisily against the side of the house. At the same time the sound of the +flying creatures in the room was heard again and as if to make matters +worse a sound very like a groan came from the stairway. The weird +interruption was followed by a wild laugh that came from the same +stairway and a moment later the confusion was increased by a sound more +unexpected than any which as yet had been heard by the Go Ahead boys in +the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER IV--FLIGHT + + +There had been a moment of intense silence which was sharply broken by a +long whistling sound, that seemed to come from some place directly +behind the spot where the boys were standing. This sound was followed by +a prolonged sigh and this in turn was abruptly ended when out of the +darkness there came a call, "F-r-e-d! Fred Button!" The call was in a +low tone but coming as it did after the startling events which had +occurred was almost more than Fred was able to bear. His nerves were +unstrung and without a word he turned and swiftly made for the door, +which fortunately had been left open. + +Nor had Fred been long out of the house before he was joined by his +companions. George, who previously had gone around to the rear door, +came as quickly as John and Grant. + +For a brief time the boys assembled under the branches of a huge cherry +tree that was growing in one corner of the yard. + +"What do you make of that?" demanded George. "I told you you might hear +something about Fagan and the Cowboys if you went into that old Meeker +House." + +"It wasn't what I heard about them that troubled me," retorted Fred. "It +was when I heard my own name called." + +"Honest?" demanded George. + +"Yes, sir. You ask the other fellows. Somebody right behind me called +'Fred.' 'Fred Button.' I was standing where I could see straight through +the window and I am perfectly sure there wasn't anybody there. If you'll +tell me how the thing was done I'll be much obliged to you." + +"It wasn't done at all," laughed George. "You were just dreaming. It's +one of those attacks of nightmare that you have some times. Don't you +remember when we were at Mackinac,[1] how one night we had to throw some +cold water in your face to make you wake up?" + +"I guess that was the same night," retorted Fred, "when I had to +administer condign and physical chastisement to you, you were kicking so +in the bed." + +"Yes, I have a very vivid recollection of that part of that night." + +"Almost as vivid as you have of to-night," laughed George. + +"I don't see anything to laugh at," said Fred sharply. "You ask the +other fellows if somebody didn't call my name." + +"It did sound like it," said John, "but then we were ready to believe +almost anything and when Fred said there was somebody calling him we all +heard 'Fred' on every side of us. What are we doing out here, anyway? +Why don't we go back there and look into it?" + +"I'm going to look into it," said Fred quickly, "but I'm not going to +look when I can't see. It's so dark to-night that you can't find +anything." + +"You seem to have found some things that made you leave the room faster +than George goes when he runs the hundred in ten flat." + +"Maybe I did," admitted Fred, "but if I did I want to tell you I never +ran a race in which I was so hard pushed as I was to-night. There wasn't +room to put a sheet of paper between Grant and me." + +"That's all right," spoke up Grant. "I didn't take any part in your +foolish conversation, but what I want to know is how you can account for +these things." + +"If you ask me," said George, "I'm not accounting for them." + +"But there's some way to find out what these things mean. There isn't +one of us a big enough fool to believe that there is such a thing as a +ghost and yet we got into the old Meeker House,--" + +"If there isn't any ghost," spoke up George, "then I don't see where the +trouble is. You can't be afraid of something that isn't, can you?" + +"I don't suppose you can," admitted Grant, "but sometimes you can be +afraid of things you think are when they are not." + +"You're getting too deep for me," said Fred. "What I want to know is +about those wings. That room seemed to be just full of something that +was flying all around." + +"I'll tell you what it was," spoke up John. + +"What was it?" inquired Fred quickly. + +"Cherubs." + +"What?" + +"Cherubs. Don't you know what cherubs are? They are just heads with +wings. You can find them on old tomb-stones and in the pictures of some +of the old books. I have always thought that a cherub must be almost as +happy as the people said he used to be. He didn't have to bother about +any clothes except neckties and a hat. It doesn't take him very long to +get from one place to another. In fact I think if Fred here was a cherub +he would have had less trouble getting out of that house to-night than +he did." + +"You seem to be greatly troubled about my leaving that house," spoke up +Fred testily. "I noticed that I wasn't alone." + +"Except when you started," suggested Grant. "We thought you were in +trouble and came out to see if we could help." + +"You did?" laughed Fred derisively. "I'll tell you what I'll do, Grant, +if you'll go back into that house with me right now I'll go too." + +"I'm going back there," said Grant slowly, "but as has been said I am +going back when I can see something." + +"That's what I thought," retorted Fred tauntingly. + +"It's all right, fellows," spoke up George. "I guess we have had enough +for one night. I don't suppose there really is anything in the things we +have heard to-night, and we'll find out pretty soon just what it is, but +until we do I think it's great fun to go into the old house and stir up +the spooks." + +"Do you know, I have an idea what those flying creatures were?" +suggested John. + +"What were they?" inquired George. + +"Bats probably." + +"Bats?" exclaimed Fred scornfully. "Bats? Why those things had wings at +least two feet long. You could hear them flapping over your head." + +"That's about on the scale that you heard and saw everything to-night, +Fred. That is, everything except the length of the steps you took when +you were leaving. I would like to understand how a fellow who is only +five feet four can take steps that are ten feet long." + +"There's only one answer to that," said George, "and that is, he +didn't." + +"You don't know what you're talking about," retorted Grant. "You didn't +see him. I did." + +"See me?" exclaimed Fred. "See me! Why his hands were right on my +shoulder all the while. I couldn't shake him off. He almost had me there +two or three times. I'm not sure that I wouldn't rather have Fagan's +spook get hold of me than Grant's hands when he is as scared as he was +to-night." + +"Well, fellows, what shall we do?" inquired George. "Do you want to give +it up or go back?" + +"Both," said Fred quickly. "We're not going back again to-night and +we're not going to give it up. We're going ahead and find out what there +is in that tomfoolery." + +"Well, I see you have a little piece of nerve left yet," laughed George. +"I told you what was coming but you wouldn't believe me." + +"Was that the reason why you went outside, George?" demanded John. "You +remember, fellows," he added, turning to his companions, "George went +around to the back of the old house. He was outside where he could get a +fine running start if he had to." + +"That may all be," said George slowly, "but my running start wasn't much +compared with the one you fellows had. If you didn't get a running start +I am wondering what time you would make if you had one. My, what a thing +it would be at the track meet to have one of these ghosts to start the +fellows off. I think the next time I see Grant on the track I'll yell +Fagan at him. I think he will break the record if I do. Especially if +Fred is just ahead of him. If you're not going back into the house," he +continued, "I think we had better go back to the machine and start for +home." + +The boys all agreed and soon were seated in the car, riding swiftly back +toward the farm. + +Their confidence returned in proportion to the distance that intervened +between them and the house which they had just visited. Indeed, when at +last they arrived at the farmhouse every one was loud in his declaration +that he had not been frightened by what had occurred and was strong in +his determination to go back and investigate the things which had seemed +so mysterious. + +Nevertheless, in spite of their boasting, it was plain that Fred was +somewhat chagrined by the quickness and rapidity of his departure from +the old Meeker House. Several times that evening a sly allusion to his +speed brought a quick retort. + +The following morning, however, the courage and good spirits of the boys +had returned in full measure. Even Fred was not afraid to acknowledge +his fear of the night before and laughed as heartily as any of his +friends when they described his antics in his flight from the house. + +"That doesn't make any difference," he asserted strongly. "I'm still one +of the Go Ahead boys and I haven't given up the plan I spoke about." + +"What's your plan, Freddie?" laughed John. + +"I'm going to look into the old house by daylight." + +"I wouldn't do that yet," suggested George soberly. "It seems to me the +best plan will be for us to go down there again to-night and find out +whether or not there really is anything in what we thought we heard and +saw last night." + +"We might take a gun," suggested Grant. + +"What would you shoot?" said Fred scornfully. "Suppose you did find a +spook and shot it, what good would it do? I suppose they aren't like +other people." + +After a long consultation it finally was agreed that another visit to +the mysterious house should be made that evening and then if anything +strange occurred the boys would make further investigation the following +day. + +----- +[1] See "The Go Ahead Boys on Smugglers' Island." + + + + +CHAPTER V--A SURPRISE + + +Meanwhile Fred had decided that he would make some investigations of his +own. His apparent lack of courage had reacted now and he was determined +to do something which would enable him to redeem himself in the eyes of +his companions. + +Accordingly when his friends decided early in the afternoon that they +would take the automobile and go to the country club for a game of +tennis he excused himself on the plea that there were some other and +very important matters to which he must attend. + +It was a matter of self-denial for Fred to decline to join his +companions in a visit to the country club. This place throughout the +summer afternoons was one that was marked in the region. Crowds of young +people assembled there and the tennis courts and golf links were +occupied by people who were finding their vacation days passing all too +rapidly in the beautiful region. + +To the protests of his friends Fred refused to listen. Even the fact +that his absence might prevent a game of tennis from being played did +not appeal to him. He quietly and steadfastly adhered to his purpose. + +Soon after luncheon he saw his friends depart, although the last words +he heard were their calls for him to reconsider and join them. + +Previous to their departure George called Fred into the library and in a +low voice said to him, "Take my advice, lad, and don't try it." + +"Don't try what?" Fred inquired. + +"You know what I mean." + +"I haven't the least idea." + +"Well, then I tell you again that my advice to you is not to do it." + +"But I don't know what you mean." + +"If you'll think it over for two or three hours I'm sure you'll find +out," declared George and he withdrew from the room. + +George's warning was still fresh in Fred's mind when the boys no longer +could be seen. He was still mystified by the strange warning. He was +positive that he had not spoken to any of his friends concerning the +project in his mind and therefore it was impossible that George could +have heard any word of his plans. + +Assured that his companions had departed, Fred soon afterward set forth +on his solitary expedition. He had, however, not entered the road before +he saw the automobile returning. + +"What's wrong?" he called as the car stopped in front of the long, +winding driveway that led to the farmhouse, which was located back on +the hillside. + +"I went off without my tennis racquet," explained George. "You have +decided to come with us, haven't you, Fred? + +"No, I'm not going," replied Fred. + +"But you're going somewhere," said George. "What are you doing down here +in the road if you're not? I thought you had some very important matters +which you had to attend to this afternoon?" + +"I have," and Fred refused to listen to the renewed pleadings of his +friend, although he did not start on his way to the old Meeker House +until once more the automobile had passed out of sight. He was +suspicious as he walked on that George's return for the racquet had been +a pretense on his part. He was somewhat suspicious now that George +believed he was about to go back to the old house, although what had +given him that impression it was impossible for him to say. + +On his journey Fred had taken with him the collie dog which belonged to +George. The animal was unusually beautiful and its owner was exceedingly +proud of it, as it had won a prize whenever he had exhibited it. + +Delighted to be permitted to accompany Fred the intelligent animal +expressed his pleasure in his own noisy and active manner. + +It was not until Fred at last had arrived at the road in front of the +old house that the collie displayed any uneasiness. When Fred turned in +at the open gateway the dog, looking up into his face whined, and then +apparently convinced that protests on his part were unavailing, turned +and ran from the place. + +Startled by the unexpected action Fred returned to the road and watched +the dog as it fled swiftly homeward. A feeling of uneasiness crept over +him despite his attempt to laugh. It was impossible for spooks to be +found, he assured himself, on such a day. The afternoon sun, warm, and +yet not unduly warm, was flooding the beautiful region with its beams. +The fertile land, the attractive houses, even the woods back upon the +hillside all seemed to be sharing in the absolute quiet that prevailed. +Not a sound was to be heard save the noisy flights of the winged +grasshoppers or the occasional unmusical sound which proclaimed the +presence of locusts. + +Determined to ignore the momentary impression which the unwillingness of +the dog to accompany him into the old house had aroused, Fred once more +turned toward the rear of the old building. A fallen grape-arbor on his +right and the tangled mass of vines that grew along the ground showed +how long it had been since the place had received any attention. There +was an air of neglect and decay manifest wherever he looked. The passing +boys had thrown stones or snowballs at the windows until only a few +panes were left. The chimneys had crumbled in part, so that not one was +standing in its original form. The grass was high and tangled and the +shrubs in the yard were rank and overgrown. The place which manifestly +at one time had been the abode of people who had given it every care and +affection had now been forgotten. + +And yet, was it really forgotten? Fred vividly recalled the experience +of the preceding evening as he advanced toward the kitchen door. The +door still was hanging upon its hinges and was only partly closed. +Doubtless it had been left ajar by George in his exit the night before. + +Fred stepped cautiously inside the building. The silence that followed +for a time was unbroken. The very stillness itself produced its effect +upon the boy and when he stopped and looked intently all about him, his +heart was beating rapidly, although he assured himself there was no +cause for fear. + +Suddenly from the front room came a sound that was unusual and somewhat +startling in the prevailing stillness. It was a sound not unlike that +produced by a noisy rattler in the hands of a small boy. The noise, +however, was forgotten, when, to Fred's intense amazement, which +included perhaps an element of alarm, he was startled by the sound of +footsteps on the stairway. + +Once more he assured himself that it was broad daylight. Again he +recalled the statement which he had heard many a time that in such +houses there was nothing to be feared except after the shades of night +had fallen. He could plainly see the rays of the afternoon sun as they +entered through the open window and fell across the floor of the room in +which he was standing. + +But the footsteps could not be denied. The sound became plainer. For an +instant Fred glanced timidly toward the door and was strongly tempted to +run from the place. + +Before he started, however, the footsteps ceased, the old door at the +foot of the stairway creaked upon its hinges and a moment later Fred saw +standing before him a man, whose appearance proclaimed him to be a +tramp. + +The surprise was mutual, and for a moment the man and the boy stared +blankly at each other. Fred suspected that the stranger doubtless had +been sleeping in the upper room. Indeed the boy laughed in his relief as +he was confident now that he had discovered the source of the strange +sounds that had been heard the preceding evening. + +"Hello, young man," called the tramp in a low, guttural voice. "Did you +come in here to wake me up? I told me valet not to call me until five +o'clock." + +"No, I didn't come in here to wake you up," said Fred quietly. + +"Maybe you come from the hospital?" + +"No," said Fred simply. + +"I'm expecting somebody from the hospital." + +"What's the matter? Are you sick?" + +"Yes, I be. Leastwise, I've got some symptoms I don't like." + +"Tell me what the trouble is," suggested Fred good-naturedly. "Perhaps I +can help you." + +"From the best I can find out I think I am threatened with hydrostatic +internal spontaneous combustion." + +"It's more likely your conscience," laughed Fred. + +"No, it isn't my conscience. I can stick a pin in that and not flinch. +No, it's something else that's the matter with me. I feel as if I were +burning up inside." + +"You're not going to get anything out of me," laughed Fred, "to put out +the fire." + +"That's a pity," said the tramp, who now seated himself quietly on the +foot of the stairs. "That's a pity. All I need is a nickel to stop that +roaring flame. I'm suffering from another trouble too," added the tramp. + +"What's that?" + +"Overweariness of the flesh. I've had that for considerable time. It's a +great source of suffering. Still, I don't know that either of those is +quite as bad as something else." + +"What, have you got more troubles still?" + +"Yes, I have." + +"What are they?" + +"Well, the chief one is that I'm an orphan. There isn't any home waiting +for little Willie." The man shook his head in mock pathos and Fred +laughed heartily. "I have consulted specialists," began the tramp once +more, "but I don't find any one to relieve me. The last man I went to +said he thought the best thing he could prescribe would be for me to go +out in the country where I could breathe fresh air and not have to +endure hard labor." + +"What were you doing, breaking stone?" laughed Fred. + +For a moment the tramp glared upon the lad, but a moment later he said +good-naturedly, "If I thought you knew what that meant I would give you +something to make you remember this visit a long time. No, my great +trouble is that I'm too ardent an American. I insist upon seeing my own +country. I have been going to and fro, wandering up and down the land--" + +"You're not the only one," broke in Fred. "It seems to me I've heard +about another individual who is going about like a roaring lion." + +"Why don't you come in and sit down," suggested the tramp, apparently +ignoring Fred's last suggestion. "Ever been in this old house before?" + +"Once." + +"When was that?" + +"Last night." + +"How long did you stay?" + +"I don't remember. We left in such a hurry," said Fred somewhat +ruefully. + +"Oh, you found the spooks, did you?" + +"We heard some strange noises. The strangest of all was that some one +called my name." + +"Oh, that's not strange," declared the tramp lightly. "I've been in this +house hundreds of times. I have heard my name called and never flinched +once. Sometimes the constable calls it and sometimes somebody else, but +it doesn't make any difference; I never answer. If you'd like to look +through the old house I'll show you around." + + + + +CHAPTER VI--A PRISONER + + +"That's just what I should like to do," exclaimed Fred eagerly. + +The knowledge that he was not to make the investigation entirely alone +doubtless strengthened the courage of the boy. All his friends were +aware that he was not cowardly and yet somehow his strange experience of +the preceding evening in the old Meeker House had deeply affected him. +Convinced as he was that there was an explanation to be found for every +mysterious happening, nevertheless he was somewhat nervous at the +thought of being alone in the neglected building. + +"I have spent some time in here," said the tramp, "as I told you. It is +a queer old house. For example, right here in this room," he added as he +led the way into the front room, "there is a concealed closet. I don't +think any one would ever find it unless he was told of it." + +As he spoke the strange man turned a button, which was apparently a part +of the molding of the stairway. + +In response to his quick and energetic pull a door was opened and as +Fred peered within he saw there was a small room perhaps six or seven +feet square. It was directly under the stairway and when he looked into +the adjoining room he saw that it extended within that room also. + +"What was that for?" he said as he turned to his companion. + +"I don't know," replied the tramp. "I suspect, though, that that is +where they used to put the boys when they were naughty." + +The tone of the man's voice, the language which he used; indeed the very +bearing of the stranger, increased Fred's curiosity concerning him. Was +this man no more than he appeared to be? Was he really a tramp, as he +said he was? His clothing was old and worn, the care of his person had +been neglected and at first glance any observer might think that he was +an ordinary vagabond. Perhaps he was, Fred thought, and yet somehow he +was convinced that there were other things to be explained in connection +with the stranger. + +"Come up stairs," said the tramp, leading the way up the stairway. + +Fred followed obediently and soon found himself in the hallway from +which opened several rooms. Some of these were large, though all were +low. For a moment, as he stopped to look about him, it seemed to Fred +that he almost saw the sights that the house had witnessed one hundred +years before this time. What stories of life and death, of suffering and +joy these old rooms might have told had they been endowed with the power +of speech. + +Somehow, although Fred was unable to account for his feeling, it seemed +that unseen witnesses were about him and that the presence of himself +and the tramp in these rooms was very like an intrusion. He did not +speak concerning his feelings, however, and after a hasty inspection the +two returned to the room below. + +"What's that?" demanded Fred suddenly as from the chimney there came +sounds like those which he had heard the preceding evening. + +"I cannot see," replied the tramp, his eyes twinkling as he spoke. + +"I cannot see, either," said Fred, "but I can hear. Don't you know what +that noise is?" As he spoke the strange sound was repeated. It was a +broken note, sharp and yet long-drawn out. It was clearly heard, too, +and yet Fred was convinced now that it was no ghostly voice from which +the chatter came. But what was it? His companion did not explain to him +and he himself had no conception of the source of the strange sound. + +They proceeded through the various rooms on the first floor, but nothing +was discovered that in any way explained the mysterious events which +Fred had come to investigate. + +Conversation had almost ceased, the tramp seldom speaking except to call +to Fred to follow him, and Fred only occasionally asking such questions +as occurred to him. + +"The cellar is the strangest part of all," said the tramp. "You don't +want to leave until you have seen that part of the old house." + +"All right," declared Fred lightly. "I came over to see what I could +find, and if there's anything in the cellar worth finding I want to see +it." + +The stairs to the cellar were low and broad, but the wood in places had +decayed and fallen away. As a consequence when the tramp descended upon +the third step the rotten timbers in part gave way and he was compelled +to leap to the ground below him. Fred too jumped, but the mishap did not +cause any inconvenience, though neither of them spoke when both arose. + +The light was dim, entering the place from two open windows which were +just above the ground. In silence the investigators moved about the +place until at last Fred said, "It seems to me like a dungeon down here. +I don't know what they could have kept here." + +"Probably they used to come down here with a candle. I have an idea that +if you boys thought you saw and heard strange things here last night you +were not unlike the boys of one hundred years ago who came down here +after apples and potatoes." + +"That's right," laughed Fred, although his laughter was not hearty. "No +man could crawl through either of those two windows. There isn't much +more than room enough to put your arm through either of them." + +"Wait a minute," said the tramp abruptly. "I'll be back here with a +light. I want to show you something." + +"What is it?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, there's a well here in one corner. I don't know whether it was +made in case the Meekers were attacked by the Indians and they wanted to +be sure of having what water they needed, or whether the house was built +over the old well, which they perhaps filled in and since then it has +fallen away." + +"Never mind," called Fred. "I'll go upstairs with you. I don't care +anything about the old well." + +"But I want to show it to you," declared the tramp. "You wait here and +I'll be back in a minute." + +Hastily the strange man retraced his way to the room above, but no +sooner had he gained the place he was seeking than the massive door was +dropped into place and left Fred in almost complete darkness. + +The first feeling of the boy was that some accident had befallen his +recent companion. He listened intently, but he did not hear any sound +that indicated any trouble in the room above. + +Following this feeling of fear came the sensation of intense loneliness. +Although the room was only dimly lighted, by this time Fred's eyes had +become somewhat accustomed to the semi-darkness and he was able to see +all about him. A pile of boards in one corner of the cellar were the +only objects he distinguished. + +At first Fred had no feeling of fear. He expected the door to be opened +at once and he waited confidently for a hail from the man who had just +left him. However, when several minutes elapsed and he heard no call nor +was any attempt made to open the door, a feeling of alarm swept over +him. Again he glanced hastily about the cellar and keenly watched the +light of the setting sun as its beams were cast through the little +windows. + +Convinced that night was near at hand and somewhat alarmed now at his +predicament, Fred rushed to the heavy door and did his utmost to lift +it. Whether or not the door was fastened he did not know, but his +efforts were unavailing. The massive door was unmoved and when a few +minutes had elapsed Fred was convinced that he was helpless to lift it. + +Astonished by what he had already learned, he remained standing at the +foot of the stairway and in his loudest tones called to the man who had +recently left him. "Open the door! Open the door!" he shouted. "I can't +get out. The door is fast." + +His tones increased in loudness as he discovered that no attention was +paid his hail. + +Repeatedly the anxious lad pounded upon the cellar-door and repeated his +calls. The silence that rested over the old house was unbroken. +Apparently no one was within hailing distance. What had become of the +tramp was not clear, but apparently he had departed from the old Meeker +House. + +Almost desperate now, Fred dragged the boards from the corner in which +he had discovered them and piling them up on the floor beneath the +little window that opened upon the road he soon was able to look out +upon the scene. No one was within sight. To call for help now would be +useless, if the tramp really had departed from the house. + +He carefully examined the windows to see if it would be possible for him +to lift the sash and thus make an opening that would be large enough to +enable him to crawl through. He was unable, however, to accomplish his +task and soon concluded that his sole reliance now was to wait until +some one passed in the road and call to him for help. + +Not many minutes had passed before a farm-wagon, drawn by two horses, +was seen approaching. The farmer who was driving the team was apparently +unaware of any call upon him, for his rattling wagon soon passed on and +in spite of Fred's loudest calls for help he did not stop. + +"I don't believe I am making enough noise," Fred sturdily declared to +himself. "The next one that passes I'll make him hear me whether he +wants to or not." + +A brief time afterward he discovered a boy driving a cow not far away on +the road. He was approaching the corner on which the old Meeker House +stood and in a brief time would be within hailing distance. + +Convinced that his call before had not been heard because he had not +used tones sufficiently loud, Fred increased his efforts. He shouted in +tones that were unnatural, they were so high keyed. He then whistled and +gave his school yell as being likely to be heeded when his own call +might be unheard. + +Nor were his efforts in vain. Fred saw the boy when he approached the +corner stop abruptly and give one startled look toward the old house. A +moment later Fred saw a picture which he never was able to forget. The +cow, with tail elevated, was running swiftly from the place, while close +behind her followed the boy, who at frequent intervals stopped and +looked behind him at the old Meeker House. It was evident to Fred what +thoughts were in the mind of the lad, for his frequent glances, as well +as his manner, betrayed his terror. Evidently he had heard stories of +the old place that had not induced him to enter the building when such +strange and unearthly sounds issued from the cellar. + +A moment later the horn of an automobile was heard and soon afterward a +car turned the corner. Fred was nearly hopeless by this time, but in +desperation once more he did his utmost to make his voice heard. The +automobile, however, passed on and apparently his calls for aid were +unheard. + +Darkness would be settling over the land within a few minutes. Fred +thought of his friends, who doubtless by this time had returned from the +country-club and were puzzled to account for the absence of their +friend. + +Convinced that he was the only one except the tramp who knew where he +was at that time, Fred resolutely prepared to endure the wait that must +elapse before relief could be had. As he turned away from the window he +was startled by sounds that came from the room directly above him. The +boy, alarmed now and thoroughly distressed, stopped abruptly and waited +for a repetition of the noise which had aroused him. + + + + +CHAPTER VII--AN ESCAPE + + +There was no question about the repetition of the strange sound in the +upper room. To the excited boy there were evidences that people were +walking over the board floors. Indeed, he was positive he could hear the +slow, measured footfalls of some one who was walking back and forth in +the room directly above him. A moment later he was equally convinced +that the sound of the whistling creatures which had been heard when the +four boys first visited the house was now repeated. + +A moment later there came a rushing sound of many wings. For a moment +Fred's courage almost deserted him, his flesh seemed to creep. He +stopped abruptly in the darkness and spoke aloud to himself, "This will +never do. It is all foolishness. There isn't any such thing as a spook +anyway, so why should you be afraid of one?" + +At that moment, however, the sound of the rushing wings was heard again +and all Fred's efforts to strengthen his heart proved unavailing. The +flying creatures were in the cellar, there was no question about that +now. Fred almost cried aloud as he heard the wings coming closer to the +place he was standing. + +A moment later the flying creatures seemed to be circling the cellar and +in the midst of it all the sharp twitter which had so strangely +impressed him the preceding evening was now heard again and within a few +feet of him. Then, too, there was the sound of some one walking again in +the room above him. Had Fred been in a less nervous condition he would +have been aware that it was no ghostly walk which he heard, for the +footfalls were heavy and plainly those of some one whose weight was not +slight. Fred, however, was in no condition calmly to consider these +things. The darkness was almost appalling now and surrounded as he was +by unseen winged creatures his fears redoubled. + +He looked again at the cellar windows, but escape through them was +impossible. Almost in a frenzy the frightened boy decided that help must +be found from some source. In his desperation he ran to the cellar door +and pushed against it with all his strength. To his amazement the door +readily yielded to his onslaught. He pushed up the heavy door and in a +moment he was in the yard. + +He was in the kitchen when the door once more fell back into its place. +The loud report startled the unseen creatures and even after he had +gained the ground outside the building he heard the strange twittering +that seemed now to come from the chimney. The noise made by the wings of +the flying creatures also was plainly heard. Whatever the explanation +might be the whole place and experience seemed so uncanny to the nervous +boy that he instantly fled toward the road not far away. + +Even when he gained the highway his one supreme thought still was of +flight. Instantly beginning to run he steadily increased the pace at +which he was fleeing until his breathing became labored and perspiration +was pouring down his face. Occasionally he glanced behind him in his mad +flight and on one occasion as he did so his foot was caught in some +obstruction and he was thrown heavily upon the ground. + +Falling, however, was not uncommon in the experience of Fred. Indeed, +his friends declared that he was like a rubber ball, he bounced up after +every fall as if the contact with the ground had only afforded him +additional power. + +The road was dusty and as Fred's flight continued his appearance became +steadily worse. Fortunately, however, in the dim light not one of the +few people who met him recognized him, or discovered his plight. The one +great purpose in his mind was still to run. The greatest possible +distance between himself and the old Meeker House must be made and in +his determination this distance steadily and rapidly increased. +Occasionally he glanced behind the trees, the dim outlines of which were +plainly to be seen. Somehow there was a fear in his mind that some enemy +might be loitering behind these shelters. Once when he ran past an old +and deserted barn that stood near the roadway he was confident that he +heard sounds of weird laughter issuing from the tumbling structure. +Indeed, in whichever direction the boy looked, it seemed to him he +discovered evidences of the very enemies whom he had left behind him in +his flight. + +Somehow at last Fred found himself in the long, shaded lane or driveway +that led from the road up to the house of his friend. The trees were +tall poplars and stood like sentinels guarding each side of the road. +Even now Fred's fears had not disappeared, although he saw the lights +gleam from the windows of the old farmhouse before him. + +So weary was he by his long flight and worn by his excitement that when +at last he swiftly mounted the steps of the piazza his foot slipped and +once more the unfortunate boy fell upon the floor. + +Aroused by the sound his three friends instantly rushed from the room in +which they were seated and a moment later discovered their friend in his +predicament. + +"What in the world is the matter with you?" demanded George as the three +boys gazed in astonishment at Fred. + +"N-n-o-t-h-in'. N-n-o-t-h-in'," gasped Fred. + +"You look as if there was nothing doing," said Grant, repressing a smile +as the plight of Fred became manifest in the light. "Actually you look +as if you belonged in a lunatic asylum." + +"I guess I do," responded Fred. + +"Well, what's the matter?" demanded John. "You haven't told us where you +have been nor what you have been doing." + +"I can't. I can't now," said Fred. "Give me a chance to rest up." + +"You need a bath more than you need a rest," declared George laughingly, +as he became convinced that nothing serious had happened to his friend. +"Come upstairs and I'll see that you get what you deserve." + +"It's lucky everybody doesn't get what he deserves. If he did--" + +"Never mind that," directed George. "Come on upstairs and take your bath +and get a change of clothes and you'll feel in your right mind once +more." + +Acting promptly upon the suggestion Fred withdrew from his friends for a +time and a half-hour later, when he returned to the piazza, he was not +able entirely to conceal his feeling of chagrin. It was true that he had +had some strange experiences, but it was difficult now to believe that +they were all real. Certainly his companions were very much in evidence +and as they seated themselves, George said promptly, "Now my lad, tell +us what happened to you." + +"Well, I don't mind telling you," said Fred, "that I went over to the +old Meeker House." + +"That's just what I thought," laughed George, "and you stayed there +until it was so dark that you heard those strange noises again, didn't +you?" + +"Yes, sir, I did that, and a good deal more." + +"What else? Tell us about it. Why don't you talk?" demanded John +impatiently. + +"It isn't anything I want to talk much about," said Fred positively in a +low voice. "I tell you there's something strange about that house. I +went over there late this afternoon and found a tramp." + +"Where?" broke in George. "In the house?" + +"Yes, it was in the house and he at once offered to become my guide, +counselor and friend." + +"What do you mean?" inquired Grant. + +"Just what I say," said Fred. "He showed me through the old building. +Finally he took me into the cellar and left me there, though he took +pains not to close the old cellar-door. For a while I didn't mind it, +but when I found I couldn't get out of the place, for the windows were +too small for me to crawl through, and I couldn't lift the big door, I +didn't know just what to do." + +"Well, what did you do?" demanded John. + +"Why, I called, shouted and whistled through the window, but I couldn't +get anybody to pay any attention to me. Yes, there was one who heard +me," he added. "He was a small boy driving a cow and when he heard the +calls from the old Meeker House he lost no time in withdrawing from that +part of the country. Even the cow he was driving seemed to feel just as +he did, for her tail went up and her head down and she joined in the +race in that graceful, polite way that cows have when they run." + +"It's plain you saw something besides the spooks then," said George, +laughing heartily. "Look yonder," he added quickly, pointing as he spoke +toward the end of the piazza. + +In the dim light Uncle Sim was seen standing there, his eye-balls +shining and his intense interest in the conversation of the boys +manifest in the expression of his face. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," he said when the boys first became aware of his +presence, "I don' tol' yo' not to go near dat ol' Meeker House." + +"Don't you ever go there?" asked Fred. + +"Me go dar? No, suh. No, suh. It would take fo' yoke ob oxen to make me +go inside dat ol' house in de daytime and in de night I reckon Caleb's +Army couldn't drive me in dar'." + +"What became of your tramp friend?" inquired George when the boys arose +to enter the room. + +"That's what I should like to know," said Fred somewhat ruefully. + +"Well, come on in, we'll all feel better after dinner," said George +cheerfully, as he led the way into the dining room. + +The strange experience which had befallen Fred was the chief topic of +conversation. Even their interest, however, was broken when a half-hour +had passed and word was brought that Uncle Sim was desirous of speaking +at once to Mr. George. + +Excusing himself George withdrew from the dining room and a few minutes +later when he returned he said, "What do you think has happened, +fellows?" + +"We don't know. How should we know?" retorted John. "If you've got +something to say why don't you say it?" + +"That's just what I am going to do," said George, but he had scarcely +begun his statement before his three friends leaped from their seats at +the table and quickly followed him as he led the way out of the house. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII--THE LOST CAR + + +"What's the trouble? What's the trouble?" demanded George excitedly when +the boys had run out through the kitchen door. + +"Uncle Sim says that my car is gone," replied George. + +"Gone? Gone where?" demanded Grant. + +"He doesn't know and that's what he wanted to find out from us." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," broke in the old colored man who now approached +the place where the boys were standing. "Dat car sho' am gone. I jes' +came to fin' out if any ob yo' young gen'lemen disremembered who might +hab tuk de car." + +"Why, there hasn't anybody taken it," said John. "Have you looked in the +garage, George?" + +In spite of his perplexity George laughed slightly as he said, "I +certainly have. You don't think I would solemnly state to you that the +car was gone if I had seen it in the garage, do you?" + +The boys by this time had advanced to the open door of the garage and a +hasty examination confirmed the statement of the old colored man that +the automobile was not there. + +"What do you suppose it means?" inquired Fred. + +"It means somebody has taken it," replied George. + +"You mean stolen it?" + +"That's what I don't know. I'm trying to explain to you fellows that the +car isn't here and if it isn't here it must be somewhere else. Now, if +it is somewhere else how did it get there and who took it there? Do you +see? Can I make any impression on any of you?" + +"Why don't you say in plain English just what you mean?" retorted John. +"Do you think your car has been stolen?" + +"I know it's gone and that's all I know." + +"What are you going to do about it?" + +"I'm going to take you fellows and Uncle Sim in the old car and find out +what has happened to the new one, if I can." + +"That's all right, we'll be with you in a minute," declared George. + +Speedily the boys entered the house and securing their caps at once +prepared to accompany George, who soon started down the lane toward the +road beyond. There was no plan clearly defined in his mind nor had any +one in the party any suggestions to make as to whom the thief might be +or what had become of the missing automobile. + +In response to George's queries Uncle Sim related his own experiences. +He had been coming in from the barn and noticed that the door of the +garage was still open. As he had strict orders to see that this was +closed every night, he turned aside to carry out the directions. To his +surprise he found that the new automobile was not in its accustomed +place. His first thought naturally was that the boys had taken it for +another drive and yet at that very moment he heard the sound of their +laughter issuing from the dining-room. + +Puzzled by the fact he at once entered the house and soon made his +presence and his errand known. + +His statement, startling as it was, at first had not alarmed George, but +as soon as he had made a hasty investigation he too was as troubled as +his dusky friend. The car was gone and there was no accounting for its +departure. + +"Did any of you fellows hear the automobile when it went down the +driveway?" George inquired of his friends as they sped along the dusty +road. + +"Not one of us," said John, positively. + +"That's the trouble in having such a good car," said George dryly. "You +see it makes so little noise that it couldn't be heard a few feet away." + +"I don't think that was it," spoke up Grant. "I think it's because +certain members of our party were making so much noise that an +earthquake or thunder would have been drowned." + +"That's all right, then," said George dryly. "You wait until we find +that car and then we'll talk a little more about it." + +"What was the number of your car?" asked Fred. + +"27155." + +"I think a man has got more nerve to steal an automobile than anything +else. Of course he knows he will be taken," declared Fred. + +"Not always," answered George. "Down on the sea shore there was a +certain firm last summer that did a regular business in stolen +automobiles. They painted them different colors and did a few little +things that altered the appearance so that a man wouldn't recognize his +own car." + +"Is that so? Is that true?" demanded Grant. + +"It certainly is. I know a man who lost a car down there. Those men work +all through the towns and cities in the northern part of the state and +run down to the seashore with the stolen cars in the night when nobody +is around and the next day the cars wouldn't be recognized by the very +men who were looking for them." + +"Well, I hope we shan't find your car down there," said Fred warmly. + +"I hope we shan't," replied George, "though the main thing I want just +now is to find the car anyway. Some of the good times I promised you +fellows this summer will go begging, I'm afraid, if we have lost our +automobile." + +"We'll find it, George," said John, patting his friend on the shoulder. + +Meanwhile Uncle Sim, who was still a member of the party, had taken no +share in the conversation. At that moment, however, he uttered an +exclamation of surprise and directed the attention of the Go Ahead boys +to the old Meeker House which now was not far ahead of them. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," said Uncle Sim, his voice trembling in his +excitement. "I sho' do see some lights in dat cellar ob de ol' house. +'Pears like dere's always somethin' wrong in de ole Meeker House." + +"How it is, Fred? Do you agree with Uncle Sim?" laughed George. + +"I never saw any lights in it," replied Fred glumly. + +"No, but that's what you wanted to see, I guess, more than anything +else," laughed Grant. "But there's a light there now," he added +suddenly, "I saw it myself. It shines for a minute and then it is gone. +There it is again!" he exclaimed a moment later. "You can see it shining +through the cellar windows. What do you suppose it is?" + +"Spooks," said George solemnly. "They usually have a supper there once a +year and I think to-night is the regular time for their meeting." + +"Do you want to stop?" demanded Fred quickly. + +"I don't mind," replied George. There was no enthusiasm, however, +manifest among the boys, although every one jokingly declared that he +was not afraid. The excuse was commonly given that the necessity of +hasty investigation into the loss of the automobile demanded action in +other directions. Consequently no stop was made and although every boy +was frequently glancing behind him at the old Meeker House no light was +seen nor did any additional or unusual sounds come from that direction. + +When the boys had gone beyond the corner their thoughts once more +returned to the problem which was confronting them. The mystery of the +lost car must be solved. Although there were many suggestions offered +there was not one of the boys that had any clearly outlined plan as to +what must be done in order to find the lost car or obtain information +concerning those who had taken it. + +"I have a suggestion," broke in Grant at last. + +"What's that?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, it's your friend, the tramp. Probably he's the man who has been +hanging around the place for several days and when his opportunity came +he took it." + +"Which do you mean, the opportunity, or the car?" laughed Fred. + +"Both. His opportunity was to take the car." + +"That tramp," declared Fred solemnly, "didn't have strength enough about +him to push the button to turn on the power." + +"That's something you don't know," retorted his friend. "I think when +you are through with it you'll find that the car disappeared at the same +time the tramp did. No one has seen him since," added Grant, positively. + +"And from all I can learn," retorted Fred, "nobody saw him before except +myself, so you haven't run down your problem yet." + +When the boys arrived at the Corners, as the little nearby hamlet was +called, they made many inquiries of the people they met, but no word +concerning the missing car was heard. There were several suggestions +from the country people that other cars had been lost within the past +few weeks, but none of them was able to add to the information which the +boys already possessed. + +Disappointed by their failures, George at last said, "I think the best +thing for us to do will be to go back home. I'll call up my father on +the 'phone and if he isn't coming out pretty soon he will tell me what +to do." + +In response to George's suggestion the boys once more clambered into the +car and in a brief time were noisily speeding over the road on their way +back to their friend's house. + +"We've got two mysteries now," suggested George. + +"Three you mean," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"We've got the mystery of the lost car and the mystery of the old Meeker +House. That makes two. I don't see where your third comes in." + +"The third is our mysterious friend, the tramp, that I saw in the old +Meeker House." + +"What's the mystery about him?" laughed George. "I don't find anything +very mysterious about an unwashed tramp you found in the old house. Very +likely he had crawled in there to sleep and you waked him up." + +"He was awake all right," declared Fred promptly. "There isn't any +question about that. He wasn't moving around as fast as I have seen +some, but he didn't take it all out in motions, either." + +"It seems to me," laughed Grant, "that you find in that tramp whatever +you want to find, Fred. First you say he's one kind of man and then you +tell us he's another." + +"Wait until you see him," said Fred sagely. "Maybe he's in the old house +now. It can't be far ahead." + +"Not more than a quarter of a mile," suggested Grant. + +For some reason the boys became silent as the car speeded forward in the +dim light. The eyes of every one were turned toward the old house which +had perplexed them in so many ways. + +As they came near the corner John said in a low voice, "There's not only +a ghost of a man in that house, but there's the ghost of the automobile. +Do you hear that horn?" + +All the boys listened intently and to their consternation the faint +sound of a horn was heard, issuing from the old house. + +"What do you suppose that means?" demanded Fred in a whisper. + +"I told you there was the ghost of an automobile in that house, didn't +I?" demanded John. + +"Look yonder," called Grant quickly. "There's that light again in the +cellar. Don't you think we had better stop and find out what all this +means?" + +At that moment the faint sound of the horn was heard again from the +house and for an instant lights flashed from every window. + +These, however, quickly disappeared and although the boys waited several +minutes, the sound was not repeated nor were the lights again seen. + + + + +CHAPTER IX--ANOTHER FLIGHT + + +"What do you suppose that means?" demanded Fred in a whisper. + +"Things are seldom what they seem," said Grant. + +"What do you mean?" again demanded Fred, turning sharply upon his +friend. "Don't you think there are lights there? Didn't you hear the +sound of the automobile horn?" + +"I certainly did," acknowledged Grant, "but that isn't all there is to +it. There are some things we don't see in connection with these things." + +"Come on," urged George, "let's all get out and go in there and see if +we cannot see those other things that Grant is telling about." + +For a moment there was silence in the little party, but at last, as no +one was desirous of being looked upon as cowardly by his friends, all +four boys stepped down upon the ground. + +"Come on, Uncle Sim," called George. "You aren't going to be left +behind." + +"We don' lose one car," remarked the aged negro, his teeth chattering as +he spoke. + +"And we don't want to lose another, do we, Uncle Sim?" said George. "I +don't think anybody can take it without our knowing it, so you can come +along, Uncle Sim, if you want to." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," responded the negro. "D'rec'ly, d'rec'ly." + +George laughed, as the old man slowly and with manifest reluctance +climbed down upon the ground. His "mis'ry" plainly was unusually +troublesome, for he walked with a great effort and very slowly. Indeed, +he groaned with every step that he took, as he followed the boys on +their way to the old house. + +Silence fell upon the party when they drew near the building. No lights +now were to be seen in any of its windows. Silence rested over the +quaint old structure and apparently there was nothing to explain the +strange sights and sounds which recently had issued from the venerable +building. + +"You boys stay here and go into the house by the front door and I'll go +around to the kitchen," said George. + +"What for?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, we'll be more certain," explained George, "to find out if there is +anything wrong here if we come at the old house from two sides." + +"I think I'll go with you," spoke up Grant quickly. + +"There's no need of that," protested George sharply. Indeed the lad +spoke too sharply, for the suspicions of Grant were instantly aroused by +the evident desire of his friend not to have him accompany him. +Knowledge of that fact, however, was sufficient of itself to increase +Grant's determination. + +"We had better divide up the party evenly," he suggested. "John and Fred +can stay here and watch this side and I'll go with you around to the +kitchen door." + +With manifest reluctance, though he made no further protest, George +accepted the suggestion of his friend and together the two boys soon +disappeared from the sight of their companions. + +"Who's that?" whispered Fred as he grasped the arm of John, who was +standing beside him, and pointing to an approaching figure of a man. + +"That's Uncle Sim," replied John after a hasty glance at the approaching +form. + +John's words were verified when a few moments later Uncle Sim, his voice +trembling and his terror manifest in his entire bearing, approached the +spot where the two boys were standing. Indeed, had it not been for the +presence of John and Fred, Uncle Sim with all his "mis'ry" would not +have been induced to approach the uncanny place. + +"Come on," said John a moment later. "We're going into the house to find +out about those lights." + +No protest was made and together the two boys, followed by Uncle Sim, +whose reluctance manifestly increased with every passing moment, pushed +open the sagging front door and entered the front room. + +For a moment they were unable to distinguish any objects in the +darkness. From the small windows the faint light entered, but it was not +sufficient to enable the boys to see about them. Suddenly the strange +whirring of winds was heard again. Now the sound came from the ceiling +and then again it seemed to the startled boys that it was close to the +place where they were standing. Back and forth and up and down the +strange sounds continued, occasionally broken by a plaintive note as if +the creature that was darting about the room was in terror or pain. + +Uncle Sim, unable longer to control his feelings, began to pray, but +even his prayer did not prevent him from speedily fleeing from the room. + +Fred glanced through the open door and saw the old negro making most +excellent time as he ran across the field toward the waiting automobile. +Under other circumstances he would have laughed heartily, but just now +there was excitement sufficient to prevent the boys from following the +retreating old negro. + +In the midst of the sounds of the wings suddenly a prolonged groan was +heard. It seemed to both Fred and John that it issued from some place +close to them. Several times the startling noise was repeated and then +was followed by a strange whistling. + +For some reason, which neither of the two boys explained to the other, +they had not advanced farther into the room. Both glanced behind them to +make certain that the door was still open and their way of escape was +unimpeded. + +"Where are the other fellows?" whispered Fred. + +"I don't know. Shall I call them?" + +"Yes," said Fred eagerly, + +"Hello, there is George. Where are you, Grant?" called John, striving to +speak boldly, though in spite of his efforts his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +Instead of a response from their companion a faint sound of an auto horn +was heard in the old building. It was mournful beyond the power of +either boy to describe. Instead of the sharp, short "honk," it was +prolonged and weird. + +"This is too much for me," said Fred sharply. "I have seen all I want to +see. The other fellows aren't here and I'm not going into this old house +any further unless I can see my way." + +"What's that? What's that?" whispered John excitedly. + +As he spoke the sound of some one running around the corner of the house +was heard by both boys. In a moment John and Fred were outside the old +building and as they became aware that the fugitives were George and +Grant they lost no time in following them. + +In the distance Uncle Sim could be seen climbing into the automobile. It +was marvelous too what excellent time all four boys were making. Swiftly +as George and Grant were running they were soon overtaken by their +companions and together all four arrived at the place in the road where +their automobile had been left. + +At that moment there came a sound from the old Meeker House very like a +wild burst of laughter. This was repeated and the terror of Uncle Sim +became still more pronounced. + +"There goes that auto horn again," said George, as he grasped the wheel +and looked behind to see if his friends were ready to start. "Uncle +Sim," called George just before he started, "I wish you would see if +that back tire on the left is all right. We don't want to start out on a +flat tire." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," answered Uncle Sim quickly, as he obediently +climbed out of the car and inspected the tire. "It's all right, suh," he +repeated. "It's all right." + +In his eagerness to be gone George at once started, unaware that the +aged negro had not yet returned to his seat. + +His ignorance was speedily dispelled when from the darkness behind them +came several agonizing calls for help, "Hi dar, don't leave me! Don't +leave me! Wait! Wait dar!" + +As the boys glanced behind them they saw the old man running swiftly +toward them and making even better time than when he had departed from +the old Meeker House. + +Obediently George stopped the automobile and in a moment Uncle Sim, +breathless and excited, climbed into the seat. + +"There's one thing I don't understand, Uncle Sim," said George, laughing +as he spoke. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," responded the negro. "Dat's jes' de way I feel." + +"What I can't understand," said George, "is why it is so hard for you to +walk when you are working around the place and it's so easy for you to +run when you have been left behind." + +"Dat's so. Yas, suh," answered the negro. "I jes' cain't explain dat +mahself." + +Apparently George was the only member of the party that was willing to +talk and even he soon lost his desire as few responses were made to his +various suggestions. + +Uncle Sim, however, with chattering teeth and trembling voice, +frequently expressed his displeasure over the attempt of the boys to +belittle the sounds which had come from the old Meeker House. + +At last Uncle Sim declared solemnly, "I jes' made up my mind how dat ar +automobile was taken." + +"How was that?" demanded George. + +"It's de spooks back in de ole Meeker House. Dey make all de trouble." + +The four boys were now far enough from the scene of their recent +adventure to permit of their looking more calmly at their surroundings. +Their former fear had departed as the distance between them and the old +house had increased. When Uncle Sim made this solemn declaration as to +the cause of the loss of the automobile they all laughed heartily, +although the aged negro strongly maintained his repeated declarations. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," he declared, "Dar's somethin' strange 'bout all +dis rumpus. Yo' hear de spirits in de ole house and you see de lights +from de windows, and den you hear de autermobile ho'n. Dat's de way it +is, yas, suh. Yo' couldn't find that automobile if yo' was to search dat +old house from de cellar up to de garret and yet de ho'n kept er blowin' +and er blowin' all de time." + +"I think you're mistaken, Uncle Sim," laughed George. + +"No, suh. No, suh. Dat's jes' de way it is. I feel shore you'll neber +see dat autermobile agin." + +"You think it is in the old house?" demanded Fred. + +"No, suh. No, suh. I didn't say as how it is exac'ly _in_ de ole house, +but what I says is dat de persons what's in de ole house can tell yo' +what become of dat ar autermobile, an' it was our autermobile ho'n what +was er blowin' dar. Yas, suh, I'd know dat ho'n if I heard it er hundred +miles from here." + +"I'll tell you what I'll do," said George suddenly. + +"Tell ahead," said Fred. "What is it you'll do?" + +"I'll dare the crowd to go back to the old Meeker House." + +"We'll take your dare," responded Fred promptly. + + + + +CHAPTER X--THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + + +There was no enthusiasm manifest among the four boys when again they +walked across the field on their way to the old Meeker House. As they +came near the building, suddenly lights were seen in the windows once +more and a faint sound of the automobile horn again was heard. + +"Shall we go in?" inquired Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his +attempt to control it. + +"It's getting late," suggested George. There was a note of laughter in +his voice, but his companions were so excited that they were scarcely +aware of it. "Perhaps we had better put it off until some other time." + +"That's the way I feel about it," joined in John. + +"All right," said George, "and we must look after our car too. My father +wouldn't want me to lose the old car as well as the new one." + +Like the famous soldiers who marched up the hill and then marched down +again, the Go Ahead boys without protest on the part of any member of +the party retraced their way to the road and silently took their places +in the car. + +Conversation lagged and when at last they arrived at George's home they +left the car in the garage and then quickly entered the house. + +When they came into the room where the lights were shining they stared +blankly at one another for a moment and then laughed loudly. + +"What a pack of brave fellows we are, aren't we?" said George. + +"We are going to find out about that old house," declared John quietly. + +To the surprise of the boys George's father had arrived during their +absence. He was an interested listener to the story which the boys had +to relate, although none of them detected the sly glance which passed +between him and George. Evidently there was something understood by them +which was unknown to the others. + +"Yes," said Mr. Sanders when the boys were seated in the room. "There +have been some strange occurrences in this part of the country from the +days when it was first settled." + +"I guess that's so," said Grant. "We were hearing about the young fellow +who was captured up here in the Ramapo Pass in the Revolution." + +"Do you mean young Montagnie?" + +"We don't know his name," replied Grant, "but it was the one who was +used by Washington as a messenger without his understanding it." + +"That's the fellow," said Mr. Sanders. "I have always been greatly +interested in him. I do not think people ever have appreciated the part +he took in the plan which Washington wanted to try. He was a fine young +chap, about twenty years of age, and was a licensed preacher. Washington +had heard such good reports of him that when he came to try his plan he +sent for young Montagnie one morning up on the Hudson at Dobbs Ferry. It +was there the Continental army was encamped at the time. The general +told Montagnie that he had heard good reports of him and the young +soldier was so embarrassed that he could only stammer his thanks. Then +Washington went on to tell him that he wanted him to go across the +country and through the Ramapo Pass and carry a message to General +Heath, who was then at Morristown. He explained carefully how the papers +were to be sewed inside the lining of his coat. Young Montagnie agreed, +but suggested that he knew a better way across the country. There was +danger of his being taken if he should go down through the Ramapo +Valley. It is said that Washington drew himself up to his full height +and looked sternly at the young soldier as he thundered at him, 'It is +your business to obey.' And of course there was nothing more to be +said." + +"He must have had a strange feeling when he went down through the Pass," +suggested John. "He knew what the danger was and at the same time he +knew that he could find his way safely across the country without going +into the Pass. It seems strange that he did not suspect the trick +Washington was trying to play." + +"Apparently he didn't suspect anything," said Mr. Sanders. "It was early +in the morning when he entered the narrow defile. The only weapon he had +was a stout club and he was swinging along at a good rate, confident +that if he once safely got through the Pass many of his perils would be +over. He had just entered one end of the Pass when he saw five men +coming in at the other end. + +"He instantly recognized the leader as young Richard Smith, whose father +he had seen hanged up in Goshen a few days before this time. You see his +father was one of the worst of the cowboys. At least many of his +dastardly deeds were committed against the colonists, but he didn't stop +for that and he was willing to have dealings with either side, provided +he made by the transaction." + +"What was he hanged for?" inquired John. + +"Why, the people became so indignant at last that about two hundred of +the boys and men started after him one day. Of course he ran then, but +they chased him clear down to Long Island." + +"Did they catch him?" inquired John. + +"They most certainly did, and they brought him back to Goshen and he was +hanged there in the courtyard. Then his son, Richard, declared he would +revenge his father's death and it was this young man whom Montagnie saw +when he came into the Ramapo Pass just at sunrise that morning away back +in 1781. + +"The young messenger felt of the letter inside the lining of his coat to +make sure that it was safe and grasping his club more firmly and doing +his utmost to appear indifferent he at once turned and approached the +men. Very likely he would have run if he thought he could escape in that +manner, but he had no weapon except his club while the others were +armed. He well knew that if he should try to escape they would at once +start after him. + +"He quietly saluted the men when he passed them and received a grunt +from Richard in response. However, he was not critical, as now he was +hoping that his peril had been passed. He was not to get away so easily, +however, for before he came out into the open road he was hailed by the +men behind him and ordered to stop. Once more the young preacher was +tempted to run, but he was aware that his effort would be useless. +Accordingly he waited for the men to come back to him, and when Richard +Smith gruffly demanded who he was and where he was going he answered in +a general way saying that he was simply going across the country, 'That +won't do,' said Richard loudly, 'that may mean to New York or it may +mean to Morristown. Who are you anyway?' + +"By this time Montagnie was convinced that he was in deadly peril and he +quickly decided to sell his life as dearly as possible. Swinging his +club he knocked down one of them and leaping over his prostrate body +started up the steep side of the Pass. For some reason he was not fired +upon but before he gained the top he was astonished to see two of the +party whom he had left in the valley now approaching from above him, +almost as if they had dropped out of the clouds." + +"How did they do it?" inquired Grant. + +"Very likely they knew of a short cut. At all events the young messenger +was caught between the two parties. They took him to a little shanty in +the woods and then began to search him. They cut his hat into shreds, +and of course found nothing valuable. Then they made him take off his +coat and as soon as they had cut the lining they discovered the letters +which were hidden there. + +"Young Montagnie expected every moment that he would be shot or hanged. +One of the common methods of hanging employed by the cowboys in those +days was to put a noose around the prisoner's neck, tie the rope to the +limb of a tree after they had put the man on horseback, and then, when +they struck the horse and it started quickly, the wretched victim was +left hanging in the air. But for some unexplained reason young Montagnie +was simply kept in the house three days. Then when he still confidently +believed that he was being led to his death he was taken down the Hudson +and carried across to New York, where he was shut up in the old Van +Cortlandt Sugar House, which stood near the corner of what is now +Broadway and Cortlandt Street. You see there were so many American +prisoners in New York that the British had to make use of some of the +big buildings besides the jails." + +"Yes," suggested John, "I have heard that they used some of the churches +as jails." + +"They did," responded Mr. Sanders. + +"Well, what happened to young Montagnie?" + +"I was just about to tell you," said Sanders, smiling as he spoke. +"Naturally he felt very bitter when he found himself a prisoner in the +old sugar-house. He was so thoroughly convinced that his capture was +useless and that he might have made his way successfully across the +country to Morristown, that he was angry at Washington for his arbitrary +command. + +"However, three days later his keeper showed him a copy of _Rivington's +Gazette_. Rivington was a printer in New York and was a very bitter +Tory. Montagnie was not especially interested when he first took the +paper, but in a moment he was keenly excited when his eye fell upon an +announcement that one of Washington's messengers had been captured and +that valuable information had been found concealed in his coat. The +statement further announced that in this paper was a letter from General +Washington to General Heath in which the commander explained that he was +about to attack the British in New York and expected to find General +Clinton entirely unprepared for such action. + +"And at that very time," resumed Mr. Sanders, "Washington with his +little army had crossed the Delaware River and was on his way toward +Yorktown to help Greene and Lafayette. It was impossible now for Clinton +to leave New York, believing as he did that it was about to be attacked, +and even after he had found out the trick which Washington had played +upon him it was too late for him to try to transport his army by sea +because Washington would arrive at Yorktown before the red coats +possibly could come to the aid of Cornwallis. The battle of Yorktown +followed, as you know, and Cornwallis and his army were made prisoners. +Indeed it was at Yorktown that really the final independence of the +Colonies was won. But I have always felt that the part which young +Montagnie took in winning the victory at Yorktown has never been known +as it ought to be." + +"What became of him?" inquired Fred. + +"I don't know. I have often tried to find out," replied Mr. Sanders. +"You see the men in those days were so busy making history that they had +little time in which to write it. As a consequence there are many things +which we would like to know, but do not." + +"Now," continued Mr. Sanders as he arose from his seat, "I understand +that you boys have lost an automobile." + +"We didn't lose it," exclaimed George; "it was stolen." + +"It seems to me," said Mr. Sanders, "that if you had an automobile and +haven't one now you must have lost it, whatever the way in which it +disappeared." + + + + +CHAPTER XI--THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + + +"What are you going to do?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"We don't know what to do," explained Fred. "We thought when you came +out here you would tell us." + +"I think I shall leave it for you boys to settle among yourselves." + +"But don't you want to get your car back?" demanded Grant in surprise. + +"Indeed I do," said Mr. Sanders. + +"Then," exclaimed Grant, "I should think you would want to help us find +it." + +"It's possible that I may try some plans of my own," explained Mr. +Sanders, "but meanwhile I am willing for the Go Ahead boys to see what +they can do in the way of restoring the car." + +"It's a strange thing," said George, "how that car ever could have been +taken out of our yard without some of us hearing it. I explained to the +boys," he added laughingly, "that it was such a good car that they +couldn't hear the engine." + +"That may be true," spoke up Fred, "but we had another explanation." + +"What was that?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"Why, we said some of the fellows were making so much noise that they +might have taken a threshing machine out of the garage and not one of us +would have heard it." + +"I don't mind explaining to you," said Mr. Sanders, "that I have sent a +brief description of the car to several of the nearby cities. My +impression is that the automobile hasn't gone very far from home, but +one cannot tell about that. Perhaps we shall get some word from Newark +or New York pretty soon." + +"Do you think they would take that car to New York?" demanded Fred. "I +thought George said that they had had trouble a year or two ago when a +lot of automobiles were stolen and taken down to Lakewood or somewhere +along the Jersey shore." + +"That may be true," said Mr. Sanders. "I have taken a few steps in the +matter, but I am going to leave the most of it to the Go Ahead boys. I +shall expect you to get some trace of the car before I come out for the +week-end. I am compelled to go back to the city to-morrow morning, so I +must leave you boys to your own devices." + +"Well," said George just before the boys sought their rooms, "to-morrow +morning we'll start out and begin our search for that missing +automobile." + +The following morning, after the departure of Mr. Sanders, the boys were +soon ready for their expedition. That is, all were ready except John, +who, for reasons which he did not fully explain, said that he would wait +until the following day before he joined in the search for the missing +car. + +Before the three boys and Uncle Sim took their seats in the automobile +Fred drew his elongated friend to one side and pulling his head down +until it was on a level with his own whispered to him. + +The conversation between the two friends was brief, but when Fred +responded to the hail of his comrades and ran to take his seat in the +automobile, there was an expression upon his face which indicated that +the cause of the failure of John to accompany them was not altogether +unknown to him. + +In a brief time the car with its inmates disappeared around the bend in +the road and John was no longer to be seen. + +"I think I'll go first to Paterson," explained George, to the two boys, +"and then I'll stop at every garage along the road between there and +Newark." + +When they arrived at Paterson they sought the quarters of the chief of +police and all three boys entered the room. + +George was the spokesman for the party and he briefly explained the loss +which had befallen them. + +The chief of police listened attentively, made notes of several +statements which George made and then said, "We shall do our best for +you. The trouble is that stolen cars frequently are mutilated or +repainted or something is done to them which prevents an owner from +recognizing his own property." + +"My father too is sending out word about the car," suggested George. + +"That's right, that's the only thing to do. It's one of the things you +never can tell about. You may find the car in a country garage, or in a +big city, or you may not find it at all." + +"Don't you think we'll find it?" demanded George. + +"I cannot say. Have you offered a reward for its recovery?" + +"I don't know," admitted George. "My father has charge of that. If he +has offered a reward he hasn't told me about it." + +"Yes, I see," said the chief slowly, looking sternly at George as he +spoke. "There may be reasons why he doesn't want to tell you about it." + +"What reasons?" demanded George. + +"If you don't know I shan't tell you." + +"Do you think we took the car?" demanded George hotly. + +"I'm not saying anything about that part of it. I don't know. I'm going +to take your directions and do my best to locate the car and the thief +too, if I can. It won't make any difference to me where I hit or who it +is. When we find the party that stole the car shall we report?" + +George was too angry to continue the conversation and turning abruptly +from the room he joined his companions, and together they hastily +rentered the car. + +"Never mind, George," said Fred cheerfully; "don't forget that we're the +Go Ahead boys, and if the car is anywhere in Jersey we'll try to find +it." + +"But we haven't any plan," suggested Grant. "What do you intend to do, +George?" + +"Find the car. That's as far as I have got now. I think I will stop at +every garage along the road and find out if any one has seen or heard +anything about our lost car." + +"You'll stand about as good a chance of finding it as you will of +finding a needle in a haystack," laughed Grant. "However, if that's what +you want, I'm perfectly willing to go along with you." + +"That's very kind and considerate on your part," remarked George dryly, +as the car started swiftly along the country road into which they now +had turned. + +"I don't see anything," suggested Grant, who was the first to break in +upon the silence. "I don't see anything to prevent the thief taking the +car into New York City or going to Philadelphia with it." + +"There isn't anything," said George quietly. + +"And even after he has gone into New York or Pennsylvania he can come +back again and double on his tracks. I don't see much hope of your ever +finding your car." + +"Perhaps we shan't find it," admitted George, "but I belong to a crowd +that's known as the Go Ahead boys and we aren't beaten before we start, +anyway. If we have to give up it will be after we have done our best." + +"That's the way to talk!" broke in Fred. "We're going ahead anyway and +we're going to get where we started for, too." + +"What will you do if you find your car?" inquired Grant. + +"Take it, of course," said George. + +"But suppose somebody has bought it from the thief? He won't give the +car back to you without your proving that it belongs to you." + +"Then we'll prove it," said George quietly. + +"What will you do with your thief if you find him?" + +"I'll wait until I find him," said George. + +"You know," broke in Fred, "I sometimes think it wasn't any thief that +stole that car anyway." + +"What do you mean, pygmy?" demanded both boys together as they looked +keenly at their diminutive friend. + +"You know just as well as I do," said Fred sturdily. + +"I haven't the remotest idea what you mean," said Grant. "You'll have to +try to make the point plain." + +"You mean," retorted Fred, "that you have to be helped to see a point +once in your life." + +"Go ahead, Fred," called George sharply. "What do you mean?" + +"Why you heard the tooting of that horn in the old Meeker House the same +as I did," said Fred. + +"You think the car is in that old house?" demanded Grant. + +"I didn't say so," said Fred, "but I do say that the horn that belongs +to George's car is in that old house, or else the horn that is there is +so like it that you couldn't tell them apart." + +George laughed quietly and said, "Next thing, Fred, you'll be telling us +that the spooks stole the car." + +"I'm not so sure that they didn't," said Fred. + +"If they did, then what we'll find in the old Meeker House will be only +the ghost of the car, I'm afraid." + +Conversation ceased and at every garage along the road George stopped +and made inquiries concerning the missing automobile. + +It was late in the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys turned homeward. Not +an inkling had they received of the stolen car. Several times they had +been informed that "A good many cars of late have been stolen," but the +knowledge brought neither comfort nor light. + +"George," suggested Fred, "suppose we go home by the road where the old +Meeker House is." + +George smiled dryly as he replied, "All right. The way is as short if I +turn in there as in any other way. What are you looking for, the ghost +of the lost automobile?" + +Fred shook his head and did not reply, but when at last in the dusk they +drew near the place where the mysterious old house was standing, all +were convinced that they heard a faint sound of an automobile horn +coming from the place. + + + + +CHAPTER XII--A HASTY DEPARTURE + + +As the speed of the automobile was instantly decreased, Fred said +excitedly, "Stop, George! I say it is time for us to find out about this +thing and quit all our foolishness." + +"What do you want to do?" demanded George. + +"I want to go into that old house and find out just what all this +mystery means." + +"I don't dare leave the car," said George. + +"Then you stay here and look after it," retorted Fred. "Grant and I will +make our own inspections, won't we?" he added as he turned to his +companion. + +Grant did not speak, but as he quickly leaped out of the car his example +was at once followed by Fred and together the two boys started toward +the house, the dim outline of which could be seen before them. + +It was an ideal summer night. There was no moon, but as there were not +many clouds in the sky the two boys were able to see about them in every +direction. Crickets noisily were proclaiming their presence and the not +unmusical notes of the tree toads joined in a chorus that arose from +every side. + +In silence the boys approached the front door of the house and just as +they were about to enter there came again that mocking sound of an +automobile horn. + +In spite of his declaration of his courage Fred instantly gripped his +companion's arm. Neither of the boys spoke as they halted for a moment +on the stone door-step. + +The startling noise of the horn was followed by sounds even more +unexpected. There were shouts and calls and cries issuing from within +the building. In the midst of this strange confusion there was also +heard the sound of laughter. + +The combination at first appeared to be almost too strong for the nerves +of the two Go Ahead boys. For an instant they turned and were looking +back at the road where George was waiting for them in his automobile. + +"Come on," said Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his courageous +attitude. "Come on in, Grant. We must find out about this thing." + +Before Grant could reply, suddenly around the corner of the house two +men were seen. Both were running swiftly and apparently were unmindful +of the presence of the boys. + +The two ghostly forms moved swiftly across the intervening field and +were apparently running directly toward the automobile in the road. + +The sight was more than either Grant or Fred was able to endure. Without +another word both leaped from the stone steps and in their swiftest +paces ran down the old pathway eager to gain the shelter of the waiting +automobile. + +"What's the trouble?" demanded George as his companions joined him. +"What's happened? Is there anything wrong?" + +"Don't talk about it now," said Fred. "Put on all the speed you have got +and we'll tell you later what happened." + +"I don't believe there's any such great need of haste," said George +dryly. "Why not go back and find out what the cause of all the trouble +is?" + +"You may go if you want to," retorted Fred, "but I'm not going to try it +again to-night." + +"The Go Ahead boys apparently are in motion, but not in the right +direction," suggested George demurely. + +"The right direction," declared Fred, "is straight toward your house." +As he spoke he glanced again at the Meeker place and as he did so +discovered the two ghostly forms that were still moving across the +field. + +"Both of them came out of the house," he said in a loud whisper, "while +we were on the front door-step." + +"Oh, I guess not," said George tantalizingly. "It's probably two men +that took a short cut. They were coming from the other road." + +"Don't you believe it!" maintained Fred stoutly. "They came out of that +old Meeker House. Didn't they, Grant?" he added, turning to his friend +for confirmation. + +"Yes, they came out of the house," said Grant brusquely. It was plain +the boy was not enjoying the recollection of the swift flight which he +and Fred had made to rejoin George. + +"Get your car under motion," said Fred sharply. "We don't want to stay +here any longer. We'll tell you what happened when you get out on the +main road." + +"Just as you say," laughed George. + +A moment later the automobile was moving swiftly down the road. As it +came near the place where the two forms had been seen it was evident +that both were seeking to gain the road in advance of the automobile. + +"Maybe the spooks will try to get this car, too," suggested George in a +low voice. + +At that moment there came a hail from the two men in advance and at the +sound George laughed loudly. + +"Do you know who that is?" he demanded, turning to his companions. + +"Who is it?" inquired Fred. + +"Why it's John and Uncle Sim. They want to ride home. I guess I'll +pretend not to know who they are and put on a little more speed." + +As he spoke the car began to move more swiftly, a sight which at once +called forth louder shouts of protest from the two men who now were near +the fence along the roadside. + +"Let them in. Let them in," said Grant. + +"All right, just as you say," replied George, and as he spoke he brought +the automobile to a standstill. + +"What do you want?" he called to the two men who now were climbing the +fence. + +"We want you to take us home," replied one of the two. + +"Is that you, John?" + +"It certainly is." + +"Well, I couldn't tell," laughed George. "You look more like a string +than ever. Is that Uncle Sim with you?" + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," spoke up the negro promptly. + +"Then you have been over to the old Meeker House, have you?" inquired +George as John and the colored man took their seats in the car. + +"Yes, we have been there," abruptly replied John. + +"You didn't seem to stay very long," suggested George. "Were there any +special reasons why you didn't want to tarry any longer?" + +"Dere sho' was," spoke up Uncle Sim, his teeth chattering as he spoke. +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh, dere sho' was." Lifting his face toward the sky the +old colored man muttered some incantations or prayers which in a measure +indicated the terror which possessed him. He was trembling in every limb +and when he tried to speak his lower jaw, over which he apparently had +lost control, resounded as it repeatedly struck the teeth on his upper +jaw. + +"Never mind, Uncle Sim," said George, noticing the abject terror of the +old man. "We'll soon be out of this. I don't see why you went back there +when you're so afraid of the old place." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," stammered Uncle Sim. "I don' went jes' because dis +young man 'sist on my goin' wif him." + +"Was he afraid to go alone?" + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh." + +"Did he think he would be less scared if there were two than he would be +if he was there alone?" laughed George. + +"That's all right, George," broke in John, "you don't know what you're +talking about. If you had heard what we did you would have made better +time than either of us when we were trying to head you off." + +"What did you hear?" + +"Why, we heard the same old sound and a lot more. Just as true as I am +sitting here there was a voice that sounded all through the house and it +was calling, 'John, John'." + +"Did you answer it?" + +"Did I answer it? No, sir, I didn't answer it. I was out of that house +before you could count ten." + +"I didn't know that it affected you that way," laughed George, "to have +anybody speak to you." + +"It doesn't to have any live body, but that name was sounded all through +the house. It wasn't loud either, it was just that whispered, 'John, +John,' that I don't think I shall ever forget as long as I live." + +"It seems to have affected Uncle Sim even worse than it did you," +suggested George, as Uncle Sim clasped his hands and lifted them far +above his head and offered various incantations, as if he were doing his +utmost to ward off the evil spirits. + +"Well, all I have got to say," explained George at last, "is that the Go +Ahead boys ought to change their name." + +"Why?" demanded Fred sharply. + +"Because it seems to me that they can leave any place and make better +time than anybody I have ever seen. Even Uncle Sim forgets his +rheumatism and 'mis'ry' and keeps up with John when he races across the +field. To-morrow morning I will give John one dollar if he will make as +good time from the old Meeker House out to the road as he made to-night +when it was dark." + +"Never you mind about that!" retorted John. "You didn't see all that I +saw." + +"But you haven't told us what you saw." + +"I told you something I heard. If you had heard your own name coming +down the chimney and through the windows and up from the cellar, out of +the attic, in the hallway, down the stairs and everywhere at the same +time you wouldn't have stayed there any longer either." + +"Perhaps I wouldn't," admitted George, "but my feeling is that you +didn't hear half as much as you thought you did." + +"No, sir," responded John. "I have told you only half what I did hear." + +"Well go ahead with your story." + +"I'm not going to talk until we get home." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII--WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + + +Conversation ceased during the remainder of the ride. The silence was +broken two or three times by George, who was driving the car as he +looked behind him at his companions and laughed aloud. No response was +given to his implied invitations to describe their feelings and as they +came nearer the end of their journey the chagrin under which all three +boys were suffering became still more marked. + +At last when they were once more in the house, Fred, unable longer to +remain silent, said abruptly, "I know there isn't anything in the racket +at the old Meeker House, but in spite of it all I confess I'm scared +when I hear those strange sounds." + +"What are you afraid of?" laughed George. + +"I don't know what I'm afraid of," said Fred, "but it scares me half out +of my wits." + +"There's something very strange about it," broke in John. "I don't +believe in spooks and such things, but no one has told us yet what the +sound of those flying wings means and they haven't explained how a +fellow can get in there and hear his name called from seven different +parts of the house at the same time." + +"What about that horn?" inquired Grant. "That's the strangest part of it +all to me." + +"Do you know," said Fred, "I'm sure that horn that blows in the old +house is the one that used to be on George's car." + +"No, it can't be," said George. "There's nothing but ghosts in the +Meeker House and so it could be only the ghost of that horn if there +really is anything there." + +"Well, it isn't the ghost of a sound," declared John positively. "It's a +real noise let me tell you and when you hear it as I did to-night, first +right close to your ear, and then, a second or two later, sounding as if +it came from the attic or the cellar you're ready to believe almost +anything." + +"Too ready, I'm afraid," laughed George. + +"The next time we go there," spoke up Fred, "I move that George Sanders +be selected to go into the house by the front door. If you remember, +fellows, he has always slipped out every time we went there and gone +around to the kitchen door." + +"I believe he knows more about it than he has told us yet," declared +John. + +"All I know," said George solemnly, "is that some of the Go Ahead boys +have reversed their name. Whenever they pluck up courage enough to go to +the old house they always go there with fear and trembling. They walk as +if they were traveling to their own funeral, but when they leave they +make better time than I ever saw any of them make on the cinder path. I +think that we ought to change the name. They aren't Go Ahead boys any +more, they are the Go Backward or the Get Away boys." + +"I notice," spoke up Grant, "that you didn't stand very long in the way +of your own departure. At least I haven't noticed yet that you have been +very far behind any of us when we ran from the place." + +"Of course you haven't," said George. "I have to look after my guests, +don't I? And if they are in such a hurry to leave, it wouldn't be very +polite for me to stay." + +"Don't leave on our account," said Fred dryly. + +"I guess there isn't much danger that you wouldn't any other time," +laughed George. "Perhaps you don't need any help after all. I was just +trying to be polite." + +"It's too great an effort," said Fred. "Don't try it again, but what are +you going to do about that stolen car?" + +"I'm going ahead," replied George. + +"You certainly have a strange way of doing it then," retorted Fred. "It +seems to me you were going all around it." + +"Never you mind," said George. "We'll have that car back in our garage +in less than a week, you mark my words and see if we don't." + +"If we do," declared Grant, "it won't be any fault of ours. I guess your +father will be the one that will find it." + +"He will help," laughed George. + +"Help," repeated Fred. "If we keep up the idiotic kind of a search we +made to-day I guess he will have to do the whole thing." + +"Perhaps he will," admitted George. "I'm not jealous. If we can only get +that car back, that's about all I want." + +"Well, I'm going to bed," declared John. "This has been my busy day." + +"And you haven't told us yet what you were doing," suggested Grant. + +"I guess I don't have to tell you," said John. "All three of you seem to +know more about Uncle Sim and me and what we have been doing to-day than +we do ourselves." + +In a brief time the boys had withdrawn from the room and sought their +beds. + +The following morning when three of the Go Ahead boys went down stairs +they discovered George talking over the telephone. + +"Yes," he was saying. "That's all right. We'll start right after +breakfast. Thank you very much. Good-by." + +As he hung up the receiver George turned to his friends and said, "What +would you fellows say if I told you that I had some word about the car?" + +"We would all say that it was a good word, anyway," said Fred promptly. + +"I was just talking to my father who told me that he had received a +telegram this morning from Newburgh." + +"That's in New York State," spoke up Fred. + +"Correct," answered George. "I'm glad that for once in your life you are +correctly informed." + +"You want to be thankful," retorted Fred, "that once in your life you +were able to appreciate the information I possess. I haven't a stingy +thing about me, and I have been trying to be generous and give you some +of the knowledge I have acquired, after long and painful effort, but you +do not seem to appreciate my kind heart." + +"My father says that the best thing for us to do will be to take the old +car and go straight to Newburgh. We may have to stay all night, so you +had better go prepared." + +"We aren't going before breakfast, are we?" demanded Grant. + +"No, my lean and hungry friend, we'll wait until the wants of the inner +man are satisfied." + +"Not that," said Fred. "Not that. You mean you will wait long enough for +him to eat all he needs, but not all he wants. We aren't going to start +from here before sunset, if you don't mean that." + +Conversation was not as brisk after the boys entered the dining room, +but when their breakfast had been eaten and they followed George as he +led the way to the garage they were all as talkative as before. + +"Going to take Uncle Sim with you?" inquired Grant. + +"No," answered George. "I'll have to leave him to look after the place!" + +"How long before we start?" inquired John. + +"About three minutes. Are you going with us to-day?" + +"You're right I am," declared John. "I stayed home yesterday to make my +own investigations in the old Meeker House." + +"And you have finished them all?" inquired George with a laugh. + +"I can't say that the investigations are all finished, but I am. Yes, +sir, I'm done. You don't catch me alone in that old house again." + +"But I thought Uncle Sim went with you," suggested Fred. + +"Uncle Sim? Uncle Sim? I would rather have an infant in arms with me. +Uncle Sim was scared before we were inside the house and after that +everything he saw or heard all helped to scare him still more." + +"He surely was scared last night," laughed Fred as he recalled the +plight of the aged negro. + +"He was that," said John solemnly, "but the worst of it is he scared me +too. You know they say that a man doesn't run because he's scared, he's +scared because he runs. I don't know much about that, but I guess it +worked both ways with me. I know I was scared before I ran and I know I +was scared a good deal worse after I began to run." + +"Never mind, John," said George, "We'll have a fine ride to-day. We're +going up through Ramapo Valley, through that place my father was telling +you about where young Montagnie was taken prisoner so many years ago by +the cowboys." + +"I hope there won't be anybody there to make prisoners of us," declared +Grant solemnly. "Do you ever have any hold-ups there now?" + +"Not every day," explained George. + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded Grant as he turned sharply upon +George. + +"Just what I say," repeated George. + +"You don't really think we'll have any trouble, do you?" inquired Fred +anxiously. + +"I cannot say," said George slowly. "There comes a gentleman now who +belongs to the fraternity. Perhaps he can tell you more about it than +I." As he spoke the three boys glanced quickly toward the kitchen door. +Approaching it was a man who bore every indication of being a tramp. + +"Hold on, fellows," whispered Fred, excitedly, "that's the very same +tramp I met over in the old Meeker House." + +"Sure about that?" asked George quickly. + +"Yes, it's the same man." + +"Come on, then," said George, "We'll go up and interview him." + +The tramp now was seated on the stone step and hungrily was devouring +the breakfast which had been given him. + +"How long since you have been in the old Meeker House?" inquired Fred as +he approached the stranger. + +As the man looked up he recognized his companion of the former night and +a smile spread over his countenance. "I just came from there," he said. + +"Were you in the house all night?" demanded Fred quickly. + +"Yes. Why?" + +"Did you hear any strange sounds?" + +"Not one." + +"Didn't you see anything that scared you?" + +"No, sir, nothing scared me." + +"And you say you were there all night?" + +"That's what I say. I crawled in there right after sunset and went to +sleep. I told you the other night that I sometimes sleep there in my +travels." + +"I don't understand why you didn't hear anything," said John, "if you +really were in the house. I was there and I heard some things." + +"What?" The tramp paused in his occupation and stared blankly at John as +he spoke. + +"The same things that happen there every night. There were some +creatures flying all around the room--" + +"Ostriches," said the tramp soberly. + +"And there must have been a good many people there too because they +called me by my name and at the same time from every part of the house." + +"A part of Washington's army," said the tramp. + +"I don't know who they were, but the thing that scared me most of all +was the tooting of an automobile horn. First it sounded right close to +my ear and then it seemed to come from all parts of the house at once." + +"Nothing but the wind whistling around the eaves," said the tramp. "I +don't mind telling you though that there have been times when I have +heard sounds over there that made me think of the horn of an auto--" + +"Didn't you hear it last night?" demanded John. + +"No. Where are you boys going?" the tramp abruptly added. + +"We're going to look for a lost automobile," said Fred. "You haven't +seen one lately, have you?" + +"Did you lose a car?" inquired the tramp, ignoring the question. + +"We certainly have lost it," said George, "or rather somebody has taken +it." + +"And you know where it is now?" + +"We've got word where it may be and we're going to find out." + +Fred had been watching the tramp closely throughout the conversation and +when George abruptly turned back to the garage he instantly followed +him. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV--DISAPPOINTED + + +"I tell you," exclaimed Fred in a low voice as soon as he had overtaken +his friend, "that tramp knows more about the lost automobile than he +told us." + +George turned abruptly and for a moment stared blankly at his friend and +then laughed aloud. "I think you surely have got it," he said. "A fellow +who can find spooks and ghosts of automobiles ought to be able to find +out a man who will steal them. That tramp to me doesn't look as if he +had ever seen the inside of a car." + +"It doesn't make any difference," said Fred persistently. "I tell you he +knows more about that car than you think." + +"What makes you think so?" + +"The way he looked and acted when we were talking about the auto having +been stolen." + +"Did he look guilty?" + +"I don't know whether he did or not. He looked up right away and the +expression on his face was different from what it was before. He knows +something about it anyway, whether he took it or not." + +"Keep it up, Fred," laughed George. "Pretty soon you'll be able to run +down every man who has seen our car, to say nothing of those who took +it." + +"What do you advise me to do?" he continued. + +"I don't know." + +"That's just it," laughed George. "There are lots of people that can +tell you what ought to be done, but there are mighty few that can tell +you how to do it. Do you want me to have him arrested?" + +"I didn't say that," said Fred. "All I said to you was that he knows +more about it than you think he does. It seems to me it would be a good +thing to have some one watch him or to leave word with the constable." + +"What will the constable do? He can't invite him to his house." + +"No, but he can tell him he mustn't leave town, can't he?" + +"I don't think he could without a warrant or something. You can't arrest +a man merely on suspicion." + +"All the same," said Fred, "I think you'll find that he knows more about +that lost car than any one else." + +"Well," said George, "he doesn't seem to be leaving the country very +rapidly and if we hear of him riding around in a brand new automobile +we'll begin to ask some questions. Now, the thing for us to do is to +start on our trip and see if there's anything in the report my father +has received about the lost car having been found in Newburgh." + +A few minutes later the four boys were on their way toward the beautiful +little city on the Hudson. + +A ride of between forty and fifty miles was before them and they had not +gone far on their journey before they were more deeply interested in the +sights and scenes they were passing than in the pursuit of the car which +had been lost. + +While they were riding through the Ramapo Valley they tried to discover +the place where young Montagnie had had his troubles with the cowboys +who had stopped him. Other stories of heroic deeds by the colonists in +the struggle for independence were told by George and Grant and the time +passed so rapidly that when the car stopped at Suffern, where the boys +were to have their luncheon, with one accord they declared that the ride +had been the most enjoyable in all their experience. + +Early in the afternoon the ride was resumed and such excellent time was +made that by half past three o'clock they had arrived at the end of +their journey. + +Their car was placed in a garage and then the boys at once went to a +hotel where they were to remain that night, for it had been decided that +they would not return until the following morning, whether their lost +car was found or not. + +"Come on, fellows," said George a half-hour afterward, "we'll go down to +the garage and see if our car is there." + +Down the hillside on the steep street that led to the bank of the Hudson +the boys made their way, frequently commenting on the experiences people +of Newburgh must have in winter-time, when ice and snow were to be found +on the streets. + +George explained that at that time ropes were stretched along the +sidewalk to protect the people who tried to pass up or down the slippery +way. + +"Here we are," explained George a little later as they stopped in front +of a large garage. "Come on in. We'll know what out fate is in a few +minutes." + +Entering the garage George inquired for the manager and soon was in +conversation with a young man, who at once became deeply interested in +the boys and in the story they were telling him. At last he said, "The +car you are talking about is back here in the corner. Come with me and +I'll show it to you." + +Eagerly following the manager the boys soon stopped in front of the car +which he indicated. "You see," explained the young man, "this car has +recently been painted. It has a Pennsylvania license, but that could be +very easily obtained for they could run over across the Pennsylvania +line and then come up into New York State. There are some other changes +that have been made, but I want you to look at it and tell me whether or +not you think it is the car you have lost." + +"I don't think it is," said George promptly. + +"Better look at it more closely," said the manager. "Sometimes these +cars are created the way they used to tell me the gypsies did when I was +a boy. You know they used to scare us by telling us that the gypsies +stole children and then they fixed them up so that their own mothers +wouldn't recognize them." + +"How did they do that?" inquired John. + +"Oh, I don't know. I suppose they cut their hair, painted their faces +and dressed them up in some outlandish clothes. Well, that's the way +these men that steal automobiles sometimes do. They fix them up so that +their owners wouldn't recognize the cars as theirs." + +A further and careful investigation of the car was made but it was not +long before George said positively, "That isn't our car." + +"You're sure, are you?" again inquired the manager. + +"Yes, sir. I'm sure. The engine isn't like ours. There are more spokes +in the wheels and the hood is different. No, I'm sure it's not our car." + +George's disappointment was manifest in the tones of his voice and his +friends naturally shared in his feelings. + +"Was that car stolen?" inquired Fred. + +"We suspect that it was," replied the manager. "We have had half a dozen +inquiries recently about stolen cars and though I cannot tell you more +we have reason to believe that this is one of them. My advice to you is +to stop on your way back home at a garage managed by Egge and Hatch." + +"What are their names?" demanded Grant blankly. + +"Egge and Hatch," repeated the manager. "I know another automobile +concern which is run by Waite and Barrett." + +"Wait and Bear-it," laughed Fred. "That's a good name. That would do for +a lot of other concerns besides garages, wouldn't it?" + +"It would be a better name for the men who leave their automobiles there +to be repaired," suggested Grant. + +The boys were now convinced that the car they had inspected was not the +one they had lost. There was nothing more to be done unless they visited +every garage in the city. + +"And I don't think there will be much use even in that, just now," +suggested the manager. + +"Come on then, fellows, we'll go back to the hotel," said George. + +"But I don't want to go back to the hotel," said Grant. "I want to go +somewhere else." + +"Do you know where it is?" demanded John. "I've known you when you +started for some place that you didn't know, nor did any one else." + +"I know exactly where I want to go," said Grant pompously. "If you +fellows want to come with me it will do you good, but if you don't you +can do what you please. I have never been in Newburgh before and while I +am here I am going to take advantage of the opportunity." + +"All right, we'll go with you," said Fred glibly. "If you can find +anything that is going to improve you we want to come along and see the +show." + + + + +CHAPTER XV--A FAMOUS SPOT + + +Unknown to his friends Grant had made some inquiries concerning a spot +in Newburgh which he long had been desirous of seeing. Without +explaining to his companions what he had in mind he quickly led the way +up another hill until they arrived at a large enclosed yard. In the +midst of it stood a low old stone house. In front of the house, on the +extensive lawn, were several piles of cannon balls, and cannon were +looking out over the peaceful waters of the Hudson. The flag of the +United States was floating from the high flagpole and added much to the +beauty of the scene. + +"What's all this?" demanded John. + +"Every young American is supposed to know that this is Washington's +headquarters. Didn't you ever hear of it?" + +"He had so many," laughed John, "I can't keep track of them. It is +something like the beds he slept in that we were talking about the other +day." + +"Well, this is where he had his headquarters," said Grant, "when his +army was in this part of the country. This is a beautiful spot, isn't +it?" + +"It's wonderful!" said Fred in a low voice. The impulsive lad was deeply +impressed by the associations connected with the place where they then +were standing as well as by the marvelous scene of the Hudson winding +its way in and out through the midst of the towering hills. + +"Over yonder," said Grant, pointing across the river as he spoke, "is +Beacon and right across the river is Fishkill." + +"Good name," said John in a low voice. + +"Of course it is," said Grant. "We're in the Empire State. That's the +State I live in and there isn't another one like it in the Union." + +"That's right," said George, who felt that he was now called upon to +defend his own State. "New York has a choice collection. I don't say +that there aren't some good people here, but you don't have to go very +far to come to Ossining. Do you know who lives there?" + +"Yes, some undesirable citizens," said Grant. + +"Yes, and you go on a little farther up the river and you come to +Albany. If you want to know what New York State is like you want to find +out how much the capitol building there cost." + +"Never mind about those things," broke in John. "What I want to know is +about this part of the country where we are now. I have read a good many +stories about the American army when it was in camp at Peekskill." + +"Of course you have," said Grant; "there were a lot of things doing +there. I have a book at home that my great-grandfather used to read when +he was a boy. It tells about a young fellow only seventeen years of age +who was one of Washington's couriers. He used to ride between Morristown +and Lake Champlain. At least he did in the year when Burgoyne was trying +to bring his Hessians and redcoats from Montreal to New York." + +"He didn't bring them, though," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"Only as far as Saratoga," laughed Grant. "If it hadn't been for certain +obstacles I guess he would have brought them all the way down the +river." + +"I guess he would too," laughed Fred scornfully, "but his 'obstacles,' +as you call them, were General Gates, Philip Schuyler, Benedict Arnold +and a few other continental soldiers that did not seem to be +enthusiastic over allowing Johnnie Burgoyne to come any farther." + +"I was reading the other day," said Grant, "that the Baroness de +Reidesel was with her husband when the Hessians were captured. She had +her children with her and to show them due honor Mrs. General Schuyler +took the Baroness and her children into her own home. The Hessian lady +did not know that Mrs. Schuyler understood German and she rudely carried +on some conversation with her children in that language when Mrs. +Schuyler was present. One time one of the children piped up and asked +his mother, 'Isn't this the place that we are to have when our father is +made a duke after he has whipped the Yankees?' As the Baroness glanced +up she was aware that Mrs. Schuyler had understood what the boy was +saying. She tried to apologize but Mrs. Schuyler was a perfect lady and +at once smoothed things out. They say she was a brave woman. There's one +story about her though that I never believed." + +"What was that?" asked John. + +"Why they say that thirteen was a magical number for the Americans. The +British reported that Martha Washington had a big cat with thirteen +stripes around its tail and that she wouldn't have any other kind. There +were just thirteen of the colonies, you know, and that made it worse. +And it was reported that General Phil. Schuyler had just thirteen hairs +left in his bald pate and that Mrs. Catherine Schuyler very carefully +oiled and brushed them every night for fear that the magic number might +be changed." + +"She had better brush his hair than pull it," suggested George. + +"I can remember the time," said John, "when my mother used to brush and +pull my hair at the same time." + +"So can I," said every one of the boys together. + +"Well, the main thing is," said Fred philosophically, "that George +Washington had some headquarters and that it's a good thing for the +United States of America that he did. I wish we had some men now as +great as he was." + +"We have," said John quickly. + +"We have?" retorted Fred scornfully. "Where are they?" + +"Eight here," said John solemnly. "Here are four of them. They haven't +all arrived yet, but they are on their way." + +"Fine lot too," broke in Grant. "Scared so that they run like deer when +they hear sounds in the old Meeker House and there isn't one of them +that has shown that he has the nerve to stay there long enough to find +out just what those strange sounds mean." + +"We're not afraid of anything we can see, but it is the things that you +can't see that scare us," explained Fred. + +"Never mind the Meeker House," said Grant, "I want to take in what this +place means. The old cannon balls, the old guns, and the relics we saw +inside the house," for the boys had entered the old building and +inspected the various relics of revolutionary times that were on +exhibition, "to say nothing about the old Hudson River itself, and the +hills, ought to satisfy every one of us for a while, anyway." + +"It's a great sight," said George. "I'm glad you brought us up here. I +knew Washington's headquarters were here, but it had slipped my mind +when we first came. I'm getting hungry. Come on back to the hotel and +we'll have our dinner." + +The following morning was unusually warm. The boys were early awake, but +even then the heat was oppressive. + +"Whew," said Fred when they left the dining room, "if it's as hot as +this before we start what will it be afterward?" + +"That's just like some people," declared John. "They aren't satisfied +with the good or the bad they have, but they are always looking ahead +for more. There's one thing we don't have to do." + +"What's that?" inquired Fred. + +"We don't have to swelter before the sun beats down upon us. It will be +plenty of time to see what we have to do if we find it so warm on the +road that we don't want to go on." + +Soon after breakfast the boys started on their homeward ride. + +True to its promise the heat steadily increased and a glare that was +exceedingly trying to the eyes beat down upon the roadway. + +George increased the speed at which he was driving, but the air which +fanned their faces was almost like that which comes from a heated oven. + +Already the cattle in the nearby fields had sought the shade of the +trees in the pastures. The hens in the farmyards also were lying in the +shade, their wings partly extended as if they were trying to cool their +heated bodies. + +"Hens in hot weather," said George, "always make me think they are +laughing at us." + +"What do you mean?" demanded John. "Who ever heard a hen laugh." + +"I didn't say I had heard them laugh, but they have their mouths open." + +"Hens don't have mouths, my friend." + +"They don't?" demanded George. "Then how do they eat?" + +"They have throats and bills and beaks, but they don't have mouths." + +"What is a mouth anyway?" said George scornfully. "Isn't it the opening +in the head through which one takes food into his stomach?" + +"I suppose it is." + +"Well, doesn't a hen swallow corn?" + +"She does." + +"Then she has a mouth, hasn't she?" + +"Wait a minute and I'll tell you. It's this way, you see--" + +At that moment there was a loud report directly beneath the car which at +that time was passing under a stone bridge. + +George instantly stopped the car, but another driver directly in front +of him was so startled by the unexpected sound that he lost control of +his automobile and swung into the ditch, nearly overturning his car as +he did so. Instantly rising from his seat he turned and glared at the Go +Ahead boys as if he was tempted to visit some merited punishment upon +them. + +The boys, however, were so busy with their own troubles that they +ignored the anger of the driver before them. Instantly leaping from +their seats they began their investigations. + +Only a brief time, however, was required to disclose the cause of the +trouble. "A blowout," said George disgustedly. "It's torn that tube all +into shreds." + +"You blew it up too tight," suggested Grant. + +"Thank you," said George as he took off his coat, "you're so well +informed about these matters that I think I'll let you help me put a new +tire on." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI--ANOTHER LOSS + + +The angry stranger, who by this time had recovered from his surprise, +speedily departed. Indeed, the fact that the boys had had only a slight +conversation with him perhaps increased his anger and as soon as his car +had been pulled from the ditch, a task in which all joined to help, he +soon afterward disappeared from sight. + +The intense heat soon caused the faces of the boys to be shining with +perspiration. The dust from the road also did its part until in the +streaked countenances of the Go Ahead boys even their own mothers would +have had difficulty in recognizing members of their families. + +The difficult task and the heat of the day also united in increasing the +irritation of the boys. There were several remarks made which happily +were soon forgotten or ignored. + +In the midst of the task the jack broke and the wheel dropped upon the +ground. + +"There you have it!" exclaimed George irritably. "A broken jack! No +tube! Seventeen miles from nowhere and not a crumb to eat!" + +"Never mind, George," said John good-naturedly. "Somebody will be coming +along pretty soon and will lend us a hand." + +"He will have to lend us a jack, I guess if we ever get anywhere. I +don't know what is the matter with this thing," he added as again he +examined the broken implement. + +"There's nothing for us to do except wait," suggested Grant. "Come up +here in the shade, fellows. We'll have to join that man who is sitting +there." + +As Grant spoke he pointed toward a bank or knoll near the roadside where +a man was seen reclining on the ground beneath the shade of some huge +maple trees. + +"That's a good suggestion," declared Fred, and in a brief time the boys +were seated on the ground, enjoying the relief from the heat of the +burning sun. + +Their only hope now rested upon some friendly driver stopping to aid +them. + +To the amazement of Fred, as well as of his companions, the man whom +they discovered enjoying the shade was none other than the tramp who had +first been seen in the old Meeker House. + +He stared a moment at the unexpected sight and then as a grin spread +over the countenance of the man he was convinced that his first +impression had been correct. The tramp of the Meeker House was there +before him. How he had come there, so far from the place where he had +been first seen, was a mystery. + +"You seem to have had bad luck, my friends," laughed the tramp, as he +sat erect when the boys approached. + +"Yes, the day is so hot," growled George, "that the tube burst. We had a +blowout. We had it blown up too much anyway when we left Newburgh." + +"Have you been to Newburgh!" inquired the tramp. + +"Yes," replied George shortly. + +"Did you find your car?" + +"No." + +"That's too bad." If the tramp, however, had any real sympathy for the +boys in their loss his countenance failed to reflect the feeling, for he +was still grinning at his young companions. "Not much use," he +continued. "There must be seventy-five or a hundred thousand autos in +Jersey alone, and when you stop to think of all that are in New York and +Pennsylvania you will see you stand mighty little chance of ever finding +your own car." + +"Thank you," said George. "You needn't be worried though, for we are +going to get it." + +"What are you doing up here?" demanded Fred. + +"Why I got to thinking of it last night," explained the tramp, "after +you boys left home and the more I thought about it the more I thought I +would like to come up into this part of the world too. You haven't any +objection to my coming?" he added quizzically. + +"Oh, no, not the slightest," said Fred glibly. "I was just wondering how +a man as weary as you are could have made such good time. You must have +come forty miles or more. How did you do it?" + +"Part of the way," replied the tramp, "I came in an empty box-car. I got +a lift with an old man who was taking a load of produce to market and +another man gave me a ride in his automobile. I don't think I have +walked all together more than half a mile. There's always somebody that +is good to the halt, the blind, the lame,--" + +"And the lazy," joined in Fred. + +"I guess that's right," said the tramp. "But I'm not to blame for it. I +don't like to work. It's the way I was born, and if I don't like it I +don't see why I should do it, do you?" + +"Not as long as some one else is willing to work and get you something +to eat and wear," suggested George tartly. + +"I guess you're right again," drawled the tramp. "If the time ever comes +when there isn't anybody to do that for me, then I guess I'll have to go +to work. But I'm putting it off as long as possible. Hello," he added +quickly, "there comes a car," pointing as he spoke toward an automobile +which was swiftly approaching. + +George ran speedily down to the road and hailed the approaching car. + +The automobile was stopped as the signal was discovered, and for the +first time George was conscious of his dust-discolored face, for seated +in the back seat was a young girl with her mother. She laughed as she +saw George's countenance and even her mother's face could not conceal +the quizzical expression that appeared when George spoke. + +"We had a blowout here," explained George, "and when we tried to put on +a new tube our jack broke. Can you help us out?" + +"Certainly," said the woman. "James, you help these young gentlemen," +she added as she turned to her chauffeur. + +The other boys now turned and offered their assistance to George, +although Grant and John plainly were more interested in the occupants of +the friendly car than they were in the task immediately confronting +them. + +"There's no use, boys," said the chauffeur at last. "That blowout must +have been a big one." + +"It was," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"It has bent your rim. Yon never can get a new tire on that until it has +been fixed." + +"What shall we do?" inquired George blankly. + +"The best thing I can suggest is for you to get in our car and we will +take you to a good garage about four miles up the road. They will have +to come back here in another car so you won't have to walk." + +"That's a good suggestion," said George quickly as he prepared to accept +the invitation. + +His zeal, however was quickly shared by two of his friends, who insisted +that their presence also was required. "You see," Fred explained, "if +they cannot help us at that garage, why some of us will have to go on to +another. We cannot leave our car here all day in the sun." + +John was the only one of the party left behind and as it was deemed +necessary for some one to remain with the car he volunteered for that +service. + +The task confronting him was not difficult, however, and John soon was +reclining once more in a shaded spot near the tramp who was still seated +in the same place he had first been seen. + +In spite of John's efforts to draw the man into conversation the tramp +was strangely silent most of the time. At last, however, his mood +changed and turning to John he said, "Your friends ought to be back here +by this time." + +"They may have had trouble in getting a car right away to bring them +back." + +"Well, they will be here pretty soon," said the tramp. "I think I'll go +up to that orchard up yonder," he added as he pointed to a hillside +covered with apple trees about one hundred yards distant. + +"Are there any apples there ripe?" inquired John quickly. + +"Plenty of them. Plenty of them. The owner doesn't seem to care anything +about them. He hasn't sprayed his trees or pruned them for years, but +there are some juicy red apples in the corner of the orchard and they +are mighty good. I know for I have tried them already." + +"Wait a minute and I'll go up with you," said John. + +Together they made their way up the side of the hill and John speedily +discovered that the statement of his companion was correct. The ground +beneath the trees was carpeted with a layer of red apples tempting in +their size and appearance. + +"I think I'll take back a few for the other fellows," said John, as he +filled his cap. "I would like to pay for them, but I don't see anybody +around here." + +"Nobody pays for these apples," explained the tramp. "The owner of the +farm spent a lot of money on his place and then got tired of it and went +back to the city. He left everything here to go to pieces." + +"That's a pity," said John as he climbed over the fence and started back +toward the place where they had left the automobile. + +"Where is our car?" demanded John in consternation as he drew near the +place from which they had started. + +In amazement he looked up and down the road, but not a trace of the +automobile was to be seen. + +"What do you suppose has happened to that car?" he demanded, again +turning to his companion. + +"I don't know unless it has evaporated," said the tramp. "It's a pretty +hot day." + +"Evaporated nothing!" explained John angrily. "The car is gone. I don't +know what George and the fellows will say. We have lost two cars now +instead of one. I don't understand how it could have been taken away +without our knowing it." + +"That isn't nearly so important," suggested the tramp, "as the fact that +it is gone. There isn't any car here." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII--LEFT BEHIND + + +"I think the men from the garage may have come and taken the car away," +suggested the tramp. + +"That may be the way it is," said John, relieved by the suggestion. A +moment later, however, the thought occurred to him that in the event of +the return of the boys with a man from the garage, in all probability +some of them would have remained and not all have gone back with him. In +that case his companions must be near, but as he looked up and down the +road he did not discover any trace of his friends. + +"They will be back here by and by," said the tramp encouragingly. "It +won't take very long to straighten that rim and put on a new shoe. The +best thing for you to do is to stay right here until they come." + +"I don't see much else to do," said John, still far from being persuaded +that an explanation of the missing car was to be found in the suggestion +made by his strange companion. "I guess I'll just have to wait." + +"If you do, then you might as well wait comfortably." As he spoke the +tramp again sought the shaded place on the bank above the road, and +seated on the ground, with his back against a tree, he at once began to +feast upon the apples he had brought from the orchard. + +Following his example John speedily climbed the little knoll and quickly +seated himself in a similar manner against a nearby tree. + +"We can see up and down the road here," said the tramp, "and if your +friends come you'll know it long before they are here." + +For some reason John lost his desire to talk to the strange man. He was +continually looking up the road in the direction in which the boys had +disappeared when they had departed in the friendly car. A half-hour +passed and only two automobiles were seen on the dusty road. The heat +seemed to increase as the noon-hour approached. There was no habitation +within sight at which a luncheon might be obtained and John now began to +feel hungry as well as anxious. + +He was by no means satisfied that George's car had been taken to the +garage by the boys. Indeed, his fear that the second car had been stolen +was steadily increasing and he was blaming himself, as not unnaturally +he believed George would blame him if the car had indeed been taken. + +When an hour had passed a car was seen approaching which the tramp +quickly declared belonged to a garage in a neighboring village. "I know +that car," he said confidently, "for I have worked in that shop." + +"Do you know anything about automobiles?" demanded John quickly. + +"Not very much, but then one doesn't have to know very much to work in a +place like that. I used to look wise and hammer a lot and then charge +still more. I have made up my mind that if ever I have to work again I'm +going to find a job in an automobile shop. The hardest thing you have to +do is to make out your bills." + +"That may be so," said John, smiling as he spoke, "though I hope it +won't prove to be the case this time. There are the boys in that car," +he added quickly, as he recognized his three friends approaching. The +car was driven by a man in his shirt sleeves and the speed at which he +was moving proclaimed the fact that either he was an expert driver or +one of the most reckless of men. + +A few minutes later the automobile was stopped in front of John, who now +ran down into the road to greet the returning boys. + +"Where's the car, Jack?" inquired Grant quickly. + +"I don't know," said John. + +"You don't know! Weren't you here in charge of it?" + +"I have been here all the time except about five minutes when I went up +into the orchard yonder and got some apples. When I came back the car +was gone. This man," he added, pointing to the tramp as he spoke, "said +he thought you had come from the garage and taken the car back with +you." + +"Whew!" whistled Fred. "This is getting exciting. First you lose one car +and then you lose another. I think we'll have to go back to the old +Meeker House and look for its ghost." + +"I don't see anything funny in this," said Grant in disgust. "Here we +are at least four miles from the railroad. We know how hot and dusty the +road is and we don't want--" + +"You fellows are a sympathetic crowd," broke in George. "You're thinking +about your own comfort all the while and not a word about my losses. +It's bad enough to have one car stolen to say nothing of two." + +"Do you think this second car has been stolen?" demanded Fred abruptly, +turning upon his friend as he spoke. + +"Well, it's gone, isn't it?" said George. + +"Yes, it's gone," admitted Fred, "but that doesn't mean it has been +stolen." + +"Well, tell me what has become of it then? Where is it? Show me the +car." + +"I can't do it," said Fred. "I wish I could. But I don't believe that +car has been stolen." + +"What do you think?" demanded George, turning to the mechanic as he +spoke. + +"I haven't heard of a car being stolen up here in a long time, and I +don't see how anybody could have taken that car away without being seen +if he was trying to steal it." + +"That's all true enough," said George angrily. "I know all those things, +but tell me if you can where my car is. I don't see how anybody could +have taken it away from here with the shoe being in the condition that +it was. I never saw such a blowout in my life." + +"Perhaps we can track it," suggested Grant. + +"That's right. That's just what we can do," said George eagerly. "Look +here," he added, as he pointed to a place near the road where the +imprint of the mutilated tire plainly could be seen. + +It was possible to follow this track a few yards, but there the trail +ceased, the car apparently had been brought up again on the hard roadbed +and no trace was left of its passage. + +"What's become of your tramp?" demanded George, suddenly turning upon +John. + +All four boys quickly looked about them, but the tramp had disappeared +from sight. + +"That's one of the strangest things I ever heard of," said Fred. "That +tramp knew how you lost the other car and I guess he could tell some +things about this one too, if he wanted to." + +"He was with me all the time," spoke up John quickly. "I never lost +sight of him a minute." + +"It's a pity you didn't do as well with the car," said Grant. + +"Well, the tramp and I went up into the orchard together. We were +together all the while we were there and we came back together. When we +got back here we saw that the car was gone. The tramp was here. Now will +you please tell me how a tramp could steal an automobile and still be +with me all the while?" + +"What do you think is the best thing for us to do?" said George, turning +to the mechanic. + +"Your car isn't here," said the man, "and you could track it a little +way, far enough to see that it was taken in that direction," he +explained as he pointed ahead of him. "Now that's right on the way back +to the garage and my advice is for all four of you to get into the car +and we'll see what we can find on the way back. If you don't find +anything we can telephone when you get into the village, or you can +leave on the train. There's one out in about an hour and a half." + +The suggestion finally was adopted and all four boys maintained a +careful outlook for the missing car throughout their ride to the garage. +However no trace of the missing automobile was discovered. The car had +disappeared and the boys were stranded in a little village in northern +New Jersey. + +Leaving his companions, George telephoned his father. The conversation +lasted several minutes and when at last George rejoined his friends he +said glumly, "My father says the best thing for us to do is to come home +by train. He told us to look out and not lose the train." + +"I guess," laughed Grant, "it would be a little more expensive for him +if we should lose the train than to have us lose the cars." + +"If we keep this up much longer," said Fred, "we'll have a good big bill +to pay. I never knew anybody in my life that ever had a car stolen and +here we lose two inside of a week." + +"You must remember," said John soberly, "that we are the Go Ahead boys. +It doesn't make any difference what we start in we have got to leave the +rest of them behind us. If it's looking for smugglers or digging for a +pirate's chest or having our automobiles stolen, it doesn't make a +particle of difference which, we are bound to go ahead, get ahead and +keep ahead." + +"I'm glad to hear you talk that way," said George grimly. "I have been +looking in my pockets to see if I have money enough to get a ticket +home. Have any of you got money?" + +"I'll take up a collection," suggested John, seizing his cap as he +spoke. The result of his efforts, however, when the sum was counted, was +not quite sufficient to purchase the tickets required by the four boys +on their return trip. + +"I don't see anything for us to do," said Fred glibly, "except to leave +String here. He's the one who is responsible for the loss of the car +to-day and if anybody has to stay behind I think he ought to be the +one." + +"I agree with you," said John meekly. "I'm willing to stay, for I +confess I would like to find out what has become of that lost car." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII--THE ARRIVAL + + +In spite of the protests of the other boys against John being left +behind, it was finally decided that he should carry out his own plan. He +had declared his purpose to find out if possible what had become of the +second car. + +George had insisted that all four of the Go Ahead boys either should +remain together or depart in a body; but after a brief conversation in +which John explained that he really was desirous of making some further +investigations of his own and also that it was equally important for +George to get into touch with his father, as he could not do over the +telephone, it was agreed that John should remain until the following +day. A very attractive hotel not far from the station was most inviting. +There John explained he would remain until the following day when the +boys either would come for him or send him money. + +Only a few moments elapsed before the noisy train proclaimed its coming. +The scream of the locomotive was echoed and re-echoed in the nearby +valley and long before its arrival at the station the people of the +little village were aware that the one o'clock train was "on time." + +Again George protested strongly against John being left behind, although +he did not explain how he was to ride on the train without a ticket nor +how he was to obtain a ticket without any money. However, in a few +minutes the three departing boys, standing on the rear platform of the +last car, were waving their hats as they bade good-by to the fourth +member of the Go Ahead boys who was watching them from the platform of +the station. + +Slowly John turned into the walk that led him from the little station to +the main street of the village. As he came out upon the sidewalk he was +startled when he heard himself addressed by his own name. Surprised, he +glanced in the direction from which the unexpected hail had come and he +was amazed to behold the tramp, who had been his companion in the +morning, now seated in the missing automobile. Evidently he had been +driving the car but the expression on his face as John ran toward him +did not indicate his purpose to explain the sight which had so startled +him. + +"Where did you get that car?" demanded John sharply as he stared at the +driver. + +"I found it at the other garage," explained the tramp. + +"How did it get there?" + +"Why, there was another blowout right near where you had yours this +morning. I guess it must be the same fellow that you scared or drove +into a ditch; at least that's what he said. He couldn't fix his car +because the rim was torn into pieces and he got a lift back to this +garage and sent some men out to get his car." + +"And they got ours?" demanded John delightedly. + +"That's what it seems," replied the tramp quietly. "I suspected there +might be some trouble of the kind so I went around there and sure enough +I found this car just as I half expected to. Your friends have cleared +out and left you, have they?" + +"They have gone back home," explained John. + +"Well, that's all right. We'll beat them there yet. You get in and I'll +see what time I can make." + +"You're sure you know how to drive?" inquired John. "Because if you +don't know how I can do something at it myself." + +"My 'deah boy,'" lisped the tramp, "don't distress your little heart +about my being able to drive the car. You get in here and if you have +any fault to find I'll resign and let you take the wheel." + +"We ought to have something to eat," said John, "but I haven't a cent of +money." + +"So I understand. It took all the money there was in the crowd to buy +tickets for three boys." + +"How did you know?" + +"Never mind that. I knew you didn't have any money and I knew too that I +would have to furnish what we needed on our trip. I managed to get +together twenty-three cents. I think that's just the amount one ought to +have when he is leaving in a hurry, don't you?" laughed the tramp. + +"That's all right." + +"Well, I took my twenty-three cents and went over to the grocery store +and I bought some cheese and a box of crackers. You get in and feed up +on the way back. If you're like me you'll think you've had a dinner fit +for a king." + +As he spoke the tramp held up to view the purchases he had made and John +instantly responded to his appeal and took his seat in front beside the +driver. The hungry boy declared that he never had tasted food he enjoyed +more. Meanwhile the car was driven steadily forward on its way. And if +John had had any misgivings as to the ability of his companion as a +driver they were soon dispelled. It was plain that the man was an expert +at his task. + +"Where did you learn to drive a car?" + +"I didn't have to learn," said the tramp. "I always knew. I have driven +cars ever since they were first made. If I need any money I get a job as +a chauffeur and then after I have got some money I don't need any job +and quit." + +John laughed as he said, "You're the strangest man I ever saw." + +"That's what others have told me." + +"I don't see why a man with the brains you have doesn't do something +worth while. What do you want to be beating around the country for +without any home and staying nights in such places as the old Meeker +House?" + +"I have often wondered myself," replied the tramp quietly. "I don't know +that there's any answer to your question. Speaking of the old Meeker +House, have you heard anything more about the strange noises over +there?" + +"Not since I saw you," replied John. + +"Well, my advice to you is to take your friends over there to-night and +I suspect you'll have an experience that will interest you." + +"What is it?" demanded John, interested at once. + +"I'm not sure just what it will be so I cannot explain, but if you want +to see your friends stirred up you take them over there after you have +had your dinner to-night. By the way, do you think there will be any +reward for finding this car?" + +"Knowing Mr. Sanders as I do, I'm quite sure there will be." + +"I have brought the bill in my pocket for the repairs at the garage." + +"How much did they charge?" + +"Fifty-three cents and the man apologized for the size of his bill. +That's one of the things they haven't learned up here in the country +yet." + +"I have never found any one who didn't know how to charge," laughed +John. + +"Well, this man didn't seem to know much about it, so I paid his bill +and had just twenty-three cents left, as I told you. I think if Mr. +Sanders wants to pay that bill I shall let him." + +"I certainly know he will," said John. "I know he will insist upon it +anyway for he's that kind of a man." + +The automobile was making most excellent time and long before it was +possible for his companions to arrive John had turned into the driveway +that led to George's home. + +The tramp had insisted upon leaving the car before it had turned in, +explaining that he would return when Mr. Sanders came and if the latter +"sufficiently urged" him to accept a reward he would do so willingly. + +John laughed as the strange man departed and then drove up to the house. + +Uncle Sim was the first to greet him and after staring blankly at John +for a moment he said, "Whar de other boys?" + +"They are coming later," said John. "They are coming on the train." + +"Wha' fo'?" + +"Oh, they will have to tell you," said John. "Just as soon as I can wash +up I want to go over to the station and bring them home. They'll come in +probably on the next train." + +True to his word a half-hour later John was waiting in the automobile +near the station. He had pictured to himself the excitement of his +friends when they should arrive and discover him in the lost automobile, +awaiting their coming. + +John's meditations were interrupted by the prolonged blast by which the +coming of the train was made known. So pleased was he over the prospect +that he laughed aloud. The arrival of the train, however, soon caused +him to watch the alighting passengers and as soon as he discovered his +friends among the number, in his loudest tones he shouted, "George, tell +all the Go Ahead boys to come over here!" + +Startled by the unexpected hail the three boys turned and for a moment +stared blankly at John. All the latter's hopes were more than fulfilled. +Surprise and incredulity were stamped upon the faces of the three Go +Ahead boys. + +"Where did you get that car?" demanded George, hastily approaching. + +"Why, it is your car, isn't it?" said John meekly. + +"Sure it is, but where did you get it?" + +"Why, after you fellows left me over there where you took the train I +thought you would like to have me look up your car, so that's what I +have done, but you don't seem to be very thankful. This is an ungrateful +world, and a naughty deed arouses more interest than a good one. At +least I think that's what Shakespeare says." + +"Shakespeare?" broke in Fred sharply. "You never got as far as the title +page." + +"That may all be," retorted John. "All I mean to say now is that this +car is for the exclusive use of those who are accustomed to move in +polite society." As he spoke John turned on the power and despite the +efforts of his friends to overtake him soon was moving rapidly over the +road. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX--AN INVITATION + + +Appearing to ignore his friends John drove rapidly around the circle +which had been laid out between the station and the main street. Proudly +returning to the place on the platform where his friends were awaiting +his coming, he called out, "How's this car? How's the driver? Pretty +slick, eh?" + +"What we don't know," said George quickly, "is where the driver came +from and how he got the car." + +"You'll have to trust your Uncle John for some things," replied the +driver solemnly. "There are some things you can't explain and some +things it's hard for certain people to understand. You see that your +car's here, don't you?" + +"Yes," replied George. + +"It's all right, isn't it?" + +"As far as I can see." + +"Cylinders all sound? Tires all complete? Boiler intact? Carbureter +still working? Limousine all ready to be carved?" + +"That's right," said George, laughing as he spoke. "As far as I can see +everything is all straight except the fact that you didn't tell us how +you got the car and beat us back here." + +"Get in, fellows, and I'll tell you about it on the way back," said +John. "I'll resign my position as chauffeur too," he added, as he +quickly moved to another seat. + +"I don't mind; stay where you are," said George cordially. + +"No, I know you don't 'mind,' but this is a hot day. I would rather sit +behind and tell you how to do it." + +"All right then, I'll go ahead," said George, as he started the car. +"Tell us how you did it." + +"I have already explained to the best of my ability," said John soberly. + +"Tell us again, then," broke in Fred. + +"Why, all there is to it is that after you fellows left I looked around +for the car and found it." + +"Did you find it alone?" + +"What do you mean,--was I the only one that found it, or do you mean that +I found the car all by itself?" + +"My, how correct some fellows are in their talk," murmured Fred. "Yes, +what I mean was were you all alone when you found the car?" + +"No." + +"Well, why don't you tell us who was with you?" demanded Grant +irritably. + +"The tramp," said John abruptly. + +"The tramp!" repeated the boys together. + +"That's what I said." + +"Tell us about it," said George. + +"Why, after you fellows cleared out and left me behind, for you remember +that you took all the tickets there were and left me up there sans +money, sans ticket, sans everything, as Shakespeare says--" + +"We don't remember anything of the kind," interrupted George. "We tried +to get you to come along." + +"Yes, you did!" laughed John scornfully. "You tried hard. You had just +money enough to buy three tickets and I was generous enough to say that +I would let you three fellows use them--" + +"Go on with your story about the tramp," interrupted Fred. + +"Well, I'll tell you the truth," said John. + +"Hope it won't make you too tired," murmured Fred. + +"I'm telling you the truth," said John, glaring at his diminutive +companion as he spoke. "The train hadn't fairly gotten out of sight with +you fellows on board before up comes the tramp, driving this car. He +came right up to the platform of the station and invited me to get on +board. You may be sure I didn't stand on the form, or likewise on the +platform, very long." + +"Where did he get it?" demanded George. + +"He suspected what had happened," explained John, "and he said he went +to another garage, hoping that there had been some mistake. He said +there were two cars in trouble out there on the road, one besides ours. +The men that came out from the shop made a mistake and I guess each car +was taken to the wrong garage." + +"That's a pretty good story," laughed George. + +"Well, it's all right," declared John warmly. "Here's your car anyway. +The tramp brought it, just as I'm telling you, and you haven't anything +to say about it." + +"Maybe the tramp took the car and got scared when he saw us start off. +Probably he thought we were going for help." + +"Probably nothing!" exclaimed John disgustedly. "I tell you that tramp +is all right. He can speak the English language and he has got some +brains. I asked him to-day what he was tramping around the country for +and he said he didn't know." + +"He must have a lot of brains," ejaculated Fred. + +"He knows how to drive a car all right," said John. "He drove all the +way home." + +"Where is he now?" demanded George. + +"I don't know. He wouldn't stay. By the way, he did suggest before he +departed that if there was any reward connected with the finding of the +car he wouldn't mind taking it." + +"Probably he wouldn't," laughed Fred. + +"I think he is entitled to something," said George, "and I'll tell my +father about it the first time he comes out." + +"Where did the tramp go?" + +"He didn't tell me," explained John, "but I think he went over to the +old Meeker House. He said that if we wanted to see something worth while +and something that would beat anything we had ever experienced in the +old Meeker House we had better come over there after dinner." + +"To-night?" inquired Fred. + +"Yes, to-night." + +"I say we go," said Grant quickly. + +"So say we all," added George. + +In a brief time the car was running swiftly up the driveway of the yard +and as soon as his companions alighted George took it to the garage. + +The other missing car, however, had not been returned nor had any word +been received concerning it during the absence of the boys. + +A call on the telephone speedily demanded George's attention and as soon +as he rejoined his friends he said, "I have been talking to my father." + +"You mean your father has been talking to you," suggested Fred. + +Ignoring the interruption, George continued, "My father says that he has +word of a car that is being held in Morristown. In some ways it answers +the description of ours. He thinks it will be a good thing for us to go +there to-morrow and find out more about it." + +"Good plan. Good scheme," said Fred sympathetically. "Did your father +say anything about suitably rewarding the tramp for his return of the +car which he probably had all the while?" + +"He did," said George simply. "He told me to give him a ten dollar +bill." + +"That's all right," said Fred eagerly. "Now I think it will be a good +thing for each of us to take his turn, too," he added. "Every one of us +can take that car off and hide it over night and get ten dollars reward +when he brings it back in the morning. That's all your friend Mr. Tramp +did." + +"That's no such thing!" spoke up John, quick to defend his recent +acquaintance. + +"You may have it your own way," laughed Fred. "Then we're to go over and +call on him to-night at the old Meeker House, are we?" + +"That's just what we are going to do," said John. + +True to the suggestion, soon after sunset the Go Ahead boys rode to the +mysterious house. When they left their car by the roadside and started +across the intervening field it was plain that there was an air of +greater confidence now manifest by all four boys than in any previous +visit. + +The moon already had risen and in its clear light the old apple trees +and the poplars that lined the driveway appeared like aged sentinels, +twisted and gnarled. Indeed, some of the objects assumed fantastic forms +and as the boys advanced, a silence not unlike that which had rested +upon them in their former visits now fell over the party. + +"I'll tell you one thing," spoke up Fred in a loud whisper; "I'm going +with George around to the kitchen this trip." + +"I haven't invited you," replied George promptly. + +"It doesn't make any difference whether you have or not, I'm going just +the same," said Fred. + +"Then I shall have to put up with it," responded George in mock +resignation. "All I can say to the rest of you is that whatever you do +don't run. Let's find out what this thing means this time. Do you +agree?" + +"Yes, we agree," replied his friends. + +"Good," responded George. "Now don't forget." + +The boys at once separated, George and Fred moving around to the rear of +the house while John and Grant approached the front door, which already +was a familiar sight. + +Without waiting for their companions to enter they at once pushed open +the door, which creaked on its rusty hinges, producing sounds not unlike +the cry of a child in distress. + +Inside the room there again was the sound of many rushing wings. Indeed, +for a moment, to the boys, who were startled in spite of their +determination to be calm, the room seemed to be filled with flying +creatures. Weird sounds also were heard and low spoken cries that were +not unlike the creaking of the hinges of the old door. + +In spite of their recently expressed courage both boys stopped as if by +common consent. As they did so the sound of voices, speaking in +whispers, was heard from other parts of the house. No person, however, +was visible and in the dim light that penetrated the room neither of the +boys was able to see any object distinctly. + +Meanwhile the flapping of the unseen wings continued. Suddenly there was +a flash of light that was almost blinding. It was so unexpected that +both boys together and almost instantly turned toward the door. A cloud +of smoke swept through the room and both boys, coughing and choking, +instantly turned and fled from the house. Their speed increased as there +came sounds of loud laughter from within the ancient dwelling. Unmindful +of their promise not to run, both boys instantly turned and quickly were +making most excellent time across the field in the direction of the +automobile, which still could be seen in the open road. + + + + +CHAPTER XX--THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + + +When John and Grant climbed into their seats in the waiting automobile +both were nearly breathless. Before either of them spoke there came +another loud burst of laughter from the house of mystery, and a moment +later Fred and George were seen approaching. Both were running but +neither apparently had been as greatly alarmed by the occurrences in the +old Meeker House as had their two friends. + +"I thought you fellows were not going to run," said Fred as he seated +himself. + +"We thought the place was being bombarded," explained John. "I noticed +that you didn't stay very long either." + +"We had to come out and find what had made you fellows run so fast," +said George. + +"That's all right," said John. "I'm willing to go back there now if you +are." + +Fred hesitated a moment, but as George had now seated himself and the +car was under motion and there was slight prospect of turning back, in +his boldest tones he said, "I'm perfectly willing to go back. I wasn't +scared to-night anyway." + +"Come on, then," said John, rising as he spoke. + +George, however, ignored the conversation and increasing the speed at +which the car was moving soon left the corner far behind him. + +When the Go Ahead boys arrived at the farmhouse neither John nor Grant +had much to say concerning their recent experience. The blinding flash +which they described had been seen also by their companions, but both +George and Fred declared that they had not been frightened by the +unexpected occurrence. + +There was no possibility of denying the fact that John and Grant had +fled much more precipitately than had their companions, although there +had been no great difference in the time of their return to the waiting +automobile. + +For some reason conversation flagged and not many references were made +to the mysteries of the old Meeker House which still were unexplained. + +"To-morrow morning," said George, "you understand that we are to go to +Morristown. Are we all going?" + +"We are," replied his friends together. + +"I didn't know but John would like to stay behind and make some further +investigations," laughed George. + +"No, sir. I'm not going to be left this time," explained John. "I want +to see Morristown. I have heard so much about the place that I want to +see it for myself." + +"It's well worth seeing," said George. + +The following morning directly after breakfast, the Go Ahead boys were +speeding swiftly toward the beautiful Jersey town which was to be their +destination. The ride across the rolling country, with its frequent +streams and hills and villages, was most attractive. Many beautiful +homes, erected by the people of the great city beyond the borders of the +state, added much to the beauty of the scenery. + +However, the enthusiasm of the boys reached its highest point when at +last they arrived at Morristown. The combination of age with the best +that the thought of modern times could accomplish in the architecture of +the houses was most impressive. Beautiful homes, many of which had +extensive lawns and shade trees and the many evidences of thrift and +prosperity to be seen on every side, were most attractive. + +The first duty of the boys, however, was to visit the garage to which +they had been directed by George's father. Here, however, again their +efforts proved unavailing. The missing car was not found. An automobile +of the same make and concerning which there was some question of +ownership was still in the garage, but the Go Ahead boys speedily +decided that they had no claim to its possession. + +"I don't believe we'll ever find the car," said Fred despondently when +the boys departed from the garage. + +"I guess you have forgotten our name," suggested John. "We are the Go +Ahead boys, not the Give Up boys." + +"That's all right," spoke up George, "but just now I am going to show +you some of the sights of this old historic town." + +"Did Washington sleep here?" inquired Fred demurely. + +"He lived here for a while," explained George, "but the British tried to +find out whether he was asleep or not. They never found him asleep." + +"Still I suppose he did sleep sometimes." + +"When was he here?" inquired John. + +"Why, don't you know the history of your own country?" spoke up Fred. +"Washington came here after the battle of Princeton. That winter was a +hard one for the little colonial army. People have talked about Valley +Forge just as if there wasn't as much suffering at Morristown. I don't +know why it is that people start on one line and then forget there are +any others." + +"He was here twice," explained Grant. "That winter of '77 and '78 and +then too in the winter of '78 and '79." + +"Yes," said George. "The house which is called Washington's Headquarters +is where he lived during his second winter. I'm going to take you +first," he added, "out to Washington Valley. That's where the most of +the soldiers camped." + +In a brief time the Go Ahead boys gained the summit of the hill from +which they were able to look down upon the marvelously beautiful valley +before them. It was like a great bowl among the hills. The rich and +cultivated fields and beautiful homes on the hillsides and the nature of +the place itself combined to make a most beautiful as well as +interesting picture. + +"It looks almost as if it was built for an army to hide in," said Grant. + +"They were pretty well protected here," explained George. "You see, the +hills were as good as forts. Now we'll go back to Washington's +headquarters," he added, as he turned around and started once more back +toward Morristown. + +Not far from the public square the boys found the famous building. Built +of brick and covered with boards and shingles, its sides painted white, +it produced not merely an impression of age, but also of freshness as +well. + +"Then this is where the father of his country stayed, is it?" said Fred. +"Just look at this picture," he added as he pointed toward the house and +then turned around to George and said, "then look at this. We have +fallen from that to this, Washington was the father of his country and +G. Washington Sanders is just 'Pop'." + +"That's all right," replied George, joining in the laugh of his friends. +"I'll admit that Pop isn't the biggest word in the language any more +than Pyg is." + +"Quit this," demanded Grant. "We're going into the old house and you +will have to behave yourselves." + +The visit proved to be most interesting. Many articles that had been +used when Washington was living in the house and many more which had +been contributed were on exhibition. Indeed, as the boys passed from +room to room they became more subdued in their manner, for somehow the +knowledge that they were looking upon the same sights that had greeted +the great commander had produced a marked effect. Even the old cannon on +the lawn and the piles of cannon balls had stories of their own. + +The silence, however, was broken when the boys resumed their seats in +the automobile. + +"I wonder why Washington stayed so far away from his army," suggested +John. + +"He had a body guard here all the time," explained Grant. "There were +about two hundred and fifty men stationed here. They used to call them +the life guard." + +"What did they do?" inquired Fred. + +"It was a special guard to protect General Washington. You see the red +coats and Hessians, as I told you, tried a good many times to catch +Washington asleep. Sometimes they crossed over from Staten Island and +came up through Springfield, trying to catch the 'old fox' off his +guard. But the people all through the country knew just what to do. They +had guns or little cannon mounted on several of the hills and whenever +word came that the redcoats were coming the boys fired one cannon and +that would be heard by other people and the guns on the other hills +would be fired too so that the soldiers at Morristown knew long before +the British could arrive that they were trying to advance." + +"But they never got him," said Fred gleefully. + +"It wasn't because they didn't try hard enough," laughed George. "My +grandfather used to tell me that when the soldiers at Morristown heard +the 'old sow,' which was the name of one of the guns, they understood +right away that there was danger of an attack. Everything in the old +house was shut up except the windows, and then five of the continentals +took their stand at every window and were ready to fire upon any one +that came near the place." + +"I would like to have seen Washington," said John thoughtfully. + +"They say," said George, "that he was about as tall as you are, String, +but he had some breadth and thickness as well as length. He weighed +about two hundred pounds. All the time he was at Morristown he was very +quiet. I fancy he was worried all the while. That didn't prevent him +from being very strict with his soldiers, however. He issued an order +that there should be no gambling or swearing, that nobody should be +permitted to do any stunts on Sunday, and the men who disobeyed didn't +forget the lesson taught them." + +"Why, what did Washington do?" inquired Fred. + +"He had guilty soldiers whipped in the presence of their companies. A +man would be tied up to a tree and then the drummers or fifers would +have to lash him. Sometimes they got forty blows, sometimes more. One +time a soldier who had disobeyed orders about poaching and had stolen a +pig from a poor farmer was reported to the commander. Washington had him +whipped with more than a double dose. They say that the men did not make +any complaint though, and even when they were going through the +performance every man used to take a lead cartridge between his teeth +and bite hard on it whenever he was struck a blow." + +"I guess that's one reason why Washington was so popular," suggested +John thoughtfully. + +"It's an easy way to become popular," laughed Fred. + +"Never you mind," retorted George. "You know just as well as I do that +no fellow likes a teacher that is not strict. My father says that the +man or boy who tries to be popular never is." + +"And your father is dead right too," said Grant quickly, turning to his +friend. + +"Yes, sir, he's all right," responded John. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI--AN EXPLANATION IN PART + + +It was the middle of the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys returned to +George's home. Apparently they had not been cast down by their failure +to obtain information concerning the missing car. Indeed, as one of the +boys laughingly remarked, George was the only one deeply and personally +concerned in the loss and if he did not feel discouraged there certainly +was no reason why his friends should be despondent. + +On the broad piazza of the old farmhouse the boys sat for a half-hour +talking over the experiences of the day. Different suggestions were made +as to possible plans that might be adopted in the search for the stolen +automobile. + +"I'm not thinking so much about the car as I am about what we saw to-day +at Morristown," said Grant thoughtfully. "I feel almost as if I had +stepped right back into the eighteenth century." + +"My friend," said Fred soberly, "that is where you belong. I have often +been puzzled to know how to account for some of the strange traits of +your peculiar personality. You have hit the nail now squarely on the +head. You have been born one hundred and forty years too late. You are a +rare old antique." + +The boys laughed as Grant arose from his seat and lifting his diminutive +friend bodily from the chair in which he was seated, he dropped him over +the rail. + +"When you grow up," he called, "and learn to behave you may come back +here." + +"I'm not coming back," called Fred glibly. + +"We'll try to live through our disappointment," said Grant. + +"You'll be disappointed all right the next time you see me," called +Fred. Then turning to John he eagerly beckoned to him to follow him. + +With a groan John slowly arose from the chair in which he was seated and +followed Fred as he led the way around the corner of the house. + +"What I want of you," said Fred when he and his companion could not be +seen by the other boys, "is to go with me over to the Meeker House. I +think I have found something." + +"Is it the same thing you found last night?" inquired John. + +"Not at all. I don't mind telling you that I have fixed a trap over +there." + +"What do you mean, a steel trap?" + +"No, no," said Fred. "I sprinkled some bran last night all around the +floor. I filled my pockets with it before we started and while we were +in the old house I scattered it on the floors. Now, I want to go over +there to find out if--" + +"If what?" interrupted John. "Are you trying to feed those spooks on +bran?" + +"As usual, my friend," retorted Fred, "you begin at the wrong end. I am +not trying to get an impression of their heads, but of their feet. Only, +spooks don't make a deep impression when they step on the floor, and I'm +more than suspicious that I'll find some tracks." + +"I'll go with you," said John eagerly. "Wait until I tell the other +fellows that we are going away for a while. Are you going to walk, +Fred?" + +"Yes, I am. I have been riding all day and I want to stretch my +muscles." + +Both George and Grant laughed when John told them that he and Fred were +going for a walk. + +"You'll walk in one direction," called George, "but you'll be running +when you come back. I think I'll take the car and in a half an hour I'll +come over after you. You'll want to see some of your friends by that +time and you will want to see them bad." + +"I don't want to see them 'bad,'" retorted John as he turned away. "They +are 'bad' enough as it is. I want to see them badly." + +Together the two boys walked through the woods and across the lots and +by a shorter route than the highway arrived within a half-hour in the +yard of the house they were seeking. + +"Come around to the kitchen," said Fred. Almost unconsciously he had +lowered his voice and although it was still daylight he was glancing +nervously about him when he and John softly opened the rear door and +stepped within the kitchen. + +The boards of the floor were twisted and uneven. The floor was of pine +and George had explained that his father had said that he believed the +floor was as old as any part of the house. There were marks of the +places where the women of another generation had scrubbed the floor. +Doubtless it had been their pride to keep the pine boards clean, just as +it is a source of pride to many of their sisters of a later day to be +adorned with feathers of various gaudy colors. + +Noiselessly the boys advanced and without a word having been spoken +began to examine the floor where Fred had scattered the bran the +preceding evening. No footprints were found, however, and it was +speedily plain that if any one had entered the building since the boys +had departed they had not done so by the kitchen door. + +Convinced that they were alone in the house, the courage of both boys +somewhat revived. Indeed there was something in the sunshine of the +summer afternoon and in the not unmusical sounds of the winged +grasshoppers in the adjacent orchard that was soothing to the excited +boys. + +They were about to pass out of the room when John abruptly stopped and +whispered, "Look here, Fred. What's that?" As he spoke he pointed to a +small tube which plainly had been fastened recently to the wall. The +tube was of tin, about an inch in diameter and extended almost to the +ceiling. Through the wall a hole had been made and the boys peered +eagerly at the wall in the adjacent room to see whether or not the tube +was there also. + +"That's just how it is! That's good, String!" exclaimed Fred excitedly. +"That explains the sound of the voices we heard the other night." + +"I don't see how it explains it," said John, somewhat puzzled by the +excitement of his companion. + +"Why, it's a speaking tube. You go back to the kitchen and I'll stay +here and we'll try it." + +The suggestion was quickly adopted and in a brief time both boys were +aware that Fred's conjecture was correct. The strange sounds and the +whispers of their names which had been heard frequently whenever they +had visited the house after darkness had fallen, now were explained. + +"That's the reason," said John eagerly, "why George always wants to come +around to the kitchen door. Don't you remember he hasn't once come in by +the front door?" + +"That's right," responded Fred. "He knows more about what is going on in +this old house than he has let on, and all the time he has been +pretending that he was puzzled as much as we are by what we have seen +and heard. We must think up something so that we can pay him back in his +own coin." + +"That's what we'll do," said John eagerly. "What shall it be?" + +"Time enough to think about that later," responded Fred. "What's that?" +he added abruptly. + +From within the chimney could be heard the sound as of a man swinging a +noisy rattle. There were also sharp noises that sometimes were quite +loud and at others were low and soft and yet they were continuously +sounding. + +"I tell you there's something in that chimney," said John. + +"I begin to think you're right," whispered Fred. "Get down on your knees +and look up through the fireplace." + +John obediently stretched his long form upon the floor and peered up +through the flue of the open fireplace. As he did so the clatter in the +chimney suddenly increased in volume and for a moment John was on the +point of hastily withdrawing from the spot. + +As he prepared to do so, however, suddenly a little, young bird fell, +striking the floor close to John's head. At the same time there was a +renewal of the clatter in the chimney and John hastily withdrew. + +To his amazement he found when he arose that Fred was laughing. + +"What's there so funny about it?" demanded John as he tried to brush the +accumulated dust from his person. + +For a moment Fred was almost unable to control himself, but at last he +said, "Oh, Jack, what fools we have been. There we were so scared by the +sound of the wings that we heard in this room and the strange noises +that came from the chimney that we couldn't get out of the place fast +enough. And now it's all as plain as daylight." + +"I don't see it," said John blankly. + +"Well, have a little patience, and in time you'll see it, Johnny." + +"Why don't you talk? Why don't you explain yourself? What are you +laughing at?" demanded John, irritated by the manner of his companion. + +"Why those sounds we heard were made by chimney-swallows." + +"What is a chimney-swallow?" + +"Do you mean to tell me that you have lived to be seventeen years old +and don't know what a chimney-swallow is?" + +"They don't have them in the city where I live." + +"Well," said Fred, pretending to be discouraged, "I cannot understand +how any fellow can live as you have and yet not know that there are some +birds called chimney-swallows that live in the chimneys of old or +deserted houses. If you should look up there now you could see some +nests fastened right to the sides of the chimney. I have never seen the +birds, but I'm sure that's what they are. Whenever we have come into the +house we have probably frightened them and they have been flying around +the room. They were the spooks that scared us so." + +"Do you suppose George knew about it?" demanded John ruefully. + +"Of course he knew it. He has been saving it all up to add to his story +of the speaking tube." + +"Well, it's a comfort to know the old house isn't haunted anyway." + +"Of course it isn't haunted. There isn't anything haunted because there +isn't anything like ghosts or spooks." + +"I'm glad to hear you talk so nicely, Freddie," said John, who now had +recovered from his chagrin. "If I'm not mistaken I've heard you talk in +a different tone once or twice before when we have been here." + +"That's all right," said Fred glibly. "Now we have found out what the +spooks are and we'll show George that we're not afraid of anything in +the old Meeker House." + +The boys were still conversing in whispers, and as Fred made his bold +declaration he abruptly stopped and looked anxiously toward the +stairway. A sound mysterious and unexpected had been heard in the room +directly above them. Both boys were convinced that either others were in +the house, or that they had not yet found an explanation for all the +mysteries of the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII--A DARE + + +Without a word having been spoken, Fred and John instantly departed from +the old house. They did not even glance at each other as they did so, +but moved by a common impulse both were apparently ready to seek a place +of safety with all haste. + +Fred's bold declaration that now he had found an explanation for the +strange occurrences in the Meeker House apparently had not held good. He +was maintaining his place by the side of his tall friend when both were +fleeing from the house. + +The sun already had disappeared from sight and the shadows of the +evening were lengthening. + +Perhaps the hour increased their feeling of uncertainty. At all events +the confidence they had possessed, when in broad daylight they had +boldly entered the kitchen, manifestly now was gone. Each boy frequently +glanced behind him in his flight, but neither spoke to the other until +fifty yards intervened between them and the dwelling. + +"What are we doing out here?" demanded Fred blankly. + +"I don't think you need very much of an explanation," retorted John. + +"That's the way it seems to me, too," responded Fred, striving to laugh +lightly as he spoke. + +"At all events we are making pretty good time." + +Indeed the smaller boy was able to maintain the pace at which his friend +with the longer legs was moving over the field. Half the distance +between the house and the road had been covered when John stopped and +said, "Look ahead there, Fred. Isn't that George and Grant waiting over +yonder in the road?" + +In response to the suggestion of his friend, Fred glanced quickly at the +huge spreading oak tree that grew close to the fence. It was a +magnificent tree, the pride of the country around about and the delight +of many visitors. Beneath it an automobile was seen and then Fred +exclaimed quickly, "You're right, String, that's George and Grant. Let's +slow up a little. We don't want them to think we are in too much of a +hurry." + +Accordingly the speed at which they were moving decreased and as they +glanced behind them and saw that the conditions about the old Meeker +House apparently were unchanged the boys ceased to run and began to +walk. + +"Don't let them think we have been scared out," again suggested Fred. +"We'll never hear the last of it if we don't." + +Without replying John nodded his head and more slowly the boys walked +across the intervening field and then climbed the fence and leaped +lightly into the roadside when they drew near the place where the two +boys were awaiting their coming. + +"What's your hurry?" demanded George, laughing as he spoke. + +"We're in no hurry," responded Fred glibly. + +"We're hungry, that's all," said John. "We were afraid you would be +keeping dinner for us." + +"That's a mighty good excuse," laughed Grant. "You didn't act when we +first saw you as if you were thinking of your dinner. I didn't believe +that either one of you could make such good time." + +"That's all right," said Fred sharply. "That's all right, but it's just +exactly as I said." + +"What is?" inquired George. + +"Why the tricks you have been trying to play on us in the old Meeker +House." + +"Tricks? What tricks have I been trying to play?" replied George. + +"Did you ever hear of chimney-swallows?" inquired Fred. + +"Indeed I have," said George, "and I have seen them lots of times." + +"Ever see any in the old Meeker House?" + +"Yes," replied George, laughing again as he spoke. + +"Well, why didn't you tell us that they were there? You let us go on and +I think you helped us too to believe that the room was full of flying +spooks." + +"I didn't know that I was to blame," laughed George, "if you didn't know +the difference between a spook and chimney-swallow." + +"You must have put in a lot of work in that old house, George," broke in +John. + +"Work?" inquired George, staring blankly at his friend. "What do you +mean? I never worked there in my life." + +"Who put in that speaking tube that runs from the kitchen to the front +room?" demanded John. + +"I didn't," George said quietly. + +"You mean you didn't do the work. I guess you knew it was put in and I +guess too that you know who put it in." + +George laughed, but did not directly reply to the implied question. + +"We have found out about your old speaking tube," continued John. "That +was a great trick for you to play on your old friends." + +Grant, who was listening intently to the conversation, in which up to +this time he had taken no part, now said, "Then you two fellows think +you have found out all about the strange things in the old Meeker House, +do you?" + +"We didn't say that," replied Fred. "All we say is that we have found +out about the wings that we heard and the chattering in the chimney and +the speaking tube that ran from the kitchen into the front room. My, but +I was scared when I heard my name called there," he added. + +George laughed loudly as he said, "You don't need to tell me that, Pyg. +I wouldn't have believed that any living creature could have made its +legs fly as fast as yours did that night." + +"I was trying to keep up with the rest of the fellows," retorted Fred. +"I had to go some to do that." + +"Now that you have found out all these things you're not afraid to go +back there any time, are you?" inquired George. + +"Yes, sir, I am," said Fred. + +"What?" + +"Because we haven't found out everything. There's something strange +about that place that I don't understand yet." + +"Why, what happened?" inquired George quickly. + +"We heard voices upstairs." + +"Was that the reason why you were moving so fast across the yard?" +laughed George. + +"Laugh all you want to," said Fred, "but that's what we heard." + +"Probably your tramp was talking to himself," suggested Grant. + +"No, sir," spoke up John promptly. "That wasn't it at all. Besides there +was more than one voice." + +"You didn't hear the automobile-horn, did you?" inquired George. + +"No, we didn't. We heard all I wanted to without hearing that. It just +made my flesh creep to hear those voices upstairs and coming down the +stairway." + +"Was there anything strange about the voices?" asked George. + +"Yes, sir, there was." + +"Well, I tell you what I'll do," said Grant promptly. "I'll dare both of +you to come back here to the old Meeker House after dinner to-night." + +"I'll do it," said Fred promptly. + +"I'll give you another dare better than that," said John. "I'll dare you +and George to go back there right now." + +"Will you come too?" demanded George. + +"We have just come from there," said John. "We know what there is there +and you don't. Now we dare you both to go back right now." + +George glanced a moment questioningly at Grant and then without a word +being spoken promptly turned the car and started back toward the +mysterious old house. + +Apparently all thoughts of dinner had been forgotten or ignored. Fred +and John looked at each other and laughed derisively, but neither spoke +until at last the car was halted under the old oak tree. + +Quickly George and Grant leaped out and started across the intervening +field. + +Fred and John left to themselves waited until their friends had gone to +the rear of the building and then the former said quickly, "Let's take +the car and go back home. It will serve those fellows just right to +leave them there." + +John laughed as he agreed to the suggestion. + +Avoiding all possible noise they turned the car about and started down +the road. They had gone only a short distance, however, before Fred +suddenly clutched the arm of his companion who was driving and said, +"Listen, String! Wasn't that a call or a shout?" + +As he spoke, Fred in great excitement looked behind him in the direction +of the mysterious old dwelling house. Without a word, John turned the +car about and started swiftly on his way back to the old tree. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII--LED BY A MAN + + +When the boys arrived at the familiar place in the road they were +startled by a renewal of the shouts from the house. It was the faint +sound of these calls which had alarmed them and caused them to turn back +on their way. + +Even while they were hesitating as to whether or not they should leave +the car and run to the house to aid their friends, who apparently were +in dire trouble, they saw two forms emerge from the front door. They +instantly recognized George and Grant, for the light was still +sufficient to enable them to see quite plainly across the fields. Both +boys were running at their highest speed. + +Blowing the horn of the automobile and shouting, both John and Fred did +their utmost to call the attention of their friends to the fact that +they were awaiting their coming. That their calls were heard was +speedily manifest when both George and Grant, turning slightly in the +direction in which they were speeding, ran toward the great tree. + +At that moment George stumbled over some unseen object and fell headlong +upon the ground. His companion stopped a moment and Fred and John +watched him as he lifted George to his feet and then both boys renewed +their flight. + +In a brief time they had arrived at the fence and in their haste both +fell when they tried to climb over it. + +"What's wrong? What's wrong?" demanded Fred excitedly, as his friends +approached the car. + +"Never mind what's wrong," said George brusquely. "Let me get into the +car and give me that wheel." + +No further words were spoken while George and his companions entered the +car and in a brief time the automobile was again speeding down the road. +Several times Grant glanced apprehensively behind him, but the +increasing distance evidently gave him renewed courage, for when a +quarter of a mile had been covered he said, "I suppose you fellows are +both wondering what the trouble is." + +"Yes, we are," said John quickly. "What is it?" + +"It's the same thing that scared you, only worse. We heard sounds +upstairs that showed that some men up there were fighting, then there +was a pistol-shot and we heard some one fall. After that there were +groans and cries galore, and we thought it was time for us to start for +home." + +"You were brave boys to leave that other fellow!" said Fred tartly. "If +there was some one shot, it was time for you to help him." + +"We couldn't help him very much if we went upstairs only to be shot +ourselves," said George sharply. + +"You don't know what you could have done," retorted Fred. + +"No, I didn't know, but I'll tell you what I'll do. If you want to go +back there right now, I'll take you back." + +"I don't want to go," said Fred quietly. "It's time for somebody besides +boys like us to step in. I think the best thing for us to do will be to +find some man and take him back there. We can go in with him then and +help if we have to." + +"I guess that's a good suggestion, all right," said George quickly. +"Grant and I were so scared that we couldn't think of anything except +getting out of the horrible old house in the best possible time. My, +think how Grant loped along, taking about six feet at a jump." + +"I noticed that I wasn't alone," said Grant, dryly. "Whoever it was with +me wasn't very far behind." + +"I guess you're right," acknowledged George. "Now I'll own up, fellows, +about the speaking tube and the swallows. I knew the birds were in the +chimney and I knew too that you didn't know much about such things, so I +thought I would let you work it out. Then I put in that speaking tube +and added to the fun, but I tell you right now that I have had my +lesson. I'm not afraid of all the ghosts in Jersey, but I don't like the +sounds that came from that upper room in the old Meeker House. I don't +mind saying so to any one. I guess my father is at the house by this +time, for he said he might come out to-night. If he is, we'll tell him +all about it and let him take charge. It's time for the Go Ahead boys to +go ahead all right, but I think they had better follow somebody who is +older, all the same." + +All the boys agreed that George's suggestion was the best that could be +made. The speed of the automobile increased and not many minutes had +elapsed when the Go Ahead boys arrived at George's home. + +They were all delighted when they found that Mr. Sanders was there. He +listened to the story of the excited boys and then quietly said, "I +think we'll have dinner first and then I'll go with you over to the old +Meeker House. You have been stirring up the spooks, have you?" and Mr. +Sanders laughed as he spoke. "There were spooks there when I was a boy, +and I remember how we used to steer clear of the corner when we were +coming home evenings. When we were a little older we began to make +investigations and found there wasn't anything unusual or that couldn't +be explained about the old place. But the stories of the spooks have +kept up just the same. I don't know why, unless it is that there are +some people that believe such things just because they want to believe +them." + +"That's what Csar says," spoke up Grant. "I remember in his +Commentaries he wrote that 'men believe that which they wish to +believe.' But, Mr. Sanders, don't you think there's something very +strange about what George and I heard there to-night?" + +"There may be," admitted Mr. Sanders, "but there have been so many +stories told about the old house that I do not know whether you boys +thought you heard something or really did hear it." + +"You would have known if you had been with us," spoke up George quickly. + +"Well, I shall be with you soon and then we will try to find out. I +cannot believe there is anything wrong there, so we might as well have +our dinner and then we will start." + +The plan of Mr. Sanders was followed, and directly after dinner the Go +Ahead boys, together with George's father, started once more for the +place which had been the scene of so much excitement throughout their +summer vacation. + +Upon the suggestion of Mr. Sanders a lantern was taken with them. When +they arrived at the familiar spot beneath the old oak tree the lantern +was lighted and all five started across the fields toward the Meeker +House. + +No one spoke until they arrived at the front door, which now had become +a familiar spot to all four boys. Without a word Mr. Sanders pushed open +the door and stepped within the room. Instantly there was a great +fluttering of wings, for the chimney-swallows, startled by the light as +well as by the unexpected entrance of the visitors, were displaying +their alarm by their frantic cries and swift flight. No other sounds, +however, were heard when the birds at last became more quiet. + +"Where did you say the trouble was?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"In the room upstairs," answered George. + +"The one directly over this?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Well, then the only thing for us to do is to go up there and see what +has happened." + +The boys agreed to the suggestion and although no one spoke every one +was aware that his companions were as excited as he when slowly they +began to mount the rickety stairway. The boards creaked and groaned +beneath their feet, increasing the excitement of all. + +When they had arrived at the platform about midway on the stairway, all +stopped and listened. The screeching sounds of the excited birds still +continued, but otherwise the silence was unbroken. + +"Is there anybody here?" called Mr. Sanders loudly. As no reply was made +to his inquiry he turned to the boys and said, "There doesn't appear to +be anybody here. Well go on up and continue our investigations." + +Once more leading the way, Mr. Sanders noiselessly mounted the steps, +the boys keeping closely together and not far behind the leader. Holding +his lantern before him Mr. Sanders stopped when he arrived at the head +of the stairway and examined the rooms that opened before him. + +Suddenly a sound very like laughter was heard in the old building, but +it quickly ceased and in place of it the faint tooting of an automobile +horn was heard. + +The boys now were staring about them and had it not been for the +presence of George's father it is doubtful if any one would have +remained. + +As it was, a startling event occurred which instantly cause all five to +turn quickly about and run swiftly down the stairway. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV--THE END OF THE HOUSE + + +Even Mr. Sanders appeared to be as alarmed as his younger companions. At +all events he was swiftly leading the way, and as the boys were running +down the stairway two or three steps at a time it was necessary for him +to move rapidly in order to keep his place at the head of the line. + +There had been a sudden flash of light that apparently had filled the +building. No sound had accompanied the strange sight although the air +was heavy with the suffocating odor of burning powder. The light +apparently had been flashed in every room at the same moment. The +twittering of the chimney-swallows abruptly ceased after one shrill +outburst of alarm. + +Before the party arrived at the foot of the stairway the blinding flash +was repeated. The house now seemed to be filled with the penetrating +odor and even the lantern did not fully serve to light their way. + +"Keep together, boys," called Mr. Sanders in a low voice. "We must all +make for the front door and get out of this place as soon as possible." + +In spite of their alarm, Fred in his own mind was questioning whether it +was the heavy odor in the room or the desire of Mr. Sanders to gain a +place of safety outside the building that had caused such a precipitate +flight. At all events no one delayed, and in a brief time all five were +running rapidly across the field, Mr. Sanders still holding the lantern +and leading the retreating party. + +Before they arrived at the road, however, they stopped and looked behind +them. The old house now was wrapped in darkness. Not a sound came from +the mysterious dwelling. The blinding flashes of light that had been +seen apparently were ended and only the reflection of the moonlight from +the few windows that still were left in the house produced an unusual +sight. + +In silence the Go Ahead boys and Mr. Sanders waited for a repetition of +the sight which had startled them. Not a sound came from the place, and +although the boys waited several minutes the strange lights were not +repeated. + +"I'm inclined to think," said Mr. Sanders thoughtfully, "that it will be +better for us to go back and continue our investigations. What do you +say, boys?" + +"We agree," spoke up Fred glibly. "We might as well run this matter down +now as at any time. What do you think those flashes were, Mr. Sanders?" + +"From the odor I think likely they were made by setting off the powder +which is lighted when a flash-light picture is taken." + +"It does seem so, doesn't it?" said John quickly. "But where did such +powder come from? Who lighted it?" + +"That's what we must find out," said Mr. Sanders dryly. + +Meanwhile the party was returning to the building and had covered half +the distance when they all stopped abruptly as George exclaimed, +"There's a light there now! Can't you see it? It's up in the corner of +the eaves." + +A moment later all declared that they could see the flames to which +George had referred, but as they resumed their walk John said abruptly, +"That's more than a flash-light, that's a fire! I tell you, fellows, the +old Meeker House is on fire!" + +Instantly every one stopped but only a brief delay was required to +confirm the startling statement. The flames by this time had burst +through the roof and it was evident that unless help speedily was +obtained the house which had stood nearly two centuries was doomed. + +There was no further waiting now and quickly all five were running +toward the blazing building. This time, however, Mr. Sanders was not +leading the party. The boys speedily outdistanced him and as soon as +they arrived within the yard they discovered that two other men were +already on the ground. + +By this time the fire was under strong headway. The timbers of the +dwelling house, old and dry, were burning almost like tinder. Sparks +were flying from the blazing roof and the flames were steadily mounting +higher and higher. + +Across the field from the opposite road forms of men approaching the +building could be seen, and the wild cry "Fire!" "Fire!" was heard on +every side. + +There were no buckets or pails to be found in the dwelling, as was +speedily discovered when the doors were burst open. Near the kitchen +door was the old well, which had been used in former generations. A +well-sweep was there, but the heavy weight which had been used to +balance the bucket was gone and it had been long since the water in the +depths below had been disturbed. In desperation, however, the entire +party sought to find some means of stopping the fire. + +Some of the men who now had arrived started swiftly across the fields +toward houses that could be seen in the distance. There was a vague +thought that they might obtain pails and ropes that would enable them to +quench the flames. By the time the men returned, however, the house was +doomed. + +Fascinated by the sight, the boys withdrew from the spot and watched the +blazing dwelling as the flames leaped and roared and crackled. + +"There goes the chimney!" exclaimed Fred in a low voice, as a pile of +bricks fell crashing into the depths. + +"I wonder what became of those chimney-swallows," suggested John. + +"I guess those that could fly are gone and those that were too young to +fly are already burned," said Grant. + +"How do you suppose that fire started?" inquired George. + +As no one had a ready solution his question remained unanswered. The +boys now, however, were rejoined by Mr. Sanders, who explained that it +was perilous as well as useless to attempt to fight the flames longer. +The most that could be expected was to prevent the flying embers from +setting fire to fences or to buildings that were not far away. + +"It's a pity," said Mr. Sanders slowly, "that the old house had to go in +this way." + +"And it never gave up all its secrets either," added Fred. "We were just +on the point of finding out, when the whole thing goes up in smoke." + +"I fancy that what you call 'secrets' will all be explained. My thought +is that the two men, whom we found here when we came back across the +fields, can tell more about the origin of the fire than we think." + +"Who were the men?" inquired George. + +"I don't know either of them," answered Mr. Sanders. "To me they looked +like tramps." + +Startled by the unexpected statement the boys stared blankly at one +another and then as if moved by a common impulse they turned and +advanced among the spectators who now numbered at least three score. + +"Isn't it wonderful," suggested Grant, "what a crowd you can get and in +such a little while even out in the country, if anything unusual is +going on? I wouldn't have believed that a blast on Gabriel's trumpet +could have brought twenty people here in an hour and yet in less than +twenty minutes there's a crowd. Where do you suppose they came from?" + +"That fire can be seen a long distance," explained George, "and there's +nothing like a fire to get a crowd. There's the tramp!" he abruptly +added, nodding, as he spoke, toward a man who could be seen on the +outskirts of the assembly. + +By common consent all four boys instantly ran to the place where the man +was seen. + +As they approached, however, the tramp, for George's statement proved to +be correct, apparently became aware of their coming and instantly +departed. + +To the boys it seemed that he had moved around to the other side of the +burning building but when they sought him there he was not to be found. + +"What do you suppose it all means?" inquired John blankly. "He acted as +if he didn't want to see us." + +"Probably he didn't," suggested George. "That's his right." + +"It may be and it may not be," retorted John. "I don't believe he will +stand very long on the order of his departure." + +"Why not?" + +"Probably he could tell more about how the fire started than any one in +the crowd." + +"What do you mean?" demanded George as the three boys stopped and stared +into the face of their friend. + +"I don't know just how much I do mean, but we all know that the tramp +used the old Meeker House as a sort of headquarters, or at least that he +used to stop there nights, and it may be that he was here when the fire +first started." + +"Of course he was," spoke up John. "Don't you remember that he told me +that if we would come over to the house after dinner, we would see +something interesting?" + +"Well, all I can say is that we came and that we certainly found +something interesting," said George dryly, as the falling timbers +crashed into the fire and great showers of sparks fell all about the +waiting boys. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV--A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + + +Following the fall of the walls of the old house, the fire blazed up +anew and a fresh shower of sparks fell far from the blazing building. +The crowd was helpless. The only water to be had was from the old well +which now had caved in and the small amount which could be secured had +been exhausted in the early part of the fire. The timbers were old and +dry, and blazed almost like burning paper. The faces and forms of the +spectators seemed to be ghostly in the light against the dark background +of the night. + +For an hour the blaze still continued, but the flames were gradually +becoming lower. No longer were there showers of blazing sparks that fell +upon the ground far away. + +There was only a dim glow when at last Mr. Sanders led the way back to +the automobile. The excitement of the boys, however, still continued and +when their car started they were all looking back at the spot where the +crowd, fantastic in its appearance in the dim light and the glow of the +dying fire, were still to be seen. + +"Well, there's one thing I feel almost as badly about as I do the loss +of the old building," said John thoughtfully, as the car sped homeward. + +"What is that?" inquired George. + +"Now we shall never know about the mysteries of the old place." + +"There aren't very many mysteries left," suggested Fred. "We have found +out about the speaking tube and the chimney-swallows." + +"Yes," said Grant, "but how about that blaze?" + +"I suspect," joined in Mr. Sanders, "that the blaze you speak of had +something to do with the burning of the old house." + +"What do you mean?" inquired George quickly. + +"That's just what I mean," replied Mr. Sanders. "Somebody had a +flash-light over there and probably set fire to the building. I haven't +any idea who could have done it." + +"I guess the tramp might tell us something," suggested Grant. + +"The tramp?" inquired Mr. Sanders. "What tramp?" + +In response to his questions the boys related all their experiences with +the strange man whom they had found in the old Meeker House. The part +which he had taken in the return of the lost automobile was also +explained and in response to George's suggestion that his father should +reward the man for the return of the car his father quickly inquired, +"But what was he doing away up beyond Tuxedo? I thought you said he made +his headquarters here in the old Meeker House." + +"He does, part of the time," explained John. + +"But what was he doing up there so far away?" inquired Mr. Sanders +sharply. "You know I sent you word that there was a possibility that a +car which had been located in a garage at Newburgh might be the one +which we had lost. What was he doing up there? How did he travel so far +and so fast?" + +"He explained to us," said John, "that he had got a ride most of the +way. In fact I think he said that he didn't have to walk over half a +mile. He stole a ride on the cars and then somebody took him in his +automobile and brought him farther." + +"Did he say what he was doing up there?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"No, sir," replied George. + +"But you say he was a very skillful driver?" + +"Yes, sir," spoke up John promptly. "I never saw a man that could handle +a car better." + +"I think we must look into this more fully," said Mr. Sanders, "but it +may be that he is the one who may know more about the loss of our car +than we think and I'm sure he could explain a part at least of the +origin of the fire at the old Meeker House." + +"Do you think he set it on fire?" demanded Fred. + +"Probably not, at least intentionally," replied Mr. Sanders, "but it may +be that he was the one who had the flash-light and he may have set fire +to the old building without intending to do so." + +"Well," spoke up John, "I'm sorry we shan't ever find out about that +tooting of the automobile horn that we heard in the old building and the +flash that we saw. Why, the fire seemed to be all over the building at +once and then die out in every room just as quickly as it came." + +"I think we shall know more about it," said Mr. Sanders quietly. +"Meanwhile the best thing for us to do is not to do anything to-night." + +After the arrival of the boys at George's home the excitement still +continued and for two hours the boys remained on the piazza talking over +the experiences of the night. Much of the mystery of the old house was +still unexplained. + +"Well, all I can say is," declared Fred, as the boys at last arose to go +to their rooms, "that if the old cowboys and skinners came back to the +old Meeker House to carry on their pranks they'll have to seek other +quarters now." + +"I think you will find that your cowboys and skinners are pretty well up +to date," laughed Mr. Sanders. "And you'll find too that they are +clothed in very substantial flesh. I have been suspicious for a long +time that the tramps were using the old house for a sort of +headquarters, but I was not sure of it until you told me the story of +the man with whom you had had some dealings. We'll all go over there the +first thing to-morrow morning and perhaps we shall find some things that +will help us to make the others clear." + +Accordingly, soon after breakfast the following day, the four Go Ahead +boys, together with Mr. Sanders, departed for the place where the fire +had occurred the preceding evening. + +When they arrived, smoke was still rising from the ashes, but the flames +had long since died away. No one was near the spot and as the boys +approached the ruins, Mr. Sanders said, "I wish our friend, the tramp, +would come." + +"Why do you want him?" inquired George. + +"I think he is the man who can give us the information we most want just +now. I do not recall that I ever saw him." + +"He's a strange man," said George quickly. "He looks like a tramp and +yet he uses good English and he shows that he has been used to better +things some time in his life." + +"Did he tell you that?" laughed Mr. Sanders. + +"I don't know that he said that exactly, but that's what he made me +think." + +"Quite likely." + +"Well, it's true," maintained George stoutly. "All you have to do is to +look into his face and hear him talk and you know that he isn't just a +common tramp." + +"Strange how the mysteries about the old Meeker House keep up," laughed +Mr. Sanders. "First you have the cowboys and skinners meeting there and +then you have men who may be modern cowboys and skinners in flesh and +blood who make it their headquarters. The twittering of the +chimney-swallows drives all four of the Go Ahead boys out of the +building." + +"But we went back," spoke up Fred quickly. "We didn't give up. Besides, +Mr. Sanders, I noticed last night when we came down the stairway that +all four of us had all we could do to keep up with you." + +"So you did. So you did," admitted Mr. Sanders laughingly. "But I did +not run because I was afraid of spooks." + +"Neither did we," said Fred. "We thought when we had a man along with us +that we would be protected and everything would be safe. But when we saw +him leaving the old Meeker House, faster than any of us boys could go, +we thought our safest plan was to try to keep up with him. Something +might happen to him, you know. If he was in trouble he might need our +help." + +Mr. Sanders laughed heartily at Fred's assertions and then said quickly, +"Who is that man coming across the field?" + +All the boys looked quickly in the direction in which Mr. Sanders +pointed and a moment later George said in a low voice, "That's our +tramp." + +"I thought he would be here," said Mr. Sanders. "Now perhaps we can find +out a little more than we knew before." + +All five awaited the approach of the man who indeed proved to be the one +about whom they had been talking. + +As the tramp came near, his face lighted up with a smile as he cordially +said, "Good morning. Good morning. You're early on the scene of our +disaster last night." + +"Yes," responded George. "We saw you last night and then we lost sight +of you in the crowd and couldn't find you again." + +"Well, here I am," said the tramp, smiling. "If you still want to see me +all you have to do is to look at me. I never thought before that I was +very much to look at." + +"We want to talk to you," said Mr. Sanders more seriously. "You told the +boys, did you not, that you and your friends had been making the old +house your headquarters?" + +"Not exactly 'headquarters,'" replied the tramp. "We used to stay some +nights there." + +"And you used the ghosts to scare people off or keep them away from the +old house?" + +"That's what we did," admitted the tramp, laughing loudly as he spoke. +"It would do your heart good if you could only have seen some of them +leave." + +"What were those groans that we heard?" spoke up Fred. "I never quite +understood them. We found out about the birds in the chimney and the +speaking tube that ran from the kitchen to the front room, but how about +those groans?" + +"Why, there were usually two or three of us, and when we had visitors we +took our stand in different rooms and one answered the groan of the +others. Sometimes we groaned all together. Usually, though, we did not +have very much to do, because after one or two groans we usually found +the old house deserted." + +"What about that automobile horn?" inquired George. + +"Oh, that was another way we had of scaring people, that was all." + +"Where did you get the horn?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"I can't just say. We had it a long time." + +"It sounded, the boys tell me, very like the horn of the car that we had +taken from our garage." + +The tramp looked into the face of Mr. Sanders a moment before he said, +"And you suspect, do you, that I took your car and left the horn here?" + +"Do you know where our car is?" inquired Mr. Sanders abruptly. "I told +my son to give you ten dollars for returning the old car. Here is the +money," Mr. Sanders added, as he held forth a bill. + +"Thank you, sir," said the tramp, as he took the money and thrust it +into his pocket. "I told the boys that I could be persuaded to accept +the reward; but about your other car, all I can say is that I don't know +where it is now." + +"Do you know who took it?" + +"I do not." + +"Do you know how the fire started in the old house last night?" + +"No, sir. I don't." + +"But you had some flash-light powder and you set it off here. The house +may have caught fire from it." + +"I don't think it could possibly have got on fire that way. You see we +used that powder in pans and we set it off in two or three rooms at the +same time, just as we used to answer one another's cries or groan +together. The fire couldn't spread. The powder just flashed up and then +the fire was all out in a minute. Besides, the old house was no good +anyway. No one could live in it and my friends and I thought that if we +slept there occasionally no one would be any the worse for it. Of course +if there had been any objections made we should have been glad to pay +attention to them." + +"I wish you would come back to the car with me, I want to speak to you +alone." + +"All right, sir, just as you say," responded the tramp, quickly +advancing and accompanying Mr. Sanders as he led the way across the +fields after he had bidden the boys remain where they then were. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI--CONCLUSION + + +Mr. Sanders and the tramp remained in the car a long time. Indeed, as +the minutes passed the boys became somewhat impatient. Frequently they +glanced toward the scene in the road in which Mr. Sanders and his +strange companion were evidently holding a very interesting +conversation. + +When an hour had elapsed the desire of the boys to depart became more +pronounced. A few of the country people meanwhile had come to view the +ruins of the famous old house, but they had little to say to the boys +and after they had inspected the ruins the most of them slowly departed. + +At last Fred said impatiently, "Look yonder! Mr. Sanders is taking that +man away in the car." + +"I wonder where he is going?" said George, as he glanced at the +departing automobile. + +"Probably taking him to the lock-up," suggested Fred. + +"If he's taking the man to the lock-up I know some more that he ought +not to forget," said George soberly. + +"So do I," spoke up Fred, "and some of them aren't more than a thousand +miles from here either." + +However, after the departure of Mr. Sanders in the car, the boys became +more thoughtful. They had not received any word to remain where they +were, but George decided that it would not be wise for them to depart +until they had received some further instructions. Doubtless, he +explained, his father would return for them in a little while. + +Another hour had elapsed before Mr. Sanders came back. As soon as he was +discovered approaching, all the Go Ahead boys ran quickly across the +field and when they were informed, in response to their inquiries, that +Mr. Sanders was ready to take them home they all quickly climbed into +the automobile. + +"What did you do with the tramp?" inquired George as soon as the car +started. + +"I took him to the railroad station." + +"Is he going to leave?" + +"He says he is." + +"You seemed to have had a mighty interesting conversation. Did he tell +you all the sad, sweet story of his life?" + +"I knew much of it." + +"You did?" demanded George in astonishment. "You did! Who is he? What is +he? How did you know him? Where did he come from? What is his name?" + +"Hold on," interrupted Mr. Sanders with a laugh. "I can answer your +questions one at a time, but I cannot find any answer that might fit +them all alike. Let me tell you first of all that he didn't explain +everything as fully as I wish he had, but he did tell me a few things." + +"What were they?" demanded George impatiently. + +"Let me tell you first a little about himself," said Mr. Sanders, +smiling at the interest of his young companions. "That tramp is the +younger brother of a great friend of mine. Indeed, his brother and I +were together almost all the time when we were boys. If I was not in his +house then he was in mine, or we were fishing in these brooks or nutting +in the woods or coasting on the hills. We very seldom were separated. +This younger brother--" + +"What is his name?" interrupted George. + +"I shan't tell you his name now. Perhaps I will some other time, but he +was one of the most attractive boys I ever knew. He was very quiet in +his manner, and had the greatest faculty of making friends I ever knew +any one to have. His mother almost idolized him and she never held him +up to any task. If he got into mischief it was always the fault of the +other boys, she said. If he was kept after school or had any trouble +with the teachers she always told him that it was the teacher's fault. +Whatever he did, to her was right. You boys want to be thankful that you +have mothers that hold you up to some things instead of upholding you in +everything you do. + +"Well, this man when he was a boy was too lazy to have any share in the +family life. Pleasant, good-natured, popular with the boys and girls, he +never did anything for any one else. If his mother wanted a pail of +water drawn from the old well behind the farmhouse--and they lived right +straight across the field in that house over yonder," explained Mr. +Sanders, pointing as he spoke to a house that could be seen in the +distance, "he always had some excuse. If his mother had simply told him +to bring in a pail of water instead of trying to smooth the way for him +and said that he was too tired or not strong enough, if she had done +that and some other things like it I don't believe this man to-day would +be tramping around the country. He has been a complete failure. He has +never learned to do anything well. He used to be the best baseball +player we had in all this part of the country. There wasn't a fellow +that could catch him when we were in swimming in the old pond. He could +make a boat and sail a boat, but he just simply drifted on. By the way, +boys, did any of you ever stop to think of the fact that a boat never +drifts but in one direction?" + +"What's that?" inquired John. + +"Why, down the stream," replied Mr. Sanders quietly. "This boy grew up +to be a man and drifted into all kinds of bad ways. You see he had never +learned to work and besides there are two words in the English language +that he never could pronounce. One word has three letters in it and the +other has two, but little words though they are, he never seemed to be +able to pronounce them." + +"I can't think what the words are," said George. + +"I know what they are," broke in John. "They are 'yes' and 'no.'" + +"That's right," replied Mr. Sanders with a smile. "They are the hardest +words in the language for a good many people to use. When they say 'yes' +they don't say it in a way that means much, and when they say 'no' it +doesn't mean much more. + +"His mother died years ago and I have always thought that this son was +the cause of her death. At one time, as I told you, he was just as +straight and attractive a boy as any of you." + +"I guess the trouble with him was that he wasn't a Go Ahead boy," +suggested Fred. + +"That was one trouble," replied Mr. Sanders with a smile, "and another +was that after he began to drift he couldn't stop. You see if he hadn't +begun he never could have come to the end to which he has. That's a +strange thing to me that more people do not realize that if they don't +begin, they never will come to the end." + +"Did he explain to you," inquired Fred, "why he shut me in the cellar of +the old Meeker House?" + +"No," replied Mr. Sanders, "I didn't know that you were shut in there." + +"Well, I was. He caught me in the cellar and bolted the door on me. I +must have been in there an hour and a half." + +"How did you get out? Did he let you out?" + +"No, sir, I went and pushed up the outside door." + +"Well, why did you wait an hour and a half before you did that?" +responded Mr. Sanders with a laugh. + +"I'm sure I don't know," said Fred blankly. "I guess it was because I +didn't think of it or try it." + +"Very likely he meant it for a joke. Now, when I had my talk with him he +recognized me, although at first I didn't recognize him. He did say some +things about scaring you boys away from the old place." + +"Did he say anything about the way we left last night?" inquired George +mischievously. + +"Why, how did you leave last night?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"We left in a big hurry," declared George. + +"What made you in such a hurry?" + +"We were trying to keep up with the man who was with us and was leading +the way," said George demurely. + +Mr. Sanders joined in the laugh that followed and then said quickly, +"Our lost car will be brought back to-day." + +"How do you know?" demanded George quickly. + +"I don't think I shall explain all of that to you, my boy," said Mr. +Sanders quietly. "It ought to be enough to know that it will be there." + +"But suppose the tramp doesn't bring it back?" suggested Grant. + +"I am not supposing anything about the tramp, or about any failure," +replied Mr. Sanders, again smiling quietly. "All I say to you is that I +am confident that the car will be brought back." + +"Did you find out who stole the car?" inquired John. + +"I don't think it was 'stolen.' You might call it 'borrowed.'" + +"Well, did you find out who 'borrowed' it then?" demanded John. + +"Yes." + +"Who did?" said George eagerly. + +"There are several reasons why I shall not go farther into details," +said Mr. Sanders. "You may draw such conclusions as you please. Very +likely they will not be incorrect. You have followed the events of the +summer more closely than I and I have no doubt can connect one with +another." + +"Well, I think," said George positively, "that the tramp took our car. +He's a mighty good driver and knows all about a car. He didn't intend to +sell it perhaps, but he wanted to use it for a few days." + +"Are you sure he used it in the daytime?" inquired Mr. Sanders quietly. + +"Why, yes. When would he use it?" demanded George. + +"Let me suppose a case," explained his father. "Just suppose a man and +his friends made it a practice to come to your garage nights and take +out your car after you had gone to bed. Suppose on one of these long +rides the car met with a bad accident. It was impossible to bring the +car back that night, so it was taken to a garage where it was said that +at least a week would be required to repair it. At the end of the week +the car is not repaired. Naturally the people whose automobile is +missing are sure the car has been stolen and they are sending word all +over the country for the police to be on the lookout for it. Meanwhile +the car is safe in a little town not more than ten miles distant from +the place where it belonged. Finally there comes a day when the car is +ready, but the man who took it and who had the accident has not money +enough to pay for the repairs. He doesn't intend to steal the car, but +he is not able to bring it back to its owner. If the owner telephones to +the garage for a man to bring it to his home it is quite likely he may +see it soon." + +"And did you let the tramp get away?" + +"I not only let him get away, but I gave him money to leave. I don't +suppose he will use the money as I told him, but I am going to give him +a chance. I would rather help two men who do not deserve it than to let +one go who does. Besides," Mr. Sanders added thoughtfully, "I thought of +his father and mother and how good they had been to me when I was a boy. +There," he added, "I have told you more than I expected." + +"Will the tramp come back?" inquired Grant. + +"I hope not. I doubt if he does, because the old Meeker House has now +gone and he has no place hereabout in which he can stay." + +"Well, we found out what the spooks in the old house were," said Fred. +"I guess that's the way with most of such things." + +"We certainly had a good time finding out," said John laughingly. "I'm +glad we didn't give up." + +"So am I," said Fred. "But then," he added, "we are the Go Ahead boys +and have not learned how to do anything else." + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS +OLD HOUSE*** + + +******* This file should be named 35964-8.txt or 35964-8.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/5/9/6/35964 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/35964-8.zip b/35964-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..123b202 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-8.zip diff --git a/35964-h.zip b/35964-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7a5620 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-h.zip diff --git a/35964-h/35964-h.htm b/35964-h/35964-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a0b998 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-h/35964-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,8144 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old House, by Ross Kay</title> + <style type="text/css"> + body {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;} + p {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0; + position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal; + font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none; + background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;} + .pncolor {color:silver;} + h1 {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;} + h1.pg {text-align:center; font-weight:bold; font-size: 190%; } + h2 {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;} + h1 {font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4ex; margin-bottom:2ex;} + h2 {font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4ex; margin-bottom:2ex;} + hr.pb {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;} + .sc {font-variant: small-caps;} + hr.fnsep {border:none; border-bottom: 1px solid black; width:10%; margin-left:0; margin-top:20px} + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + .caption {font-size: 80%;} + .footnote a {text-decoration:none;} + div.center p {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;} + .footnote {font-size: 80%;} + .fnanchor {font-size: 80%; text-decoration: none; vertical-align: 0.25em;} + .footnote .label {float:left; text-align:left; width:2em;} + + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 85%;} + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1 class="pg">The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old +House, by Ross Kay</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old House</p> +<p>Author: Ross Kay</p> +<p>Release Date: April 25, 2011 [eBook #35964]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: UTF-8</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE***</p> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<h3 class="figcenter">E-text prepared by Roger Frank, Juliet Sutherland,<br /> + and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> + +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.4em;margin:2em auto 2em auto;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i001' id='i001'></a> +<img src='images/cover.jpg' alt='' width='60%' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.4em;margin:2em auto 2em auto;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS<br/>AND THE<br/>MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE</p> + +<p style='text-align:center;'>BY</p> +<p style='text-align:center;font-size:1.2em;margin-bottom:1em;'>ROSS KAY</p> + +<p style='text-align:center'>Author of “The Search for the Spy,” “The Air Scout,”<br/> +“Dodging the North Sea Mines,” “With Joffre on<br/> +the Battle Line,” “The Go Ahead Boys<br/> +on Smugglers’ Island,” “The Go<br/> +Ahead Boys and the<br/> +Treasure Cave,”<br/> +etc., etc.</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p>Copyright, 1916,</p> +<p>by</p> +<p>BARSE & HOPKINS</p> +</div> +<p> <br/></p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +PREFACE +</p> +<p> +In almost every rural community in the older parts of our +country there is a house which some of the country folk have +believed to be “haunted.” As a rule this house is old and +perhaps has fallen into partial decay. The children passing on +the country road move to the opposite side when they draw near +the building. Stories are current of scenes which have been +witnessed and sounds heard in the vacant dwelling. Perhaps even +the older people have not altogether outgrown their feeling of +timidity when they are near it. How baseless all such stories +are and how easily most of the unusual sights and sounds can be +accounted for is of course clearly understood. In this story I +have tried to interest my young readers in the attempts of four +normal, go-ahead boys to solve the mysteries connected with a +venerable house near the home of one of them, which was shunned +by many of the simple country people. I have endeavored to avoid +all sensationalism and yet to interest the boys and girls in a +stirring story of the experiences of my heroes. I am not without +hope that the final solution of the mystery of the old Meeker +House may help my young readers a little more courageously to +face other problems, perhaps equally mysterious or perplexing, +which may be presented to them in other forms. At all events I +sincerely hope that the spirit and determination of the Go Ahead +Boys will remain in their minds after the story itself shall +have long been forgotten. +</p> +<p style='text-align: right;'>—Ross Kay</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +CONTENTS +</p> +<p style='margin-left:2em'><a href='#chI'>CHAPTER I—THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE</a><br/> +<a href='#chII'>CHAPTER II—COWBOYS AND SKINNERS</a><br/> +<a href='#chIII'>CHAPTER III—INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE</a><br/> +<a href='#chIV'>CHAPTER IV—FLIGHT</a><br/> +<a href='#chV'>CHAPTER V—A SURPRISE</a><br/> +<a href='#chVI'>CHAPTER VI—A PRISONER</a><br/> +<a href='#chVII'>CHAPTER VII—AN ESCAPE</a><br/> +<a href='#chVIII'>CHAPTER VIII—THE LOST CAR</a><br/> +<a href='#chIX'>CHAPTER IX—ANOTHER FLIGHT</a><br/> +<a href='#chX'>CHAPTER X—THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS</a><br/> +<a href='#chXI'>CHAPTER XI—THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR</a><br/> +<a href='#chXII'>CHAPTER XII—A HASTY DEPARTURE</a><br/> +<a href='#chXIII'>CHAPTER XIII—WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR</a><br/> +<a href='#chXIV'>CHAPTER XIV—DISAPPOINTED</a><br/> +<a href='#chXV'>CHAPTER XV—A FAMOUS SPOT</a><br/> +<a href='#chXVI'>CHAPTER XVI—ANOTHER LOSS</a><br/> +<a href='#chXVII'>CHAPTER XVII—LEFT BEHIND</a><br/> +<a href='#chXVIII'>CHAPTER XVIII—THE ARRIVAL</a><br/> +<a href='#chXIX'>CHAPTER XIX—AN INVITATION</a><br/> +<a href='#chXX'>CHAPTER XX—THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXI'>CHAPTER XXI—AN EXPLANATION IN PART</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXII'>CHAPTER XXII—A DARE</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXIII'>CHAPTER XXIII—LED BY A MAN</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXIV'>CHAPTER XXIV—THE END OF THE HOUSE</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXV'>CHAPTER XXV—A TALK WITH THE TRAMP</a><br/> +<a href='#chXXVI'>CHAPTER XXVI—CONCLUSION</a></p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p style='font-size:1.4em; text-align: center; margin-top: 2em;'>THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chI' id='chI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER I—THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“Do you see that house?” +</p> +<p> +“You mean that low, old house on the corner of the road?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“What of it?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, that’s one of the oldest houses in this part of the country.” +</p> +<p> +“It looks the part. How old is it?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s at least one hundred and seventy-five years old.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s old enough to look better, then. Is that one of the houses that +Washington slept in?” +</p> +<p> +“I guess so.” +</p> +<p> +“It must be, from the stories you have told me since I have been here. +How old was Washington, anyway, when he died?” +</p> +<p> +“He was in his sixty-eighth year.” +</p> +<p> +“I think there’s some mistake about that.” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir. Those are the correct figures. He was born in 1732 and he died +in 1799.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not going to dispute you, George. I’ll take your word for it, but +it always seemed to me that Washington’s age must have been a good deal +greater than the histories say it was.” +</p> +<p> +“Why?” +</p> +<p> +“Because he slept in so many houses. I have figured it up and if he had +spent about a quarter of an hour in every one of the houses that you say +he slept in, it will figure out that he was a good deal more than +sixty-seven years old. Indeed, I have begun to think that Methuselah was +an infant-in-arms compared with George Washington, if ten per cent of +the stories you have been telling us are true. By the way, how old was +Methuselah, anyway?” +</p> +<p> +“‘And all the days of Methuselah were nine hundred and sixty and nine +years and he died.’” +</p> +<p> +“Well, poor old man, I should have thought he would have been ready to +die. Just think of it, having to live in this world almost a thousand +years! I wonder how his hearing was and if he could see straight. I have +always thought that no matter how long I might live I should want people +to feel when I came to die that I had a little more of a record than +born in 1899 and died some time in the future.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the best thing some men ever did.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, to die. They’d give up their places to others who could fill them +better.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s all that got to do with that old house?” +</p> +<p> +“Nothing. I didn’t start to talk about Methuselah.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, but what about this house?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s haunted.” +</p> +<p> +A hearty laugh went up from the three boys who were the companions of +George Sanders in his automobile. +</p> +<p> +The conversation which has been recorded had been carried on by George +Sanders and his friend Fred Button. These two boys, together with John +Clemens and Grant Jones, were close friends and schoolmates. Although +they were nearly of the same age they were markedly different in their +appearance. Fred, who was the pygmy of the party, was a little, +round-faced, bright-eyed fellow, who was able to say quick and keen +things and who was the inspiration of most of the pranks of which the +band was guilty. +</p> +<p> +John Clemens was perhaps Fred’s closest friend. He was six feet three +inches tall, but he did not weigh very much more than the shorter Fred, +who made up in breadth what he lacked in length. +</p> +<p> +Grant Jones, the most quiet and thoughtful member of the party, seldom +entered into the wordy contests, although he took special delight in the +pranks of his comrades. +</p> +<p> +George Washington Sanders was the owner of the automobile in which the +four boys were riding. +</p> +<p> +The day was one of the most beautiful of early summer. In Northern New +Jersey, not far from the border of New York State, George’s father had +an extensive farm. To this place from their early childhood the four +friends had been accustomed to come from the great city and the many +good times they had enjoyed there seemed to increase in number and +quality with every succeeding summer. +</p> +<p> +Not all their summers had been passed on the farm, however. There had +been frequent trips, which the boys had taken to different parts of +their own land and others. A few years before this time they had been +accompanied by the father or uncle of one of the boys, who had acted as +guardian and guide. On these various trips they had not only had many +enjoyable times, but also many stirring experiences. Some of these +adventures have already been told in other stories of this series. +</p> +<p> +Among themselves the boys frequently referred to the quartet as the Go +Ahead boys. They had selected this name as one that was most expressive +of their purposes. They had found it in the famous motto of Davy +Crockett, who, years ago, was himself familiarly known as “Go Ahead” +Crockett. +</p> +<p> +On the day when this story opens they were on their way to George’s +farm. They had approached within a mile of their destination when their +host had called their attention to the low building which commonly was +referred to as the Meeker House. It was an unpretentious structure, +containing a story and a half, with a lean-to or addition, that looked +much as if it had been built as an afterthought, or as a postscript is +added to a letter. +</p> +<p> +The sides of the building were weather-beaten and it was manifest that +it had been long since any one had dwelt in the house. +</p> +<p> +“It seems to me, George,” spoke up Fred, “that you’re finding new +historical places around the farm every summer. Let me see, what was it +last summer?” +</p> +<p> +“You are doing better, Fred,” laughed George. “You remember now that +there was a last summer. I have sometimes been afraid you wouldn’t +remember even that much, but for your sake I’ll tell you that last +summer I told you the story of the young fellow who was captured in +Ramapo Pass. He was Washington’s messenger, you will remember, although +he did not know it at the time.” +</p> +<p> +“I do recall now,” said Fred pompously, “some information you were kind +enough to dole out to us. It seems to me that you told me that this +young fellow was sent purposely by Washington down through the Ramapo +Valley so that he would be captured by the British and taken to New +York. If I’m correct he had a letter sewed inside the lining of his coat +and this letter contained instructions for General Heath, who was at +Morristown, to join him, that is Washington and not the boy, in taking +New York.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right. It all comes back to me, too,” joined in Grant. “This +fellow was taken to New York and he felt pretty mad at Washington. He +could have found his way across the country all right, he thought, and +would have given the message to General Heath without any trouble, but +Washington insisted upon his going through to Ramapo Valley and of +course he was caught. Poor chap, he didn’t know that that was the very +thing Washington was planning to do. He wanted him caught so that his +letter would be found and Clinton wouldn’t dare leave New York.” +</p> +<p> +“What did Clinton want to leave New York for?” broke in John. “I can’t +understand why anybody would want to leave little, old New York. That’s +the best town on the globe.” +</p> +<p> +“He wanted to take his army south to help Cornwallis, who was bottled up +on the Yorktown peninsula. That was the trick that Washington played on +him. He kept Clinton here, and when at last Clinton got his eyes opened, +he found out that Washington’s army was already down across the Delaware +and headed for Chesapeake Bay.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he arrive in time?” inquired Fred innocently. +</p> +<p> +“For further and detailed information I refer you to any primary history +of the United States,” said Grant laughingly. “That’s one of the things +no American boy ought to have to learn. He ought to know it before he +begins.” +</p> +<p> +“What about this house back here?” said Fred. “You seem to point it out +as if you thought there was something peculiar about it.” +</p> +<p> +“I told you that it’s haunted.” +</p> +<p> +Again the boys laughed heartily as Grant said, “Anybody would think to +hear you talk, George, that you belonged back in the days when they +hanged witches.” +</p> +<p> +“You mean burned,” spoke up Fred promptly. +</p> +<p> +“No, I don’t mean ‘burned’ the witches, I mean ‘hanged,’” retorted +Grant. “There are some ignorant people who sometimes talk about the +people of the Salem Colony burning witches, but they didn’t burn +them—they hanged them.” +</p> +<p> +“Pardon me,” said Fred demurely. “I stand corrected.” +</p> +<p> +“But there really is something queer about this house,” said George. “I +know, for I’ve been there.” +</p> +<p> +The boys all looked back at the little building, which now was far +behind them. The quiet that rested upon it seemed like that of a +cemetery. It plainly belonged to another generation. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by its being haunted!” demanded Fred, at last breaking +in upon the silence. +</p> +<p> +“I’m telling you what the common report is,” said George, somewhat +testily. “Everybody says it is haunted.” +</p> +<p> +“But you said you yourself knew it was.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t. I said there was something peculiar about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Go on with your story, George,” called John. “Don’t keep us in this +burning suspense. What was it?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, I went over there one day,” explained George, somewhat +reluctantly. “It was just at sunset and a terrible thunder shower had +come up and I ran to the old Meeker House to get in out of the rain.” +</p> +<p> +“When did you learn to do that?” broke in Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t have to learn,” declared George. “At all events I got inside +the house and waited for the storm to pass. But it didn’t pass. When it +struck the hills over yonder it was turned back by colder currents of +air, so I got the storm coming and going. The first thing I knew the old +place was dark and then—” +</p> +<p> +“And then what?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“And then,—things began to happen.” +</p> +<p> +“What happened?” inquired Grant. “Don’t keep us in this terrible +suspense.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, there wasn’t a breath of air stirring,” explained George, “but +the window shutters began to slam a half a dozen times and I heard +groans that seemed to come up from the cellar and I was almost sure that +once I heard something or somebody call my name.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good one,” laughed John, who in spite of his flippant manner +was strongly moved by the story of his friend. “You’re always expecting +somebody to call you by name whether they know you or not.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, but they know <em>of</em> him,” suggested Fred. “I know <em>of</em> a good many +people that I don’t know by sight; for example, there’s the President.” +</p> +<p> +“Keep still, fellows,” ordered Grant, “and let George tell his story. He +was as far as the slamming of the shutters and the groans that came from +the cellar and the call which some of the evil spirits made on him by +name. Go on, George,” he added, turning to his friend, “tell us what +happened next.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chII' id='chII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER II—COWBOYS AND SKINNERS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know just what happened next,” laughed George. “There were two +peals of thunder so near together that you could hardly clap your hands +between them. When the first one came and I heard that call, I didn’t +stand on the order of my departure. When the next clap sounded I was +away down the road under that old oak tree.” +</p> +<p> +All the four boys laughed heartily, even George apparently not being +crestfallen by his lack of courage on the night he was describing. +</p> +<p> +“What is it you call the house?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“The Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“You think it’s haunted?” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t say so,” responded George somewhat warmly. “I merely said it +is a common report that it is a haunted house. I’m just telling you what +happened one night when I ran in there to get out of a storm.” +</p> +<p> +“Poor old house,” said George thoughtfully, as he looked back at the old +building, which still could be seen in the distance. “It makes me think +of Uncle Sim. He’s the last leaf on the tree and I guess this is the +oldest house in this part of the country.” +</p> +<p> +Uncle Sim was an aged negro, who for many years had been in the employ +of George’s father. His labor was no longer efficient, but his faithful +services in the years that were gone had caused Mr. Sanders to provide +for the wants of the gray-haired negro. Uncle Sim’s form was bowed with +the weight of years which he carried and his trembling limbs showed how +much he had suffered from the “mis’ry.” Indeed, the boys had become +convinced that there was no topic concerning which the old man loved to +talk as he did concerning his various aches and pains. +</p> +<p> +In spite of his afflictions, however, Uncle Sim was a warm friend of the +boys. When they got into mischief Uncle Sim’s face was lifted heavenward +so that he was unable to see any of the pranks they committed and +therefore was unable to impart any information when he was asked as to +his knowledge of their deeds. He was a great favorite of the boys and +many of his stories had been familiar to them from their earliest +childhood. He knew why the red squirrel and the black hated each other +so intensely. He was well informed concerning the perpetual warfare that +existed between the dogs and cats on the farm. The call of the bluejays +was in a language which Uncle Sim claimed to understand. And although he +did not talk back to the chattering jays, nevertheless he strongly +believed that they were much more guarded in their conversations when he +was nearby. +</p> +<p> +“You go ask Uncle Sim if the house is haunted,” repeated George. “He’ll +tell you what he thinks and you won’t have to wait very long for him to +do it, either.” +</p> +<p> +“Has he never been there?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“You’d better ask him,” declared George. +</p> +<p> +“What do you honestly think about it yourself, George?” said Grant more +seriously. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know just what to think. I haven’t been there since—” +</p> +<p> +“Since when?” spoke up John encouragingly. +</p> +<p> +“Since the last time I was there.” +</p> +<p> +“When was that?” +</p> +<p> +“That time I was telling you about when I ran in there to get out of the +rain.” +</p> +<p> +“Will you go back there now if we’ll go?” challenged Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t mind going,” said George, “but I don’t believe we’ll have time +this afternoon.” His three companions laughed derisively and so aroused +his spirit that he said brusquely, “That’s all right, fellows. I’ll go +back there as soon as any one of you will go.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, sir,” called John. “Stop your car, and we’ll all of us go +back to the old Meeker House and find out if what you have been telling +us is true.” +</p> +<p> +“Who ever heard,” broke in Grant, “of ghosts walking around in the +daytime? The time for us to go there is when the ghosts are showing up +well.” +</p> +<p> +“You didn’t tell us, George, what the ghosts were?” +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t see them,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“What do they say they are?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, the common report is, that ever since the days of the Revolution +the ghosts of the Cowboys and Skinners have made their headquarters in +the old Meeker House and whenever there’s a night that is especially +dark or there is a particularly heavy storm, then they come there and +join in the racket.” +</p> +<p> +“Cowboys?” demanded John. “What do you mean? Those fellows that drive +the cattle out on the plains?” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir, I mean the men who lived in this part of the country when +Washington was fighting for the independence of the United States. But +even if they did live here they wouldn’t help him. They said they didn’t +belong to either side, but the Cowboys usually took advantage of both +sides. When the men were away from home they would go into a house, if +they thought there was any money hidden in some old stocking, and they +would take the women and hold their feet out over the fire until they +told where the money was.” +</p> +<p> +“What were the Skinners?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, they were about the same kind of men, the only difference being +that the Cowboys took the families of the patriots, while the Skinners +paid their first attention to the Tory families. I guess it didn’t make +much difference to either party as long as they found some money or +could get any valuables.” +</p> +<p> +“What did they put up with such things for?” +</p> +<p> +“They had to put up with more or less of it,” answered George. “You see +most of the men were away from home, fighting in the army. That gave the +Cowboys and Skinners their chance and they took it. When the men came +back the Cowboys and Skinners were gone.” +</p> +<p> +“They were something like Georgie Porgie, weren’t they?” laughed Grant. +“I don’t know who he was, but when a certain part of the population of +which he was afraid began to get busy, Georgie Porgie ran away,—likewise +the Cowboys and Skinners.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s all very interesting,” spoke up Fred, “but I don’t believe there’s +such a thing in all the world as a ghost.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, sir,” said George warmly. “All I want you to do is to talk +to Uncle Sim and if he doesn’t convince you that the Meeker House is the +special place where all the people that walk around in the night have +their headquarters, then I’m mistaken.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll ask him just as soon as we get back,” said Fred promptly. +</p> +<p> +Not long afterward the automobile entered the beautiful grounds of the +farm where the four boys were spending a part of the summer. The place +was attractive because of its quietness and the deep shade in the front +yard. A collie dog, lying on the ground, arose and stretched itself and +then bounded toward George as soon as the boys alighted. Around the +corner of the garage at that moment came Uncle Sim, his broad-brimmed +hat carried in his hand and his face shining with perspiration and good +nature. +</p> +<p> +“Well, Uncle Sim,” called Fred. “You can’t guess where we’ve been.” +</p> +<p> +“No, suh, no, suh,” replied the negro, “I reckon I can’t. Mos’ gen’lly I +finds out right soon whar yo’ boys has been. Sometimes I can tell the +d’rection in which yo’ all is goin’, even when I can’t see none o’ +yo’all.” +</p> +<p> +“How’s that?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, from the d’rection in which all the dogs and cats and birds and +cows and I reckon everything that’s able to get away, is movin’.” +</p> +<p> +The boys laughed heartily at Uncle Sim’s statement and Grant said, “But, +Uncle Sim, you know we are the Go Ahead boys.” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh, I reckon I’s somewhat familar with dat ar fac’.” +</p> +<p> +“Uncle Sim, have you ever been in the Meeker House?” spoke up Grant +abruptly. +</p> +<p> +For a moment the old negro was silent as he stared blankly at the boys. +Shaking his head he said, “What fo’ yo’ ask me that question?” +</p> +<p> +“Because I want to know,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“No, suh. I ain’t never been inside the Meeker House, but I’s been so +close dat I could hear what was er goin’ on.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, what is going on there?” inquired Fred. “The house seemed to me to +be deserted. Does any one live there?” +</p> +<p> +“No, suh. No, suh, no one lives dar. Leastwise, no one live dar in the +daytime.” +</p> +<p> +“Who lives there at night?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +Once more the negro was silent and it was evident that the boy’s +question had aroused certain feelings in the heart of Uncle Sim. +</p> +<p> +“Yo’ all better take my advice,” said the old negro, shaking his head in +a still more solemn manner. “Yo’ better keep away from de Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“Why?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“No good comes to anybody dat goes to the Meeker House in the night +time.” +</p> +<p> +“But how do you know, Uncle Sim? You say you have never been there?” +</p> +<p> +“Yo’ all keep away from dar. Min’ what I tell you. Don’t none o’ you’ +boys go near dat old Meeker House after sundown.” +</p> +<p> +“But you make us want to go all the more,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +Uncle Sim merely shook his head and made no further comment. It was +plain, however, that he was seriously troubled by the statement of Grant +and that he was sincere in his warning. +</p> +<p> +“I say, fellows,” called Fred quickly, “why don’t we go over to the +Meeker House to-night? It looks as if it is going to be cloudy,” he +added as he glanced up at the sky. “This will be just the ideal night. +If there’s anything uncanny around the place we’ll be likely to find it +out. Oh, you needn’t go if you don’t want to,” he added quickly upon +George’s unspoken protest. “You and Uncle Sim will be excused, if you +don’t want to go.” +</p> +<p> +“If you fellows go I’m not going to be left behind,” spoke up George +promptly. +</p> +<p> +“Then it’s all fixed,” declared Fred gleefully. “We’ll go to the Meeker +House to-night.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER III—INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +The Go Ahead boys were excited when they entered the house of their +friend and that night when they gathered about the supper table their +one theme of conversation was the proposed visit to the old Meeker +House. +</p> +<p> +Occasionally throughout the conversation there was an expression on the +face of George different from that of his companions. However, none of +them was aware of the occasional smile, or of the keen look with which +George occasionally glanced about the table. At other times the +expression of his face was serious and his interest in the suggested +visit apparently was as keen as that of any of his friends. +</p> +<p> +The boys decided to wait until darkness had fallen before they started +on their expedition. +</p> +<p> +“It’s just eight o’clock,” said Grant, as they left the house and +prepared to take their places in the automobile which was awaiting their +coming. +</p> +<p> +“Eight o’clock and all’s not well, I’m afraid,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Are you afraid?” demanded John with a laugh. +</p> +<p> +“No, I’m not afraid, but somehow when I think of this business,” replied +Fred, “I find I have some shivers.” +</p> +<p> +“You had better not go, my lad,” said John solemnly. “This is no place +for infants or those afflicted with chills.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not chilly enough to stay home if all of you are going,” retorted +Fred. +</p> +<p> +“It’s just the kind of a night we want,” spoke up George. “There isn’t +any moon and it’s going to be dark.” +</p> +<p> +“Those clouds look as if it might rain,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That will be all the better,” said George. “The darker the night the +better the spooks behave. They say it’s almost impossible to find any +there on a moonlight night.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope we’ll find some to-night,” laughed John, but his voice somehow +seemed to belie his confidence. +</p> +<p> +At all events there was not much conversation in the automobile as it +sped swiftly down the road. +</p> +<p> +George, who was driving, occasionally referred to the various stories he +had heard of the deeds in the Meeker House, but his efforts did not meet +with any marked response until he said, “I have heard that Claudius +Smith sometimes shows up in the old house.” +</p> +<p> +“Who’s he?” +</p> +<p> +“He <em>was</em> a Cowboy. He lived more than one hundred and twenty-five years +ago. You have got to speak of him as one who ‘was’ and not ‘is’.” +</p> +<p> +“What makes him come back to the old house?” +</p> +<p> +“It was one of his favorite places, I’m told.” +</p> +<p> +“What was he?” +</p> +<p> +“I told you he was a Cowboy. He got to acting so badly that at last all +the farmers and their boys that could be spared from the army got +together and chased him clear down on Long Island.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they get him?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“They did. They brought him back and took him to Goshen, where they +hanged him in the old courtyard.” +</p> +<p> +“I shouldn’t think he would come back here to the Meeker House,” +suggested Grant. “I should think his ghost would ‘hang’ around the court +house up at Goshen.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t tell you about that,” said George, “but it may be that he +follows the road he used to travel. That may be the reason why part of +the time he’s here at the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“He must have been a great boy,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“He certainly was, and he wasn’t the only one. I have heard my father +tell about a man here in Jersey named Fagan. He was one of the Cowboys +that they used to call the Pine Robbers.” +</p> +<p> +“Who were they?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Why there were a dozen or more bands of these Pine Robbers. They used +to make their headquarters in the Pines back of Lakewood. They would dig +a hole in the sand and hide in it the stuff they had stolen, and then, +when they had enough to make up a cargo they would take it to Toms River +and ship it to New York, where William Franklin helped them dispose of +it.” +</p> +<p> +“Who was William Franklin?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Why, every educated man knows that William Franklin was the last royal +governor of New Jersey. He was the son of old Ben Franklin. He inherited +his father’s brains, but not his father’s disposition. He was one of the +bitterest of all the Tories, and when the war of the Revolution broke +out he went to New York to be with his friends.” +</p> +<p> +“What happened to this man Fagan?” asked Fred. “Is his ghost around +here, too?” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t tell you,” replied George, “whether it is here or not. I know +Fagan got to be such a bad man stealing, shooting, tormenting the women +and children that finally a big gang of men took after him and caught +him down here between Trenton and Freehold.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they do anything to him after they caught him?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Not very much. They just hanged him from the limb of a big tree by the +side of the road and left the body swinging there in the air for two or +three days. Finally they left the head in the noose, stuck a long pipe +between the jaws and my grandfather used to tell me that the head was +there until the crows had picked out the eyes and left nothing but the +grinning skull.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a nice story to tell just before we make our bows at a spook +party,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +The boy was striving to speak lightly, but his voice sounded strange +even in his own ears. Indeed, by this time, after the gruesome stories +of the Cowboys had been told, the nerves of all the boys were on edge. +</p> +<p> +The dim outlines of the Meeker House were now plainly visible. The +silence that rested over the place was unbroken except for the sighing +of the wind as it swept through the ancient pine trees that grew in the +front yard. +</p> +<p> +“This is a ghost story up to date, isn’t it?” said Grant. “I don’t +suppose many of those Cowboys or Skinners ever traveled around in +automobiles.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably not,” said John dryly, and conversation abruptly ceased. +</p> +<p> +“George, don’t you think you had better leave your automobile up here on +the road and not take it clear down to the house?” inquired Fred in a +whisper, when they drew near the place they were seeking. +</p> +<p> +“What for?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, nothing, only I thought it would be more out of the way there. You +see the house is on the corner and if some one makes a sharp turn there +they might run into it without seeing it.” +</p> +<p> +“Just as you say,” replied George good-naturedly. +</p> +<p> +Acting upon the suggestion, the automobile was stopped about a hundred +yards from the house and the boys at once prepared to walk across the +yard toward the front door. +</p> +<p> +No one spoke until Fred whispered sharply, “What’s that?” +</p> +<p> +“What’s what?” retorted George, also speaking in a whisper. +</p> +<p> +“Nothing but a branch creaking up in the tree,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s what it was,” assented Fred, and the four boys at once +resumed their advance upon the ancient house. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, fellows,” whispered George. “We’ll try the front door first.” +</p> +<p> +The attempts of the boys, however, to open the door were unavailing. The +door was massive and although it creaked and groaned it was strong and +all the attempts to open it proved failures. +</p> +<p> +“You stay here, fellows,” whispered George. “I’ll go around to the back +of the house and see if I can get in there.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll go with you,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“No, you won’t, you’ll stay right here and defend these fellows who are +a good deal more scared than they are willing to own,” retorted George. +</p> +<p> +The trio remained in silence before the front door, waiting for some +word from their friend, who at once had carried out his suggested plan +and had gone to the rear of the house. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly and without any word being spoken the heavy door in front of +the waiting boys slowly opened. It creaked noisily but there was no +question that George succeeded and the door was being opened from +within. +</p> +<p> +Grant was the first to enter, but instantly he stepped back and in a +voice that trembled said quickly, “What’s that? What’s that?” +</p> +<p> +There was a noise of flying wings in the room before them, but not one +of the boys was able to see any of the winged creatures. Back and forth +they flew, the unseen birds, their wings noisily flapping and their +cries steadily increasing in volume. +</p> +<p> +Startled as all the boys were by the unexpected sound they withdrew to +the porch in front of the door and in whispers talked over the best plan +for them to follow. +</p> +<p> +“I say we go ahead,” said Grant at last. “We don’t want to be scared out +by a little thing like this.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” agreed Fred. “You’re so bold, I’ll let you go ahead. +I shall be satisfied to-night to be one of the go behind boys. I’m not +afraid,” he hastily added when Grant laughed derisively. “I’ll follow +you wherever you dare lead. Now then start if you want to.” +</p> +<p> +No more was said and slowly and silently the boys once more entered the +room into which the door directly opened. +</p> +<p> +This time again when only a few steps had been taken, by a common +impulse they stopped and Fred whispered, “Where is George?” +</p> +<p> +“He’s somewhere around here,” whispered Grant in reply. +</p> +<p> +“But I don’t see him or hear him,” declared Fred. “We ought to find out +what has happened.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, he’s all right,” said John confidently. “Come on, let’s go ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“We haven’t any light,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have one pretty soon. That’s probably what George has gone for,” +whispered John. “He’ll be back in a minute.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe we had better try to go any farther. A good many of +these old houses have steps from one room to another. I don’t want Fred +to fall and break his neck.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you worry about my——” began Fred, but he stopped abruptly when +suddenly the shutters in the room directly over their head banged +noisily against the side of the house. At the same time the sound of the +flying creatures in the room was heard again and as if to make matters +worse a sound very like a groan came from the stairway. The weird +interruption was followed by a wild laugh that came from the same +stairway and a moment later the confusion was increased by a sound more +unexpected than any which as yet had been heard by the Go Ahead boys in +the old Meeker House. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER IV—FLIGHT</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +There had been a moment of intense silence which was sharply broken by a +long whistling sound, that seemed to come from some place directly +behind the spot where the boys were standing. This sound was followed by +a prolonged sigh and this in turn was abruptly ended when out of the +darkness there came a call, “F-r-e-d! Fred Button!” The call was in a +low tone but coming as it did after the startling events which had +occurred was almost more than Fred was able to bear. His nerves were +unstrung and without a word he turned and swiftly made for the door, +which fortunately had been left open. +</p> +<p> +Nor had Fred been long out of the house before he was joined by his +companions. George, who previously had gone around to the rear door, +came as quickly as John and Grant. +</p> +<p> +For a brief time the boys assembled under the branches of a huge cherry +tree that was growing in one corner of the yard. +</p> +<p> +“What do you make of that?” demanded George. “I told you you might hear +something about Fagan and the Cowboys if you went into that old Meeker +House.” +</p> +<p> +“It wasn’t what I heard about them that troubled me,” retorted Fred. “It +was when I heard my own name called.” +</p> +<p> +“Honest?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir. You ask the other fellows. Somebody right behind me called +‘Fred.’ ‘Fred Button.’ I was standing where I could see straight through +the window and I am perfectly sure there wasn’t anybody there. If you’ll +tell me how the thing was done I’ll be much obliged to you.” +</p> +<p> +“It wasn’t done at all,” laughed George. “You were just dreaming. It’s +one of those attacks of nightmare that you have some times. Don’t you +remember when we were at Mackinac,<a name="FNanchor_1" id="FNanchor_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor"><sup>[1]</sup></a> how one night we had to throw +some cold water in your face to make you wake up?” +</p> +<p> +“I guess that was the same night,” retorted Fred, “when I had to +administer condign and physical chastisement to you, you were kicking so +in the bed.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I have a very vivid recollection of that part of that night.” +</p> +<p> +“Almost as vivid as you have of to-night,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anything to laugh at,” said Fred sharply. “You ask the +other fellows if somebody didn’t call my name.” +</p> +<p> +“It did sound like it,” said John, “but then we were ready to believe +almost anything and when Fred said there was somebody calling him we all +heard ‘Fred’ on every side of us. What are we doing out here, anyway? +Why don’t we go back there and look into it?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going to look into it,” said Fred quickly, “but I’m not going to +look when I can’t see. It’s so dark to-night that you can’t find +anything.” +</p> +<p> +“You seem to have found some things that made you leave the room faster +than George goes when he runs the hundred in ten flat.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe I did,” admitted Fred, “but if I did I want to tell you I never +ran a race in which I was so hard pushed as I was to-night. There wasn’t +room to put a sheet of paper between Grant and me.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” spoke up Grant. “I didn’t take any part in your +foolish conversation, but what I want to know is how you can account for +these things.” +</p> +<p> +“If you ask me,” said George, “I’m not accounting for them.” +</p> +<p> +“But there’s some way to find out what these things mean. There isn’t +one of us a big enough fool to believe that there is such a thing as a +ghost and yet we got into the old Meeker House,—” +</p> +<p> +“If there isn’t any ghost,” spoke up George, “then I don’t see where the +trouble is. You can’t be afraid of something that isn’t, can you?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t suppose you can,” admitted Grant, “but sometimes you can be +afraid of things you think are when they are not.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re getting too deep for me,” said Fred. “What I want to know is +about those wings. That room seemed to be just full of something that +was flying all around.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll tell you what it was,” spoke up John. +</p> +<p> +“What was it?” inquired Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Cherubs.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“Cherubs. Don’t you know what cherubs are? They are just heads with +wings. You can find them on old tomb-stones and in the pictures of some +of the old books. I have always thought that a cherub must be almost as +happy as the people said he used to be. He didn’t have to bother about +any clothes except neckties and a hat. It doesn’t take him very long to +get from one place to another. In fact I think if Fred here was a cherub +he would have had less trouble getting out of that house to-night than +he did.” +</p> +<p> +“You seem to be greatly troubled about my leaving that house,” spoke up +Fred testily. “I noticed that I wasn’t alone.” +</p> +<p> +“Except when you started,” suggested Grant. “We thought you were in +trouble and came out to see if we could help.” +</p> +<p> +“You did?” laughed Fred derisively. “I’ll tell you what I’ll do, Grant, +if you’ll go back into that house with me right now I’ll go too.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going back there,” said Grant slowly, “but as has been said I am +going back when I can see something.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I thought,” retorted Fred tauntingly. +</p> +<p> +“It’s all right, fellows,” spoke up George. “I guess we have had enough +for one night. I don’t suppose there really is anything in the things we +have heard to-night, and we’ll find out pretty soon just what it is, but +until we do I think it’s great fun to go into the old house and stir up +the spooks.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know, I have an idea what those flying creatures were?” +suggested John. +</p> +<p> +“What were they?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Bats probably.” +</p> +<p> +“Bats?” exclaimed Fred scornfully. “Bats? Why those things had wings at +least two feet long. You could hear them flapping over your head.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s about on the scale that you heard and saw everything to-night, +Fred. That is, everything except the length of the steps you took when +you were leaving. I would like to understand how a fellow who is only +five feet four can take steps that are ten feet long.” +</p> +<p> +“There’s only one answer to that,” said George, “and that is, he +didn’t.” +</p> +<p> +“You don’t know what you’re talking about,” retorted Grant. “You didn’t +see him. I did.” +</p> +<p> +“See me?” exclaimed Fred. “See me! Why his hands were right on my +shoulder all the while. I couldn’t shake him off. He almost had me there +two or three times. I’m not sure that I wouldn’t rather have Fagan’s +spook get hold of me than Grant’s hands when he is as scared as he was +to-night.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, fellows, what shall we do?” inquired George. “Do you want to give +it up or go back?” +</p> +<p> +“Both,” said Fred quickly. “We’re not going back again to-night and +we’re not going to give it up. We’re going ahead and find out what there +is in that tomfoolery.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I see you have a little piece of nerve left yet,” laughed George. +“I told you what was coming but you wouldn’t believe me.” +</p> +<p> +“Was that the reason why you went outside, George?” demanded John. “You +remember, fellows,” he added, turning to his companions, “George went +around to the back of the old house. He was outside where he could get a +fine running start if he had to.” +</p> +<p> +“That may all be,” said George slowly, “but my running start wasn’t much +compared with the one you fellows had. If you didn’t get a running start +I am wondering what time you would make if you had one. My, what a thing +it would be at the track meet to have one of these ghosts to start the +fellows off. I think the next time I see Grant on the track I’ll yell +Fagan at him. I think he will break the record if I do. Especially if +Fred is just ahead of him. If you’re not going back into the house,” he +continued, “I think we had better go back to the machine and start for +home.” +</p> +<p> +The boys all agreed and soon were seated in the car, riding swiftly back +toward the farm. +</p> +<p> +Their confidence returned in proportion to the distance that intervened +between them and the house which they had just visited. Indeed, when at +last they arrived at the farmhouse every one was loud in his declaration +that he had not been frightened by what had occurred and was strong in +his determination to go back and investigate the things which had seemed +so mysterious. +</p> +<p> +Nevertheless, in spite of their boasting, it was plain that Fred was +somewhat chagrined by the quickness and rapidity of his departure from +the old Meeker House. Several times that evening a sly allusion to his +speed brought a quick retort. +</p> +<p> +The following morning, however, the courage and good spirits of the boys +had returned in full measure. Even Fred was not afraid to acknowledge +his fear of the night before and laughed as heartily as any of his +friends when they described his antics in his flight from the house. +</p> +<p> +“That doesn’t make any difference,” he asserted strongly. “I’m still one +of the Go Ahead boys and I haven’t given up the plan I spoke about.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s your plan, Freddie?” laughed John. +</p> +<p> +“I’m going to look into the old house by daylight.” +</p> +<p> +“I wouldn’t do that yet,” suggested George soberly. “It seems to me the +best plan will be for us to go down there again to-night and find out +whether or not there really is anything in what we thought we heard and +saw last night.” +</p> +<p> +“We might take a gun,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“What would you shoot?” said Fred scornfully. “Suppose you did find a +spook and shot it, what good would it do? I suppose they aren’t like +other people.” +</p> +<p> +After a long consultation it finally was agreed that another visit to +the mysterious house should be made that evening and then if anything +strange occurred the boys would make further investigation the following +day. +</p> +<hr class='fnsep' /> +<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1" id="Footnote_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> +See “The Go Ahead Boys on Smugglers’ Island.” +</p></div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chV' id='chV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER V—A SURPRISE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile Fred had decided that he would make some investigations of his +own. His apparent lack of courage had reacted now and he was determined +to do something which would enable him to redeem himself in the eyes of +his companions. +</p> +<p> +Accordingly when his friends decided early in the afternoon that they +would take the automobile and go to the country club for a game of +tennis he excused himself on the plea that there were some other and +very important matters to which he must attend. +</p> +<p> +It was a matter of self-denial for Fred to decline to join his +companions in a visit to the country club. This place throughout the +summer afternoons was one that was marked in the region. Crowds of young +people assembled there and the tennis courts and golf links were +occupied by people who were finding their vacation days passing all too +rapidly in the beautiful region. +</p> +<p> +To the protests of his friends Fred refused to listen. Even the fact +that his absence might prevent a game of tennis from being played did +not appeal to him. He quietly and steadfastly adhered to his purpose. +</p> +<p> +Soon after luncheon he saw his friends depart, although the last words +he heard were their calls for him to reconsider and join them. +</p> +<p> +Previous to their departure George called Fred into the library and in a +low voice said to him, “Take my advice, lad, and don’t try it.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t try what?” Fred inquired. +</p> +<p> +“You know what I mean.” +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t the least idea.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, then I tell you again that my advice to you is not to do it.” +</p> +<p> +“But I don’t know what you mean.” +</p> +<p> +“If you’ll think it over for two or three hours I’m sure you’ll find +out,” declared George and he withdrew from the room. +</p> +<p> +George’s warning was still fresh in Fred’s mind when the boys no longer +could be seen. He was still mystified by the strange warning. He was +positive that he had not spoken to any of his friends concerning the +project in his mind and therefore it was impossible that George could +have heard any word of his plans. +</p> +<p> +Assured that his companions had departed, Fred soon afterward set forth +on his solitary expedition. He had, however, not entered the road before +he saw the automobile returning. +</p> +<p> +“What’s wrong?” he called as the car stopped in front of the long, +winding driveway that led to the farmhouse, which was located back on +the hillside. +</p> +<p> +“I went off without my tennis racquet,” explained George. “You have +decided to come with us, haven’t you, Fred? +</p> +<p> +“No, I’m not going,” replied Fred. +</p> +<p> +“But you’re going somewhere,” said George. “What are you doing down here +in the road if you’re not? I thought you had some very important matters +which you had to attend to this afternoon?” +</p> +<p> +“I have,” and Fred refused to listen to the renewed pleadings of his +friend, although he did not start on his way to the old Meeker House +until once more the automobile had passed out of sight. He was +suspicious as he walked on that George’s return for the racquet had been +a pretense on his part. He was somewhat suspicious now that George +believed he was about to go back to the old house, although what had +given him that impression it was impossible for him to say. +</p> +<p> +On his journey Fred had taken with him the collie dog which belonged to +George. The animal was unusually beautiful and its owner was exceedingly +proud of it, as it had won a prize whenever he had exhibited it. +</p> +<p> +Delighted to be permitted to accompany Fred the intelligent animal +expressed his pleasure in his own noisy and active manner. +</p> +<p> +It was not until Fred at last had arrived at the road in front of the +old house that the collie displayed any uneasiness. When Fred turned in +at the open gateway the dog, looking up into his face whined, and then +apparently convinced that protests on his part were unavailing, turned +and ran from the place. +</p> +<p> +Startled by the unexpected action Fred returned to the road and watched +the dog as it fled swiftly homeward. A feeling of uneasiness crept over +him despite his attempt to laugh. It was impossible for spooks to be +found, he assured himself, on such a day. The afternoon sun, warm, and +yet not unduly warm, was flooding the beautiful region with its beams. +The fertile land, the attractive houses, even the woods back upon the +hillside all seemed to be sharing in the absolute quiet that prevailed. +Not a sound was to be heard save the noisy flights of the winged +grasshoppers or the occasional unmusical sound which proclaimed the +presence of locusts. +</p> +<p> +Determined to ignore the momentary impression which the unwillingness of +the dog to accompany him into the old house had aroused, Fred once more +turned toward the rear of the old building. A fallen grape-arbor on his +right and the tangled mass of vines that grew along the ground showed +how long it had been since the place had received any attention. There +was an air of neglect and decay manifest wherever he looked. The passing +boys had thrown stones or snowballs at the windows until only a few +panes were left. The chimneys had crumbled in part, so that not one was +standing in its original form. The grass was high and tangled and the +shrubs in the yard were rank and overgrown. The place which manifestly +at one time had been the abode of people who had given it every care and +affection had now been forgotten. +</p> +<p> +And yet, was it really forgotten? Fred vividly recalled the experience +of the preceding evening as he advanced toward the kitchen door. The +door still was hanging upon its hinges and was only partly closed. +Doubtless it had been left ajar by George in his exit the night before. +</p> +<p> +Fred stepped cautiously inside the building. The silence that followed +for a time was unbroken. The very stillness itself produced its effect +upon the boy and when he stopped and looked intently all about him, his +heart was beating rapidly, although he assured himself there was no +cause for fear. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly from the front room came a sound that was unusual and somewhat +startling in the prevailing stillness. It was a sound not unlike that +produced by a noisy rattler in the hands of a small boy. The noise, +however, was forgotten, when, to Fred’s intense amazement, which +included perhaps an element of alarm, he was startled by the sound of +footsteps on the stairway. +</p> +<p> +Once more he assured himself that it was broad daylight. Again he +recalled the statement which he had heard many a time that in such +houses there was nothing to be feared except after the shades of night +had fallen. He could plainly see the rays of the afternoon sun as they +entered through the open window and fell across the floor of the room in +which he was standing. +</p> +<p> +But the footsteps could not be denied. The sound became plainer. For an +instant Fred glanced timidly toward the door and was strongly tempted to +run from the place. +</p> +<p> +Before he started, however, the footsteps ceased, the old door at the +foot of the stairway creaked upon its hinges and a moment later Fred saw +standing before him a man, whose appearance proclaimed him to be a +tramp. +</p> +<p> +The surprise was mutual, and for a moment the man and the boy stared +blankly at each other. Fred suspected that the stranger doubtless had +been sleeping in the upper room. Indeed the boy laughed in his relief as +he was confident now that he had discovered the source of the strange +sounds that had been heard the preceding evening. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, young man,” called the tramp in a low, guttural voice. “Did you +come in here to wake me up? I told me valet not to call me until five +o’clock.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t come in here to wake you up,” said Fred quietly. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe you come from the hospital?” +</p> +<p> +“No,” said Fred simply. +</p> +<p> +“I’m expecting somebody from the hospital.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s the matter? Are you sick?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I be. Leastwise, I’ve got some symptoms I don’t like.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell me what the trouble is,” suggested Fred good-naturedly. “Perhaps I +can help you.” +</p> +<p> +“From the best I can find out I think I am threatened with hydrostatic +internal spontaneous combustion.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s more likely your conscience,” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“No, it isn’t my conscience. I can stick a pin in that and not flinch. +No, it’s something else that’s the matter with me. I feel as if I were +burning up inside.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re not going to get anything out of me,” laughed Fred, “to put out +the fire.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a pity,” said the tramp, who now seated himself quietly on the +foot of the stairs. “That’s a pity. All I need is a nickel to stop that +roaring flame. I’m suffering from another trouble too,” added the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” +</p> +<p> +“Overweariness of the flesh. I’ve had that for considerable time. It’s a +great source of suffering. Still, I don’t know that either of those is +quite as bad as something else.” +</p> +<p> +“What, have you got more troubles still?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I have.” +</p> +<p> +“What are they?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, the chief one is that I’m an orphan. There isn’t any home waiting +for little Willie.” The man shook his head in mock pathos and Fred +laughed heartily. “I have consulted specialists,” began the tramp once +more, “but I don’t find any one to relieve me. The last man I went to +said he thought the best thing he could prescribe would be for me to go +out in the country where I could breathe fresh air and not have to +endure hard labor.” +</p> +<p> +“What were you doing, breaking stone?” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +For a moment the tramp glared upon the lad, but a moment later he said +good-naturedly, “If I thought you knew what that meant I would give you +something to make you remember this visit a long time. No, my great +trouble is that I’m too ardent an American. I insist upon seeing my own +country. I have been going to and fro, wandering up and down the land—” +</p> +<p> +“You’re not the only one,” broke in Fred. “It seems to me I’ve heard +about another individual who is going about like a roaring lion.” +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t you come in and sit down,” suggested the tramp, apparently +ignoring Fred’s last suggestion. “Ever been in this old house before?” +</p> +<p> +“Once.” +</p> +<p> +“When was that?” +</p> +<p> +“Last night.” +</p> +<p> +“How long did you stay?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t remember. We left in such a hurry,” said Fred somewhat +ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, you found the spooks, did you?” +</p> +<p> +“We heard some strange noises. The strangest of all was that some one +called my name.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, that’s not strange,” declared the tramp lightly. “I’ve been in this +house hundreds of times. I have heard my name called and never flinched +once. Sometimes the constable calls it and sometimes somebody else, but +it doesn’t make any difference; I never answer. If you’d like to look +through the old house I’ll show you around.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VI—A PRISONER</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what I should like to do,” exclaimed Fred eagerly. +</p> +<p> +The knowledge that he was not to make the investigation entirely alone +doubtless strengthened the courage of the boy. All his friends were +aware that he was not cowardly and yet somehow his strange experience of +the preceding evening in the old Meeker House had deeply affected him. +Convinced as he was that there was an explanation to be found for every +mysterious happening, nevertheless he was somewhat nervous at the +thought of being alone in the neglected building. +</p> +<p> +“I have spent some time in here,” said the tramp, “as I told you. It is +a queer old house. For example, right here in this room,” he added as he +led the way into the front room, “there is a concealed closet. I don’t +think any one would ever find it unless he was told of it.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke the strange man turned a button, which was apparently a part +of the molding of the stairway. +</p> +<p> +In response to his quick and energetic pull a door was opened and as +Fred peered within he saw there was a small room perhaps six or seven +feet square. It was directly under the stairway and when he looked into +the adjoining room he saw that it extended within that room also. +</p> +<p> +“What was that for?” he said as he turned to his companion. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” replied the tramp. “I suspect, though, that that is +where they used to put the boys when they were naughty.” +</p> +<p> +The tone of the man’s voice, the language which he used; indeed the very +bearing of the stranger, increased Fred’s curiosity concerning him. Was +this man no more than he appeared to be? Was he really a tramp, as he +said he was? His clothing was old and worn, the care of his person had +been neglected and at first glance any observer might think that he was +an ordinary vagabond. Perhaps he was, Fred thought, and yet somehow he +was convinced that there were other things to be explained in connection +with the stranger. +</p> +<p> +“Come up stairs,” said the tramp, leading the way up the stairway. +</p> +<p> +Fred followed obediently and soon found himself in the hallway from +which opened several rooms. Some of these were large, though all were +low. For a moment, as he stopped to look about him, it seemed to Fred +that he almost saw the sights that the house had witnessed one hundred +years before this time. What stories of life and death, of suffering and +joy these old rooms might have told had they been endowed with the power +of speech. +</p> +<p> +Somehow, although Fred was unable to account for his feeling, it seemed +that unseen witnesses were about him and that the presence of himself +and the tramp in these rooms was very like an intrusion. He did not +speak concerning his feelings, however, and after a hasty inspection the +two returned to the room below. +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” demanded Fred suddenly as from the chimney there came +sounds like those which he had heard the preceding evening. +</p> +<p> +“I cannot see,” replied the tramp, his eyes twinkling as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“I cannot see, either,” said Fred, “but I can hear. Don’t you know what +that noise is?” As he spoke the strange sound was repeated. It was a +broken note, sharp and yet long-drawn out. It was clearly heard, too, +and yet Fred was convinced now that it was no ghostly voice from which +the chatter came. But what was it? His companion did not explain to him +and he himself had no conception of the source of the strange sound. +</p> +<p> +They proceeded through the various rooms on the first floor, but nothing +was discovered that in any way explained the mysterious events which +Fred had come to investigate. +</p> +<p> +Conversation had almost ceased, the tramp seldom speaking except to call +to Fred to follow him, and Fred only occasionally asking such questions +as occurred to him. +</p> +<p> +“The cellar is the strangest part of all,” said the tramp. “You don’t +want to leave until you have seen that part of the old house.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” declared Fred lightly. “I came over to see what I could +find, and if there’s anything in the cellar worth finding I want to see +it.” +</p> +<p> +The stairs to the cellar were low and broad, but the wood in places had +decayed and fallen away. As a consequence when the tramp descended upon +the third step the rotten timbers in part gave way and he was compelled +to leap to the ground below him. Fred too jumped, but the mishap did not +cause any inconvenience, though neither of them spoke when both arose. +</p> +<p> +The light was dim, entering the place from two open windows which were +just above the ground. In silence the investigators moved about the +place until at last Fred said, “It seems to me like a dungeon down here. +I don’t know what they could have kept here.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably they used to come down here with a candle. I have an idea that +if you boys thought you saw and heard strange things here last night you +were not unlike the boys of one hundred years ago who came down here +after apples and potatoes.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” laughed Fred, although his laughter was not hearty. “No +man could crawl through either of those two windows. There isn’t much +more than room enough to put your arm through either of them.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute,” said the tramp abruptly. “I’ll be back here with a +light. I want to show you something.” +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why, there’s a well here in one corner. I don’t know whether it was +made in case the Meekers were attacked by the Indians and they wanted to +be sure of having what water they needed, or whether the house was built +over the old well, which they perhaps filled in and since then it has +fallen away.” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind,” called Fred. “I’ll go upstairs with you. I don’t care +anything about the old well.” +</p> +<p> +“But I want to show it to you,” declared the tramp. “You wait here and +I’ll be back in a minute.” +</p> +<p> +Hastily the strange man retraced his way to the room above, but no +sooner had he gained the place he was seeking than the massive door was +dropped into place and left Fred in almost complete darkness. +</p> +<p> +The first feeling of the boy was that some accident had befallen his +recent companion. He listened intently, but he did not hear any sound +that indicated any trouble in the room above. +</p> +<p> +Following this feeling of fear came the sensation of intense loneliness. +Although the room was only dimly lighted, by this time Fred’s eyes had +become somewhat accustomed to the semi-darkness and he was able to see +all about him. A pile of boards in one corner of the cellar were the +only objects he distinguished. +</p> +<p> +At first Fred had no feeling of fear. He expected the door to be opened +at once and he waited confidently for a hail from the man who had just +left him. However, when several minutes elapsed and he heard no call nor +was any attempt made to open the door, a feeling of alarm swept over +him. Again he glanced hastily about the cellar and keenly watched the +light of the setting sun as its beams were cast through the little +windows. +</p> +<p> +Convinced that night was near at hand and somewhat alarmed now at his +predicament, Fred rushed to the heavy door and did his utmost to lift +it. Whether or not the door was fastened he did not know, but his +efforts were unavailing. The massive door was unmoved and when a few +minutes had elapsed Fred was convinced that he was helpless to lift it. +</p> +<p> +Astonished by what he had already learned, he remained standing at the +foot of the stairway and in his loudest tones called to the man who had +recently left him. “Open the door! Open the door!” he shouted. “I can’t +get out. The door is fast.” +</p> +<p> +His tones increased in loudness as he discovered that no attention was +paid his hail. +</p> +<p> +Repeatedly the anxious lad pounded upon the cellar-door and repeated his +calls. The silence that rested over the old house was unbroken. +Apparently no one was within hailing distance. What had become of the +tramp was not clear, but apparently he had departed from the old Meeker +House. +</p> +<p> +Almost desperate now, Fred dragged the boards from the corner in which +he had discovered them and piling them up on the floor beneath the +little window that opened upon the road he soon was able to look out +upon the scene. No one was within sight. To call for help now would be +useless, if the tramp really had departed from the house. +</p> +<p> +He carefully examined the windows to see if it would be possible for him +to lift the sash and thus make an opening that would be large enough to +enable him to crawl through. He was unable, however, to accomplish his +task and soon concluded that his sole reliance now was to wait until +some one passed in the road and call to him for help. +</p> +<p> +Not many minutes had passed before a farm-wagon, drawn by two horses, +was seen approaching. The farmer who was driving the team was apparently +unaware of any call upon him, for his rattling wagon soon passed on and +in spite of Fred’s loudest calls for help he did not stop. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe I am making enough noise,” Fred sturdily declared to +himself. “The next one that passes I’ll make him hear me whether he +wants to or not.” +</p> +<p> +A brief time afterward he discovered a boy driving a cow not far away on +the road. He was approaching the corner on which the old Meeker House +stood and in a brief time would be within hailing distance. +</p> +<p> +Convinced that his call before had not been heard because he had not +used tones sufficiently loud, Fred increased his efforts. He shouted in +tones that were unnatural, they were so high keyed. He then whistled and +gave his school yell as being likely to be heeded when his own call +might be unheard. +</p> +<p> +Nor were his efforts in vain. Fred saw the boy when he approached the +corner stop abruptly and give one startled look toward the old house. A +moment later Fred saw a picture which he never was able to forget. The +cow, with tail elevated, was running swiftly from the place, while close +behind her followed the boy, who at frequent intervals stopped and +looked behind him at the old Meeker House. It was evident to Fred what +thoughts were in the mind of the lad, for his frequent glances, as well +as his manner, betrayed his terror. Evidently he had heard stories of +the old place that had not induced him to enter the building when such +strange and unearthly sounds issued from the cellar. +</p> +<p> +A moment later the horn of an automobile was heard and soon afterward a +car turned the corner. Fred was nearly hopeless by this time, but in +desperation once more he did his utmost to make his voice heard. The +automobile, however, passed on and apparently his calls for aid were +unheard. +</p> +<p> +Darkness would be settling over the land within a few minutes. Fred +thought of his friends, who doubtless by this time had returned from the +country-club and were puzzled to account for the absence of their +friend. +</p> +<p> +Convinced that he was the only one except the tramp who knew where he +was at that time, Fred resolutely prepared to endure the wait that must +elapse before relief could be had. As he turned away from the window he +was startled by sounds that came from the room directly above him. The +boy, alarmed now and thoroughly distressed, stopped abruptly and waited +for a repetition of the noise which had aroused him. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VII—AN ESCAPE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +There was no question about the repetition of the strange sound in the +upper room. To the excited boy there were evidences that people were +walking over the board floors. Indeed, he was positive he could hear the +slow, measured footfalls of some one who was walking back and forth in +the room directly above him. A moment later he was equally convinced +that the sound of the whistling creatures which had been heard when the +four boys first visited the house was now repeated. +</p> +<p> +A moment later there came a rushing sound of many wings. For a moment +Fred’s courage almost deserted him, his flesh seemed to creep. He +stopped abruptly in the darkness and spoke aloud to himself, “This will +never do. It is all foolishness. There isn’t any such thing as a spook +anyway, so why should you be afraid of one?” +</p> +<p> +At that moment, however, the sound of the rushing wings was heard again +and all Fred’s efforts to strengthen his heart proved unavailing. The +flying creatures were in the cellar, there was no question about that +now. Fred almost cried aloud as he heard the wings coming closer to the +place he was standing. +</p> +<p> +A moment later the flying creatures seemed to be circling the cellar and +in the midst of it all the sharp twitter which had so strangely +impressed him the preceding evening was now heard again and within a few +feet of him. Then, too, there was the sound of some one walking again in +the room above him. Had Fred been in a less nervous condition he would +have been aware that it was no ghostly walk which he heard, for the +footfalls were heavy and plainly those of some one whose weight was not +slight. Fred, however, was in no condition calmly to consider these +things. The darkness was almost appalling now and surrounded as he was +by unseen winged creatures his fears redoubled. +</p> +<p> +He looked again at the cellar windows, but escape through them was +impossible. Almost in a frenzy the frightened boy decided that help must +be found from some source. In his desperation he ran to the cellar door +and pushed against it with all his strength. To his amazement the door +readily yielded to his onslaught. He pushed up the heavy door and in a +moment he was in the yard. +</p> +<p> +He was in the kitchen when the door once more fell back into its place. +The loud report startled the unseen creatures and even after he had +gained the ground outside the building he heard the strange twittering +that seemed now to come from the chimney. The noise made by the wings of +the flying creatures also was plainly heard. Whatever the explanation +might be the whole place and experience seemed so uncanny to the nervous +boy that he instantly fled toward the road not far away. +</p> +<p> +Even when he gained the highway his one supreme thought still was of +flight. Instantly beginning to run he steadily increased the pace at +which he was fleeing until his breathing became labored and perspiration +was pouring down his face. Occasionally he glanced behind him in his mad +flight and on one occasion as he did so his foot was caught in some +obstruction and he was thrown heavily upon the ground. +</p> +<p> +Falling, however, was not uncommon in the experience of Fred. Indeed, +his friends declared that he was like a rubber ball, he bounced up after +every fall as if the contact with the ground had only afforded him +additional power. +</p> +<p> +The road was dusty and as Fred’s flight continued his appearance became +steadily worse. Fortunately, however, in the dim light not one of the +few people who met him recognized him, or discovered his plight. The one +great purpose in his mind was still to run. The greatest possible +distance between himself and the old Meeker House must be made and in +his determination this distance steadily and rapidly increased. +Occasionally he glanced behind the trees, the dim outlines of which were +plainly to be seen. Somehow there was a fear in his mind that some enemy +might be loitering behind these shelters. Once when he ran past an old +and deserted barn that stood near the roadway he was confident that he +heard sounds of weird laughter issuing from the tumbling structure. +Indeed, in whichever direction the boy looked, it seemed to him he +discovered evidences of the very enemies whom he had left behind him in +his flight. +</p> +<p> +Somehow at last Fred found himself in the long, shaded lane or driveway +that led from the road up to the house of his friend. The trees were +tall poplars and stood like sentinels guarding each side of the road. +Even now Fred’s fears had not disappeared, although he saw the lights +gleam from the windows of the old farmhouse before him. +</p> +<p> +So weary was he by his long flight and worn by his excitement that when +at last he swiftly mounted the steps of the piazza his foot slipped and +once more the unfortunate boy fell upon the floor. +</p> +<p> +Aroused by the sound his three friends instantly rushed from the room in +which they were seated and a moment later discovered their friend in his +predicament. +</p> +<p> +“What in the world is the matter with you?” demanded George as the three +boys gazed in astonishment at Fred. +</p> +<p> +“N-n-o-t-h-in’. N-n-o-t-h-in’,” gasped Fred. +</p> +<p> +“You look as if there was nothing doing,” said Grant, repressing a smile +as the plight of Fred became manifest in the light. “Actually you look +as if you belonged in a lunatic asylum.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess I do,” responded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Well, what’s the matter?” demanded John. “You haven’t told us where you +have been nor what you have been doing.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t. I can’t now,” said Fred. “Give me a chance to rest up.” +</p> +<p> +“You need a bath more than you need a rest,” declared George laughingly, +as he became convinced that nothing serious had happened to his friend. +“Come upstairs and I’ll see that you get what you deserve.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s lucky everybody doesn’t get what he deserves. If he did—” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind that,” directed George. “Come on upstairs and take your bath +and get a change of clothes and you’ll feel in your right mind once +more.” +</p> +<p> +Acting promptly upon the suggestion Fred withdrew from his friends for a +time and a half-hour later, when he returned to the piazza, he was not +able entirely to conceal his feeling of chagrin. It was true that he had +had some strange experiences, but it was difficult now to believe that +they were all real. Certainly his companions were very much in evidence +and as they seated themselves, George said promptly, “Now my lad, tell +us what happened to you.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I don’t mind telling you,” said Fred, “that I went over to the +old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what I thought,” laughed George, “and you stayed there +until it was so dark that you heard those strange noises again, didn’t +you?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir, I did that, and a good deal more.” +</p> +<p> +“What else? Tell us about it. Why don’t you talk?” demanded John +impatiently. +</p> +<p> +“It isn’t anything I want to talk much about,” said Fred positively in a +low voice. “I tell you there’s something strange about that house. I +went over there late this afternoon and found a tramp.” +</p> +<p> +“Where?” broke in George. “In the house?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, it was in the house and he at once offered to become my guide, +counselor and friend.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Just what I say,” said Fred. “He showed me through the old building. +Finally he took me into the cellar and left me there, though he took +pains not to close the old cellar-door. For a while I didn’t mind it, +but when I found I couldn’t get out of the place, for the windows were +too small for me to crawl through, and I couldn’t lift the big door, I +didn’t know just what to do.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, what did you do?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, I called, shouted and whistled through the window, but I couldn’t +get anybody to pay any attention to me. Yes, there was one who heard +me,” he added. “He was a small boy driving a cow and when he heard the +calls from the old Meeker House he lost no time in withdrawing from that +part of the country. Even the cow he was driving seemed to feel just as +he did, for her tail went up and her head down and she joined in the +race in that graceful, polite way that cows have when they run.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s plain you saw something besides the spooks then,” said George, +laughing heartily. “Look yonder,” he added quickly, pointing as he spoke +toward the end of the piazza. +</p> +<p> +In the dim light Uncle Sim was seen standing there, his eye-balls +shining and his intense interest in the conversation of the boys +manifest in the expression of his face. +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” he said when the boys first became aware of his +presence, “I don’ tol’ yo’ not to go near dat ol’ Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you ever go there?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Me go dar? No, suh. No, suh. It would take fo’ yoke ob oxen to make me +go inside dat ol’ house in de daytime and in de night I reckon Caleb’s +Army couldn’t drive me in dar’.” +</p> +<p> +“What became of your tramp friend?” inquired George when the boys arose +to enter the room. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I should like to know,” said Fred somewhat ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“Well, come on in, we’ll all feel better after dinner,” said George +cheerfully, as he led the way into the dining room. +</p> +<p> +The strange experience which had befallen Fred was the chief topic of +conversation. Even their interest, however, was broken when a half-hour +had passed and word was brought that Uncle Sim was desirous of speaking +at once to Mr. George. +</p> +<p> +Excusing himself George withdrew from the dining room and a few minutes +later when he returned he said, “What do you think has happened, +fellows?” +</p> +<p> +“We don’t know. How should we know?” retorted John. “If you’ve got +something to say why don’t you say it?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what I am going to do,” said George, but he had scarcely +begun his statement before his three friends leaped from their seats at +the table and quickly followed him as he led the way out of the house. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER VIII—THE LOST CAR</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“What’s the trouble? What’s the trouble?” demanded George excitedly when +the boys had run out through the kitchen door. +</p> +<p> +“Uncle Sim says that my car is gone,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“Gone? Gone where?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“He doesn’t know and that’s what he wanted to find out from us.” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” broke in the old colored man who now approached +the place where the boys were standing. “Dat car sho’ am gone. I jes’ +came to fin’ out if any ob yo’ young gen’lemen disremembered who might +hab tuk de car.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, there hasn’t anybody taken it,” said John. “Have you looked in the +garage, George?” +</p> +<p> +In spite of his perplexity George laughed slightly as he said, “I +certainly have. You don’t think I would solemnly state to you that the +car was gone if I had seen it in the garage, do you?” +</p> +<p> +The boys by this time had advanced to the open door of the garage and a +hasty examination confirmed the statement of the old colored man that +the automobile was not there. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose it means?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“It means somebody has taken it,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“You mean stolen it?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I don’t know. I’m trying to explain to you fellows that the +car isn’t here and if it isn’t here it must be somewhere else. Now, if +it is somewhere else how did it get there and who took it there? Do you +see? Can I make any impression on any of you?” +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t you say in plain English just what you mean?” retorted John. +“Do you think your car has been stolen?” +</p> +<p> +“I know it’s gone and that’s all I know.” +</p> +<p> +“What are you going to do about it?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going to take you fellows and Uncle Sim in the old car and find out +what has happened to the new one, if I can.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, we’ll be with you in a minute,” declared George. +</p> +<p> +Speedily the boys entered the house and securing their caps at once +prepared to accompany George, who soon started down the lane toward the +road beyond. There was no plan clearly defined in his mind nor had any +one in the party any suggestions to make as to whom the thief might be +or what had become of the missing automobile. +</p> +<p> +In response to George’s queries Uncle Sim related his own experiences. +He had been coming in from the barn and noticed that the door of the +garage was still open. As he had strict orders to see that this was +closed every night, he turned aside to carry out the directions. To his +surprise he found that the new automobile was not in its accustomed +place. His first thought naturally was that the boys had taken it for +another drive and yet at that very moment he heard the sound of their +laughter issuing from the dining-room. +</p> +<p> +Puzzled by the fact he at once entered the house and soon made his +presence and his errand known. +</p> +<p> +His statement, startling as it was, at first had not alarmed George, but +as soon as he had made a hasty investigation he too was as troubled as +his dusky friend. The car was gone and there was no accounting for its +departure. +</p> +<p> +“Did any of you fellows hear the automobile when it went down the +driveway?” George inquired of his friends as they sped along the dusty +road. +</p> +<p> +“Not one of us,” said John, positively. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the trouble in having such a good car,” said George dryly. “You +see it makes so little noise that it couldn’t be heard a few feet away.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think that was it,” spoke up Grant. “I think it’s because +certain members of our party were making so much noise that an +earthquake or thunder would have been drowned.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, then,” said George dryly. “You wait until we find +that car and then we’ll talk a little more about it.” +</p> +<p> +“What was the number of your car?” asked Fred. +</p> +<p> +“27155.” +</p> +<p> +“I think a man has got more nerve to steal an automobile than anything +else. Of course he knows he will be taken,” declared Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Not always,” answered George. “Down on the sea shore there was a +certain firm last summer that did a regular business in stolen +automobiles. They painted them different colors and did a few little +things that altered the appearance so that a man wouldn’t recognize his +own car.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so? Is that true?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“It certainly is. I know a man who lost a car down there. Those men work +all through the towns and cities in the northern part of the state and +run down to the seashore with the stolen cars in the night when nobody +is around and the next day the cars wouldn’t be recognized by the very +men who were looking for them.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I hope we shan’t find your car down there,” said Fred warmly. +</p> +<p> +“I hope we shan’t,” replied George, “though the main thing I want just +now is to find the car anyway. Some of the good times I promised you +fellows this summer will go begging, I’m afraid, if we have lost our +automobile.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll find it, George,” said John, patting his friend on the shoulder. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile Uncle Sim, who was still a member of the party, had taken no +share in the conversation. At that moment, however, he uttered an +exclamation of surprise and directed the attention of the Go Ahead boys +to the old Meeker House which now was not far ahead of them. +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” said Uncle Sim, his voice trembling in his +excitement. “I sho’ do see some lights in dat cellar ob de ol’ house. +‘Pears like dere’s always somethin’ wrong in de ole Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“How it is, Fred? Do you agree with Uncle Sim?” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“I never saw any lights in it,” replied Fred glumly. +</p> +<p> +“No, but that’s what you wanted to see, I guess, more than anything +else,” laughed Grant. “But there’s a light there now,” he added +suddenly, “I saw it myself. It shines for a minute and then it is gone. +There it is again!” he exclaimed a moment later. “You can see it shining +through the cellar windows. What do you suppose it is?” +</p> +<p> +“Spooks,” said George solemnly. “They usually have a supper there once a +year and I think to-night is the regular time for their meeting.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you want to stop?” demanded Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t mind,” replied George. There was no enthusiasm, however, +manifest among the boys, although every one jokingly declared that he +was not afraid. The excuse was commonly given that the necessity of +hasty investigation into the loss of the automobile demanded action in +other directions. Consequently no stop was made and although every boy +was frequently glancing behind him at the old Meeker House no light was +seen nor did any additional or unusual sounds come from that direction. +</p> +<p> +When the boys had gone beyond the corner their thoughts once more +returned to the problem which was confronting them. The mystery of the +lost car must be solved. Although there were many suggestions offered +there was not one of the boys that had any clearly outlined plan as to +what must be done in order to find the lost car or obtain information +concerning those who had taken it. +</p> +<p> +“I have a suggestion,” broke in Grant at last. +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why, it’s your friend, the tramp. Probably he’s the man who has been +hanging around the place for several days and when his opportunity came +he took it.” +</p> +<p> +“Which do you mean, the opportunity, or the car?” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Both. His opportunity was to take the car.” +</p> +<p> +“That tramp,” declared Fred solemnly, “didn’t have strength enough about +him to push the button to turn on the power.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s something you don’t know,” retorted his friend. “I think when +you are through with it you’ll find that the car disappeared at the same +time the tramp did. No one has seen him since,” added Grant, positively. +</p> +<p> +“And from all I can learn,” retorted Fred, “nobody saw him before except +myself, so you haven’t run down your problem yet.” +</p> +<p> +When the boys arrived at the Corners, as the little nearby hamlet was +called, they made many inquiries of the people they met, but no word +concerning the missing car was heard. There were several suggestions +from the country people that other cars had been lost within the past +few weeks, but none of them was able to add to the information which the +boys already possessed. +</p> +<p> +Disappointed by their failures, George at last said, “I think the best +thing for us to do will be to go back home. I’ll call up my father on +the ’phone and if he isn’t coming out pretty soon he will tell me what +to do.” +</p> +<p> +In response to George’s suggestion the boys once more clambered into the +car and in a brief time were noisily speeding over the road on their way +back to their friend’s house. +</p> +<p> +“We’ve got two mysteries now,” suggested George. +</p> +<p> +“Three you mean,” spoke up Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“We’ve got the mystery of the lost car and the mystery of the old Meeker +House. That makes two. I don’t see where your third comes in.” +</p> +<p> +“The third is our mysterious friend, the tramp, that I saw in the old +Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s the mystery about him?” laughed George. “I don’t find anything +very mysterious about an unwashed tramp you found in the old house. Very +likely he had crawled in there to sleep and you waked him up.” +</p> +<p> +“He was awake all right,” declared Fred promptly. “There isn’t any +question about that. He wasn’t moving around as fast as I have seen +some, but he didn’t take it all out in motions, either.” +</p> +<p> +“It seems to me,” laughed Grant, “that you find in that tramp whatever +you want to find, Fred. First you say he’s one kind of man and then you +tell us he’s another.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait until you see him,” said Fred sagely. “Maybe he’s in the old house +now. It can’t be far ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“Not more than a quarter of a mile,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +For some reason the boys became silent as the car speeded forward in the +dim light. The eyes of every one were turned toward the old house which +had perplexed them in so many ways. +</p> +<p> +As they came near the corner John said in a low voice, “There’s not only +a ghost of a man in that house, but there’s the ghost of the automobile. +Do you hear that horn?” +</p> +<p> +All the boys listened intently and to their consternation the faint +sound of a horn was heard, issuing from the old house. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose that means?” demanded Fred in a whisper. +</p> +<p> +“I told you there was the ghost of an automobile in that house, didn’t +I?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Look yonder,” called Grant quickly. “There’s that light again in the +cellar. Don’t you think we had better stop and find out what all this +means?” +</p> +<p> +At that moment the faint sound of the horn was heard again from the +house and for an instant lights flashed from every window. +</p> +<p> +These, however, quickly disappeared and although the boys waited several +minutes, the sound was not repeated nor were the lights again seen. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER IX—ANOTHER FLIGHT</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose that means?” demanded Fred in a whisper. +</p> +<p> +“Things are seldom what they seem,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” again demanded Fred, turning sharply upon his +friend. “Don’t you think there are lights there? Didn’t you hear the +sound of the automobile horn?” +</p> +<p> +“I certainly did,” acknowledged Grant, “but that isn’t all there is to +it. There are some things we don’t see in connection with these things.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” urged George, “let’s all get out and go in there and see if +we cannot see those other things that Grant is telling about.” +</p> +<p> +For a moment there was silence in the little party, but at last, as no +one was desirous of being looked upon as cowardly by his friends, all +four boys stepped down upon the ground. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, Uncle Sim,” called George. “You aren’t going to be left +behind.” +</p> +<p> +“We don’ lose one car,” remarked the aged negro, his teeth chattering as +he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“And we don’t want to lose another, do we, Uncle Sim?” said George. “I +don’t think anybody can take it without our knowing it, so you can come +along, Uncle Sim, if you want to.” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” responded the negro. “D’rec’ly, d’rec’ly.” +</p> +<p> +George laughed, as the old man slowly and with manifest reluctance +climbed down upon the ground. His “mis’ry” plainly was unusually +troublesome, for he walked with a great effort and very slowly. Indeed, +he groaned with every step that he took, as he followed the boys on +their way to the old house. +</p> +<p> +Silence fell upon the party when they drew near the building. No lights +now were to be seen in any of its windows. Silence rested over the +quaint old structure and apparently there was nothing to explain the +strange sights and sounds which recently had issued from the venerable +building. +</p> +<p> +“You boys stay here and go into the house by the front door and I’ll go +around to the kitchen,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“What for?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why, we’ll be more certain,” explained George, “to find out if there is +anything wrong here if we come at the old house from two sides.” +</p> +<p> +“I think I’ll go with you,” spoke up Grant quickly. +</p> +<p> +“There’s no need of that,” protested George sharply. Indeed the lad +spoke too sharply, for the suspicions of Grant were instantly aroused by +the evident desire of his friend not to have him accompany him. +Knowledge of that fact, however, was sufficient of itself to increase +Grant’s determination. +</p> +<p> +“We had better divide up the party evenly,” he suggested. “John and Fred +can stay here and watch this side and I’ll go with you around to the +kitchen door.” +</p> +<p> +With manifest reluctance, though he made no further protest, George +accepted the suggestion of his friend and together the two boys soon +disappeared from the sight of their companions. +</p> +<p> +“Who’s that?” whispered Fred as he grasped the arm of John, who was +standing beside him, and pointing to an approaching figure of a man. +</p> +<p> +“That’s Uncle Sim,” replied John after a hasty glance at the approaching +form. +</p> +<p> +John’s words were verified when a few moments later Uncle Sim, his voice +trembling and his terror manifest in his entire bearing, approached the +spot where the two boys were standing. Indeed, had it not been for the +presence of John and Fred, Uncle Sim with all his “mis’ry” would not +have been induced to approach the uncanny place. +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” said John a moment later. “We’re going into the house to find +out about those lights.” +</p> +<p> +No protest was made and together the two boys, followed by Uncle Sim, +whose reluctance manifestly increased with every passing moment, pushed +open the sagging front door and entered the front room. +</p> +<p> +For a moment they were unable to distinguish any objects in the +darkness. From the small windows the faint light entered, but it was not +sufficient to enable the boys to see about them. Suddenly the strange +whirring of winds was heard again. Now the sound came from the ceiling +and then again it seemed to the startled boys that it was close to the +place where they were standing. Back and forth and up and down the +strange sounds continued, occasionally broken by a plaintive note as if +the creature that was darting about the room was in terror or pain. +</p> +<p> +Uncle Sim, unable longer to control his feelings, began to pray, but +even his prayer did not prevent him from speedily fleeing from the room. +</p> +<p> +Fred glanced through the open door and saw the old negro making most +excellent time as he ran across the field toward the waiting automobile. +Under other circumstances he would have laughed heartily, but just now +there was excitement sufficient to prevent the boys from following the +retreating old negro. +</p> +<p> +In the midst of the sounds of the wings suddenly a prolonged groan was +heard. It seemed to both Fred and John that it issued from some place +close to them. Several times the startling noise was repeated and then +was followed by a strange whistling. +</p> +<p> +For some reason, which neither of the two boys explained to the other, +they had not advanced farther into the room. Both glanced behind them to +make certain that the door was still open and their way of escape was +unimpeded. +</p> +<p> +“Where are the other fellows?” whispered Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. Shall I call them?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Fred eagerly, +</p> +<p> +“Hello, there is George. Where are you, Grant?” called John, striving to +speak boldly, though in spite of his efforts his voice trembled as he +spoke. +</p> +<p> +Instead of a response from their companion a faint sound of an auto horn +was heard in the old building. It was mournful beyond the power of +either boy to describe. Instead of the sharp, short “honk,” it was +prolonged and weird. +</p> +<p> +“This is too much for me,” said Fred sharply. “I have seen all I want to +see. The other fellows aren’t here and I’m not going into this old house +any further unless I can see my way.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that? What’s that?” whispered John excitedly. +</p> +<p> +As he spoke the sound of some one running around the corner of the house +was heard by both boys. In a moment John and Fred were outside the old +building and as they became aware that the fugitives were George and +Grant they lost no time in following them. +</p> +<p> +In the distance Uncle Sim could be seen climbing into the automobile. It +was marvelous too what excellent time all four boys were making. Swiftly +as George and Grant were running they were soon overtaken by their +companions and together all four arrived at the place in the road where +their automobile had been left. +</p> +<p> +At that moment there came a sound from the old Meeker House very like a +wild burst of laughter. This was repeated and the terror of Uncle Sim +became still more pronounced. +</p> +<p> +“There goes that auto horn again,” said George, as he grasped the wheel +and looked behind to see if his friends were ready to start. “Uncle +Sim,” called George just before he started, “I wish you would see if +that back tire on the left is all right. We don’t want to start out on a +flat tire.” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” answered Uncle Sim quickly, as he obediently +climbed out of the car and inspected the tire. “It’s all right, suh,” he +repeated. “It’s all right.” +</p> +<p> +In his eagerness to be gone George at once started, unaware that the +aged negro had not yet returned to his seat. +</p> +<p> +His ignorance was speedily dispelled when from the darkness behind them +came several agonizing calls for help, “Hi dar, don’t leave me! Don’t +leave me! Wait! Wait dar!” +</p> +<p> +As the boys glanced behind them they saw the old man running swiftly +toward them and making even better time than when he had departed from +the old Meeker House. +</p> +<p> +Obediently George stopped the automobile and in a moment Uncle Sim, +breathless and excited, climbed into the seat. +</p> +<p> +“There’s one thing I don’t understand, Uncle Sim,” said George, laughing +as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” responded the negro. “Dat’s jes’ de way I feel.” +</p> +<p> +“What I can’t understand,” said George, “is why it is so hard for you to +walk when you are working around the place and it’s so easy for you to +run when you have been left behind.” +</p> +<p> +“Dat’s so. Yas, suh,” answered the negro. “I jes’ cain’t explain dat +mahself.” +</p> +<p> +Apparently George was the only member of the party that was willing to +talk and even he soon lost his desire as few responses were made to his +various suggestions. +</p> +<p> +Uncle Sim, however, with chattering teeth and trembling voice, +frequently expressed his displeasure over the attempt of the boys to +belittle the sounds which had come from the old Meeker House. +</p> +<p> +At last Uncle Sim declared solemnly, “I jes’ made up my mind how dat ar +automobile was taken.” +</p> +<p> +“How was that?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“It’s de spooks back in de ole Meeker House. Dey make all de trouble.” +</p> +<p> +The four boys were now far enough from the scene of their recent +adventure to permit of their looking more calmly at their surroundings. +Their former fear had departed as the distance between them and the old +house had increased. When Uncle Sim made this solemn declaration as to +the cause of the loss of the automobile they all laughed heartily, +although the aged negro strongly maintained his repeated declarations. +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” he declared, “Dar’s somethin’ strange ‘bout all +dis rumpus. Yo’ hear de spirits in de ole house and you see de lights +from de windows, and den you hear de autermobile ho’n. Dat’s de way it +is, yas, suh. Yo’ couldn’t find that automobile if yo’ was to search dat +old house from de cellar up to de garret and yet de ho’n kept er blowin’ +and er blowin’ all de time.” +</p> +<p> +“I think you’re mistaken, Uncle Sim,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“No, suh. No, suh. Dat’s jes’ de way it is. I feel shore you’ll neber +see dat autermobile agin.” +</p> +<p> +“You think it is in the old house?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“No, suh. No, suh. I didn’t say as how it is exac’ly <em>in</em> de ole house, +but what I says is dat de persons what’s in de ole house can tell yo’ +what become of dat ar autermobile, an’ it was our autermobile ho’n what +was er blowin’ dar. Yas, suh, I’d know dat ho’n if I heard it er hundred +miles from here.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll tell you what I’ll do,” said George suddenly. +</p> +<p> +“Tell ahead,” said Fred. “What is it you’ll do?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll dare the crowd to go back to the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“We’ll take your dare,” responded Fred promptly. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chX' id='chX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER X—THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +There was no enthusiasm manifest among the four boys when again they +walked across the field on their way to the old Meeker House. As they +came near the building, suddenly lights were seen in the windows once +more and a faint sound of the automobile horn again was heard. +</p> +<p> +“Shall we go in?” inquired Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his +attempt to control it. +</p> +<p> +“It’s getting late,” suggested George. There was a note of laughter in +his voice, but his companions were so excited that they were scarcely +aware of it. “Perhaps we had better put it off until some other time.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way I feel about it,” joined in John. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said George, “and we must look after our car too. My father +wouldn’t want me to lose the old car as well as the new one.” +</p> +<p> +Like the famous soldiers who marched up the hill and then marched down +again, the Go Ahead boys without protest on the part of any member of +the party retraced their way to the road and silently took their places +in the car. +</p> +<p> +Conversation lagged and when at last they arrived at George’s home they +left the car in the garage and then quickly entered the house. +</p> +<p> +When they came into the room where the lights were shining they stared +blankly at one another for a moment and then laughed loudly. +</p> +<p> +“What a pack of brave fellows we are, aren’t we?” said George. +</p> +<p> +“We are going to find out about that old house,” declared John quietly. +</p> +<p> +To the surprise of the boys George’s father had arrived during their +absence. He was an interested listener to the story which the boys had +to relate, although none of them detected the sly glance which passed +between him and George. Evidently there was something understood by them +which was unknown to the others. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Mr. Sanders when the boys were seated in the room. “There +have been some strange occurrences in this part of the country from the +days when it was first settled.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s so,” said Grant. “We were hearing about the young fellow +who was captured up here in the Ramapo Pass in the Revolution.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you mean young Montagnie?” +</p> +<p> +“We don’t know his name,” replied Grant, “but it was the one who was +used by Washington as a messenger without his understanding it.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the fellow,” said Mr. Sanders. “I have always been greatly +interested in him. I do not think people ever have appreciated the part +he took in the plan which Washington wanted to try. He was a fine young +chap, about twenty years of age, and was a licensed preacher. Washington +had heard such good reports of him that when he came to try his plan he +sent for young Montagnie one morning up on the Hudson at Dobbs Ferry. It +was there the Continental army was encamped at the time. The general +told Montagnie that he had heard good reports of him and the young +soldier was so embarrassed that he could only stammer his thanks. Then +Washington went on to tell him that he wanted him to go across the +country and through the Ramapo Pass and carry a message to General +Heath, who was then at Morristown. He explained carefully how the papers +were to be sewed inside the lining of his coat. Young Montagnie agreed, +but suggested that he knew a better way across the country. There was +danger of his being taken if he should go down through the Ramapo +Valley. It is said that Washington drew himself up to his full height +and looked sternly at the young soldier as he thundered at him, ‘It is +your business to obey.’ And of course there was nothing more to be +said.” +</p> +<p> +“He must have had a strange feeling when he went down through the Pass,” +suggested John. “He knew what the danger was and at the same time he +knew that he could find his way safely across the country without going +into the Pass. It seems strange that he did not suspect the trick +Washington was trying to play.” +</p> +<p> +“Apparently he didn’t suspect anything,” said Mr. Sanders. “It was early +in the morning when he entered the narrow defile. The only weapon he had +was a stout club and he was swinging along at a good rate, confident +that if he once safely got through the Pass many of his perils would be +over. He had just entered one end of the Pass when he saw five men +coming in at the other end. +</p> +<p> +“He instantly recognized the leader as young Richard Smith, whose father +he had seen hanged up in Goshen a few days before this time. You see his +father was one of the worst of the cowboys. At least many of his +dastardly deeds were committed against the colonists, but he didn’t stop +for that and he was willing to have dealings with either side, provided +he made by the transaction.” +</p> +<p> +“What was he hanged for?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, the people became so indignant at last that about two hundred of +the boys and men started after him one day. Of course he ran then, but +they chased him clear down to Long Island.” +</p> +<p> +“Did they catch him?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“They most certainly did, and they brought him back to Goshen and he was +hanged there in the courtyard. Then his son, Richard, declared he would +revenge his father’s death and it was this young man whom Montagnie saw +when he came into the Ramapo Pass just at sunrise that morning away back +in 1781. +</p> +<p> +“The young messenger felt of the letter inside the lining of his coat to +make sure that it was safe and grasping his club more firmly and doing +his utmost to appear indifferent he at once turned and approached the +men. Very likely he would have run if he thought he could escape in that +manner, but he had no weapon except his club while the others were +armed. He well knew that if he should try to escape they would at once +start after him. +</p> +<p> +“He quietly saluted the men when he passed them and received a grunt +from Richard in response. However, he was not critical, as now he was +hoping that his peril had been passed. He was not to get away so easily, +however, for before he came out into the open road he was hailed by the +men behind him and ordered to stop. Once more the young preacher was +tempted to run, but he was aware that his effort would be useless. +Accordingly he waited for the men to come back to him, and when Richard +Smith gruffly demanded who he was and where he was going he answered in +a general way saying that he was simply going across the country, ‘That +won’t do,’ said Richard loudly, ‘that may mean to New York or it may +mean to Morristown. Who are you anyway?’ +</p> +<p> +“By this time Montagnie was convinced that he was in deadly peril and he +quickly decided to sell his life as dearly as possible. Swinging his +club he knocked down one of them and leaping over his prostrate body +started up the steep side of the Pass. For some reason he was not fired +upon but before he gained the top he was astonished to see two of the +party whom he had left in the valley now approaching from above him, +almost as if they had dropped out of the clouds.” +</p> +<p> +“How did they do it?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Very likely they knew of a short cut. At all events the young messenger +was caught between the two parties. They took him to a little shanty in +the woods and then began to search him. They cut his hat into shreds, +and of course found nothing valuable. Then they made him take off his +coat and as soon as they had cut the lining they discovered the letters +which were hidden there. +</p> +<p> +“Young Montagnie expected every moment that he would be shot or hanged. +One of the common methods of hanging employed by the cowboys in those +days was to put a noose around the prisoner’s neck, tie the rope to the +limb of a tree after they had put the man on horseback, and then, when +they struck the horse and it started quickly, the wretched victim was +left hanging in the air. But for some unexplained reason young Montagnie +was simply kept in the house three days. Then when he still confidently +believed that he was being led to his death he was taken down the Hudson +and carried across to New York, where he was shut up in the old Van +Cortlandt Sugar House, which stood near the corner of what is now +Broadway and Cortlandt Street. You see there were so many American +prisoners in New York that the British had to make use of some of the +big buildings besides the jails.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” suggested John, “I have heard that they used some of the churches +as jails.” +</p> +<p> +“They did,” responded Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“Well, what happened to young Montagnie?” +</p> +<p> +“I was just about to tell you,” said Sanders, smiling as he spoke. +“Naturally he felt very bitter when he found himself a prisoner in the +old sugar-house. He was so thoroughly convinced that his capture was +useless and that he might have made his way successfully across the +country to Morristown, that he was angry at Washington for his arbitrary +command. +</p> +<p> +“However, three days later his keeper showed him a copy of <em>Rivington’s +Gazette</em>. Rivington was a printer in New York and was a very bitter +Tory. Montagnie was not especially interested when he first took the +paper, but in a moment he was keenly excited when his eye fell upon an +announcement that one of Washington’s messengers had been captured and +that valuable information had been found concealed in his coat. The +statement further announced that in this paper was a letter from General +Washington to General Heath in which the commander explained that he was +about to attack the British in New York and expected to find General +Clinton entirely unprepared for such action. +</p> +<p> +“And at that very time,” resumed Mr. Sanders, “Washington with his +little army had crossed the Delaware River and was on his way toward +Yorktown to help Greene and Lafayette. It was impossible now for Clinton +to leave New York, believing as he did that it was about to be attacked, +and even after he had found out the trick which Washington had played +upon him it was too late for him to try to transport his army by sea +because Washington would arrive at Yorktown before the red coats +possibly could come to the aid of Cornwallis. The battle of Yorktown +followed, as you know, and Cornwallis and his army were made prisoners. +Indeed it was at Yorktown that really the final independence of the +Colonies was won. But I have always felt that the part which young +Montagnie took in winning the victory at Yorktown has never been known +as it ought to be.” +</p> +<p> +“What became of him?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. I have often tried to find out,” replied Mr. Sanders. +“You see the men in those days were so busy making history that they had +little time in which to write it. As a consequence there are many things +which we would like to know, but do not.” +</p> +<p> +“Now,” continued Mr. Sanders as he arose from his seat, “I understand +that you boys have lost an automobile.” +</p> +<p> +“We didn’t lose it,” exclaimed George; “it was stolen.” +</p> +<p> +“It seems to me,” said Mr. Sanders, “that if you had an automobile and +haven’t one now you must have lost it, whatever the way in which it +disappeared.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XI—THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“What are you going to do?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“We don’t know what to do,” explained Fred. “We thought when you came +out here you would tell us.” +</p> +<p> +“I think I shall leave it for you boys to settle among yourselves.” +</p> +<p> +“But don’t you want to get your car back?” demanded Grant in surprise. +</p> +<p> +“Indeed I do,” said Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“Then,” exclaimed Grant, “I should think you would want to help us find +it.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s possible that I may try some plans of my own,” explained Mr. +Sanders, “but meanwhile I am willing for the Go Ahead boys to see what +they can do in the way of restoring the car.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a strange thing,” said George, “how that car ever could have been +taken out of our yard without some of us hearing it. I explained to the +boys,” he added laughingly, “that it was such a good car that they +couldn’t hear the engine.” +</p> +<p> +“That may be true,” spoke up Fred, “but we had another explanation.” +</p> +<p> +“What was that?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“Why, we said some of the fellows were making so much noise that they +might have taken a threshing machine out of the garage and not one of us +would have heard it.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t mind explaining to you,” said Mr. Sanders, “that I have sent a +brief description of the car to several of the nearby cities. My +impression is that the automobile hasn’t gone very far from home, but +one cannot tell about that. Perhaps we shall get some word from Newark +or New York pretty soon.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you think they would take that car to New York?” demanded Fred. “I +thought George said that they had had trouble a year or two ago when a +lot of automobiles were stolen and taken down to Lakewood or somewhere +along the Jersey shore.” +</p> +<p> +“That may be true,” said Mr. Sanders. “I have taken a few steps in the +matter, but I am going to leave the most of it to the Go Ahead boys. I +shall expect you to get some trace of the car before I come out for the +week-end. I am compelled to go back to the city to-morrow morning, so I +must leave you boys to your own devices.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said George just before the boys sought their rooms, “to-morrow +morning we’ll start out and begin our search for that missing +automobile.” +</p> +<p> +The following morning, after the departure of Mr. Sanders, the boys were +soon ready for their expedition. That is, all were ready except John, +who, for reasons which he did not fully explain, said that he would wait +until the following day before he joined in the search for the missing +car. +</p> +<p> +Before the three boys and Uncle Sim took their seats in the automobile +Fred drew his elongated friend to one side and pulling his head down +until it was on a level with his own whispered to him. +</p> +<p> +The conversation between the two friends was brief, but when Fred +responded to the hail of his comrades and ran to take his seat in the +automobile, there was an expression upon his face which indicated that +the cause of the failure of John to accompany them was not altogether +unknown to him. +</p> +<p> +In a brief time the car with its inmates disappeared around the bend in +the road and John was no longer to be seen. +</p> +<p> +“I think I’ll go first to Paterson,” explained George, to the two boys, +“and then I’ll stop at every garage along the road between there and +Newark.” +</p> +<p> +When they arrived at Paterson they sought the quarters of the chief of +police and all three boys entered the room. +</p> +<p> +George was the spokesman for the party and he briefly explained the loss +which had befallen them. +</p> +<p> +The chief of police listened attentively, made notes of several +statements which George made and then said, “We shall do our best for +you. The trouble is that stolen cars frequently are mutilated or +repainted or something is done to them which prevents an owner from +recognizing his own property.” +</p> +<p> +“My father too is sending out word about the car,” suggested George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, that’s the only thing to do. It’s one of the things you +never can tell about. You may find the car in a country garage, or in a +big city, or you may not find it at all.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you think we’ll find it?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“I cannot say. Have you offered a reward for its recovery?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” admitted George. “My father has charge of that. If he +has offered a reward he hasn’t told me about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I see,” said the chief slowly, looking sternly at George as he +spoke. “There may be reasons why he doesn’t want to tell you about it.” +</p> +<p> +“What reasons?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“If you don’t know I shan’t tell you.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you think we took the car?” demanded George hotly. +</p> +<p> +“I’m not saying anything about that part of it. I don’t know. I’m going +to take your directions and do my best to locate the car and the thief +too, if I can. It won’t make any difference to me where I hit or who it +is. When we find the party that stole the car shall we report?” +</p> +<p> +George was too angry to continue the conversation and turning abruptly +from the room he joined his companions, and together they hastily +reëntered the car. +</p> +<p> +“Never mind, George,” said Fred cheerfully; “don’t forget that we’re the +Go Ahead boys, and if the car is anywhere in Jersey we’ll try to find +it.” +</p> +<p> +“But we haven’t any plan,” suggested Grant. “What do you intend to do, +George?” +</p> +<p> +“Find the car. That’s as far as I have got now. I think I will stop at +every garage along the road and find out if any one has seen or heard +anything about our lost car.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll stand about as good a chance of finding it as you will of +finding a needle in a haystack,” laughed Grant. “However, if that’s what +you want, I’m perfectly willing to go along with you.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s very kind and considerate on your part,” remarked George dryly, +as the car started swiftly along the country road into which they now +had turned. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anything,” suggested Grant, who was the first to break in +upon the silence. “I don’t see anything to prevent the thief taking the +car into New York City or going to Philadelphia with it.” +</p> +<p> +“There isn’t anything,” said George quietly. +</p> +<p> +“And even after he has gone into New York or Pennsylvania he can come +back again and double on his tracks. I don’t see much hope of your ever +finding your car.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps we shan’t find it,” admitted George, “but I belong to a crowd +that’s known as the Go Ahead boys and we aren’t beaten before we start, +anyway. If we have to give up it will be after we have done our best.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way to talk!” broke in Fred. “We’re going ahead anyway and +we’re going to get where we started for, too.” +</p> +<p> +“What will you do if you find your car?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Take it, of course,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“But suppose somebody has bought it from the thief? He won’t give the +car back to you without your proving that it belongs to you.” +</p> +<p> +“Then we’ll prove it,” said George quietly. +</p> +<p> +“What will you do with your thief if you find him?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll wait until I find him,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“You know,” broke in Fred, “I sometimes think it wasn’t any thief that +stole that car anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean, pygmy?” demanded both boys together as they looked +keenly at their diminutive friend. +</p> +<p> +“You know just as well as I do,” said Fred sturdily. +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t the remotest idea what you mean,” said Grant. “You’ll have to +try to make the point plain.” +</p> +<p> +“You mean,” retorted Fred, “that you have to be helped to see a point +once in your life.” +</p> +<p> +“Go ahead, Fred,” called George sharply. “What do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Why you heard the tooting of that horn in the old Meeker House the same +as I did,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“You think the car is in that old house?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t say so,” said Fred, “but I do say that the horn that belongs +to George’s car is in that old house, or else the horn that is there is +so like it that you couldn’t tell them apart.” +</p> +<p> +George laughed quietly and said, “Next thing, Fred, you’ll be telling us +that the spooks stole the car.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not so sure that they didn’t,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“If they did, then what we’ll find in the old Meeker House will be only +the ghost of the car, I’m afraid.” +</p> +<p> +Conversation ceased and at every garage along the road George stopped +and made inquiries concerning the missing automobile. +</p> +<p> +It was late in the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys turned homeward. Not +an inkling had they received of the stolen car. Several times they had +been informed that “A good many cars of late have been stolen,” but the +knowledge brought neither comfort nor light. +</p> +<p> +“George,” suggested Fred, “suppose we go home by the road where the old +Meeker House is.” +</p> +<p> +George smiled dryly as he replied, “All right. The way is as short if I +turn in there as in any other way. What are you looking for, the ghost +of the lost automobile?” +</p> +<p> +Fred shook his head and did not reply, but when at last in the dusk they +drew near the place where the mysterious old house was standing, all +were convinced that they heard a faint sound of an automobile horn +coming from the place. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XII—A HASTY DEPARTURE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +As the speed of the automobile was instantly decreased, Fred said +excitedly, “Stop, George! I say it is time for us to find out about this +thing and quit all our foolishness.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you want to do?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“I want to go into that old house and find out just what all this +mystery means.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t dare leave the car,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“Then you stay here and look after it,” retorted Fred. “Grant and I will +make our own inspections, won’t we?” he added as he turned to his +companion. +</p> +<p> +Grant did not speak, but as he quickly leaped out of the car his example +was at once followed by Fred and together the two boys started toward +the house, the dim outline of which could be seen before them. +</p> +<p> +It was an ideal summer night. There was no moon, but as there were not +many clouds in the sky the two boys were able to see about them in every +direction. Crickets noisily were proclaiming their presence and the not +unmusical notes of the tree toads joined in a chorus that arose from +every side. +</p> +<p> +In silence the boys approached the front door of the house and just as +they were about to enter there came again that mocking sound of an +automobile horn. +</p> +<p> +In spite of his declaration of his courage Fred instantly gripped his +companion’s arm. Neither of the boys spoke as they halted for a moment +on the stone door-step. +</p> +<p> +The startling noise of the horn was followed by sounds even more +unexpected. There were shouts and calls and cries issuing from within +the building. In the midst of this strange confusion there was also +heard the sound of laughter. +</p> +<p> +The combination at first appeared to be almost too strong for the nerves +of the two Go Ahead boys. For an instant they turned and were looking +back at the road where George was waiting for them in his automobile. +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” said Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his courageous +attitude. “Come on in, Grant. We must find out about this thing.” +</p> +<p> +Before Grant could reply, suddenly around the corner of the house two +men were seen. Both were running swiftly and apparently were unmindful +of the presence of the boys. +</p> +<p> +The two ghostly forms moved swiftly across the intervening field and +were apparently running directly toward the automobile in the road. +</p> +<p> +The sight was more than either Grant or Fred was able to endure. Without +another word both leaped from the stone steps and in their swiftest +paces ran down the old pathway eager to gain the shelter of the waiting +automobile. +</p> +<p> +“What’s the trouble?” demanded George as his companions joined him. +“What’s happened? Is there anything wrong?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t talk about it now,” said Fred. “Put on all the speed you have got +and we’ll tell you later what happened.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe there’s any such great need of haste,” said George +dryly. “Why not go back and find out what the cause of all the trouble +is?” +</p> +<p> +“You may go if you want to,” retorted Fred, “but I’m not going to try it +again to-night.” +</p> +<p> +“The Go Ahead boys apparently are in motion, but not in the right +direction,” suggested George demurely. +</p> +<p> +“The right direction,” declared Fred, “is straight toward your house.” +As he spoke he glanced again at the Meeker place and as he did so +discovered the two ghostly forms that were still moving across the +field. +</p> +<p> +“Both of them came out of the house,” he said in a loud whisper, “while +we were on the front door-step.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I guess not,” said George tantalizingly. “It’s probably two men +that took a short cut. They were coming from the other road.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t you believe it!” maintained Fred stoutly. “They came out of that +old Meeker House. Didn’t they, Grant?” he added, turning to his friend +for confirmation. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, they came out of the house,” said Grant brusquely. It was plain +the boy was not enjoying the recollection of the swift flight which he +and Fred had made to rejoin George. +</p> +<p> +“Get your car under motion,” said Fred sharply. “We don’t want to stay +here any longer. We’ll tell you what happened when you get out on the +main road.” +</p> +<p> +“Just as you say,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +A moment later the automobile was moving swiftly down the road. As it +came near the place where the two forms had been seen it was evident +that both were seeking to gain the road in advance of the automobile. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe the spooks will try to get this car, too,” suggested George in a +low voice. +</p> +<p> +At that moment there came a hail from the two men in advance and at the +sound George laughed loudly. +</p> +<p> +“Do you know who that is?” he demanded, turning to his companions. +</p> +<p> +“Who is it?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why it’s John and Uncle Sim. They want to ride home. I guess I’ll +pretend not to know who they are and put on a little more speed.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke the car began to move more swiftly, a sight which at once +called forth louder shouts of protest from the two men who now were near +the fence along the roadside. +</p> +<p> +“Let them in. Let them in,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“All right, just as you say,” replied George, and as he spoke he brought +the automobile to a standstill. +</p> +<p> +“What do you want?” he called to the two men who now were climbing the +fence. +</p> +<p> +“We want you to take us home,” replied one of the two. +</p> +<p> +“Is that you, John?” +</p> +<p> +“It certainly is.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I couldn’t tell,” laughed George. “You look more like a string +than ever. Is that Uncle Sim with you?” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” spoke up the negro promptly. +</p> +<p> +“Then you have been over to the old Meeker House, have you?” inquired +George as John and the colored man took their seats in the car. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, we have been there,” abruptly replied John. +</p> +<p> +“You didn’t seem to stay very long,” suggested George. “Were there any +special reasons why you didn’t want to tarry any longer?” +</p> +<p> +“Dere sho’ was,” spoke up Uncle Sim, his teeth chattering as he spoke. +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh, dere sho’ was.” Lifting his face toward the sky the +old colored man muttered some incantations or prayers which in a measure +indicated the terror which possessed him. He was trembling in every limb +and when he tried to speak his lower jaw, over which he apparently had +lost control, resounded as it repeatedly struck the teeth on his upper +jaw. +</p> +<p> +“Never mind, Uncle Sim,” said George, noticing the abject terror of the +old man. “We’ll soon be out of this. I don’t see why you went back there +when you’re so afraid of the old place.” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh,” stammered Uncle Sim. “I don’ went jes’ because dis +young man ‘sist on my goin’ wif him.” +</p> +<p> +“Was he afraid to go alone?” +</p> +<p> +“Yas, suh. Yas, suh.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he think he would be less scared if there were two than he would be +if he was there alone?” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right, George,” broke in John, “you don’t know what you’re +talking about. If you had heard what we did you would have made better +time than either of us when we were trying to head you off.” +</p> +<p> +“What did you hear?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, we heard the same old sound and a lot more. Just as true as I am +sitting here there was a voice that sounded all through the house and it +was calling, ‘John, John’.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you answer it?” +</p> +<p> +“Did I answer it? No, sir, I didn’t answer it. I was out of that house +before you could count ten.” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t know that it affected you that way,” laughed George, “to have +anybody speak to you.” +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t to have any live body, but that name was sounded all through +the house. It wasn’t loud either, it was just that whispered, ‘John, +John,’ that I don’t think I shall ever forget as long as I live.” +</p> +<p> +“It seems to have affected Uncle Sim even worse than it did you,” +suggested George, as Uncle Sim clasped his hands and lifted them far +above his head and offered various incantations, as if he were doing his +utmost to ward off the evil spirits. +</p> +<p> +“Well, all I have got to say,” explained George at last, “is that the Go +Ahead boys ought to change their name.” +</p> +<p> +“Why?” demanded Fred sharply. +</p> +<p> +“Because it seems to me that they can leave any place and make better +time than anybody I have ever seen. Even Uncle Sim forgets his +rheumatism and ‘mis’ry’ and keeps up with John when he races across the +field. To-morrow morning I will give John one dollar if he will make as +good time from the old Meeker House out to the road as he made to-night +when it was dark.” +</p> +<p> +“Never you mind about that!” retorted John. “You didn’t see all that I +saw.” +</p> +<p> +“But you haven’t told us what you saw.” +</p> +<p> +“I told you something I heard. If you had heard your own name coming +down the chimney and through the windows and up from the cellar, out of +the attic, in the hallway, down the stairs and everywhere at the same +time you wouldn’t have stayed there any longer either.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps I wouldn’t,” admitted George, “but my feeling is that you +didn’t hear half as much as you thought you did.” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir,” responded John. “I have told you only half what I did hear.” +</p> +<p> +“Well go ahead with your story.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not going to talk until we get home.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIII—WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Conversation ceased during the remainder of the ride. The silence was +broken two or three times by George, who was driving the car as he +looked behind him at his companions and laughed aloud. No response was +given to his implied invitations to describe their feelings and as they +came nearer the end of their journey the chagrin under which all three +boys were suffering became still more marked. +</p> +<p> +At last when they were once more in the house, Fred, unable longer to +remain silent, said abruptly, “I know there isn’t anything in the racket +at the old Meeker House, but in spite of it all I confess I’m scared +when I hear those strange sounds.” +</p> +<p> +“What are you afraid of?” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know what I’m afraid of,” said Fred, “but it scares me half out +of my wits.” +</p> +<p> +“There’s something very strange about it,” broke in John. “I don’t +believe in spooks and such things, but no one has told us yet what the +sound of those flying wings means and they haven’t explained how a +fellow can get in there and hear his name called from seven different +parts of the house at the same time.” +</p> +<p> +“What about that horn?” inquired Grant. “That’s the strangest part of it +all to me.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know,” said Fred, “I’m sure that horn that blows in the old +house is the one that used to be on George’s car.” +</p> +<p> +“No, it can’t be,” said George. “There’s nothing but ghosts in the +Meeker House and so it could be only the ghost of that horn if there +really is anything there.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it isn’t the ghost of a sound,” declared John positively. “It’s a +real noise let me tell you and when you hear it as I did to-night, first +right close to your ear, and then, a second or two later, sounding as if +it came from the attic or the cellar you’re ready to believe almost +anything.” +</p> +<p> +“Too ready, I’m afraid,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“The next time we go there,” spoke up Fred, “I move that George Sanders +be selected to go into the house by the front door. If you remember, +fellows, he has always slipped out every time we went there and gone +around to the kitchen door.” +</p> +<p> +“I believe he knows more about it than he has told us yet,” declared +John. +</p> +<p> +“All I know,” said George solemnly, “is that some of the Go Ahead boys +have reversed their name. Whenever they pluck up courage enough to go to +the old house they always go there with fear and trembling. They walk as +if they were traveling to their own funeral, but when they leave they +make better time than I ever saw any of them make on the cinder path. I +think that we ought to change the name. They aren’t Go Ahead boys any +more, they are the Go Backward or the Get Away boys.” +</p> +<p> +“I notice,” spoke up Grant, “that you didn’t stand very long in the way +of your own departure. At least I haven’t noticed yet that you have been +very far behind any of us when we ran from the place.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course you haven’t,” said George. “I have to look after my guests, +don’t I? And if they are in such a hurry to leave, it wouldn’t be very +polite for me to stay.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t leave on our account,” said Fred dryly. +</p> +<p> +“I guess there isn’t much danger that you wouldn’t any other time,” +laughed George. “Perhaps you don’t need any help after all. I was just +trying to be polite.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s too great an effort,” said Fred. “Don’t try it again, but what are +you going to do about that stolen car?” +</p> +<p> +“I’m going ahead,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“You certainly have a strange way of doing it then,” retorted Fred. “It +seems to me you were going all around it.” +</p> +<p> +“Never you mind,” said George. “We’ll have that car back in our garage +in less than a week, you mark my words and see if we don’t.” +</p> +<p> +“If we do,” declared Grant, “it won’t be any fault of ours. I guess your +father will be the one that will find it.” +</p> +<p> +“He will help,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“Help,” repeated Fred. “If we keep up the idiotic kind of a search we +made to-day I guess he will have to do the whole thing.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps he will,” admitted George. “I’m not jealous. If we can only get +that car back, that’s about all I want.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m going to bed,” declared John. “This has been my busy day.” +</p> +<p> +“And you haven’t told us yet what you were doing,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I guess I don’t have to tell you,” said John. “All three of you seem to +know more about Uncle Sim and me and what we have been doing to-day than +we do ourselves.” +</p> +<p> +In a brief time the boys had withdrawn from the room and sought their +beds. +</p> +<p> +The following morning when three of the Go Ahead boys went down stairs +they discovered George talking over the telephone. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” he was saying. “That’s all right. We’ll start right after +breakfast. Thank you very much. Good-by.” +</p> +<p> +As he hung up the receiver George turned to his friends and said, “What +would you fellows say if I told you that I had some word about the car?” +</p> +<p> +“We would all say that it was a good word, anyway,” said Fred promptly. +</p> +<p> +“I was just talking to my father who told me that he had received a +telegram this morning from Newburgh.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s in New York State,” spoke up Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Correct,” answered George. “I’m glad that for once in your life you are +correctly informed.” +</p> +<p> +“You want to be thankful,” retorted Fred, “that once in your life you +were able to appreciate the information I possess. I haven’t a stingy +thing about me, and I have been trying to be generous and give you some +of the knowledge I have acquired, after long and painful effort, but you +do not seem to appreciate my kind heart.” +</p> +<p> +“My father says that the best thing for us to do will be to take the old +car and go straight to Newburgh. We may have to stay all night, so you +had better go prepared.” +</p> +<p> +“We aren’t going before breakfast, are we?” demanded Grant. +</p> +<p> +“No, my lean and hungry friend, we’ll wait until the wants of the inner +man are satisfied.” +</p> +<p> +“Not that,” said Fred. “Not that. You mean you will wait long enough for +him to eat all he needs, but not all he wants. We aren’t going to start +from here before sunset, if you don’t mean that.” +</p> +<p> +Conversation was not as brisk after the boys entered the dining room, +but when their breakfast had been eaten and they followed George as he +led the way to the garage they were all as talkative as before. +</p> +<p> +“Going to take Uncle Sim with you?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“No,” answered George. “I’ll have to leave him to look after the place!” +</p> +<p> +“How long before we start?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“About three minutes. Are you going with us to-day?” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right I am,” declared John. “I stayed home yesterday to make my +own investigations in the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“And you have finished them all?” inquired George with a laugh. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t say that the investigations are all finished, but I am. Yes, +sir, I’m done. You don’t catch me alone in that old house again.” +</p> +<p> +“But I thought Uncle Sim went with you,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Uncle Sim? Uncle Sim? I would rather have an infant in arms with me. +Uncle Sim was scared before we were inside the house and after that +everything he saw or heard all helped to scare him still more.” +</p> +<p> +“He surely was scared last night,” laughed Fred as he recalled the +plight of the aged negro. +</p> +<p> +“He was that,” said John solemnly, “but the worst of it is he scared me +too. You know they say that a man doesn’t run because he’s scared, he’s +scared because he runs. I don’t know much about that, but I guess it +worked both ways with me. I know I was scared before I ran and I know I +was scared a good deal worse after I began to run.” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind, John,” said George, “We’ll have a fine ride to-day. We’re +going up through Ramapo Valley, through that place my father was telling +you about where young Montagnie was taken prisoner so many years ago by +the cowboys.” +</p> +<p> +“I hope there won’t be anybody there to make prisoners of us,” declared +Grant solemnly. “Do you ever have any hold-ups there now?” +</p> +<p> +“Not every day,” explained George. +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean by that?” demanded Grant as he turned sharply upon +George. +</p> +<p> +“Just what I say,” repeated George. +</p> +<p> +“You don’t really think we’ll have any trouble, do you?” inquired Fred +anxiously. +</p> +<p> +“I cannot say,” said George slowly. “There comes a gentleman now who +belongs to the fraternity. Perhaps he can tell you more about it than +I.” As he spoke the three boys glanced quickly toward the kitchen door. +Approaching it was a man who bore every indication of being a tramp. +</p> +<p> +“Hold on, fellows,” whispered Fred, excitedly, “that’s the very same +tramp I met over in the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure about that?” asked George quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, it’s the same man.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on, then,” said George, “We’ll go up and interview him.” +</p> +<p> +The tramp now was seated on the stone step and hungrily was devouring +the breakfast which had been given him. +</p> +<p> +“How long since you have been in the old Meeker House?” inquired Fred as +he approached the stranger. +</p> +<p> +As the man looked up he recognized his companion of the former night and +a smile spread over his countenance. “I just came from there,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“Were you in the house all night?” demanded Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Yes. Why?” +</p> +<p> +“Did you hear any strange sounds?” +</p> +<p> +“Not one.” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you see anything that scared you?” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir, nothing scared me.” +</p> +<p> +“And you say you were there all night?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I say. I crawled in there right after sunset and went to +sleep. I told you the other night that I sometimes sleep there in my +travels.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t understand why you didn’t hear anything,” said John, “if you +really were in the house. I was there and I heard some things.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” The tramp paused in his occupation and stared blankly at John as +he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“The same things that happen there every night. There were some +creatures flying all around the room—” +</p> +<p> +“Ostriches,” said the tramp soberly. +</p> +<p> +“And there must have been a good many people there too because they +called me by my name and at the same time from every part of the house.” +</p> +<p> +“A part of Washington’s army,” said the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know who they were, but the thing that scared me most of all +was the tooting of an automobile horn. First it sounded right close to +my ear and then it seemed to come from all parts of the house at once.” +</p> +<p> +“Nothing but the wind whistling around the eaves,” said the tramp. “I +don’t mind telling you though that there have been times when I have +heard sounds over there that made me think of the horn of an auto—” +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t you hear it last night?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“No. Where are you boys going?” the tramp abruptly added. +</p> +<p> +“We’re going to look for a lost automobile,” said Fred. “You haven’t +seen one lately, have you?” +</p> +<p> +“Did you lose a car?” inquired the tramp, ignoring the question. +</p> +<p> +“We certainly have lost it,” said George, “or rather somebody has taken +it.” +</p> +<p> +“And you know where it is now?” +</p> +<p> +“We’ve got word where it may be and we’re going to find out.” +</p> +<p> +Fred had been watching the tramp closely throughout the conversation and +when George abruptly turned back to the garage he instantly followed +him. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIV—DISAPPOINTED</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“I tell you,” exclaimed Fred in a low voice as soon as he had overtaken +his friend, “that tramp knows more about the lost automobile than he +told us.” +</p> +<p> +George turned abruptly and for a moment stared blankly at his friend and +then laughed aloud. “I think you surely have got it,” he said. “A fellow +who can find spooks and ghosts of automobiles ought to be able to find +out a man who will steal them. That tramp to me doesn’t look as if he +had ever seen the inside of a car.” +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t make any difference,” said Fred persistently. “I tell you he +knows more about that car than you think.” +</p> +<p> +“What makes you think so?” +</p> +<p> +“The way he looked and acted when we were talking about the auto having +been stolen.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he look guilty?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know whether he did or not. He looked up right away and the +expression on his face was different from what it was before. He knows +something about it anyway, whether he took it or not.” +</p> +<p> +“Keep it up, Fred,” laughed George. “Pretty soon you’ll be able to run +down every man who has seen our car, to say nothing of those who took +it.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you advise me to do?” he continued. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s just it,” laughed George. “There are lots of people that can +tell you what ought to be done, but there are mighty few that can tell +you how to do it. Do you want me to have him arrested?” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t say that,” said Fred. “All I said to you was that he knows +more about it than you think he does. It seems to me it would be a good +thing to have some one watch him or to leave word with the constable.” +</p> +<p> +“What will the constable do? He can’t invite him to his house.” +</p> +<p> +“No, but he can tell him he mustn’t leave town, can’t he?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think he could without a warrant or something. You can’t arrest +a man merely on suspicion.” +</p> +<p> +“All the same,” said Fred, “I think you’ll find that he knows more about +that lost car than any one else.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said George, “he doesn’t seem to be leaving the country very +rapidly and if we hear of him riding around in a brand new automobile +we’ll begin to ask some questions. Now, the thing for us to do is to +start on our trip and see if there’s anything in the report my father +has received about the lost car having been found in Newburgh.” +</p> +<p> +A few minutes later the four boys were on their way toward the beautiful +little city on the Hudson. +</p> +<p> +A ride of between forty and fifty miles was before them and they had not +gone far on their journey before they were more deeply interested in the +sights and scenes they were passing than in the pursuit of the car which +had been lost. +</p> +<p> +While they were riding through the Ramapo Valley they tried to discover +the place where young Montagnie had had his troubles with the cowboys +who had stopped him. Other stories of heroic deeds by the colonists in +the struggle for independence were told by George and Grant and the time +passed so rapidly that when the car stopped at Suffern, where the boys +were to have their luncheon, with one accord they declared that the ride +had been the most enjoyable in all their experience. +</p> +<p> +Early in the afternoon the ride was resumed and such excellent time was +made that by half past three o’clock they had arrived at the end of +their journey. +</p> +<p> +Their car was placed in a garage and then the boys at once went to a +hotel where they were to remain that night, for it had been decided that +they would not return until the following morning, whether their lost +car was found or not. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, fellows,” said George a half-hour afterward, “we’ll go down to +the garage and see if our car is there.” +</p> +<p> +Down the hillside on the steep street that led to the bank of the +Hudson the boys made their way, frequently commenting on the experiences +people of Newburgh must have in winter-time, when ice and snow were to +be found on the streets. +</p> +<p> +George explained that at that time ropes were stretched along the +sidewalk to protect the people who tried to pass up or down the slippery +way. +</p> +<p> +“Here we are,” explained George a little later as they stopped in front +of a large garage. “Come on in. We’ll know what out fate is in a few +minutes.” +</p> +<p> +Entering the garage George inquired for the manager and soon was in +conversation with a young man, who at once became deeply interested in +the boys and in the story they were telling him. At last he said, “The +car you are talking about is back here in the corner. Come with me and +I’ll show it to you.” +</p> +<p> +Eagerly following the manager the boys soon stopped in front of the car +which he indicated. “You see,” explained the young man, “this car has +recently been painted. It has a Pennsylvania license, but that could be +very easily obtained for they could run over across the Pennsylvania +line and then come up into New York State. There are some other changes +that have been made, but I want you to look at it and tell me whether or +not you think it is the car you have lost.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think it is,” said George promptly. +</p> +<p> +“Better look at it more closely,” said the manager. “Sometimes these +cars are created the way they used to tell me the gypsies did when I was +a boy. You know they used to scare us by telling us that the gypsies +stole children and then they fixed them up so that their own mothers +wouldn’t recognize them.” +</p> +<p> +“How did they do that?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know. I suppose they cut their hair, painted their faces +and dressed them up in some outlandish clothes. Well, that’s the way +these men that steal automobiles sometimes do. They fix them up so that +their owners wouldn’t recognize the cars as theirs.” +</p> +<p> +A further and careful investigation of the car was made but it was not +long before George said positively, “That isn’t our car.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re sure, are you?” again inquired the manager. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir. I’m sure. The engine isn’t like ours. There are more spokes +in the wheels and the hood is different. No, I’m sure it’s not our car.” +</p> +<p> +George’s disappointment was manifest in the tones of his voice and his +friends naturally shared in his feelings. +</p> +<p> +“Was that car stolen?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“We suspect that it was,” replied the manager. “We have had half a dozen +inquiries recently about stolen cars and though I cannot tell you more +we have reason to believe that this is one of them. My advice to you is +to stop on your way back home at a garage managed by Egge and Hatch.” +</p> +<p> +“What are their names?” demanded Grant blankly. +</p> +<p> +“Egge and Hatch,” repeated the manager. “I know another automobile +concern which is run by Waite and Barrett.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait and Bear-it,” laughed Fred. “That’s a good name. That would do for +a lot of other concerns besides garages, wouldn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“It would be a better name for the men who leave their automobiles there +to be repaired,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +The boys were now convinced that the car they had inspected was not the +one they had lost. There was nothing more to be done unless they visited +every garage in the city. +</p> +<p> +“And I don’t think there will be much use even in that, just now,” +suggested the manager. +</p> +<p> +“Come on then, fellows, we’ll go back to the hotel,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“But I don’t want to go back to the hotel,” said Grant. “I want to go +somewhere else.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know where it is?” demanded John. “I’ve known you when you +started for some place that you didn’t know, nor did any one else.” +</p> +<p> +“I know exactly where I want to go,” said Grant pompously. “If you +fellows want to come with me it will do you good, but if you don’t you +can do what you please. I have never been in Newburgh before and while I +am here I am going to take advantage of the opportunity.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, we’ll go with you,” said Fred glibly. “If you can find +anything that is going to improve you we want to come along and see the +show.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XV—A FAMOUS SPOT</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Unknown to his friends Grant had made some inquiries concerning a spot +in Newburgh which he long had been desirous of seeing. Without +explaining to his companions what he had in mind he quickly led the way +up another hill until they arrived at a large enclosed yard. In the +midst of it stood a low old stone house. In front of the house, on the +extensive lawn, were several piles of cannon balls, and cannon were +looking out over the peaceful waters of the Hudson. The flag of the +United States was floating from the high flagpole and added much to the +beauty of the scene. +</p> +<p> +“What’s all this?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Every young American is supposed to know that this is Washington’s +headquarters. Didn’t you ever hear of it?” +</p> +<p> +“He had so many,” laughed John, “I can’t keep track of them. It is +something like the beds he slept in that we were talking about the other +day.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, this is where he had his headquarters,” said Grant, “when his +army was in this part of the country. This is a beautiful spot, isn’t +it?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s wonderful!” said Fred in a low voice. The impulsive lad was deeply +impressed by the associations connected with the place where they then +were standing as well as by the marvelous scene of the Hudson winding +its way in and out through the midst of the towering hills. +</p> +<p> +“Over yonder,” said Grant, pointing across the river as he spoke, “is +Beacon and right across the river is Fishkill.” +</p> +<p> +“Good name,” said John in a low voice. +</p> +<p> +“Of course it is,” said Grant. “We’re in the Empire State. That’s the +State I live in and there isn’t another one like it in the Union.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said George, who felt that he was now called upon to +defend his own State. “New York has a choice collection. I don’t say +that there aren’t some good people here, but you don’t have to go very +far to come to Ossining. Do you know who lives there?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, some undesirable citizens,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and you go on a little farther up the river and you come to +Albany. If you want to know what New York State is like you want to find +out how much the capitol building there cost.” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind about those things,” broke in John. “What I want to know is +about this part of the country where we are now. I have read a good many +stories about the American army when it was in camp at Peekskill.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course you have,” said Grant; “there were a lot of things doing +there. I have a book at home that my great-grandfather used to read when +he was a boy. It tells about a young fellow only seventeen years of age +who was one of Washington’s couriers. He used to ride between Morristown +and Lake Champlain. At least he did in the year when Burgoyne was trying +to bring his Hessians and redcoats from Montreal to New York.” +</p> +<p> +“He didn’t bring them, though,” spoke up Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Only as far as Saratoga,” laughed Grant. “If it hadn’t been for certain +obstacles I guess he would have brought them all the way down the +river.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess he would too,” laughed Fred scornfully, “but his ‘obstacles,’ +as you call them, were General Gates, Philip Schuyler, Benedict Arnold +and a few other continental soldiers that did not seem to be +enthusiastic over allowing Johnnie Burgoyne to come any farther.” +</p> +<p> +“I was reading the other day,” said Grant, “that the Baroness de +Reidesel was with her husband when the Hessians were captured. She had +her children with her and to show them due honor Mrs. General Schuyler +took the Baroness and her children into her own home. The Hessian lady +did not know that Mrs. Schuyler understood German and she rudely carried +on some conversation with her children in that language when Mrs. +Schuyler was present. One time one of the children piped up and asked +his mother, ‘Isn’t this the place that we are to have when our father is +made a duke after he has whipped the Yankees?’ As the Baroness glanced +up she was aware that Mrs. Schuyler had understood what the boy was +saying. She tried to apologize but Mrs. Schuyler was a perfect lady and +at once smoothed things out. They say she was a brave woman. There’s one +story about her though that I never believed.” +</p> +<p> +“What was that?” asked John. +</p> +<p> +“Why they say that thirteen was a magical number for the Americans. The +British reported that Martha Washington had a big cat with thirteen +stripes around its tail and that she wouldn’t have any other kind. There +were just thirteen of the colonies, you know, and that made it worse. +And it was reported that General Phil. Schuyler had just thirteen hairs +left in his bald pate and that Mrs. Catherine Schuyler very carefully +oiled and brushed them every night for fear that the magic number might +be changed.” +</p> +<p> +“She had better brush his hair than pull it,” suggested George. +</p> +<p> +“I can remember the time,” said John, “when my mother used to brush and +pull my hair at the same time.” +</p> +<p> +“So can I,” said every one of the boys together. +</p> +<p> +“Well, the main thing is,” said Fred philosophically, “that George +Washington had some headquarters and that it’s a good thing for the +United States of America that he did. I wish we had some men now as +great as he was.” +</p> +<p> +“We have,” said John quickly. +</p> +<p> +“We have?” retorted Fred scornfully. “Where are they?” +</p> +<p> +“Eight here,” said John solemnly. “Here are four of them. They haven’t +all arrived yet, but they are on their way.” +</p> +<p> +“Fine lot too,” broke in Grant. “Scared so that they run like deer when +they hear sounds in the old Meeker House and there isn’t one of them +that has shown that he has the nerve to stay there long enough to find +out just what those strange sounds mean.” +</p> +<p> +“We’re not afraid of anything we can see, but it is the things that you +can’t see that scare us,” explained Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Never mind the Meeker House,” said Grant, “I want to take in what this +place means. The old cannon balls, the old guns, and the relics we saw +inside the house,” for the boys had entered the old building and +inspected the various relics of revolutionary times that were on +exhibition, “to say nothing about the old Hudson River itself, and the +hills, ought to satisfy every one of us for a while, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a great sight,” said George. “I’m glad you brought us up here. I +knew Washington’s headquarters were here, but it had slipped my mind +when we first came. I’m getting hungry. Come on back to the hotel and +we’ll have our dinner.” +</p> +<p> +The following morning was unusually warm. The boys were early awake, but +even then the heat was oppressive. +</p> +<p> +“Whew,” said Fred when they left the dining room, “if it’s as hot as +this before we start what will it be afterward?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s just like some people,” declared John. “They aren’t satisfied +with the good or the bad they have, but they are always looking ahead +for more. There’s one thing we don’t have to do.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“We don’t have to swelter before the sun beats down upon us. It will be +plenty of time to see what we have to do if we find it so warm on the +road that we don’t want to go on.” +</p> +<p> +Soon after breakfast the boys started on their homeward ride. +</p> +<p> +True to its promise the heat steadily increased and a glare that was +exceedingly trying to the eyes beat down upon the roadway. +</p> +<p> +George increased the speed at which he was driving, but the air which +fanned their faces was almost like that which comes from a heated oven. +</p> +<p> +Already the cattle in the nearby fields had sought the shade of the +trees in the pastures. The hens in the farmyards also were lying in the +shade, their wings partly extended as if they were trying to cool their +heated bodies. +</p> +<p> +“Hens in hot weather,” said George, “always make me think they are +laughing at us.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” demanded John. “Who ever heard a hen laugh.” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t say I had heard them laugh, but they have their mouths open.” +</p> +<p> +“Hens don’t have mouths, my friend.” +</p> +<p> +“They don’t?” demanded George. “Then how do they eat?” +</p> +<p> +“They have throats and bills and beaks, but they don’t have mouths.” +</p> +<p> +“What is a mouth anyway?” said George scornfully. “Isn’t it the opening +in the head through which one takes food into his stomach?” +</p> +<p> +“I suppose it is.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, doesn’t a hen swallow corn?” +</p> +<p> +“She does.” +</p> +<p> +“Then she has a mouth, hasn’t she?” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute and I’ll tell you. It’s this way, you see—” +</p> +<p> +At that moment there was a loud report directly beneath the car which at +that time was passing under a stone bridge. +</p> +<p> +George instantly stopped the car, but another driver directly in front +of him was so startled by the unexpected sound that he lost control of +his automobile and swung into the ditch, nearly overturning his car as +he did so. Instantly rising from his seat he turned and glared at the Go +Ahead boys as if he was tempted to visit some merited punishment upon +them. +</p> +<p> +The boys, however, were so busy with their own troubles that they +ignored the anger of the driver before them. Instantly leaping from +their seats they began their investigations. +</p> +<p> +Only a brief time, however, was required to disclose the cause of the +trouble. “A blowout,” said George disgustedly. “It’s torn that tube all +into shreds.” +</p> +<p> +“You blew it up too tight,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Thank you,” said George as he took off his coat, “you’re so well +informed about these matters that I think I’ll let you help me put a new +tire on.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVI—ANOTHER LOSS</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +The angry stranger, who by this time had recovered from his surprise, +speedily departed. Indeed, the fact that the boys had had only a slight +conversation with him perhaps increased his anger and as soon as his car +had been pulled from the ditch, a task in which all joined to help, he +soon afterward disappeared from sight. +</p> +<p> +The intense heat soon caused the faces of the boys to be shining with +perspiration. The dust from the road also did its part until in the +streaked countenances of the Go Ahead boys even their own mothers would +have had difficulty in recognizing members of their families. +</p> +<p> +The difficult task and the heat of the day also united in increasing the +irritation of the boys. There were several remarks made which happily +were soon forgotten or ignored. +</p> +<p> +In the midst of the task the jack broke and the wheel dropped upon the +ground. +</p> +<p> +“There you have it!” exclaimed George irritably. “A broken jack! No +tube! Seventeen miles from nowhere and not a crumb to eat!” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind, George,” said John good-naturedly. “Somebody will be coming +along pretty soon and will lend us a hand.” +</p> +<p> +“He will have to lend us a jack, I guess if we ever get anywhere. I +don’t know what is the matter with this thing,” he added as again he +examined the broken implement. +</p> +<p> +“There’s nothing for us to do except wait,” suggested Grant. “Come up +here in the shade, fellows. We’ll have to join that man who is sitting +there.” +</p> +<p> +As Grant spoke he pointed toward a bank or knoll near the roadside where +a man was seen reclining on the ground beneath the shade of some huge +maple trees. +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good suggestion,” declared Fred, and in a brief time the boys +were seated on the ground, enjoying the relief from the heat of the +burning sun. +</p> +<p> +Their only hope now rested upon some friendly driver stopping to aid +them. +</p> +<p> +To the amazement of Fred, as well as of his companions, the man whom +they discovered enjoying the shade was none other than the tramp who had +first been seen in the old Meeker House. +</p> +<p> +He stared a moment at the unexpected sight and then as a grin spread +over the countenance of the man he was convinced that his first +impression had been correct. The tramp of the Meeker House was there +before him. How he had come there, so far from the place where he had +been first seen, was a mystery. +</p> +<p> +“You seem to have had bad luck, my friends,” laughed the tramp, as he +sat erect when the boys approached. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, the day is so hot,” growled George, “that the tube burst. We had a +blowout. We had it blown up too much anyway when we left Newburgh.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you been to Newburgh!” inquired the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” replied George shortly. +</p> +<p> +“Did you find your car?” +</p> +<p> +“No.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s too bad.” If the tramp, however, had any real sympathy for the +boys in their loss his countenance failed to reflect the feeling, for he +was still grinning at his young companions. “Not much use,” he +continued. “There must be seventy-five or a hundred thousand autos in +Jersey alone, and when you stop to think of all that are in New York and +Pennsylvania you will see you stand mighty little chance of ever finding +your own car.” +</p> +<p> +“Thank you,” said George. “You needn’t be worried though, for we are +going to get it.” +</p> +<p> +“What are you doing up here?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why I got to thinking of it last night,” explained the tramp, “after +you boys left home and the more I thought about it the more I thought I +would like to come up into this part of the world too. You haven’t any +objection to my coming?” he added quizzically. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no, not the slightest,” said Fred glibly. “I was just wondering how +a man as weary as you are could have made such good time. You must have +come forty miles or more. How did you do it?” +</p> +<p> +“Part of the way,” replied the tramp, “I came in an empty box-car. I got +a lift with an old man who was taking a load of produce to market and +another man gave me a ride in his automobile. I don’t think I have +walked all together more than half a mile. There’s always somebody that +is good to the halt, the blind, the lame,—” +</p> +<p> +“And the lazy,” joined in Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s right,” said the tramp. “But I’m not to blame for it. I +don’t like to work. It’s the way I was born, and if I don’t like it I +don’t see why I should do it, do you?” +</p> +<p> +“Not as long as some one else is willing to work and get you something +to eat and wear,” suggested George tartly. +</p> +<p> +“I guess you’re right again,” drawled the tramp. “If the time ever comes +when there isn’t anybody to do that for me, then I guess I’ll have to go +to work. But I’m putting it off as long as possible. Hello,” he added +quickly, “there comes a car,” pointing as he spoke toward an automobile +which was swiftly approaching. +</p> +<p> +George ran speedily down to the road and hailed the approaching car. +</p> +<p> +The automobile was stopped as the signal was discovered, and for the +first time George was conscious of his dust-discolored face, for seated +in the back seat was a young girl with her mother. She laughed as she +saw George’s countenance and even her mother’s face could not conceal +the quizzical expression that appeared when George spoke. +</p> +<p> +“We had a blowout here,” explained George, “and when we tried to put on +a new tube our jack broke. Can you help us out?” +</p> +<p> +“Certainly,” said the woman. “James, you help these young gentlemen,” +she added as she turned to her chauffeur. +</p> +<p> +The other boys now turned and offered their assistance to George, +although Grant and John plainly were more interested in the occupants of +the friendly car than they were in the task immediately confronting +them. +</p> +<p> +“There’s no use, boys,” said the chauffeur at last. “That blowout must +have been a big one.” +</p> +<p> +“It was,” spoke up Fred quickly. +</p> +<p> +“It has bent your rim. Yon never can get a new tire on that until it has +been fixed.” +</p> +<p> +“What shall we do?” inquired George blankly. +</p> +<p> +“The best thing I can suggest is for you to get in our car and we will +take you to a good garage about four miles up the road. They will have +to come back here in another car so you won’t have to walk.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a good suggestion,” said George quickly as he prepared to accept +the invitation. +</p> +<p> +His zeal, however was quickly shared by two of his friends, who insisted +that their presence also was required. “You see,” Fred explained, “if +they cannot help us at that garage, why some of us will have to go on to +another. We cannot leave our car here all day in the sun.” +</p> +<p> +John was the only one of the party left behind and as it was deemed +necessary for some one to remain with the car he volunteered for that +service. +</p> +<p> +The task confronting him was not difficult, however, and John soon was +reclining once more in a shaded spot near the tramp who was still seated +in the same place he had first been seen. +</p> +<p> +In spite of John’s efforts to draw the man into conversation the tramp +was strangely silent most of the time. At last, however, his mood +changed and turning to John he said, “Your friends ought to be back here +by this time.” +</p> +<p> +“They may have had trouble in getting a car right away to bring them +back.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, they will be here pretty soon,” said the tramp. “I think I’ll go +up to that orchard up yonder,” he added as he pointed to a hillside +covered with apple trees about one hundred yards distant. +</p> +<p> +“Are there any apples there ripe?” inquired John quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Plenty of them. Plenty of them. The owner doesn’t seem to care anything +about them. He hasn’t sprayed his trees or pruned them for years, but +there are some juicy red apples in the corner of the orchard and they +are mighty good. I know for I have tried them already.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute and I’ll go up with you,” said John. +</p> +<p> +Together they made their way up the side of the hill and John speedily +discovered that the statement of his companion was correct. The ground +beneath the trees was carpeted with a layer of red apples tempting in +their size and appearance. +</p> +<p> +“I think I’ll take back a few for the other fellows,” said John, as he +filled his cap. “I would like to pay for them, but I don’t see anybody +around here.” +</p> +<p> +“Nobody pays for these apples,” explained the tramp. “The owner of the +farm spent a lot of money on his place and then got tired of it and went +back to the city. He left everything here to go to pieces.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a pity,” said John as he climbed over the fence and started back +toward the place where they had left the automobile. +</p> +<p> +“Where is our car?” demanded John in consternation as he drew near the +place from which they had started. +</p> +<p> +In amazement he looked up and down the road, but not a trace of the +automobile was to be seen. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose has happened to that car?” he demanded, again +turning to his companion. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know unless it has evaporated,” said the tramp. “It’s a pretty +hot day.” +</p> +<p> +“Evaporated nothing!” explained John angrily. “The car is gone. I don’t +know what George and the fellows will say. We have lost two cars now +instead of one. I don’t understand how it could have been taken away +without our knowing it.” +</p> +<p> +“That isn’t nearly so important,” suggested the tramp, “as the fact that +it is gone. There isn’t any car here.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVII—LEFT BEHIND</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +“I think the men from the garage may have come and taken the car away,” +suggested the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“That may be the way it is,” said John, relieved by the suggestion. A +moment later, however, the thought occurred to him that in the event of +the return of the boys with a man from the garage, in all probability +some of them would have remained and not all have gone back with him. In +that case his companions must be near, but as he looked up and down the +road he did not discover any trace of his friends. +</p> +<p> +“They will be back here by and by,” said the tramp encouragingly. “It +won’t take very long to straighten that rim and put on a new shoe. The +best thing for you to do is to stay right here until they come.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see much else to do,” said John, still far from being persuaded +that an explanation of the missing car was to be found in the suggestion +made by his strange companion. “I guess I’ll just have to wait.” +</p> +<p> +“If you do, then you might as well wait comfortably.” As he spoke the +tramp again sought the shaded place on the bank above the road, and +seated on the ground, with his back against a tree, he at once began to +feast upon the apples he had brought from the orchard. +</p> +<p> +Following his example John speedily climbed the little knoll and quickly +seated himself in a similar manner against a nearby tree. +</p> +<p> +“We can see up and down the road here,” said the tramp, “and if your +friends come you’ll know it long before they are here.” +</p> +<p> +For some reason John lost his desire to talk to the strange man. He was +continually looking up the road in the direction in which the boys had +disappeared when they had departed in the friendly car. A half-hour +passed and only two automobiles were seen on the dusty road. The heat +seemed to increase as the noon-hour approached. There was no habitation +within sight at which a luncheon might be obtained and John now began to +feel hungry as well as anxious. +</p> +<p> +He was by no means satisfied that George’s car had been taken to the +garage by the boys. Indeed, his fear that the second car had been stolen +was steadily increasing and he was blaming himself, as not unnaturally +he believed George would blame him if the car had indeed been taken. +</p> +<p> +When an hour had passed a car was seen approaching which the tramp +quickly declared belonged to a garage in a neighboring village. “I know +that car,” he said confidently, “for I have worked in that shop.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know anything about automobiles?” demanded John quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Not very much, but then one doesn’t have to know very much to work in a +place like that. I used to look wise and hammer a lot and then charge +still more. I have made up my mind that if ever I have to work again I’m +going to find a job in an automobile shop. The hardest thing you have to +do is to make out your bills.” +</p> +<p> +“That may be so,” said John, smiling as he spoke, “though I hope it +won’t prove to be the case this time. There are the boys in that car,” +he added quickly, as he recognized his three friends approaching. The +car was driven by a man in his shirt sleeves and the speed at which he +was moving proclaimed the fact that either he was an expert driver or +one of the most reckless of men. +</p> +<p> +A few minutes later the automobile was stopped in front of John, who now +ran down into the road to greet the returning boys. +</p> +<p> +“Where’s the car, Jack?” inquired Grant quickly. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“You don’t know! Weren’t you here in charge of it?” +</p> +<p> +“I have been here all the time except about five minutes when I went up +into the orchard yonder and got some apples. When I came back the car +was gone. This man,” he added, pointing to the tramp as he spoke, “said +he thought you had come from the garage and taken the car back with +you.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew!” whistled Fred. “This is getting exciting. First you lose one car +and then you lose another. I think we’ll have to go back to the old +Meeker House and look for its ghost.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anything funny in this,” said Grant in disgust. “Here we +are at least four miles from the railroad. We know how hot and dusty the +road is and we don’t want—” +</p> +<p> +“You fellows are a sympathetic crowd,” broke in George. “You’re thinking +about your own comfort all the while and not a word about my losses. +It’s bad enough to have one car stolen to say nothing of two.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you think this second car has been stolen?” demanded Fred abruptly, +turning upon his friend as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s gone, isn’t it?” said George. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, it’s gone,” admitted Fred, “but that doesn’t mean it has been +stolen.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, tell me what has become of it then? Where is it? Show me the +car.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t do it,” said Fred. “I wish I could. But I don’t believe that +car has been stolen.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you think?” demanded George, turning to the mechanic as he +spoke. +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t heard of a car being stolen up here in a long time, and I +don’t see how anybody could have taken that car away without being seen +if he was trying to steal it.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all true enough,” said George angrily. “I know all those things, +but tell me if you can where my car is. I don’t see how anybody could +have taken it away from here with the shoe being in the condition that +it was. I never saw such a blowout in my life.” +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps we can track it,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“That’s right. That’s just what we can do,” said George eagerly. “Look +here,” he added, as he pointed to a place near the road where the +imprint of the mutilated tire plainly could be seen. +</p> +<p> +It was possible to follow this track a few yards, but there the trail +ceased, the car apparently had been brought up again on the hard roadbed +and no trace was left of its passage. +</p> +<p> +“What’s become of your tramp?” demanded George, suddenly turning upon +John. +</p> +<p> +All four boys quickly looked about them, but the tramp had disappeared +from sight. +</p> +<p> +“That’s one of the strangest things I ever heard of,” said Fred. “That +tramp knew how you lost the other car and I guess he could tell some +things about this one too, if he wanted to.” +</p> +<p> +“He was with me all the time,” spoke up John quickly. “I never lost +sight of him a minute.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a pity you didn’t do as well with the car,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“Well, the tramp and I went up into the orchard together. We were +together all the while we were there and we came back together. When we +got back here we saw that the car was gone. The tramp was here. Now will +you please tell me how a tramp could steal an automobile and still be +with me all the while?” +</p> +<p> +“What do you think is the best thing for us to do?” said George, turning +to the mechanic. +</p> +<p> +“Your car isn’t here,” said the man, “and you could track it a little +way, far enough to see that it was taken in that direction,” he +explained as he pointed ahead of him. “Now that’s right on the way back +to the garage and my advice is for all four of you to get into the car +and we’ll see what we can find on the way back. If you don’t find +anything we can telephone when you get into the village, or you can +leave on the train. There’s one out in about an hour and a half.” +</p> +<p> +The suggestion finally was adopted and all four boys maintained a +careful outlook for the missing car throughout their ride to the garage. +However no trace of the missing automobile was discovered. The car had +disappeared and the boys were stranded in a little village in northern +New Jersey. +</p> +<p> +Leaving his companions, George telephoned his father. The conversation +lasted several minutes and when at last George rejoined his friends he +said glumly, “My father says the best thing for us to do is to come home +by train. He told us to look out and not lose the train.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess,” laughed Grant, “it would be a little more expensive for him +if we should lose the train than to have us lose the cars.” +</p> +<p> +“If we keep this up much longer,” said Fred, “we’ll have a good big bill +to pay. I never knew anybody in my life that ever had a car stolen and +here we lose two inside of a week.” +</p> +<p> +“You must remember,” said John soberly, “that we are the Go Ahead boys. +It doesn’t make any difference what we start in we have got to leave the +rest of them behind us. If it’s looking for smugglers or digging for a +pirate’s chest or having our automobiles stolen, it doesn’t make a +particle of difference which, we are bound to go ahead, get ahead and +keep ahead.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m glad to hear you talk that way,” said George grimly. “I have been +looking in my pockets to see if I have money enough to get a ticket +home. Have any of you got money?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll take up a collection,” suggested John, seizing his cap as he +spoke. The result of his efforts, however, when the sum was counted, was +not quite sufficient to purchase the tickets required by the four boys +on their return trip. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see anything for us to do,” said Fred glibly, “except to leave +String here. He’s the one who is responsible for the loss of the car +to-day and if anybody has to stay behind I think he ought to be the +one.” +</p> +<p> +“I agree with you,” said John meekly. “I’m willing to stay, for I +confess I would like to find out what has become of that lost car.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII—THE ARRIVAL</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +In spite of the protests of the other boys against John being left +behind, it was finally decided that he should carry out his own plan. He +had declared his purpose to find out if possible what had become of the +second car. +</p> +<p> +George had insisted that all four of the Go Ahead boys either should +remain together or depart in a body; but after a brief conversation in +which John explained that he really was desirous of making some further +investigations of his own and also that it was equally important for +George to get into touch with his father, as he could not do over the +telephone, it was agreed that John should remain until the following +day. A very attractive hotel not far from the station was most inviting. +There John explained he would remain until the following day when the +boys either would come for him or send him money. +</p> +<p> +Only a few moments elapsed before the noisy train proclaimed its coming. +The scream of the locomotive was echoed and re-echoed in the nearby +valley and long before its arrival at the station the people of the +little village were aware that the one o’clock train was “on time.” +</p> +<p> +Again George protested strongly against John being left behind, although +he did not explain how he was to ride on the train without a ticket nor +how he was to obtain a ticket without any money. However, in a few +minutes the three departing boys, standing on the rear platform of the +last car, were waving their hats as they bade good-by to the fourth +member of the Go Ahead boys who was watching them from the platform of +the station. +</p> +<p> +Slowly John turned into the walk that led him from the little station to +the main street of the village. As he came out upon the sidewalk he was +startled when he heard himself addressed by his own name. Surprised, he +glanced in the direction from which the unexpected hail had come and he +was amazed to behold the tramp, who had been his companion in the +morning, now seated in the missing automobile. Evidently he had been +driving the car but the expression on his face as John ran toward him +did not indicate his purpose to explain the sight which had so startled +him. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you get that car?” demanded John sharply as he stared at the +driver. +</p> +<p> +“I found it at the other garage,” explained the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“How did it get there?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, there was another blowout right near where you had yours this +morning. I guess it must be the same fellow that you scared or drove +into a ditch; at least that’s what he said. He couldn’t fix his car +because the rim was torn into pieces and he got a lift back to this +garage and sent some men out to get his car.” +</p> +<p> +“And they got ours?” demanded John delightedly. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what it seems,” replied the tramp quietly. “I suspected there +might be some trouble of the kind so I went around there and sure enough +I found this car just as I half expected to. Your friends have cleared +out and left you, have they?” +</p> +<p> +“They have gone back home,” explained John. +</p> +<p> +“Well, that’s all right. We’ll beat them there yet. You get in and I’ll +see what time I can make.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re sure you know how to drive?” inquired John. “Because if you +don’t know how I can do something at it myself.” +</p> +<p> +“My ‘deah boy,’” lisped the tramp, “don’t distress your little heart +about my being able to drive the car. You get in here and if you have +any fault to find I’ll resign and let you take the wheel.” +</p> +<p> +“We ought to have something to eat,” said John, “but I haven’t a cent of +money.” +</p> +<p> +“So I understand. It took all the money there was in the crowd to buy +tickets for three boys.” +</p> +<p> +“How did you know?” +</p> +<p> +“Never mind that. I knew you didn’t have any money and I knew too that I +would have to furnish what we needed on our trip. I managed to get +together twenty-three cents. I think that’s just the amount one ought to +have when he is leaving in a hurry, don’t you?” laughed the tramp. +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I took my twenty-three cents and went over to the grocery store +and I bought some cheese and a box of crackers. You get in and feed up +on the way back. If you’re like me you’ll think you’ve had a dinner fit +for a king.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke the tramp held up to view the purchases he had made and John +instantly responded to his appeal and took his seat in front beside the +driver. The hungry boy declared that he never had tasted food he enjoyed +more. Meanwhile the car was driven steadily forward on its way. And if +John had had any misgivings as to the ability of his companion as a +driver they were soon dispelled. It was plain that the man was an expert +at his task. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you learn to drive a car?” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t have to learn,” said the tramp. “I always knew. I have driven +cars ever since they were first made. If I need any money I get a job as +a chauffeur and then after I have got some money I don’t need any job +and quit.” +</p> +<p> +John laughed as he said, “You’re the strangest man I ever saw.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what others have told me.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see why a man with the brains you have doesn’t do something +worth while. What do you want to be beating around the country for +without any home and staying nights in such places as the old Meeker +House?” +</p> +<p> +“I have often wondered myself,” replied the tramp quietly. “I don’t know +that there’s any answer to your question. Speaking of the old Meeker +House, have you heard anything more about the strange noises over +there?” +</p> +<p> +“Not since I saw you,” replied John. +</p> +<p> +“Well, my advice to you is to take your friends over there to-night and +I suspect you’ll have an experience that will interest you.” +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” demanded John, interested at once. +</p> +<p> +“I’m not sure just what it will be so I cannot explain, but if you want +to see your friends stirred up you take them over there after you have +had your dinner to-night. By the way, do you think there will be any +reward for finding this car?” +</p> +<p> +“Knowing Mr. Sanders as I do, I’m quite sure there will be.” +</p> +<p> +“I have brought the bill in my pocket for the repairs at the garage.” +</p> +<p> +“How much did they charge?” +</p> +<p> +“Fifty-three cents and the man apologized for the size of his bill. +That’s one of the things they haven’t learned up here in the country +yet.” +</p> +<p> +“I have never found any one who didn’t know how to charge,” laughed +John. +</p> +<p> +“Well, this man didn’t seem to know much about it, so I paid his bill +and had just twenty-three cents left, as I told you. I think if Mr. +Sanders wants to pay that bill I shall let him.” +</p> +<p> +“I certainly know he will,” said John. “I know he will insist upon it +anyway for he’s that kind of a man.” +</p> +<p> +The automobile was making most excellent time and long before it was +possible for his companions to arrive John had turned into the driveway +that led to George’s home. +</p> +<p> +The tramp had insisted upon leaving the car before it had turned in, +explaining that he would return when Mr. Sanders came and if the latter +“sufficiently urged” him to accept a reward he would do so willingly. +</p> +<p> +John laughed as the strange man departed and then drove up to the house. +</p> +<p> +Uncle Sim was the first to greet him and after staring blankly at John +for a moment he said, “Whar de other boys?” +</p> +<p> +“They are coming later,” said John. “They are coming on the train.” +</p> +<p> +“Wha’ fo’?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, they will have to tell you,” said John. “Just as soon as I can wash +up I want to go over to the station and bring them home. They’ll come in +probably on the next train.” +</p> +<p> +True to his word a half-hour later John was waiting in the automobile +near the station. He had pictured to himself the excitement of his +friends when they should arrive and discover him in the lost automobile, +awaiting their coming. +</p> +<p> +John’s meditations were interrupted by the prolonged blast by which the +coming of the train was made known. So pleased was he over the prospect +that he laughed aloud. The arrival of the train, however, soon caused +him to watch the alighting passengers and as soon as he discovered his +friends among the number, in his loudest tones he shouted, “George, tell +all the Go Ahead boys to come over here!” +</p> +<p> +Startled by the unexpected hail the three boys turned and for a moment +stared blankly at John. All the latter’s hopes were more than fulfilled. +Surprise and incredulity were stamped upon the faces of the three Go +Ahead boys. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you get that car?” demanded George, hastily approaching. +</p> +<p> +“Why, it is your car, isn’t it?” said John meekly. +</p> +<p> +“Sure it is, but where did you get it?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, after you fellows left me over there where you took the train I +thought you would like to have me look up your car, so that’s what I +have done, but you don’t seem to be very thankful. This is an ungrateful +world, and a naughty deed arouses more interest than a good one. At +least I think that’s what Shakespeare says.” +</p> +<p> +“Shakespeare?” broke in Fred sharply. “You never got as far as the title +page.” +</p> +<p> +“That may all be,” retorted John. “All I mean to say now is that this +car is for the exclusive use of those who are accustomed to move in +polite society.” As he spoke John turned on the power and despite the +efforts of his friends to overtake him soon was moving rapidly over the +road. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XIX—AN INVITATION</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Appearing to ignore his friends John drove rapidly around the circle +which had been laid out between the station and the main street. Proudly +returning to the place on the platform where his friends were awaiting +his coming, he called out, “How’s this car? How’s the driver? Pretty +slick, eh?” +</p> +<p> +“What we don’t know,” said George quickly, “is where the driver came +from and how he got the car.” +</p> +<p> +“You’ll have to trust your Uncle John for some things,” replied the +driver solemnly. “There are some things you can’t explain and some +things it’s hard for certain people to understand. You see that your +car’s here, don’t you?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“It’s all right, isn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“As far as I can see.” +</p> +<p> +“Cylinders all sound? Tires all complete? Boiler intact? Carbureter +still working? Limousine all ready to be carved?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said George, laughing as he spoke. “As far as I can see +everything is all straight except the fact that you didn’t tell us how +you got the car and beat us back here.” +</p> +<p> +“Get in, fellows, and I’ll tell you about it on the way back,” said +John. “I’ll resign my position as chauffeur too,” he added, as he +quickly moved to another seat. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t mind; stay where you are,” said George cordially. +</p> +<p> +“No, I know you don’t ‘mind,’ but this is a hot day. I would rather sit +behind and tell you how to do it.” +</p> +<p> +“All right then, I’ll go ahead,” said George, as he started the car. +“Tell us how you did it.” +</p> +<p> +“I have already explained to the best of my ability,” said John soberly. +</p> +<p> +“Tell us again, then,” broke in Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Why, all there is to it is that after you fellows left I looked around +for the car and found it.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you find it alone?” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean,—was I the only one that found it, or do you mean that +I found the car all by itself?” +</p> +<p> +“My, how correct some fellows are in their talk,” murmured Fred. “Yes, +what I mean was were you all alone when you found the car?” +</p> +<p> +“No.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, why don’t you tell us who was with you?” demanded Grant +irritably. +</p> +<p> +“The tramp,” said John abruptly. +</p> +<p> +“The tramp!” repeated the boys together. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I said.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell us about it,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“Why, after you fellows cleared out and left me behind, for you remember +that you took all the tickets there were and left me up there sans +money, sans ticket, sans everything, as Shakespeare says—” +</p> +<p> +“We don’t remember anything of the kind,” interrupted George. “We tried +to get you to come along.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, you did!” laughed John scornfully. “You tried hard. You had just +money enough to buy three tickets and I was generous enough to say that +I would let you three fellows use them—” +</p> +<p> +“Go on with your story about the tramp,” interrupted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’ll tell you the truth,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“Hope it won’t make you too tired,” murmured Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I’m telling you the truth,” said John, glaring at his diminutive +companion as he spoke. “The train hadn’t fairly gotten out of sight with +you fellows on board before up comes the tramp, driving this car. He +came right up to the platform of the station and invited me to get on +board. You may be sure I didn’t stand on the form, or likewise on the +platform, very long.” +</p> +<p> +“Where did he get it?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“He suspected what had happened,” explained John, “and he said he went +to another garage, hoping that there had been some mistake. He said +there were two cars in trouble out there on the road, one besides ours. +The men that came out from the shop made a mistake and I guess each car +was taken to the wrong garage.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a pretty good story,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s all right,” declared John warmly. “Here’s your car anyway. +The tramp brought it, just as I’m telling you, and you haven’t anything +to say about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe the tramp took the car and got scared when he saw us start off. +Probably he thought we were going for help.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably nothing!” exclaimed John disgustedly. “I tell you that tramp +is all right. He can speak the English language and he has got some +brains. I asked him to-day what he was tramping around the country for +and he said he didn’t know.” +</p> +<p> +“He must have a lot of brains,” ejaculated Fred. +</p> +<p> +“He knows how to drive a car all right,” said John. “He drove all the +way home.” +</p> +<p> +“Where is he now?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. He wouldn’t stay. By the way, he did suggest before he +departed that if there was any reward connected with the finding of the +car he wouldn’t mind taking it.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably he wouldn’t,” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“I think he is entitled to something,” said George, “and I’ll tell my +father about it the first time he comes out.” +</p> +<p> +“Where did the tramp go?” +</p> +<p> +“He didn’t tell me,” explained John, “but I think he went over to the +old Meeker House. He said that if we wanted to see something worth while +and something that would beat anything we had ever experienced in the +old Meeker House we had better come over there after dinner.” +</p> +<p> +“To-night?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, to-night.” +</p> +<p> +“I say we go,” said Grant quickly. +</p> +<p> +“So say we all,” added George. +</p> +<p> +In a brief time the car was running swiftly up the driveway of the yard +and as soon as his companions alighted George took it to the garage. +</p> +<p> +The other missing car, however, had not been returned nor had any word +been received concerning it during the absence of the boys. +</p> +<p> +A call on the telephone speedily demanded George’s attention and as soon +as he rejoined his friends he said, “I have been talking to my father.” +</p> +<p> +“You mean your father has been talking to you,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +Ignoring the interruption, George continued, “My father says that he has +word of a car that is being held in Morristown. In some ways it answers +the description of ours. He thinks it will be a good thing for us to go +there to-morrow and find out more about it.” +</p> +<p> +“Good plan. Good scheme,” said Fred sympathetically. “Did your father +say anything about suitably rewarding the tramp for his return of the +car which he probably had all the while?” +</p> +<p> +“He did,” said George simply. “He told me to give him a ten dollar +bill.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” said Fred eagerly. “Now I think it will be a good +thing for each of us to take his turn, too,” he added. “Every one of us +can take that car off and hide it over night and get ten dollars reward +when he brings it back in the morning. That’s all your friend Mr. Tramp +did.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s no such thing!” spoke up John, quick to defend his recent +acquaintance. +</p> +<p> +“You may have it your own way,” laughed Fred. “Then we’re to go over and +call on him to-night at the old Meeker House, are we?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what we are going to do,” said John. +</p> +<p> +True to the suggestion, soon after sunset the Go Ahead boys rode to the +mysterious house. When they left their car by the roadside and started +across the intervening field it was plain that there was an air of +greater confidence now manifest by all four boys than in any previous +visit. +</p> +<p> +The moon already had risen and in its clear light the old apple trees +and the poplars that lined the driveway appeared like aged sentinels, +twisted and gnarled. Indeed, some of the objects assumed fantastic forms +and as the boys advanced, a silence not unlike that which had rested +upon them in their former visits now fell over the party. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll tell you one thing,” spoke up Fred in a loud whisper; “I’m going +with George around to the kitchen this trip.” +</p> +<p> +“I haven’t invited you,” replied George promptly. +</p> +<p> +“It doesn’t make any difference whether you have or not, I’m going just +the same,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Then I shall have to put up with it,” responded George in mock +resignation. “All I can say to the rest of you is that whatever you do +don’t run. Let’s find out what this thing means this time. Do you +agree?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, we agree,” replied his friends. +</p> +<p> +“Good,” responded George. “Now don’t forget.” +</p> +<p> +The boys at once separated, George and Fred moving around to the rear of +the house while John and Grant approached the front door, which already +was a familiar sight. +</p> +<p> +Without waiting for their companions to enter they at once pushed open +the door, which creaked on its rusty hinges, producing sounds not unlike +the cry of a child in distress. +</p> +<p> +Inside the room there again was the sound of many rushing wings. Indeed, +for a moment, to the boys, who were startled in spite of their +determination to be calm, the room seemed to be filled with flying +creatures. Weird sounds also were heard and low spoken cries that were +not unlike the creaking of the hinges of the old door. +</p> +<p> +In spite of their recently expressed courage both boys stopped as if by +common consent. As they did so the sound of voices, speaking in +whispers, was heard from other parts of the house. No person, however, +was visible and in the dim light that penetrated the room neither of the +boys was able to see any object distinctly. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile the flapping of the unseen wings continued. Suddenly there was +a flash of light that was almost blinding. It was so unexpected that +both boys together and almost instantly turned toward the door. A cloud +of smoke swept through the room and both boys, coughing and choking, +instantly turned and fled from the house. Their speed increased as there +came sounds of loud laughter from within the ancient dwelling. Unmindful +of their promise not to run, both boys instantly turned and quickly were +making most excellent time across the field in the direction of the +automobile, which still could be seen in the open road. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XX—THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +When John and Grant climbed into their seats in the waiting automobile +both were nearly breathless. Before either of them spoke there came +another loud burst of laughter from the house of mystery, and a moment +later Fred and George were seen approaching. Both were running but +neither apparently had been as greatly alarmed by the occurrences in the +old Meeker House as had their two friends. +</p> +<p> +“I thought you fellows were not going to run,” said Fred as he seated +himself. +</p> +<p> +“We thought the place was being bombarded,” explained John. “I noticed +that you didn’t stay very long either.” +</p> +<p> +“We had to come out and find what had made you fellows run so fast,” +said George. +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” said John. “I’m willing to go back there now if you +are.” +</p> +<p> +Fred hesitated a moment, but as George had now seated himself and the +car was under motion and there was slight prospect of turning back, in +his boldest tones he said, “I’m perfectly willing to go back. I wasn’t +scared to-night anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“Come on, then,” said John, rising as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +George, however, ignored the conversation and increasing the speed at +which the car was moving soon left the corner far behind him. +</p> +<p> +When the Go Ahead boys arrived at the farmhouse neither John nor Grant +had much to say concerning their recent experience. The blinding flash +which they described had been seen also by their companions, but both +George and Fred declared that they had not been frightened by the +unexpected occurrence. +</p> +<p> +There was no possibility of denying the fact that John and Grant had +fled much more precipitately than had their companions, although there +had been no great difference in the time of their return to the waiting +automobile. +</p> +<p> +For some reason conversation flagged and not many references were made +to the mysteries of the old Meeker House which still were unexplained. +</p> +<p> +“To-morrow morning,” said George, “you understand that we are to go to +Morristown. Are we all going?” +</p> +<p> +“We are,” replied his friends together. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t know but John would like to stay behind and make some further +investigations,” laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“No, sir. I’m not going to be left this time,” explained John. “I want +to see Morristown. I have heard so much about the place that I want to +see it for myself.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s well worth seeing,” said George. +</p> +<p> +The following morning directly after breakfast, the Go Ahead boys were +speeding swiftly toward the beautiful Jersey town which was to be their +destination. The ride across the rolling country, with its frequent +streams and hills and villages, was most attractive. Many beautiful +homes, erected by the people of the great city beyond the borders of the +state, added much to the beauty of the scenery. +</p> +<p> +However, the enthusiasm of the boys reached its highest point when at +last they arrived at Morristown. The combination of age with the best +that the thought of modern times could accomplish in the architecture of +the houses was most impressive. Beautiful homes, many of which had +extensive lawns and shade trees and the many evidences of thrift and +prosperity to be seen on every side, were most attractive. +</p> +<p> +The first duty of the boys, however, was to visit the garage to which +they had been directed by George’s father. Here, however, again their +efforts proved unavailing. The missing car was not found. An automobile +of the same make and concerning which there was some question of +ownership was still in the garage, but the Go Ahead boys speedily +decided that they had no claim to its possession. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe we’ll ever find the car,” said Fred despondently when +the boys departed from the garage. +</p> +<p> +“I guess you have forgotten our name,” suggested John. “We are the Go +Ahead boys, not the Give Up boys.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” spoke up George, “but just now I am going to show +you some of the sights of this old historic town.” +</p> +<p> +“Did Washington sleep here?” inquired Fred demurely. +</p> +<p> +“He lived here for a while,” explained George, “but the British tried to +find out whether he was asleep or not. They never found him asleep.” +</p> +<p> +“Still I suppose he did sleep sometimes.” +</p> +<p> +“When was he here?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, don’t you know the history of your own country?” spoke up Fred. +“Washington came here after the battle of Princeton. That winter was a +hard one for the little colonial army. People have talked about Valley +Forge just as if there wasn’t as much suffering at Morristown. I don’t +know why it is that people start on one line and then forget there are +any others.” +</p> +<p> +“He was here twice,” explained Grant. “That winter of ’77 and ’78 and +then too in the winter of ’78 and ’79.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said George. “The house which is called Washington’s Headquarters +is where he lived during his second winter. I’m going to take you +first,” he added, “out to Washington Valley. That’s where the most of +the soldiers camped.” +</p> +<p> +In a brief time the Go Ahead boys gained the summit of the hill from +which they were able to look down upon the marvelously beautiful valley +before them. It was like a great bowl among the hills. The rich and +cultivated fields and beautiful homes on the hillsides and the nature of +the place itself combined to make a most beautiful as well as +interesting picture. +</p> +<p> +“It looks almost as if it was built for an army to hide in,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“They were pretty well protected here,” explained George. “You see, the +hills were as good as forts. Now we’ll go back to Washington’s +headquarters,” he added, as he turned around and started once more back +toward Morristown. +</p> +<p> +Not far from the public square the boys found the famous building. Built +of brick and covered with boards and shingles, its sides painted white, +it produced not merely an impression of age, but also of freshness as +well. +</p> +<p> +“Then this is where the father of his country stayed, is it?” said Fred. +“Just look at this picture,” he added as he pointed toward the house and +then turned around to George and said, “then look at this. We have +fallen from that to this, Washington was the father of his country and +G. Washington Sanders is just ‘Pop’.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” replied George, joining in the laugh of his friends. +“I’ll admit that Pop isn’t the biggest word in the language any more +than Pyg is.” +</p> +<p> +“Quit this,” demanded Grant. “We’re going into the old house and you +will have to behave yourselves.” +</p> +<p> +The visit proved to be most interesting. Many articles that had been +used when Washington was living in the house and many more which had +been contributed were on exhibition. Indeed, as the boys passed from +room to room they became more subdued in their manner, for somehow the +knowledge that they were looking upon the same sights that had greeted +the great commander had produced a marked effect. Even the old cannon on +the lawn and the piles of cannon balls had stories of their own. +</p> +<p> +The silence, however, was broken when the boys resumed their seats in +the automobile. +</p> +<p> +“I wonder why Washington stayed so far away from his army,” suggested +John. +</p> +<p> +“He had a body guard here all the time,” explained Grant. “There were +about two hundred and fifty men stationed here. They used to call them +the life guard.” +</p> +<p> +“What did they do?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“It was a special guard to protect General Washington. You see the red +coats and Hessians, as I told you, tried a good many times to catch +Washington asleep. Sometimes they crossed over from Staten Island and +came up through Springfield, trying to catch the ‘old fox’ off his +guard. But the people all through the country knew just what to do. They +had guns or little cannon mounted on several of the hills and whenever +word came that the redcoats were coming the boys fired one cannon and +that would be heard by other people and the guns on the other hills +would be fired too so that the soldiers at Morristown knew long before +the British could arrive that they were trying to advance.” +</p> +<p> +“But they never got him,” said Fred gleefully. +</p> +<p> +“It wasn’t because they didn’t try hard enough,” laughed George. “My +grandfather used to tell me that when the soldiers at Morristown heard +the ‘old sow,’ which was the name of one of the guns, they understood +right away that there was danger of an attack. Everything in the old +house was shut up except the windows, and then five of the continentals +took their stand at every window and were ready to fire upon any one +that came near the place.” +</p> +<p> +“I would like to have seen Washington,” said John thoughtfully. +</p> +<p> +“They say,” said George, “that he was about as tall as you are, String, +but he had some breadth and thickness as well as length. He weighed +about two hundred pounds. All the time he was at Morristown he was very +quiet. I fancy he was worried all the while. That didn’t prevent him +from being very strict with his soldiers, however. He issued an order +that there should be no gambling or swearing, that nobody should be +permitted to do any stunts on Sunday, and the men who disobeyed didn’t +forget the lesson taught them.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, what did Washington do?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“He had guilty soldiers whipped in the presence of their companies. A +man would be tied up to a tree and then the drummers or fifers would +have to lash him. Sometimes they got forty blows, sometimes more. One +time a soldier who had disobeyed orders about poaching and had stolen a +pig from a poor farmer was reported to the commander. Washington had him +whipped with more than a double dose. They say that the men did not make +any complaint though, and even when they were going through the +performance every man used to take a lead cartridge between his teeth +and bite hard on it whenever he was struck a blow.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s one reason why Washington was so popular,” suggested +John thoughtfully. +</p> +<p> +“It’s an easy way to become popular,” laughed Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Never you mind,” retorted George. “You know just as well as I do that +no fellow likes a teacher that is not strict. My father says that the +man or boy who tries to be popular never is.” +</p> +<p> +“And your father is dead right too,” said Grant quickly, turning to his +friend. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir, he’s all right,” responded John. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXI—AN EXPLANATION IN PART</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +It was the middle of the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys returned to +George’s home. Apparently they had not been cast down by their failure +to obtain information concerning the missing car. Indeed, as one of the +boys laughingly remarked, George was the only one deeply and personally +concerned in the loss and if he did not feel discouraged there certainly +was no reason why his friends should be despondent. +</p> +<p> +On the broad piazza of the old farmhouse the boys sat for a half-hour +talking over the experiences of the day. Different suggestions were made +as to possible plans that might be adopted in the search for the stolen +automobile. +</p> +<p> +“I’m not thinking so much about the car as I am about what we saw to-day +at Morristown,” said Grant thoughtfully. “I feel almost as if I had +stepped right back into the eighteenth century.” +</p> +<p> +“My friend,” said Fred soberly, “that is where you belong. I have often +been puzzled to know how to account for some of the strange traits of +your peculiar personality. You have hit the nail now squarely on the +head. You have been born one hundred and forty years too late. You are a +rare old antique.” +</p> +<p> +The boys laughed as Grant arose from his seat and lifting his diminutive +friend bodily from the chair in which he was seated, he dropped him over +the rail. +</p> +<p> +“When you grow up,” he called, “and learn to behave you may come back +here.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m not coming back,” called Fred glibly. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll try to live through our disappointment,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“You’ll be disappointed all right the next time you see me,” called +Fred. Then turning to John he eagerly beckoned to him to follow him. +</p> +<p> +With a groan John slowly arose from the chair in which he was seated and +followed Fred as he led the way around the corner of the house. +</p> +<p> +“What I want of you,” said Fred when he and his companion could not be +seen by the other boys, “is to go with me over to the Meeker House. I +think I have found something.” +</p> +<p> +“Is it the same thing you found last night?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Not at all. I don’t mind telling you that I have fixed a trap over +there.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean, a steel trap?” +</p> +<p> +“No, no,” said Fred. “I sprinkled some bran last night all around the +floor. I filled my pockets with it before we started and while we were +in the old house I scattered it on the floors. Now, I want to go over +there to find out if—” +</p> +<p> +“If what?” interrupted John. “Are you trying to feed those spooks on +bran?” +</p> +<p> +“As usual, my friend,” retorted Fred, “you begin at the wrong end. I am +not trying to get an impression of their heads, but of their feet. Only, +spooks don’t make a deep impression when they step on the floor, and I’m +more than suspicious that I’ll find some tracks.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll go with you,” said John eagerly. “Wait until I tell the other +fellows that we are going away for a while. Are you going to walk, +Fred?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, I am. I have been riding all day and I want to stretch my +muscles.” +</p> +<p> +Both George and Grant laughed when John told them that he and Fred were +going for a walk. +</p> +<p> +“You’ll walk in one direction,” called George, “but you’ll be running +when you come back. I think I’ll take the car and in a half an hour I’ll +come over after you. You’ll want to see some of your friends by that +time and you will want to see them bad.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t want to see them ‘bad,’” retorted John as he turned away. “They +are ‘bad’ enough as it is. I want to see them badly.” +</p> +<p> +Together the two boys walked through the woods and across the lots and +by a shorter route than the highway arrived within a half-hour in the +yard of the house they were seeking. +</p> +<p> +“Come around to the kitchen,” said Fred. Almost unconsciously he had +lowered his voice and although it was still daylight he was glancing +nervously about him when he and John softly opened the rear door and +stepped within the kitchen. +</p> +<p> +The boards of the floor were twisted and uneven. The floor was of pine +and George had explained that his father had said that he believed the +floor was as old as any part of the house. There were marks of the +places where the women of another generation had scrubbed the floor. +Doubtless it had been their pride to keep the pine boards clean, just as +it is a source of pride to many of their sisters of a later day to be +adorned with feathers of various gaudy colors. +</p> +<p> +Noiselessly the boys advanced and without a word having been spoken +began to examine the floor where Fred had scattered the bran the +preceding evening. No footprints were found, however, and it was +speedily plain that if any one had entered the building since the boys +had departed they had not done so by the kitchen door. +</p> +<p> +Convinced that they were alone in the house, the courage of both boys +somewhat revived. Indeed there was something in the sunshine of the +summer afternoon and in the not unmusical sounds of the winged +grasshoppers in the adjacent orchard that was soothing to the excited +boys. +</p> +<p> +They were about to pass out of the room when John abruptly stopped and +whispered, “Look here, Fred. What’s that?” As he spoke he pointed to a +small tube which plainly had been fastened recently to the wall. The +tube was of tin, about an inch in diameter and extended almost to the +ceiling. Through the wall a hole had been made and the boys peered +eagerly at the wall in the adjacent room to see whether or not the tube +was there also. +</p> +<p> +“That’s just how it is! That’s good, String!” exclaimed Fred excitedly. +“That explains the sound of the voices we heard the other night.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see how it explains it,” said John, somewhat puzzled by the +excitement of his companion. +</p> +<p> +“Why, it’s a speaking tube. You go back to the kitchen and I’ll stay +here and we’ll try it.” +</p> +<p> +The suggestion was quickly adopted and in a brief time both boys were +aware that Fred’s conjecture was correct. The strange sounds and the +whispers of their names which had been heard frequently whenever they +had visited the house after darkness had fallen, now were explained. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the reason,” said John eagerly, “why George always wants to come +around to the kitchen door. Don’t you remember he hasn’t once come in by +the front door?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” responded Fred. “He knows more about what is going on in +this old house than he has let on, and all the time he has been +pretending that he was puzzled as much as we are by what we have seen +and heard. We must think up something so that we can pay him back in his +own coin.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what we’ll do,” said John eagerly. “What shall it be?” +</p> +<p> +“Time enough to think about that later,” responded Fred. “What’s that?” +he added abruptly. +</p> +<p> +From within the chimney could be heard the sound as of a man swinging a +noisy rattle. There were also sharp noises that sometimes were quite +loud and at others were low and soft and yet they were continuously +sounding. +</p> +<p> +“I tell you there’s something in that chimney,” said John. +</p> +<p> +“I begin to think you’re right,” whispered Fred. “Get down on your knees +and look up through the fireplace.” +</p> +<p> +John obediently stretched his long form upon the floor and peered up +through the flue of the open fireplace. As he did so the clatter in the +chimney suddenly increased in volume and for a moment John was on the +point of hastily withdrawing from the spot. +</p> +<p> +As he prepared to do so, however, suddenly a little, young bird fell, +striking the floor close to John’s head. At the same time there was a +renewal of the clatter in the chimney and John hastily withdrew. +</p> +<p> +To his amazement he found when he arose that Fred was laughing. +</p> +<p> +“What’s there so funny about it?” demanded John as he tried to brush the +accumulated dust from his person. +</p> +<p> +For a moment Fred was almost unable to control himself, but at last he +said, “Oh, Jack, what fools we have been. There we were so scared by the +sound of the wings that we heard in this room and the strange noises +that came from the chimney that we couldn’t get out of the place fast +enough. And now it’s all as plain as daylight.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t see it,” said John blankly. +</p> +<p> +“Well, have a little patience, and in time you’ll see it, Johnny.” +</p> +<p> +“Why don’t you talk? Why don’t you explain yourself? What are you +laughing at?” demanded John, irritated by the manner of his companion. +</p> +<p> +“Why those sounds we heard were made by chimney-swallows.” +</p> +<p> +“What is a chimney-swallow?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you mean to tell me that you have lived to be seventeen years old +and don’t know what a chimney-swallow is?” +</p> +<p> +“They don’t have them in the city where I live.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said Fred, pretending to be discouraged, “I cannot understand +how any fellow can live as you have and yet not know that there are some +birds called chimney-swallows that live in the chimneys of old or +deserted houses. If you should look up there now you could see some +nests fastened right to the sides of the chimney. I have never seen the +birds, but I’m sure that’s what they are. Whenever we have come into the +house we have probably frightened them and they have been flying around +the room. They were the spooks that scared us so.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you suppose George knew about it?” demanded John ruefully. +</p> +<p> +“Of course he knew it. He has been saving it all up to add to his story +of the speaking tube.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s a comfort to know the old house isn’t haunted anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course it isn’t haunted. There isn’t anything haunted because there +isn’t anything like ghosts or spooks.” +</p> +<p> +“I’m glad to hear you talk so nicely, Freddie,” said John, who now had +recovered from his chagrin. “If I’m not mistaken I’ve heard you talk in +a different tone once or twice before when we have been here.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” said Fred glibly. “Now we have found out what the +spooks are and we’ll show George that we’re not afraid of anything in +the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +The boys were still conversing in whispers, and as Fred made his bold +declaration he abruptly stopped and looked anxiously toward the +stairway. A sound mysterious and unexpected had been heard in the room +directly above them. Both boys were convinced that either others were in +the house, or that they had not yet found an explanation for all the +mysteries of the old Meeker House. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXII—A DARE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Without a word having been spoken, Fred and John instantly departed from +the old house. They did not even glance at each other as they did so, +but moved by a common impulse both were apparently ready to seek a place +of safety with all haste. +</p> +<p> +Fred’s bold declaration that now he had found an explanation for the +strange occurrences in the Meeker House apparently had not held good. He +was maintaining his place by the side of his tall friend when both were +fleeing from the house. +</p> +<p> +The sun already had disappeared from sight and the shadows of the +evening were lengthening. +</p> +<p> +Perhaps the hour increased their feeling of uncertainty. At all events +the confidence they had possessed, when in broad daylight they had +boldly entered the kitchen, manifestly now was gone. Each boy frequently +glanced behind him in his flight, but neither spoke to the other until +fifty yards intervened between them and the dwelling. +</p> +<p> +“What are we doing out here?” demanded Fred blankly. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think you need very much of an explanation,” retorted John. +</p> +<p> +“That’s the way it seems to me, too,” responded Fred, striving to laugh +lightly as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“At all events we are making pretty good time.” +</p> +<p> +Indeed the smaller boy was able to maintain the pace at which his friend +with the longer legs was moving over the field. Half the distance +between the house and the road had been covered when John stopped and +said, “Look ahead there, Fred. Isn’t that George and Grant waiting over +yonder in the road?” +</p> +<p> +In response to the suggestion of his friend, Fred glanced quickly at the +huge spreading oak tree that grew close to the fence. It was a +magnificent tree, the pride of the country around about and the delight +of many visitors. Beneath it an automobile was seen and then Fred +exclaimed quickly, “You’re right, String, that’s George and Grant. Let’s +slow up a little. We don’t want them to think we are in too much of a +hurry.” +</p> +<p> +Accordingly the speed at which they were moving decreased and as they +glanced behind them and saw that the conditions about the old Meeker +House apparently were unchanged the boys ceased to run and began to +walk. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t let them think we have been scared out,” again suggested Fred. +“We’ll never hear the last of it if we don’t.” +</p> +<p> +Without replying John nodded his head and more slowly the boys walked +across the intervening field and then climbed the fence and leaped +lightly into the roadside when they drew near the place where the two +boys were awaiting their coming. +</p> +<p> +“What’s your hurry?” demanded George, laughing as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“We’re in no hurry,” responded Fred glibly. +</p> +<p> +“We’re hungry, that’s all,” said John. “We were afraid you would be +keeping dinner for us.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s a mighty good excuse,” laughed Grant. “You didn’t act when we +first saw you as if you were thinking of your dinner. I didn’t believe +that either one of you could make such good time.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s all right,” said Fred sharply. “That’s all right, but it’s just +exactly as I said.” +</p> +<p> +“What is?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Why the tricks you have been trying to play on us in the old Meeker +House.” +</p> +<p> +“Tricks? What tricks have I been trying to play?” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“Did you ever hear of chimney-swallows?” inquired Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Indeed I have,” said George, “and I have seen them lots of times.” +</p> +<p> +“Ever see any in the old Meeker House?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” replied George, laughing again as he spoke. +</p> +<p> +“Well, why didn’t you tell us that they were there? You let us go on and +I think you helped us too to believe that the room was full of flying +spooks.” +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t know that I was to blame,” laughed George, “if you didn’t know +the difference between a spook and chimney-swallow.” +</p> +<p> +“You must have put in a lot of work in that old house, George,” broke in +John. +</p> +<p> +“Work?” inquired George, staring blankly at his friend. “What do you +mean? I never worked there in my life.” +</p> +<p> +“Who put in that speaking tube that runs from the kitchen to the front +room?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“I didn’t,” George said quietly. +</p> +<p> +“You mean you didn’t do the work. I guess you knew it was put in and I +guess too that you know who put it in.” +</p> +<p> +George laughed, but did not directly reply to the implied question. +</p> +<p> +“We have found out about your old speaking tube,” continued John. “That +was a great trick for you to play on your old friends.” +</p> +<p> +Grant, who was listening intently to the conversation, in which up to +this time he had taken no part, now said, “Then you two fellows think +you have found out all about the strange things in the old Meeker House, +do you?” +</p> +<p> +“We didn’t say that,” replied Fred. “All we say is that we have found +out about the wings that we heard and the chattering in the chimney and +the speaking tube that ran from the kitchen into the front room. My, but +I was scared when I heard my name called there,” he added. +</p> +<p> +George laughed loudly as he said, “You don’t need to tell me that, Pyg. +I wouldn’t have believed that any living creature could have made its +legs fly as fast as yours did that night.” +</p> +<p> +“I was trying to keep up with the rest of the fellows,” retorted Fred. +“I had to go some to do that.” +</p> +<p> +“Now that you have found out all these things you’re not afraid to go +back there any time, are you?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir, I am,” said Fred. +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“Because we haven’t found out everything. There’s something strange +about that place that I don’t understand yet.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, what happened?” inquired George quickly. +</p> +<p> +“We heard voices upstairs.” +</p> +<p> +“Was that the reason why you were moving so fast across the yard?” +laughed George. +</p> +<p> +“Laugh all you want to,” said Fred, “but that’s what we heard.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably your tramp was talking to himself,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“No, sir,” spoke up John promptly. “That wasn’t it at all. Besides there +was more than one voice.” +</p> +<p> +“You didn’t hear the automobile-horn, did you?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“No, we didn’t. We heard all I wanted to without hearing that. It just +made my flesh creep to hear those voices upstairs and coming down the +stairway.” +</p> +<p> +“Was there anything strange about the voices?” asked George. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir, there was.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I tell you what I’ll do,” said Grant promptly. “I’ll dare both of +you to come back here to the old Meeker House after dinner to-night.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll do it,” said Fred promptly. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll give you another dare better than that,” said John. “I’ll dare you +and George to go back there right now.” +</p> +<p> +“Will you come too?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“We have just come from there,” said John. “We know what there is there +and you don’t. Now we dare you both to go back right now.” +</p> +<p> +George glanced a moment questioningly at Grant and then without a word +being spoken promptly turned the car and started back toward the +mysterious old house. +</p> +<p> +Apparently all thoughts of dinner had been forgotten or ignored. Fred +and John looked at each other and laughed derisively, but neither spoke +until at last the car was halted under the old oak tree. +</p> +<p> +Quickly George and Grant leaped out and started across the intervening +field. +</p> +<p> +Fred and John left to themselves waited until their friends had gone to +the rear of the building and then the former said quickly, “Let’s take +the car and go back home. It will serve those fellows just right to +leave them there.” +</p> +<p> +John laughed as he agreed to the suggestion. +</p> +<p> +Avoiding all possible noise they turned the car about and started down +the road. They had gone only a short distance, however, before Fred +suddenly clutched the arm of his companion who was driving and said, +“Listen, String! Wasn’t that a call or a shout?” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke, Fred in great excitement looked behind him in the direction +of the mysterious old dwelling house. Without a word, John turned the +car about and started swiftly on his way back to the old tree. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII—LED BY A MAN</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +When the boys arrived at the familiar place in the road they were +startled by a renewal of the shouts from the house. It was the faint +sound of these calls which had alarmed them and caused them to turn back +on their way. +</p> +<p> +Even while they were hesitating as to whether or not they should leave +the car and run to the house to aid their friends, who apparently were +in dire trouble, they saw two forms emerge from the front door. They +instantly recognized George and Grant, for the light was still +sufficient to enable them to see quite plainly across the fields. Both +boys were running at their highest speed. +</p> +<p> +Blowing the horn of the automobile and shouting, both John and Fred did +their utmost to call the attention of their friends to the fact that +they were awaiting their coming. That their calls were heard was +speedily manifest when both George and Grant, turning slightly in the +direction in which they were speeding, ran toward the great tree. +</p> +<p> +At that moment George stumbled over some unseen object and fell headlong +upon the ground. His companion stopped a moment and Fred and John +watched him as he lifted George to his feet and then both boys renewed +their flight. +</p> +<p> +In a brief time they had arrived at the fence and in their haste both +fell when they tried to climb over it. +</p> +<p> +“What’s wrong? What’s wrong?” demanded Fred excitedly, as his friends +approached the car. +</p> +<p> +“Never mind what’s wrong,” said George brusquely. “Let me get into the +car and give me that wheel.” +</p> +<p> +No further words were spoken while George and his companions entered the +car and in a brief time the automobile was again speeding down the road. +Several times Grant glanced apprehensively behind him, but the +increasing distance evidently gave him renewed courage, for when a +quarter of a mile had been covered he said, “I suppose you fellows are +both wondering what the trouble is.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, we are,” said John quickly. “What is it?” +</p> +<p> +“It’s the same thing that scared you, only worse. We heard sounds +upstairs that showed that some men up there were fighting, then there +was a pistol-shot and we heard some one fall. After that there were +groans and cries galore, and we thought it was time for us to start for +home.” +</p> +<p> +“You were brave boys to leave that other fellow!” said Fred tartly. “If +there was some one shot, it was time for you to help him.” +</p> +<p> +“We couldn’t help him very much if we went upstairs only to be shot +ourselves,” said George sharply. +</p> +<p> +“You don’t know what you could have done,” retorted Fred. +</p> +<p> +“No, I didn’t know, but I’ll tell you what I’ll do. If you want to go +back there right now, I’ll take you back.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t want to go,” said Fred quietly. “It’s time for somebody besides +boys like us to step in. I think the best thing for us to do will be to +find some man and take him back there. We can go in with him then and +help if we have to.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s a good suggestion, all right,” said George quickly. +“Grant and I were so scared that we couldn’t think of anything except +getting out of the horrible old house in the best possible time. My, +think how Grant loped along, taking about six feet at a jump.” +</p> +<p> +“I noticed that I wasn’t alone,” said Grant, dryly. “Whoever it was with +me wasn’t very far behind.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess you’re right,” acknowledged George. “Now I’ll own up, fellows, +about the speaking tube and the swallows. I knew the birds were in the +chimney and I knew too that you didn’t know much about such things, so I +thought I would let you work it out. Then I put in that speaking tube +and added to the fun, but I tell you right now that I have had my +lesson. I’m not afraid of all the ghosts in Jersey, but I don’t like the +sounds that came from that upper room in the old Meeker House. I don’t +mind saying so to any one. I guess my father is at the house by this +time, for he said he might come out to-night. If he is, we’ll tell him +all about it and let him take charge. It’s time for the Go Ahead boys to +go ahead all right, but I think they had better follow somebody who is +older, all the same.” +</p> +<p> +All the boys agreed that George’s suggestion was the best that could be +made. The speed of the automobile increased and not many minutes had +elapsed when the Go Ahead boys arrived at George’s home. +</p> +<p> +They were all delighted when they found that Mr. Sanders was there. He +listened to the story of the excited boys and then quietly said, “I +think we’ll have dinner first and then I’ll go with you over to the old +Meeker House. You have been stirring up the spooks, have you?” and Mr. +Sanders laughed as he spoke. “There were spooks there when I was a boy, +and I remember how we used to steer clear of the corner when we were +coming home evenings. When we were a little older we began to make +investigations and found there wasn’t anything unusual or that couldn’t +be explained about the old place. But the stories of the spooks have +kept up just the same. I don’t know why, unless it is that there are +some people that believe such things just because they want to believe +them.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what Cæsar says,” spoke up Grant. “I remember in his +Commentaries he wrote that ‘men believe that which they wish to +believe.’ But, Mr. Sanders, don’t you think there’s something very +strange about what George and I heard there to-night?” +</p> +<p> +“There may be,” admitted Mr. Sanders, “but there have been so many +stories told about the old house that I do not know whether you boys +thought you heard something or really did hear it.” +</p> +<p> +“You would have known if you had been with us,” spoke up George quickly. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I shall be with you soon and then we will try to find out. I +cannot believe there is anything wrong there, so we might as well have +our dinner and then we will start.” +</p> +<p> +The plan of Mr. Sanders was followed, and directly after dinner the Go +Ahead boys, together with George’s father, started once more for the +place which had been the scene of so much excitement throughout their +summer vacation. +</p> +<p> +Upon the suggestion of Mr. Sanders a lantern was taken with them. When +they arrived at the familiar spot beneath the old oak tree the lantern +was lighted and all five started across the fields toward the Meeker +House. +</p> +<p> +No one spoke until they arrived at the front door, which now had become +a familiar spot to all four boys. Without a word Mr. Sanders pushed open +the door and stepped within the room. Instantly there was a great +fluttering of wings, for the chimney-swallows, startled by the light as +well as by the unexpected entrance of the visitors, were displaying +their alarm by their frantic cries and swift flight. No other sounds, +however, were heard when the birds at last became more quiet. +</p> +<p> +“Where did you say the trouble was?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“In the room upstairs,” answered George. +</p> +<p> +“The one directly over this?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, then the only thing for us to do is to go up there and see what +has happened.” +</p> +<p> +The boys agreed to the suggestion and although no one spoke every one +was aware that his companions were as excited as he when slowly they +began to mount the rickety stairway. The boards creaked and groaned +beneath their feet, increasing the excitement of all. +</p> +<p> +When they had arrived at the platform about midway on the stairway, all +stopped and listened. The screeching sounds of the excited birds still +continued, but otherwise the silence was unbroken. +</p> +<p> +“Is there anybody here?” called Mr. Sanders loudly. As no reply was made +to his inquiry he turned to the boys and said, “There doesn’t appear to +be anybody here. Well go on up and continue our investigations.” +</p> +<p> +Once more leading the way, Mr. Sanders noiselessly mounted the steps, +the boys keeping closely together and not far behind the leader. Holding +his lantern before him Mr. Sanders stopped when he arrived at the head +of the stairway and examined the rooms that opened before him. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly a sound very like laughter was heard in the old building, but +it quickly ceased and in place of it the faint tooting of an automobile +horn was heard. +</p> +<p> +The boys now were staring about them and had it not been for the +presence of George’s father it is doubtful if any one would have +remained. +</p> +<p> +As it was, a startling event occurred which instantly cause all five to +turn quickly about and run swiftly down the stairway. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV—THE END OF THE HOUSE</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Even Mr. Sanders appeared to be as alarmed as his younger companions. At +all events he was swiftly leading the way, and as the boys were running +down the stairway two or three steps at a time it was necessary for him +to move rapidly in order to keep his place at the head of the line. +</p> +<p> +There had been a sudden flash of light that apparently had filled the +building. No sound had accompanied the strange sight although the air +was heavy with the suffocating odor of burning powder. The light +apparently had been flashed in every room at the same moment. The +twittering of the chimney-swallows abruptly ceased after one shrill +outburst of alarm. +</p> +<p> +Before the party arrived at the foot of the stairway the blinding flash +was repeated. The house now seemed to be filled with the penetrating +odor and even the lantern did not fully serve to light their way. +</p> +<p> +“Keep together, boys,” called Mr. Sanders in a low voice. “We must all +make for the front door and get out of this place as soon as possible.” +</p> +<p> +In spite of their alarm, Fred in his own mind was questioning whether it +was the heavy odor in the room or the desire of Mr. Sanders to gain a +place of safety outside the building that had caused such a precipitate +flight. At all events no one delayed, and in a brief time all five were +running rapidly across the field, Mr. Sanders still holding the lantern +and leading the retreating party. +</p> +<p> +Before they arrived at the road, however, they stopped and looked behind +them. The old house now was wrapped in darkness. Not a sound came from +the mysterious dwelling. The blinding flashes of light that had been +seen apparently were ended and only the reflection of the moonlight from +the few windows that still were left in the house produced an unusual +sight. +</p> +<p> +In silence the Go Ahead boys and Mr. Sanders waited for a repetition of +the sight which had startled them. Not a sound came from the place, and +although the boys waited several minutes the strange lights were not +repeated. +</p> +<p> +“I’m inclined to think,” said Mr. Sanders thoughtfully, “that it will be +better for us to go back and continue our investigations. What do you +say, boys?” +</p> +<p> +“We agree,” spoke up Fred glibly. “We might as well run this matter down +now as at any time. What do you think those flashes were, Mr. Sanders?” +</p> +<p> +“From the odor I think likely they were made by setting off the powder +which is lighted when a flash-light picture is taken.” +</p> +<p> +“It does seem so, doesn’t it?” said John quickly. “But where did such +powder come from? Who lighted it?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what we must find out,” said Mr. Sanders dryly. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile the party was returning to the building and had covered half +the distance when they all stopped abruptly as George exclaimed, +“There’s a light there now! Can’t you see it? It’s up in the corner of +the eaves.” +</p> +<p> +A moment later all declared that they could see the flames to which +George had referred, but as they resumed their walk John said abruptly, +“That’s more than a flash-light, that’s a fire! I tell you, fellows, the +old Meeker House is on fire!” +</p> +<p> +Instantly every one stopped but only a brief delay was required to +confirm the startling statement. The flames by this time had burst +through the roof and it was evident that unless help speedily was +obtained the house which had stood nearly two centuries was doomed. +</p> +<p> +There was no further waiting now and quickly all five were running +toward the blazing building. This time, however, Mr. Sanders was not +leading the party. The boys speedily outdistanced him and as soon as +they arrived within the yard they discovered that two other men were +already on the ground. +</p> +<p> +By this time the fire was under strong headway. The timbers of the +dwelling house, old and dry, were burning almost like tinder. Sparks +were flying from the blazing roof and the flames were steadily mounting +higher and higher. +</p> +<p> +Across the field from the opposite road forms of men approaching the +building could be seen, and the wild cry “Fire!” “Fire!” was heard on +every side. +</p> +<p> +There were no buckets or pails to be found in the dwelling, as was +speedily discovered when the doors were burst open. Near the kitchen +door was the old well, which had been used in former generations. A +well-sweep was there, but the heavy weight which had been used to +balance the bucket was gone and it had been long since the water in the +depths below had been disturbed. In desperation, however, the entire +party sought to find some means of stopping the fire. +</p> +<p> +Some of the men who now had arrived started swiftly across the fields +toward houses that could be seen in the distance. There was a vague +thought that they might obtain pails and ropes that would enable them to +quench the flames. By the time the men returned, however, the house was +doomed. +</p> +<p> +Fascinated by the sight, the boys withdrew from the spot and watched the +blazing dwelling as the flames leaped and roared and crackled. +</p> +<p> +“There goes the chimney!” exclaimed Fred in a low voice, as a pile of +bricks fell crashing into the depths. +</p> +<p> +“I wonder what became of those chimney-swallows,” suggested John. +</p> +<p> +“I guess those that could fly are gone and those that were too young to +fly are already burned,” said Grant. +</p> +<p> +“How do you suppose that fire started?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +As no one had a ready solution his question remained unanswered. The +boys now, however, were rejoined by Mr. Sanders, who explained that it +was perilous as well as useless to attempt to fight the flames longer. +The most that could be expected was to prevent the flying embers from +setting fire to fences or to buildings that were not far away. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a pity,” said Mr. Sanders slowly, “that the old house had to go in +this way.” +</p> +<p> +“And it never gave up all its secrets either,” added Fred. “We were just +on the point of finding out, when the whole thing goes up in smoke.” +</p> +<p> +“I fancy that what you call ‘secrets’ will all be explained. My thought +is that the two men, whom we found here when we came back across the +fields, can tell more about the origin of the fire than we think.” +</p> +<p> +“Who were the men?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know either of them,” answered Mr. Sanders. “To me they looked +like tramps.” +</p> +<p> +Startled by the unexpected statement the boys stared blankly at one +another and then as if moved by a common impulse they turned and +advanced among the spectators who now numbered at least three score. +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t it wonderful,” suggested Grant, “what a crowd you can get and in +such a little while even out in the country, if anything unusual is +going on? I wouldn’t have believed that a blast on Gabriel’s trumpet +could have brought twenty people here in an hour and yet in less than +twenty minutes there’s a crowd. Where do you suppose they came from?” +</p> +<p> +“That fire can be seen a long distance,” explained George, “and there’s +nothing like a fire to get a crowd. There’s the tramp!” he abruptly +added, nodding, as he spoke, toward a man who could be seen on the +outskirts of the assembly. +</p> +<p> +By common consent all four boys instantly ran to the place where the man +was seen. +</p> +<p> +As they approached, however, the tramp, for George’s statement proved to +be correct, apparently became aware of their coming and instantly +departed. +</p> +<p> +To the boys it seemed that he had moved around to the other side of the +burning building but when they sought him there he was not to be found. +</p> +<p> +“What do you suppose it all means?” inquired John blankly. “He acted as +if he didn’t want to see us.” +</p> +<p> +“Probably he didn’t,” suggested George. “That’s his right.” +</p> +<p> +“It may be and it may not be,” retorted John. “I don’t believe he will +stand very long on the order of his departure.” +</p> +<p> +“Why not?” +</p> +<p> +“Probably he could tell more about how the fire started than any one in +the crowd.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” demanded George as the three boys stopped and stared +into the face of their friend. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know just how much I do mean, but we all know that the tramp +used the old Meeker House as a sort of headquarters, or at least that he +used to stop there nights, and it may be that he was here when the fire +first started.” +</p> +<p> +“Of course he was,” spoke up John. “Don’t you remember that he told me +that if we would come over to the house after dinner, we would see +something interesting?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, all I can say is that we came and that we certainly found +something interesting,” said George dryly, as the falling timbers +crashed into the fire and great showers of sparks fell all about the +waiting boys. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV—A TALK WITH THE TRAMP</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Following the fall of the walls of the old house, the fire blazed up +anew and a fresh shower of sparks fell far from the blazing building. +The crowd was helpless. The only water to be had was from the old well +which now had caved in and the small amount which could be secured had +been exhausted in the early part of the fire. The timbers were old and +dry, and blazed almost like burning paper. The faces and forms of the +spectators seemed to be ghostly in the light against the dark background +of the night. +</p> +<p> +For an hour the blaze still continued, but the flames were gradually +becoming lower. No longer were there showers of blazing sparks that fell +upon the ground far away. +</p> +<p> +There was only a dim glow when at last Mr. Sanders led the way back to +the automobile. The excitement of the boys, however, still continued and +when their car started they were all looking back at the spot where the +crowd, fantastic in its appearance in the dim light and the glow of the +dying fire, were still to be seen. +</p> +<p> +“Well, there’s one thing I feel almost as badly about as I do the loss +of the old building,” said John thoughtfully, as the car sped homeward. +</p> +<p> +“What is that?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Now we shall never know about the mysteries of the old place.” +</p> +<p> +“There aren’t very many mysteries left,” suggested Fred. “We have found +out about the speaking tube and the chimney-swallows.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Grant, “but how about that blaze?” +</p> +<p> +“I suspect,” joined in Mr. Sanders, “that the blaze you speak of had +something to do with the burning of the old house.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” inquired George quickly. +</p> +<p> +“That’s just what I mean,” replied Mr. Sanders. “Somebody had a +flash-light over there and probably set fire to the building. I haven’t +any idea who could have done it.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess the tramp might tell us something,” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“The tramp?” inquired Mr. Sanders. “What tramp?” +</p> +<p> +In response to his questions the boys related all their experiences with +the strange man whom they had found in the old Meeker House. The part +which he had taken in the return of the lost automobile was also +explained and in response to George’s suggestion that his father should +reward the man for the return of the car his father quickly inquired, +“But what was he doing away up beyond Tuxedo? I thought you said he made +his headquarters here in the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“He does, part of the time,” explained John. +</p> +<p> +“But what was he doing up there so far away?” inquired Mr. Sanders +sharply. “You know I sent you word that there was a possibility that a +car which had been located in a garage at Newburgh might be the one +which we had lost. What was he doing up there? How did he travel so far +and so fast?” +</p> +<p> +“He explained to us,” said John, “that he had got a ride most of the +way. In fact I think he said that he didn’t have to walk over half a +mile. He stole a ride on the cars and then somebody took him in his +automobile and brought him farther.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he say what he was doing up there?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“No, sir,” replied George. +</p> +<p> +“But you say he was a very skillful driver?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir,” spoke up John promptly. “I never saw a man that could handle +a car better.” +</p> +<p> +“I think we must look into this more fully,” said Mr. Sanders, “but it +may be that he is the one who may know more about the loss of our car +than we think and I’m sure he could explain a part at least of the +origin of the fire at the old Meeker House.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you think he set it on fire?” demanded Fred. +</p> +<p> +“Probably not, at least intentionally,” replied Mr. Sanders, “but it may +be that he was the one who had the flash-light and he may have set fire +to the old building without intending to do so.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” spoke up John, “I’m sorry we shan’t ever find out about that +tooting of the automobile horn that we heard in the old building and the +flash that we saw. Why, the fire seemed to be all over the building at +once and then die out in every room just as quickly as it came.” +</p> +<p> +“I think we shall know more about it,” said Mr. Sanders quietly. +“Meanwhile the best thing for us to do is not to do anything to-night.” +</p> +<p> +After the arrival of the boys at George’s home the excitement still +continued and for two hours the boys remained on the piazza talking over +the experiences of the night. Much of the mystery of the old house was +still unexplained. +</p> +<p> +“Well, all I can say is,” declared Fred, as the boys at last arose to go +to their rooms, “that if the old cowboys and skinners came back to the +old Meeker House to carry on their pranks they’ll have to seek other +quarters now.” +</p> +<p> +“I think you will find that your cowboys and skinners are pretty well up +to date,” laughed Mr. Sanders. “And you’ll find too that they are +clothed in very substantial flesh. I have been suspicious for a long +time that the tramps were using the old house for a sort of +headquarters, but I was not sure of it until you told me the story of +the man with whom you had had some dealings. We’ll all go over there the +first thing to-morrow morning and perhaps we shall find some things that +will help us to make the others clear.” +</p> +<p> +Accordingly, soon after breakfast the following day, the four Go Ahead +boys, together with Mr. Sanders, departed for the place where the fire +had occurred the preceding evening. +</p> +<p> +When they arrived, smoke was still rising from the ashes, but the flames +had long since died away. No one was near the spot and as the boys +approached the ruins, Mr. Sanders said, “I wish our friend, the tramp, +would come.” +</p> +<p> +“Why do you want him?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“I think he is the man who can give us the information we most want just +now. I do not recall that I ever saw him.” +</p> +<p> +“He’s a strange man,” said George quickly. “He looks like a tramp and +yet he uses good English and he shows that he has been used to better +things some time in his life.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he tell you that?” laughed Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know that he said that exactly, but that’s what he made me +think.” +</p> +<p> +“Quite likely.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s true,” maintained George stoutly. “All you have to do is to +look into his face and hear him talk and you know that he isn’t just a +common tramp.” +</p> +<p> +“Strange how the mysteries about the old Meeker House keep up,” laughed +Mr. Sanders. “First you have the cowboys and skinners meeting there and +then you have men who may be modern cowboys and skinners in flesh and +blood who make it their headquarters. The twittering of the +chimney-swallows drives all four of the Go Ahead boys out of the +building.” +</p> +<p> +“But we went back,” spoke up Fred quickly. “We didn’t give up. Besides, +Mr. Sanders, I noticed last night when we came down the stairway that +all four of us had all we could do to keep up with you.” +</p> +<p> +“So you did. So you did,” admitted Mr. Sanders laughingly. “But I did +not run because I was afraid of spooks.” +</p> +<p> +“Neither did we,” said Fred. “We thought when we had a man along with us +that we would be protected and everything would be safe. But when we saw +him leaving the old Meeker House, faster than any of us boys could go, +we thought our safest plan was to try to keep up with him. Something +might happen to him, you know. If he was in trouble he might need our +help.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Sanders laughed heartily at Fred’s assertions and then said quickly, +“Who is that man coming across the field?” +</p> +<p> +All the boys looked quickly in the direction in which Mr. Sanders +pointed and a moment later George said in a low voice, “That’s our +tramp.” +</p> +<p> +“I thought he would be here,” said Mr. Sanders. “Now perhaps we can find +out a little more than we knew before.” +</p> +<p> +All five awaited the approach of the man who indeed proved to be the one +about whom they had been talking. +</p> +<p> +As the tramp came near, his face lighted up with a smile as he cordially +said, “Good morning. Good morning. You’re early on the scene of our +disaster last night.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” responded George. “We saw you last night and then we lost sight +of you in the crowd and couldn’t find you again.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, here I am,” said the tramp, smiling. “If you still want to see me +all you have to do is to look at me. I never thought before that I was +very much to look at.” +</p> +<p> +“We want to talk to you,” said Mr. Sanders more seriously. “You told the +boys, did you not, that you and your friends had been making the old +house your headquarters?” +</p> +<p> +“Not exactly ‘headquarters,’” replied the tramp. “We used to stay some +nights there.” +</p> +<p> +“And you used the ghosts to scare people off or keep them away from the +old house?” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what we did,” admitted the tramp, laughing loudly as he spoke. +“It would do your heart good if you could only have seen some of them +leave.” +</p> +<p> +“What were those groans that we heard?” spoke up Fred. “I never quite +understood them. We found out about the birds in the chimney and the +speaking tube that ran from the kitchen to the front room, but how about +those groans?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, there were usually two or three of us, and when we had visitors we +took our stand in different rooms and one answered the groan of the +others. Sometimes we groaned all together. Usually, though, we did not +have very much to do, because after one or two groans we usually found +the old house deserted.” +</p> +<p> +“What about that automobile horn?” inquired George. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, that was another way we had of scaring people, that was all.” +</p> +<p> +“Where did you get the horn?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t just say. We had it a long time.” +</p> +<p> +“It sounded, the boys tell me, very like the horn of the car that we had +taken from our garage.” +</p> +<p> +The tramp looked into the face of Mr. Sanders a moment before he said, +“And you suspect, do you, that I took your car and left the horn here?” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know where our car is?” inquired Mr. Sanders abruptly. “I told +my son to give you ten dollars for returning the old car. Here is the +money,” Mr. Sanders added, as he held forth a bill. +</p> +<p> +“Thank you, sir,” said the tramp, as he took the money and thrust it +into his pocket. “I told the boys that I could be persuaded to accept +the reward; but about your other car, all I can say is that I don’t know +where it is now.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know who took it?” +</p> +<p> +“I do not.” +</p> +<p> +“Do you know how the fire started in the old house last night?” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir. I don’t.” +</p> +<p> +“But you had some flash-light powder and you set it off here. The house +may have caught fire from it.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think it could possibly have got on fire that way. You see we +used that powder in pans and we set it off in two or three rooms at the +same time, just as we used to answer one another’s cries or groan +together. The fire couldn’t spread. The powder just flashed up and then +the fire was all out in a minute. Besides, the old house was no good +anyway. No one could live in it and my friends and I thought that if we +slept there occasionally no one would be any the worse for it. Of course +if there had been any objections made we should have been glad to pay +attention to them.” +</p> +<p> +“I wish you would come back to the car with me, I want to speak to you +alone.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, sir, just as you say,” responded the tramp, quickly +advancing and accompanying Mr. Sanders as he led the way across the +fields after he had bidden the boys remain where they then were. +</p> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a></div> +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI—CONCLUSION</h2> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +Mr. Sanders and the tramp remained in the car a long time. Indeed, as +the minutes passed the boys became somewhat impatient. Frequently they +glanced toward the scene in the road in which Mr. Sanders and his +strange companion were evidently holding a very interesting +conversation. +</p> +<p> +When an hour had elapsed the desire of the boys to depart became more +pronounced. A few of the country people meanwhile had come to view the +ruins of the famous old house, but they had little to say to the boys +and after they had inspected the ruins the most of them slowly departed. +</p> +<p> +At last Fred said impatiently, “Look yonder! Mr. Sanders is taking that +man away in the car.” +</p> +<p> +“I wonder where he is going?” said George, as he glanced at the +departing automobile. +</p> +<p> +“Probably taking him to the lock-up,” suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“If he’s taking the man to the lock-up I know some more that he ought +not to forget,” said George soberly. +</p> +<p> +“So do I,” spoke up Fred, “and some of them aren’t more than a thousand +miles from here either.” +</p> +<p> +However, after the departure of Mr. Sanders in the car, the boys became +more thoughtful. They had not received any word to remain where they +were, but George decided that it would not be wise for them to depart +until they had received some further instructions. Doubtless, he +explained, his father would return for them in a little while. +</p> +<p> +Another hour had elapsed before Mr. Sanders came back. As soon as he was +discovered approaching, all the Go Ahead boys ran quickly across the +field and when they were informed, in response to their inquiries, that +Mr. Sanders was ready to take them home they all quickly climbed into +the automobile. +</p> +<p> +“What did you do with the tramp?” inquired George as soon as the car +started. +</p> +<p> +“I took him to the railroad station.” +</p> +<p> +“Is he going to leave?” +</p> +<p> +“He says he is.” +</p> +<p> +“You seemed to have had a mighty interesting conversation. Did he tell +you all the sad, sweet story of his life?” +</p> +<p> +“I knew much of it.” +</p> +<p> +“You did?” demanded George in astonishment. “You did! Who is he? What is +he? How did you know him? Where did he come from? What is his name?” +</p> +<p> +“Hold on,” interrupted Mr. Sanders with a laugh. “I can answer your +questions one at a time, but I cannot find any answer that might fit +them all alike. Let me tell you first of all that he didn’t explain +everything as fully as I wish he had, but he did tell me a few things.” +</p> +<p> +“What were they?” demanded George impatiently. +</p> +<p> +“Let me tell you first a little about himself,” said Mr. Sanders, +smiling at the interest of his young companions. “That tramp is the +younger brother of a great friend of mine. Indeed, his brother and I +were together almost all the time when we were boys. If I was not in his +house then he was in mine, or we were fishing in these brooks or nutting +in the woods or coasting on the hills. We very seldom were separated. +This younger brother—” +</p> +<p> +“What is his name?” interrupted George. +</p> +<p> +“I shan’t tell you his name now. Perhaps I will some other time, but he +was one of the most attractive boys I ever knew. He was very quiet in +his manner, and had the greatest faculty of making friends I ever knew +any one to have. His mother almost idolized him and she never held him +up to any task. If he got into mischief it was always the fault of the +other boys, she said. If he was kept after school or had any trouble +with the teachers she always told him that it was the teacher’s fault. +Whatever he did, to her was right. You boys want to be thankful that you +have mothers that hold you up to some things instead of upholding you in +everything you do. +</p> +<p> +“Well, this man when he was a boy was too lazy to have any share in the +family life. Pleasant, good-natured, popular with the boys and girls, he +never did anything for any one else. If his mother wanted a pail of +water drawn from the old well behind the farmhouse—and they lived right +straight across the field in that house over yonder,” explained Mr. +Sanders, pointing as he spoke to a house that could be seen in the +distance, “he always had some excuse. If his mother had simply told him +to bring in a pail of water instead of trying to smooth the way for him +and said that he was too tired or not strong enough, if she had done +that and some other things like it I don’t believe this man to-day would +be tramping around the country. He has been a complete failure. He has +never learned to do anything well. He used to be the best baseball +player we had in all this part of the country. There wasn’t a fellow +that could catch him when we were in swimming in the old pond. He could +make a boat and sail a boat, but he just simply drifted on. By the way, +boys, did any of you ever stop to think of the fact that a boat never +drifts but in one direction?” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“Why, down the stream,” replied Mr. Sanders quietly. “This boy grew up +to be a man and drifted into all kinds of bad ways. You see he had never +learned to work and besides there are two words in the English language +that he never could pronounce. One word has three letters in it and the +other has two, but little words though they are, he never seemed to be +able to pronounce them.” +</p> +<p> +“I can’t think what the words are,” said George. +</p> +<p> +“I know what they are,” broke in John. “They are ‘yes’ and ‘no.’” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” replied Mr. Sanders with a smile. “They are the hardest +words in the language for a good many people to use. When they say ‘yes’ +they don’t say it in a way that means much, and when they say ‘no’ it +doesn’t mean much more. +</p> +<p> +“His mother died years ago and I have always thought that this son was +the cause of her death. At one time, as I told you, he was just as +straight and attractive a boy as any of you.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess the trouble with him was that he wasn’t a Go Ahead boy,” +suggested Fred. +</p> +<p> +“That was one trouble,” replied Mr. Sanders with a smile, “and another +was that after he began to drift he couldn’t stop. You see if he hadn’t +begun he never could have come to the end to which he has. That’s a +strange thing to me that more people do not realize that if they don’t +begin, they never will come to the end.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he explain to you,” inquired Fred, “why he shut me in the cellar of +the old Meeker House?” +</p> +<p> +“No,” replied Mr. Sanders, “I didn’t know that you were shut in there.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I was. He caught me in the cellar and bolted the door on me. I +must have been in there an hour and a half.” +</p> +<p> +“How did you get out? Did he let you out?” +</p> +<p> +“No, sir, I went and pushed up the outside door.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, why did you wait an hour and a half before you did that?” +responded Mr. Sanders with a laugh. +</p> +<p> +“I’m sure I don’t know,” said Fred blankly. “I guess it was because I +didn’t think of it or try it.” +</p> +<p> +“Very likely he meant it for a joke. Now, when I had my talk with him he +recognized me, although at first I didn’t recognize him. He did say some +things about scaring you boys away from the old place.” +</p> +<p> +“Did he say anything about the way we left last night?” inquired George +mischievously. +</p> +<p> +“Why, how did you leave last night?” inquired Mr. Sanders. +</p> +<p> +“We left in a big hurry,” declared George. +</p> +<p> +“What made you in such a hurry?” +</p> +<p> +“We were trying to keep up with the man who was with us and was leading +the way,” said George demurely. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Sanders joined in the laugh that followed and then said quickly, +“Our lost car will be brought back to-day.” +</p> +<p> +“How do you know?” demanded George quickly. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think I shall explain all of that to you, my boy,” said Mr. +Sanders quietly. “It ought to be enough to know that it will be there.” +</p> +<p> +“But suppose the tramp doesn’t bring it back?” suggested Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I am not supposing anything about the tramp, or about any failure,” +replied Mr. Sanders, again smiling quietly. “All I say to you is that I +am confident that the car will be brought back.” +</p> +<p> +“Did you find out who stole the car?” inquired John. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t think it was ‘stolen.’ You might call it ‘borrowed.’” +</p> +<p> +“Well, did you find out who ‘borrowed’ it then?” demanded John. +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Who did?” said George eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“There are several reasons why I shall not go farther into details,” +said Mr. Sanders. “You may draw such conclusions as you please. Very +likely they will not be incorrect. You have followed the events of the +summer more closely than I and I have no doubt can connect one with +another.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I think,” said George positively, “that the tramp took our car. +He’s a mighty good driver and knows all about a car. He didn’t intend to +sell it perhaps, but he wanted to use it for a few days.” +</p> +<p> +“Are you sure he used it in the daytime?” inquired Mr. Sanders quietly. +</p> +<p> +“Why, yes. When would he use it?” demanded George. +</p> +<p> +“Let me suppose a case,” explained his father. “Just suppose a man and +his friends made it a practice to come to your garage nights and take +out your car after you had gone to bed. Suppose on one of these long +rides the car met with a bad accident. It was impossible to bring the +car back that night, so it was taken to a garage where it was said that +at least a week would be required to repair it. At the end of the week +the car is not repaired. Naturally the people whose automobile is +missing are sure the car has been stolen and they are sending word all +over the country for the police to be on the lookout for it. Meanwhile +the car is safe in a little town not more than ten miles distant from +the place where it belonged. Finally there comes a day when the car is +ready, but the man who took it and who had the accident has not money +enough to pay for the repairs. He doesn’t intend to steal the car, but +he is not able to bring it back to its owner. If the owner telephones to +the garage for a man to bring it to his home it is quite likely he may +see it soon.” +</p> +<p> +“And did you let the tramp get away?” +</p> +<p> +“I not only let him get away, but I gave him money to leave. I don’t +suppose he will use the money as I told him, but I am going to give him +a chance. I would rather help two men who do not deserve it than to let +one go who does. Besides,” Mr. Sanders added thoughtfully, “I thought of +his father and mother and how good they had been to me when I was a boy. +There,” he added, “I have told you more than I expected.” +</p> +<p> +“Will the tramp come back?” inquired Grant. +</p> +<p> +“I hope not. I doubt if he does, because the old Meeker House has now +gone and he has no place hereabout in which he can stay.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, we found out what the spooks in the old house were,” said Fred. +“I guess that’s the way with most of such things.” +</p> +<p> +“We certainly had a good time finding out,” said John laughingly. “I’m +glad we didn’t give up.” +</p> +<p> +“So am I,” said Fred. “But then,” he added, “we are the Go Ahead boys +and have not learned how to do anything else.” +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 35964-h.txt or 35964-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/5/9/6/35964">http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/9/6/35964</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/35964-h/images/cover.jpg b/35964-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c771262 --- /dev/null +++ b/35964-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/35964.txt b/35964.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9007b7d --- /dev/null +++ b/35964.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6407 @@ +The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old +House, by Ross Kay + + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + + + + +Title: The Go Ahead Boys and the Mysterious Old House + + +Author: Ross Kay + + + +Release Date: April 25, 2011 [eBook #35964] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) + + +***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE +MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE*** + + +E-text prepared by Roger Frank, Juliet Sutherland, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team (http://www.pgdp.net) + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + +by + +ROSS KAY + +Author of "The Search for the Spy," "The Air Scout," "Dodging the +North Sea Mines," "With Joffre on the Battle Line," "The Go Ahead +Boys on Smugglers' Island," "The Go Ahead Boys and the Treasure +Cave," etc., etc. + + + + + + + +Copyright, 1916, +by +Barse & Hopkins + + + + +PREFACE + +In almost every rural community in the older parts of our country there +is a house which some of the country folk have believed to be "haunted." +As a rule this house is old and perhaps has fallen into partial decay. +The children passing on the country road move to the opposite side when +they draw near the building. Stories are current of scenes which have +been witnessed and sounds heard in the vacant dwelling. Perhaps even the +older people have not altogether outgrown their feeling of timidity when +they are near it. How baseless all such stories are and how easily most +of the unusual sights and sounds can be accounted for is of course +clearly understood. In this story I have tried to interest my young +readers in the attempts of four normal, go-ahead boys to solve the +mysteries connected with a venerable house near the home of one of them, +which was shunned by many of the simple country people. I have +endeavored to avoid all sensationalism and yet to interest the boys and +girls in a stirring story of the experiences of my heroes. I am not +without hope that the final solution of the mystery of the old Meeker +House may help my young readers a little more courageously to face other +problems, perhaps equally mysterious or perplexing, which may be +presented to them in other forms. At all events I sincerely hope that +the spirit and determination of the Go Ahead Boys will remain in their +minds after the story itself shall have long been forgotten. + + --Ross Kay + + + + +CONTENTS + . CHAPTER I--THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + . CHAPTER II--COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + . CHAPTER III--INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + . CHAPTER IV--FLIGHT + . CHAPTER V--A SURPRISE + . CHAPTER VI--A PRISONER + . CHAPTER VII--AN ESCAPE + . CHAPTER VIII--THE LOST CAR + . CHAPTER IX--ANOTHER FLIGHT + . CHAPTER X--THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + . CHAPTER XI--THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + . CHAPTER XII--A HASTY DEPARTURE + . CHAPTER XIII--WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + . CHAPTER XIV--DISAPPOINTED + . CHAPTER XV--A FAMOUS SPOT + . CHAPTER XVI--ANOTHER LOSS + . CHAPTER XVII--LEFT BEHIND + . CHAPTER XVIII--THE ARRIVAL + . CHAPTER XIX--AN INVITATION + . CHAPTER XX--THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + . CHAPTER XXI--AN EXPLANATION IN PART + . CHAPTER XXII--A DARE + . CHAPTER XXIII--LED BY A MAN + . CHAPTER XXIV--THE END OF THE HOUSE + . CHAPTER XXV--A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + . CHAPTER XXVI--CONCLUSION + + + + +THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS OLD HOUSE + + + + +CHAPTER I--THE OLD MEEKER HOUSE + + +"Do you see that house?" + +"You mean that low, old house on the corner of the road?" + +"Yes." + +"What of it?" + +"Well, that's one of the oldest houses in this part of the country." + +"It looks the part. How old is it?" + +"It's at least one hundred and seventy-five years old." + +"It's old enough to look better, then. Is that one of the houses that +Washington slept in?" + +"I guess so." + +"It must be, from the stories you have told me since I have been here. +How old was Washington, anyway, when he died?" + +"He was in his sixty-eighth year." + +"I think there's some mistake about that." + +"No, sir. Those are the correct figures. He was born in 1732 and he died +in 1799." + +"I'm not going to dispute you, George. I'll take your word for it, but +it always seemed to me that Washington's age must have been a good deal +greater than the histories say it was." + +"Why?" + +"Because he slept in so many houses. I have figured it up and if he had +spent about a quarter of an hour in every one of the houses that you say +he slept in, it will figure out that he was a good deal more than +sixty-seven years old. Indeed, I have begun to think that Methuselah was +an infant-in-arms compared with George Washington, if ten per cent of +the stories you have been telling us are true. By the way, how old was +Methuselah, anyway?" + +"'And all the days of Methuselah were nine hundred and sixty and nine +years and he died.'" + +"Well, poor old man, I should have thought he would have been ready to +die. Just think of it, having to live in this world almost a thousand +years! I wonder how his hearing was and if he could see straight. I have +always thought that no matter how long I might live I should want people +to feel when I came to die that I had a little more of a record than +born in 1899 and died some time in the future." + +"That's the best thing some men ever did." + +"What?" + +"Why, to die. They'd give up their places to others who could fill them +better." + +"What's all that got to do with that old house?" + +"Nothing. I didn't start to talk about Methuselah." + +"That's all right, but what about this house?" + +"It's haunted." + +A hearty laugh went up from the three boys who were the companions of +George Sanders in his automobile. + +The conversation which has been recorded had been carried on by George +Sanders and his friend Fred Button. These two boys, together with John +Clemens and Grant Jones, were close friends and schoolmates. Although +they were nearly of the same age they were markedly different in their +appearance. Fred, who was the pygmy of the party, was a little, +round-faced, bright-eyed fellow, who was able to say quick and keen +things and who was the inspiration of most of the pranks of which the +band was guilty. + +John Clemens was perhaps Fred's closest friend. He was six feet three +inches tall, but he did not weigh very much more than the shorter Fred, +who made up in breadth what he lacked in length. + +Grant Jones, the most quiet and thoughtful member of the party, seldom +entered into the wordy contests, although he took special delight in the +pranks of his comrades. + +George Washington Sanders was the owner of the automobile in which the +four boys were riding. + +The day was one of the most beautiful of early summer. In Northern New +Jersey, not far from the border of New York State, George's father had +an extensive farm. To this place from their early childhood the four +friends had been accustomed to come from the great city and the many +good times they had enjoyed there seemed to increase in number and +quality with every succeeding summer. + +Not all their summers had been passed on the farm, however. There had +been frequent trips, which the boys had taken to different parts of +their own land and others. A few years before this time they had been +accompanied by the father or uncle of one of the boys, who had acted as +guardian and guide. On these various trips they had not only had many +enjoyable times, but also many stirring experiences. Some of these +adventures have already been told in other stories of this series. + +Among themselves the boys frequently referred to the quartet as the Go +Ahead boys. They had selected this name as one that was most expressive +of their purposes. They had found it in the famous motto of Davy +Crockett, who, years ago, was himself familiarly known as "Go Ahead" +Crockett. + +On the day when this story opens they were on their way to George's +farm. They had approached within a mile of their destination when their +host had called their attention to the low building which commonly was +referred to as the Meeker House. It was an unpretentious structure, +containing a story and a half, with a lean-to or addition, that looked +much as if it had been built as an afterthought, or as a postscript is +added to a letter. + +The sides of the building were weather-beaten and it was manifest that +it had been long since any one had dwelt in the house. + +"It seems to me, George," spoke up Fred, "that you're finding new +historical places around the farm every summer. Let me see, what was it +last summer?" + +"You are doing better, Fred," laughed George. "You remember now that +there was a last summer. I have sometimes been afraid you wouldn't +remember even that much, but for your sake I'll tell you that last +summer I told you the story of the young fellow who was captured in +Ramapo Pass. He was Washington's messenger, you will remember, although +he did not know it at the time." + +"I do recall now," said Fred pompously, "some information you were kind +enough to dole out to us. It seems to me that you told me that this +young fellow was sent purposely by Washington down through the Ramapo +Valley so that he would be captured by the British and taken to New +York. If I'm correct he had a letter sewed inside the lining of his coat +and this letter contained instructions for General Heath, who was at +Morristown, to join him, that is Washington and not the boy, in taking +New York." + +"That's right. It all comes back to me, too," joined in Grant. "This +fellow was taken to New York and he felt pretty mad at Washington. He +could have found his way across the country all right, he thought, and +would have given the message to General Heath without any trouble, but +Washington insisted upon his going through to Ramapo Valley and of +course he was caught. Poor chap, he didn't know that that was the very +thing Washington was planning to do. He wanted him caught so that his +letter would be found and Clinton wouldn't dare leave New York." + +"What did Clinton want to leave New York for?" broke in John. "I can't +understand why anybody would want to leave little, old New York. That's +the best town on the globe." + +"He wanted to take his army south to help Cornwallis, who was bottled up +on the Yorktown peninsula. That was the trick that Washington played on +him. He kept Clinton here, and when at last Clinton got his eyes opened, +he found out that Washington's army was already down across the Delaware +and headed for Chesapeake Bay." + +"Did he arrive in time?" inquired Fred innocently. + +"For further and detailed information I refer you to any primary history +of the United States," said Grant laughingly. "That's one of the things +no American boy ought to have to learn. He ought to know it before he +begins." + +"What about this house back here?" said Fred. "You seem to point it out +as if you thought there was something peculiar about it." + +"I told you that it's haunted." + +Again the boys laughed heartily as Grant said, "Anybody would think to +hear you talk, George, that you belonged back in the days when they +hanged witches." + +"You mean burned," spoke up Fred promptly. + +"No, I don't mean 'burned' the witches, I mean 'hanged,'" retorted +Grant. "There are some ignorant people who sometimes talk about the +people of the Salem Colony burning witches, but they didn't burn +them--they hanged them." + +"Pardon me," said Fred demurely. "I stand corrected." + +"But there really is something queer about this house," said George. "I +know, for I've been there." + +The boys all looked back at the little building, which now was far +behind them. The quiet that rested upon it seemed like that of a +cemetery. It plainly belonged to another generation. + +"What do you mean by its being haunted!" demanded Fred, at last breaking +in upon the silence. + +"I'm telling you what the common report is," said George, somewhat +testily. "Everybody says it is haunted." + +"But you said you yourself knew it was." + +"No, I didn't. I said there was something peculiar about it." + +"Go on with your story, George," called John. "Don't keep us in this +burning suspense. What was it?" + +"Why, I went over there one day," explained George, somewhat +reluctantly. "It was just at sunset and a terrible thunder shower had +come up and I ran to the old Meeker House to get in out of the rain." + +"When did you learn to do that?" broke in Fred. + +"I didn't have to learn," declared George. "At all events I got inside +the house and waited for the storm to pass. But it didn't pass. When it +struck the hills over yonder it was turned back by colder currents of +air, so I got the storm coming and going. The first thing I knew the old +place was dark and then--" + +"And then what?" demanded Grant. + +"And then,--things began to happen." + +"What happened?" inquired Grant. "Don't keep us in this terrible +suspense." + +"Well, there wasn't a breath of air stirring," explained George, "but +the window shutters began to slam a half a dozen times and I heard +groans that seemed to come up from the cellar and I was almost sure that +once I heard something or somebody call my name." + +"That's a good one," laughed John, who in spite of his flippant manner +was strongly moved by the story of his friend. "You're always expecting +somebody to call you by name whether they know you or not." + +"Oh, but they know _of_ him," suggested Fred. "I know _of_ a good many +people that I don't know by sight; for example, there's the President." + +"Keep still, fellows," ordered Grant, "and let George tell his story. He +was as far as the slamming of the shutters and the groans that came from +the cellar and the call which some of the evil spirits made on him by +name. Go on, George," he added, turning to his friend, "tell us what +happened next." + + + + +CHAPTER II--COWBOYS AND SKINNERS + + +"I don't know just what happened next," laughed George. "There were two +peals of thunder so near together that you could hardly clap your hands +between them. When the first one came and I heard that call, I didn't +stand on the order of my departure. When the next clap sounded I was +away down the road under that old oak tree." + +All the four boys laughed heartily, even George apparently not being +crestfallen by his lack of courage on the night he was describing. + +"What is it you call the house?" inquired John. + +"The Meeker House." + +"You think it's haunted?" + +"I didn't say so," responded George somewhat warmly. "I merely said it +is a common report that it is a haunted house. I'm just telling you what +happened one night when I ran in there to get out of a storm." + +"Poor old house," said George thoughtfully, as he looked back at the old +building, which still could be seen in the distance. "It makes me think +of Uncle Sim. He's the last leaf on the tree and I guess this is the +oldest house in this part of the country." + +Uncle Sim was an aged negro, who for many years had been in the employ +of George's father. His labor was no longer efficient, but his faithful +services in the years that were gone had caused Mr. Sanders to provide +for the wants of the gray-haired negro. Uncle Sim's form was bowed with +the weight of years which he carried and his trembling limbs showed how +much he had suffered from the "mis'ry." Indeed, the boys had become +convinced that there was no topic concerning which the old man loved to +talk as he did concerning his various aches and pains. + +In spite of his afflictions, however, Uncle Sim was a warm friend of the +boys. When they got into mischief Uncle Sim's face was lifted heavenward +so that he was unable to see any of the pranks they committed and +therefore was unable to impart any information when he was asked as to +his knowledge of their deeds. He was a great favorite of the boys and +many of his stories had been familiar to them from their earliest +childhood. He knew why the red squirrel and the black hated each other +so intensely. He was well informed concerning the perpetual warfare that +existed between the dogs and cats on the farm. The call of the bluejays +was in a language which Uncle Sim claimed to understand. And although he +did not talk back to the chattering jays, nevertheless he strongly +believed that they were much more guarded in their conversations when he +was nearby. + +"You go ask Uncle Sim if the house is haunted," repeated George. "He'll +tell you what he thinks and you won't have to wait very long for him to +do it, either." + +"Has he never been there?" asked Fred. + +"You'd better ask him," declared George. + +"What do you honestly think about it yourself, George?" said Grant more +seriously. + +"I don't know just what to think. I haven't been there since--" + +"Since when?" spoke up John encouragingly. + +"Since the last time I was there." + +"When was that?" + +"That time I was telling you about when I ran in there to get out of the +rain." + +"Will you go back there now if we'll go?" challenged Fred. + +"I don't mind going," said George, "but I don't believe we'll have time +this afternoon." His three companions laughed derisively and so aroused +his spirit that he said brusquely, "That's all right, fellows. I'll go +back there as soon as any one of you will go." + +"All right, sir," called John. "Stop your car, and we'll all of us go +back to the old Meeker House and find out if what you have been telling +us is true." + +"Who ever heard," broke in Grant, "of ghosts walking around in the +daytime? The time for us to go there is when the ghosts are showing up +well." + +"You didn't tell us, George, what the ghosts were?" + +"No, I didn't see them," replied George. + +"What do they say they are?" + +"Why, the common report is, that ever since the days of the Revolution +the ghosts of the Cowboys and Skinners have made their headquarters in +the old Meeker House and whenever there's a night that is especially +dark or there is a particularly heavy storm, then they come there and +join in the racket." + +"Cowboys?" demanded John. "What do you mean? Those fellows that drive +the cattle out on the plains?" + +"No, sir, I mean the men who lived in this part of the country when +Washington was fighting for the independence of the United States. But +even if they did live here they wouldn't help him. They said they didn't +belong to either side, but the Cowboys usually took advantage of both +sides. When the men were away from home they would go into a house, if +they thought there was any money hidden in some old stocking, and they +would take the women and hold their feet out over the fire until they +told where the money was." + +"What were the Skinners?" inquired John. + +"Why, they were about the same kind of men, the only difference being +that the Cowboys took the families of the patriots, while the Skinners +paid their first attention to the Tory families. I guess it didn't make +much difference to either party as long as they found some money or +could get any valuables." + +"What did they put up with such things for?" + +"They had to put up with more or less of it," answered George. "You see +most of the men were away from home, fighting in the army. That gave the +Cowboys and Skinners their chance and they took it. When the men came +back the Cowboys and Skinners were gone." + +"They were something like Georgie Porgie, weren't they?" laughed Grant. +"I don't know who he was, but when a certain part of the population of +which he was afraid began to get busy, Georgie Porgie ran away,--likewise +the Cowboys and Skinners." + +"It's all very interesting," spoke up Fred, "but I don't believe there's +such a thing in all the world as a ghost." + +"All right, sir," said George warmly. "All I want you to do is to talk +to Uncle Sim and if he doesn't convince you that the Meeker House is the +special place where all the people that walk around in the night have +their headquarters, then I'm mistaken." + +"I'll ask him just as soon as we get back," said Fred promptly. + +Not long afterward the automobile entered the beautiful grounds of the +farm where the four boys were spending a part of the summer. The place +was attractive because of its quietness and the deep shade in the front +yard. A collie dog, lying on the ground, arose and stretched itself and +then bounded toward George as soon as the boys alighted. Around the +corner of the garage at that moment came Uncle Sim, his broad-brimmed +hat carried in his hand and his face shining with perspiration and good +nature. + +"Well, Uncle Sim," called Fred. "You can't guess where we've been." + +"No, suh, no, suh," replied the negro, "I reckon I can't. Mos' gen'lly I +finds out right soon whar yo' boys has been. Sometimes I can tell the +d'rection in which yo' all is goin', even when I can't see none o' +yo'all." + +"How's that?" demanded John. + +"Why, from the d'rection in which all the dogs and cats and birds and +cows and I reckon everything that's able to get away, is movin'." + +The boys laughed heartily at Uncle Sim's statement and Grant said, "But, +Uncle Sim, you know we are the Go Ahead boys." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh, I reckon I's somewhat familar with dat ar fac'." + +"Uncle Sim, have you ever been in the Meeker House?" spoke up Grant +abruptly. + +For a moment the old negro was silent as he stared blankly at the boys. +Shaking his head he said, "What fo' yo' ask me that question?" + +"Because I want to know," said Grant. + +"No, suh. I ain't never been inside the Meeker House, but I's been so +close dat I could hear what was er goin' on." + +"Why, what is going on there?" inquired Fred. "The house seemed to me to +be deserted. Does any one live there?" + +"No, suh. No, suh, no one lives dar. Leastwise, no one live dar in the +daytime." + +"Who lives there at night?" inquired Fred. + +Once more the negro was silent and it was evident that the boy's +question had aroused certain feelings in the heart of Uncle Sim. + +"Yo' all better take my advice," said the old negro, shaking his head in +a still more solemn manner. "Yo' better keep away from de Meeker House." + +"Why?" inquired John. + +"No good comes to anybody dat goes to the Meeker House in the night +time." + +"But how do you know, Uncle Sim? You say you have never been there?" + +"Yo' all keep away from dar. Min' what I tell you. Don't none o' you' +boys go near dat old Meeker House after sundown." + +"But you make us want to go all the more," said Grant. + +Uncle Sim merely shook his head and made no further comment. It was +plain, however, that he was seriously troubled by the statement of Grant +and that he was sincere in his warning. + +"I say, fellows," called Fred quickly, "why don't we go over to the +Meeker House to-night? It looks as if it is going to be cloudy," he +added as he glanced up at the sky. "This will be just the ideal night. +If there's anything uncanny around the place we'll be likely to find it +out. Oh, you needn't go if you don't want to," he added quickly upon +George's unspoken protest. "You and Uncle Sim will be excused, if you +don't want to go." + +"If you fellows go I'm not going to be left behind," spoke up George +promptly. + +"Then it's all fixed," declared Fred gleefully. "We'll go to the Meeker +House to-night." + + + + +CHAPTER III--INTO THE HAUNTED HOUSE + + +The Go Ahead boys were excited when they entered the house of their +friend and that night when they gathered about the supper table their +one theme of conversation was the proposed visit to the old Meeker +House. + +Occasionally throughout the conversation there was an expression on the +face of George different from that of his companions. However, none of +them was aware of the occasional smile, or of the keen look with which +George occasionally glanced about the table. At other times the +expression of his face was serious and his interest in the suggested +visit apparently was as keen as that of any of his friends. + +The boys decided to wait until darkness had fallen before they started +on their expedition. + +"It's just eight o'clock," said Grant, as they left the house and +prepared to take their places in the automobile which was awaiting their +coming. + +"Eight o'clock and all's not well, I'm afraid," suggested Fred. + +"Are you afraid?" demanded John with a laugh. + +"No, I'm not afraid, but somehow when I think of this business," replied +Fred, "I find I have some shivers." + +"You had better not go, my lad," said John solemnly. "This is no place +for infants or those afflicted with chills." + +"I'm not chilly enough to stay home if all of you are going," retorted +Fred. + +"It's just the kind of a night we want," spoke up George. "There isn't +any moon and it's going to be dark." + +"Those clouds look as if it might rain," suggested Grant. + +"That will be all the better," said George. "The darker the night the +better the spooks behave. They say it's almost impossible to find any +there on a moonlight night." + +"I hope we'll find some to-night," laughed John, but his voice somehow +seemed to belie his confidence. + +At all events there was not much conversation in the automobile as it +sped swiftly down the road. + +George, who was driving, occasionally referred to the various stories he +had heard of the deeds in the Meeker House, but his efforts did not meet +with any marked response until he said, "I have heard that Claudius +Smith sometimes shows up in the old house." + +"Who's he?" + +"He _was_ a Cowboy. He lived more than one hundred and twenty-five years +ago. You have got to speak of him as one who 'was' and not 'is'." + +"What makes him come back to the old house?" + +"It was one of his favorite places, I'm told." + +"What was he?" + +"I told you he was a Cowboy. He got to acting so badly that at last all +the farmers and their boys that could be spared from the army got +together and chased him clear down on Long Island." + +"Did they get him?" inquired Fred. + +"They did. They brought him back and took him to Goshen, where they +hanged him in the old courtyard." + +"I shouldn't think he would come back here to the Meeker House," +suggested Grant. "I should think his ghost would 'hang' around the court +house up at Goshen." + +"I can't tell you about that," said George, "but it may be that he +follows the road he used to travel. That may be the reason why part of +the time he's here at the old Meeker House." + +"He must have been a great boy," suggested Fred. + +"He certainly was, and he wasn't the only one. I have heard my father +tell about a man here in Jersey named Fagan. He was one of the Cowboys +that they used to call the Pine Robbers." + +"Who were they?" inquired John. + +"Why there were a dozen or more bands of these Pine Robbers. They used +to make their headquarters in the Pines back of Lakewood. They would dig +a hole in the sand and hide in it the stuff they had stolen, and then, +when they had enough to make up a cargo they would take it to Toms River +and ship it to New York, where William Franklin helped them dispose of +it." + +"Who was William Franklin?" demanded Grant. + +"Why, every educated man knows that William Franklin was the last royal +governor of New Jersey. He was the son of old Ben Franklin. He inherited +his father's brains, but not his father's disposition. He was one of the +bitterest of all the Tories, and when the war of the Revolution broke +out he went to New York to be with his friends." + +"What happened to this man Fagan?" asked Fred. "Is his ghost around +here, too?" + +"I can't tell you," replied George, "whether it is here or not. I know +Fagan got to be such a bad man stealing, shooting, tormenting the women +and children that finally a big gang of men took after him and caught +him down here between Trenton and Freehold." + +"Did they do anything to him after they caught him?" inquired Grant. + +"Not very much. They just hanged him from the limb of a big tree by the +side of the road and left the body swinging there in the air for two or +three days. Finally they left the head in the noose, stuck a long pipe +between the jaws and my grandfather used to tell me that the head was +there until the crows had picked out the eyes and left nothing but the +grinning skull." + +"That's a nice story to tell just before we make our bows at a spook +party," said Fred. + +The boy was striving to speak lightly, but his voice sounded strange +even in his own ears. Indeed, by this time, after the gruesome stories +of the Cowboys had been told, the nerves of all the boys were on edge. + +The dim outlines of the Meeker House were now plainly visible. The +silence that rested over the place was unbroken except for the sighing +of the wind as it swept through the ancient pine trees that grew in the +front yard. + +"This is a ghost story up to date, isn't it?" said Grant. "I don't +suppose many of those Cowboys or Skinners ever traveled around in +automobiles." + +"Probably not," said John dryly, and conversation abruptly ceased. + +"George, don't you think you had better leave your automobile up here on +the road and not take it clear down to the house?" inquired Fred in a +whisper, when they drew near the place they were seeking. + +"What for?" inquired George. + +"Oh, nothing, only I thought it would be more out of the way there. You +see the house is on the corner and if some one makes a sharp turn there +they might run into it without seeing it." + +"Just as you say," replied George good-naturedly. + +Acting upon the suggestion, the automobile was stopped about a hundred +yards from the house and the boys at once prepared to walk across the +yard toward the front door. + +No one spoke until Fred whispered sharply, "What's that?" + +"What's what?" retorted George, also speaking in a whisper. + +"Nothing but a branch creaking up in the tree," suggested Grant. + +"I guess that's what it was," assented Fred, and the four boys at once +resumed their advance upon the ancient house. + +"Come on, fellows," whispered George. "We'll try the front door first." + +The attempts of the boys, however, to open the door were unavailing. The +door was massive and although it creaked and groaned it was strong and +all the attempts to open it proved failures. + +"You stay here, fellows," whispered George. "I'll go around to the back +of the house and see if I can get in there." + +"I'll go with you," suggested Fred. + +"No, you won't, you'll stay right here and defend these fellows who are +a good deal more scared than they are willing to own," retorted George. + +The trio remained in silence before the front door, waiting for some +word from their friend, who at once had carried out his suggested plan +and had gone to the rear of the house. + +Suddenly and without any word being spoken the heavy door in front of +the waiting boys slowly opened. It creaked noisily but there was no +question that George succeeded and the door was being opened from +within. + +Grant was the first to enter, but instantly he stepped back and in a +voice that trembled said quickly, "What's that? What's that?" + +There was a noise of flying wings in the room before them, but not one +of the boys was able to see any of the winged creatures. Back and forth +they flew, the unseen birds, their wings noisily flapping and their +cries steadily increasing in volume. + +Startled as all the boys were by the unexpected sound they withdrew to +the porch in front of the door and in whispers talked over the best plan +for them to follow. + +"I say we go ahead," said Grant at last. "We don't want to be scared out +by a little thing like this." + +"That's all right," agreed Fred. "You're so bold, I'll let you go ahead. +I shall be satisfied to-night to be one of the go behind boys. I'm not +afraid," he hastily added when Grant laughed derisively. "I'll follow +you wherever you dare lead. Now then start if you want to." + +No more was said and slowly and silently the boys once more entered the +room into which the door directly opened. + +This time again when only a few steps had been taken, by a common +impulse they stopped and Fred whispered, "Where is George?" + +"He's somewhere around here," whispered Grant in reply. + +"But I don't see him or hear him," declared Fred. "We ought to find out +what has happened." + +"Oh, he's all right," said John confidently. "Come on, let's go ahead." + +"We haven't any light," suggested Fred. + +"We'll have one pretty soon. That's probably what George has gone for," +whispered John. "He'll be back in a minute." + +"I don't believe we had better try to go any farther. A good many of +these old houses have steps from one room to another. I don't want Fred +to fall and break his neck." + +"Don't you worry about my----" began Fred, but he stopped abruptly when +suddenly the shutters in the room directly over their head banged +noisily against the side of the house. At the same time the sound of the +flying creatures in the room was heard again and as if to make matters +worse a sound very like a groan came from the stairway. The weird +interruption was followed by a wild laugh that came from the same +stairway and a moment later the confusion was increased by a sound more +unexpected than any which as yet had been heard by the Go Ahead boys in +the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER IV--FLIGHT + + +There had been a moment of intense silence which was sharply broken by a +long whistling sound, that seemed to come from some place directly +behind the spot where the boys were standing. This sound was followed by +a prolonged sigh and this in turn was abruptly ended when out of the +darkness there came a call, "F-r-e-d! Fred Button!" The call was in a +low tone but coming as it did after the startling events which had +occurred was almost more than Fred was able to bear. His nerves were +unstrung and without a word he turned and swiftly made for the door, +which fortunately had been left open. + +Nor had Fred been long out of the house before he was joined by his +companions. George, who previously had gone around to the rear door, +came as quickly as John and Grant. + +For a brief time the boys assembled under the branches of a huge cherry +tree that was growing in one corner of the yard. + +"What do you make of that?" demanded George. "I told you you might hear +something about Fagan and the Cowboys if you went into that old Meeker +House." + +"It wasn't what I heard about them that troubled me," retorted Fred. "It +was when I heard my own name called." + +"Honest?" demanded George. + +"Yes, sir. You ask the other fellows. Somebody right behind me called +'Fred.' 'Fred Button.' I was standing where I could see straight through +the window and I am perfectly sure there wasn't anybody there. If you'll +tell me how the thing was done I'll be much obliged to you." + +"It wasn't done at all," laughed George. "You were just dreaming. It's +one of those attacks of nightmare that you have some times. Don't you +remember when we were at Mackinac,[1] how one night we had to throw some +cold water in your face to make you wake up?" + +"I guess that was the same night," retorted Fred, "when I had to +administer condign and physical chastisement to you, you were kicking so +in the bed." + +"Yes, I have a very vivid recollection of that part of that night." + +"Almost as vivid as you have of to-night," laughed George. + +"I don't see anything to laugh at," said Fred sharply. "You ask the +other fellows if somebody didn't call my name." + +"It did sound like it," said John, "but then we were ready to believe +almost anything and when Fred said there was somebody calling him we all +heard 'Fred' on every side of us. What are we doing out here, anyway? +Why don't we go back there and look into it?" + +"I'm going to look into it," said Fred quickly, "but I'm not going to +look when I can't see. It's so dark to-night that you can't find +anything." + +"You seem to have found some things that made you leave the room faster +than George goes when he runs the hundred in ten flat." + +"Maybe I did," admitted Fred, "but if I did I want to tell you I never +ran a race in which I was so hard pushed as I was to-night. There wasn't +room to put a sheet of paper between Grant and me." + +"That's all right," spoke up Grant. "I didn't take any part in your +foolish conversation, but what I want to know is how you can account for +these things." + +"If you ask me," said George, "I'm not accounting for them." + +"But there's some way to find out what these things mean. There isn't +one of us a big enough fool to believe that there is such a thing as a +ghost and yet we got into the old Meeker House,--" + +"If there isn't any ghost," spoke up George, "then I don't see where the +trouble is. You can't be afraid of something that isn't, can you?" + +"I don't suppose you can," admitted Grant, "but sometimes you can be +afraid of things you think are when they are not." + +"You're getting too deep for me," said Fred. "What I want to know is +about those wings. That room seemed to be just full of something that +was flying all around." + +"I'll tell you what it was," spoke up John. + +"What was it?" inquired Fred quickly. + +"Cherubs." + +"What?" + +"Cherubs. Don't you know what cherubs are? They are just heads with +wings. You can find them on old tomb-stones and in the pictures of some +of the old books. I have always thought that a cherub must be almost as +happy as the people said he used to be. He didn't have to bother about +any clothes except neckties and a hat. It doesn't take him very long to +get from one place to another. In fact I think if Fred here was a cherub +he would have had less trouble getting out of that house to-night than +he did." + +"You seem to be greatly troubled about my leaving that house," spoke up +Fred testily. "I noticed that I wasn't alone." + +"Except when you started," suggested Grant. "We thought you were in +trouble and came out to see if we could help." + +"You did?" laughed Fred derisively. "I'll tell you what I'll do, Grant, +if you'll go back into that house with me right now I'll go too." + +"I'm going back there," said Grant slowly, "but as has been said I am +going back when I can see something." + +"That's what I thought," retorted Fred tauntingly. + +"It's all right, fellows," spoke up George. "I guess we have had enough +for one night. I don't suppose there really is anything in the things we +have heard to-night, and we'll find out pretty soon just what it is, but +until we do I think it's great fun to go into the old house and stir up +the spooks." + +"Do you know, I have an idea what those flying creatures were?" +suggested John. + +"What were they?" inquired George. + +"Bats probably." + +"Bats?" exclaimed Fred scornfully. "Bats? Why those things had wings at +least two feet long. You could hear them flapping over your head." + +"That's about on the scale that you heard and saw everything to-night, +Fred. That is, everything except the length of the steps you took when +you were leaving. I would like to understand how a fellow who is only +five feet four can take steps that are ten feet long." + +"There's only one answer to that," said George, "and that is, he +didn't." + +"You don't know what you're talking about," retorted Grant. "You didn't +see him. I did." + +"See me?" exclaimed Fred. "See me! Why his hands were right on my +shoulder all the while. I couldn't shake him off. He almost had me there +two or three times. I'm not sure that I wouldn't rather have Fagan's +spook get hold of me than Grant's hands when he is as scared as he was +to-night." + +"Well, fellows, what shall we do?" inquired George. "Do you want to give +it up or go back?" + +"Both," said Fred quickly. "We're not going back again to-night and +we're not going to give it up. We're going ahead and find out what there +is in that tomfoolery." + +"Well, I see you have a little piece of nerve left yet," laughed George. +"I told you what was coming but you wouldn't believe me." + +"Was that the reason why you went outside, George?" demanded John. "You +remember, fellows," he added, turning to his companions, "George went +around to the back of the old house. He was outside where he could get a +fine running start if he had to." + +"That may all be," said George slowly, "but my running start wasn't much +compared with the one you fellows had. If you didn't get a running start +I am wondering what time you would make if you had one. My, what a thing +it would be at the track meet to have one of these ghosts to start the +fellows off. I think the next time I see Grant on the track I'll yell +Fagan at him. I think he will break the record if I do. Especially if +Fred is just ahead of him. If you're not going back into the house," he +continued, "I think we had better go back to the machine and start for +home." + +The boys all agreed and soon were seated in the car, riding swiftly back +toward the farm. + +Their confidence returned in proportion to the distance that intervened +between them and the house which they had just visited. Indeed, when at +last they arrived at the farmhouse every one was loud in his declaration +that he had not been frightened by what had occurred and was strong in +his determination to go back and investigate the things which had seemed +so mysterious. + +Nevertheless, in spite of their boasting, it was plain that Fred was +somewhat chagrined by the quickness and rapidity of his departure from +the old Meeker House. Several times that evening a sly allusion to his +speed brought a quick retort. + +The following morning, however, the courage and good spirits of the boys +had returned in full measure. Even Fred was not afraid to acknowledge +his fear of the night before and laughed as heartily as any of his +friends when they described his antics in his flight from the house. + +"That doesn't make any difference," he asserted strongly. "I'm still one +of the Go Ahead boys and I haven't given up the plan I spoke about." + +"What's your plan, Freddie?" laughed John. + +"I'm going to look into the old house by daylight." + +"I wouldn't do that yet," suggested George soberly. "It seems to me the +best plan will be for us to go down there again to-night and find out +whether or not there really is anything in what we thought we heard and +saw last night." + +"We might take a gun," suggested Grant. + +"What would you shoot?" said Fred scornfully. "Suppose you did find a +spook and shot it, what good would it do? I suppose they aren't like +other people." + +After a long consultation it finally was agreed that another visit to +the mysterious house should be made that evening and then if anything +strange occurred the boys would make further investigation the following +day. + +----- +[1] See "The Go Ahead Boys on Smugglers' Island." + + + + +CHAPTER V--A SURPRISE + + +Meanwhile Fred had decided that he would make some investigations of his +own. His apparent lack of courage had reacted now and he was determined +to do something which would enable him to redeem himself in the eyes of +his companions. + +Accordingly when his friends decided early in the afternoon that they +would take the automobile and go to the country club for a game of +tennis he excused himself on the plea that there were some other and +very important matters to which he must attend. + +It was a matter of self-denial for Fred to decline to join his +companions in a visit to the country club. This place throughout the +summer afternoons was one that was marked in the region. Crowds of young +people assembled there and the tennis courts and golf links were +occupied by people who were finding their vacation days passing all too +rapidly in the beautiful region. + +To the protests of his friends Fred refused to listen. Even the fact +that his absence might prevent a game of tennis from being played did +not appeal to him. He quietly and steadfastly adhered to his purpose. + +Soon after luncheon he saw his friends depart, although the last words +he heard were their calls for him to reconsider and join them. + +Previous to their departure George called Fred into the library and in a +low voice said to him, "Take my advice, lad, and don't try it." + +"Don't try what?" Fred inquired. + +"You know what I mean." + +"I haven't the least idea." + +"Well, then I tell you again that my advice to you is not to do it." + +"But I don't know what you mean." + +"If you'll think it over for two or three hours I'm sure you'll find +out," declared George and he withdrew from the room. + +George's warning was still fresh in Fred's mind when the boys no longer +could be seen. He was still mystified by the strange warning. He was +positive that he had not spoken to any of his friends concerning the +project in his mind and therefore it was impossible that George could +have heard any word of his plans. + +Assured that his companions had departed, Fred soon afterward set forth +on his solitary expedition. He had, however, not entered the road before +he saw the automobile returning. + +"What's wrong?" he called as the car stopped in front of the long, +winding driveway that led to the farmhouse, which was located back on +the hillside. + +"I went off without my tennis racquet," explained George. "You have +decided to come with us, haven't you, Fred? + +"No, I'm not going," replied Fred. + +"But you're going somewhere," said George. "What are you doing down here +in the road if you're not? I thought you had some very important matters +which you had to attend to this afternoon?" + +"I have," and Fred refused to listen to the renewed pleadings of his +friend, although he did not start on his way to the old Meeker House +until once more the automobile had passed out of sight. He was +suspicious as he walked on that George's return for the racquet had been +a pretense on his part. He was somewhat suspicious now that George +believed he was about to go back to the old house, although what had +given him that impression it was impossible for him to say. + +On his journey Fred had taken with him the collie dog which belonged to +George. The animal was unusually beautiful and its owner was exceedingly +proud of it, as it had won a prize whenever he had exhibited it. + +Delighted to be permitted to accompany Fred the intelligent animal +expressed his pleasure in his own noisy and active manner. + +It was not until Fred at last had arrived at the road in front of the +old house that the collie displayed any uneasiness. When Fred turned in +at the open gateway the dog, looking up into his face whined, and then +apparently convinced that protests on his part were unavailing, turned +and ran from the place. + +Startled by the unexpected action Fred returned to the road and watched +the dog as it fled swiftly homeward. A feeling of uneasiness crept over +him despite his attempt to laugh. It was impossible for spooks to be +found, he assured himself, on such a day. The afternoon sun, warm, and +yet not unduly warm, was flooding the beautiful region with its beams. +The fertile land, the attractive houses, even the woods back upon the +hillside all seemed to be sharing in the absolute quiet that prevailed. +Not a sound was to be heard save the noisy flights of the winged +grasshoppers or the occasional unmusical sound which proclaimed the +presence of locusts. + +Determined to ignore the momentary impression which the unwillingness of +the dog to accompany him into the old house had aroused, Fred once more +turned toward the rear of the old building. A fallen grape-arbor on his +right and the tangled mass of vines that grew along the ground showed +how long it had been since the place had received any attention. There +was an air of neglect and decay manifest wherever he looked. The passing +boys had thrown stones or snowballs at the windows until only a few +panes were left. The chimneys had crumbled in part, so that not one was +standing in its original form. The grass was high and tangled and the +shrubs in the yard were rank and overgrown. The place which manifestly +at one time had been the abode of people who had given it every care and +affection had now been forgotten. + +And yet, was it really forgotten? Fred vividly recalled the experience +of the preceding evening as he advanced toward the kitchen door. The +door still was hanging upon its hinges and was only partly closed. +Doubtless it had been left ajar by George in his exit the night before. + +Fred stepped cautiously inside the building. The silence that followed +for a time was unbroken. The very stillness itself produced its effect +upon the boy and when he stopped and looked intently all about him, his +heart was beating rapidly, although he assured himself there was no +cause for fear. + +Suddenly from the front room came a sound that was unusual and somewhat +startling in the prevailing stillness. It was a sound not unlike that +produced by a noisy rattler in the hands of a small boy. The noise, +however, was forgotten, when, to Fred's intense amazement, which +included perhaps an element of alarm, he was startled by the sound of +footsteps on the stairway. + +Once more he assured himself that it was broad daylight. Again he +recalled the statement which he had heard many a time that in such +houses there was nothing to be feared except after the shades of night +had fallen. He could plainly see the rays of the afternoon sun as they +entered through the open window and fell across the floor of the room in +which he was standing. + +But the footsteps could not be denied. The sound became plainer. For an +instant Fred glanced timidly toward the door and was strongly tempted to +run from the place. + +Before he started, however, the footsteps ceased, the old door at the +foot of the stairway creaked upon its hinges and a moment later Fred saw +standing before him a man, whose appearance proclaimed him to be a +tramp. + +The surprise was mutual, and for a moment the man and the boy stared +blankly at each other. Fred suspected that the stranger doubtless had +been sleeping in the upper room. Indeed the boy laughed in his relief as +he was confident now that he had discovered the source of the strange +sounds that had been heard the preceding evening. + +"Hello, young man," called the tramp in a low, guttural voice. "Did you +come in here to wake me up? I told me valet not to call me until five +o'clock." + +"No, I didn't come in here to wake you up," said Fred quietly. + +"Maybe you come from the hospital?" + +"No," said Fred simply. + +"I'm expecting somebody from the hospital." + +"What's the matter? Are you sick?" + +"Yes, I be. Leastwise, I've got some symptoms I don't like." + +"Tell me what the trouble is," suggested Fred good-naturedly. "Perhaps I +can help you." + +"From the best I can find out I think I am threatened with hydrostatic +internal spontaneous combustion." + +"It's more likely your conscience," laughed Fred. + +"No, it isn't my conscience. I can stick a pin in that and not flinch. +No, it's something else that's the matter with me. I feel as if I were +burning up inside." + +"You're not going to get anything out of me," laughed Fred, "to put out +the fire." + +"That's a pity," said the tramp, who now seated himself quietly on the +foot of the stairs. "That's a pity. All I need is a nickel to stop that +roaring flame. I'm suffering from another trouble too," added the tramp. + +"What's that?" + +"Overweariness of the flesh. I've had that for considerable time. It's a +great source of suffering. Still, I don't know that either of those is +quite as bad as something else." + +"What, have you got more troubles still?" + +"Yes, I have." + +"What are they?" + +"Well, the chief one is that I'm an orphan. There isn't any home waiting +for little Willie." The man shook his head in mock pathos and Fred +laughed heartily. "I have consulted specialists," began the tramp once +more, "but I don't find any one to relieve me. The last man I went to +said he thought the best thing he could prescribe would be for me to go +out in the country where I could breathe fresh air and not have to +endure hard labor." + +"What were you doing, breaking stone?" laughed Fred. + +For a moment the tramp glared upon the lad, but a moment later he said +good-naturedly, "If I thought you knew what that meant I would give you +something to make you remember this visit a long time. No, my great +trouble is that I'm too ardent an American. I insist upon seeing my own +country. I have been going to and fro, wandering up and down the land--" + +"You're not the only one," broke in Fred. "It seems to me I've heard +about another individual who is going about like a roaring lion." + +"Why don't you come in and sit down," suggested the tramp, apparently +ignoring Fred's last suggestion. "Ever been in this old house before?" + +"Once." + +"When was that?" + +"Last night." + +"How long did you stay?" + +"I don't remember. We left in such a hurry," said Fred somewhat +ruefully. + +"Oh, you found the spooks, did you?" + +"We heard some strange noises. The strangest of all was that some one +called my name." + +"Oh, that's not strange," declared the tramp lightly. "I've been in this +house hundreds of times. I have heard my name called and never flinched +once. Sometimes the constable calls it and sometimes somebody else, but +it doesn't make any difference; I never answer. If you'd like to look +through the old house I'll show you around." + + + + +CHAPTER VI--A PRISONER + + +"That's just what I should like to do," exclaimed Fred eagerly. + +The knowledge that he was not to make the investigation entirely alone +doubtless strengthened the courage of the boy. All his friends were +aware that he was not cowardly and yet somehow his strange experience of +the preceding evening in the old Meeker House had deeply affected him. +Convinced as he was that there was an explanation to be found for every +mysterious happening, nevertheless he was somewhat nervous at the +thought of being alone in the neglected building. + +"I have spent some time in here," said the tramp, "as I told you. It is +a queer old house. For example, right here in this room," he added as he +led the way into the front room, "there is a concealed closet. I don't +think any one would ever find it unless he was told of it." + +As he spoke the strange man turned a button, which was apparently a part +of the molding of the stairway. + +In response to his quick and energetic pull a door was opened and as +Fred peered within he saw there was a small room perhaps six or seven +feet square. It was directly under the stairway and when he looked into +the adjoining room he saw that it extended within that room also. + +"What was that for?" he said as he turned to his companion. + +"I don't know," replied the tramp. "I suspect, though, that that is +where they used to put the boys when they were naughty." + +The tone of the man's voice, the language which he used; indeed the very +bearing of the stranger, increased Fred's curiosity concerning him. Was +this man no more than he appeared to be? Was he really a tramp, as he +said he was? His clothing was old and worn, the care of his person had +been neglected and at first glance any observer might think that he was +an ordinary vagabond. Perhaps he was, Fred thought, and yet somehow he +was convinced that there were other things to be explained in connection +with the stranger. + +"Come up stairs," said the tramp, leading the way up the stairway. + +Fred followed obediently and soon found himself in the hallway from +which opened several rooms. Some of these were large, though all were +low. For a moment, as he stopped to look about him, it seemed to Fred +that he almost saw the sights that the house had witnessed one hundred +years before this time. What stories of life and death, of suffering and +joy these old rooms might have told had they been endowed with the power +of speech. + +Somehow, although Fred was unable to account for his feeling, it seemed +that unseen witnesses were about him and that the presence of himself +and the tramp in these rooms was very like an intrusion. He did not +speak concerning his feelings, however, and after a hasty inspection the +two returned to the room below. + +"What's that?" demanded Fred suddenly as from the chimney there came +sounds like those which he had heard the preceding evening. + +"I cannot see," replied the tramp, his eyes twinkling as he spoke. + +"I cannot see, either," said Fred, "but I can hear. Don't you know what +that noise is?" As he spoke the strange sound was repeated. It was a +broken note, sharp and yet long-drawn out. It was clearly heard, too, +and yet Fred was convinced now that it was no ghostly voice from which +the chatter came. But what was it? His companion did not explain to him +and he himself had no conception of the source of the strange sound. + +They proceeded through the various rooms on the first floor, but nothing +was discovered that in any way explained the mysterious events which +Fred had come to investigate. + +Conversation had almost ceased, the tramp seldom speaking except to call +to Fred to follow him, and Fred only occasionally asking such questions +as occurred to him. + +"The cellar is the strangest part of all," said the tramp. "You don't +want to leave until you have seen that part of the old house." + +"All right," declared Fred lightly. "I came over to see what I could +find, and if there's anything in the cellar worth finding I want to see +it." + +The stairs to the cellar were low and broad, but the wood in places had +decayed and fallen away. As a consequence when the tramp descended upon +the third step the rotten timbers in part gave way and he was compelled +to leap to the ground below him. Fred too jumped, but the mishap did not +cause any inconvenience, though neither of them spoke when both arose. + +The light was dim, entering the place from two open windows which were +just above the ground. In silence the investigators moved about the +place until at last Fred said, "It seems to me like a dungeon down here. +I don't know what they could have kept here." + +"Probably they used to come down here with a candle. I have an idea that +if you boys thought you saw and heard strange things here last night you +were not unlike the boys of one hundred years ago who came down here +after apples and potatoes." + +"That's right," laughed Fred, although his laughter was not hearty. "No +man could crawl through either of those two windows. There isn't much +more than room enough to put your arm through either of them." + +"Wait a minute," said the tramp abruptly. "I'll be back here with a +light. I want to show you something." + +"What is it?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, there's a well here in one corner. I don't know whether it was +made in case the Meekers were attacked by the Indians and they wanted to +be sure of having what water they needed, or whether the house was built +over the old well, which they perhaps filled in and since then it has +fallen away." + +"Never mind," called Fred. "I'll go upstairs with you. I don't care +anything about the old well." + +"But I want to show it to you," declared the tramp. "You wait here and +I'll be back in a minute." + +Hastily the strange man retraced his way to the room above, but no +sooner had he gained the place he was seeking than the massive door was +dropped into place and left Fred in almost complete darkness. + +The first feeling of the boy was that some accident had befallen his +recent companion. He listened intently, but he did not hear any sound +that indicated any trouble in the room above. + +Following this feeling of fear came the sensation of intense loneliness. +Although the room was only dimly lighted, by this time Fred's eyes had +become somewhat accustomed to the semi-darkness and he was able to see +all about him. A pile of boards in one corner of the cellar were the +only objects he distinguished. + +At first Fred had no feeling of fear. He expected the door to be opened +at once and he waited confidently for a hail from the man who had just +left him. However, when several minutes elapsed and he heard no call nor +was any attempt made to open the door, a feeling of alarm swept over +him. Again he glanced hastily about the cellar and keenly watched the +light of the setting sun as its beams were cast through the little +windows. + +Convinced that night was near at hand and somewhat alarmed now at his +predicament, Fred rushed to the heavy door and did his utmost to lift +it. Whether or not the door was fastened he did not know, but his +efforts were unavailing. The massive door was unmoved and when a few +minutes had elapsed Fred was convinced that he was helpless to lift it. + +Astonished by what he had already learned, he remained standing at the +foot of the stairway and in his loudest tones called to the man who had +recently left him. "Open the door! Open the door!" he shouted. "I can't +get out. The door is fast." + +His tones increased in loudness as he discovered that no attention was +paid his hail. + +Repeatedly the anxious lad pounded upon the cellar-door and repeated his +calls. The silence that rested over the old house was unbroken. +Apparently no one was within hailing distance. What had become of the +tramp was not clear, but apparently he had departed from the old Meeker +House. + +Almost desperate now, Fred dragged the boards from the corner in which +he had discovered them and piling them up on the floor beneath the +little window that opened upon the road he soon was able to look out +upon the scene. No one was within sight. To call for help now would be +useless, if the tramp really had departed from the house. + +He carefully examined the windows to see if it would be possible for him +to lift the sash and thus make an opening that would be large enough to +enable him to crawl through. He was unable, however, to accomplish his +task and soon concluded that his sole reliance now was to wait until +some one passed in the road and call to him for help. + +Not many minutes had passed before a farm-wagon, drawn by two horses, +was seen approaching. The farmer who was driving the team was apparently +unaware of any call upon him, for his rattling wagon soon passed on and +in spite of Fred's loudest calls for help he did not stop. + +"I don't believe I am making enough noise," Fred sturdily declared to +himself. "The next one that passes I'll make him hear me whether he +wants to or not." + +A brief time afterward he discovered a boy driving a cow not far away on +the road. He was approaching the corner on which the old Meeker House +stood and in a brief time would be within hailing distance. + +Convinced that his call before had not been heard because he had not +used tones sufficiently loud, Fred increased his efforts. He shouted in +tones that were unnatural, they were so high keyed. He then whistled and +gave his school yell as being likely to be heeded when his own call +might be unheard. + +Nor were his efforts in vain. Fred saw the boy when he approached the +corner stop abruptly and give one startled look toward the old house. A +moment later Fred saw a picture which he never was able to forget. The +cow, with tail elevated, was running swiftly from the place, while close +behind her followed the boy, who at frequent intervals stopped and +looked behind him at the old Meeker House. It was evident to Fred what +thoughts were in the mind of the lad, for his frequent glances, as well +as his manner, betrayed his terror. Evidently he had heard stories of +the old place that had not induced him to enter the building when such +strange and unearthly sounds issued from the cellar. + +A moment later the horn of an automobile was heard and soon afterward a +car turned the corner. Fred was nearly hopeless by this time, but in +desperation once more he did his utmost to make his voice heard. The +automobile, however, passed on and apparently his calls for aid were +unheard. + +Darkness would be settling over the land within a few minutes. Fred +thought of his friends, who doubtless by this time had returned from the +country-club and were puzzled to account for the absence of their +friend. + +Convinced that he was the only one except the tramp who knew where he +was at that time, Fred resolutely prepared to endure the wait that must +elapse before relief could be had. As he turned away from the window he +was startled by sounds that came from the room directly above him. The +boy, alarmed now and thoroughly distressed, stopped abruptly and waited +for a repetition of the noise which had aroused him. + + + + +CHAPTER VII--AN ESCAPE + + +There was no question about the repetition of the strange sound in the +upper room. To the excited boy there were evidences that people were +walking over the board floors. Indeed, he was positive he could hear the +slow, measured footfalls of some one who was walking back and forth in +the room directly above him. A moment later he was equally convinced +that the sound of the whistling creatures which had been heard when the +four boys first visited the house was now repeated. + +A moment later there came a rushing sound of many wings. For a moment +Fred's courage almost deserted him, his flesh seemed to creep. He +stopped abruptly in the darkness and spoke aloud to himself, "This will +never do. It is all foolishness. There isn't any such thing as a spook +anyway, so why should you be afraid of one?" + +At that moment, however, the sound of the rushing wings was heard again +and all Fred's efforts to strengthen his heart proved unavailing. The +flying creatures were in the cellar, there was no question about that +now. Fred almost cried aloud as he heard the wings coming closer to the +place he was standing. + +A moment later the flying creatures seemed to be circling the cellar and +in the midst of it all the sharp twitter which had so strangely +impressed him the preceding evening was now heard again and within a few +feet of him. Then, too, there was the sound of some one walking again in +the room above him. Had Fred been in a less nervous condition he would +have been aware that it was no ghostly walk which he heard, for the +footfalls were heavy and plainly those of some one whose weight was not +slight. Fred, however, was in no condition calmly to consider these +things. The darkness was almost appalling now and surrounded as he was +by unseen winged creatures his fears redoubled. + +He looked again at the cellar windows, but escape through them was +impossible. Almost in a frenzy the frightened boy decided that help must +be found from some source. In his desperation he ran to the cellar door +and pushed against it with all his strength. To his amazement the door +readily yielded to his onslaught. He pushed up the heavy door and in a +moment he was in the yard. + +He was in the kitchen when the door once more fell back into its place. +The loud report startled the unseen creatures and even after he had +gained the ground outside the building he heard the strange twittering +that seemed now to come from the chimney. The noise made by the wings of +the flying creatures also was plainly heard. Whatever the explanation +might be the whole place and experience seemed so uncanny to the nervous +boy that he instantly fled toward the road not far away. + +Even when he gained the highway his one supreme thought still was of +flight. Instantly beginning to run he steadily increased the pace at +which he was fleeing until his breathing became labored and perspiration +was pouring down his face. Occasionally he glanced behind him in his mad +flight and on one occasion as he did so his foot was caught in some +obstruction and he was thrown heavily upon the ground. + +Falling, however, was not uncommon in the experience of Fred. Indeed, +his friends declared that he was like a rubber ball, he bounced up after +every fall as if the contact with the ground had only afforded him +additional power. + +The road was dusty and as Fred's flight continued his appearance became +steadily worse. Fortunately, however, in the dim light not one of the +few people who met him recognized him, or discovered his plight. The one +great purpose in his mind was still to run. The greatest possible +distance between himself and the old Meeker House must be made and in +his determination this distance steadily and rapidly increased. +Occasionally he glanced behind the trees, the dim outlines of which were +plainly to be seen. Somehow there was a fear in his mind that some enemy +might be loitering behind these shelters. Once when he ran past an old +and deserted barn that stood near the roadway he was confident that he +heard sounds of weird laughter issuing from the tumbling structure. +Indeed, in whichever direction the boy looked, it seemed to him he +discovered evidences of the very enemies whom he had left behind him in +his flight. + +Somehow at last Fred found himself in the long, shaded lane or driveway +that led from the road up to the house of his friend. The trees were +tall poplars and stood like sentinels guarding each side of the road. +Even now Fred's fears had not disappeared, although he saw the lights +gleam from the windows of the old farmhouse before him. + +So weary was he by his long flight and worn by his excitement that when +at last he swiftly mounted the steps of the piazza his foot slipped and +once more the unfortunate boy fell upon the floor. + +Aroused by the sound his three friends instantly rushed from the room in +which they were seated and a moment later discovered their friend in his +predicament. + +"What in the world is the matter with you?" demanded George as the three +boys gazed in astonishment at Fred. + +"N-n-o-t-h-in'. N-n-o-t-h-in'," gasped Fred. + +"You look as if there was nothing doing," said Grant, repressing a smile +as the plight of Fred became manifest in the light. "Actually you look +as if you belonged in a lunatic asylum." + +"I guess I do," responded Fred. + +"Well, what's the matter?" demanded John. "You haven't told us where you +have been nor what you have been doing." + +"I can't. I can't now," said Fred. "Give me a chance to rest up." + +"You need a bath more than you need a rest," declared George laughingly, +as he became convinced that nothing serious had happened to his friend. +"Come upstairs and I'll see that you get what you deserve." + +"It's lucky everybody doesn't get what he deserves. If he did--" + +"Never mind that," directed George. "Come on upstairs and take your bath +and get a change of clothes and you'll feel in your right mind once +more." + +Acting promptly upon the suggestion Fred withdrew from his friends for a +time and a half-hour later, when he returned to the piazza, he was not +able entirely to conceal his feeling of chagrin. It was true that he had +had some strange experiences, but it was difficult now to believe that +they were all real. Certainly his companions were very much in evidence +and as they seated themselves, George said promptly, "Now my lad, tell +us what happened to you." + +"Well, I don't mind telling you," said Fred, "that I went over to the +old Meeker House." + +"That's just what I thought," laughed George, "and you stayed there +until it was so dark that you heard those strange noises again, didn't +you?" + +"Yes, sir, I did that, and a good deal more." + +"What else? Tell us about it. Why don't you talk?" demanded John +impatiently. + +"It isn't anything I want to talk much about," said Fred positively in a +low voice. "I tell you there's something strange about that house. I +went over there late this afternoon and found a tramp." + +"Where?" broke in George. "In the house?" + +"Yes, it was in the house and he at once offered to become my guide, +counselor and friend." + +"What do you mean?" inquired Grant. + +"Just what I say," said Fred. "He showed me through the old building. +Finally he took me into the cellar and left me there, though he took +pains not to close the old cellar-door. For a while I didn't mind it, +but when I found I couldn't get out of the place, for the windows were +too small for me to crawl through, and I couldn't lift the big door, I +didn't know just what to do." + +"Well, what did you do?" demanded John. + +"Why, I called, shouted and whistled through the window, but I couldn't +get anybody to pay any attention to me. Yes, there was one who heard +me," he added. "He was a small boy driving a cow and when he heard the +calls from the old Meeker House he lost no time in withdrawing from that +part of the country. Even the cow he was driving seemed to feel just as +he did, for her tail went up and her head down and she joined in the +race in that graceful, polite way that cows have when they run." + +"It's plain you saw something besides the spooks then," said George, +laughing heartily. "Look yonder," he added quickly, pointing as he spoke +toward the end of the piazza. + +In the dim light Uncle Sim was seen standing there, his eye-balls +shining and his intense interest in the conversation of the boys +manifest in the expression of his face. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," he said when the boys first became aware of his +presence, "I don' tol' yo' not to go near dat ol' Meeker House." + +"Don't you ever go there?" asked Fred. + +"Me go dar? No, suh. No, suh. It would take fo' yoke ob oxen to make me +go inside dat ol' house in de daytime and in de night I reckon Caleb's +Army couldn't drive me in dar'." + +"What became of your tramp friend?" inquired George when the boys arose +to enter the room. + +"That's what I should like to know," said Fred somewhat ruefully. + +"Well, come on in, we'll all feel better after dinner," said George +cheerfully, as he led the way into the dining room. + +The strange experience which had befallen Fred was the chief topic of +conversation. Even their interest, however, was broken when a half-hour +had passed and word was brought that Uncle Sim was desirous of speaking +at once to Mr. George. + +Excusing himself George withdrew from the dining room and a few minutes +later when he returned he said, "What do you think has happened, +fellows?" + +"We don't know. How should we know?" retorted John. "If you've got +something to say why don't you say it?" + +"That's just what I am going to do," said George, but he had scarcely +begun his statement before his three friends leaped from their seats at +the table and quickly followed him as he led the way out of the house. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII--THE LOST CAR + + +"What's the trouble? What's the trouble?" demanded George excitedly when +the boys had run out through the kitchen door. + +"Uncle Sim says that my car is gone," replied George. + +"Gone? Gone where?" demanded Grant. + +"He doesn't know and that's what he wanted to find out from us." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," broke in the old colored man who now approached +the place where the boys were standing. "Dat car sho' am gone. I jes' +came to fin' out if any ob yo' young gen'lemen disremembered who might +hab tuk de car." + +"Why, there hasn't anybody taken it," said John. "Have you looked in the +garage, George?" + +In spite of his perplexity George laughed slightly as he said, "I +certainly have. You don't think I would solemnly state to you that the +car was gone if I had seen it in the garage, do you?" + +The boys by this time had advanced to the open door of the garage and a +hasty examination confirmed the statement of the old colored man that +the automobile was not there. + +"What do you suppose it means?" inquired Fred. + +"It means somebody has taken it," replied George. + +"You mean stolen it?" + +"That's what I don't know. I'm trying to explain to you fellows that the +car isn't here and if it isn't here it must be somewhere else. Now, if +it is somewhere else how did it get there and who took it there? Do you +see? Can I make any impression on any of you?" + +"Why don't you say in plain English just what you mean?" retorted John. +"Do you think your car has been stolen?" + +"I know it's gone and that's all I know." + +"What are you going to do about it?" + +"I'm going to take you fellows and Uncle Sim in the old car and find out +what has happened to the new one, if I can." + +"That's all right, we'll be with you in a minute," declared George. + +Speedily the boys entered the house and securing their caps at once +prepared to accompany George, who soon started down the lane toward the +road beyond. There was no plan clearly defined in his mind nor had any +one in the party any suggestions to make as to whom the thief might be +or what had become of the missing automobile. + +In response to George's queries Uncle Sim related his own experiences. +He had been coming in from the barn and noticed that the door of the +garage was still open. As he had strict orders to see that this was +closed every night, he turned aside to carry out the directions. To his +surprise he found that the new automobile was not in its accustomed +place. His first thought naturally was that the boys had taken it for +another drive and yet at that very moment he heard the sound of their +laughter issuing from the dining-room. + +Puzzled by the fact he at once entered the house and soon made his +presence and his errand known. + +His statement, startling as it was, at first had not alarmed George, but +as soon as he had made a hasty investigation he too was as troubled as +his dusky friend. The car was gone and there was no accounting for its +departure. + +"Did any of you fellows hear the automobile when it went down the +driveway?" George inquired of his friends as they sped along the dusty +road. + +"Not one of us," said John, positively. + +"That's the trouble in having such a good car," said George dryly. "You +see it makes so little noise that it couldn't be heard a few feet away." + +"I don't think that was it," spoke up Grant. "I think it's because +certain members of our party were making so much noise that an +earthquake or thunder would have been drowned." + +"That's all right, then," said George dryly. "You wait until we find +that car and then we'll talk a little more about it." + +"What was the number of your car?" asked Fred. + +"27155." + +"I think a man has got more nerve to steal an automobile than anything +else. Of course he knows he will be taken," declared Fred. + +"Not always," answered George. "Down on the sea shore there was a +certain firm last summer that did a regular business in stolen +automobiles. They painted them different colors and did a few little +things that altered the appearance so that a man wouldn't recognize his +own car." + +"Is that so? Is that true?" demanded Grant. + +"It certainly is. I know a man who lost a car down there. Those men work +all through the towns and cities in the northern part of the state and +run down to the seashore with the stolen cars in the night when nobody +is around and the next day the cars wouldn't be recognized by the very +men who were looking for them." + +"Well, I hope we shan't find your car down there," said Fred warmly. + +"I hope we shan't," replied George, "though the main thing I want just +now is to find the car anyway. Some of the good times I promised you +fellows this summer will go begging, I'm afraid, if we have lost our +automobile." + +"We'll find it, George," said John, patting his friend on the shoulder. + +Meanwhile Uncle Sim, who was still a member of the party, had taken no +share in the conversation. At that moment, however, he uttered an +exclamation of surprise and directed the attention of the Go Ahead boys +to the old Meeker House which now was not far ahead of them. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," said Uncle Sim, his voice trembling in his +excitement. "I sho' do see some lights in dat cellar ob de ol' house. +'Pears like dere's always somethin' wrong in de ole Meeker House." + +"How it is, Fred? Do you agree with Uncle Sim?" laughed George. + +"I never saw any lights in it," replied Fred glumly. + +"No, but that's what you wanted to see, I guess, more than anything +else," laughed Grant. "But there's a light there now," he added +suddenly, "I saw it myself. It shines for a minute and then it is gone. +There it is again!" he exclaimed a moment later. "You can see it shining +through the cellar windows. What do you suppose it is?" + +"Spooks," said George solemnly. "They usually have a supper there once a +year and I think to-night is the regular time for their meeting." + +"Do you want to stop?" demanded Fred quickly. + +"I don't mind," replied George. There was no enthusiasm, however, +manifest among the boys, although every one jokingly declared that he +was not afraid. The excuse was commonly given that the necessity of +hasty investigation into the loss of the automobile demanded action in +other directions. Consequently no stop was made and although every boy +was frequently glancing behind him at the old Meeker House no light was +seen nor did any additional or unusual sounds come from that direction. + +When the boys had gone beyond the corner their thoughts once more +returned to the problem which was confronting them. The mystery of the +lost car must be solved. Although there were many suggestions offered +there was not one of the boys that had any clearly outlined plan as to +what must be done in order to find the lost car or obtain information +concerning those who had taken it. + +"I have a suggestion," broke in Grant at last. + +"What's that?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, it's your friend, the tramp. Probably he's the man who has been +hanging around the place for several days and when his opportunity came +he took it." + +"Which do you mean, the opportunity, or the car?" laughed Fred. + +"Both. His opportunity was to take the car." + +"That tramp," declared Fred solemnly, "didn't have strength enough about +him to push the button to turn on the power." + +"That's something you don't know," retorted his friend. "I think when +you are through with it you'll find that the car disappeared at the same +time the tramp did. No one has seen him since," added Grant, positively. + +"And from all I can learn," retorted Fred, "nobody saw him before except +myself, so you haven't run down your problem yet." + +When the boys arrived at the Corners, as the little nearby hamlet was +called, they made many inquiries of the people they met, but no word +concerning the missing car was heard. There were several suggestions +from the country people that other cars had been lost within the past +few weeks, but none of them was able to add to the information which the +boys already possessed. + +Disappointed by their failures, George at last said, "I think the best +thing for us to do will be to go back home. I'll call up my father on +the 'phone and if he isn't coming out pretty soon he will tell me what +to do." + +In response to George's suggestion the boys once more clambered into the +car and in a brief time were noisily speeding over the road on their way +back to their friend's house. + +"We've got two mysteries now," suggested George. + +"Three you mean," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"We've got the mystery of the lost car and the mystery of the old Meeker +House. That makes two. I don't see where your third comes in." + +"The third is our mysterious friend, the tramp, that I saw in the old +Meeker House." + +"What's the mystery about him?" laughed George. "I don't find anything +very mysterious about an unwashed tramp you found in the old house. Very +likely he had crawled in there to sleep and you waked him up." + +"He was awake all right," declared Fred promptly. "There isn't any +question about that. He wasn't moving around as fast as I have seen +some, but he didn't take it all out in motions, either." + +"It seems to me," laughed Grant, "that you find in that tramp whatever +you want to find, Fred. First you say he's one kind of man and then you +tell us he's another." + +"Wait until you see him," said Fred sagely. "Maybe he's in the old house +now. It can't be far ahead." + +"Not more than a quarter of a mile," suggested Grant. + +For some reason the boys became silent as the car speeded forward in the +dim light. The eyes of every one were turned toward the old house which +had perplexed them in so many ways. + +As they came near the corner John said in a low voice, "There's not only +a ghost of a man in that house, but there's the ghost of the automobile. +Do you hear that horn?" + +All the boys listened intently and to their consternation the faint +sound of a horn was heard, issuing from the old house. + +"What do you suppose that means?" demanded Fred in a whisper. + +"I told you there was the ghost of an automobile in that house, didn't +I?" demanded John. + +"Look yonder," called Grant quickly. "There's that light again in the +cellar. Don't you think we had better stop and find out what all this +means?" + +At that moment the faint sound of the horn was heard again from the +house and for an instant lights flashed from every window. + +These, however, quickly disappeared and although the boys waited several +minutes, the sound was not repeated nor were the lights again seen. + + + + +CHAPTER IX--ANOTHER FLIGHT + + +"What do you suppose that means?" demanded Fred in a whisper. + +"Things are seldom what they seem," said Grant. + +"What do you mean?" again demanded Fred, turning sharply upon his +friend. "Don't you think there are lights there? Didn't you hear the +sound of the automobile horn?" + +"I certainly did," acknowledged Grant, "but that isn't all there is to +it. There are some things we don't see in connection with these things." + +"Come on," urged George, "let's all get out and go in there and see if +we cannot see those other things that Grant is telling about." + +For a moment there was silence in the little party, but at last, as no +one was desirous of being looked upon as cowardly by his friends, all +four boys stepped down upon the ground. + +"Come on, Uncle Sim," called George. "You aren't going to be left +behind." + +"We don' lose one car," remarked the aged negro, his teeth chattering as +he spoke. + +"And we don't want to lose another, do we, Uncle Sim?" said George. "I +don't think anybody can take it without our knowing it, so you can come +along, Uncle Sim, if you want to." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," responded the negro. "D'rec'ly, d'rec'ly." + +George laughed, as the old man slowly and with manifest reluctance +climbed down upon the ground. His "mis'ry" plainly was unusually +troublesome, for he walked with a great effort and very slowly. Indeed, +he groaned with every step that he took, as he followed the boys on +their way to the old house. + +Silence fell upon the party when they drew near the building. No lights +now were to be seen in any of its windows. Silence rested over the +quaint old structure and apparently there was nothing to explain the +strange sights and sounds which recently had issued from the venerable +building. + +"You boys stay here and go into the house by the front door and I'll go +around to the kitchen," said George. + +"What for?" demanded Fred. + +"Why, we'll be more certain," explained George, "to find out if there is +anything wrong here if we come at the old house from two sides." + +"I think I'll go with you," spoke up Grant quickly. + +"There's no need of that," protested George sharply. Indeed the lad +spoke too sharply, for the suspicions of Grant were instantly aroused by +the evident desire of his friend not to have him accompany him. +Knowledge of that fact, however, was sufficient of itself to increase +Grant's determination. + +"We had better divide up the party evenly," he suggested. "John and Fred +can stay here and watch this side and I'll go with you around to the +kitchen door." + +With manifest reluctance, though he made no further protest, George +accepted the suggestion of his friend and together the two boys soon +disappeared from the sight of their companions. + +"Who's that?" whispered Fred as he grasped the arm of John, who was +standing beside him, and pointing to an approaching figure of a man. + +"That's Uncle Sim," replied John after a hasty glance at the approaching +form. + +John's words were verified when a few moments later Uncle Sim, his voice +trembling and his terror manifest in his entire bearing, approached the +spot where the two boys were standing. Indeed, had it not been for the +presence of John and Fred, Uncle Sim with all his "mis'ry" would not +have been induced to approach the uncanny place. + +"Come on," said John a moment later. "We're going into the house to find +out about those lights." + +No protest was made and together the two boys, followed by Uncle Sim, +whose reluctance manifestly increased with every passing moment, pushed +open the sagging front door and entered the front room. + +For a moment they were unable to distinguish any objects in the +darkness. From the small windows the faint light entered, but it was not +sufficient to enable the boys to see about them. Suddenly the strange +whirring of winds was heard again. Now the sound came from the ceiling +and then again it seemed to the startled boys that it was close to the +place where they were standing. Back and forth and up and down the +strange sounds continued, occasionally broken by a plaintive note as if +the creature that was darting about the room was in terror or pain. + +Uncle Sim, unable longer to control his feelings, began to pray, but +even his prayer did not prevent him from speedily fleeing from the room. + +Fred glanced through the open door and saw the old negro making most +excellent time as he ran across the field toward the waiting automobile. +Under other circumstances he would have laughed heartily, but just now +there was excitement sufficient to prevent the boys from following the +retreating old negro. + +In the midst of the sounds of the wings suddenly a prolonged groan was +heard. It seemed to both Fred and John that it issued from some place +close to them. Several times the startling noise was repeated and then +was followed by a strange whistling. + +For some reason, which neither of the two boys explained to the other, +they had not advanced farther into the room. Both glanced behind them to +make certain that the door was still open and their way of escape was +unimpeded. + +"Where are the other fellows?" whispered Fred. + +"I don't know. Shall I call them?" + +"Yes," said Fred eagerly, + +"Hello, there is George. Where are you, Grant?" called John, striving to +speak boldly, though in spite of his efforts his voice trembled as he +spoke. + +Instead of a response from their companion a faint sound of an auto horn +was heard in the old building. It was mournful beyond the power of +either boy to describe. Instead of the sharp, short "honk," it was +prolonged and weird. + +"This is too much for me," said Fred sharply. "I have seen all I want to +see. The other fellows aren't here and I'm not going into this old house +any further unless I can see my way." + +"What's that? What's that?" whispered John excitedly. + +As he spoke the sound of some one running around the corner of the house +was heard by both boys. In a moment John and Fred were outside the old +building and as they became aware that the fugitives were George and +Grant they lost no time in following them. + +In the distance Uncle Sim could be seen climbing into the automobile. It +was marvelous too what excellent time all four boys were making. Swiftly +as George and Grant were running they were soon overtaken by their +companions and together all four arrived at the place in the road where +their automobile had been left. + +At that moment there came a sound from the old Meeker House very like a +wild burst of laughter. This was repeated and the terror of Uncle Sim +became still more pronounced. + +"There goes that auto horn again," said George, as he grasped the wheel +and looked behind to see if his friends were ready to start. "Uncle +Sim," called George just before he started, "I wish you would see if +that back tire on the left is all right. We don't want to start out on a +flat tire." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," answered Uncle Sim quickly, as he obediently +climbed out of the car and inspected the tire. "It's all right, suh," he +repeated. "It's all right." + +In his eagerness to be gone George at once started, unaware that the +aged negro had not yet returned to his seat. + +His ignorance was speedily dispelled when from the darkness behind them +came several agonizing calls for help, "Hi dar, don't leave me! Don't +leave me! Wait! Wait dar!" + +As the boys glanced behind them they saw the old man running swiftly +toward them and making even better time than when he had departed from +the old Meeker House. + +Obediently George stopped the automobile and in a moment Uncle Sim, +breathless and excited, climbed into the seat. + +"There's one thing I don't understand, Uncle Sim," said George, laughing +as he spoke. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," responded the negro. "Dat's jes' de way I feel." + +"What I can't understand," said George, "is why it is so hard for you to +walk when you are working around the place and it's so easy for you to +run when you have been left behind." + +"Dat's so. Yas, suh," answered the negro. "I jes' cain't explain dat +mahself." + +Apparently George was the only member of the party that was willing to +talk and even he soon lost his desire as few responses were made to his +various suggestions. + +Uncle Sim, however, with chattering teeth and trembling voice, +frequently expressed his displeasure over the attempt of the boys to +belittle the sounds which had come from the old Meeker House. + +At last Uncle Sim declared solemnly, "I jes' made up my mind how dat ar +automobile was taken." + +"How was that?" demanded George. + +"It's de spooks back in de ole Meeker House. Dey make all de trouble." + +The four boys were now far enough from the scene of their recent +adventure to permit of their looking more calmly at their surroundings. +Their former fear had departed as the distance between them and the old +house had increased. When Uncle Sim made this solemn declaration as to +the cause of the loss of the automobile they all laughed heartily, +although the aged negro strongly maintained his repeated declarations. + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," he declared, "Dar's somethin' strange 'bout all +dis rumpus. Yo' hear de spirits in de ole house and you see de lights +from de windows, and den you hear de autermobile ho'n. Dat's de way it +is, yas, suh. Yo' couldn't find that automobile if yo' was to search dat +old house from de cellar up to de garret and yet de ho'n kept er blowin' +and er blowin' all de time." + +"I think you're mistaken, Uncle Sim," laughed George. + +"No, suh. No, suh. Dat's jes' de way it is. I feel shore you'll neber +see dat autermobile agin." + +"You think it is in the old house?" demanded Fred. + +"No, suh. No, suh. I didn't say as how it is exac'ly _in_ de ole house, +but what I says is dat de persons what's in de ole house can tell yo' +what become of dat ar autermobile, an' it was our autermobile ho'n what +was er blowin' dar. Yas, suh, I'd know dat ho'n if I heard it er hundred +miles from here." + +"I'll tell you what I'll do," said George suddenly. + +"Tell ahead," said Fred. "What is it you'll do?" + +"I'll dare the crowd to go back to the old Meeker House." + +"We'll take your dare," responded Fred promptly. + + + + +CHAPTER X--THE CAPTURE IN THE PASS + + +There was no enthusiasm manifest among the four boys when again they +walked across the field on their way to the old Meeker House. As they +came near the building, suddenly lights were seen in the windows once +more and a faint sound of the automobile horn again was heard. + +"Shall we go in?" inquired Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his +attempt to control it. + +"It's getting late," suggested George. There was a note of laughter in +his voice, but his companions were so excited that they were scarcely +aware of it. "Perhaps we had better put it off until some other time." + +"That's the way I feel about it," joined in John. + +"All right," said George, "and we must look after our car too. My father +wouldn't want me to lose the old car as well as the new one." + +Like the famous soldiers who marched up the hill and then marched down +again, the Go Ahead boys without protest on the part of any member of +the party retraced their way to the road and silently took their places +in the car. + +Conversation lagged and when at last they arrived at George's home they +left the car in the garage and then quickly entered the house. + +When they came into the room where the lights were shining they stared +blankly at one another for a moment and then laughed loudly. + +"What a pack of brave fellows we are, aren't we?" said George. + +"We are going to find out about that old house," declared John quietly. + +To the surprise of the boys George's father had arrived during their +absence. He was an interested listener to the story which the boys had +to relate, although none of them detected the sly glance which passed +between him and George. Evidently there was something understood by them +which was unknown to the others. + +"Yes," said Mr. Sanders when the boys were seated in the room. "There +have been some strange occurrences in this part of the country from the +days when it was first settled." + +"I guess that's so," said Grant. "We were hearing about the young fellow +who was captured up here in the Ramapo Pass in the Revolution." + +"Do you mean young Montagnie?" + +"We don't know his name," replied Grant, "but it was the one who was +used by Washington as a messenger without his understanding it." + +"That's the fellow," said Mr. Sanders. "I have always been greatly +interested in him. I do not think people ever have appreciated the part +he took in the plan which Washington wanted to try. He was a fine young +chap, about twenty years of age, and was a licensed preacher. Washington +had heard such good reports of him that when he came to try his plan he +sent for young Montagnie one morning up on the Hudson at Dobbs Ferry. It +was there the Continental army was encamped at the time. The general +told Montagnie that he had heard good reports of him and the young +soldier was so embarrassed that he could only stammer his thanks. Then +Washington went on to tell him that he wanted him to go across the +country and through the Ramapo Pass and carry a message to General +Heath, who was then at Morristown. He explained carefully how the papers +were to be sewed inside the lining of his coat. Young Montagnie agreed, +but suggested that he knew a better way across the country. There was +danger of his being taken if he should go down through the Ramapo +Valley. It is said that Washington drew himself up to his full height +and looked sternly at the young soldier as he thundered at him, 'It is +your business to obey.' And of course there was nothing more to be +said." + +"He must have had a strange feeling when he went down through the Pass," +suggested John. "He knew what the danger was and at the same time he +knew that he could find his way safely across the country without going +into the Pass. It seems strange that he did not suspect the trick +Washington was trying to play." + +"Apparently he didn't suspect anything," said Mr. Sanders. "It was early +in the morning when he entered the narrow defile. The only weapon he had +was a stout club and he was swinging along at a good rate, confident +that if he once safely got through the Pass many of his perils would be +over. He had just entered one end of the Pass when he saw five men +coming in at the other end. + +"He instantly recognized the leader as young Richard Smith, whose father +he had seen hanged up in Goshen a few days before this time. You see his +father was one of the worst of the cowboys. At least many of his +dastardly deeds were committed against the colonists, but he didn't stop +for that and he was willing to have dealings with either side, provided +he made by the transaction." + +"What was he hanged for?" inquired John. + +"Why, the people became so indignant at last that about two hundred of +the boys and men started after him one day. Of course he ran then, but +they chased him clear down to Long Island." + +"Did they catch him?" inquired John. + +"They most certainly did, and they brought him back to Goshen and he was +hanged there in the courtyard. Then his son, Richard, declared he would +revenge his father's death and it was this young man whom Montagnie saw +when he came into the Ramapo Pass just at sunrise that morning away back +in 1781. + +"The young messenger felt of the letter inside the lining of his coat to +make sure that it was safe and grasping his club more firmly and doing +his utmost to appear indifferent he at once turned and approached the +men. Very likely he would have run if he thought he could escape in that +manner, but he had no weapon except his club while the others were +armed. He well knew that if he should try to escape they would at once +start after him. + +"He quietly saluted the men when he passed them and received a grunt +from Richard in response. However, he was not critical, as now he was +hoping that his peril had been passed. He was not to get away so easily, +however, for before he came out into the open road he was hailed by the +men behind him and ordered to stop. Once more the young preacher was +tempted to run, but he was aware that his effort would be useless. +Accordingly he waited for the men to come back to him, and when Richard +Smith gruffly demanded who he was and where he was going he answered in +a general way saying that he was simply going across the country, 'That +won't do,' said Richard loudly, 'that may mean to New York or it may +mean to Morristown. Who are you anyway?' + +"By this time Montagnie was convinced that he was in deadly peril and he +quickly decided to sell his life as dearly as possible. Swinging his +club he knocked down one of them and leaping over his prostrate body +started up the steep side of the Pass. For some reason he was not fired +upon but before he gained the top he was astonished to see two of the +party whom he had left in the valley now approaching from above him, +almost as if they had dropped out of the clouds." + +"How did they do it?" inquired Grant. + +"Very likely they knew of a short cut. At all events the young messenger +was caught between the two parties. They took him to a little shanty in +the woods and then began to search him. They cut his hat into shreds, +and of course found nothing valuable. Then they made him take off his +coat and as soon as they had cut the lining they discovered the letters +which were hidden there. + +"Young Montagnie expected every moment that he would be shot or hanged. +One of the common methods of hanging employed by the cowboys in those +days was to put a noose around the prisoner's neck, tie the rope to the +limb of a tree after they had put the man on horseback, and then, when +they struck the horse and it started quickly, the wretched victim was +left hanging in the air. But for some unexplained reason young Montagnie +was simply kept in the house three days. Then when he still confidently +believed that he was being led to his death he was taken down the Hudson +and carried across to New York, where he was shut up in the old Van +Cortlandt Sugar House, which stood near the corner of what is now +Broadway and Cortlandt Street. You see there were so many American +prisoners in New York that the British had to make use of some of the +big buildings besides the jails." + +"Yes," suggested John, "I have heard that they used some of the churches +as jails." + +"They did," responded Mr. Sanders. + +"Well, what happened to young Montagnie?" + +"I was just about to tell you," said Sanders, smiling as he spoke. +"Naturally he felt very bitter when he found himself a prisoner in the +old sugar-house. He was so thoroughly convinced that his capture was +useless and that he might have made his way successfully across the +country to Morristown, that he was angry at Washington for his arbitrary +command. + +"However, three days later his keeper showed him a copy of _Rivington's +Gazette_. Rivington was a printer in New York and was a very bitter +Tory. Montagnie was not especially interested when he first took the +paper, but in a moment he was keenly excited when his eye fell upon an +announcement that one of Washington's messengers had been captured and +that valuable information had been found concealed in his coat. The +statement further announced that in this paper was a letter from General +Washington to General Heath in which the commander explained that he was +about to attack the British in New York and expected to find General +Clinton entirely unprepared for such action. + +"And at that very time," resumed Mr. Sanders, "Washington with his +little army had crossed the Delaware River and was on his way toward +Yorktown to help Greene and Lafayette. It was impossible now for Clinton +to leave New York, believing as he did that it was about to be attacked, +and even after he had found out the trick which Washington had played +upon him it was too late for him to try to transport his army by sea +because Washington would arrive at Yorktown before the red coats +possibly could come to the aid of Cornwallis. The battle of Yorktown +followed, as you know, and Cornwallis and his army were made prisoners. +Indeed it was at Yorktown that really the final independence of the +Colonies was won. But I have always felt that the part which young +Montagnie took in winning the victory at Yorktown has never been known +as it ought to be." + +"What became of him?" inquired Fred. + +"I don't know. I have often tried to find out," replied Mr. Sanders. +"You see the men in those days were so busy making history that they had +little time in which to write it. As a consequence there are many things +which we would like to know, but do not." + +"Now," continued Mr. Sanders as he arose from his seat, "I understand +that you boys have lost an automobile." + +"We didn't lose it," exclaimed George; "it was stolen." + +"It seems to me," said Mr. Sanders, "that if you had an automobile and +haven't one now you must have lost it, whatever the way in which it +disappeared." + + + + +CHAPTER XI--THE SEARCH FOR THE MISSING CAR + + +"What are you going to do?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"We don't know what to do," explained Fred. "We thought when you came +out here you would tell us." + +"I think I shall leave it for you boys to settle among yourselves." + +"But don't you want to get your car back?" demanded Grant in surprise. + +"Indeed I do," said Mr. Sanders. + +"Then," exclaimed Grant, "I should think you would want to help us find +it." + +"It's possible that I may try some plans of my own," explained Mr. +Sanders, "but meanwhile I am willing for the Go Ahead boys to see what +they can do in the way of restoring the car." + +"It's a strange thing," said George, "how that car ever could have been +taken out of our yard without some of us hearing it. I explained to the +boys," he added laughingly, "that it was such a good car that they +couldn't hear the engine." + +"That may be true," spoke up Fred, "but we had another explanation." + +"What was that?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"Why, we said some of the fellows were making so much noise that they +might have taken a threshing machine out of the garage and not one of us +would have heard it." + +"I don't mind explaining to you," said Mr. Sanders, "that I have sent a +brief description of the car to several of the nearby cities. My +impression is that the automobile hasn't gone very far from home, but +one cannot tell about that. Perhaps we shall get some word from Newark +or New York pretty soon." + +"Do you think they would take that car to New York?" demanded Fred. "I +thought George said that they had had trouble a year or two ago when a +lot of automobiles were stolen and taken down to Lakewood or somewhere +along the Jersey shore." + +"That may be true," said Mr. Sanders. "I have taken a few steps in the +matter, but I am going to leave the most of it to the Go Ahead boys. I +shall expect you to get some trace of the car before I come out for the +week-end. I am compelled to go back to the city to-morrow morning, so I +must leave you boys to your own devices." + +"Well," said George just before the boys sought their rooms, "to-morrow +morning we'll start out and begin our search for that missing +automobile." + +The following morning, after the departure of Mr. Sanders, the boys were +soon ready for their expedition. That is, all were ready except John, +who, for reasons which he did not fully explain, said that he would wait +until the following day before he joined in the search for the missing +car. + +Before the three boys and Uncle Sim took their seats in the automobile +Fred drew his elongated friend to one side and pulling his head down +until it was on a level with his own whispered to him. + +The conversation between the two friends was brief, but when Fred +responded to the hail of his comrades and ran to take his seat in the +automobile, there was an expression upon his face which indicated that +the cause of the failure of John to accompany them was not altogether +unknown to him. + +In a brief time the car with its inmates disappeared around the bend in +the road and John was no longer to be seen. + +"I think I'll go first to Paterson," explained George, to the two boys, +"and then I'll stop at every garage along the road between there and +Newark." + +When they arrived at Paterson they sought the quarters of the chief of +police and all three boys entered the room. + +George was the spokesman for the party and he briefly explained the loss +which had befallen them. + +The chief of police listened attentively, made notes of several +statements which George made and then said, "We shall do our best for +you. The trouble is that stolen cars frequently are mutilated or +repainted or something is done to them which prevents an owner from +recognizing his own property." + +"My father too is sending out word about the car," suggested George. + +"That's right, that's the only thing to do. It's one of the things you +never can tell about. You may find the car in a country garage, or in a +big city, or you may not find it at all." + +"Don't you think we'll find it?" demanded George. + +"I cannot say. Have you offered a reward for its recovery?" + +"I don't know," admitted George. "My father has charge of that. If he +has offered a reward he hasn't told me about it." + +"Yes, I see," said the chief slowly, looking sternly at George as he +spoke. "There may be reasons why he doesn't want to tell you about it." + +"What reasons?" demanded George. + +"If you don't know I shan't tell you." + +"Do you think we took the car?" demanded George hotly. + +"I'm not saying anything about that part of it. I don't know. I'm going +to take your directions and do my best to locate the car and the thief +too, if I can. It won't make any difference to me where I hit or who it +is. When we find the party that stole the car shall we report?" + +George was too angry to continue the conversation and turning abruptly +from the room he joined his companions, and together they hastily +reentered the car. + +"Never mind, George," said Fred cheerfully; "don't forget that we're the +Go Ahead boys, and if the car is anywhere in Jersey we'll try to find +it." + +"But we haven't any plan," suggested Grant. "What do you intend to do, +George?" + +"Find the car. That's as far as I have got now. I think I will stop at +every garage along the road and find out if any one has seen or heard +anything about our lost car." + +"You'll stand about as good a chance of finding it as you will of +finding a needle in a haystack," laughed Grant. "However, if that's what +you want, I'm perfectly willing to go along with you." + +"That's very kind and considerate on your part," remarked George dryly, +as the car started swiftly along the country road into which they now +had turned. + +"I don't see anything," suggested Grant, who was the first to break in +upon the silence. "I don't see anything to prevent the thief taking the +car into New York City or going to Philadelphia with it." + +"There isn't anything," said George quietly. + +"And even after he has gone into New York or Pennsylvania he can come +back again and double on his tracks. I don't see much hope of your ever +finding your car." + +"Perhaps we shan't find it," admitted George, "but I belong to a crowd +that's known as the Go Ahead boys and we aren't beaten before we start, +anyway. If we have to give up it will be after we have done our best." + +"That's the way to talk!" broke in Fred. "We're going ahead anyway and +we're going to get where we started for, too." + +"What will you do if you find your car?" inquired Grant. + +"Take it, of course," said George. + +"But suppose somebody has bought it from the thief? He won't give the +car back to you without your proving that it belongs to you." + +"Then we'll prove it," said George quietly. + +"What will you do with your thief if you find him?" + +"I'll wait until I find him," said George. + +"You know," broke in Fred, "I sometimes think it wasn't any thief that +stole that car anyway." + +"What do you mean, pygmy?" demanded both boys together as they looked +keenly at their diminutive friend. + +"You know just as well as I do," said Fred sturdily. + +"I haven't the remotest idea what you mean," said Grant. "You'll have to +try to make the point plain." + +"You mean," retorted Fred, "that you have to be helped to see a point +once in your life." + +"Go ahead, Fred," called George sharply. "What do you mean?" + +"Why you heard the tooting of that horn in the old Meeker House the same +as I did," said Fred. + +"You think the car is in that old house?" demanded Grant. + +"I didn't say so," said Fred, "but I do say that the horn that belongs +to George's car is in that old house, or else the horn that is there is +so like it that you couldn't tell them apart." + +George laughed quietly and said, "Next thing, Fred, you'll be telling us +that the spooks stole the car." + +"I'm not so sure that they didn't," said Fred. + +"If they did, then what we'll find in the old Meeker House will be only +the ghost of the car, I'm afraid." + +Conversation ceased and at every garage along the road George stopped +and made inquiries concerning the missing automobile. + +It was late in the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys turned homeward. Not +an inkling had they received of the stolen car. Several times they had +been informed that "A good many cars of late have been stolen," but the +knowledge brought neither comfort nor light. + +"George," suggested Fred, "suppose we go home by the road where the old +Meeker House is." + +George smiled dryly as he replied, "All right. The way is as short if I +turn in there as in any other way. What are you looking for, the ghost +of the lost automobile?" + +Fred shook his head and did not reply, but when at last in the dusk they +drew near the place where the mysterious old house was standing, all +were convinced that they heard a faint sound of an automobile horn +coming from the place. + + + + +CHAPTER XII--A HASTY DEPARTURE + + +As the speed of the automobile was instantly decreased, Fred said +excitedly, "Stop, George! I say it is time for us to find out about this +thing and quit all our foolishness." + +"What do you want to do?" demanded George. + +"I want to go into that old house and find out just what all this +mystery means." + +"I don't dare leave the car," said George. + +"Then you stay here and look after it," retorted Fred. "Grant and I will +make our own inspections, won't we?" he added as he turned to his +companion. + +Grant did not speak, but as he quickly leaped out of the car his example +was at once followed by Fred and together the two boys started toward +the house, the dim outline of which could be seen before them. + +It was an ideal summer night. There was no moon, but as there were not +many clouds in the sky the two boys were able to see about them in every +direction. Crickets noisily were proclaiming their presence and the not +unmusical notes of the tree toads joined in a chorus that arose from +every side. + +In silence the boys approached the front door of the house and just as +they were about to enter there came again that mocking sound of an +automobile horn. + +In spite of his declaration of his courage Fred instantly gripped his +companion's arm. Neither of the boys spoke as they halted for a moment +on the stone door-step. + +The startling noise of the horn was followed by sounds even more +unexpected. There were shouts and calls and cries issuing from within +the building. In the midst of this strange confusion there was also +heard the sound of laughter. + +The combination at first appeared to be almost too strong for the nerves +of the two Go Ahead boys. For an instant they turned and were looking +back at the road where George was waiting for them in his automobile. + +"Come on," said Fred, his voice trembling in spite of his courageous +attitude. "Come on in, Grant. We must find out about this thing." + +Before Grant could reply, suddenly around the corner of the house two +men were seen. Both were running swiftly and apparently were unmindful +of the presence of the boys. + +The two ghostly forms moved swiftly across the intervening field and +were apparently running directly toward the automobile in the road. + +The sight was more than either Grant or Fred was able to endure. Without +another word both leaped from the stone steps and in their swiftest +paces ran down the old pathway eager to gain the shelter of the waiting +automobile. + +"What's the trouble?" demanded George as his companions joined him. +"What's happened? Is there anything wrong?" + +"Don't talk about it now," said Fred. "Put on all the speed you have got +and we'll tell you later what happened." + +"I don't believe there's any such great need of haste," said George +dryly. "Why not go back and find out what the cause of all the trouble +is?" + +"You may go if you want to," retorted Fred, "but I'm not going to try it +again to-night." + +"The Go Ahead boys apparently are in motion, but not in the right +direction," suggested George demurely. + +"The right direction," declared Fred, "is straight toward your house." +As he spoke he glanced again at the Meeker place and as he did so +discovered the two ghostly forms that were still moving across the +field. + +"Both of them came out of the house," he said in a loud whisper, "while +we were on the front door-step." + +"Oh, I guess not," said George tantalizingly. "It's probably two men +that took a short cut. They were coming from the other road." + +"Don't you believe it!" maintained Fred stoutly. "They came out of that +old Meeker House. Didn't they, Grant?" he added, turning to his friend +for confirmation. + +"Yes, they came out of the house," said Grant brusquely. It was plain +the boy was not enjoying the recollection of the swift flight which he +and Fred had made to rejoin George. + +"Get your car under motion," said Fred sharply. "We don't want to stay +here any longer. We'll tell you what happened when you get out on the +main road." + +"Just as you say," laughed George. + +A moment later the automobile was moving swiftly down the road. As it +came near the place where the two forms had been seen it was evident +that both were seeking to gain the road in advance of the automobile. + +"Maybe the spooks will try to get this car, too," suggested George in a +low voice. + +At that moment there came a hail from the two men in advance and at the +sound George laughed loudly. + +"Do you know who that is?" he demanded, turning to his companions. + +"Who is it?" inquired Fred. + +"Why it's John and Uncle Sim. They want to ride home. I guess I'll +pretend not to know who they are and put on a little more speed." + +As he spoke the car began to move more swiftly, a sight which at once +called forth louder shouts of protest from the two men who now were near +the fence along the roadside. + +"Let them in. Let them in," said Grant. + +"All right, just as you say," replied George, and as he spoke he brought +the automobile to a standstill. + +"What do you want?" he called to the two men who now were climbing the +fence. + +"We want you to take us home," replied one of the two. + +"Is that you, John?" + +"It certainly is." + +"Well, I couldn't tell," laughed George. "You look more like a string +than ever. Is that Uncle Sim with you?" + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," spoke up the negro promptly. + +"Then you have been over to the old Meeker House, have you?" inquired +George as John and the colored man took their seats in the car. + +"Yes, we have been there," abruptly replied John. + +"You didn't seem to stay very long," suggested George. "Were there any +special reasons why you didn't want to tarry any longer?" + +"Dere sho' was," spoke up Uncle Sim, his teeth chattering as he spoke. +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh, dere sho' was." Lifting his face toward the sky the +old colored man muttered some incantations or prayers which in a measure +indicated the terror which possessed him. He was trembling in every limb +and when he tried to speak his lower jaw, over which he apparently had +lost control, resounded as it repeatedly struck the teeth on his upper +jaw. + +"Never mind, Uncle Sim," said George, noticing the abject terror of the +old man. "We'll soon be out of this. I don't see why you went back there +when you're so afraid of the old place." + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh," stammered Uncle Sim. "I don' went jes' because dis +young man 'sist on my goin' wif him." + +"Was he afraid to go alone?" + +"Yas, suh. Yas, suh." + +"Did he think he would be less scared if there were two than he would be +if he was there alone?" laughed George. + +"That's all right, George," broke in John, "you don't know what you're +talking about. If you had heard what we did you would have made better +time than either of us when we were trying to head you off." + +"What did you hear?" + +"Why, we heard the same old sound and a lot more. Just as true as I am +sitting here there was a voice that sounded all through the house and it +was calling, 'John, John'." + +"Did you answer it?" + +"Did I answer it? No, sir, I didn't answer it. I was out of that house +before you could count ten." + +"I didn't know that it affected you that way," laughed George, "to have +anybody speak to you." + +"It doesn't to have any live body, but that name was sounded all through +the house. It wasn't loud either, it was just that whispered, 'John, +John,' that I don't think I shall ever forget as long as I live." + +"It seems to have affected Uncle Sim even worse than it did you," +suggested George, as Uncle Sim clasped his hands and lifted them far +above his head and offered various incantations, as if he were doing his +utmost to ward off the evil spirits. + +"Well, all I have got to say," explained George at last, "is that the Go +Ahead boys ought to change their name." + +"Why?" demanded Fred sharply. + +"Because it seems to me that they can leave any place and make better +time than anybody I have ever seen. Even Uncle Sim forgets his +rheumatism and 'mis'ry' and keeps up with John when he races across the +field. To-morrow morning I will give John one dollar if he will make as +good time from the old Meeker House out to the road as he made to-night +when it was dark." + +"Never you mind about that!" retorted John. "You didn't see all that I +saw." + +"But you haven't told us what you saw." + +"I told you something I heard. If you had heard your own name coming +down the chimney and through the windows and up from the cellar, out of +the attic, in the hallway, down the stairs and everywhere at the same +time you wouldn't have stayed there any longer either." + +"Perhaps I wouldn't," admitted George, "but my feeling is that you +didn't hear half as much as you thought you did." + +"No, sir," responded John. "I have told you only half what I did hear." + +"Well go ahead with your story." + +"I'm not going to talk until we get home." + + + + +CHAPTER XIII--WORD CONCERNING THE LOST CAR + + +Conversation ceased during the remainder of the ride. The silence was +broken two or three times by George, who was driving the car as he +looked behind him at his companions and laughed aloud. No response was +given to his implied invitations to describe their feelings and as they +came nearer the end of their journey the chagrin under which all three +boys were suffering became still more marked. + +At last when they were once more in the house, Fred, unable longer to +remain silent, said abruptly, "I know there isn't anything in the racket +at the old Meeker House, but in spite of it all I confess I'm scared +when I hear those strange sounds." + +"What are you afraid of?" laughed George. + +"I don't know what I'm afraid of," said Fred, "but it scares me half out +of my wits." + +"There's something very strange about it," broke in John. "I don't +believe in spooks and such things, but no one has told us yet what the +sound of those flying wings means and they haven't explained how a +fellow can get in there and hear his name called from seven different +parts of the house at the same time." + +"What about that horn?" inquired Grant. "That's the strangest part of it +all to me." + +"Do you know," said Fred, "I'm sure that horn that blows in the old +house is the one that used to be on George's car." + +"No, it can't be," said George. "There's nothing but ghosts in the +Meeker House and so it could be only the ghost of that horn if there +really is anything there." + +"Well, it isn't the ghost of a sound," declared John positively. "It's a +real noise let me tell you and when you hear it as I did to-night, first +right close to your ear, and then, a second or two later, sounding as if +it came from the attic or the cellar you're ready to believe almost +anything." + +"Too ready, I'm afraid," laughed George. + +"The next time we go there," spoke up Fred, "I move that George Sanders +be selected to go into the house by the front door. If you remember, +fellows, he has always slipped out every time we went there and gone +around to the kitchen door." + +"I believe he knows more about it than he has told us yet," declared +John. + +"All I know," said George solemnly, "is that some of the Go Ahead boys +have reversed their name. Whenever they pluck up courage enough to go to +the old house they always go there with fear and trembling. They walk as +if they were traveling to their own funeral, but when they leave they +make better time than I ever saw any of them make on the cinder path. I +think that we ought to change the name. They aren't Go Ahead boys any +more, they are the Go Backward or the Get Away boys." + +"I notice," spoke up Grant, "that you didn't stand very long in the way +of your own departure. At least I haven't noticed yet that you have been +very far behind any of us when we ran from the place." + +"Of course you haven't," said George. "I have to look after my guests, +don't I? And if they are in such a hurry to leave, it wouldn't be very +polite for me to stay." + +"Don't leave on our account," said Fred dryly. + +"I guess there isn't much danger that you wouldn't any other time," +laughed George. "Perhaps you don't need any help after all. I was just +trying to be polite." + +"It's too great an effort," said Fred. "Don't try it again, but what are +you going to do about that stolen car?" + +"I'm going ahead," replied George. + +"You certainly have a strange way of doing it then," retorted Fred. "It +seems to me you were going all around it." + +"Never you mind," said George. "We'll have that car back in our garage +in less than a week, you mark my words and see if we don't." + +"If we do," declared Grant, "it won't be any fault of ours. I guess your +father will be the one that will find it." + +"He will help," laughed George. + +"Help," repeated Fred. "If we keep up the idiotic kind of a search we +made to-day I guess he will have to do the whole thing." + +"Perhaps he will," admitted George. "I'm not jealous. If we can only get +that car back, that's about all I want." + +"Well, I'm going to bed," declared John. "This has been my busy day." + +"And you haven't told us yet what you were doing," suggested Grant. + +"I guess I don't have to tell you," said John. "All three of you seem to +know more about Uncle Sim and me and what we have been doing to-day than +we do ourselves." + +In a brief time the boys had withdrawn from the room and sought their +beds. + +The following morning when three of the Go Ahead boys went down stairs +they discovered George talking over the telephone. + +"Yes," he was saying. "That's all right. We'll start right after +breakfast. Thank you very much. Good-by." + +As he hung up the receiver George turned to his friends and said, "What +would you fellows say if I told you that I had some word about the car?" + +"We would all say that it was a good word, anyway," said Fred promptly. + +"I was just talking to my father who told me that he had received a +telegram this morning from Newburgh." + +"That's in New York State," spoke up Fred. + +"Correct," answered George. "I'm glad that for once in your life you are +correctly informed." + +"You want to be thankful," retorted Fred, "that once in your life you +were able to appreciate the information I possess. I haven't a stingy +thing about me, and I have been trying to be generous and give you some +of the knowledge I have acquired, after long and painful effort, but you +do not seem to appreciate my kind heart." + +"My father says that the best thing for us to do will be to take the old +car and go straight to Newburgh. We may have to stay all night, so you +had better go prepared." + +"We aren't going before breakfast, are we?" demanded Grant. + +"No, my lean and hungry friend, we'll wait until the wants of the inner +man are satisfied." + +"Not that," said Fred. "Not that. You mean you will wait long enough for +him to eat all he needs, but not all he wants. We aren't going to start +from here before sunset, if you don't mean that." + +Conversation was not as brisk after the boys entered the dining room, +but when their breakfast had been eaten and they followed George as he +led the way to the garage they were all as talkative as before. + +"Going to take Uncle Sim with you?" inquired Grant. + +"No," answered George. "I'll have to leave him to look after the place!" + +"How long before we start?" inquired John. + +"About three minutes. Are you going with us to-day?" + +"You're right I am," declared John. "I stayed home yesterday to make my +own investigations in the old Meeker House." + +"And you have finished them all?" inquired George with a laugh. + +"I can't say that the investigations are all finished, but I am. Yes, +sir, I'm done. You don't catch me alone in that old house again." + +"But I thought Uncle Sim went with you," suggested Fred. + +"Uncle Sim? Uncle Sim? I would rather have an infant in arms with me. +Uncle Sim was scared before we were inside the house and after that +everything he saw or heard all helped to scare him still more." + +"He surely was scared last night," laughed Fred as he recalled the +plight of the aged negro. + +"He was that," said John solemnly, "but the worst of it is he scared me +too. You know they say that a man doesn't run because he's scared, he's +scared because he runs. I don't know much about that, but I guess it +worked both ways with me. I know I was scared before I ran and I know I +was scared a good deal worse after I began to run." + +"Never mind, John," said George, "We'll have a fine ride to-day. We're +going up through Ramapo Valley, through that place my father was telling +you about where young Montagnie was taken prisoner so many years ago by +the cowboys." + +"I hope there won't be anybody there to make prisoners of us," declared +Grant solemnly. "Do you ever have any hold-ups there now?" + +"Not every day," explained George. + +"What do you mean by that?" demanded Grant as he turned sharply upon +George. + +"Just what I say," repeated George. + +"You don't really think we'll have any trouble, do you?" inquired Fred +anxiously. + +"I cannot say," said George slowly. "There comes a gentleman now who +belongs to the fraternity. Perhaps he can tell you more about it than +I." As he spoke the three boys glanced quickly toward the kitchen door. +Approaching it was a man who bore every indication of being a tramp. + +"Hold on, fellows," whispered Fred, excitedly, "that's the very same +tramp I met over in the old Meeker House." + +"Sure about that?" asked George quickly. + +"Yes, it's the same man." + +"Come on, then," said George, "We'll go up and interview him." + +The tramp now was seated on the stone step and hungrily was devouring +the breakfast which had been given him. + +"How long since you have been in the old Meeker House?" inquired Fred as +he approached the stranger. + +As the man looked up he recognized his companion of the former night and +a smile spread over his countenance. "I just came from there," he said. + +"Were you in the house all night?" demanded Fred quickly. + +"Yes. Why?" + +"Did you hear any strange sounds?" + +"Not one." + +"Didn't you see anything that scared you?" + +"No, sir, nothing scared me." + +"And you say you were there all night?" + +"That's what I say. I crawled in there right after sunset and went to +sleep. I told you the other night that I sometimes sleep there in my +travels." + +"I don't understand why you didn't hear anything," said John, "if you +really were in the house. I was there and I heard some things." + +"What?" The tramp paused in his occupation and stared blankly at John as +he spoke. + +"The same things that happen there every night. There were some +creatures flying all around the room--" + +"Ostriches," said the tramp soberly. + +"And there must have been a good many people there too because they +called me by my name and at the same time from every part of the house." + +"A part of Washington's army," said the tramp. + +"I don't know who they were, but the thing that scared me most of all +was the tooting of an automobile horn. First it sounded right close to +my ear and then it seemed to come from all parts of the house at once." + +"Nothing but the wind whistling around the eaves," said the tramp. "I +don't mind telling you though that there have been times when I have +heard sounds over there that made me think of the horn of an auto--" + +"Didn't you hear it last night?" demanded John. + +"No. Where are you boys going?" the tramp abruptly added. + +"We're going to look for a lost automobile," said Fred. "You haven't +seen one lately, have you?" + +"Did you lose a car?" inquired the tramp, ignoring the question. + +"We certainly have lost it," said George, "or rather somebody has taken +it." + +"And you know where it is now?" + +"We've got word where it may be and we're going to find out." + +Fred had been watching the tramp closely throughout the conversation and +when George abruptly turned back to the garage he instantly followed +him. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV--DISAPPOINTED + + +"I tell you," exclaimed Fred in a low voice as soon as he had overtaken +his friend, "that tramp knows more about the lost automobile than he +told us." + +George turned abruptly and for a moment stared blankly at his friend and +then laughed aloud. "I think you surely have got it," he said. "A fellow +who can find spooks and ghosts of automobiles ought to be able to find +out a man who will steal them. That tramp to me doesn't look as if he +had ever seen the inside of a car." + +"It doesn't make any difference," said Fred persistently. "I tell you he +knows more about that car than you think." + +"What makes you think so?" + +"The way he looked and acted when we were talking about the auto having +been stolen." + +"Did he look guilty?" + +"I don't know whether he did or not. He looked up right away and the +expression on his face was different from what it was before. He knows +something about it anyway, whether he took it or not." + +"Keep it up, Fred," laughed George. "Pretty soon you'll be able to run +down every man who has seen our car, to say nothing of those who took +it." + +"What do you advise me to do?" he continued. + +"I don't know." + +"That's just it," laughed George. "There are lots of people that can +tell you what ought to be done, but there are mighty few that can tell +you how to do it. Do you want me to have him arrested?" + +"I didn't say that," said Fred. "All I said to you was that he knows +more about it than you think he does. It seems to me it would be a good +thing to have some one watch him or to leave word with the constable." + +"What will the constable do? He can't invite him to his house." + +"No, but he can tell him he mustn't leave town, can't he?" + +"I don't think he could without a warrant or something. You can't arrest +a man merely on suspicion." + +"All the same," said Fred, "I think you'll find that he knows more about +that lost car than any one else." + +"Well," said George, "he doesn't seem to be leaving the country very +rapidly and if we hear of him riding around in a brand new automobile +we'll begin to ask some questions. Now, the thing for us to do is to +start on our trip and see if there's anything in the report my father +has received about the lost car having been found in Newburgh." + +A few minutes later the four boys were on their way toward the beautiful +little city on the Hudson. + +A ride of between forty and fifty miles was before them and they had not +gone far on their journey before they were more deeply interested in the +sights and scenes they were passing than in the pursuit of the car which +had been lost. + +While they were riding through the Ramapo Valley they tried to discover +the place where young Montagnie had had his troubles with the cowboys +who had stopped him. Other stories of heroic deeds by the colonists in +the struggle for independence were told by George and Grant and the time +passed so rapidly that when the car stopped at Suffern, where the boys +were to have their luncheon, with one accord they declared that the ride +had been the most enjoyable in all their experience. + +Early in the afternoon the ride was resumed and such excellent time was +made that by half past three o'clock they had arrived at the end of +their journey. + +Their car was placed in a garage and then the boys at once went to a +hotel where they were to remain that night, for it had been decided that +they would not return until the following morning, whether their lost +car was found or not. + +"Come on, fellows," said George a half-hour afterward, "we'll go down to +the garage and see if our car is there." + +Down the hillside on the steep street that led to the bank of the Hudson +the boys made their way, frequently commenting on the experiences people +of Newburgh must have in winter-time, when ice and snow were to be found +on the streets. + +George explained that at that time ropes were stretched along the +sidewalk to protect the people who tried to pass up or down the slippery +way. + +"Here we are," explained George a little later as they stopped in front +of a large garage. "Come on in. We'll know what out fate is in a few +minutes." + +Entering the garage George inquired for the manager and soon was in +conversation with a young man, who at once became deeply interested in +the boys and in the story they were telling him. At last he said, "The +car you are talking about is back here in the corner. Come with me and +I'll show it to you." + +Eagerly following the manager the boys soon stopped in front of the car +which he indicated. "You see," explained the young man, "this car has +recently been painted. It has a Pennsylvania license, but that could be +very easily obtained for they could run over across the Pennsylvania +line and then come up into New York State. There are some other changes +that have been made, but I want you to look at it and tell me whether or +not you think it is the car you have lost." + +"I don't think it is," said George promptly. + +"Better look at it more closely," said the manager. "Sometimes these +cars are created the way they used to tell me the gypsies did when I was +a boy. You know they used to scare us by telling us that the gypsies +stole children and then they fixed them up so that their own mothers +wouldn't recognize them." + +"How did they do that?" inquired John. + +"Oh, I don't know. I suppose they cut their hair, painted their faces +and dressed them up in some outlandish clothes. Well, that's the way +these men that steal automobiles sometimes do. They fix them up so that +their owners wouldn't recognize the cars as theirs." + +A further and careful investigation of the car was made but it was not +long before George said positively, "That isn't our car." + +"You're sure, are you?" again inquired the manager. + +"Yes, sir. I'm sure. The engine isn't like ours. There are more spokes +in the wheels and the hood is different. No, I'm sure it's not our car." + +George's disappointment was manifest in the tones of his voice and his +friends naturally shared in his feelings. + +"Was that car stolen?" inquired Fred. + +"We suspect that it was," replied the manager. "We have had half a dozen +inquiries recently about stolen cars and though I cannot tell you more +we have reason to believe that this is one of them. My advice to you is +to stop on your way back home at a garage managed by Egge and Hatch." + +"What are their names?" demanded Grant blankly. + +"Egge and Hatch," repeated the manager. "I know another automobile +concern which is run by Waite and Barrett." + +"Wait and Bear-it," laughed Fred. "That's a good name. That would do for +a lot of other concerns besides garages, wouldn't it?" + +"It would be a better name for the men who leave their automobiles there +to be repaired," suggested Grant. + +The boys were now convinced that the car they had inspected was not the +one they had lost. There was nothing more to be done unless they visited +every garage in the city. + +"And I don't think there will be much use even in that, just now," +suggested the manager. + +"Come on then, fellows, we'll go back to the hotel," said George. + +"But I don't want to go back to the hotel," said Grant. "I want to go +somewhere else." + +"Do you know where it is?" demanded John. "I've known you when you +started for some place that you didn't know, nor did any one else." + +"I know exactly where I want to go," said Grant pompously. "If you +fellows want to come with me it will do you good, but if you don't you +can do what you please. I have never been in Newburgh before and while I +am here I am going to take advantage of the opportunity." + +"All right, we'll go with you," said Fred glibly. "If you can find +anything that is going to improve you we want to come along and see the +show." + + + + +CHAPTER XV--A FAMOUS SPOT + + +Unknown to his friends Grant had made some inquiries concerning a spot +in Newburgh which he long had been desirous of seeing. Without +explaining to his companions what he had in mind he quickly led the way +up another hill until they arrived at a large enclosed yard. In the +midst of it stood a low old stone house. In front of the house, on the +extensive lawn, were several piles of cannon balls, and cannon were +looking out over the peaceful waters of the Hudson. The flag of the +United States was floating from the high flagpole and added much to the +beauty of the scene. + +"What's all this?" demanded John. + +"Every young American is supposed to know that this is Washington's +headquarters. Didn't you ever hear of it?" + +"He had so many," laughed John, "I can't keep track of them. It is +something like the beds he slept in that we were talking about the other +day." + +"Well, this is where he had his headquarters," said Grant, "when his +army was in this part of the country. This is a beautiful spot, isn't +it?" + +"It's wonderful!" said Fred in a low voice. The impulsive lad was deeply +impressed by the associations connected with the place where they then +were standing as well as by the marvelous scene of the Hudson winding +its way in and out through the midst of the towering hills. + +"Over yonder," said Grant, pointing across the river as he spoke, "is +Beacon and right across the river is Fishkill." + +"Good name," said John in a low voice. + +"Of course it is," said Grant. "We're in the Empire State. That's the +State I live in and there isn't another one like it in the Union." + +"That's right," said George, who felt that he was now called upon to +defend his own State. "New York has a choice collection. I don't say +that there aren't some good people here, but you don't have to go very +far to come to Ossining. Do you know who lives there?" + +"Yes, some undesirable citizens," said Grant. + +"Yes, and you go on a little farther up the river and you come to +Albany. If you want to know what New York State is like you want to find +out how much the capitol building there cost." + +"Never mind about those things," broke in John. "What I want to know is +about this part of the country where we are now. I have read a good many +stories about the American army when it was in camp at Peekskill." + +"Of course you have," said Grant; "there were a lot of things doing +there. I have a book at home that my great-grandfather used to read when +he was a boy. It tells about a young fellow only seventeen years of age +who was one of Washington's couriers. He used to ride between Morristown +and Lake Champlain. At least he did in the year when Burgoyne was trying +to bring his Hessians and redcoats from Montreal to New York." + +"He didn't bring them, though," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"Only as far as Saratoga," laughed Grant. "If it hadn't been for certain +obstacles I guess he would have brought them all the way down the +river." + +"I guess he would too," laughed Fred scornfully, "but his 'obstacles,' +as you call them, were General Gates, Philip Schuyler, Benedict Arnold +and a few other continental soldiers that did not seem to be +enthusiastic over allowing Johnnie Burgoyne to come any farther." + +"I was reading the other day," said Grant, "that the Baroness de +Reidesel was with her husband when the Hessians were captured. She had +her children with her and to show them due honor Mrs. General Schuyler +took the Baroness and her children into her own home. The Hessian lady +did not know that Mrs. Schuyler understood German and she rudely carried +on some conversation with her children in that language when Mrs. +Schuyler was present. One time one of the children piped up and asked +his mother, 'Isn't this the place that we are to have when our father is +made a duke after he has whipped the Yankees?' As the Baroness glanced +up she was aware that Mrs. Schuyler had understood what the boy was +saying. She tried to apologize but Mrs. Schuyler was a perfect lady and +at once smoothed things out. They say she was a brave woman. There's one +story about her though that I never believed." + +"What was that?" asked John. + +"Why they say that thirteen was a magical number for the Americans. The +British reported that Martha Washington had a big cat with thirteen +stripes around its tail and that she wouldn't have any other kind. There +were just thirteen of the colonies, you know, and that made it worse. +And it was reported that General Phil. Schuyler had just thirteen hairs +left in his bald pate and that Mrs. Catherine Schuyler very carefully +oiled and brushed them every night for fear that the magic number might +be changed." + +"She had better brush his hair than pull it," suggested George. + +"I can remember the time," said John, "when my mother used to brush and +pull my hair at the same time." + +"So can I," said every one of the boys together. + +"Well, the main thing is," said Fred philosophically, "that George +Washington had some headquarters and that it's a good thing for the +United States of America that he did. I wish we had some men now as +great as he was." + +"We have," said John quickly. + +"We have?" retorted Fred scornfully. "Where are they?" + +"Eight here," said John solemnly. "Here are four of them. They haven't +all arrived yet, but they are on their way." + +"Fine lot too," broke in Grant. "Scared so that they run like deer when +they hear sounds in the old Meeker House and there isn't one of them +that has shown that he has the nerve to stay there long enough to find +out just what those strange sounds mean." + +"We're not afraid of anything we can see, but it is the things that you +can't see that scare us," explained Fred. + +"Never mind the Meeker House," said Grant, "I want to take in what this +place means. The old cannon balls, the old guns, and the relics we saw +inside the house," for the boys had entered the old building and +inspected the various relics of revolutionary times that were on +exhibition, "to say nothing about the old Hudson River itself, and the +hills, ought to satisfy every one of us for a while, anyway." + +"It's a great sight," said George. "I'm glad you brought us up here. I +knew Washington's headquarters were here, but it had slipped my mind +when we first came. I'm getting hungry. Come on back to the hotel and +we'll have our dinner." + +The following morning was unusually warm. The boys were early awake, but +even then the heat was oppressive. + +"Whew," said Fred when they left the dining room, "if it's as hot as +this before we start what will it be afterward?" + +"That's just like some people," declared John. "They aren't satisfied +with the good or the bad they have, but they are always looking ahead +for more. There's one thing we don't have to do." + +"What's that?" inquired Fred. + +"We don't have to swelter before the sun beats down upon us. It will be +plenty of time to see what we have to do if we find it so warm on the +road that we don't want to go on." + +Soon after breakfast the boys started on their homeward ride. + +True to its promise the heat steadily increased and a glare that was +exceedingly trying to the eyes beat down upon the roadway. + +George increased the speed at which he was driving, but the air which +fanned their faces was almost like that which comes from a heated oven. + +Already the cattle in the nearby fields had sought the shade of the +trees in the pastures. The hens in the farmyards also were lying in the +shade, their wings partly extended as if they were trying to cool their +heated bodies. + +"Hens in hot weather," said George, "always make me think they are +laughing at us." + +"What do you mean?" demanded John. "Who ever heard a hen laugh." + +"I didn't say I had heard them laugh, but they have their mouths open." + +"Hens don't have mouths, my friend." + +"They don't?" demanded George. "Then how do they eat?" + +"They have throats and bills and beaks, but they don't have mouths." + +"What is a mouth anyway?" said George scornfully. "Isn't it the opening +in the head through which one takes food into his stomach?" + +"I suppose it is." + +"Well, doesn't a hen swallow corn?" + +"She does." + +"Then she has a mouth, hasn't she?" + +"Wait a minute and I'll tell you. It's this way, you see--" + +At that moment there was a loud report directly beneath the car which at +that time was passing under a stone bridge. + +George instantly stopped the car, but another driver directly in front +of him was so startled by the unexpected sound that he lost control of +his automobile and swung into the ditch, nearly overturning his car as +he did so. Instantly rising from his seat he turned and glared at the Go +Ahead boys as if he was tempted to visit some merited punishment upon +them. + +The boys, however, were so busy with their own troubles that they +ignored the anger of the driver before them. Instantly leaping from +their seats they began their investigations. + +Only a brief time, however, was required to disclose the cause of the +trouble. "A blowout," said George disgustedly. "It's torn that tube all +into shreds." + +"You blew it up too tight," suggested Grant. + +"Thank you," said George as he took off his coat, "you're so well +informed about these matters that I think I'll let you help me put a new +tire on." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI--ANOTHER LOSS + + +The angry stranger, who by this time had recovered from his surprise, +speedily departed. Indeed, the fact that the boys had had only a slight +conversation with him perhaps increased his anger and as soon as his car +had been pulled from the ditch, a task in which all joined to help, he +soon afterward disappeared from sight. + +The intense heat soon caused the faces of the boys to be shining with +perspiration. The dust from the road also did its part until in the +streaked countenances of the Go Ahead boys even their own mothers would +have had difficulty in recognizing members of their families. + +The difficult task and the heat of the day also united in increasing the +irritation of the boys. There were several remarks made which happily +were soon forgotten or ignored. + +In the midst of the task the jack broke and the wheel dropped upon the +ground. + +"There you have it!" exclaimed George irritably. "A broken jack! No +tube! Seventeen miles from nowhere and not a crumb to eat!" + +"Never mind, George," said John good-naturedly. "Somebody will be coming +along pretty soon and will lend us a hand." + +"He will have to lend us a jack, I guess if we ever get anywhere. I +don't know what is the matter with this thing," he added as again he +examined the broken implement. + +"There's nothing for us to do except wait," suggested Grant. "Come up +here in the shade, fellows. We'll have to join that man who is sitting +there." + +As Grant spoke he pointed toward a bank or knoll near the roadside where +a man was seen reclining on the ground beneath the shade of some huge +maple trees. + +"That's a good suggestion," declared Fred, and in a brief time the boys +were seated on the ground, enjoying the relief from the heat of the +burning sun. + +Their only hope now rested upon some friendly driver stopping to aid +them. + +To the amazement of Fred, as well as of his companions, the man whom +they discovered enjoying the shade was none other than the tramp who had +first been seen in the old Meeker House. + +He stared a moment at the unexpected sight and then as a grin spread +over the countenance of the man he was convinced that his first +impression had been correct. The tramp of the Meeker House was there +before him. How he had come there, so far from the place where he had +been first seen, was a mystery. + +"You seem to have had bad luck, my friends," laughed the tramp, as he +sat erect when the boys approached. + +"Yes, the day is so hot," growled George, "that the tube burst. We had a +blowout. We had it blown up too much anyway when we left Newburgh." + +"Have you been to Newburgh!" inquired the tramp. + +"Yes," replied George shortly. + +"Did you find your car?" + +"No." + +"That's too bad." If the tramp, however, had any real sympathy for the +boys in their loss his countenance failed to reflect the feeling, for he +was still grinning at his young companions. "Not much use," he +continued. "There must be seventy-five or a hundred thousand autos in +Jersey alone, and when you stop to think of all that are in New York and +Pennsylvania you will see you stand mighty little chance of ever finding +your own car." + +"Thank you," said George. "You needn't be worried though, for we are +going to get it." + +"What are you doing up here?" demanded Fred. + +"Why I got to thinking of it last night," explained the tramp, "after +you boys left home and the more I thought about it the more I thought I +would like to come up into this part of the world too. You haven't any +objection to my coming?" he added quizzically. + +"Oh, no, not the slightest," said Fred glibly. "I was just wondering how +a man as weary as you are could have made such good time. You must have +come forty miles or more. How did you do it?" + +"Part of the way," replied the tramp, "I came in an empty box-car. I got +a lift with an old man who was taking a load of produce to market and +another man gave me a ride in his automobile. I don't think I have +walked all together more than half a mile. There's always somebody that +is good to the halt, the blind, the lame,--" + +"And the lazy," joined in Fred. + +"I guess that's right," said the tramp. "But I'm not to blame for it. I +don't like to work. It's the way I was born, and if I don't like it I +don't see why I should do it, do you?" + +"Not as long as some one else is willing to work and get you something +to eat and wear," suggested George tartly. + +"I guess you're right again," drawled the tramp. "If the time ever comes +when there isn't anybody to do that for me, then I guess I'll have to go +to work. But I'm putting it off as long as possible. Hello," he added +quickly, "there comes a car," pointing as he spoke toward an automobile +which was swiftly approaching. + +George ran speedily down to the road and hailed the approaching car. + +The automobile was stopped as the signal was discovered, and for the +first time George was conscious of his dust-discolored face, for seated +in the back seat was a young girl with her mother. She laughed as she +saw George's countenance and even her mother's face could not conceal +the quizzical expression that appeared when George spoke. + +"We had a blowout here," explained George, "and when we tried to put on +a new tube our jack broke. Can you help us out?" + +"Certainly," said the woman. "James, you help these young gentlemen," +she added as she turned to her chauffeur. + +The other boys now turned and offered their assistance to George, +although Grant and John plainly were more interested in the occupants of +the friendly car than they were in the task immediately confronting +them. + +"There's no use, boys," said the chauffeur at last. "That blowout must +have been a big one." + +"It was," spoke up Fred quickly. + +"It has bent your rim. Yon never can get a new tire on that until it has +been fixed." + +"What shall we do?" inquired George blankly. + +"The best thing I can suggest is for you to get in our car and we will +take you to a good garage about four miles up the road. They will have +to come back here in another car so you won't have to walk." + +"That's a good suggestion," said George quickly as he prepared to accept +the invitation. + +His zeal, however was quickly shared by two of his friends, who insisted +that their presence also was required. "You see," Fred explained, "if +they cannot help us at that garage, why some of us will have to go on to +another. We cannot leave our car here all day in the sun." + +John was the only one of the party left behind and as it was deemed +necessary for some one to remain with the car he volunteered for that +service. + +The task confronting him was not difficult, however, and John soon was +reclining once more in a shaded spot near the tramp who was still seated +in the same place he had first been seen. + +In spite of John's efforts to draw the man into conversation the tramp +was strangely silent most of the time. At last, however, his mood +changed and turning to John he said, "Your friends ought to be back here +by this time." + +"They may have had trouble in getting a car right away to bring them +back." + +"Well, they will be here pretty soon," said the tramp. "I think I'll go +up to that orchard up yonder," he added as he pointed to a hillside +covered with apple trees about one hundred yards distant. + +"Are there any apples there ripe?" inquired John quickly. + +"Plenty of them. Plenty of them. The owner doesn't seem to care anything +about them. He hasn't sprayed his trees or pruned them for years, but +there are some juicy red apples in the corner of the orchard and they +are mighty good. I know for I have tried them already." + +"Wait a minute and I'll go up with you," said John. + +Together they made their way up the side of the hill and John speedily +discovered that the statement of his companion was correct. The ground +beneath the trees was carpeted with a layer of red apples tempting in +their size and appearance. + +"I think I'll take back a few for the other fellows," said John, as he +filled his cap. "I would like to pay for them, but I don't see anybody +around here." + +"Nobody pays for these apples," explained the tramp. "The owner of the +farm spent a lot of money on his place and then got tired of it and went +back to the city. He left everything here to go to pieces." + +"That's a pity," said John as he climbed over the fence and started back +toward the place where they had left the automobile. + +"Where is our car?" demanded John in consternation as he drew near the +place from which they had started. + +In amazement he looked up and down the road, but not a trace of the +automobile was to be seen. + +"What do you suppose has happened to that car?" he demanded, again +turning to his companion. + +"I don't know unless it has evaporated," said the tramp. "It's a pretty +hot day." + +"Evaporated nothing!" explained John angrily. "The car is gone. I don't +know what George and the fellows will say. We have lost two cars now +instead of one. I don't understand how it could have been taken away +without our knowing it." + +"That isn't nearly so important," suggested the tramp, "as the fact that +it is gone. There isn't any car here." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII--LEFT BEHIND + + +"I think the men from the garage may have come and taken the car away," +suggested the tramp. + +"That may be the way it is," said John, relieved by the suggestion. A +moment later, however, the thought occurred to him that in the event of +the return of the boys with a man from the garage, in all probability +some of them would have remained and not all have gone back with him. In +that case his companions must be near, but as he looked up and down the +road he did not discover any trace of his friends. + +"They will be back here by and by," said the tramp encouragingly. "It +won't take very long to straighten that rim and put on a new shoe. The +best thing for you to do is to stay right here until they come." + +"I don't see much else to do," said John, still far from being persuaded +that an explanation of the missing car was to be found in the suggestion +made by his strange companion. "I guess I'll just have to wait." + +"If you do, then you might as well wait comfortably." As he spoke the +tramp again sought the shaded place on the bank above the road, and +seated on the ground, with his back against a tree, he at once began to +feast upon the apples he had brought from the orchard. + +Following his example John speedily climbed the little knoll and quickly +seated himself in a similar manner against a nearby tree. + +"We can see up and down the road here," said the tramp, "and if your +friends come you'll know it long before they are here." + +For some reason John lost his desire to talk to the strange man. He was +continually looking up the road in the direction in which the boys had +disappeared when they had departed in the friendly car. A half-hour +passed and only two automobiles were seen on the dusty road. The heat +seemed to increase as the noon-hour approached. There was no habitation +within sight at which a luncheon might be obtained and John now began to +feel hungry as well as anxious. + +He was by no means satisfied that George's car had been taken to the +garage by the boys. Indeed, his fear that the second car had been stolen +was steadily increasing and he was blaming himself, as not unnaturally +he believed George would blame him if the car had indeed been taken. + +When an hour had passed a car was seen approaching which the tramp +quickly declared belonged to a garage in a neighboring village. "I know +that car," he said confidently, "for I have worked in that shop." + +"Do you know anything about automobiles?" demanded John quickly. + +"Not very much, but then one doesn't have to know very much to work in a +place like that. I used to look wise and hammer a lot and then charge +still more. I have made up my mind that if ever I have to work again I'm +going to find a job in an automobile shop. The hardest thing you have to +do is to make out your bills." + +"That may be so," said John, smiling as he spoke, "though I hope it +won't prove to be the case this time. There are the boys in that car," +he added quickly, as he recognized his three friends approaching. The +car was driven by a man in his shirt sleeves and the speed at which he +was moving proclaimed the fact that either he was an expert driver or +one of the most reckless of men. + +A few minutes later the automobile was stopped in front of John, who now +ran down into the road to greet the returning boys. + +"Where's the car, Jack?" inquired Grant quickly. + +"I don't know," said John. + +"You don't know! Weren't you here in charge of it?" + +"I have been here all the time except about five minutes when I went up +into the orchard yonder and got some apples. When I came back the car +was gone. This man," he added, pointing to the tramp as he spoke, "said +he thought you had come from the garage and taken the car back with +you." + +"Whew!" whistled Fred. "This is getting exciting. First you lose one car +and then you lose another. I think we'll have to go back to the old +Meeker House and look for its ghost." + +"I don't see anything funny in this," said Grant in disgust. "Here we +are at least four miles from the railroad. We know how hot and dusty the +road is and we don't want--" + +"You fellows are a sympathetic crowd," broke in George. "You're thinking +about your own comfort all the while and not a word about my losses. +It's bad enough to have one car stolen to say nothing of two." + +"Do you think this second car has been stolen?" demanded Fred abruptly, +turning upon his friend as he spoke. + +"Well, it's gone, isn't it?" said George. + +"Yes, it's gone," admitted Fred, "but that doesn't mean it has been +stolen." + +"Well, tell me what has become of it then? Where is it? Show me the +car." + +"I can't do it," said Fred. "I wish I could. But I don't believe that +car has been stolen." + +"What do you think?" demanded George, turning to the mechanic as he +spoke. + +"I haven't heard of a car being stolen up here in a long time, and I +don't see how anybody could have taken that car away without being seen +if he was trying to steal it." + +"That's all true enough," said George angrily. "I know all those things, +but tell me if you can where my car is. I don't see how anybody could +have taken it away from here with the shoe being in the condition that +it was. I never saw such a blowout in my life." + +"Perhaps we can track it," suggested Grant. + +"That's right. That's just what we can do," said George eagerly. "Look +here," he added, as he pointed to a place near the road where the +imprint of the mutilated tire plainly could be seen. + +It was possible to follow this track a few yards, but there the trail +ceased, the car apparently had been brought up again on the hard roadbed +and no trace was left of its passage. + +"What's become of your tramp?" demanded George, suddenly turning upon +John. + +All four boys quickly looked about them, but the tramp had disappeared +from sight. + +"That's one of the strangest things I ever heard of," said Fred. "That +tramp knew how you lost the other car and I guess he could tell some +things about this one too, if he wanted to." + +"He was with me all the time," spoke up John quickly. "I never lost +sight of him a minute." + +"It's a pity you didn't do as well with the car," said Grant. + +"Well, the tramp and I went up into the orchard together. We were +together all the while we were there and we came back together. When we +got back here we saw that the car was gone. The tramp was here. Now will +you please tell me how a tramp could steal an automobile and still be +with me all the while?" + +"What do you think is the best thing for us to do?" said George, turning +to the mechanic. + +"Your car isn't here," said the man, "and you could track it a little +way, far enough to see that it was taken in that direction," he +explained as he pointed ahead of him. "Now that's right on the way back +to the garage and my advice is for all four of you to get into the car +and we'll see what we can find on the way back. If you don't find +anything we can telephone when you get into the village, or you can +leave on the train. There's one out in about an hour and a half." + +The suggestion finally was adopted and all four boys maintained a +careful outlook for the missing car throughout their ride to the garage. +However no trace of the missing automobile was discovered. The car had +disappeared and the boys were stranded in a little village in northern +New Jersey. + +Leaving his companions, George telephoned his father. The conversation +lasted several minutes and when at last George rejoined his friends he +said glumly, "My father says the best thing for us to do is to come home +by train. He told us to look out and not lose the train." + +"I guess," laughed Grant, "it would be a little more expensive for him +if we should lose the train than to have us lose the cars." + +"If we keep this up much longer," said Fred, "we'll have a good big bill +to pay. I never knew anybody in my life that ever had a car stolen and +here we lose two inside of a week." + +"You must remember," said John soberly, "that we are the Go Ahead boys. +It doesn't make any difference what we start in we have got to leave the +rest of them behind us. If it's looking for smugglers or digging for a +pirate's chest or having our automobiles stolen, it doesn't make a +particle of difference which, we are bound to go ahead, get ahead and +keep ahead." + +"I'm glad to hear you talk that way," said George grimly. "I have been +looking in my pockets to see if I have money enough to get a ticket +home. Have any of you got money?" + +"I'll take up a collection," suggested John, seizing his cap as he +spoke. The result of his efforts, however, when the sum was counted, was +not quite sufficient to purchase the tickets required by the four boys +on their return trip. + +"I don't see anything for us to do," said Fred glibly, "except to leave +String here. He's the one who is responsible for the loss of the car +to-day and if anybody has to stay behind I think he ought to be the +one." + +"I agree with you," said John meekly. "I'm willing to stay, for I +confess I would like to find out what has become of that lost car." + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII--THE ARRIVAL + + +In spite of the protests of the other boys against John being left +behind, it was finally decided that he should carry out his own plan. He +had declared his purpose to find out if possible what had become of the +second car. + +George had insisted that all four of the Go Ahead boys either should +remain together or depart in a body; but after a brief conversation in +which John explained that he really was desirous of making some further +investigations of his own and also that it was equally important for +George to get into touch with his father, as he could not do over the +telephone, it was agreed that John should remain until the following +day. A very attractive hotel not far from the station was most inviting. +There John explained he would remain until the following day when the +boys either would come for him or send him money. + +Only a few moments elapsed before the noisy train proclaimed its coming. +The scream of the locomotive was echoed and re-echoed in the nearby +valley and long before its arrival at the station the people of the +little village were aware that the one o'clock train was "on time." + +Again George protested strongly against John being left behind, although +he did not explain how he was to ride on the train without a ticket nor +how he was to obtain a ticket without any money. However, in a few +minutes the three departing boys, standing on the rear platform of the +last car, were waving their hats as they bade good-by to the fourth +member of the Go Ahead boys who was watching them from the platform of +the station. + +Slowly John turned into the walk that led him from the little station to +the main street of the village. As he came out upon the sidewalk he was +startled when he heard himself addressed by his own name. Surprised, he +glanced in the direction from which the unexpected hail had come and he +was amazed to behold the tramp, who had been his companion in the +morning, now seated in the missing automobile. Evidently he had been +driving the car but the expression on his face as John ran toward him +did not indicate his purpose to explain the sight which had so startled +him. + +"Where did you get that car?" demanded John sharply as he stared at the +driver. + +"I found it at the other garage," explained the tramp. + +"How did it get there?" + +"Why, there was another blowout right near where you had yours this +morning. I guess it must be the same fellow that you scared or drove +into a ditch; at least that's what he said. He couldn't fix his car +because the rim was torn into pieces and he got a lift back to this +garage and sent some men out to get his car." + +"And they got ours?" demanded John delightedly. + +"That's what it seems," replied the tramp quietly. "I suspected there +might be some trouble of the kind so I went around there and sure enough +I found this car just as I half expected to. Your friends have cleared +out and left you, have they?" + +"They have gone back home," explained John. + +"Well, that's all right. We'll beat them there yet. You get in and I'll +see what time I can make." + +"You're sure you know how to drive?" inquired John. "Because if you +don't know how I can do something at it myself." + +"My 'deah boy,'" lisped the tramp, "don't distress your little heart +about my being able to drive the car. You get in here and if you have +any fault to find I'll resign and let you take the wheel." + +"We ought to have something to eat," said John, "but I haven't a cent of +money." + +"So I understand. It took all the money there was in the crowd to buy +tickets for three boys." + +"How did you know?" + +"Never mind that. I knew you didn't have any money and I knew too that I +would have to furnish what we needed on our trip. I managed to get +together twenty-three cents. I think that's just the amount one ought to +have when he is leaving in a hurry, don't you?" laughed the tramp. + +"That's all right." + +"Well, I took my twenty-three cents and went over to the grocery store +and I bought some cheese and a box of crackers. You get in and feed up +on the way back. If you're like me you'll think you've had a dinner fit +for a king." + +As he spoke the tramp held up to view the purchases he had made and John +instantly responded to his appeal and took his seat in front beside the +driver. The hungry boy declared that he never had tasted food he enjoyed +more. Meanwhile the car was driven steadily forward on its way. And if +John had had any misgivings as to the ability of his companion as a +driver they were soon dispelled. It was plain that the man was an expert +at his task. + +"Where did you learn to drive a car?" + +"I didn't have to learn," said the tramp. "I always knew. I have driven +cars ever since they were first made. If I need any money I get a job as +a chauffeur and then after I have got some money I don't need any job +and quit." + +John laughed as he said, "You're the strangest man I ever saw." + +"That's what others have told me." + +"I don't see why a man with the brains you have doesn't do something +worth while. What do you want to be beating around the country for +without any home and staying nights in such places as the old Meeker +House?" + +"I have often wondered myself," replied the tramp quietly. "I don't know +that there's any answer to your question. Speaking of the old Meeker +House, have you heard anything more about the strange noises over +there?" + +"Not since I saw you," replied John. + +"Well, my advice to you is to take your friends over there to-night and +I suspect you'll have an experience that will interest you." + +"What is it?" demanded John, interested at once. + +"I'm not sure just what it will be so I cannot explain, but if you want +to see your friends stirred up you take them over there after you have +had your dinner to-night. By the way, do you think there will be any +reward for finding this car?" + +"Knowing Mr. Sanders as I do, I'm quite sure there will be." + +"I have brought the bill in my pocket for the repairs at the garage." + +"How much did they charge?" + +"Fifty-three cents and the man apologized for the size of his bill. +That's one of the things they haven't learned up here in the country +yet." + +"I have never found any one who didn't know how to charge," laughed +John. + +"Well, this man didn't seem to know much about it, so I paid his bill +and had just twenty-three cents left, as I told you. I think if Mr. +Sanders wants to pay that bill I shall let him." + +"I certainly know he will," said John. "I know he will insist upon it +anyway for he's that kind of a man." + +The automobile was making most excellent time and long before it was +possible for his companions to arrive John had turned into the driveway +that led to George's home. + +The tramp had insisted upon leaving the car before it had turned in, +explaining that he would return when Mr. Sanders came and if the latter +"sufficiently urged" him to accept a reward he would do so willingly. + +John laughed as the strange man departed and then drove up to the house. + +Uncle Sim was the first to greet him and after staring blankly at John +for a moment he said, "Whar de other boys?" + +"They are coming later," said John. "They are coming on the train." + +"Wha' fo'?" + +"Oh, they will have to tell you," said John. "Just as soon as I can wash +up I want to go over to the station and bring them home. They'll come in +probably on the next train." + +True to his word a half-hour later John was waiting in the automobile +near the station. He had pictured to himself the excitement of his +friends when they should arrive and discover him in the lost automobile, +awaiting their coming. + +John's meditations were interrupted by the prolonged blast by which the +coming of the train was made known. So pleased was he over the prospect +that he laughed aloud. The arrival of the train, however, soon caused +him to watch the alighting passengers and as soon as he discovered his +friends among the number, in his loudest tones he shouted, "George, tell +all the Go Ahead boys to come over here!" + +Startled by the unexpected hail the three boys turned and for a moment +stared blankly at John. All the latter's hopes were more than fulfilled. +Surprise and incredulity were stamped upon the faces of the three Go +Ahead boys. + +"Where did you get that car?" demanded George, hastily approaching. + +"Why, it is your car, isn't it?" said John meekly. + +"Sure it is, but where did you get it?" + +"Why, after you fellows left me over there where you took the train I +thought you would like to have me look up your car, so that's what I +have done, but you don't seem to be very thankful. This is an ungrateful +world, and a naughty deed arouses more interest than a good one. At +least I think that's what Shakespeare says." + +"Shakespeare?" broke in Fred sharply. "You never got as far as the title +page." + +"That may all be," retorted John. "All I mean to say now is that this +car is for the exclusive use of those who are accustomed to move in +polite society." As he spoke John turned on the power and despite the +efforts of his friends to overtake him soon was moving rapidly over the +road. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX--AN INVITATION + + +Appearing to ignore his friends John drove rapidly around the circle +which had been laid out between the station and the main street. Proudly +returning to the place on the platform where his friends were awaiting +his coming, he called out, "How's this car? How's the driver? Pretty +slick, eh?" + +"What we don't know," said George quickly, "is where the driver came +from and how he got the car." + +"You'll have to trust your Uncle John for some things," replied the +driver solemnly. "There are some things you can't explain and some +things it's hard for certain people to understand. You see that your +car's here, don't you?" + +"Yes," replied George. + +"It's all right, isn't it?" + +"As far as I can see." + +"Cylinders all sound? Tires all complete? Boiler intact? Carbureter +still working? Limousine all ready to be carved?" + +"That's right," said George, laughing as he spoke. "As far as I can see +everything is all straight except the fact that you didn't tell us how +you got the car and beat us back here." + +"Get in, fellows, and I'll tell you about it on the way back," said +John. "I'll resign my position as chauffeur too," he added, as he +quickly moved to another seat. + +"I don't mind; stay where you are," said George cordially. + +"No, I know you don't 'mind,' but this is a hot day. I would rather sit +behind and tell you how to do it." + +"All right then, I'll go ahead," said George, as he started the car. +"Tell us how you did it." + +"I have already explained to the best of my ability," said John soberly. + +"Tell us again, then," broke in Fred. + +"Why, all there is to it is that after you fellows left I looked around +for the car and found it." + +"Did you find it alone?" + +"What do you mean,--was I the only one that found it, or do you mean that +I found the car all by itself?" + +"My, how correct some fellows are in their talk," murmured Fred. "Yes, +what I mean was were you all alone when you found the car?" + +"No." + +"Well, why don't you tell us who was with you?" demanded Grant +irritably. + +"The tramp," said John abruptly. + +"The tramp!" repeated the boys together. + +"That's what I said." + +"Tell us about it," said George. + +"Why, after you fellows cleared out and left me behind, for you remember +that you took all the tickets there were and left me up there sans +money, sans ticket, sans everything, as Shakespeare says--" + +"We don't remember anything of the kind," interrupted George. "We tried +to get you to come along." + +"Yes, you did!" laughed John scornfully. "You tried hard. You had just +money enough to buy three tickets and I was generous enough to say that +I would let you three fellows use them--" + +"Go on with your story about the tramp," interrupted Fred. + +"Well, I'll tell you the truth," said John. + +"Hope it won't make you too tired," murmured Fred. + +"I'm telling you the truth," said John, glaring at his diminutive +companion as he spoke. "The train hadn't fairly gotten out of sight with +you fellows on board before up comes the tramp, driving this car. He +came right up to the platform of the station and invited me to get on +board. You may be sure I didn't stand on the form, or likewise on the +platform, very long." + +"Where did he get it?" demanded George. + +"He suspected what had happened," explained John, "and he said he went +to another garage, hoping that there had been some mistake. He said +there were two cars in trouble out there on the road, one besides ours. +The men that came out from the shop made a mistake and I guess each car +was taken to the wrong garage." + +"That's a pretty good story," laughed George. + +"Well, it's all right," declared John warmly. "Here's your car anyway. +The tramp brought it, just as I'm telling you, and you haven't anything +to say about it." + +"Maybe the tramp took the car and got scared when he saw us start off. +Probably he thought we were going for help." + +"Probably nothing!" exclaimed John disgustedly. "I tell you that tramp +is all right. He can speak the English language and he has got some +brains. I asked him to-day what he was tramping around the country for +and he said he didn't know." + +"He must have a lot of brains," ejaculated Fred. + +"He knows how to drive a car all right," said John. "He drove all the +way home." + +"Where is he now?" demanded George. + +"I don't know. He wouldn't stay. By the way, he did suggest before he +departed that if there was any reward connected with the finding of the +car he wouldn't mind taking it." + +"Probably he wouldn't," laughed Fred. + +"I think he is entitled to something," said George, "and I'll tell my +father about it the first time he comes out." + +"Where did the tramp go?" + +"He didn't tell me," explained John, "but I think he went over to the +old Meeker House. He said that if we wanted to see something worth while +and something that would beat anything we had ever experienced in the +old Meeker House we had better come over there after dinner." + +"To-night?" inquired Fred. + +"Yes, to-night." + +"I say we go," said Grant quickly. + +"So say we all," added George. + +In a brief time the car was running swiftly up the driveway of the yard +and as soon as his companions alighted George took it to the garage. + +The other missing car, however, had not been returned nor had any word +been received concerning it during the absence of the boys. + +A call on the telephone speedily demanded George's attention and as soon +as he rejoined his friends he said, "I have been talking to my father." + +"You mean your father has been talking to you," suggested Fred. + +Ignoring the interruption, George continued, "My father says that he has +word of a car that is being held in Morristown. In some ways it answers +the description of ours. He thinks it will be a good thing for us to go +there to-morrow and find out more about it." + +"Good plan. Good scheme," said Fred sympathetically. "Did your father +say anything about suitably rewarding the tramp for his return of the +car which he probably had all the while?" + +"He did," said George simply. "He told me to give him a ten dollar +bill." + +"That's all right," said Fred eagerly. "Now I think it will be a good +thing for each of us to take his turn, too," he added. "Every one of us +can take that car off and hide it over night and get ten dollars reward +when he brings it back in the morning. That's all your friend Mr. Tramp +did." + +"That's no such thing!" spoke up John, quick to defend his recent +acquaintance. + +"You may have it your own way," laughed Fred. "Then we're to go over and +call on him to-night at the old Meeker House, are we?" + +"That's just what we are going to do," said John. + +True to the suggestion, soon after sunset the Go Ahead boys rode to the +mysterious house. When they left their car by the roadside and started +across the intervening field it was plain that there was an air of +greater confidence now manifest by all four boys than in any previous +visit. + +The moon already had risen and in its clear light the old apple trees +and the poplars that lined the driveway appeared like aged sentinels, +twisted and gnarled. Indeed, some of the objects assumed fantastic forms +and as the boys advanced, a silence not unlike that which had rested +upon them in their former visits now fell over the party. + +"I'll tell you one thing," spoke up Fred in a loud whisper; "I'm going +with George around to the kitchen this trip." + +"I haven't invited you," replied George promptly. + +"It doesn't make any difference whether you have or not, I'm going just +the same," said Fred. + +"Then I shall have to put up with it," responded George in mock +resignation. "All I can say to the rest of you is that whatever you do +don't run. Let's find out what this thing means this time. Do you +agree?" + +"Yes, we agree," replied his friends. + +"Good," responded George. "Now don't forget." + +The boys at once separated, George and Fred moving around to the rear of +the house while John and Grant approached the front door, which already +was a familiar sight. + +Without waiting for their companions to enter they at once pushed open +the door, which creaked on its rusty hinges, producing sounds not unlike +the cry of a child in distress. + +Inside the room there again was the sound of many rushing wings. Indeed, +for a moment, to the boys, who were startled in spite of their +determination to be calm, the room seemed to be filled with flying +creatures. Weird sounds also were heard and low spoken cries that were +not unlike the creaking of the hinges of the old door. + +In spite of their recently expressed courage both boys stopped as if by +common consent. As they did so the sound of voices, speaking in +whispers, was heard from other parts of the house. No person, however, +was visible and in the dim light that penetrated the room neither of the +boys was able to see any object distinctly. + +Meanwhile the flapping of the unseen wings continued. Suddenly there was +a flash of light that was almost blinding. It was so unexpected that +both boys together and almost instantly turned toward the door. A cloud +of smoke swept through the room and both boys, coughing and choking, +instantly turned and fled from the house. Their speed increased as there +came sounds of loud laughter from within the ancient dwelling. Unmindful +of their promise not to run, both boys instantly turned and quickly were +making most excellent time across the field in the direction of the +automobile, which still could be seen in the open road. + + + + +CHAPTER XX--THE FATHER OF HIS COUNTRY + + +When John and Grant climbed into their seats in the waiting automobile +both were nearly breathless. Before either of them spoke there came +another loud burst of laughter from the house of mystery, and a moment +later Fred and George were seen approaching. Both were running but +neither apparently had been as greatly alarmed by the occurrences in the +old Meeker House as had their two friends. + +"I thought you fellows were not going to run," said Fred as he seated +himself. + +"We thought the place was being bombarded," explained John. "I noticed +that you didn't stay very long either." + +"We had to come out and find what had made you fellows run so fast," +said George. + +"That's all right," said John. "I'm willing to go back there now if you +are." + +Fred hesitated a moment, but as George had now seated himself and the +car was under motion and there was slight prospect of turning back, in +his boldest tones he said, "I'm perfectly willing to go back. I wasn't +scared to-night anyway." + +"Come on, then," said John, rising as he spoke. + +George, however, ignored the conversation and increasing the speed at +which the car was moving soon left the corner far behind him. + +When the Go Ahead boys arrived at the farmhouse neither John nor Grant +had much to say concerning their recent experience. The blinding flash +which they described had been seen also by their companions, but both +George and Fred declared that they had not been frightened by the +unexpected occurrence. + +There was no possibility of denying the fact that John and Grant had +fled much more precipitately than had their companions, although there +had been no great difference in the time of their return to the waiting +automobile. + +For some reason conversation flagged and not many references were made +to the mysteries of the old Meeker House which still were unexplained. + +"To-morrow morning," said George, "you understand that we are to go to +Morristown. Are we all going?" + +"We are," replied his friends together. + +"I didn't know but John would like to stay behind and make some further +investigations," laughed George. + +"No, sir. I'm not going to be left this time," explained John. "I want +to see Morristown. I have heard so much about the place that I want to +see it for myself." + +"It's well worth seeing," said George. + +The following morning directly after breakfast, the Go Ahead boys were +speeding swiftly toward the beautiful Jersey town which was to be their +destination. The ride across the rolling country, with its frequent +streams and hills and villages, was most attractive. Many beautiful +homes, erected by the people of the great city beyond the borders of the +state, added much to the beauty of the scenery. + +However, the enthusiasm of the boys reached its highest point when at +last they arrived at Morristown. The combination of age with the best +that the thought of modern times could accomplish in the architecture of +the houses was most impressive. Beautiful homes, many of which had +extensive lawns and shade trees and the many evidences of thrift and +prosperity to be seen on every side, were most attractive. + +The first duty of the boys, however, was to visit the garage to which +they had been directed by George's father. Here, however, again their +efforts proved unavailing. The missing car was not found. An automobile +of the same make and concerning which there was some question of +ownership was still in the garage, but the Go Ahead boys speedily +decided that they had no claim to its possession. + +"I don't believe we'll ever find the car," said Fred despondently when +the boys departed from the garage. + +"I guess you have forgotten our name," suggested John. "We are the Go +Ahead boys, not the Give Up boys." + +"That's all right," spoke up George, "but just now I am going to show +you some of the sights of this old historic town." + +"Did Washington sleep here?" inquired Fred demurely. + +"He lived here for a while," explained George, "but the British tried to +find out whether he was asleep or not. They never found him asleep." + +"Still I suppose he did sleep sometimes." + +"When was he here?" inquired John. + +"Why, don't you know the history of your own country?" spoke up Fred. +"Washington came here after the battle of Princeton. That winter was a +hard one for the little colonial army. People have talked about Valley +Forge just as if there wasn't as much suffering at Morristown. I don't +know why it is that people start on one line and then forget there are +any others." + +"He was here twice," explained Grant. "That winter of '77 and '78 and +then too in the winter of '78 and '79." + +"Yes," said George. "The house which is called Washington's Headquarters +is where he lived during his second winter. I'm going to take you +first," he added, "out to Washington Valley. That's where the most of +the soldiers camped." + +In a brief time the Go Ahead boys gained the summit of the hill from +which they were able to look down upon the marvelously beautiful valley +before them. It was like a great bowl among the hills. The rich and +cultivated fields and beautiful homes on the hillsides and the nature of +the place itself combined to make a most beautiful as well as +interesting picture. + +"It looks almost as if it was built for an army to hide in," said Grant. + +"They were pretty well protected here," explained George. "You see, the +hills were as good as forts. Now we'll go back to Washington's +headquarters," he added, as he turned around and started once more back +toward Morristown. + +Not far from the public square the boys found the famous building. Built +of brick and covered with boards and shingles, its sides painted white, +it produced not merely an impression of age, but also of freshness as +well. + +"Then this is where the father of his country stayed, is it?" said Fred. +"Just look at this picture," he added as he pointed toward the house and +then turned around to George and said, "then look at this. We have +fallen from that to this, Washington was the father of his country and +G. Washington Sanders is just 'Pop'." + +"That's all right," replied George, joining in the laugh of his friends. +"I'll admit that Pop isn't the biggest word in the language any more +than Pyg is." + +"Quit this," demanded Grant. "We're going into the old house and you +will have to behave yourselves." + +The visit proved to be most interesting. Many articles that had been +used when Washington was living in the house and many more which had +been contributed were on exhibition. Indeed, as the boys passed from +room to room they became more subdued in their manner, for somehow the +knowledge that they were looking upon the same sights that had greeted +the great commander had produced a marked effect. Even the old cannon on +the lawn and the piles of cannon balls had stories of their own. + +The silence, however, was broken when the boys resumed their seats in +the automobile. + +"I wonder why Washington stayed so far away from his army," suggested +John. + +"He had a body guard here all the time," explained Grant. "There were +about two hundred and fifty men stationed here. They used to call them +the life guard." + +"What did they do?" inquired Fred. + +"It was a special guard to protect General Washington. You see the red +coats and Hessians, as I told you, tried a good many times to catch +Washington asleep. Sometimes they crossed over from Staten Island and +came up through Springfield, trying to catch the 'old fox' off his +guard. But the people all through the country knew just what to do. They +had guns or little cannon mounted on several of the hills and whenever +word came that the redcoats were coming the boys fired one cannon and +that would be heard by other people and the guns on the other hills +would be fired too so that the soldiers at Morristown knew long before +the British could arrive that they were trying to advance." + +"But they never got him," said Fred gleefully. + +"It wasn't because they didn't try hard enough," laughed George. "My +grandfather used to tell me that when the soldiers at Morristown heard +the 'old sow,' which was the name of one of the guns, they understood +right away that there was danger of an attack. Everything in the old +house was shut up except the windows, and then five of the continentals +took their stand at every window and were ready to fire upon any one +that came near the place." + +"I would like to have seen Washington," said John thoughtfully. + +"They say," said George, "that he was about as tall as you are, String, +but he had some breadth and thickness as well as length. He weighed +about two hundred pounds. All the time he was at Morristown he was very +quiet. I fancy he was worried all the while. That didn't prevent him +from being very strict with his soldiers, however. He issued an order +that there should be no gambling or swearing, that nobody should be +permitted to do any stunts on Sunday, and the men who disobeyed didn't +forget the lesson taught them." + +"Why, what did Washington do?" inquired Fred. + +"He had guilty soldiers whipped in the presence of their companies. A +man would be tied up to a tree and then the drummers or fifers would +have to lash him. Sometimes they got forty blows, sometimes more. One +time a soldier who had disobeyed orders about poaching and had stolen a +pig from a poor farmer was reported to the commander. Washington had him +whipped with more than a double dose. They say that the men did not make +any complaint though, and even when they were going through the +performance every man used to take a lead cartridge between his teeth +and bite hard on it whenever he was struck a blow." + +"I guess that's one reason why Washington was so popular," suggested +John thoughtfully. + +"It's an easy way to become popular," laughed Fred. + +"Never you mind," retorted George. "You know just as well as I do that +no fellow likes a teacher that is not strict. My father says that the +man or boy who tries to be popular never is." + +"And your father is dead right too," said Grant quickly, turning to his +friend. + +"Yes, sir, he's all right," responded John. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI--AN EXPLANATION IN PART + + +It was the middle of the afternoon when the Go Ahead boys returned to +George's home. Apparently they had not been cast down by their failure +to obtain information concerning the missing car. Indeed, as one of the +boys laughingly remarked, George was the only one deeply and personally +concerned in the loss and if he did not feel discouraged there certainly +was no reason why his friends should be despondent. + +On the broad piazza of the old farmhouse the boys sat for a half-hour +talking over the experiences of the day. Different suggestions were made +as to possible plans that might be adopted in the search for the stolen +automobile. + +"I'm not thinking so much about the car as I am about what we saw to-day +at Morristown," said Grant thoughtfully. "I feel almost as if I had +stepped right back into the eighteenth century." + +"My friend," said Fred soberly, "that is where you belong. I have often +been puzzled to know how to account for some of the strange traits of +your peculiar personality. You have hit the nail now squarely on the +head. You have been born one hundred and forty years too late. You are a +rare old antique." + +The boys laughed as Grant arose from his seat and lifting his diminutive +friend bodily from the chair in which he was seated, he dropped him over +the rail. + +"When you grow up," he called, "and learn to behave you may come back +here." + +"I'm not coming back," called Fred glibly. + +"We'll try to live through our disappointment," said Grant. + +"You'll be disappointed all right the next time you see me," called +Fred. Then turning to John he eagerly beckoned to him to follow him. + +With a groan John slowly arose from the chair in which he was seated and +followed Fred as he led the way around the corner of the house. + +"What I want of you," said Fred when he and his companion could not be +seen by the other boys, "is to go with me over to the Meeker House. I +think I have found something." + +"Is it the same thing you found last night?" inquired John. + +"Not at all. I don't mind telling you that I have fixed a trap over +there." + +"What do you mean, a steel trap?" + +"No, no," said Fred. "I sprinkled some bran last night all around the +floor. I filled my pockets with it before we started and while we were +in the old house I scattered it on the floors. Now, I want to go over +there to find out if--" + +"If what?" interrupted John. "Are you trying to feed those spooks on +bran?" + +"As usual, my friend," retorted Fred, "you begin at the wrong end. I am +not trying to get an impression of their heads, but of their feet. Only, +spooks don't make a deep impression when they step on the floor, and I'm +more than suspicious that I'll find some tracks." + +"I'll go with you," said John eagerly. "Wait until I tell the other +fellows that we are going away for a while. Are you going to walk, +Fred?" + +"Yes, I am. I have been riding all day and I want to stretch my +muscles." + +Both George and Grant laughed when John told them that he and Fred were +going for a walk. + +"You'll walk in one direction," called George, "but you'll be running +when you come back. I think I'll take the car and in a half an hour I'll +come over after you. You'll want to see some of your friends by that +time and you will want to see them bad." + +"I don't want to see them 'bad,'" retorted John as he turned away. "They +are 'bad' enough as it is. I want to see them badly." + +Together the two boys walked through the woods and across the lots and +by a shorter route than the highway arrived within a half-hour in the +yard of the house they were seeking. + +"Come around to the kitchen," said Fred. Almost unconsciously he had +lowered his voice and although it was still daylight he was glancing +nervously about him when he and John softly opened the rear door and +stepped within the kitchen. + +The boards of the floor were twisted and uneven. The floor was of pine +and George had explained that his father had said that he believed the +floor was as old as any part of the house. There were marks of the +places where the women of another generation had scrubbed the floor. +Doubtless it had been their pride to keep the pine boards clean, just as +it is a source of pride to many of their sisters of a later day to be +adorned with feathers of various gaudy colors. + +Noiselessly the boys advanced and without a word having been spoken +began to examine the floor where Fred had scattered the bran the +preceding evening. No footprints were found, however, and it was +speedily plain that if any one had entered the building since the boys +had departed they had not done so by the kitchen door. + +Convinced that they were alone in the house, the courage of both boys +somewhat revived. Indeed there was something in the sunshine of the +summer afternoon and in the not unmusical sounds of the winged +grasshoppers in the adjacent orchard that was soothing to the excited +boys. + +They were about to pass out of the room when John abruptly stopped and +whispered, "Look here, Fred. What's that?" As he spoke he pointed to a +small tube which plainly had been fastened recently to the wall. The +tube was of tin, about an inch in diameter and extended almost to the +ceiling. Through the wall a hole had been made and the boys peered +eagerly at the wall in the adjacent room to see whether or not the tube +was there also. + +"That's just how it is! That's good, String!" exclaimed Fred excitedly. +"That explains the sound of the voices we heard the other night." + +"I don't see how it explains it," said John, somewhat puzzled by the +excitement of his companion. + +"Why, it's a speaking tube. You go back to the kitchen and I'll stay +here and we'll try it." + +The suggestion was quickly adopted and in a brief time both boys were +aware that Fred's conjecture was correct. The strange sounds and the +whispers of their names which had been heard frequently whenever they +had visited the house after darkness had fallen, now were explained. + +"That's the reason," said John eagerly, "why George always wants to come +around to the kitchen door. Don't you remember he hasn't once come in by +the front door?" + +"That's right," responded Fred. "He knows more about what is going on in +this old house than he has let on, and all the time he has been +pretending that he was puzzled as much as we are by what we have seen +and heard. We must think up something so that we can pay him back in his +own coin." + +"That's what we'll do," said John eagerly. "What shall it be?" + +"Time enough to think about that later," responded Fred. "What's that?" +he added abruptly. + +From within the chimney could be heard the sound as of a man swinging a +noisy rattle. There were also sharp noises that sometimes were quite +loud and at others were low and soft and yet they were continuously +sounding. + +"I tell you there's something in that chimney," said John. + +"I begin to think you're right," whispered Fred. "Get down on your knees +and look up through the fireplace." + +John obediently stretched his long form upon the floor and peered up +through the flue of the open fireplace. As he did so the clatter in the +chimney suddenly increased in volume and for a moment John was on the +point of hastily withdrawing from the spot. + +As he prepared to do so, however, suddenly a little, young bird fell, +striking the floor close to John's head. At the same time there was a +renewal of the clatter in the chimney and John hastily withdrew. + +To his amazement he found when he arose that Fred was laughing. + +"What's there so funny about it?" demanded John as he tried to brush the +accumulated dust from his person. + +For a moment Fred was almost unable to control himself, but at last he +said, "Oh, Jack, what fools we have been. There we were so scared by the +sound of the wings that we heard in this room and the strange noises +that came from the chimney that we couldn't get out of the place fast +enough. And now it's all as plain as daylight." + +"I don't see it," said John blankly. + +"Well, have a little patience, and in time you'll see it, Johnny." + +"Why don't you talk? Why don't you explain yourself? What are you +laughing at?" demanded John, irritated by the manner of his companion. + +"Why those sounds we heard were made by chimney-swallows." + +"What is a chimney-swallow?" + +"Do you mean to tell me that you have lived to be seventeen years old +and don't know what a chimney-swallow is?" + +"They don't have them in the city where I live." + +"Well," said Fred, pretending to be discouraged, "I cannot understand +how any fellow can live as you have and yet not know that there are some +birds called chimney-swallows that live in the chimneys of old or +deserted houses. If you should look up there now you could see some +nests fastened right to the sides of the chimney. I have never seen the +birds, but I'm sure that's what they are. Whenever we have come into the +house we have probably frightened them and they have been flying around +the room. They were the spooks that scared us so." + +"Do you suppose George knew about it?" demanded John ruefully. + +"Of course he knew it. He has been saving it all up to add to his story +of the speaking tube." + +"Well, it's a comfort to know the old house isn't haunted anyway." + +"Of course it isn't haunted. There isn't anything haunted because there +isn't anything like ghosts or spooks." + +"I'm glad to hear you talk so nicely, Freddie," said John, who now had +recovered from his chagrin. "If I'm not mistaken I've heard you talk in +a different tone once or twice before when we have been here." + +"That's all right," said Fred glibly. "Now we have found out what the +spooks are and we'll show George that we're not afraid of anything in +the old Meeker House." + +The boys were still conversing in whispers, and as Fred made his bold +declaration he abruptly stopped and looked anxiously toward the +stairway. A sound mysterious and unexpected had been heard in the room +directly above them. Both boys were convinced that either others were in +the house, or that they had not yet found an explanation for all the +mysteries of the old Meeker House. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII--A DARE + + +Without a word having been spoken, Fred and John instantly departed from +the old house. They did not even glance at each other as they did so, +but moved by a common impulse both were apparently ready to seek a place +of safety with all haste. + +Fred's bold declaration that now he had found an explanation for the +strange occurrences in the Meeker House apparently had not held good. He +was maintaining his place by the side of his tall friend when both were +fleeing from the house. + +The sun already had disappeared from sight and the shadows of the +evening were lengthening. + +Perhaps the hour increased their feeling of uncertainty. At all events +the confidence they had possessed, when in broad daylight they had +boldly entered the kitchen, manifestly now was gone. Each boy frequently +glanced behind him in his flight, but neither spoke to the other until +fifty yards intervened between them and the dwelling. + +"What are we doing out here?" demanded Fred blankly. + +"I don't think you need very much of an explanation," retorted John. + +"That's the way it seems to me, too," responded Fred, striving to laugh +lightly as he spoke. + +"At all events we are making pretty good time." + +Indeed the smaller boy was able to maintain the pace at which his friend +with the longer legs was moving over the field. Half the distance +between the house and the road had been covered when John stopped and +said, "Look ahead there, Fred. Isn't that George and Grant waiting over +yonder in the road?" + +In response to the suggestion of his friend, Fred glanced quickly at the +huge spreading oak tree that grew close to the fence. It was a +magnificent tree, the pride of the country around about and the delight +of many visitors. Beneath it an automobile was seen and then Fred +exclaimed quickly, "You're right, String, that's George and Grant. Let's +slow up a little. We don't want them to think we are in too much of a +hurry." + +Accordingly the speed at which they were moving decreased and as they +glanced behind them and saw that the conditions about the old Meeker +House apparently were unchanged the boys ceased to run and began to +walk. + +"Don't let them think we have been scared out," again suggested Fred. +"We'll never hear the last of it if we don't." + +Without replying John nodded his head and more slowly the boys walked +across the intervening field and then climbed the fence and leaped +lightly into the roadside when they drew near the place where the two +boys were awaiting their coming. + +"What's your hurry?" demanded George, laughing as he spoke. + +"We're in no hurry," responded Fred glibly. + +"We're hungry, that's all," said John. "We were afraid you would be +keeping dinner for us." + +"That's a mighty good excuse," laughed Grant. "You didn't act when we +first saw you as if you were thinking of your dinner. I didn't believe +that either one of you could make such good time." + +"That's all right," said Fred sharply. "That's all right, but it's just +exactly as I said." + +"What is?" inquired George. + +"Why the tricks you have been trying to play on us in the old Meeker +House." + +"Tricks? What tricks have I been trying to play?" replied George. + +"Did you ever hear of chimney-swallows?" inquired Fred. + +"Indeed I have," said George, "and I have seen them lots of times." + +"Ever see any in the old Meeker House?" + +"Yes," replied George, laughing again as he spoke. + +"Well, why didn't you tell us that they were there? You let us go on and +I think you helped us too to believe that the room was full of flying +spooks." + +"I didn't know that I was to blame," laughed George, "if you didn't know +the difference between a spook and chimney-swallow." + +"You must have put in a lot of work in that old house, George," broke in +John. + +"Work?" inquired George, staring blankly at his friend. "What do you +mean? I never worked there in my life." + +"Who put in that speaking tube that runs from the kitchen to the front +room?" demanded John. + +"I didn't," George said quietly. + +"You mean you didn't do the work. I guess you knew it was put in and I +guess too that you know who put it in." + +George laughed, but did not directly reply to the implied question. + +"We have found out about your old speaking tube," continued John. "That +was a great trick for you to play on your old friends." + +Grant, who was listening intently to the conversation, in which up to +this time he had taken no part, now said, "Then you two fellows think +you have found out all about the strange things in the old Meeker House, +do you?" + +"We didn't say that," replied Fred. "All we say is that we have found +out about the wings that we heard and the chattering in the chimney and +the speaking tube that ran from the kitchen into the front room. My, but +I was scared when I heard my name called there," he added. + +George laughed loudly as he said, "You don't need to tell me that, Pyg. +I wouldn't have believed that any living creature could have made its +legs fly as fast as yours did that night." + +"I was trying to keep up with the rest of the fellows," retorted Fred. +"I had to go some to do that." + +"Now that you have found out all these things you're not afraid to go +back there any time, are you?" inquired George. + +"Yes, sir, I am," said Fred. + +"What?" + +"Because we haven't found out everything. There's something strange +about that place that I don't understand yet." + +"Why, what happened?" inquired George quickly. + +"We heard voices upstairs." + +"Was that the reason why you were moving so fast across the yard?" +laughed George. + +"Laugh all you want to," said Fred, "but that's what we heard." + +"Probably your tramp was talking to himself," suggested Grant. + +"No, sir," spoke up John promptly. "That wasn't it at all. Besides there +was more than one voice." + +"You didn't hear the automobile-horn, did you?" inquired George. + +"No, we didn't. We heard all I wanted to without hearing that. It just +made my flesh creep to hear those voices upstairs and coming down the +stairway." + +"Was there anything strange about the voices?" asked George. + +"Yes, sir, there was." + +"Well, I tell you what I'll do," said Grant promptly. "I'll dare both of +you to come back here to the old Meeker House after dinner to-night." + +"I'll do it," said Fred promptly. + +"I'll give you another dare better than that," said John. "I'll dare you +and George to go back there right now." + +"Will you come too?" demanded George. + +"We have just come from there," said John. "We know what there is there +and you don't. Now we dare you both to go back right now." + +George glanced a moment questioningly at Grant and then without a word +being spoken promptly turned the car and started back toward the +mysterious old house. + +Apparently all thoughts of dinner had been forgotten or ignored. Fred +and John looked at each other and laughed derisively, but neither spoke +until at last the car was halted under the old oak tree. + +Quickly George and Grant leaped out and started across the intervening +field. + +Fred and John left to themselves waited until their friends had gone to +the rear of the building and then the former said quickly, "Let's take +the car and go back home. It will serve those fellows just right to +leave them there." + +John laughed as he agreed to the suggestion. + +Avoiding all possible noise they turned the car about and started down +the road. They had gone only a short distance, however, before Fred +suddenly clutched the arm of his companion who was driving and said, +"Listen, String! Wasn't that a call or a shout?" + +As he spoke, Fred in great excitement looked behind him in the direction +of the mysterious old dwelling house. Without a word, John turned the +car about and started swiftly on his way back to the old tree. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII--LED BY A MAN + + +When the boys arrived at the familiar place in the road they were +startled by a renewal of the shouts from the house. It was the faint +sound of these calls which had alarmed them and caused them to turn back +on their way. + +Even while they were hesitating as to whether or not they should leave +the car and run to the house to aid their friends, who apparently were +in dire trouble, they saw two forms emerge from the front door. They +instantly recognized George and Grant, for the light was still +sufficient to enable them to see quite plainly across the fields. Both +boys were running at their highest speed. + +Blowing the horn of the automobile and shouting, both John and Fred did +their utmost to call the attention of their friends to the fact that +they were awaiting their coming. That their calls were heard was +speedily manifest when both George and Grant, turning slightly in the +direction in which they were speeding, ran toward the great tree. + +At that moment George stumbled over some unseen object and fell headlong +upon the ground. His companion stopped a moment and Fred and John +watched him as he lifted George to his feet and then both boys renewed +their flight. + +In a brief time they had arrived at the fence and in their haste both +fell when they tried to climb over it. + +"What's wrong? What's wrong?" demanded Fred excitedly, as his friends +approached the car. + +"Never mind what's wrong," said George brusquely. "Let me get into the +car and give me that wheel." + +No further words were spoken while George and his companions entered the +car and in a brief time the automobile was again speeding down the road. +Several times Grant glanced apprehensively behind him, but the +increasing distance evidently gave him renewed courage, for when a +quarter of a mile had been covered he said, "I suppose you fellows are +both wondering what the trouble is." + +"Yes, we are," said John quickly. "What is it?" + +"It's the same thing that scared you, only worse. We heard sounds +upstairs that showed that some men up there were fighting, then there +was a pistol-shot and we heard some one fall. After that there were +groans and cries galore, and we thought it was time for us to start for +home." + +"You were brave boys to leave that other fellow!" said Fred tartly. "If +there was some one shot, it was time for you to help him." + +"We couldn't help him very much if we went upstairs only to be shot +ourselves," said George sharply. + +"You don't know what you could have done," retorted Fred. + +"No, I didn't know, but I'll tell you what I'll do. If you want to go +back there right now, I'll take you back." + +"I don't want to go," said Fred quietly. "It's time for somebody besides +boys like us to step in. I think the best thing for us to do will be to +find some man and take him back there. We can go in with him then and +help if we have to." + +"I guess that's a good suggestion, all right," said George quickly. +"Grant and I were so scared that we couldn't think of anything except +getting out of the horrible old house in the best possible time. My, +think how Grant loped along, taking about six feet at a jump." + +"I noticed that I wasn't alone," said Grant, dryly. "Whoever it was with +me wasn't very far behind." + +"I guess you're right," acknowledged George. "Now I'll own up, fellows, +about the speaking tube and the swallows. I knew the birds were in the +chimney and I knew too that you didn't know much about such things, so I +thought I would let you work it out. Then I put in that speaking tube +and added to the fun, but I tell you right now that I have had my +lesson. I'm not afraid of all the ghosts in Jersey, but I don't like the +sounds that came from that upper room in the old Meeker House. I don't +mind saying so to any one. I guess my father is at the house by this +time, for he said he might come out to-night. If he is, we'll tell him +all about it and let him take charge. It's time for the Go Ahead boys to +go ahead all right, but I think they had better follow somebody who is +older, all the same." + +All the boys agreed that George's suggestion was the best that could be +made. The speed of the automobile increased and not many minutes had +elapsed when the Go Ahead boys arrived at George's home. + +They were all delighted when they found that Mr. Sanders was there. He +listened to the story of the excited boys and then quietly said, "I +think we'll have dinner first and then I'll go with you over to the old +Meeker House. You have been stirring up the spooks, have you?" and Mr. +Sanders laughed as he spoke. "There were spooks there when I was a boy, +and I remember how we used to steer clear of the corner when we were +coming home evenings. When we were a little older we began to make +investigations and found there wasn't anything unusual or that couldn't +be explained about the old place. But the stories of the spooks have +kept up just the same. I don't know why, unless it is that there are +some people that believe such things just because they want to believe +them." + +"That's what Caesar says," spoke up Grant. "I remember in his +Commentaries he wrote that 'men believe that which they wish to +believe.' But, Mr. Sanders, don't you think there's something very +strange about what George and I heard there to-night?" + +"There may be," admitted Mr. Sanders, "but there have been so many +stories told about the old house that I do not know whether you boys +thought you heard something or really did hear it." + +"You would have known if you had been with us," spoke up George quickly. + +"Well, I shall be with you soon and then we will try to find out. I +cannot believe there is anything wrong there, so we might as well have +our dinner and then we will start." + +The plan of Mr. Sanders was followed, and directly after dinner the Go +Ahead boys, together with George's father, started once more for the +place which had been the scene of so much excitement throughout their +summer vacation. + +Upon the suggestion of Mr. Sanders a lantern was taken with them. When +they arrived at the familiar spot beneath the old oak tree the lantern +was lighted and all five started across the fields toward the Meeker +House. + +No one spoke until they arrived at the front door, which now had become +a familiar spot to all four boys. Without a word Mr. Sanders pushed open +the door and stepped within the room. Instantly there was a great +fluttering of wings, for the chimney-swallows, startled by the light as +well as by the unexpected entrance of the visitors, were displaying +their alarm by their frantic cries and swift flight. No other sounds, +however, were heard when the birds at last became more quiet. + +"Where did you say the trouble was?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"In the room upstairs," answered George. + +"The one directly over this?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"Well, then the only thing for us to do is to go up there and see what +has happened." + +The boys agreed to the suggestion and although no one spoke every one +was aware that his companions were as excited as he when slowly they +began to mount the rickety stairway. The boards creaked and groaned +beneath their feet, increasing the excitement of all. + +When they had arrived at the platform about midway on the stairway, all +stopped and listened. The screeching sounds of the excited birds still +continued, but otherwise the silence was unbroken. + +"Is there anybody here?" called Mr. Sanders loudly. As no reply was made +to his inquiry he turned to the boys and said, "There doesn't appear to +be anybody here. Well go on up and continue our investigations." + +Once more leading the way, Mr. Sanders noiselessly mounted the steps, +the boys keeping closely together and not far behind the leader. Holding +his lantern before him Mr. Sanders stopped when he arrived at the head +of the stairway and examined the rooms that opened before him. + +Suddenly a sound very like laughter was heard in the old building, but +it quickly ceased and in place of it the faint tooting of an automobile +horn was heard. + +The boys now were staring about them and had it not been for the +presence of George's father it is doubtful if any one would have +remained. + +As it was, a startling event occurred which instantly cause all five to +turn quickly about and run swiftly down the stairway. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV--THE END OF THE HOUSE + + +Even Mr. Sanders appeared to be as alarmed as his younger companions. At +all events he was swiftly leading the way, and as the boys were running +down the stairway two or three steps at a time it was necessary for him +to move rapidly in order to keep his place at the head of the line. + +There had been a sudden flash of light that apparently had filled the +building. No sound had accompanied the strange sight although the air +was heavy with the suffocating odor of burning powder. The light +apparently had been flashed in every room at the same moment. The +twittering of the chimney-swallows abruptly ceased after one shrill +outburst of alarm. + +Before the party arrived at the foot of the stairway the blinding flash +was repeated. The house now seemed to be filled with the penetrating +odor and even the lantern did not fully serve to light their way. + +"Keep together, boys," called Mr. Sanders in a low voice. "We must all +make for the front door and get out of this place as soon as possible." + +In spite of their alarm, Fred in his own mind was questioning whether it +was the heavy odor in the room or the desire of Mr. Sanders to gain a +place of safety outside the building that had caused such a precipitate +flight. At all events no one delayed, and in a brief time all five were +running rapidly across the field, Mr. Sanders still holding the lantern +and leading the retreating party. + +Before they arrived at the road, however, they stopped and looked behind +them. The old house now was wrapped in darkness. Not a sound came from +the mysterious dwelling. The blinding flashes of light that had been +seen apparently were ended and only the reflection of the moonlight from +the few windows that still were left in the house produced an unusual +sight. + +In silence the Go Ahead boys and Mr. Sanders waited for a repetition of +the sight which had startled them. Not a sound came from the place, and +although the boys waited several minutes the strange lights were not +repeated. + +"I'm inclined to think," said Mr. Sanders thoughtfully, "that it will be +better for us to go back and continue our investigations. What do you +say, boys?" + +"We agree," spoke up Fred glibly. "We might as well run this matter down +now as at any time. What do you think those flashes were, Mr. Sanders?" + +"From the odor I think likely they were made by setting off the powder +which is lighted when a flash-light picture is taken." + +"It does seem so, doesn't it?" said John quickly. "But where did such +powder come from? Who lighted it?" + +"That's what we must find out," said Mr. Sanders dryly. + +Meanwhile the party was returning to the building and had covered half +the distance when they all stopped abruptly as George exclaimed, +"There's a light there now! Can't you see it? It's up in the corner of +the eaves." + +A moment later all declared that they could see the flames to which +George had referred, but as they resumed their walk John said abruptly, +"That's more than a flash-light, that's a fire! I tell you, fellows, the +old Meeker House is on fire!" + +Instantly every one stopped but only a brief delay was required to +confirm the startling statement. The flames by this time had burst +through the roof and it was evident that unless help speedily was +obtained the house which had stood nearly two centuries was doomed. + +There was no further waiting now and quickly all five were running +toward the blazing building. This time, however, Mr. Sanders was not +leading the party. The boys speedily outdistanced him and as soon as +they arrived within the yard they discovered that two other men were +already on the ground. + +By this time the fire was under strong headway. The timbers of the +dwelling house, old and dry, were burning almost like tinder. Sparks +were flying from the blazing roof and the flames were steadily mounting +higher and higher. + +Across the field from the opposite road forms of men approaching the +building could be seen, and the wild cry "Fire!" "Fire!" was heard on +every side. + +There were no buckets or pails to be found in the dwelling, as was +speedily discovered when the doors were burst open. Near the kitchen +door was the old well, which had been used in former generations. A +well-sweep was there, but the heavy weight which had been used to +balance the bucket was gone and it had been long since the water in the +depths below had been disturbed. In desperation, however, the entire +party sought to find some means of stopping the fire. + +Some of the men who now had arrived started swiftly across the fields +toward houses that could be seen in the distance. There was a vague +thought that they might obtain pails and ropes that would enable them to +quench the flames. By the time the men returned, however, the house was +doomed. + +Fascinated by the sight, the boys withdrew from the spot and watched the +blazing dwelling as the flames leaped and roared and crackled. + +"There goes the chimney!" exclaimed Fred in a low voice, as a pile of +bricks fell crashing into the depths. + +"I wonder what became of those chimney-swallows," suggested John. + +"I guess those that could fly are gone and those that were too young to +fly are already burned," said Grant. + +"How do you suppose that fire started?" inquired George. + +As no one had a ready solution his question remained unanswered. The +boys now, however, were rejoined by Mr. Sanders, who explained that it +was perilous as well as useless to attempt to fight the flames longer. +The most that could be expected was to prevent the flying embers from +setting fire to fences or to buildings that were not far away. + +"It's a pity," said Mr. Sanders slowly, "that the old house had to go in +this way." + +"And it never gave up all its secrets either," added Fred. "We were just +on the point of finding out, when the whole thing goes up in smoke." + +"I fancy that what you call 'secrets' will all be explained. My thought +is that the two men, whom we found here when we came back across the +fields, can tell more about the origin of the fire than we think." + +"Who were the men?" inquired George. + +"I don't know either of them," answered Mr. Sanders. "To me they looked +like tramps." + +Startled by the unexpected statement the boys stared blankly at one +another and then as if moved by a common impulse they turned and +advanced among the spectators who now numbered at least three score. + +"Isn't it wonderful," suggested Grant, "what a crowd you can get and in +such a little while even out in the country, if anything unusual is +going on? I wouldn't have believed that a blast on Gabriel's trumpet +could have brought twenty people here in an hour and yet in less than +twenty minutes there's a crowd. Where do you suppose they came from?" + +"That fire can be seen a long distance," explained George, "and there's +nothing like a fire to get a crowd. There's the tramp!" he abruptly +added, nodding, as he spoke, toward a man who could be seen on the +outskirts of the assembly. + +By common consent all four boys instantly ran to the place where the man +was seen. + +As they approached, however, the tramp, for George's statement proved to +be correct, apparently became aware of their coming and instantly +departed. + +To the boys it seemed that he had moved around to the other side of the +burning building but when they sought him there he was not to be found. + +"What do you suppose it all means?" inquired John blankly. "He acted as +if he didn't want to see us." + +"Probably he didn't," suggested George. "That's his right." + +"It may be and it may not be," retorted John. "I don't believe he will +stand very long on the order of his departure." + +"Why not?" + +"Probably he could tell more about how the fire started than any one in +the crowd." + +"What do you mean?" demanded George as the three boys stopped and stared +into the face of their friend. + +"I don't know just how much I do mean, but we all know that the tramp +used the old Meeker House as a sort of headquarters, or at least that he +used to stop there nights, and it may be that he was here when the fire +first started." + +"Of course he was," spoke up John. "Don't you remember that he told me +that if we would come over to the house after dinner, we would see +something interesting?" + +"Well, all I can say is that we came and that we certainly found +something interesting," said George dryly, as the falling timbers +crashed into the fire and great showers of sparks fell all about the +waiting boys. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV--A TALK WITH THE TRAMP + + +Following the fall of the walls of the old house, the fire blazed up +anew and a fresh shower of sparks fell far from the blazing building. +The crowd was helpless. The only water to be had was from the old well +which now had caved in and the small amount which could be secured had +been exhausted in the early part of the fire. The timbers were old and +dry, and blazed almost like burning paper. The faces and forms of the +spectators seemed to be ghostly in the light against the dark background +of the night. + +For an hour the blaze still continued, but the flames were gradually +becoming lower. No longer were there showers of blazing sparks that fell +upon the ground far away. + +There was only a dim glow when at last Mr. Sanders led the way back to +the automobile. The excitement of the boys, however, still continued and +when their car started they were all looking back at the spot where the +crowd, fantastic in its appearance in the dim light and the glow of the +dying fire, were still to be seen. + +"Well, there's one thing I feel almost as badly about as I do the loss +of the old building," said John thoughtfully, as the car sped homeward. + +"What is that?" inquired George. + +"Now we shall never know about the mysteries of the old place." + +"There aren't very many mysteries left," suggested Fred. "We have found +out about the speaking tube and the chimney-swallows." + +"Yes," said Grant, "but how about that blaze?" + +"I suspect," joined in Mr. Sanders, "that the blaze you speak of had +something to do with the burning of the old house." + +"What do you mean?" inquired George quickly. + +"That's just what I mean," replied Mr. Sanders. "Somebody had a +flash-light over there and probably set fire to the building. I haven't +any idea who could have done it." + +"I guess the tramp might tell us something," suggested Grant. + +"The tramp?" inquired Mr. Sanders. "What tramp?" + +In response to his questions the boys related all their experiences with +the strange man whom they had found in the old Meeker House. The part +which he had taken in the return of the lost automobile was also +explained and in response to George's suggestion that his father should +reward the man for the return of the car his father quickly inquired, +"But what was he doing away up beyond Tuxedo? I thought you said he made +his headquarters here in the old Meeker House." + +"He does, part of the time," explained John. + +"But what was he doing up there so far away?" inquired Mr. Sanders +sharply. "You know I sent you word that there was a possibility that a +car which had been located in a garage at Newburgh might be the one +which we had lost. What was he doing up there? How did he travel so far +and so fast?" + +"He explained to us," said John, "that he had got a ride most of the +way. In fact I think he said that he didn't have to walk over half a +mile. He stole a ride on the cars and then somebody took him in his +automobile and brought him farther." + +"Did he say what he was doing up there?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"No, sir," replied George. + +"But you say he was a very skillful driver?" + +"Yes, sir," spoke up John promptly. "I never saw a man that could handle +a car better." + +"I think we must look into this more fully," said Mr. Sanders, "but it +may be that he is the one who may know more about the loss of our car +than we think and I'm sure he could explain a part at least of the +origin of the fire at the old Meeker House." + +"Do you think he set it on fire?" demanded Fred. + +"Probably not, at least intentionally," replied Mr. Sanders, "but it may +be that he was the one who had the flash-light and he may have set fire +to the old building without intending to do so." + +"Well," spoke up John, "I'm sorry we shan't ever find out about that +tooting of the automobile horn that we heard in the old building and the +flash that we saw. Why, the fire seemed to be all over the building at +once and then die out in every room just as quickly as it came." + +"I think we shall know more about it," said Mr. Sanders quietly. +"Meanwhile the best thing for us to do is not to do anything to-night." + +After the arrival of the boys at George's home the excitement still +continued and for two hours the boys remained on the piazza talking over +the experiences of the night. Much of the mystery of the old house was +still unexplained. + +"Well, all I can say is," declared Fred, as the boys at last arose to go +to their rooms, "that if the old cowboys and skinners came back to the +old Meeker House to carry on their pranks they'll have to seek other +quarters now." + +"I think you will find that your cowboys and skinners are pretty well up +to date," laughed Mr. Sanders. "And you'll find too that they are +clothed in very substantial flesh. I have been suspicious for a long +time that the tramps were using the old house for a sort of +headquarters, but I was not sure of it until you told me the story of +the man with whom you had had some dealings. We'll all go over there the +first thing to-morrow morning and perhaps we shall find some things that +will help us to make the others clear." + +Accordingly, soon after breakfast the following day, the four Go Ahead +boys, together with Mr. Sanders, departed for the place where the fire +had occurred the preceding evening. + +When they arrived, smoke was still rising from the ashes, but the flames +had long since died away. No one was near the spot and as the boys +approached the ruins, Mr. Sanders said, "I wish our friend, the tramp, +would come." + +"Why do you want him?" inquired George. + +"I think he is the man who can give us the information we most want just +now. I do not recall that I ever saw him." + +"He's a strange man," said George quickly. "He looks like a tramp and +yet he uses good English and he shows that he has been used to better +things some time in his life." + +"Did he tell you that?" laughed Mr. Sanders. + +"I don't know that he said that exactly, but that's what he made me +think." + +"Quite likely." + +"Well, it's true," maintained George stoutly. "All you have to do is to +look into his face and hear him talk and you know that he isn't just a +common tramp." + +"Strange how the mysteries about the old Meeker House keep up," laughed +Mr. Sanders. "First you have the cowboys and skinners meeting there and +then you have men who may be modern cowboys and skinners in flesh and +blood who make it their headquarters. The twittering of the +chimney-swallows drives all four of the Go Ahead boys out of the +building." + +"But we went back," spoke up Fred quickly. "We didn't give up. Besides, +Mr. Sanders, I noticed last night when we came down the stairway that +all four of us had all we could do to keep up with you." + +"So you did. So you did," admitted Mr. Sanders laughingly. "But I did +not run because I was afraid of spooks." + +"Neither did we," said Fred. "We thought when we had a man along with us +that we would be protected and everything would be safe. But when we saw +him leaving the old Meeker House, faster than any of us boys could go, +we thought our safest plan was to try to keep up with him. Something +might happen to him, you know. If he was in trouble he might need our +help." + +Mr. Sanders laughed heartily at Fred's assertions and then said quickly, +"Who is that man coming across the field?" + +All the boys looked quickly in the direction in which Mr. Sanders +pointed and a moment later George said in a low voice, "That's our +tramp." + +"I thought he would be here," said Mr. Sanders. "Now perhaps we can find +out a little more than we knew before." + +All five awaited the approach of the man who indeed proved to be the one +about whom they had been talking. + +As the tramp came near, his face lighted up with a smile as he cordially +said, "Good morning. Good morning. You're early on the scene of our +disaster last night." + +"Yes," responded George. "We saw you last night and then we lost sight +of you in the crowd and couldn't find you again." + +"Well, here I am," said the tramp, smiling. "If you still want to see me +all you have to do is to look at me. I never thought before that I was +very much to look at." + +"We want to talk to you," said Mr. Sanders more seriously. "You told the +boys, did you not, that you and your friends had been making the old +house your headquarters?" + +"Not exactly 'headquarters,'" replied the tramp. "We used to stay some +nights there." + +"And you used the ghosts to scare people off or keep them away from the +old house?" + +"That's what we did," admitted the tramp, laughing loudly as he spoke. +"It would do your heart good if you could only have seen some of them +leave." + +"What were those groans that we heard?" spoke up Fred. "I never quite +understood them. We found out about the birds in the chimney and the +speaking tube that ran from the kitchen to the front room, but how about +those groans?" + +"Why, there were usually two or three of us, and when we had visitors we +took our stand in different rooms and one answered the groan of the +others. Sometimes we groaned all together. Usually, though, we did not +have very much to do, because after one or two groans we usually found +the old house deserted." + +"What about that automobile horn?" inquired George. + +"Oh, that was another way we had of scaring people, that was all." + +"Where did you get the horn?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"I can't just say. We had it a long time." + +"It sounded, the boys tell me, very like the horn of the car that we had +taken from our garage." + +The tramp looked into the face of Mr. Sanders a moment before he said, +"And you suspect, do you, that I took your car and left the horn here?" + +"Do you know where our car is?" inquired Mr. Sanders abruptly. "I told +my son to give you ten dollars for returning the old car. Here is the +money," Mr. Sanders added, as he held forth a bill. + +"Thank you, sir," said the tramp, as he took the money and thrust it +into his pocket. "I told the boys that I could be persuaded to accept +the reward; but about your other car, all I can say is that I don't know +where it is now." + +"Do you know who took it?" + +"I do not." + +"Do you know how the fire started in the old house last night?" + +"No, sir. I don't." + +"But you had some flash-light powder and you set it off here. The house +may have caught fire from it." + +"I don't think it could possibly have got on fire that way. You see we +used that powder in pans and we set it off in two or three rooms at the +same time, just as we used to answer one another's cries or groan +together. The fire couldn't spread. The powder just flashed up and then +the fire was all out in a minute. Besides, the old house was no good +anyway. No one could live in it and my friends and I thought that if we +slept there occasionally no one would be any the worse for it. Of course +if there had been any objections made we should have been glad to pay +attention to them." + +"I wish you would come back to the car with me, I want to speak to you +alone." + +"All right, sir, just as you say," responded the tramp, quickly +advancing and accompanying Mr. Sanders as he led the way across the +fields after he had bidden the boys remain where they then were. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI--CONCLUSION + + +Mr. Sanders and the tramp remained in the car a long time. Indeed, as +the minutes passed the boys became somewhat impatient. Frequently they +glanced toward the scene in the road in which Mr. Sanders and his +strange companion were evidently holding a very interesting +conversation. + +When an hour had elapsed the desire of the boys to depart became more +pronounced. A few of the country people meanwhile had come to view the +ruins of the famous old house, but they had little to say to the boys +and after they had inspected the ruins the most of them slowly departed. + +At last Fred said impatiently, "Look yonder! Mr. Sanders is taking that +man away in the car." + +"I wonder where he is going?" said George, as he glanced at the +departing automobile. + +"Probably taking him to the lock-up," suggested Fred. + +"If he's taking the man to the lock-up I know some more that he ought +not to forget," said George soberly. + +"So do I," spoke up Fred, "and some of them aren't more than a thousand +miles from here either." + +However, after the departure of Mr. Sanders in the car, the boys became +more thoughtful. They had not received any word to remain where they +were, but George decided that it would not be wise for them to depart +until they had received some further instructions. Doubtless, he +explained, his father would return for them in a little while. + +Another hour had elapsed before Mr. Sanders came back. As soon as he was +discovered approaching, all the Go Ahead boys ran quickly across the +field and when they were informed, in response to their inquiries, that +Mr. Sanders was ready to take them home they all quickly climbed into +the automobile. + +"What did you do with the tramp?" inquired George as soon as the car +started. + +"I took him to the railroad station." + +"Is he going to leave?" + +"He says he is." + +"You seemed to have had a mighty interesting conversation. Did he tell +you all the sad, sweet story of his life?" + +"I knew much of it." + +"You did?" demanded George in astonishment. "You did! Who is he? What is +he? How did you know him? Where did he come from? What is his name?" + +"Hold on," interrupted Mr. Sanders with a laugh. "I can answer your +questions one at a time, but I cannot find any answer that might fit +them all alike. Let me tell you first of all that he didn't explain +everything as fully as I wish he had, but he did tell me a few things." + +"What were they?" demanded George impatiently. + +"Let me tell you first a little about himself," said Mr. Sanders, +smiling at the interest of his young companions. "That tramp is the +younger brother of a great friend of mine. Indeed, his brother and I +were together almost all the time when we were boys. If I was not in his +house then he was in mine, or we were fishing in these brooks or nutting +in the woods or coasting on the hills. We very seldom were separated. +This younger brother--" + +"What is his name?" interrupted George. + +"I shan't tell you his name now. Perhaps I will some other time, but he +was one of the most attractive boys I ever knew. He was very quiet in +his manner, and had the greatest faculty of making friends I ever knew +any one to have. His mother almost idolized him and she never held him +up to any task. If he got into mischief it was always the fault of the +other boys, she said. If he was kept after school or had any trouble +with the teachers she always told him that it was the teacher's fault. +Whatever he did, to her was right. You boys want to be thankful that you +have mothers that hold you up to some things instead of upholding you in +everything you do. + +"Well, this man when he was a boy was too lazy to have any share in the +family life. Pleasant, good-natured, popular with the boys and girls, he +never did anything for any one else. If his mother wanted a pail of +water drawn from the old well behind the farmhouse--and they lived right +straight across the field in that house over yonder," explained Mr. +Sanders, pointing as he spoke to a house that could be seen in the +distance, "he always had some excuse. If his mother had simply told him +to bring in a pail of water instead of trying to smooth the way for him +and said that he was too tired or not strong enough, if she had done +that and some other things like it I don't believe this man to-day would +be tramping around the country. He has been a complete failure. He has +never learned to do anything well. He used to be the best baseball +player we had in all this part of the country. There wasn't a fellow +that could catch him when we were in swimming in the old pond. He could +make a boat and sail a boat, but he just simply drifted on. By the way, +boys, did any of you ever stop to think of the fact that a boat never +drifts but in one direction?" + +"What's that?" inquired John. + +"Why, down the stream," replied Mr. Sanders quietly. "This boy grew up +to be a man and drifted into all kinds of bad ways. You see he had never +learned to work and besides there are two words in the English language +that he never could pronounce. One word has three letters in it and the +other has two, but little words though they are, he never seemed to be +able to pronounce them." + +"I can't think what the words are," said George. + +"I know what they are," broke in John. "They are 'yes' and 'no.'" + +"That's right," replied Mr. Sanders with a smile. "They are the hardest +words in the language for a good many people to use. When they say 'yes' +they don't say it in a way that means much, and when they say 'no' it +doesn't mean much more. + +"His mother died years ago and I have always thought that this son was +the cause of her death. At one time, as I told you, he was just as +straight and attractive a boy as any of you." + +"I guess the trouble with him was that he wasn't a Go Ahead boy," +suggested Fred. + +"That was one trouble," replied Mr. Sanders with a smile, "and another +was that after he began to drift he couldn't stop. You see if he hadn't +begun he never could have come to the end to which he has. That's a +strange thing to me that more people do not realize that if they don't +begin, they never will come to the end." + +"Did he explain to you," inquired Fred, "why he shut me in the cellar of +the old Meeker House?" + +"No," replied Mr. Sanders, "I didn't know that you were shut in there." + +"Well, I was. He caught me in the cellar and bolted the door on me. I +must have been in there an hour and a half." + +"How did you get out? Did he let you out?" + +"No, sir, I went and pushed up the outside door." + +"Well, why did you wait an hour and a half before you did that?" +responded Mr. Sanders with a laugh. + +"I'm sure I don't know," said Fred blankly. "I guess it was because I +didn't think of it or try it." + +"Very likely he meant it for a joke. Now, when I had my talk with him he +recognized me, although at first I didn't recognize him. He did say some +things about scaring you boys away from the old place." + +"Did he say anything about the way we left last night?" inquired George +mischievously. + +"Why, how did you leave last night?" inquired Mr. Sanders. + +"We left in a big hurry," declared George. + +"What made you in such a hurry?" + +"We were trying to keep up with the man who was with us and was leading +the way," said George demurely. + +Mr. Sanders joined in the laugh that followed and then said quickly, +"Our lost car will be brought back to-day." + +"How do you know?" demanded George quickly. + +"I don't think I shall explain all of that to you, my boy," said Mr. +Sanders quietly. "It ought to be enough to know that it will be there." + +"But suppose the tramp doesn't bring it back?" suggested Grant. + +"I am not supposing anything about the tramp, or about any failure," +replied Mr. Sanders, again smiling quietly. "All I say to you is that I +am confident that the car will be brought back." + +"Did you find out who stole the car?" inquired John. + +"I don't think it was 'stolen.' You might call it 'borrowed.'" + +"Well, did you find out who 'borrowed' it then?" demanded John. + +"Yes." + +"Who did?" said George eagerly. + +"There are several reasons why I shall not go farther into details," +said Mr. Sanders. "You may draw such conclusions as you please. Very +likely they will not be incorrect. You have followed the events of the +summer more closely than I and I have no doubt can connect one with +another." + +"Well, I think," said George positively, "that the tramp took our car. +He's a mighty good driver and knows all about a car. He didn't intend to +sell it perhaps, but he wanted to use it for a few days." + +"Are you sure he used it in the daytime?" inquired Mr. Sanders quietly. + +"Why, yes. When would he use it?" demanded George. + +"Let me suppose a case," explained his father. "Just suppose a man and +his friends made it a practice to come to your garage nights and take +out your car after you had gone to bed. Suppose on one of these long +rides the car met with a bad accident. It was impossible to bring the +car back that night, so it was taken to a garage where it was said that +at least a week would be required to repair it. At the end of the week +the car is not repaired. Naturally the people whose automobile is +missing are sure the car has been stolen and they are sending word all +over the country for the police to be on the lookout for it. Meanwhile +the car is safe in a little town not more than ten miles distant from +the place where it belonged. Finally there comes a day when the car is +ready, but the man who took it and who had the accident has not money +enough to pay for the repairs. He doesn't intend to steal the car, but +he is not able to bring it back to its owner. If the owner telephones to +the garage for a man to bring it to his home it is quite likely he may +see it soon." + +"And did you let the tramp get away?" + +"I not only let him get away, but I gave him money to leave. I don't +suppose he will use the money as I told him, but I am going to give him +a chance. I would rather help two men who do not deserve it than to let +one go who does. Besides," Mr. Sanders added thoughtfully, "I thought of +his father and mother and how good they had been to me when I was a boy. +There," he added, "I have told you more than I expected." + +"Will the tramp come back?" inquired Grant. + +"I hope not. I doubt if he does, because the old Meeker House has now +gone and he has no place hereabout in which he can stay." + +"Well, we found out what the spooks in the old house were," said Fred. +"I guess that's the way with most of such things." + +"We certainly had a good time finding out," said John laughingly. "I'm +glad we didn't give up." + +"So am I," said Fred. "But then," he added, "we are the Go Ahead boys +and have not learned how to do anything else." + + + +***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE GO AHEAD BOYS AND THE MYSTERIOUS +OLD HOUSE*** + + +******* This file should be named 35964.txt or 35964.zip ******* + + +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/3/5/9/6/35964 + + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://www.gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: +http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + diff --git a/35964.zip b/35964.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b3a69b --- /dev/null +++ b/35964.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec22404 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #35964 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/35964) |
